Sodamco Weber Product catalogue 2012 by Weber

PRODUCT CATALOGUE 2012

Designed and produced by the Central Marketing Department SODAMCO Holding Beirut, Lebanon Printed by Arab Printing Press November 2011 1

CONTENTS

Company Profile Founded in Lebanon in 1985, SODAMCO manufactures and markets quality construction chemicals products that meet the building standards and specific climate requirements in the Middle East and the Gulf. After more than twenty five (25) years of continuous growth, SODAMCO is recognized as the “Construction Chemicals Expert(s)” in the region. SODAMCO’s workforce exceeds four hundred fifty (450) employees of whom approximately two hundred (200) specialized professionals are committed to provide insightful and valuable assistance to more than seven thousand five hundred (7,500) customers. SODAMCO is renowned for the quality of its technically advanced products as well as the excellence of its assistance on sites, and the reliability of its after-sale service. SODAMCO’s state-of-the-art manufacturing facilities have production capacities exceeding three hundred ten thousand (310,000) tons of mortars and one hundred twenty million (120,000,000) liters of admixtures spread over eight different manufacturing, blending and distribution locations in Lebanon, Syria, the United Arab Emirates, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Jordan, Kuwait and Oman as follows:

COUNTRY

COMPANY

Lebanon

SODAMCO S.A.L. - Hosrayel (Jbeil) - Factory SODAMCO Lebanon - Beirut

YEAR ESTABLISHED 1985 1996

Syria

SODAMCO S.A.L. Syria Branch Damascus - Commercial Office SODAMCO Syria Ltd. Hisyeh Factory

1994 2010

U.A.E.

SODAMCO S.A.L. - Abu Dhabi SODAMCO S.A.L. - Dubai SODAMCO Emirates Factory for Bldg Materials - Musaffah SODAMCO Holding - Masdar city

1990 1998 2007 2010

Qatar

SODAMCO Qatar W.L.L. - Doha

2002

KSA

SODAMCO Industrial Co. for Construction Chemicals W.L.L. - Jeddah SODAMCO Industrial Co. for Construction Chemicals W.L.L. Riyadh

SODAMCO provides innovative solutions to many leading contracting companies in the region. Its product range fits a wide variety of projects, from low-cost housings to the most prestigious and technically-demanding towers and complex structures. SODAMCO regularly introduces new products to satisfy the customer needs, and supplements that with professional training sessions on the correct application of those products. Regular seminars and hands-on trainings are offered to applicators, contractors, and consultants. The company enjoys an excellent reputation among the local and international consulting offices established in the markets it is serving. SODAMCO’s products are regularly specified and approved in a wide variety of projects across the region. Consulting and design firms participate on a regular basis in presentations on the latest building materials and construction technologies. In September 2009, Saint-Gobain Weber, part of Saint-Gobain group, and the worldwide leader in Industrial Mortars, has entered into a joint-venture (“JV”) agreement with SODAMCO. This agreement has enabled Saint-Gobain Weber to set up in a region having experienced a very dynamic growth over the last few years. The SODAMCO-Weber JV is well set to benefit from the financial stability and the large potential in the construction industry of the area. In addition, this agreement sets a solid platform to further develop, expand, and market innovative products and services destined to the habitat and construction markets in the region. SODAMCO Weber is now considered a leading supplier of construction materials in the Middle East and the Gulf. Its dynamic team of professionals and loyal customers constitute the essential forces behind its remarkable track record and the strong pillars for its upcoming expansions.

2007 2009

Jordan

ATTADAMUNIA for Construction Industries

2008

Kuwait

SODAMCO Kuwait L.L.C.

2008

Oman

SODAMCO Muscat L.L.C.

2011

SODAMCO product lines include: • • • • • •

ADMIXTURES AND CONCRETE RELATED PRODUCTS TILE ADHESIVES AND GROUTS FAÇADE AND EXTERNAL INSULATION SYSTEMS DECOTRATIVE AND TECHNICAL FLOORING PREMIXED MORTARS AND PLASTERS STRUCTURAL, WATERPROOFING AND REPAIR SOLUTIONS

SODAMCO’s products are developed through extensive research and development and are subject to strict quality control procedures. The finished products are in conformity with European (EN), British (BS) and American (ASTM) standards. SODAMCO obtained in Lebanon in 1999 the ISO 9002(ver. 1994) International Quality Certificate and in 2004 the ISO 9001: 2000. The ISO 9001: 2000 certificate was obtained in the UAE (2008), in KSA (2009), and in Qatar which updated it to ISO 9001:2008 in 2010. SODAMCO is also an environmental, health and safety oriented company; it got ISO 14001:2004 certified in the UAE in 2009, and started the implementation of OHSAS 18001:2007 in the beginning of 2010. In 2010 SODAMCO UAE upgraded its certificate for quality management system to ISO 9001:2008.

ARABIAN GULF

HEAD OFFICES

SODAMCO Holding S.A.L. Tayar Center Bloc B 1st Flr. Charles de Gaulle Str. Sin el Fil P.O. Box 55-654 Beirut - LEBANON T +961 1 510 863/4 M +961 3 380 748 F +961 1 510 862 +961 1 491 673 sodamco@sodamco.com www.sodamco.com Saint Gobain Weber De Brie str. P.O. Box 84, Servon 77253 Brie Comte Robert cedex FRANCE T +33 1 60 62 13 00 F +33 1 64 05 47 50 www.e-weber.com

UNITED ARAB EMIRATES SODAMCO Holding - Masdar City Branch Office No. 307, 3rd flr., Injazat bldg., Masdar City, Mohamed Bin Zayed City P.O.Box 135062 Abu Dhabi - UAE T +971 2 698 5180/1 F +971 2 698 5182 masdar@sodamco.com

SODAMCO Emirates Factory for Building Materials L.L.C. Industrial City of Abu Dhabi - ICAD 3 Plot No. 65 NR29 Abu Dhabi - UAE T +971 2 550 9994 F +971 2 550 9449 Hotline +971 2 550 9339 (logostics) icad3@sodamco.com

SODAMCO S.A.L - Abu Dhabi Branch Mussafah - Industrial Area M 38 - Plot No. 9 Abu dhabi - UAE T +971 2 550 9994 F +971 2 5509449 mussafah@sodamco.com

SODAMCO S.A.L. - Dubai Branch Al Quoz Industrial Area P.O. Box 31320 Dubai - UAE T +971 4 347 2640 F +971 4 340 3420 dubai@sodamco.com

NEAR EAST LEBANON SODAMCO S.A.L. - Beirut Branch Beirut - Lebanon Dedeyan Center Dora T/F +961 1 255 957 M +961 3 141 423

SODAMCO S.A.L. Main Road, Hosrayel (Jbeil) P.O. Box 11- 9666 Beirut - Lebanon T +961 9 790 920/1/2/3 M +961 3 700 892/3 F +961 9 790 924 jbeil@sodamco.com

SODAMCO S.A.L - Saida Branch Al Alayli Bldg. Ground Flr. Al Barrad Region East Highway Saida - Lebanon T/F +961 7 730 239 M +961 3 953 843

SODAMCO S.A.L. - Naher-El-Mot Warehouse Main Str. Jdeideh, Roumieh Highway Beirut - Lebanon M +961 70 258 393

SODAMCO S.A.L - Zahle Branch Centre Hajj Near Libano-Francais Hospital Zahle - Lebanon M +961 3 439 574

QATAR SODAMCO Qatar (Factory) Doha Industrial City Str. No. 17, Gate No. 103 T +974 4 450 1363 F +974 4 450 1373 doha@sodamco.com

SODAMCO Qatar W.L.L. Al Rayan Complex, Bloc B 5th Flr., Flat 17, Rayan Road Al Musheireb, P.O. Box 22520 Doha – Qatar T +974 4442 3816 F +974 4442 5149 doha@sodamco.com

KUWAIT SYRIA SODAMCO Syria Ltd. 1st Flr, Bldg. 199, Kafarsousseh Facing Sham Center P.O.Box 11989 Damascus - Syria T +963 11 214 5548 / +963 11 214 6313 F +963 11 214 5549 M +963 98 814 5548 damascus@sodamco.com

SODAMCO Syria Ltd. (Factory) Industrial City, Hussiah Engineering Section Land No. 330 - 331 Homs - Syria T +963 11 214 5548

SODAMCO Kuwait L.L.C. Dana Center Tower B Office No. 4F / 402 Salem Mubarak Str., Bloc 7 P.O. Box 496 Salmiya 22005 Kuwait T +965 2 571 6404 T +965 2 571 0397 F +965 2 571 2721 kuwait@sodamco.com

SODAMCO Kuwait L.L.C. (Factory) Division No. 1381 Al Rai Area, Kuwait T +965 9 406 3052 kuwait@sodamco.com

SULTANATE OF OMAN

JORDAN SODAMCO Muscat L.L.C. Maktabi Bldg. Al Khuwair P.O. Box 1982 PC 111, CPO, Muscat Sultanate of Oman T +968 2439 1914 / 5 F +968 2448 3801 muscat@sodamco.com

ATTADAMUNIA for Construction Industries JSC Tha’labah Al – Ameli Str. P.O. Box 710844 Amman 11171 JORDAN T +962 6 420 0417 F +962 6 420 0418 amman@sodamco.com

KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA

INDEX

JEDDAH SODAMCO Industrial Co. for Construction Chemicals W.L.L. SODAMCO Villa, Prince Mohammad Bin Abdul Aziz Str. P.O. Box 222, Jeddah 21411 KSA T +966 2 668 3295 T +966 2 261 2722 F +966 2 668 1498 jeddah@sodamco.com

SODAMCO Industrial Co. for Construction Chemicals W.L.L (Factory) Al Khomra, facing Al Mohaideb warehouses T +966 2 609 6265/6 F +966 2 609 6265/6 Ext 111 jeddah@sodamco.com

RIYADH SODAMCO Industrial Co. for Construction Chemicals W.L.L. Salahuddin Al Ayoubi Str. Facing Military Airbase Al Bayt 52 Complex Building No. 5, Office No. 14 Riyadh - KSA T +966 1 473 8751 T +966 1 472 5339 riyadh@sodamco.com

SODAMCO Industrial Co. for Construction Chemicals W.L.L (Factory) Slay Area – Exit 18 T +966 1 810 5713 F +966 1 214 1623 riyadh@sodamco.com

Region

Product

Pages

A ALL GCC MENA GCC GCC GCC ALL ALL MENA ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL UAE MENA MENA MENA MENA MENA MENA MENA UAE MENA MENA ALL ALL ALL QATAR ALL QATAR MENA GCC QATAR UAE UAE UAE UAE UAE MENA MENA ALL ALL ALL MENA ALL QATAR

Admix 205 PVA Admix 210 PV Admix 215 PV Admix 225 MB Admix 230 CH Admix 235 EM Admix 240 LTX Admix 245 SBR Admix anti-freeze Admix A-wash-C Admix A-wash-N Admix A-wash-U Admix cemtex Admix cemtex M Admix CF 100 Admix CF 100 P Admix CF 101 Admix CF 102 Admix CF 103 Admix CF 104 Admix CF 105 Admix CF 106 Admix CF 110 Admix CF 111 Admix CF 113 Admix CF 114 Admix CF 115 Admix CF 116 Admix CF 117 Admix CF 120 Admix CF 121 Admix CF 125 Admix CF 130 Admix CF 1700 Admix CF 207 Admix CF 257 Admix CF 258 AW Admix CF 260 Admix CF 274 Admix CF 275 Admix CF 30 HM Admix CF 30 N Admix CF 300 Admix CF 333 Admix CF 335 Admix CF 40 Admix CF 50 S Admix CF 60 CR

215 216 217 220 218 222 224 226 210 253 255 257 197 199 131 133 135 137 101 139 141 143 145 146 148 245 150 152 154 156 158 160 162 182 164 166 168 170 172 174 113 114 176 178 103 115 116 118

INDEX

Region

Product

Pages

UAE QATAR QATAR ALL QATAR QATAR MENA MENA MENA MENA MENA ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL MENA ALL GCC QATAR QATAR GCC MENA UAE ALL ALL ALL ALL GCC MENA ALL ALL ALL MENA ALL ALL GCC ALL ALL ALL MENA ALL MENA MENA MENA MENA GCC ALL

Admix CF 555 Admix CF 80 Admix CF 85 Admix CF 88 R Admix CF 90 N Admix CF 92 Admix CF 96 R Admix CF G Admix CF GD Admix CF JM1 Admix CF TH95 Admix CIS Admix CMU 100 Admix CMU 200 Admix color P Admix corrin Admix CP 305 Admix CP 310 Admix CP 313 Admix CP 315 Admix CP 315 D Admix CP 333 Admix CP 432 Admix CP 445 Admix CP 60 Admix CR 152 Admix eco plus 600 Admix eco plus 620 Admix eco tard 100 Admix eco tard 120 Admix fast Admix fast C Admix fast C 200 Admix FLY ASH Admix GEL A Admix GEL P Admix JET L Admix LSM 500 Admix MP 104 Admix multi 250 Admix SEC Admix SEC E Admix SEC L Admix SEC P Admix SIL D Admix SIL DSF Admix SIL P Admix SIL U Admix SRA 2000 Admix tard B

180 120 122 124 126 128 130 184 105 107 185 240 247 249 243 239 97 99 84 86 88 90 91 93 82 200 109 111 203 205 207 208 209 227 187 189 242 251 95 213 190 192 194 196 228 230 232 234 211 202

Region

ALL ALL ALL MENA ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

GCC ALL ALL ALL ALL MENA ALL ALL ALL GCC ALL ALL UAE ALL ALL ALL ALL GCC ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL MENA ALL ALL ALL MENA ALL ALL ALL

Product

Pages

Biflex.PL Biflex.SL Biflex.PL anti-root 4 mm Biplas.PL 3 & 4 mm Biplas.PL 4 mm Biplas.SL 4 mm Biplon.PL 4 & 5 mm Blastocrete 160 FC Blastocrete 165 FW

Carrocolle BOND Carrocolle MAX Carrocolle PLUS Carrocolle WP Carrofix Carrofix PY Carroflex Carroflex FS Carrojoint Thin / Thick Carrojoint PLUS Thin / Thick Carromortar Carromortar TBS Carromortar TBS (HS) Carromortar TBS thick Colle primer Conrep.301 GA Conrep.301 HCS Conrep.301 SR Conrep.302 HF Conrep.303 HFG Conrep.304 VHS Conrep.311 MC Conrep.311 MC-HCS Conrep.313 EHS Conrep.314 RD Conrep.318 FD Conrep.321 PA Conrep.331 HCS Conrep.331 TX Conrep.332 FR Conrep.335 NSR Conrep.345 NSM Conrep.350 NSG Conrep.360 FFR Conrep.365 PY Conrep.370 PF Conrep.405 BFX Conrep.410 RSA

516 518 520 528 524 526 530 271 272

275 277 279 281 283 285 287 290 303 306 296 294 295 297 298 445 450 448 452 455 457 459 461 463 465 467 485 471 469 473 475 477 479 481 486 483 501 487

INDEX

Region

Product

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL MENA ALL

Conrep.411 EPT Conrep.412 CRY Conrep.420 SC Conrep.430 GRT Conrep.435 ANC Conrep.440 PR Conrep.450 PC Conrep.501 ZRP Conrep.510 CMA Conrep.550 CFL Cure WH Cure WT Cure Y20 Cure Y40

ALL ALL ALL MENA GCC ALL ALL ALL ALL GCC ALL MENA MENA ALL MENA MENA MENA ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

ALL ALL MENA ALL ALL ALL MENA ALL ALL

Pages

Damp.PC Decap Decap XER Decofaçade.210 AD Decofaçade.220 DC Decofaçade.230 RC Decofaçade.240 ED Decofaçade.241 LW Decofaçade.242 CP Decofaçade.250 AP Decofaçade.260 BD Decofaçade.300 PR Decofaçade.310 MX Decofaçade.320 AC Decofaçade.330 RC Decofaçade.340 HE Decofaçade.350 SX Decofaçade.GRC Decofine Dem 22 Dem 44 Dem B

EcoDem Epobat Epobat.52 Epofloor.H.B. 50 Epogravel Epojoint Epojoint WB Epopark.3 MM Eposil

508 510 489 491 512 493 495 497 499 500 264 265 267 268

532 269 270 315 317 319 327 321 331 320 322 337 338 339 340 341 342 323 325 261 362 263

259 358 360 357 368 308 310 379 355

Region

Product

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

Eposil.plus Epotile Epotile PLUS EPSILONE CMP 111 EPSILONE CMP 180 EPSILONE CMP 300 EPSILONE HP 500 EPSILONE HP 502 EPSILONE HP 504 EPSILONE HP 505 EPSILONE HP 510 EPSILONE HP 520 EPSILONE HP 522 EPSILONE HP 525 EPSILONE HP 555 EPSILONE HP 570 EPSILONE HP 575 EPSILONE HP 580 EPSILONE HP 585 EPSILONE HW 333 EPSILONE HW 350 EPSILONE HW 370 EPSILONE HW 380 EPSILONE HW 385 EPSILONE HW 395 EPSILONE PC 410 EPSILONE PC 430 EPSILONE PC 440 EPSILONE PC 470 EPSILONE PC 485 EPSILONE VMA CONTROL EPSILONE WR 220

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL MENA ALL ALL ALL ALL GCC

Pages

Fiber mesh Fibril 100 Floortop.210 PU Floortop.2100 XPU Floortop.215 UV Floortop.220 PU Floortop.240 SIL SB Floortop.241 SIL WB Floortop.255 SC Floortop.340 RLS Floortop.400 BA Floortop.410 QS Floortop.420 HP Floortop.440 SC Floortop.505 SLC Floortop.510 prime Floortop.510 SOL

356 299 301 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 59 61 63 65 67 69 71 73 75 77 80

236 237 361 366 363 364 375 376 370 377 371 372 373 378 381 382 383

INDEX

Region

Product

Pages

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

Floortop.515 PSC Floortop.600 SCR Floortop.605 PRS Floortop.610 EHS Floortop.630 TSC

384 386 387 389 391

G ALL ALL

ALL ALL

Geotextile.800 P Geotextile.TS

Hardex HBR-Backing rod

579 580

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL MENA ALL MENA MENA MENA MENA ALL ALL ALL GCC

Jointseal.BIT Jointseal.FRS Jointseal.MS Jointseal.prime PS Jointseal.PS 2000 JF Jointseal.PS 1000 GG/PG/SW Jointseal.PU Jointseal.PU 2000 Jointseal.PU 2010 Jointseal.PU MC

PPremix.bloc fill RM

Premix.bloc fix Premix.bloc fix A Premix.bloc fix LW Premix.bloc fix LW-B Premix.bloc fix N Premix.custom mix Premix.fine finish Premix.key coat Premix.plaster ceiling Premix.plaster fiber Premix.plaster hand Premix.plaster spray Premix.plaster thick Premix.SGP-1 Premix.SGP-2 Premix.skim coat Premix.SP-1

Product

GCC GCC GCC ALL ALL ALL GCC GCC GCC GCC ALL ALL

Premix.SP-2 Premix.SP-3 FL Premix.SP-5 Premix.SP-6 WP Premix.SP-11 Premix.SP-33 Premix.SRC-1 Premix.SRC-2 Premix.SRC-LW Premix.SRC-S Primer 500 GYP Proboard

374 607

J ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL GCC

Region

602 604 605 586 591 587 593 595 597 600

435 430 431 132 433 434 436 438 402 418 420 422 424 426 428 429 439 404

ALL ALL ALL ALL MENA ALL

MENA

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL GCC MENA GCC GCC ALL

Pages

Self.AD Self.AD P 4mm Soilex.200 Stone.fix Supermix Swellbar

Uniflex.PL 3 mm

Waterproof.110/120 FX Waterproof.116/126 FX Waterproof.130/140 PR Waterproof.132 WB Waterproof.136/146 FX Waterproof.150 BLC Waterproof.190 PA Waterproof.210 AFC Waterproof.310 PU primer Waterproof.350 PU Waterproof.360 PU Waterproof.370 BPU Waterproof.380 PU clear Waterproof.390 PU Waterproof.prime SB Waterproof.prime WB Waterproof.RBE Waterproof.RBE- L Waterproof.RBV Waterproof.SSP 50 Waterproof.TAR ESB

406 408 410 412 414 416 395 396 398 400 437 537

533 535 585 350 484 584

522

565 567 570 574 568 572 576 578 549 550 552 554 556 590 539 541 542 544 545 547 561

INDEX

Region

Product

Pages

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

waterproof.TAR ESF Waterstops weber.pas deco weber.pas prime weber.pral F weber.pral F LW weber.cote beton weber.therm base weber.therm glue

563 582 343 345 333 335 351 346 348

THIRD GENERATION SUPERPLASTICIZING ADMIXTURES GCC MENA ALL

EPSILONE CMP 111 Gulf Cooperation Council Countries Middle East & North Africa Includes GCC & MENA

(UAE, Qatar, KSA, Bahrain, Kuwait…) (Lebanon, Syria, Cyprus, Algeria, Egypt…)

EPSILONE CMP 180 EPSILONE CMP 300 EPSILONE HP 500 EPSILONE HP 502 EPSILONE HP 504 EPSILONE HP 505 EPSILONE HP 510 EPSILONE HP 520 EPSILONE HP 522 EPSILONE HP 525 EPSILONE HP 555 EPSILONE HP 570 EPSILONE HP 575 EPSILONE HP 580 EPSILONE HP 585 EPSILONE HW 333 EPSILONE HW 350 EPSILONE HW 370 EPSILONE HW 380

Water reducing / superplasticizing admixture for glass fiber reinforced concrete Concrete manufactured product water repellent sealer & efflorescense control admixture Special admixture for concrete manufactured for dry cast & semi dry applications High performance concrete hyperplasticizer - extended slump retention High performance concrete hyperplasticizer - extended slump retention High performance concrete hyperplasticizer - extended slump retention Special superplasticizer for high performance concrete High performance concrete hyperplasticizer - extended slump retention High performance concrete hyperplasticizer - extended slump retention High performance concrete hyperplasticizer extended slump retention Special superplasticizer for high performance concrete Special superplasticizer for high performance concrete High performance concrete hyperplasticizer High performance concrete hyperplasticizer High performance concrete hyperplasticizer High performance concrete hyperplasticizer New generation carboxylate ether superplasticizer - extended slump retention New generation polycarboxylate ether superplasticizer - extended slump retention New generation polycarboxylate ether superplasticizer extended slump retention New generation polycarboxylate ether superplasticizer extended slump retention

* Available only in GCC **Available only in MENA

23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 59 61

EPSILONE HW 385 EPSILONE HW 395 EPSILONE PC 410 EPSILONE PC 430 EPSILONE PC 440 EPSILONE PC 470 EPSILONE PC 485 EPSILONE VMA CONTROL EPSILONE WR 220

New generation polycarboxylate ether superplasticizer - extended slump retention New generation polycarboxylate ether superplasticizer - extended slump retention Special superplasticizer for high performance precast & ready mix concrete Special superplasticizer for high performance precast & ready mix concrete Special superplasticizer for high performance precast & ready mix concrete Special superplasticizer for high performance precast & ready mix concrete New generation polycarboxylate ether superplasticizer for the precast industry Viscosity modifying admixture for enhancing concrete rheological properties Third generation water reducing and retarding admixture

63 65 67 69 71 73 75 77 80

ADMIXTURES FOR CONCRETE WATER REDUCING PLASTICIZERS **Admix CP 60 **Admix CP 313 Admix CP 315 *Admix CP 315 D *Admix CP 333 *Admix CP 432 *Admix CP 445 *Admix MP 104

Water reducer, plasticizer with retarding effect Water reducing, plasticizer for mortar & concrete Water reducing, retarding, plasticizing admixture Water reducing, retarding, plasticizing admixture Water reducing plasticizer Qatar only Water reducing plasticizer Qatar only Water-reducing, retarding, plasticizing admixture Plasticizer for cement mortar

82 84 86 88 90 91 93 95

WATER REDUCING RETARDING PLASTICIZERS Admix CP 305 Admix CP 310

Water-reducing & retarding admixture Water-reducing and retarding admixture

97 99

MID RANGE WATER REDUCING SUPERPLASTICIZERS **Admix CF 103 Admix CF 335 **Admix CF GD **Admix CF JM 1 Admix eco plus 600 Admix eco plus 620

Superplasticizer for hot weather concrete Mid-range superplasticizer admixture for concrete Water-reducing and retarding superplasticizer Superplasticizer, high slump retention Mid range water reducing & retarding admixture for concrete Mid range water reducing, retarding and plasticizing admixture for concrete

101 103 105 107 109 111

HIGH-RANGE WATER REDUCING SUPERPLASTICIZERS **Admix CF 30 HM **Admix CF 30 N **Admix CF 40

High-performance water reducing admixture Superplasticizer for early strength Superplasticizer for early strength

*Available only in GCC **Available only in MENA

113 114 115

Admix CF 50 S *Admix CF 60 CR *Admix CF 80 *Admix CF 85 Admix CF 88 R *Admix CF 90 N *Admix CF 92 **Admix CF 96 R Admix CF 100 *Admix CF 100 P **Admix CF 101 **Admix CF 102 **Admix CF 104 **Admix CF 105 **Admix CF 106 **Admix CF 110 *Admix CF 111 **Admix CF 113 Admix CF 115 Admix CF 116 Admix CF 117 *Admix CF 120 Admix CF 121 *Admix CF 125 **Admix CF 130 *Admix CF 207 *Admix CF 257 *Admix CF 258 AW *Admix CF 260 *Admix CF 274 *Admix CF 275 Admic CF 300 Admix CF 333 *Admix CF 555 *Admix CF 1700 **Admix CF G **Admix CF TH95

High-range superplasticizer for fluid concrete High-range water reducing, retarding, superplasticizing admixture Qatar only High-range water reducing, retarding, superplasticizing admixture Qatar only High-range water reducing, retarding, superplasticizing admixture Qatar only High-range water reducing , retarding, superplasticizing admixture High-range water reducing, retarding, superplasticizing admixture Qatar only High-range superplasticizer for fluid concrete Qatar only High-range water reducing and retarding admixture High-range, water reducing, superplasticizing admixture High-range water reducing, superplasticizing admixture for precast concrete UAE only Superplasticizer, high range water reducer High-range water reducing and retarding admixture High-range water reducing and retarding admixture Superplasticizer (for low w/c concrete) Superplasticizer, high-range water reduce Superplasticizer, high-range water reducer High-range water reducing, retarding, superplasticizing admixture UAE only High-range water reducing, retarding, superplasticizing admixture High-range, water reducing, superplasticizing admixture High-range water reducing, retarding, superplasticizing admixture High-range water reducing admixture for high performance concrete High-range, water reducing, superplasticizing admixture Qatar only High-range water-reducing admixture High range water reducing superplasticizing admixture for ready mix concrete High performance water reducing admixture High-range superplasticizer for fluid concrete Qatar only High-range water reducing, retarding, superplasticizing admixture UAE only High-range water reducing, retarding, superplasticizing admixture UAE only High-range water reducing, retarding, superplasticizing admixture UAE only High Range Water Reducing Superplacticizers UAE only High Range Water Reducing Superplacticizers UAE only High Range Water Reducing, retarding, superplacticizers admixture

116 118 120 122 124 126 128 130 131 133

High-range water reducing, retarding, superplasticizing admixture High-range water reducing, retarding, superplasticizing admixture UAE only High-range water reducing, retarding, superplasticizing admixture High-range water reducing and retarding admixture Superplasticizer (for low w/c concrete)

178 180

168 170 172 174 176

182 184 185

AIR ENTRAINING PLASTICIZERS Admix GEL A **Admix GEL P

Air-entraining admixture for concrete Air-entraining agent in powder form

*Available only in GCC **Available only in MENA

135 137 139 141 143 145 146 148 150 152 154 156 158 160 162 164 166

187 189

WATERPROOFING ADMIXTURES Admix SEC Admix SEC E **Admix SEC L Admix SEC P

Water repellent, hydrophobic Admixture Integral waterproofing Admixture in liquid form Water-reducer plasticizer, waterproofing Admixture Integral waterproofing Admixture in powder form

190 192 194 196

EXPANDING & PLASTICIZING ADMIXTURES Admix cemtex Admix cemtex M

Expanding & plasticizing Admixture High-performance expanding & plasticizing Admixture

197 199

High performance retarding, plasticizing Admixture UAE only Retarding Admixture Water reducing & retarding admixture for concrete Water reducing, retardind & plasticizing admixture for concrete

200 202 203 205

Setting and hardening chloride-free accelerator Setting and hardening chloride-free accelerator Chloride setting accelerator

207 208 209

Anti-freeze agent for concreting in cold weather

210

Shrinkage reducing Admixture Multifunctional concrete admixture

211 213

PVA-BASED ADMIXTURES FOR MORTARS

PVA-multi-purpose bonding agent PVA-based bonding agent for mortar and concrete PVA-based bonding agent for mortar and concrete PVA-based bonding agent

215 216 217 218

236 237

CORROSION INHIBITORS Admix corrin Admix CIS

Corrosion inhibitor in liquid form Corrosion inhibitor solution

Shotcrete accelerator admixture

239 240

242

CONCRETE PIGMENTS

Admix color P

Powder pigments for concrete

243

SBR latex-based bonding agent SBR latex-based bonding agent for mortar and concrete SBR latex-based bonding agent SBR latex-based high performance bonding agent

*Available only in GCC **Available only in MENA

Admix A-wash-C Admix A-wash-N Admix A-wash-U

Anti-washout admixture-special Liquid anti-washout admixture Universal anti-washout admixture

ADMIXTURES FOR DRY MIX

Plasticizing admixture for semi-dry concrete products Water reducing admixture for semi-dry concrete product Special admixture for dry cast & semi dry concrete applications

245 247 249

CONCRETE FOAMING AGENT Admix LSM 500

Foaming agent for manufacturing low strength materials

220 222 224 226

251

DEMOULDING AGENTS EcoDem Dem 22 Dem 44

Delayed Mould-Release Agent Vegetable Emulision Water-based shutter release agent Universal oil-based shutter release agent

*Available only in GCC **Available only in MENA

253 255 257

SURFACE TREATMENTS

SBR-BASED ADMIXTURES FOR MORTARS *Admix 225 MB *Admix 235 EM Admix 240 LTX Admix 245 SBR

Synthetic fibers additive to concrete and plaster Fibrillated polypropylene fibers additive for concrete and plaster

SYNTHETIC FIBERS

Admix CF 114 Admix CMU 100 Admix CMU 200

ADMIXTURES FOR MORTARS Admix 205 PVA *Admix 210 PV **Admix 215 PV *Admix 230 CH

227 228 230 232 234

ANTI-WASHOUT ADMIXTURE

SPECIALTIES Admix SRA 2000 Admix multi 250

Supplementary cementing material for concrete Densified silica fume for high performance concrete Densified silica fume for high performance concrete Silica fume for high performance concrete Un-densified silica fume for high performance concrete

SHOTCRETE ADMIXTURES

ANTI-FREEZE AGENTS **Admix ANTI-FREEZE

Admix fly ash **Admix SIL D **Admix SIL DSF **Admix SIL P **Admix SIL U

Admix JET L

ACCELERATORS *Admix fast **Admix fast C Admix fast C 200

SUPPLEMENTARY CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS

Fiber mesh Fibril 100

RETARDERS *Admix CR 152 Admix tard B Admix eco tard 100 Admix eco tard 120

CONCRETE ADDITIVES

259 261 262

CMP 111 HIGH RANGE WATER REDUCER – SELF CONSOLIDATING CONCRETE Dem B

Wax-based shutter release agent

263

CURING COMPOUNDS Cure WH Cure WT **Cure Y 20 Cure Y 40

Curing compound for fresh concrete surfaces High efficient curing compound for fresh concrete Curing compound for newly placed concrete Concrete curing compound

264 265 267 268

CONCRETE SOLVENTS Decap Decap XER

High-performance concrete solvent Concrete solvent

269 270

• High elastic modulus - superior load bearing capacity • Can be used with acrylic polymers • Provides GFRC with self consolidating properties • Enhances aesthetic for minimal repairs • Provides excellent dispersion and intensity of colored GFRC • Provides properties for sustainable GFRC • Provides better adherence to vertical molds surfaces

EPSILONE CMP 111 is a superplasticizer based on synthetic polymers that has a strong dispersing power over the fine particles of glass fiber reinforced concrete hence allowing higher mechanical properties and high early compressive strength. EPSILONE CMP 111 does not delay the setting time of the GFRC and is capable to achieve higher water reduction. EPSILONE CMP 111 works even in GFRC with very low water/cementitious materials ratio containing supplementary cementitious materials, such as GGBFS, Fly Ash and silica fume.

SCOPE OF USE

EPSILONE CMP 111 is recommended for all cement types in sprayed & Premixed GFRC for the following applications: • Architectural cladding • Moulding and landscaping • Roofing, walls and windows • Building renovation • Foundations and flooring • Modular building • Permanent formwork • Rail cable channeling • Acoustic barriers and screens • Bridge and tunnel lining panels • Water and drainage

WORKING MECHANISM

SURFACE RETARDERS Blastocrete 160 FC Blastocrete 165 FW

PRODUCT

Surface retarder for fresh concrete Surface retarder for formwork

271 272

The superplasticizer based on sulphonated naphtalene or melamine is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, this POLYAdmix RM 109 is different from these superplasticisers being based on a MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion. So in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of the lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which stabilizes the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property helps the ready mix operators with extended workability retention.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

PROPERTIES

STANDARDS

• Increases GFRC cohesion • Increases compressive, tensile, and flexural strengths • Increases durability • Increases fire resistance • Produces high early strengths and can significantly increase mould utilization • Can be used to gain economies due to a possible cement reduction • High water reducing • High workability-ease of placing and compaction without segregation • Good adhesion - ease of pumping. No bleeding • Good workability - excellent surface appearance • Reducing or eliminating the need for vibration • Minimal bleed water - excellent concrete quality

EPSILONE CMP 111 complies with: ASTM C – 494 – Type F. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2. ASTM C1017 Type I

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

EPSILONE CMP 111 is totally miscible in water. No extension to the batching time is necessary. Do not add to dry cement. For high early strength of GFRC, use a lower W/C and higher EPSILONE CMP 111 dosage.

DOSAGE RATES

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum

*Available only in GCC **Available only in MENA

Liquid (Slightly Brown) 1.01 ± 0.02 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

CMP 111

CMP 180 CONCRETE MANUFACTURED PRODUCT WATER-REPELLANT SEALER & EFFLORESCENSE CONTROL ADMIXTURE

dosage of EPSILONE CMP 111 for a particular mixture. A dosage of 500 to 2750 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials is recommended. This may be changed to higher dosage in high ambient and mixture temperature conditions.

thoroughly with water. If irritation persists, seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention.

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

QUALITY STATEMENT

EPSILONE CMP 111 can be used at high dosage rates without any retardation. A severe over dosage of EPSILONE CMP 111 will result in the following: • Very slight delay of the initial and final setting times of the concrete mixture. • Very Slight increase in air entrainment. • Increase in workability. No more severe side effects are known with the history of EPSILONE CMP 111.

DISCLAIMER

While the company guarantees its products against defective materials, the use and application of these products are made without guarantee since the conditions of their application are beyond its control. It is recommended to verify with the company that the product is suitable for the intended use, and that this Data Sheet version is the latest one. The company may modify it without prior notice. Technical characteristics are listed for guidance only. For more information, please contact the company’s office in your location.

COMPATIBILITY EPSILONE CMP 111 can be used in all types of Portland and sulfate-resisting cements, including those containing supplementary cementitious materials. For use with other cements, contact the company’s technical service department. EPSILONE CMP 111 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing EPSILONE CMP 111 they must be dispensed separately. EPSILONE CMP 111 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate-and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult the company’s technical dept. for further advice.

NOTE The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorized disclosure, use, dissemination or copying (either whole or partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit.

Edition: 06/10-A

PACKAGING EPSILONE CMP 111 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE EPSILONE CMP 111 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

PRODUCT

• Exposed aggregate • Roof tiles • Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete

EPSILONE CMP 180 is a water-based state of the art water-repellent sealer specifically designed for concrete manufactured products. EPSILONE CMP 180 works better and lasts much longer than conventional sealers because it contains a unique blend of silane and siloxane compounds which chemically react with silicates below the surface of the substrate. This reaction forms an insoluble, water-repellent barrier within the surface. The finished application is virtually invisible, leaving the surface with its original appearance and breathability.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

STANDARDS

EPSILONE CMP 180 complies with: ASTM C 642 ASTM C 1262 ASTM E 514

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

PROPERTIES

All surfaces to be treated must be clean and free from dirt, oil, loose paint, moss, mildew, laitance, efflorescence, form oils, and any other contaminate that may interfere with the penetration or reaction of EPSILONE CMP 180. Do not dilute with water or any other solvents. Protect greenery from over spray. EPSILONE CMP 180 is best applied with a low pressure sprayer. Airless spray equipment is more efficient for larger projects, can also be applied by mop, flooding and squeegee, broom, brush or roller. Apply two coats at the recommended rates of coverage. Do not allow product to pool on the substrate surface. IMPORTANT - treated surfaces will begin to develop water repellency soon after the initial application of EPSILONE CMP 180 has dried. Since EPSILONE CMP 180 is water-based it is necessary to apply the second coat immediately after the first coat is dry, so that the second coat will not be repelled by the first. This may mean that large projects will need to be completed in sections for best results.

• Long service life translates into low overall cost • Easy to apply • Fast drying and low odor • Excellent penetration • No change of surface gloss • Low VOCs (Volatile Organic Compounds), • Water-based , eliminates the safety concerns re lated to flammability, fumes and toxicity • Excellent moisture vapor transmission (breathability) means it will not contribute to condensation problems. • Works as a chloride screen to protect against salt attack from de-icing salts, sea water, etc. • Resists acid rain and other chemicals • Resists mildew and moss formation • Reduces primary and secondary efflorescence • Significantly improves freeze-thaw durability • Improves color vibrancy and pigment efficiency • Reduces absorption rate • Provides superior color retention • Improves water repellent performance • UV Resistant

DOSAGE RATES

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of EPSILONE CMP 180 for a particular application. EPSILONE CMP 180 exhibits optimum performance when applied in two coats. Apply the first coat at 4 to 6 m2/L. Apply the second coat at 8 to 10m2/L. Total product usage will require approximately 1 liter/3 m2.

SCOPE OF USE

EPSILONE CMP 180 is recommended for all cement types in concrete manufactured products for the following applications: • Interlock Pavers • Masonry Blocks • Kerbstones • Bricks

HEALTH & SAFETY In case of frost, the product recovers its properties after progressive thawing and homogenizing by agitation. In case of contact with skin or eyes, rinse

Liquid (transparent witish liquid) 1.00 ± 0.2 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

CMP 180

CMP 300 WATER REDUCING / SUPERPLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE FOR GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE

COMPATIBILITY

(either whole or partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit.

EPSILONE CMP 180 can be used in all types of Portland and sulfate-resisting cements, including those containing supplementary cementitious materials. For use with other cements, contact the company’s technical service department. Consult the company’s technical dept. for further advice.

Edition: 10/10-A

PACKAGING EPSILONE CMP 180 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

PRODUCT

SCOPE OF USE

EPSILONE CMP 300 is a multi-component admixture specifically formulated to be used in the manufacture of “dry” or “semi-dry” vibrated and pressed concrete products such as paving and masonry blocks, bricks and architectural masonry to assist compaction, disperse cement, color and fine aggregate particles, and help reducing efflorescence and increasing water tightness. Damage by handling, strapping and palleting is reduced, and the resistance to abrasion is significantly enhanced.

EPSILONE CMP 300 is recommended for all cement types in the following areas: • Masonry/Concrete block • Architectural concrete panels • Roof tiles • Concrete tiles • Pavers/Interlock • Colored concrete • Concrete with low W/C • Concrete with GGBS, fly ash and silica fume • Use in sustainable application where recycled or alternative materials are applied

EPSILONE CMP 300 does not contain calcium chloride. EPSILONE CMP 300 is also a plasticizing admixture that provides improved placement and lubricity to semi-dry concrete products.

STORAGE EPSILONE CMP 180 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity Chloride content

EPSILONE CMP 300 disperses the mix to provide added workability while lowering the overall water to cement ratio. This allows easier hydration of the cement particles and results in improved green strengths and higher ultimate compressive strengths. EPSILONE CMP 300 works on very low water/ cementitious mixtures.

HEALTH & SAFETY In case of frost, the product recovers its properties after progressive thawing and homogenizing by agitation. In case of contact with skin or eyes, rinse thoroughly with water. If irritation persists, seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

EPSILONE CMP 300 is totally miscible in water. EPSILONE CMP 300 is normally dosed as supplied at a rate of 400 to 2400 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials. Other dosages may be required depending on specific conditions. For best results, add EPSILONE CMP 300 after pre-wetting the mix aggregates and cement with part of the required hydration water. Mix components at controlled mixing time to provide optimum lubricity to the mix. For high early strength of concrete, use a lower w/c and a higher EPSILONE CMP 300 dosage.

PROPERTIES

• Long service life translates into low overall cost • Easy to apply • Fast drying and low odor • Excellent penetration • No change of surface gloss • Low VOCs (Volatile Organic Compounds), • Water-based , eliminates the safety concerns related to flammability, fumes and toxicity • Excellent moisture vapor transmission (breathability) means it will not contribute to condensation problems. • Works as a chloride screen to protect against salt attack from de-icing salts, sea water, etc. • Resists acid rain and other chemicals • Resists mildew and moss formation • Reduces primary and secondary efflorescence • Significantly improves freeze-thaw durability • Improves color vibrancy and pigment efficiency • Reduces absorption rate • Provides superior color retention • Improves water repellent performance • UV Resistant

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management msystem to ensure consistency and quality

DISCLAIMER

NOTE The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorized disclosure, use, dissemination or copying

Liquid Pale Yellow 1.01 ± 0.02 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

DOSAGE RATES

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of EPSILONE CMP 300 for a particular mix. A dosage of 400 to 2400 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials is recommended. This may be changed to higher dosage in specific conditions.

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE Severe over dose of EPSILONE CMP 300 will result in the following: • Delay of the initial and final setting of the concrete mixture • Increased workability

CMP 300

HP 500 HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE HYPERPLASTICIZER EXTENDED SLUMP RETENTION

COMPATIBILITY

NOTE

PRODUCT

EPSILONE CMP 300 can be used with all types of Portland, sulfate-resisting cements and supplementary cementitious materials. EPSILONE CMP 300 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing EPSILONE CMP 300 they must be dispensed separately.

The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorized disclosure, use, dissemination or copying (either whole or partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit.

EPSILONE HP 500 is a highly effective superplasticizer based on modified synthetic carboxylated polymers specifically designed to produce ready-mix concrete with low water-to- binder ratio (w/b) and excellent workability. It can help the ready-mixed concrete industry, where more than normal slump retention and durability are required. The ability to work over a wide range of w/b, including low w/b, and still obtain extended slump retention allows for the manufacturing of high-quality concrete.

Edition: 02/11-A

DISPENSING It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment.

SCOPE OF USE EPSILONE HP 500 is recommended for all areas of use of high-performance concrete in the ready-mix industry: • Super slump retaining concrete with equal or less water content than conventional admixtures • Concrete mixtures containing silica fume, GGBS, or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Long distance transport • Hot weather concreting • Highly durable concrete • Mass concrete • Pumped concrete • High strength concrete • Pervious Concrete • Sustainable Concrete

WORKING MECHANISM

PACKAGING

Sulphonated naphthalene- or melamine-based superplasticizer is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the cement hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE HP 500 is specially designed with MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion of cement particles. Therefore, in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of these lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which greatly enhances the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property enables the production of concrete with extended workability retention.

EPSILONE CMP 300 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE Up to 2 years when stored in accordance with manufacture’s instructions

QUALITY STATEMENT

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

STANDARDS ASTM C 494 Type D & G ASTM C1017 Type I & II BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Schematic figure shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management msystem to ensure consistency and quality

DISCLAIMER

EPSILONE HP 500 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, preferably after approximately 60% of mixing water addition.

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: from 400 to 1700 ml per 100 kg of cementituous content. Dosage above the recommended values can be employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials

PROPERTIES • High water reducing • Increased ultimate compressive strength • Increased flexural strength • Increased durability • Superior slump retention. Ease of delivery to point of placement

company’s office in your location.

Liquid (Light Brown) 1.08 ± 0.02 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

admixture demand varies with w/b of the concrete, cement type, pozzolanic materials and ambient temperature.

HP 500

HP 502 HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE HYPERPLASTICIZER EXTENDED SLUMP RETENTION

Trials are to be conducted prior to use in order to determine required performance, including workability retention, setting, and strength development.

materials, the use and application of these products are made without guarantee since the conditions of their application are beyond its control. It is recommended to verify with the company that the product is suitable for the intended use, and that this Data Sheet version is the latest one. The company may modify it without prior notice. Technical characteristics are listed for guidance only. For more information, please contact the company’s office in your location.

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of EPSILONE HP 500 may result in the following: • Delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Impair consistency & cohesion

NOTE COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE HP 500 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders EPSILONE HP 500 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and me mine sulfonate-based superplasticizers.

Edition: 09/10-A

PACKAGING

EPSILONE HP 500 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

STORAGE

EPSILONE HP 500 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

HEALTH & SAFETY

PRODUCT

• High workability-ease of placing and compaction without segregation • Good adhesion - ease of pumping. No bleeding • Good workability - excellent surface appearance • Minimal bleed water - excellent concrete quality • High elastic modulus and high strength - superior load bearing capacity

EPSILONE HP 502 is a highly effective superplasticizer based on modified synthetic carboxylated polymers specifically designed to produce ready-mix concrete with low water-to- binder ratio (w/b) and excellent workability. It can help the ready-mixed concrete industry, where more than normal slump retention and durability are required. The ability to work over a wide range of w/b, including low w/b, and still obtain extended slump retention allows for the manufacturing of high-quality concrete.

SCOPE OF USE

EPSILONE HP 502 is recommended for all areas of use of high-performance concrete in the ready-mix industry: • Super slump retaining concrete with equal or less water content than conventional admixtures • Concrete mixtures containing silica fume, GGBS, or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Long distance transport • Hot weather concreting • Highly durable concrete • Mass concrete • Pumped concrete • High strength concrete • Pervious Concrete • Sustainable Concrete

WORKING MECHANISM

Sulphonated naphthalene- or melamine-based superplasticizer is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the cement hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE HP 502 is specially designed with MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion of cement particles. Therefore, in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of these lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which greatly enhances the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property enables the production of concrete with extended workability retention.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

Liquid (Light Brown) 1.07 ± 0.02 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

STANDARDS

Schematic figure shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

ASTM C 494 Type D & G ASTM C1017 Type I & II BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

QUALITY STATEMENT

EPSILONE HP 502 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, preferably after approximately 60% of mixing water addition.

PROPERTIES

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

• High water reducing • Increased ultimate compressive strength • Increased flexural strength • Increased durability • Superior slump retention. Ease of delivery to point of placement

DISCLAIMER

While the company guarantees its products against defective

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: from 600 to 1700 ml per 100 kg of cementituous content. Dosage above the recommended values can be employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific

HP 502

HP 504 HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE HYPERPLASTICIZER EXTENDED SLUMP RETENTION

job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials

internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

admixture demand varies with w/b of the concrete, cement type, pozzolanic materials and ambient temperature. Trials are to be conducted prior to use in order to determine required performance, including workability retention, setting, and strength development.

DISCLAIMER

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of EPSILONE HP 502 may result in the following: • Delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Impair consistency & cohesion

COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE HP 502 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders

Edition: 09/10-A

EPSILONE HP 502 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers.

PACKAGING

EPSILONE HP 502 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

PRODUCT

EPSILONE HP 504 is a highly effective superplasticizer based on modified synthetic carboxylated polymers specifically designed to produce ready-mix concrete with low water-to- binder ratio (w/b) and excellent workability. It can help the ready-mixed concrete industry, where more than normal slump retention and durability are required. The ability to work over a wide range of w/b, including low w/b, and still obtain extended slump retention allows for the manufacturing of high-quality concrete.

SCOPE OF USE

EPSILONE HP 504 is recommended for all areas of use of high-performance concrete in the ready-mix industry: • Super slump retaining concrete with equal or less water content than conventional admixtures • Concrete mixtures containing silica fume, GGBS, or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Long distance transport • Hot weather concreting • Highly durable concrete • Mass concrete • Pumped concrete • High strength concrete • Pervious Concrete • Sustainable Concrete

WORKING MECHANISM

Sulphonated naphthalene- or melamine-based superplasticizer is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the cement hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE HP 504 is specially designed with MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion of cement particles. Therefore, in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of these lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which greatly enhances the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property enables the production of concrete with extended workability retention.

STORAGE

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Type D & G ASTM C1017 Type I & II BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

Schematic figure shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

EPSILONE HP 502 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

HEALTH & SAFETY

Liquid (Light Brown) 1.07 ± 0.02 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

EPSILONE HP 504 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, preferably after approximately 60% of mixing water addition.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: from 600 to 1700 ml per 100 kg of cementituous content. Dosage above the recommended values can be employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific

HP 504

HP 505 SPECIAL SUPERPLASTICIZER FOR HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials admixture demand varies with w/b of the concrete, cement type, pozzolanic materials and ambient temperature. Trials are to be conducted prior to use in order to determine required performance, including workability retention, setting, and strength development.

DISCLAIMER

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of EPSILONE HP 504 may result in the following: • Delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Impair consistency & cohesion

NOTE

COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE HP 504 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers.

Edition: 09/10-A

EPSILONE HP 504 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders

PACKAGING

in normal period of time while maintaining desired water-cement ratio • Provides concrete with self consolidating properties • Enhances passing/filling ability of the fresh concrete • Enhances aesthetic for minimal repairs • High water reduction • High workability-ease of placing and compaction without segregation • Reduced risk of cracks • Good adhesion - ease of pumping. No bleeding • Good workability - excellent surface appearance • Minimal bleed water - excellent concrete quality • High elastic modulus - superior load bearing capacity • Provides properties for sustainable concrete

PRODUCT

EPSILONE HP 505 is a highly effective synthetic polymer based additive which performs extremely well with Portland cement of various types specifically designed to produce concrete with low water binder ratio and excellent workability. EPSILONE HP 505 improves the physical and mechanical performance of concrete.

WORKING MECHANISM

Sulphonated naphthalene- or melamine-based superplasticizer is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the cement hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE HP 505 is specially designed with MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion of cement particles. Therefore, in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of these lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which greatly enhances the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property enables the production of concrete with extended workability retention.

EPSILONE HP 504 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

SCOPE OF USE EPSILONE HP 505 is recommended for all areas of use of high performance: • High rise concrete applications • Mass concrete • High strength concrete • Concrete mixes containing Silica Fume: GGBFS or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Self Consolidating Concrete • High Durable Concrete

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

Schematic figure shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

STORAGE

EPSILONE HP 504 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Type D & G ASTM C1017 Type I & II BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

PROPERTIES

HEALTH & SAFETY

• Allows reduction in cement while maintaining desired strength. • Accelerates strength development and resulting in higher frequency in use of forms. • Permits reduction in amount of water normally required for a given workability. • Enables development of high strength concrete other than by cement addition. • Provides flow ability (greater than 200mm slump) of fresh concrete that does not segregate and sets

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our

Liquid (Light Brown) 1.115 ± 0.03 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

EPSILONE HP 505 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, preferably after approximately 60% of mixing water addition.

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: from 600 to 1700 ml per 100 kg of cementituous content. Dosage above the recommended values can be

HP 505

HP 510 HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE HYPERPLASTICIZER EXTENDED SLUMP RETENTION QUALITY STATEMENT

employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of EPSILONE HP 505 may result in the following: • Slight delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Higher Ultimate Strength Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE HP 505 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders

Edition: 09/10-A

EPSILONE HP 505 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical dept. for advice.

PACKAGING

• Good adhesion - ease of pumping. No bleeding • Good workability - excellent surface appearance • Minimal bleed water - excellent concrete quality • High elastic modulus and high strength - superior load bearing capacity

PRODUCT

EPSILONE HP 510 is a highly effective superplasticizer based on modified synthetic carboxylated polymers specifically designed to produce ready-mix concrete with low water-to- binder ratio (w/b) and excellent workability. It can help the ready-mixed concrete industry, where more than normal slump retention and durability are required. The ability to work over a wide range of w/b, including low w/b, and still obtain extended slump retention allows for the manufacturing of high-quality concrete.

SCOPE OF USE EPSILONE HP 510 is recommended for all areas of use of high-performance concrete in the ready-mix industry: • Super slump retaining concrete with equal or less water content than conventional admixtures • Concrete mixtures containing silica fume, GGBS, or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Long distance transport • Hot weather concreting • Highly durable concrete • Mass concrete • Pumped concrete • High strength concrete • Pervious Concrete • Sustainable Concrete

WORKING MECHANISM

Sulphonated naphthalene- or melamine-based superplasticizer is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the cement hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE HP 510 is specially designed with MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion of cement particles. Therefore, in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of these lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which greatly enhances the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property enables the production of concrete with extended workability retention.

EPSILONE HP 505 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Type D & G ASTM C1017 Type I & II BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

Schematic figure shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

STORAGE

EPSILONE HP 505 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

Liquid (Light Brown) 1.11 ± 0.03 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

EPSILONE HP 510 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, preferably after approximately 60% of mixing water addition.

PROPERTIES

HEALTH & SAFETY

• High water reducing • Increased ultimate compressive strength • Increased flexural strength • Increased durability • Superior slump retention. Ease of delivery to point of placement • High workability-ease of placing and compaction without segregation

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: from 400 to 1500 ml per 100 kg of cementituous content. Dosage above the recommended values can be employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials.

HP 510

HP 520 HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE HYPERPLASTICIZER EXTENDED SLUMP RETENTION

system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of EPSILONE HP 510 may result in the following: • Delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Impair consistency & cohesion Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

NOTE

COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE HP 510 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical dept. for advice.

Edition: 07/10-A

EPSILONE HP 510 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders

PACKAGING

EPSILONE HP 510 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

PRODUCT

EPSILONE HP 520 is a highly effective superplasticizer based on modified synthetic carboxylated polymers specifically designed to produce ready-mix concrete with low water-to-binder ratio (w/b) and excellent workability. It can help the ready-mixed concrete industry, where more than normal slump retention and durability are required. The ability to work over a wide range of w/b, including low w/b, and still obtain extended slump retention allows for the manufacturing of high-quality concrete.

SCOPE OF USE EPSILONE HP 520 is recommended for all areas of use of high-performance concrete in the ready-mix industry: • Super slump retaining concrete with equal or less water content than conventional admixtures • Concrete mixtures containing silica fume, GGBS, or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Long distance transport • Hot weather concreting • Highly durable concrete • Mass concrete • Pumped concrete • High strength concrete • Pervious Concrete • Sustainable Concrete

WORKING MECHANISM

Sulphonated naphthalene- or melamine-based superplasticizer is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the cement hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE HP 520 is specially designed with MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion of cement particles. Therefore, in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of these lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which greatly enhances the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property enables the production of concrete with extended workability retention.

STORAGE

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Type D & G ASTM C1017 Type I & II BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

Schematic figure shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

EPSILONE HP 510 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

HEALTH & SAFETY

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

EPSILONE HP 520 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, preferably after approximately 60% of mixing water addition.

PROPERTIES

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management

Liquid (Light Brown) 1.06 ± 0.02 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

DOSAGE RATES

HP 520

HP 522 HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE HYPERPLASTICIZER EXTENDED SLUMP RETENTION

system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of EPSILONE HP 520 may result in the following: • Delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Impair consistency & cohesion Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

NOTE

COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE HP 520 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical dept. for advice.

Edition: 08/10-A

EPSILONE HP 520 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders

PACKAGING

EPSILONE HP 520 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

STORAGE

PRODUCT

EPSILONE HP 522 is a highly effective superplasticizer based on modified synthetic carboxylated polymers specifically designed to produce ready-mix concrete with low water-to- binder ratio (w/b) and excellent workability. It can help the ready-mixed concrete industry, where more than normal slump retention and durability are required. The ability to work over a wide range of w/b, including low w/b, and still obtain extended slump retention allows for the manufacturing of high-quality concrete.

SCOPE OF USE EPSILONE HP 522 is recommended for all areas of use of high-performance concrete in the ready-mix industry: • Super slump retaining concrete with equal or less water content than conventional admixtures • Concrete mixtures containing silica fume, GGBS, or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Long distance transport • Hot weather concreting • Highly durable concrete • Mass concrete • Pumped concrete • High strength concrete • Pervious Concrete • Sustainable Concrete

WORKING MECHANISM

Sulphonated naphthalene- or melamine-based superplasticizer is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the cement hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE HP 522 is specially designed with MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion of cement particles. Therefore, in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of these lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which greatly enhances the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property enables the production of concrete with extended workability retention.

EPSILONE HP 520 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

STANDARDS

Schematic shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

HEALTH & SAFETY

Liquid (LPale Yellow) 1.07 ± 0.02 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

ASTM C 494 Type D & G ASTM C1017 Type I & II BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

EPSILONE HP 522 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, preferably after approximately 60% of mixing water addition.

PROPERTIES

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: from 400 to 1500 ml per 100 kg of cementituous content. Dosage above the recommended values can be employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific

HP 522

HP 525 SPECIAL SUPERPLASTICIZER FOR HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE

job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials

If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention.

Admixture demand varies with w/b of the concrete, cement type, pozzolanic materials and ambient temperature. Trials are to be conducted prior to use in order to determine required performance, including workability retention, setting, and strength development.

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management msystem to ensure consistency and quality

DISCLAIMER

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of EPSILONE HP 522 may result in the following: • Delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Impair consistency & cohesion Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE HP 522 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders

NOTE

EPSILONE HP 522 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers.

EPSILONE HP 525 is a highly effective synthetic polymer based additive which performs extremely well with Portland cement of various types specifically designed to produce concrete with low water binder ratio and excellent workability. EPSILONE HP 525 improves the physical and mechanical performance of concrete.

WORKING MECHANISM

Sulphonated naphthalene- or melamine-based superplasticizer is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the cement hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE HP 525 is specially designed with MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion of cement particles. Therefore, in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of these lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which greatly enhances the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property enables the production of concrete with extended workability retention.

SCOPE OF USE

EPSILONE HP 525 is recommended for all areas of use of high performance: • High rise concrete applications • Mass concrete • High strength concrete • Concrete mixes containing Silica Fume: GGBFS or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Self Consolidating Concrete • High Durable Concrete

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

Schematic figure shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

Edition: 01/11-A

PACKAGING

period of time while maintaining desired water-cement ratio • Provides concrete with self consolidating properties • Enhances passing/filling ability of the fresh concrete • Enhances aesthetic for minimal repairs • High water reduction • High workability-ease of placing and compaction without segregation • Reduced risk of cracks • Good adhesion - ease of pumping. No bleeding • Good workability - excellent surface appearance • Minimal bleed water - excellent concrete quality • High elastic modulus - superior load bearing capacity • Provides properties for sustainable concrete

PRODUCT

EPSILONE HP 522 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Type D & G ASTM C1017 Type I & II BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

STORAGE

EPSILONE HP 522 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

PROPERTIES

HEALTH & SAFETY

Liquid (Light Brown) 1.10 ± 0.03 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

EPSILONE HP 525 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, preferably after approximately 60% of mixing water addition.

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: from 500 to 1700 ml per 100 kg of cementituous content. Dosage above the recommended values can be

HP 525

HP 555 SPECIAL SUPERPLASTICIZER FOR HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE QUALITY STATEMENT

employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of EPSILONE HP 525 may result in the following: • Slight delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Higher Ultimate Strength Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE HP 525 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders

Edition: 09/10-A

EPSILONE HP 525 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical dept. for advice.

PRODUCT

EPSILONE HP 555 is a highly effective synthetic polymer based additive which performs extremely well with Portland cement of various types specifically designed to produce concrete with low water binder ratio and excellent workability. EPSILONE HP 555 improves the physical and mechanical performance of concrete.

WORKING MECHANISM

Sulphonated naphthalene- or melamine-based superplasticizer is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the cement hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE HP 555 is specially designed with MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion of cement particles. Therefore, in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of these lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which greatly enhances the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property enables the production of concrete with extended workability retention.

SCOPE OF USE

EPSILONE HP 555 is recommended for all areas of use of high performance: • High rise concrete applications • Mass concrete • High strength concrete • Concrete mixes containing Silica Fume: GGBFS or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Self Consolidating Concrete • High Durable Concrete

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

Schematic figure shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

PACKAGING

EPSILONE HP 525 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

STORAGE

EPSILONE HP 525 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Type D & G ASTM C1017 Type I & II BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

PROPERTIES

HEALTH & SAFETY

Liquid (Light Brown) 1.11 ± 0.03 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

EPSILONE HP 555 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, preferably after approximately 60% of mixing water addition.

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: from 500 to 1500 ml per 100 kg of cementituous content. Dosage above the recommended values can be

HP 555

HP 570 HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE HYPERPLASTICIZER

QUALITY STATEMENT

employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of EPSILONE HP 555 may result in the following: • Slight delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Higher Ultimate Strength Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE HP 555 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders

Edition: 09/10-A

EPSILONE HP 555 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical dept. for advice.

period of time while maintaining desired water-cement ratio • Provides concrete with self consolidating properties • Enhances passing / filling ability of the fresh concrete • Enhances aesthetic for minimal repairs • High water reduction • High workability-ease of placing and compaction without segregation • Reduced risk of cracks • Good adhesion - ease of pumping. No bleeding • Good workability - excellent surface appearance • Minimal bleed water - excellent concrete quality • High elastic modulus - superior load bearing capacity • Provides properties for sustainable concrete

PRODUCT

EPSILONE HP 570 is a highly effective synthetic polymer based additive which performs extremely well with Portland cement of various types specifically designed to produce concrete with low water binder ratio and excellent workability. EPSILONE HP 570 improves the physical and mechanical performance of concrete.

WORKING MECHANISM

Sulphonated naphthalene- or melamine-based superplasticizer is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the cement hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE HP 570 is specially designed with MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion of cement particles. Therefore, in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of these lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which greatly enhances the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property enables the production of concrete with extended workability retention.

SCOPE OF USE

EPSILONE HP 570 is recommended for all areas of use of high performance: • High rise concrete applications • Mass concrete • High strength concrete • Concrete mixes containing Silica Fume: GGBFS or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Self Consolidating Concrete • High Durable Concrete

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

Schematic figure shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

PACKAGING

EPSILONE HP 555 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Type F & G ASTM C1017 Type I & II BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

STORAGE

EPSILONE HP 555 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

PROPERTIES

HEALTH & SAFETY

Liquid (Light Brown) 1.11 ± 0.03 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

EPSILONE HP 570 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, preferably after approximately 60% of mixing water addition.

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: from 500 to 2200 ml per 100 kg of cementituous content. Dosage above the recommended values can be

HP 570

HP 575 HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE HYPERPLASTICIZER

QUALITY STATEMENT

employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of EPSILONE HP 570 may result in the following: • Slight delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Higher Ultimate Strength Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE HP 570 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders

Edition: 07/10-A

EPSILONE HP 570 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical dept. for advice.

period of time while maintaining desired water-cement ratio • Provides concrete with self consolidating properties • Enhances passing / filling ability of the fresh concrete • Enhances aesthetic for minimal repairs • High water reduction • High workability-ease of placing and compaction without segregation • Reduced risk of cracks • Good adhesion - ease of pumping. No bleeding • Good workability - excellent surface appearance • Minimal bleed water - excellent concrete quality • High elastic modulus - superior load bearing capacity • Provides properties for sustainable concrete

PRODUCT

EPSILONE HP 575 is a highly effective synthetic polymer based additive which performs extremely well with Portland cement of various types specifically designed to produce concrete with low water binder ratio and excellent workability. EPSILONE HP 575 improves the physical and mechanical performance of concrete.

WORKING MECHANISM

Sulphonated naphthalene- or melamine-based superplasticizer is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the cement hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE HP 575 is specially designed with MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion of cement particles. Therefore, in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of these lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which greatly enhances the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property enables the production of concrete with extended workability retention.

SCOPE OF USE

EPSILONE HP 575 is recommended for all areas of use of high performance: • High rise concrete applications • Mass concrete • High strength concrete • Concrete mixes containing Silica Fume: GGBFS or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Self Consolidating Concrete • High Durable Concrete

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

Schematic figure shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

PACKAGING

EPSILONE HP 570 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Type D & G ASTM C1017 Type I & II BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

STORAGE

EPSILONE HP 570 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

PROPERTIES

HEALTH & SAFETY

Liquid (Light Brown) 1.07 ± 0.02 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

EPSILONE HP 575 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, preferably after approximately 60% of mixing water addition.

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: from 500 to 1700 ml per 100 kg of cementituous content. Dosage above the recommended values can be

HP 575

HP 580 HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE HYPERPLASTICIZER

QUALITY STATEMENT

employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of EPSILONE HP 575 may result in the following: • Slight delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Higher Ultimate Strength Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE HP 575 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders

Edition: 09/10-A

EPSILONE HP 575 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical dept. for advice.

fresh concrete that does not segregate and sets in normal period of time while maintaining desired water-cement ratio • Provides concrete with self consolidating properties • Enhances passing / filling ability of the fresh concrete • Enhances aesthetic for minimal repairs • High water reduction • High workability-ease of placing and compaction without segregation • Reduced risk of cracks • Good adhesion - ease of pumping. No bleeding • Good workability - excellent surface appearance • Minimal bleed water - excellent concrete quality • High elastic modulus - superior load bearing capacity • Provides properties for sustainable concrete

PRODUCT

EPSILONE HP 580 is a highly effective synthetic polymer based additive which performs extremely well with Portland cement of various types specifically designed to produce concrete with low water binder ratio and excellent workability. EPSILONE HP 580 improves the physical and mechanical performance of concrete.

WORKING MECHANISM

Sulphonated naphthalene- or melamine-based superplasticizer is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the cement hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE HP 580 is specially designed with MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion of cement particles. Therefore, in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of these lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which greatly enhances the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property enables the production of concrete with extended workability retention.

SCOPE OF USE

EPSILONE HP 580 is recommended for all areas of use of high performance: • High rise concrete applications • Mass concrete • High strength concrete • Concrete mixes containing Silica Fume: GGBFS or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Self Consolidating Concrete • High Durable Concrete

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

Schematic figure shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

PACKAGING

EPSILONE HP 575 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

STORAGE

EPSILONE HP 575 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Type F & G ASTM C1017 Type I & II BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

PROPERTIES

HEALTH & SAFETY

Liquid (Light Brown) 1.10 ± 0.03 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

EPSILONE HP 580 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, preferably after approximately 60% of mixing water addition.

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: from 500 to 2000 ml per 100 kg of cementituous content.

HP 580

HP 585 HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE HYPERPLASTICIZER

QUALITY STATEMENT

Dosage above the recommended values can be employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of EPSILONE HP 580 may result in the following: • Slight delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Higher Ultimate Strength Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE HP 580 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders

Edition: 08/10-A

EPSILONE HP 580 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical dept. for advice.

PRODUCT

EPSILONE HP 585 is a highly effective synthetic polymer based additive which performs extremely well with Portland cement of various types specifically designed to produce concrete with low water binder ratio and excellent workability. EPSILONE HP 585 improves the physical and mechanical performance of concrete.

WORKING MECHANISM

Sulphonated naphthalene- or melamine-based superplasticizer is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the cement hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE HP 585 is specially designed with MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion of cement particles. Therefore, in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of these lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which greatly enhances the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property enables the production of concrete with extended workability retention.

SCOPE OF USE

EPSILONE HP 585 is recommended for all areas of use of high performance: • High rise concrete applications • Mass concrete • High strength concrete • Concrete mixes containing Silica Fume: GGBFS or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Self Consolidating Concrete • High Durable Concrete

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

Schematic figure shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

PACKAGING

EPSILONE HP 580 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Type F ASTM C1017 Type I BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

STORAGE

EPSILONE HP 580 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

PROPERTIES

HEALTH & SAFETY

Liquid (Light Brown) 1.11 ± 0.03 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

EPSILONE HP 585 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, preferably after approximately 60% of mixing water addition.

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: from 500 to 2200 ml per 100 kg of cementituous content.

HP 585

HW 333 NEW GENERATION POLYCARBOXYLATE ETHER SUPERPLASTICIZER - EXTENDED SLUMP RETENTION QUALITY STATEMENT

Dosage above the recommended values can be employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of EPSILONE HP 585 may result in the following: • Slight delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Higher Ultimate Strength Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE HP 585 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders

Edition: 09/10-A

EPSILONE HP 585 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical dept. for advice.

PACKAGING

• Excellent surface appearance in high workability • Ease of placing and compaction without segregation • Reduced risk of cracking • Ease of pumping

PRODUCT

EPSILONE HW 333 is a highly effective superplasticizer based on modified synthetic carboxylated polymers specifically designed to produce ready-mix concrete with low water - to - binder ratio (w/b) and excellent workability. It can help the ready-mixed concrete industry, where more than normal slump retention and durability are required. The ability to work over a wide range of w/b, including low w/b, and still obtain extended slump retention allows for the manufacturing of high-quality concrete.

SCOPE OF USE

EPSILONE HW 333 is recommended for all areas of use of high-performance concrete in the ready-mix industry: • Super slump retaining concrete with equal or less water content than conventional admixtures • Concrete mixtures containing silica fume, GGBS, or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Long distance transport • Hot weather concreting • Highly durable concrete • Mass concrete • Pumped concrete

WORKING MECHANISM

Sulphonated naphthalene- or melamine-based superplasticizer is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the cement hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE HW 333 is specially designed with MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion of cement particles. Therefore, in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of these lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which greatly enhances the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property enables the production of concrete with extended workability retention.

EPSILONE HP 585 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity @ 25˚C Chloride content

STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Type D & G BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

EPSILONE HW 333 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, preferably after approximately 60% of mixing water addition.

Schematic figure shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

STORAGE

EPSILONE HP 585 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

HEALTH & SAFETY

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: from 400 to 2200 ml per 100 kg of cementituous content. Dosage above the recommended values can be employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials.

PROPERTIES

• Water reducing • Superior slump retention. Ease of delivery to point of placement • Reduces mix water requirements by as much as 30%, resulting in up to a 50% increase in compressive strength and up to a 30% increase in flexural strength.

Liquid (Pale Yellow) 1.040 ± 0.02 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

HW 333

HW 350 NEW GENERATION POLYCARBOXYLATE ETHER SUPERPLASTICIZER SLUMP RETENTION • High elastic modulus and high strength - superior load bearing capacity

PRODUCT

workability retention, setting, and strength development.

DISCLAIMER

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of EPSILONE HW 333 may result in the following: • Delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Impair consistency & cohesion Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE HW 333 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders

NOTE

EPSILONE HW 333 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical department for advice

Edition: 01/11-A

PACKAGING

EPSILONE HW 333 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

STORAGE

EPSILONE HW 585 is a highly effective synthetic polymer based additive which performs extremely well with Portland cement of various types specifically designed to produce concrete with low water binder ratio and excellent workability. EPSILONE HW 585 improves the physical and mechanical performance of concrete.

SCOPE OF USE

EPSILONE HW 350 is recommended for all areas of use of high performance concrete in the ready-mix industry: • Super slump retaining concrete with equal or less water content than conventional admixtures • Concrete mixtures containing silica fume, GGBS, or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Long distance transport • Hot weather concreting • Highly durable concrete • Mass concrete • Pumped concrete

WORKING MECHANISM

Sulphonated naphthalene- or melamine-based superplasticizer is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the cement hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE HW 350 is specially designed with MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion of cement particles. Therefore, in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of these lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which greatly enhances the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property enables the production of concrete with extended workability retention.

EPSILONE HW 333 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Type A, D & G BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

EPSILONE HW 350 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, preferably after approximately 60% of mixing water addition.

Schematic figure shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

HEALTH & SAFETY

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: from 400 to 2500 ml per 100 kg of cementituous content. Dosage above the recommended values can be employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials.

PROPERTIES

• Water reducing • Superior slump retention. Ease of delivery to point of placement • High workability-ease of placing and compaction without segregation • Reduced risk of cracking • Good adhesion - ease of pumping. No bleeding • Good workability - excellent surface appearance • Minimal bleed water - excellent concrete quality

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality

Liquid (Light Brown) 1.040 ± 0.02 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

HW 350

HW 370 NEW GENERATION POLYCARBOXYLATE ETHER SUPERPLASTICIZER “EXTENDED SLUMP RETENTION” QUALITY STATEMENT

Dosage above the recommended values can be employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of EPSILONE HW 350 may result in the following: • Delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Impair consistency & cohesion Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE HW 350 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders EPSILONE HW 350 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical dept. for advice.

Edition: 07/10-A

PACKAGING

EPSILONE HW 350 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

PRODUCT

EPSILONE HW 370 is a highly effective superplasticizer based on modified synthetic carboxylated polymers specifically designed to produce ready-mix concrete with low water-to-binder ratio (w/b) and excellent workability. It can help the ready-mixed concrete industry, where more than normal slump retention and durability are required. The ability to work over a wide range of w/b, including low w/b, and still obtain extended slump retention allows for the manufacturing of high-quality concrete.

SCOPE OF USE

EPSILONE HW 370 is recommended for all areas of use of high-performance concrete in the ready-mix industry: • Super slump retaining concrete with equal or less water content than conventional admixtures • Concrete mixtures containing silica fume, GGBS, or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Long distance transport • Hot weather concreting • Highly durable concrete • Mass concrete • Pumped concrete

WORKING MECHANISM

Sulphonated naphthalene or melamine-based superplasticizer is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the cement hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE HW 370 is specially designed with MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion of cement particles. Therefore, in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of these lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which greatly enhances the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property enables the production of concrete with extended workability retention.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity @25˚C Chloride content

STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Types D, F & G BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

EPSILONE HW 370 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, preferably after approximately 60% of mixing water addition.

Schematic figure shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

STORAGE

EPSILONE HW 350 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: from 400 to 1800 ml per 100 kg of cementituous content. Dosage above the recommended values can be employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials Admixture demand varies with w/b of the concrete, cement type, pozzolanic materials and ambient temperature. Trials are to be conducted prior to use in order to

HEALTH & SAFETY

PROPERTIES

• Water reducing • Superior slump retention. Ease of delivery to point of placement • High workability-ease of placing and compaction without segregation • Reduced risk of cracking

Liquid (Pale Yellow) 1.040 ± 0.02 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

HW 370

HW 380 NEW GENERATION POLYCARBOXYLATE ETHER SUPERPLASTICIZER “EXTENDED SLUMP RETENTION” DISCLAIMER

determine required performance, including workability retention, setting, and strength development.

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of EPSILONE HW 370 may result in the following: • Delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Impair consistency & cohesion Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE HW 370 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders

Edition: 11/10-A

EPSILONE HW 370 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical dept. for advice.

PACKAGING

EPSILONE HW 370 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

STORAGE

EPSILONE HW 370 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

• Good workability - excellent surface appearance • Minimal bleed water - excellent concrete quality • High elastic modulus and high strength - superior load bearing capacity

PRODUCT

EPSILONE HW 380 is a highly effective superplasticizer based on modified synthetic carboxylated polymers specifically designed to produce ready mix concrete with low water binder ratio and excellent workability. It can help the ready-mixed concrete industry, where more than normal slump retention and durability are required. The ability to work over a range of water binder ratios including low w/b ratios and still obtain extended slump retention allows for the manufacture of high quality concrete.

SCOPE OF USE

EPSILONE HW 380 is recommended for all areas of use of high performance concrete in the ready-mix industry: • Super slump retaining concrete with equal or less water content than conventional admixtures • Concrete mixtures containing silica fume, GGBS, or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Long distance transport • Hot weather concreting • Highly durable concrete • Mass concrete • Pumped concrete

WORKING MECHANISM

The superplasticizer based on sulphonated naphthalene or melamine is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE HW 380 is different from these superplasticizers being based on a MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion. So in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of the lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which stabilizes the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property helps the ready mix operators with extended workability retention.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

EPSILONE HW 380 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, preferably after approximately 60% of mixing water addition.

DOSAGE RATES

Schematic figure shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

HEALTH & SAFETY

admixture demand varies with w/b of the concrete, cement type, pozzolanic materials and ambient temperature. Trials are to be conducted prior to use in order to determine required performance.

PROPERTIES

• High water reducing • Superior slump retention. Ease of delivery to point of placement • High workability-ease of placing and compaction without segregation • Reduced risk of cracks • Good adhesion - ease of pumping. No bleeding

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management msystem to ensure consistency and quality

Liquid (Light Brown) 1.050 ± 0.01 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of EPSILONE HW 380 may result in the following: • Delay of initial setting

HW 380

HW 385 NEW GENERATION POLYCARBOXYLATE ETHER SUPERPLASTICIZER - EXTENDED SLUMP RETENTION

• Higher workability • Impair consistency & cohesion Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

only. For more information, please contact the company’s office in your location.

COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE HW 380 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders EPSILONE HW 380 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical dept. for advice.

• Good workability - excellent surface appearance • Minimal bleed water - excellent concrete quality • High elastic modulus and high strength - superior load bearing capacity

PRODUCT

EPSILONE HW 385 is a highly effective superplasticizer based on modified synthetic carboxylated polymers specifically designed to produce ready-mix concrete with low water-to- binder ratio (w/b) and excellent workability. It can help the ready-mixed concrete industry, where more than normal slump retention and durability are required. The ability to work over a wide range of w/b, including low w/b, and still obtain extended slump retention allows for the manufacturing of high-quality concrete.

SCOPE OF USE

EPSILONE HW 385 is recommended for all areas of use of high-performance concrete in the ready-mix industry: • Super slump retaining concrete with equal or less water content than conventional admixtures • Concrete mixtures containing silica fume, GGBS, or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Long distance transport • Hot weather concreting • Highly durable concrete • Mass concrete • Pumped concrete

Edition: 05/10-A

WORKING MECHANISM

Sulphonated naphthalene- or melamine-based superplasticizer is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the cement hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE HW 385 is specially designed with MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion of cement particles. Therefore, in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of these lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which greatly enhances the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property enables the production of concrete with extended workability retention.

PACKAGING

EPSILONE HW 380 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

STORAGE

EPSILONE HW 380 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

HEALTH & SAFETY

QUALITY STATEMENT

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity @25˚C Chloride content

STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Types D, F & G BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

EPSILONE HW 385 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, preferably after approximately 60% of mixing water addition.

Schematic figure shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: from 400 to 1800 ml per 100 Kg of cementituous content. Dosage above the recommended values can be employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials

PROPERTIES

Liquid (Pale Yellow) 1.050 ± 0.02 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

Admixture demand varies with w/b of the concrete, cement type, pozzolanic materials and ambient temperature. Trials are to be conducted prior to use in order

HW 385

HW 395 NEW GENERATION POLYCARBOXYLATE ETHER SUPERPLASTICIZER “EXTENDED SLUMP RETENTION” DISCLAIMER

to determine required performance, including workability retention, setting, and strength development.

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of EPSILONE HW 385 may result in the following: • Delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Impair consistency & cohesion Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

• Good adhesion - ease of pumping. No bleeding • Good workability - excellent surface appearance • Minimal bleed water - excellent concrete quality • High elastic modulus - superior load bearing capacity

PRODUCT

EPSILONE HW 395 is a highly effective superplasticizer based on modified synthetic carboxylated polymers specifically designed to produce ready mix concrete with low water binder ratio and excellent workability. It can help the ready-mixed concrete industry, where more than normal slump retention and durability are required. The ability to work over a range of water binder ratios including low w/b ratios and still obtain extended slump retention allows for the manufacture of high quality concrete.

SCOPE OF USE

EPSILONE HW 395 is recommended for all areas of use of high performance concrete in ready mix Industry: • Super slump retaining concrete with equal or less water content than conventional admixtures • Concrete mixes containing Silica Fume: GGBS or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Long distance transport • Hot weather concreting • Highly durable concrete • Mass concrete • Pumped concrete • High strength concrete

NOTE

COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE HW 385 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders

Edition: 10/10-A

EPSILONE HW 385 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate - and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical department for advice.

PACKAGING

EPSILONE HW 385 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

STORAGE

EPSILONE HW 385 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

WORKING MECHANISM

The superplasticizer based on sulphonated naphthalene or melamine is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE HW 395 is different from these superplasticizers being based on a MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion. So in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of the lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which stabilizes the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property helps the ready mix operators with extended workability retention.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

EPSILONE HW 395 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, preferably after approximately 60% of mixing water addition.

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: from 600 to 1800 ml per 100 kg of cementituous content. Dosage above the recommended values can be employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials. Dosages varies dependant on water/cementituous ratio of the concrete, cement type, pozzolanic materials and ambient temperatures. Trials are to be conducted prior to determine required performances.

Schematic figure shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

HEALTH & SAFETY

PROPERTIES

• High water reducing • Superior slump retention. Ease of delivery to point of placement • High workability-ease of placing and compaction without segregation • Reduced risk of cracks

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management msystem to ensure consistency and quality

Liquid (Light Brown) 1.07 ± 0.02 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of EPSILONE HW 395 may result in the following: • Delay of initial setting

HW 395

PC 410 SPECIAL SUPERPLASTICIZER FOR HIGH PERFORMANCE PRECAST & READY MIX CONCRETE

• Higher workability • Impair consistency & cohesion Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

only. For more information, please contact the company’s office in your location.

COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE HW 395 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders EPSILONE HW 395 is not compatible with NSF & MSF superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical dept. for advice.

cement to less expensive Type I (ordinary). • Enables development of high strength concrete other than by cement addition. • Provides flow ability (greater than 200mm slump) of fresh concrete that does not segregate and sets in normal period of time while maintaining desired water-cement ratio • Provides concrete with self consolidating properties • Enhances passing/filling ability of the fresh concrete • Enhances aesthetic for minimal repairs • High water reduction • High workability-ease of placing and compaction without segregation • Reduced risk of cracks • Good adhesion - ease of pumping. No bleeding • Good workability - excellent surface appearance • Minimal bleed water - excellent concrete quality • High elastic modulus - superior load bearing capacity • Provides properties for sustainable precast

PRODUCT

EPSILONE PC 410 is a highly effective synthetic polymer based additive which performs extremely well with Portland cement of various types specifically designed to produce ready mixed concrete for precast with low water binder ratio and excellent workability. EPSILONE PC 410 improves the physical and mechanical performance of concrete.

WORKING MECHANISM Edition: 09/10-A

PACKAGING

EPSILONE HW 395 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

STORAGE

EPSILONE HW 395 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

HEALTH & SAFETY

Sulphonated naphthalene- or melamine-based superplasticizer is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the cement hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE PC 410 is specially designed with MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion of cement particles. Therefore, in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of these lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which greatly enhances the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property enables the production of concrete with extended workability retention.

SCOPE OF USE

EPSILONE PC 410 is recommended for all areas of use of high performance concrete in ready mix Precast Industry: • Precast/Prestressed concrete • Hollow core production • Tilt Up • Highly durable concrete • Retaining walls • Colored Precast • High strength concrete • Concrete mixes containing Silica Fume: GGBFS or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Concrete using white cement

Schematic figure shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

PROPERTIES

DISCLAIMER

• Allows reduction in cement while maintaining desired strength. • Accelerates strength development and resulting in higher frequency in use of forms. • Helps reduce steam curing time thereby reducing energy cost. • Permits reduction in amount of water normally required for a given workability. • Allows producer to switch from Type III (high early)

STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Type F ASTM C1017 Type I BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

Liquid (Light Brown) 1.05 ± 0.02 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

PC 410

PC 430 SPECIAL SUPERPLASTICIZER FOR HIGH PERFORMANCE PRECAST & READY MIX CONCRETE

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

HEALTH & SAFETY

EPSILONE PC 410 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer preferably after approximately 60% of water addition.

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: from 500 to 3000 ml per 100 kg of cementituous content. Dosage above the recommended values can be employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials.

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of EPSILONE PC 410 may result in the following: • Slight delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Higher Ultimate Strength Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE PC 410 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders EPSILONE PC 410 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical dept. for advice.

PRODUCT

EPSILONE PC 430 is a highly effective synthetic polymer based additive which performs extremely well with Portland cement of various types specifically designed to produce ready mixed concrete for precast with low water binder ratio and excellent workability. EPSILONE PC 430 improves the physical and mechanical performance of concrete.

WORKING MECHANISM

Sulphonated naphthalene- or melamine-based superplasticizer is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the cement hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE PC 430 is specially designed with MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion of cement particles. Therefore, in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of these lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which greatly enhances the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property enables the production of concrete with extended workability retention.

SCOPE OF USE

EPSILONE PC 430 is recommended for all areas of use of high performance concrete in ready mix Precast Industry: • Precast/Prestressed concrete • Hollow core production • Tilt Up • Highly durable concrete • Retaining walls • Colored Precast • High strength concrete • Concrete mixes containing Silica Fume: GGBFS or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Concrete using white cement

Schematic figure shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

Edition: 10/10-A

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

PROPERTIES

PACKAGING

EPSILONE PC 410 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

STORAGE

EPSILONE PC 410 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Type F ASTM C1017 Type I BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

Liquid (Light Brown) 1.07 ± 0.02 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

PC 430

PC 440 SPECIAL SUPERPLASTICIZER FOR HIGH PERFORMANCE PRECAST & READY MIX CONCRETE

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

HEALTH & SAFETY

EPSILONE PC 430 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer preferably after approximately 60% of water addition.

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: from 500 to 2700 ml per 100 kg of cementituous content. Dosage above the recommended values can be employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials.

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of EPSILONE PC 430 may result in the following: • Slight delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Higher Ultimate Strength Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE PC 430 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders EPSILONE PC 430 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical dept. for advice.

• Enables development of high strength concrete other than by cement addition. • Provides flow ability (greater than 200mm slump) of fresh concrete that does not segregate and sets in normal period of time while maintaining desired water-cement ratio • Provides concrete with self consolidating properties • Enhances passing/filling ability of the fresh concrete • Enhances aesthetic for minimal repairs • High water reduction • High workability-ease of placing and compaction without segregation • Reduced risk of cracks • Good adhesion - ease of pumping. No bleeding • Good workability - excellent surface appearance • Minimal bleed water - excellent concrete quality • High elastic modulus - superior load bearing capacity • Provides properties for sustainable precast

PRODUCT

EPSILONE PC 440 is a highly effective synthetic polymer based additive which performs extremely well with Portland cement of various types specifically designed to produce ready mixed concrete for precast with low water binder ratio and excellent workability. EPSILONE PC 440 improves the physical and mechanical performance of concrete.

WORKING MECHANISM

Sulphonated naphthalene- or melamine-based superplasticizer is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the cement hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE PC 440 is specially designed with MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion of cement particles. Therefore, in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of these lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which greatly enhances the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property enables the production of concrete with extended workability retention.

SCOPE OF USE

EPSILONE PC 440 is recommended for all areas of use of high performance concrete in ready mix Precast Industry: • Precast/Prestressed concrete • Hollow core production • Tilt Up • Highly durable concrete • Retaining walls • Colored Precast • High strength concrete • Concrete mixes containing Silica Fume: GGBFS or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Concrete using white cement

Schematic figure shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

Edition: 10/10-A

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

PROPERTIES

PACKAGING

EPSILONE PC 430 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

STORAGE

EPSILONE PC 430 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

Liquid (Light Brown) 1.08 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Type F ASTM C1017 Type I BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

EPSILONE PC 440 should be dispensed after all concrete

PC 440

PC 470 SPECIAL SUPERPLASTICIZER FOR HIGH PERFORMANCE PRECAST & READY MIX CONCRETE

constituents are charged in the central mixer preferably after approximately 60% of water addition.

HEALTH & SAFETY

PRODUCT

QUALITY STATEMENT

WORKING MECHANISM

DOSAGE RATES

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management msystem to ensure consistency and quality

DISCLAIMER

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of EPSILONE PC 440 may result in the following: • Slight delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Higher Ultimate Strength Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

NOTE

COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE PC 440 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders EPSILONE PC 440 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical dept. for advice.

EPSILONE PC 470 is a highly effective synthetic polymer based additive which performs extremely well with Portland cement of various types specifically designed to produce ready mixed concrete for precast with low water binder ratio and excellent workability. EPSILONE PC 470 improves the physical and mechanical performance of concrete.

Sulphonated naphthalene- or melamine-based superplasticizer is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the cement hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE PC 470 is specially designed with MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion of cement particles. Therefore, in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of these lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which greatly enhances the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property enables the production of concrete with extended workability retention.

SCOPE OF USE

EPSILONE PC 470 is recommended for all areas of use of high performance concrete in ready mix Precast Industry: • Precast/Prestressed concrete • Hollow core production • Tilt Up • Highly durable concrete • Retaining walls • Colored Precast • High strength concrete • Concrete mixes containing Silica Fume: GGBFS or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Concrete using white cement

Schematic figure shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

Edition: 07/11-A

CHARACTERISTICS PROPERTIES

Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

PACKAGING

EPSILONE PC 440 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

STORAGE

EPSILONE PC 440 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Type F ASTM C1017 Type I BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

Liquid (Light Brown) 1.065 ± 0.02 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

PC 470

PC 485 NEW GENERATION POLYCARBOXYLATE ETHER SUPERPLASTICIZER FOR THE PRECAST INDUSTRY

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

HEALTH & SAFETY

EPSILONE PC 470 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer preferably after approximately 60% of water addition.

DOSAGE RATES

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of EPSILONE PC 470 may result in the following: • Slight delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Higher Ultimate Strength Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE PC 470 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders EPSILONE PC 470 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical dept. for advice.

PRODUCT

EPSILONE PC 485 is a highly effective synthetic polymer based additive which performs extremely well with Portland cement of various types specifically designed to produce ready mixed concrete for precast with low water binder ratio and excellent workability. EPSILONE PC 485 improves the physical and mechanical performance of concrete.

WORKING MECHANISM

Sulphonated naphthalene- or melamine-based superplasticizer is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the cement hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE PC 485 is specially designed with MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion of cement particles. Therefore, in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of these lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which greatly enhances the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property enables the production of concrete with extended workability retention.

SCOPE OF USE

EPSILONE PC 485 is recommended for all areas of use of high performance concrete in ready mix Precast Industry: • Precast/Prestressed concrete • Hollow core production • Tilt Up • Highly durable concrete • Retaining walls • Colored Precast • High strength concrete • Concrete mixes containing Silica Fume: GGBFS or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Concrete using white cement

Schematic figure shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

Edition: 06/10-A

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

PROPERTIES

PACKAGING

EPSILONE PC 470 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

STORAGE

EPSILONE PC 470 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

Liquid (Light Brown) 1.06 ± 0.02 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Type F ASTM C1017 Type I BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

EPSILONE PC 485 should be dispensed after all concrete

VMA CONTROL

PC 485

SPECIAL SUPERPLASTICIZER FOR HIGH PERFORMANCE PRECAST & READY MIX CONCRETE HEALTH & SAFETY

constituents are charged in the central mixer preferably after approximately 60% of water addition.

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: from 600 to 2700 ml per 100 kg of cementituous content. Dosage above the recommended values can be employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality

DISCLAIMER

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of EPSILONE PC 485 may result in the following: • Slight delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Higher Ultimate Strength Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

NOTE

COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE PC 485 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders

Edition: 02/11-A

PACKAGING

EPSILONE PC 485 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

STORAGE

EPSILONE PC 485 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

EPSILONE VMA CONTROL is designed for specific applications. It is used to:

The key function of EPSILONE VMA CONTROL is to stabilize the rheological properties and consistency of the concrete, modifying and enhancing the thixotropic properties of cement-based materials, resulting in greater stability Improving cohesion and reduce segregation without significant impact on consistence.

• Reduced segregation in highly flowable/self compacting concrete • Reduced washout in underwater concrete • Reduced friction and pressure in pumped concrete • Compensates for poor aggregate grading, especially a lack of fines in the sand • Allows reductions in powder content in self compacting concrete • Reduced bleeding in concrete • Improves green strength in semi-dry concrete • Less sensitive to variations in the moisture content of the aggregate • Provides stability to more fluid mixes without the risk of segregation • Reduced formwork pressure by thixotropic effect • Better surface appearance • A more durable concrete • Reduces environmental risk caused by the wash out of cement particles • Prevents blockages by allowing the concrete to remain fluid, homogeneous and resistant to segregation, even under high pumping pressures • Increases output when used in combination with a superplasticizer to give optimal pumping pressure. • Reduced wear due to lubrication effect of the admixture • Assists pump restart by preventing segregation in static lines • Reduced sagging – dimensional stability

WORKING MECHANISM The rheology of fresh concrete can be mainly described by its yield point and plastic viscosity: • The yield point describes the force needed to start the concrete moving. Yield point is related to the workability of the concrete and may be assessed by tests such as the slump value • Plastic Viscosity describes the resistance of a concrete to flow under external stress. Viscosity is caused by internal friction. The speed of flow of concrete is related to its plastic viscosity and may be assessed by the T500 time during a slump flow test or by the time to flow through a V Funnel. The balance between the yield point and the plastic viscosity is the key to obtaining the appropriate concrete rheology. EPSILONE VMA CONTROL changes the rheological properties of concrete by increasing the plastic viscosity but usually cause only a small increase in the yield point. HRWR admixtures which decrease the yield point are used in conjunction with EPSILONE VMA CONTROL to optimize the yield point. Yield Stress 30” slump flow 0” slump

EPSILONE PC 485 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical dept. for advice.

PROPERTIES

PRODUCT

SCOPE OF USE

EPSILONE VMA CONTROL is recommended for all areas of use of high-performance concrete in the concrete industry: • Standard concrete • Self-Compacting Concrete • High Performance/High Strength Concrete • High Durability Concrete • Precast Concrete • Mass Concrete • Underwater concrete • Pervious Concrete • Lightweight aggregate concrete

Conventional Concrete

Segregation Zone SCC Plastic Viscosity

VMA CONTROL

• sprayed concrete • Shotcrete • Manufactured Concrete Products • Semi-Dry Concrete • Screeds & Renders • Repair Mortar • Sustainable concrete • HVFA concrete • Architectural concrete with exposed coarse aggregate surfaces. • Low cementituous SCC concrete mix designs.

Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

This effect can usually be overcome by increasing the superplasticizer content.

only. For more information, please contact the company’s office in your location.

COMPATIBILITY

NOTE

EPSILONE VMA CONTROL can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders EPSILONE VMA CONTROL is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical dept. for advice.

CHARACTERISTICS Creamy Liquid 1.074 ± 0.02 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

VMA CONTROL

Edition: 07/10-A

PACKAGING

EPSILONE VMA CONTROL is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

STANDARDS EFNARC - VMA Guidelines 2006 CAA – VMA for SCC Guidelines BS EN 480 BS EN 934-2 ISO 649-2

STORAGE

EPSILONE VMA CONTROL can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of . temperatures.

INSTRUCTION FOR USE

HEALTH & SAFETY

EPSILONE VMA CONTROL should be dispensed at the end of the batching sequence after all other ingredients have been thoroughly mixed.

DOSAGE RATES Range of dosage rates: from 100 to 500 ml per 100 kg of cementituous content. Various concrete materials, slump, ambient air temperature, additions of pozzolanic materials, mixing time, and type and brand of cement will affect dosage rates. It is suggested that trial mixes be conducted in order to determine the required dosage for optimum performance with available concrete components.

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management msystem to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE Overdose of EPSILONE VMA CONTROL may result in the following: • Loss of initial workability • Increase in concrete mix cohesiveness • Slowing the placing rate

WR 220

WR 220 THIRD GENERATION WATER REDUCING & RETARDING ADMIXTURE PRODUCT

EPSILONE WR 220 is a synthetic polymer complex. It interacts chemically with cement particles in freshly mixed concrete, resulting in improved cement distribution throughout the mix. This reaction transforms the low slump characteristics of low water/cement ratio mix designs into mildly set retarded; highly workable (high slump) mixes without changes to the designed water/cement ratio.

• Ease of placing and compaction without segregation • Reduced risk of cracking

determine required performance, including workability retention, setting, and strength development.

SCOP OF USE

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

EPSILONE WR 220 is recommended for all areas of use of high-performance concrete in the ready-mix industry: • Super slump retaining concrete with equal or less water content than conventional admixtures • Concrete mixtures containing silica fume, GGBS, or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Long distance transport • Hot weather concreting • Highly durable concrete • Mass concrete • Pumped concrete

WORKING MECHANISM

Sulphonated naphthalene- or melamine-based superplasticizer is absorbed onto the surface of cement particles at a very early stage of the cement hydration process. These polymer chains absorbed to the surface increase the negative charge on the surface of cement particles, and dispersion is obtained by electrostatic repulsion. In addition to the previous process, EPSILONE WR 220 is specially designed with MultiCarboxylate Ether with long lateral chains that improve greatly the dispersion of cement particles. Therefore, in addition to the electrostatic repulsion which occurs at the start of the mixing process, the presence of these lateral chains generates a steric hindrance which greatly enhances the capacity of cement particles to separate and disperse. This property enables the production of concrete with extended workability retention.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

Liquid (Pale Yellow ) 1.020 ± 0.02 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Type B & D BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

Schematic figure shows a cement particle with polymer backbone and the long lateral chains linked to it.

PROPERTIES

Simultaneously gives increased slump without extra mixing water and retards the set of concrete, allowing more time for placing and finishing in hot weather conditions. • Increases concrete strength at all ages and improves workability and durability. • Excellent surface appearance in high workability

DISCLAIMER

Overdose of EPSILONE WR 220 may result in the following: • Delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Impair consistency & cohesion Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

COMPATIBILITY

EPSILONE WR 220 can be used in mixtures containing: • Silica fume • Fly Ash • GGBFS • Pozzolanic Binders

NOTE

EPSILONE WR 220 is not compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical dept. for advice.

PACKAGING

Edition: 01/11-A

EPSILONE WR 220 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

INSTRUCTION FOR USE

STORAGE

EPSILONE WR 220 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, preferably after approximately 60% of mixing water addition.

EPSILONE WR 220 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

DOSAGE RATES

Admixture demand varies with w/b of the concrete, cement type, pozzolanic materials and ambient temperature. Trials are to be conducted prior to use in order to

QUALITY STATEMENT

Range of dosage rates: from 200 to 1200ml per 100 kg of cementituous content. Dosage above the recommended values can be employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials

quality

HEALTH & SAFETY

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management msystem to ensure consistency and

Admix CP 60

WATER REDUCER - PLASTICIZER WITH RETARDING EFFECT

PRODUCT

Admix CP 60 is a chloride-free water reducing plasticizer. Added to the mixing water of concrete, it deflocculates cement and reduces the superficial tension of water, causing better workability, complete hydration of cement, and a considerable reduction of mixing water. At a specific dosage, Admix CP 60 has the effect of a set retarder.

PROPERTIES

Admix CP 60

DOSING PUMPS Under certain conditions, dosing pumps can be installed by the company. This operation will allow all concrete operations to be automatic.

NOTE

TESTS Preliminary tests shall be performed before Admix CP 60 is used on site.

Edition: 06/07-A **Available only in MENA

DOSAGE RATES

• WVith an equal W/C, Admix CP 60 improves the workability and compactness of fresh concrete with an increase in mechanical properties. • With reduced W/C, Admix CP 60 maintains the same workability as the reference specimen. • At high dosages, Admix CP 60 delays the beginning setting. This is necessary for ready-mix concrete and pumped concrete, and is especially useful in hot weather. The mechanical strength at 28 and 90 days are improved compared to the reference concrete made without Admix CP 60. • Admix CP 60 reduces of shrinking and the risk of cracking. It prevents bleeding and segregation. • It reduces perceptibly the capillary absorption, although the admixture is not a water repellent.

0.25 to 1 kg/100 kg of the cement should be used. At temperature below 20ºC preliminary tests should be carried out for dosages higher than 0.8%.

PACKAGING

Admix CP 60 is supplied in: Bulk 200 and 25 lit. drums

STORAGE

Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

HEALTH & SAFETY

SCOPE OF USE

Dams, locks, road works, architectonic concrete, light or heavy prefabrication, ready-mix concrete, and pumped concrete.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

Brownish liquid

Specific gravity

1.174 ± 0.01

QUALITY STATEMENT

Applicable standard: ASTM C494 Type D

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

DISCLAIMER

APPLICABLE STANDARD

APPLICATION Admix CP 60 is to be added to the mixing water. The total concrete mixing water will be reduced by 5% to 20% before the incorporation of Admix CP 60. During mixing, adjust the plasticity of the concrete by adding small quantities of water, until the required plasticity is reached.

Admix CP 313

WATER REDUCING – PLASTICIZER FOR MORTAR & CONCRETE

DOSAGE RATES

PRODUCT

0.2 to 1.5 kg / 100 kg of cement should be used. It shows a retarding effect for dosages between 1.5 and 1.7 kg / 100 kg of cement. The optimum dosage for a specific job should be determined by in-situ trials.

Admix CP 313 is a water-reducing plasticizer. It confers higher compressive strength to concrete / mortar by reducing water demand and greater workability by dispersing cement particles.

PROPERTIES

Admix CP 313 with its dispersing properties, improves the workability of concrete and mortar at equal water contents. • It increases the compactness and mechanical strength of hardened concrete. • It allows the optimization of dosage in the mixture, to obtain a given strength. • It facilitates the pumping of concrete. • It reduces the cement content by 5% to 10% for the same strength.

use, dissemination or copying (either whole or partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit. Edition: 06/07-A **Available only in MENA

STORAGE

Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures

PACKAGING

Admix CP 313 is supplied in: Bulk 200, 25 lit. and 4 lit. drums

HEALTH & SAFETY

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CP 313 is recommended for all cement types, in the following areas: • General reinforced concrete • Ready to use concrete • Heavy prefabrication • Prestressed concrete • Pumped concrete

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

Added to mortar, Admix CP 313 improves workability of: • Plaster and render • Mounting mortar (blocks, bricks…)

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity

Admix CP 313

Dark brown liquid 1.120 ± 0.01

APPLICABLE STANDARD

Applicable standard: ASTM C 494 Type A

in your location.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

NOTE

Admix CP 313 is totally miscible in water. It is incorporated with the mixing water. The quantity of water is determined as a function of the desired plasticity.

The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorized disclosure,

Admix CP 315 D

WATER-REDUCING / RETARDING / PLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

cycle at the same time as the water. No extension to normal mixing time is required.

PRODUCT

Admix CP 315 D is a water reducing/retarding/ admixture which acts on the cement particles in a concrete mixture to make it more workable and helps maintain workability for considerable period. It also helps to maintain cohesion and prevents segregation even when using higher dosage rate.

DOSAGE

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CP 315 D for a particular mix. A dosage of 400 to 1800 ml per 100 kg of cement is recommended. This may be changed to higher dosage in high ambient and mixture temperature conditions.

PROPERTIES

Admix CP 315 D: • Allows the retention of the original slump over time in addition to the normal properties of a plasticizer. • Improves the density of the concrete and reduces capillary absorption. • Increases the ultimate strength of the concrete. • Reduces segregation and bleeding. • Improves the appearance of the concrete.

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING

A severe over dose of Admix CP 315 D will result in the following: • Delay of the initial and final setting times • Slight increase in air entrainment • Increased workability

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CP 315 D is ideal to use in hot-weather conditions where the slump retention over time is important for transportation. It is also used to optimize the dosage of cement, especially in precast concrete. • Transported concrete • Pipe prefabrication • General reinforced concrete • Ready-mix concrete • Heavy prefabrication • Pumped concrete

Providing it is properly cured, the ultimate strength of the concrete will not be adversely affected and will generally be higher than that of the normal concrete.

COMPATIBILITY

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20°C Chloride content Air entrainment

Liquid Dark Brown 1.125 ± 0.01 Zero to BS5075 Up to 2% depending on the admixture dosage a nd mixture proportioning.

Admix CP 315 D complies with: ASTM C 494 Types A & D. BS 5075 Part – 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

PACKAGING

Admix CP 315 D is supplied in: Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE

Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures

HEALTH & SAFETY

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

Admix CP 315 D can be used in all types of portland and sulfate-resisting cements. For use with other cements, contact the company’s technical service department. Admix CP 315 D should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CP 315 D, they must be dispensed separately. Consult the Company’s Technical Dept. for advice.

DISCLAIMER

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE

NOTE

Admix CP 315 D, a plasticizing concrete admixture manufactured to the following specification: Admix CP 315 D can be used in all concrete mixtures as mentioned, at dosage between 400 and 1800 ml per 100 kg of cement in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

APPLICABLE STANDARD

Admix CP 315 D

DISPENSING

should be introduced into a mixture by means of It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete automatic dispensing equipment.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CP 315 D is totally miscible in water. It is to be added to the concrete mixture during the mixing

Admix CP 315

WATER-REDUCING / RETARDING / PLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

PRODUCT

Admix CP 315 is totally miscible in water. It is to be added to the concrete mixture during the mixing cycle at the same time as the water. No extension to normal mixing time is required.

Admix CP 315 is a water reducing/retarding/admixture which acts on the cement particles in a concrete mixture to make it more workable and helps maintain workability for considerable period. It also helps to maintain cohesion and prevents segregation even when using higher dosage rate.

DOSAGE

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CP 315 for a particular mix. A dosage of 200 to 900 ml per 100 kg of cement is recommended. This may be changed to higher dosage in high ambient and mixture temperature conditions. At temperature below 20ºC, preliminary tests should be carried out for dosages higher than 0.8%.

PROPERTIES

Admix CP 315: • Allows the retention of the original slump over time in addition to the normal properties of a plasticizer. • Improves the density of the concrete and reduces capillary absorption. • Increases the ultimate strength of the concrete. • Reduces segregation and bleeding. • Improves the appearance of the concrete.

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING

A severe over dose of Admix CP 315 will result in the following: • Delay of the initial and final setting times • Slight increase in air entrainment • Increased workability

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CP 315 is ideal to use in hot-weather conditions where the slump retention over time is important for transportation. It is also used to optimize the dosage of cement, especially in precast concrete. • Transported concrete • Pipe prefabrication • General reinforced concrete • Ready-mix concrete • Heavy prefabrication • Pumped concrete

Providing it is properly cured, the ultimate strength of the concrete will not be adversely affected and will generally be higher than that of the normal concrete.

COMPATIBILITY

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20°C Chloride content Air entrainment

Liquid Dark Brown 1.110 ± 0.01 Zero to BS 5075 Up to 2% depending on the admixture dosage and mixture proportioning

Admix CP 315 complies with: ASTM C 494 Types A & D. BS 5075 Part – 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

DISPENSING

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixture by means of automatic dispensing equipment.

PACKAGING

Admix CP 315 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE

Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures

HEALTH & SAFETY

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

Admix CP 315 can be used in all types of portland and sulfate-resisting cements. For use with other cements, contact the company’s technical service department. Admix CP 315 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CP 315, they must be dispensed separately. Consult the Company’s Technical Dept. for advice.

DISCLAIMER

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE

NOTE

Admix CP 315, a plasticizing concrete admixture is manufactured to the following specification: Admix CP 315 can be used in all concrete mixtures as mentioned, at dosage between 200 and 900 ml per 100 kg of cement in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

APPLICABLE STANDARD

Admix CP 315

Admix CP 333

Admix CP 432

WATER-REDUCING PLASTICIZER

WATER-REDUCING / RETARDING / PLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

is variable according to the ambient temperature, to the consistency of the concrete mix and to the nature of the cement and the dosage. A previous trial in situ will help determine this duration.

PRODUCT

Admix CP 333 is a synthesized polymer e, specifically designed for use with hydraulic binders. Its particular chemical structure is remarkably efficient: It has a strong dispersant action with the finer elements of concrete. This translates into an improvement of the workability of concrete. Admix CP 333 is a catalyst of the hydration reactions of cement. It allows reaching good mechanical resistance.

PACKAGING

Admix CP 333 is supplied in: Bulk 200 and 25 lit. drums

STORAGE

Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CP 333 is recommended for all types of cement, in the following areas: • Paving and industrial floor. • Ready-mix concrete. • All concrete requiring a fluid consistency. • Concrete with low W/C.

HEALTH & SAFETY

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific Density

Liquid 1.160 ± 0.01

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

APPLICABLE STANDARD

Admix CP 333 comply with ASTM C 494 A & D. BS 5075 Part – 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CP 333 is totally miscible in water. Admix CP 333 can be added to the concrete just before the pouring. Mix together no less than 2 minutes before pouring. The maximum efficiency of Admix CP 333 will be determined after trial mixtures.

office in your location.

NOTE

DOSAGE

Range of dosing rates From 0.6 to 2.4 kg/100 kg cement

SPECIAL ADVICE

Maintenance of fluidity.

Edition: 08/10-A

*Available only in Qatar The time during which the concrete remains fluid

be added to the concrete during mixing cycle at the same time as the water. No extension to normal mixing time is required.

PRODUCT

Admix CP 432 is a water reducing/retarding/admixture which acts on the cement particles in a concrete mixture to make it more workable and helps maintain the workability for a considerable period. It helps to maintain cohesion and prevents segregation even on higher dosage.

DOSAGE

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CP 432 for a particular mixture. A dosage of 400 to 1800 ml per 100 kg of cement is recommended. This may be changed to higher dosage in high ambient and mix temperature conditions.

PROPERTIES

Admix CP 432: • Allows the retention of original slump over time inaddition to the normal properties of a plasticizer (higher slump and/or water reduction). • Improves the density of the concrete and reduces capillary absorption. • Increases the ultimate strength of the concrete. • Reduces segregation and bleeding in concrete. • Improves appearance of the concrete.

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING

A severe over dose of Admix CP 432 will result in the following: • Delay of the initial and final setting times • Slight increase in air entrainment • Increased workability Providing it is properly cured, the ultimate strength of the concrete will not be adversely affected and will generally be higher than that of concrete made without Admix CP 432.

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CP 432 is ideal to use in hot weather conditions where the slump retention over time is critical for transportation. It is also used to optimize the dosage of cement, especially in: • Precast concrete • Transported concrete • Pipe prefabrication • General reinforced concrete • Ready-mix concrete • Heavy prefabrication • Pumped concrete

COMPATIBILITY

Admix CP 432 can be used in all types of portland and sulfate-resisting cements. For use with other cements contact the company’s technical service department. Admix CP 432 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CP 432, they must be dispensed separately. Consult the Company’s Technical Dept. for advice.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20°C Chloride content Air entrainment

Liquid Dark Brown 1.115 ± 0.01 Zero to BS 5075

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE

Admix CP 432, a plasticizing concrete admixture is manufactured to the following specification: Admix CP 432 can be used in all concrete mixes as mentioned, at dosage between 400 and 1800 ml per 100 kg of cement in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Composition: Refined high molecular weight lignosulphonates and other adapted chemicals.

Up to 2% depending on the dosage and mix design

APPLICABLE STANDARD

Admix CP 432 complies with: ASTM C 494 A & D. BS 5075 Part – 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

PACKAGING

Admix CP 432 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CP 432 is totally miscible in water. It is to

Admix CP 432

Admix CP 445

WATER-REDUCING / RETARDING / PLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

be added to the concrete during mixing cycle at the same time as the water. No extension to normal mixing time is required.

PRODUCT

Admix CP 445 is a water reducing/retarding/Admix ature which acts on the cement particles in a concrete mixture to make it more workable and helps maintain the workability for a considerable period. It helps to maintain cohesion and prevents segregation even on higher dosage.

STORAGE

Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures

QUALITY STATEMENT

DOSAGE

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CP 445 for a particular mixture. A dosage of 400 to 1800 ml per 100 kg of cement is recommended. This may be changed to higher dosage in high ambient and mix temperature conditions.

PROPERTIES

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

Admix CP 445: • Allows the retention of original slump over time inaddition to the normal properties of a plasticizer (higher slump and/or water reduction). • Improves the density of the concrete and reduces capillary absorption. • Increases the ultimate strength of the concrete. • Reduces segregation and bleeding in concrete. • Improves appearance of the concrete.

HEALTH & SAFETY

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING

A severe over dose of Admix CP 445 will result in the following: • Delay of the initial and final setting times • Slight increase in air entrainment • Increased workability Providing it is properly cured, the ultimate strength of the concrete will not be adversely affected and will generally be higher than that of concrete made without Admix CP 445.

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CP 445 is ideal to use in hot weather conditions where the slump retention over time is critical for transportation. It is also used to optimize the dosage of cement, especially in: • Precast concrete • Transported concrete • Pipe prefabrication • General reinforced concrete • Ready-mix concrete • Heavy prefabrication • Pumped concrete

DISCLAIMER

COMPATIBILITY

Admix CP 445 can be used in all types of portland and sulfate-resisting cements. For use with other cements contact the company’s technical service department. Admix CP 445 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CP 445, they must be dispensed separately. Consult the Company’s Technical Dept. for advice.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20°C Chloride content Air entrainment

NOTE

Liquid Dark Brown 1.115 ± 0.001 Zero to BS 5075

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE

Admix CP 445, a plasticizing concrete admixture is manufactured to the following specification: Admix CP 445 can be used in all concrete mixes as mentioned, at dosage between 400 and 1800 ml per 100 kg of cement in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Composition: Refined high molecular weight lignosulphonates and other adapted chemicals.

Up to 2% depending on the dosage and mix design

APPLICABLE STANDARD

Admix CP 445 complies with: ASTM C 494 A & D. BS 5075 Part – 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

Edition: 07/09-A *Available only in QATAR

PACKAGING

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CP 445 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels.

Admix CP 445 is totally miscible in water. It is to

Admix CP 445

Admix MP 104

Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

PRODUCT

PLASTICIZER FOR CEMENT MORTAR

testing should be carried out to determine optimum dosage.

Admix MP 104 is a synthesized polymer plasticizer for sand-cement mortars.

STORAGE

Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures

PACKAGING

PROPERTIES

Admix MP 104 is supplied in: Drums: 200 liters Pails: 20 or 25 liters Pails: 5 liters

Admix MP 104 confers to mortars a better workability, while maintaining an excellent cohesion. Admix MP 104 is free from calcium chloride and similar salts. Admix MP 104 replaces lime in plastering and bricklaying mortars. Admix MP 104 introduced into mortar mixes, generates a network of stable microscopic bubbles, uniformly distributed, which diminishes the phenomena of capillarity.

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

HEALTH & SAFETY

STORAGE

Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

SCOPE OF USE

Admix MP 104 is recommended for the correction of grain-size distribution of natural sand that are poor in fine elements. Admix MP 104 is recommended for mortars exposed to frost. Admix MP 104 makes it possible to reduce shrinkage and risk of cracking and avoid segregation and bleeding.

DISCLAIMER

HEALTH & SAFETY

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Liquid Specific gravity at 20˚C 20°C 1.05 – 1.08 Chloride content Zero to BS 5075 Air entrainment Depending on the dosage

DISCLAIMER

and mix design

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix MP 104 is to be added with the mixing water. Reduce the mortar mixing by 20% before the incorporation of Admix MP 104. During mixing, adjust the plasticity by adding small quantities of water, until required plasticity is reached.

NOTE

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage of Admix MP 104 from 0.4 to 0.6 liter per 100 kg of cement, depending on the nature of sand and desired workability. Over-dosage increases workability; delay setting and decreases early compressive strength. Preliminary testing

Edition: 02/09-A *Available only in GCC

Admix MP 104

Admix CP 305

NOTE

PRODUCT

WATER-REDUCING & RETARDING ADMIXTURE

added to the concrete mixture during the mixing cycle at the same time as the water. No extension to normal mixing time is required.

Admix CP 305 is a water-reducing and retarding admixture for concrete. It does not contain calcium chloride or any other chemicals which could be harmful to the durability of reinforced concrete. Admix CP 305 enables easier placing, compaction and finishing of concrete and may be used to reduce the water content whilst retaining the same workability resulting in higher strengths. Admix CP 305 may also be used to reduce the overall cement content for specified strength and durability. Admix CP 305 can also improve the cohesion of concrete mixes based on poor quality materials having a higher water demand.

Edition: 11/10-A *Available only in GCC

DOSAGE

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CP 305 for a particular mix. A dosage of 200 to 1100 ml per 100 kg of cement is recommended. This may be changed to higher dosage in high ambient and mixture temperature conditions. At temperature below 20ºC, preliminary tests should be carried out for dosages higher than 0.8%.

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING

PROPERTIES

A severe over dose of Admix CP 305 will result in the following: • Delay of the initial and final setting times • Increased workability

PROPERTIES Admix CP 305: • Allows the retention of the original slump over time in addition to the normal properties of a plasticizer. • Increases the ultimate strength of the concrete. • Reduces segregation and bleeding. • Improves the appearance of the concrete.

Providing it is properly cured, the ultimate strength of the concrete will not be adversely affected and will generally be higher than that of the normal concrete.

COMPATIBILITY

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CP 305 can be used in all types of portland and sulfate-resisting cements. For use with other cements, contact the company’s technical service department. Admix CP 305 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CP 305, they must be dispensed separately. Consult the Company’s Technical Dept. for advice.

Admix CP 305 is ideal to use in hot-weather conditions where the slump retention over time is important for transportation. • Transported concrete • Pipe prefabrication • General reinforced concrete • Ready-mix concrete • Heavy prefabrication • Pumped concrete

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity Chloride content

Admix CP 305, a plasticizing concrete admixture is manufactured to the following specification: Admix CP 305 can be used in all concrete mixtures as mentioned, at dosage between 200 and 1100 ml per 100kg of cement in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

Liquid Light Brown 20°C 1.08 ± 0.02 Zero to BS 5075

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

DISPENSING

Admix CP 305 complies with: ASTM C 494 Types A & D.

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixture by means of automatic dispensing equipment.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CP 305 is totally miscible in water. It is to be

Admix CP 310

Admix CP 305

WATER-REDUCING AND RETARDING ADMIXTURE

PACKAGING

PRODUCT

Admix CP 305 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

Specific gravity

Admix CP 310 is a multi-component admixture which is carefully formulated to enhance the quality and performance characteristics of plastic and hardened concrete. Its unique chemistry results in more complete and efficient hydration of the cementitious materials in the concrete matrix, and provides improved durability, finishability and overall appearance. It does not contain calcium chloride or any other chemicals which could be harmful to the durability of reinforced concrete. Admix CP 310 may be used to reduce the water content whilst retaining the same workability resulting in higher strengths. Admix CP 310 can also improve the cohesion of concrete mixes based on poor quality materials having a higher water demand.

STORAGE

Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

HEALTH & SAFETY

Chloride content

Admix CP 310 complies with: ASTM C 494 Types A & D

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CP 310 is totally miscible in water. It is to be added to the concrete mixture during the mixing cycle at the same time as the water. No extension to normal mixing time is required.

DOSAGE RATES

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CP 310 for a particular mix. A dosage of 200 to 1100 ml per 100 kg of cement is recommended. This may be changed to higher dosage in high ambient and mixture temperature conditions. At temperature below 20ºC, preliminary tests should be carried out for dosages higher than 0.8%.

Admix CP 310: • Improves the quality of concrete by decreasing water-cement ratio for a given workability • Increases ultimate compressive and flexural strengths • Provides superior concrete finishability • Improves workability and ease of placement and consolidation • Improves pumpability of concrete • Provides uniform control of setting characteristics • Reduces cracking and shrinkage • Increases relative freeze-thaw durability • Allows the retention of the original slump over time in addition to the normal properties of a plasticizer. • Reduces segregation and bleeding.

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING

A severe over dose of Admix CP 310 will result in the following: • Delay of the initial and final setting times • Increased workability Providing it is properly cured, the ultimate strength of the concrete will not be adversely affected and will generally be higher than that of the normal concrete.

SCOPE OF USE

COMPATIBILITY

Admix CP 310 is ideal to use in hot-weather conditions where the slump retention over time is important for transportation. • Transported concrete • Pipe prefabrication • General reinforced concrete • Ready-mix concrete • Heavy prefabrication • Pumped concrete

NOTE

Edition: 08/10-A

Admix CP 310 is compatible with all types of Portland cement, and fly ash, microsilica, ground granulated blast furnace slag, calcium chloride, fibers and accelerating, retarding, and high-range water reducing admixtures. Admix CP 310 can be used in all white, colored, and architectural concrete. For best results, each admixture must be dispensed separately into the concrete mix.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color

Zero to BS 5075

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

PROPERTIES

QUALITY STATEMENT

20°C 1.09± 0.02

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE

Admix CP 310, a plasticizing and retarding concrete admixture manufactured to the following specification:

Liquid Light Brown

Admix CF 103

Admix CP 310

SUPERPLASTICIZER FOR HOT WEATHER CONCRETE

Admix CP 310 can be used in all concrete mixtures as mentioned, at dosage between 200 and 1100 ml per 100 kg of cement in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

guidance only. For more information, please contact the company’s office in your location.

NOTE

DISPENSING

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixture by means of automatic dispensing equipment.

Edition: 08/10-A

PACKAGING

Admix CP 310 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

SPECIAL ADVICE

PRODUCT

PROPERTIES

Composition of concrete The composition of the concrete before being plasticized must be established with care. The grain-size distribution of the aggregate must include a proportion of fine elements, comparable to those of pumped concrete.

SCOPE OF USE

Maintenance of fluidity The delay during which the plasticized concrete remains fluid is variable according to the temperature, to the original consistency of concrete, to the nature and to the dosage of cement, etc. Admix CF 103 allows prolonged maintenance of fluidity, proportionally to its dosages, thus acting as a set retarder. At the end of setting, the mechanical strength develops rapidly. In-situ trial will allow the determination of the optimal dosage of Admix CF 103.

Admix CF 103 is a superplasticizer based on selected polymers. It allows concrete to be fluid, homogeneous, and segregation free, while maintaining high slump over time. Admix CF 103 acts simultaneously on the following: • Dispersing of fine particles • Cohesion of fresh concrete • Setting of concrete When using dosage rates lower than those necessary for fluidification, Admix CF 103 allows the preparation of plastic concrete, with an attractive appearance and an high mechanical properties, and therefore an optimization of the dosage in cement per m³.

STORAGE

Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

Admix CF 103 is recommended for all cement types, in the following areas: • Ready to use concrete • Heavily reinforced concrete works • Incubated concrete • Paving and industrial floors • Fluid concrete for long maintenance of slump

HEALTH & SAFETY

PACKAGING

Admix CF 103 is supplied in: Bulk 200 and 25 lit. drums

STORAGE

Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

Brown Liquid 20°C 1.06 ± 0.01-

HEALTH & SAFETY

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Applicable standard: ASTM C 494 Type G.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

DISCLAIMER

Admix CF 103 is totally miscible in water. Admix CF 103 is introduced into the mixer at the same time as the mixing water, when a constant plasticity is required. In order to make fluid concrete, the introduction will be made at the end of the mixing. In this case, additional mixing for at least 2 minutes will be necessary or 5 minutes in mixing truck of 6 m³.

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DOSAGE RATES

DISCLAIMER

From 0.3 to 1.5 kg / 100 kg cement.

While the company guarantees its products against defective materials, the use and application of these

100

101

Admix CF 103

Admix CF 335

products are made without guarantee since the conditions of their application are beyond its control. It is recommended to verify with the company that the product is suitable for the intended use, and that this Data Sheet version is the latest one. The company may modify it without prior notice. Technical characteristics are listed for guidance only. For more information, please contact the company’s office in your location.

PRODUCT

MID RANGE SUPERPLASTICIZER ADMIXTURE FOR CONCRETE

delay in setting and adequate workability should be determined by in-situ trials. However, a guideline for the minimum dosage is given below. It may change according to the ambient and mixture temperatures and climatic conditions: a dosage of 500 to 1500 ml per 100 kg of cementitious material is recommended as a starting point.

Admix CF 335 is a ready to use aqueous solution of complex compounds specially formulated for use in portland cement concrete containing pozzolans. Admix CF 335 enhances the performance of plastic and hardened concrete. Admix CF 335 is manufactured under rigid quality control measures to provide uniform, reliable results.

NOTE

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING

A severe over dose of Admix CF 335 will result in the following: • Very slight delay in setting • Higher workability • Higher ultimate strength

PROPERTIES

• Improves the quality of concrete by decreasing water-cement ratio • Improves workability, placeability and consolidation • Enhances concrete pumping • Improves mix cohesiveness • Improves cement hydration and maximizes cement utilization • Increases ultimate compressive and flexural strengths • Reduces cracking and shrinkage • Improves formed surfaces • Reduces permeability • Improves resistance to sulfate attack

Edition: 08/10-A **Available only in MENA

In case of over dose, precautions should be taken not to disturb the surface area. With proper curing, the ultimate strength of the structure should not be adversely affected.

COMPATIBILITY

Admix CF 335 can be used in all types of portland and sulfate-resisting cements. For use with other cements contact company’s technical service department. Admix CF 335 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 335, they must be dispensed separately. Consult company technical Dept. for advice.

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 335 is recommended for concrete mixes to provide mid range water-reduction, greatly improved workability, ease of placement and consolidation, and improved cement performance.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity @ 20˚C

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE

Admix CF 335, a mid range superplasticizer concrete admixture is manufactured to the following specification: Admix CF 335 can be used in all concrete mixtures at dosage rates between 500 and 1500 ml per 100 kg of cementitious material in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

Brownish Liquid 1.167 ± 0.01

APPLICABLE STANDARDS ASTM C 494 Type G.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF 335 is totally miscible in water. It is incorporated prior to mixing water. The quantity of water is determined as the function of the desired plasticity.

DISPENSING

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment. Such equipment

DOSAGE RATES

The required dosage for a specific job with controlled

102

103

Admix CF 335

Admix CF GD

WATER-REDUCING AND RETARDING SUPERPLASTICIZER

PRODUCT

can be supplied by the company.

Admix CF 335 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

Admix CF GD is composed of a modified naphthalene - and lignosulfonate-based polymer. Admix CF GD is a concrete superplasticizer that enables the increase in concrete fluidity over extended period of time without mitigating homogeneity and resistance to segregation.

STORAGE

PROPERTIES

PACKAGING

Up to 2 years when stored in accordance with manufacture’s instructions.

SPECIAL ADVICE

Composition of concrete The composition of the concrete before being plasticized must be established with care. The grain size of aggregates must include a proportion of fine elements, comparable to those of pumped concrete. Composition of concrete The delay during which the plasticized concrete remains fluid is variable according to the temperature, to the original consistency of concrete, to the nature and to the dosage of cement, etc. Admix CF GD allows prolonged fluidity retention, which is proportional to the dosage of the admixture. Previous in-situ trials will allow the determination of the optimal dosage of Admix CF GD.

Admix CF GD acts simultaneously on the following: • Dispersing of fine particles • Cohesion of fresh concrete • Setting of concrete When using dosage lower than those necessary for fluidification, Admix CF GD enables preparation of flowable concrete with attractive surface appearance and high mechanical properties. Concrete made with Admix CF GD can be proportioned with lower cement content per m³.

HEALTH & SAFETY

QUALITY STATEMENT

PACKAGING

Admix CF GD is supplied in: Bulk 200 and 25 lit. drums

SCOPE OF USE

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

Admix CF GD is recommended for all cement types in the following areas: • Ready to use concrete • Heavily reinforced concrete works • Incubated concrete • Paving and industrial floors • Pumped concrete • Fluid concrete for long slump retention.

DISCLAIMER

STORAGE

Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

HEALTH & SAFETY

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity

Brown Liquid 1.091 ± 0.015

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

QUALITY STATEMENT

Applicable standard: ASTM 494 C Type G, D

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

NOTE

Admix CF GD is totally miscible in water. Admix CF GD is introduced into the mixer at the same time as the mixing water, when a constant plasticity is required.

DOSAGE RATES

Edition: 02/08-A

Range of dosing rates: from 0.3 to 1.4 kg/100 kg of cement.

104

105

Admix CF GD

Admix CF JM1

SUPERPLASTICIZER - HIGH SLUMP RETENTION

PRODUCT

for the intended use, and that this Data Sheet version is the latest one. The company may modify it without prior notice. Technical characteristics are listed for guidance only. For more information, please contact the company’s office in your location.

SPECIAL ADVICE

Admix CF JM1 is composed of modified naphthalene and retarding additives. Admix CF JM1 is a concrete superplasticizer that enables the increase in concrete fluidity over extended period of time without mitigating homogeneity and resistance to segregation.

NOTE

Composition of concrete The composition of the concrete before being plasticized must be established with care. The grain size of aggregates must include a proportion of fine elements, comparable to those of pumped concrete. Maintenance of fluidity The delay during which the plasticized concrete remains fluid is variable according to the temperature, to the original consistency of concrete, to the nature and to the dosage of cement, etc. Admix CF JM1 allows prolonged fluidity retention, which is proportionally to the dosage of the admixture. Previous in-situ trials will allow the determination of the optimal dosage of Admix CF JM1.

PROPERTIES

Admix CF JM1 acts simultaneously on the following: • Dispersing of fine particles • Cohesion of fresh concrete • Setting of concrete When using dosage lower than those necessary for fluidification Admix CF JM1 allows the preparation of plastic concrete, with an attractive appearance and an elevated mechanical resistance, and therefore an optimization of the dosage in cement per m³.

tains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit. Edition: 06/09-A **Available only in MENA

PACKAGING

Admix CF JM1 is supplied in: Bulk 200 and 25 lit. drums

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF JM1 is recommended for all cement types, in the following areas: • Ready to use concrete • Heavily reinforced concrete works • Incubated concrete • Paving and industrial floors • Pumped concrete • Fluid concrete for long maintenance of slump Admix CF JM1 is recommended when using silica fume.

STORAGE

Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

HEALTH & SAFETY

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity

Brown Liquid 1.09 ± 0.015

QUALITY STATEMENT

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

Applicable standard: ASTM C 494 Type G.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF JM1 is totally miscible in water. Admix CF JM1 is introduced into the mixer at the same time as the mixing water, when a constant plasticity is required.

DOSAGE RATES

From 0.3 to 1.4 kg / 100 kg of cement.

106

107

Admix CF JM1

Admix eco-plus 600

MID-RANGE WATER REDUCING & RETARDING admixture FOR CONCRETE • Concrete mixtures containing silica fume, GGBS, or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Long distance transport • Hot weather concreting • Highly durable concrete • Mass concrete • Pumped concrete

PRODUCT

the intended use, and that this Data Sheet version is the latest one. The company may modify it without prior notice. Technical characteristics are listed for guidance only. For more information, please contact the company’s office in your location.

Admix eco-plus 600 is a sustainable multi-component admixture which is carefully formulated to enhance the quality and performance characteristics of plastic and hardened concrete. Its unique chemistry results in more complete and efficient hydration of the cementitious materials in the concrete matrix, and provides improved strength, durability, finishability and overall appearance.

NOTE

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific Gravity at 25°C Chloride content

Admix eco-plus 600 supports the sustainability of concrete by extending its range of economic and useful applications. Its sustainable properties at the material production level continuing to make further reductions in their environmental impacts, through plant efficiencies, technology uptake and embracing an environmental awareness culture.

is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit. Edition: 06/10-A **Available only in MENA

STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Types D & G BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

Dispersing the cement particles evenly and efficiently throughout the mix makes the cement hydration process more efficient, increasing the strength gain overall. As a result, with the use of admixtures, a lesser quantity of cement is required to achieve the same strength as for a mix without admixtures.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

PROPERTIES

Range of dosage rates: from 500 to 1500ml per 100 kg of cementituous content. Dosage above the recommended values can be employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials

Admix eco-plus 600 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, preferably after approximately 70% of mixing water addition.

DOSAGE RATES

• Provides increased slump and flowability without increased water content • Improves concrete quality by reducing the watercement ratio for a given degree of workability • Improves workability and consolidation • Improves concrete finishability and surface quality • Provides lubrication and enhances pumpability, including lightweight aggregate mixes • Improves manufactured sand mixes • Improves cement hydration/utilization • Provides uniform, normal set, including GGBF (slag), silica fume and fly ash mixes. • Reduces cracking and shrinkage • Reduces concrete permeability • Improves concrete durability

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of Admix eco-plus 600 may result in the following: • Delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Impair consistency & cohesion • Higher ultimate strength Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

SCOPE OF USE

Admix eco-plus 600 is recommended for all areas of use of concrete in the ready-mix industry: • Super slump retaining concrete with equal or less water content than conventional admixtures

108

Liquid (Dark Brown) 1.14 ± 0.03 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

109

Admix eco-plus 600

Admix eco-plus 620

MID-RANGE WATER REDUCING / RETARDING & PLASTICIZING admixture

COMPATIBILITY

copying (either whole or partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit.

Admix eco-plus 600 is compatible with all types of Portland cement, class C and F fly ash, silica fume, ground granulated blast furnace slag, calcium chloride, fibers and approved air entraining, accelerating, retarding, and high-range water-reducing admixtures. For best results, each admixture must be dispensed separately into the concrete mix.

Edition: 03/11-A

Admix eco-plus 600 is compatible with naphthalene sulfonate and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical dept. for advice.

• Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Long distance transport • Hot weather concreting • Highly durable concrete • Mass concrete • Pumped concrete

PRODUCT

Admix eco-plus 620 is a sustainable multi-component admixture which is carefully formulated to enhance the quality and performance characteristics of plastic and hardened concrete. Its unique chemistry results in more complete and efficient hydration of the cementitious materials in the concrete matrix, and provides improved strength, durability, finishability and overall appearance.

CHARACTERISTICS

Admix eco-plus 620 supports the sustainability of concrete by extending its range of economic and useful applications. Its sustainable properties at the material production level continuing to make further reductions in their environmental impacts, through plant efficiencies, technology uptake and embracing an environmental awareness culture.

PACKAGING

Admix eco-plus 600 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

STORAGE

Admix eco-plus 600 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

Appearance Specific Gravity at 25°C Chloride content

STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Types D & G BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

HEALTH & SAFETY

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix eco-plus 620 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, preferably after approximately 70% of mixing water addition.

DOSAGE RATES

PROPERTIES

Range of dosage rates: from 600 to 1500ml per 100 kg of cementituous content. Dosage above the recommended values can be employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of Admix eco-plus 620 may result in the following: • Delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Impair consistency & cohesion • Higher ultimate strength Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

SCOPE OF USE

Admix eco-plus 620 is recommended for all areas of use of concrete in the ready-mix industry: • Super slump retaining concrete with equal or less water content than conventional admixtures • Concrete mixtures containing silica fume, GGBS, or PFA

NOTE

The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorized disclosure, use dissemination or

110

Liquid (Dark Brown) 1.14 ± 0.03 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

111

Admix eco-plus 620

Admix CF 30 HM

HIGH-PERFORMANCE WATER REDUCING ADMIXTURE

COMPATIBILITY

(either whole or partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit.

Admix eco-plus 620 is compatible with all types of Portland cement, class C and F fly ash, silica fume, ground granulated blast furnace slag, calcium chloride, fibers and approved air entraining, accelerating, retarding, and high-range water-reducing admixtures. For best results, each admixture must be dispensed separately into the concrete mix.

Edition: 03/11-A

Admix eco-plus 620 is compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical dept. for advice.

PRODUCT

In-situ dosage should be determined after a trial for particular preferences taking into account the desired rheological characteristics and mechanical properties of the concrete.

Admix CF 30 HM is formulated from synthetic polymers and designed as a multi-purpose superplasticizer. This special formulation enables Admix CF 30 HM to retain concrete workability for a longer time at low w/c at during hot weather concreting. It can maintain good mixture appearance without segregation or bleeding.

PACKAGING

Admix CF 30 HM is supplied in: Bulk 200 and 25 lit. drums

PROPERTIES

HEALTH & SAFETY

Admix CF 30 HM is recommended when using silica fume, GGBS & fly ash. Important water reductions are obtained while concrete keeps the same workability.

PACKAGING

Admix eco-plus 620 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

SCOPE OF USE

STORAGE

Admix CF 30 HM is used to optimize the dosage of cement and to maintain the workability. It is recommended for use with all types of cements, in the following areas: • Ready-mix concrete • Prestressed concrete • incubated concrete • Paving and industrial floors • Fluid concrete, in particular when there is a desire to maintain fluidity over time • High mechanical strength concrete

Admix eco-plus 620 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

HEALTH & SAFETY

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

Appearance Specific gravity

Brown Liquid 1.155 ± 0.01

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

DISCLAIMER

ASTM C 494 Type G.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

NOTE

Admix CF 30 HM is totally miscible in water. It can be introduced into a mixture at the same time as the mixing water or at the end of the mixing if a fluid concrete is required. In this case, supplementary mixing for at least 2 minutes will be necessary.

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosing rates: from 0.5% to 3%, by weight of binders.

NOTE

The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorized disclosure, use dissemination or copying

112

Edition: 11/09-A **Available only in MENA

113

Admix CF 30 N

SUPERPLASTICIZER FOR EARLY STRENGTH

PACKAGING

PRODUCT

Admix CF 30 N is supplied in: Bulk 200 and 25 lit. drums

Admix CF 30 N is a superplasticizer that enhances the workability of concrete and enables reduction in water demand, hence increasing strength and durability of the mixture.

STORAGE

PROPERTIES

Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

Admix CF 30 N is a synthetic polymer specifically designed for use with hydraulic binders. As a result of its particular chemical structure, flowing concrete is obtained without addition of water. Significant water reduction is without mitigating workability, resulting in reduced permeability and accelerated development in early strength.

HEALTH & SAFETY

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 30 N can be used for all types of cements, in the following areas: • High performance and ultra high performance concrete • Prestressed concrete • Densely-reinforced concrete structures • Paving and industrial floors • Ready mix concrete

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity

Brown Liquid 1.030 ± 0.01

APPLICABLE STANDARDS Applicable standard: ASTM 494 C Type F.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF 30 N is a totally miscible in water Admix CF 30 N can be added to the mixing water. It can also be added into the truck mixers, in which case mixing for at least 2 minutes at high speed is required.

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosing rates: From 0.5 to 4 kg/100 kg of cement

Edition: 06/07-A **Available only in MENA

114

Admix CF 40

SUPERPLASTICIZER FOR EARLY STRENGTH

PRODUCT

PACKAGING

Admix CF 40 is a superplasticizer that can enhance workability of concrete as well as compressive strength by reducing the water demand in the mixture.

Admix CF 40 is supplied in: Bulk 200 and 25 lit. drums

STORAGE

PROPERTIES

Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

Admix CF 40 is a synthetic polymer from the family of poly-naphthalene specifically designed for use with hydraulic binders. As a result of its particular chemical structure, flowing concrete is obtained without addition of water. Important water reductions are obtained while concrete keeps the same workability, resulting in reduced permeability and accelerated early strength development.

HEALTH & SAFETY

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 40 can be used for all types of cement, in the following areas: • High performance and ultra high performance concrete • Prestressed concrete • High reinforced concrete works • Paving and industrial floor • Ready-mix concrete

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity

Brown Liquid 1.155 ± 0.01

APPLICABLE STANDARDS Applicable standard: ASTM 494 C Type F.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF 40 is a totally miscible in water Admix CF 40 can be added to the mixing water. It can also be added into the truck mixers, in which case additional mixing at high speed for at least 2 minutes is required.

NOTE

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosing rates: from 0.5 to 4 kg / 100 kg cement

Edition: 08/10-A **Available only in MENA

115

Admix CF 50 S

HIGH-RANGE SUPERPLASTICIZER FOR FLUID CONCRETE

PRODUCT Admix CF 50 S is a chloride free, high-range, naphthalene -based superplasticizer, specially formulated for high early strength concrete mixture. Admix CF 50 S has a powerful deflocculating and dispersing action with cement which facilitates the production of fluid, self-consolidating concrete without segregation from a no-slump concrete mixture.

No extension to the mixing time is necessary. Do not add to dry cement. Admix CF 50 S can be used at site to fluidify the concrete mixture to the required workability. Make sure that the mixture is agitated at not less than 1 rpm for 2 minutes to attain consistancy before casting. For high early strength of concrete mixture, use with lower w/cm on higher Admix CF 50 S dosage.

PROPERTIES

DOSAGE

Admix CF 50 S produces: • Concrete of similar workability with 20%-25% less water • Increase concrete cohesion • Increase compressive, tensile, and flexural strengths • High early strength development, especially at low W/C ratios

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 50 S for a particular mixture. A dosage of 600 ml to 2100ml per 100 kg of cement is recommended. The required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in situ trials.

SCOPE OF USE

A severe over dose of Admix CF 50 S will result in the following: • Delay of initial and final setting times. • Slight increase in air entrainment • Increase in workability • Increase in early strength • An increase in ultimate strength

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING

Admix CF 50 S is recommended for all cement types of ordinary portland cement and sulfate-resisting cement in the following areas: • Heavily reinforced concrete works • Paving and industrial floor • Ready-mix concrete • All concrete requiring a fluid consistency. • Concrete with low W/C ratios. • Precast concrete • Works well with silica fume and GGBS • Structures with close reinforcement where vibratory efforts are ineffective • Can be used with white cement

COMPATIBILITY

Admix CF 50 S can be used in all types of Portland and sulphate resisting cement. For use with other cement contact Company’s technical service department. Admix CF 50 S should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 50 S, they must be dispensed separately. Consult company’s technical service Dept.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity at 20°C Chloride Content Air entrainment

Brown Liquid 1.190 to 1.200 Zero to BS 5075 Less than 1.0% additional air is entrained

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE Admix CF 50 S, a plasticizing concrete admixture is manufactured to the following specification: Admix CF 50 S can be used in all concrete mixes as mentioned at a dosage between 600 ml to 2100 ml per 100 kg of cement in accordance with the manufacture’s instructions.

APPLICABLE STANDARD ASTM C 494 Type F.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF 50 S

DISPENSING

NOTE

PACKAGING

Edition: 06/08-A

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment. Such equipment can be supplied by our company.

Admix CF 50 S is supplied in: Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for higher volume.

STORAGE Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

Admix CF 50 S is totally miscible in water.

116

117

Admix CF 60 CR

HIGH-RANGE WATER REDUCING / RETARDING / SUPERPLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF 60 CR is totally miscible in water. It is to be added to the concrete mix during the mixing cycle at the same time as the mixing water. No extension to normal mixing time is necessary.

Admix CF 60 CR is formulated from synthetic complex co-polymers and designed as a multi-purpose superplasticizer. This special formulation enables Admix CF 60 CR to retain concrete workability for a longer time at low w/cm and at hot weather conditions. It can maintain good mixture appearance without segregation or bleeding. At intentionally higher dosages, Admix CF 60 CR has the effect of a set retarder.

DOSAGE

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 60 CR for a particular mix. A dosage of 500 to 2250 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials is recommended. Dosage above the recommended values can be practiced up to 2450 ml per 100 kg of cementituous materials. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials.

PROPERTIES

• High workability produced is recommended for congested reinforced structures • Extended setting time allows effective hot • Weather concreting • Allows quicker consolidation • Improves surface appearance • Improves pumpability in conjunction with setting time • Compatible with concrete containing pozzolanic materials

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING

A severe over dose of Admix CF 60 CR will result in the following: • Delay in setting • Increase in air content • Higher workability

SCOPE OF USE

COMPATIBILITY

Admix CF 60 CR is formulated to ensure that plastic concrete remains workable for at least than 2 hours at high temperatures. Ideal for concrete dams, locks, road works, architectonic concrete, light or heavy prefabrication, ready-mix concrete, pumped concrete, and piling

Admix CF 60 CR can be used in all types of portland cement, sulfate-resisting cement, and cementitious materials. Admix CF 60 CR should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 60 CR, they must be dispensed separately. Consult the company Technical Dept. for advice.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20°C Chloride Content Air entrainment

Liquid Brown 1.225 ± 0.005 Zero to BS 5075 Up to 2.0% depending on dosage rate and concrete proportioning

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE Admix CF 60 CR is a high-range water reducing and retarding plasticizing concrete admixture. Admix CF 60 CR can be used in all concrete as mentioned at dosage between 500 ml to 2250 ml per 100 kg of cementitious material in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

DISPENSING

Admix CF 60 CR complies with: ASTM C 494 – Type D& G. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment.

118

Admix CF 60 CR

PACKAGING Admix CF 60 CR is supplied in: Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

119

Admix CF 80

HIGH-RANGE WATER REDUCING / RETARDING / SUPERPLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF 80 is totally miscible in water. It is to be added to the concrete mix during the mixing cycle at the same time as the mixing water. No extension to normal mixing time is necessary.

Admix CF 80 is formulated from synthetic complex co-polymers and designed as a multi-purpose superplasticizer. This special formulation enables Admix CF 80 to retain concrete workability for a longer time at low w/cm and at hot weather conditions. It can maintain good mixture appearance without segregation or bleeding. At intentionally higher dosages, Admix CF 80 has the effect of a set retarder.

DOSAGE

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 80 for a particular mix. A dosage of 500 to 2250 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials is recommended. Dosage above the recommended values can be practiced up to 2450 ml per 100 kg of cementituous materials. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials.

PROPERTIES

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING

A severe over dose of Admix CF 80 will result in the following: • Delay in setting • Increase in air content • Higher workability

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 80 is formulated to ensure that plastic concrete remains workable for at least than 2 hours at high temperatures. Ideal for concrete dams, locks, road works, architectonic concrete, light or heavy prefabrication, ready-mix concrete, pumped concrete, and piling

COMPATIBILITY

Admix CF 80 can be used in all types of portland cement, sulfate-resisting cement, and cementitious materials. Admix CF 80 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 80, they must be dispensed separately. Consult the company Technical Dept. for advice.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20°C Chloride Content Air entrainment

Liquid Brown 1.230 ± 0.01 Zero to BS 5075 Up to 2.0% depending on dosage rate and concrete proportioning

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE Admix CF 80 is a high-range water reducing and retarding plasticizing concrete admixture. Admix CF 80 can be used in all concrete as mentioned at dosage between 500 ml to 2250 ml per 100 kg of cementitious material in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS Admix CF 80 complies with: ASTM C 494 – Type D& G. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

DISPENSING It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment.

120

Admix CF 80

PACKAGING Admix CF 80 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

121

Admix CF 85

HIGH RANGE/WATER REDUCING/SUPERPLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF 85 is totally miscible in water. It is to be added to the concrete mix during the mixing cycle at the same time as the mixing water. No extension to normal mixing time is necessary. Do not add to dry cement.

Admix CF 85 is a superplasticiser based on synthetic polymers, that has a strong dispersing power over the fine particles of concrete and thus allows a higher mechanical resistance with high early strength of the hardened concrete. Admix CF 85 does not delay the setting of concrete and is capable for higher water reduction in concrete mix. Admix CF 85 works on a very low water/cementitous ratio with the presence of supplementary materials such as GGBS and Silica Fume.

DOSAGE

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 85 for a particular mix. A dosage of 800ml to 2250ml per 100kg of cementitous materials is recommended. This may be changed to higher dosage in high ambient and mix temperature conditions.

PROPERTIES

• Increase concrete cohesion • Increase compressive, tensile and flexural strengths. • Produces flowable concrete • Can be used to gain economies due to a possible cement reduction.

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING

A severe over dose of Admix CF 85 will result in the following: • Delay of the initial and final setting of the concrete mix. • Very Slight increase in air entrainment. • Increase in workability.

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 85 is recommended for all cement types in the following areas: • Heavily reinforced concrete works. • Paving and industrial floor. • Ready mixed concrete. • Concrete with low W/CM Ratio. • Precast concrete. • Hollow core precast concrete elements. • Improvement of concrete workability on site. • Reduction in cement content

COMPATIBILITY

Admix CF 85 can be used in all types of Portland and sulfate resisting cement including supplementary cementitous materials. Admix CF 85 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 85 they must be dispensed separately. Consult the company Technical Dept. for advice.

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20°C Chloride Content Air entrainment

Admix CF 85, is a high range water reducing concrete admixture. Admix CF 85 can be used in all concrete mixes as mentioned, at dosage between 800ml and 2250 ml per 100kg of cementitous materials in accordance with the manufacture’s instructions.

Liquid Brownish 1.20 - 0.005 Zero to BS 5075 Up to 2.0% less than 1% additional air is entrained.

DISPENSING It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS Admix CF 85 complies with: ASTM C 494 – Type G. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

122

Admix CF 85

PACKAGING Admix CF 85 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

123

Admix CF 88 R

HIGH-RANGE WATER REDUCING/ RETARDING / SUPERPLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT added to the concrete during the mixing cycle at the same time as the mixing water. No extension to normal mixing time is necessary.

Admix CF 88 R is designed as a multi-purpose superplasticizer. It can be used for moderate to low w/c concrete. This special formulation enables Admix CF 88 R to retain concrete workability for a longer time. It can maintain good mix appearance without segregation or bleeding. At intentionally higher dosages, Admix CF 88 R has the effect of a setting retarder.

DOSAGE

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 88 R for a particular mixture. A dosage of 300 to 1300 ml per 100 kg of cement is recommended. The required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in situ trials.

PROPERTIES

• High workability produced is recommended for congested reinforced structures • Extended setting times allow effective hot • weather concreting • Allows quicker consolidation • Improves surface appearance • No segregation at higher dosages • Improves pumpability • Can be used to gain economy due to possible cement reduction

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING

A severe over dose of Admix CF 88 R will result in the following: • Delay in setting • Slight increase in air content • Higher workability • Higher ultimate strength In case of over dosage, precautions should be taken not to disturb the surface area. With proper curing, the ultimate strength of the structure should not be adversely affected.

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 88 R is used to ensure that plastic concrete remains workable for more than 1 hour at high temperature. Ideal for construction of dams, locks, road works, architectonic concrete, light or heavy prefabrication, ready-mix concrete, and pumped concrete.

COMPATIBILITY

Admix CF 88 R can be used in all types of portland cement and sulfate resisting cement. For use with other cements contact the company’s technical service department. Admix CF 88 R should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 88 R, they must be dispensed separately. Consult the company Technical Dept. for advice.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20°C Chloride Content Air entrainment

Liquid Brown 1.125 ± 0.015 Zero to BS 5075 Up to 1% depending on dosage and mixture proportioning

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE Admix CF 88 R, a retarding, plasticizing concrete admixture is manufactured to the following specification: Admix CF 88 R can be used in all concrete as mentioned at dosage between 300 ml to 1300ml per 100kg of cement in accordance with the manufacture’s instructions. Specific Gravity at 20°C: 1.125 ± 0.015 Complying to ASTM C 494 Types D & G.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS Admix CF 88 R complies with: ASTM C 494 – Type D & G. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF 88 R is totally miscible in water. It is to be

124

Admix CF 88 R

Composition: High molecular weight refined naphthalene derivatives and other refined chemicals.

only. For more information, please contact the company’s office in your location.

DISPENSING It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment. Such equipment can be supplied by the company.

Edition: 08/10-A

PACKAGING Admix CF 88 R is supplied in: Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

125

Admix CF 90 N

HIGH-RANGE WATER REDUCING / RETARDING / SUPERPLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

cycle at the same time as the mixing water. No extension to normal mixing time is necessary.

Admix CF 90 N is a high-range water reducing/ superplasticizer ideal for hot weather conditions. Due to the capabilities of its special chemical nature, CF 90 N can provide high fluidity with remarkable workability retention. This special formulation enables Admix CF 90 N to retain concrete workability for a longer time at low w/cm at hot weather conditions. It can maintain good mixture appearance without segregation or bleeding. At higher dosages, Admix CF 90 N has the effect of a set retarder.

DOSAGE

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 90 N for a particular mixture. A dosage of 400 to 2000 ml per 100 kg of cementitious material is recommended. Dosage above the recommended values can be practiced up to 2450 ml per 100 kg of cementituous materials. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials.

PROPERTIES

Admix CF 90 N is designed for the production of plastic concrete in the following areas. • Ready-mix concrete • Heavily reinforced concrete works • Incubated concrete • Paving and industrial floors • Highly flowable concrete • Pumped concrete • Casting in hot climate

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING

A severe over dose of Admix CF 90 N will result in the following: • Delay in setting • Increase in air content • Higher workability

COMPATIBILITY

Admix CF 90 N can be used in all types of Portland cement, sulfate resisting cement and cementitious materials. Admix CF 90 N should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 90 N, they must be dispensed separately. Consult the company Technical Dept. for advice.

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 90 N is to ensure that rheoplastic concrete remains workable for more than 2 hours at high temperatures. Ideal for Dams, locks, road works, architectonic concrete, light or heavy prefabrication, ready-mixed, pumped concrete and piling.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20°C Chloride Content Air entrainment

Liquid Brown 1.220 ± 0.01 Zero to BS 5075 Up to 2.0% depending on dosage and concrete proportioning

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE Admix CF 90 N is a high-range water reducing and retarding plasticizing concrete admixture. Admix CF 90 N can be used in all concrete as mentioned at dosage between 400 to 2000 ml per 100 kg of cementitious material in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

DISPENSING

Admix CF 90 N complies with: ASTM C 494 – Type D& G. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF 90 N

PACKAGING

Admix CF 90 N is supplied in: Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE

Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

Admix CF 90 N is totally miscible in water. It is to be added to the concrete mixture during the mixing

126

127

Admix CF 92

HIGH-RANGE SUPERPLASTICIZER FOR FLUID CONCRETE

PRODUCT

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF 92 is totally miscible in water. It is to be added to the concrete mix during the mixing cycle at the same time as the mixing water. No extension to normal mixing time is necessary.

Admix CF 92 is a chloride-free, high-range naphthalene-based superplasticizer, specially formulated for high strength concrete. Admix CF 92 secures a powerful deflocculating and dispersing action of cement, which facilitates the production of fluid, self-consolidating concrete without segregation

DOSAGE

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 92 for a particular mix. A dosage of 600 to 2500 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials is recommended. The required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials.

PROPERTIES

• Admix CF 92 produces concrete of similar workability with 20%-25% less water • Increase concrete cohesion • Increase compressive, tensile, and flexural strengths • Produces flowable and self-consolidating concrete • High strength, especially at low W/C, can significantly increase mould utilization in precast works

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING A severe over dose of Admix CF 92 will result in the following: • Delay in setting • Increase in air content • Higher workability

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 92 is recommended for all cement types of types of portland cement and sulfate resisting cement in the following areas: • Heavily reinforced concrete works • Paving and industrial floor • Ready mixed concrete • All concrete requiring a fluid consistency • Concrete with low W/C • Precast concrete • Works well with silica fume and slag cement • Structures with close reinforcement where vibratory efforts are ineffective • Can be used with white cement

COMPATIBILITY

Admix CF 92 can be used in all types of portland cements, sulfate resisting cement, and cementitious materials. Admix CF 92 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 92, they must be dispensed separately. Consult the company Technical Dept. for advice.

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE Admix CF 92 is a high-range water reducing and retarding plasticizing concrete admixture. Admix CF 92 can be used in all concrete as mentioned at dosage between 600 to 2500 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20°C Chloride Content Air entrainment

Liquid Brown 1.200 ± 0.01 Zero to BS 5075 Up to 2.0% depending on dosage and concrete proportioning

APPLICABLE STANDARDS Admix CF 92 complies with: ASTM C 494 – Type D& G. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

128

Admix CF 92

PACKAGING

Admix CF 92 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE

Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

DISPENSING

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment.

Edition:08/10-A *Available only in Qatar

129

Admix CF 96 R

HIGH-RANGE SUPERPLASTICIZER FOR FLUID CONCRETE

PRODUCT

PACKAGING

Admix CF 96 R is a superplasticizer that confers more workability to concrete with less water in the mixture, and a higher mechanical properties and durability.

Admix CF 96 R is supplied in: Bulk 200 and 25 lit. drums

PROPERTIES

STORAGE

Admix CF 96 R is formulated from synthesized polymer and special resins. Its dispersing action on the finer elements of concrete is particularly high. Admix CF 96 R is recommended when using silica fume. Significant water reductions are obtained, while concrete keeps the same workability.

Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 96 R is used to optimize the dosage of cement and maintain workability. It is recommended for all types of cements, in the following areas: • Ready-mixed concrete • Pre-stressed concrete • Paving and industrial floors • Fluid concrete, in particular when there is a desire to maintain fluidity over time • High-strength concrete

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

Dark Brown Liquid

Specific gravity

1.135 ± 0.01

DISCLAIMER

APPLICABLE STANDARDS ASTM C 494 Type G.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF 96 R is totally miscible in water. It can be introduced into a mixture at the same time as the mixing water or at the end of the mixing if a fluid concrete is required. In this case, it is recommended to provide supplementary mixing for at least 2 minutes.

DOSAGE RATES

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 96 R for a particular mixture. A dosage of 0.5% to 2.6 % per 100 kg of cementitious material is recommended. Preliminary tests should be carried out for dosages higher than 2.6 %.

Edition: 08/10-A **Available only in MENA

130

Admix CF 100

HIGH-RANGE / WATER REDUCING / SUPERPLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Admix CF 100 is a superplasticizer based on synthetic polymers, that has a strong dispersing power over the fine particles of concrete and thus allows a higher mechanical resistance. Admix CF 100 does not delay the setting of concrete and is capable for higher water reduction in concrete. Admix CF 100 works on very low water/cement mixtures. Admix CF 100 can be used on site to boost up the workability of the concrete mixture to any extend without danger of delay in setting.

Admix CF 100 complies with: ASTM C – 494 – Type F. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF 100 is totally miscible in water. No extension to the batching time is necessary. Do not add to dry cement. Admix CF 100 can be used on site to produce fluid concrete to a required workability. Make sure that the concrete is agitated for not less than 2 minutes at 15 - 20 rpm before casting. For high early strength of concrete, use a lower w/c and a higher Admix CF 100 dosage.

PROPERTIES

• Increase concrete cohesion • Increase compressive, tensile, and flexural strengths • Produces high early strengths and can significantly increase mould utilization in precast works • Can be used to gain economies due to possible cement reduction

DOSAGE

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 100 for a particular mix. A dosage of 800 to 2500 ml per 100 kg of cement is recommended. This may be changed to higher dosage in high ambient and mixture temperature conditions.

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 100 is recommended for all cement types in the following areas: • Heavily reinforced concrete works • Paving and industrial floor • Ready-mix concrete • All concrete requiring fluid consistency • Concrete with low W/C • Precast concrete • Cement based injection grout • Works well with silica fume and slag • Hollow core precast concrete elements • Addition for workability at site • Reduction in cement content

EFFECT OF OVER DOSING

Admix CF 100 can be used at high dosages without retardation. Severe over dose of Admix CF 100 will result in the following: • Slight delay of the initial and final setting of the concrete mixture • Slight increase in air entrainment • Increased workability No severe side effects are known with the history of use of Admix CF 100

COMPATIBILITY

Admix CF 100 can be used in all types of portland and sulfate-resisting cements. For use with other cement types, contact Company’s technical service department. Admix CF 100 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 100 they must be dispensed separately. Consult Company’s Technical Dept. for advice.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20°C Chloride Content Air entrainment

Liquid Brownish 1.210 ± 0.02 Zero to BS 5075 Up to 1% depending on dosage and concrete

proportioning

131

Admix CF 100

Admix CF 100 P

HIGH-RANGE / WATER REDUCING / SUPERPLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE FOR PRECAST CONCRETE

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE

verify with the company that the product is suitable for the intended use, and that this Data Sheet version is the latest one. The company may modify it without prior notice. Technical characteristics are listed for guidance only. For more information, please contact the company’s office in your location.

Admix CF 100, a superplasticizing concrete admixture manufactured to the following specification: Admix CF 100 can be used in all concrete mixtures at dosage rate of 800 to 2500 ml per 100 kg of cement in accordance with the manufacture’s instructions.

NOTE

DISPENSING

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment. Such equipment can be supplied by our company

Edition: 07/11-A

PACKAGING Admix CF 100 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

PRODUCT

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Admix CF 100 P is a superplasticizer based on synthetic polymers, that has a strong dispersing power over the fine particles of concrete, hence allowing higher mechanical properties and high early compressive strength. Admix CF 100 P does not delay the setting time of the concrete and is capable to achieve higher water reduction in concrete. Admix CF 100 P works even in concrete with very low water/cementitious materials ratio containing supplementary cementitious materials, such as GGBS and silica fume. Admix CF 100 P can be used on site (re-tempering) to boost up the workability of the concrete mixture to any extend fluidity without danger of delay in setting.

Admix CF 100 P complies with: ASTM C – 494 – Type F. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF 100 P is totally miscible in water. No extension to the batching time is necessary. Do not add to dry cement. Admix CF 100 P can be used on site to produce fluid concrete to a required workability. Make sure that the concrete is agitated for not less than 2 minutes at 15- 20 rpm before casting. For high early strength of concrete, use a lower W/C and higher Admix CF 100 P dosage.

DOSAGE

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 100 P for a particular mixture. A dosage of 800 to 2250 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials is recommended. This may be changed to higher dosage in high ambient and mixture temperature conditions.

PROPERTIES

STORAGE Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

EFFECT OF OVER DOSING

Admix CF 100 P can be used at high dosage rates without any retardation. A severe over dosage of Admix CF 100 P will result in the following: • Very slight delay of the initial and final setting times of the concrete mixture. • Very Slight increase in air entrainment. • Increase in workability. No more severe side effects are known with the history of Admix CF 100 P.

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 100 P is recommended for all cement types in the following areas: • Heavily reinforced concrete works • Paving and industrial floors • Ready-mix concrete • Concrete with low W/CM • Precast concrete • Hollow core precast concrete elements • Improvement of concrete workability on site • Reduction in cement content

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

COMPATIBILITY Admix CF 100 P can be used in all types of portland and sulfate-resisting cements, including those containing supplementary cementitious materials. For use with other cements, contact the company’s technical service department. Admix CF 100 P should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 100 P they must be dispensed separately. Consult the company’s technical dept. for advice.

CHARACTERISTICS

DISCLAIMER

Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20°C Chloride Content Air entrainment

132

Liquid Brownish 1.225 ± 1.230 Zero to BS 5075 Up to 1% additional air is entrained.

133

Admix CF 100 P

Admix CF 101

SUPERPLASTICIZER - HIGH SLUMP RETENTION

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE

Admix CF 100 P, a superplasticizing concrete admixture manufactured to the following specification: Admix CF 100 P can be used in all concrete mixtures as mentioned, at dosage rate between 800 and 2250 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials in accordance with the manufacture’s instructions.

DISPENSING It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment. Such equipment can be supplied by the company

Edition: 06/07-A *Available only in UAE

PACKAGING Admix CF 100 P is supplied in: Bulk, barrels Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

PRODUCT

The composition of the concrete before being plasticized must be established with care. The grain-size distribution of the aggregate must include a proportion of fine elements, comparable to those of pumped concrete.

Admix CF 101 is a concrete superplasticizer based on selected polymers that allow concrete to be fluid, homogeneous, and segregation free with extended slump retention over time.

Maintenance of fluidity The delay during which the plasticized concrete remains fluid is variable according to the temperature, to the original consistency of concrete, to the nature and to the dosage of cement, etc. Admix CF 101 allows a prolonged maintenance of fluidity, proportionally to its dosage. In-situ trial will allow the determination of the optimal dosage of Admix CF 101.

PROPERTIES

Admix CF 101 acts simultaneously on the following: • Dispersing of fine particles • Cohesion of fresh concrete • Setting of concrete When using a dosage lower than that necessary for fluidification, Admix CF 101 allows the preparation of plastic concrete, with an attractive appearance and high mechanical properties, and therefore optimum dosage of cement per m³.

PACKAGING

Admix CF 101 is supplied in: Bulk 200 and 25 lit. drums

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 101 is recommended for all cement types, in the following areas: • Ready to use concrete • Heavily reinforced concrete works • Incubated concrete • Paving and industrial floors • Pumped concrete • Fluid concrete for long maintenance of slump Admix CF 101 is recommended when using silica fume.

STORAGE Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

Brown Liquid

Specific gravity

1.146 ± 0.015

QUALITY STATEMENT

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

ASTM C 494 Type G.

QUALITY STATEMENT

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

Admix CF 101 is totally miscible in water. Admix CF 101 is introduced into the mixer at the same time as the mixing water, when a constant plasticity is required.

DISCLAIMER

DOSAGE

From 0.3 to 1.4 kg / 100 kg of cement.

SPECIAL ADVICE

Composition of concrete

134

135

Admix CF 101

Admix CF 102

latest one. The company may modify it without prior notice. Technical characteristics are listed for guidance only. For more information, please contact the company’s office in your location.

PRODUCT

DOSAGE

Admix CF 102 is a superplasticizer that confers more workability to fresh concrete with less water in the mixture, and higher compressive strength to hardened concrete.

Range of dosing rates: from 0.5% to 2%, by mass of cement. The In-situ dosage should be determined after a trial for particular preferences taking into account the desired rheological characteristics and mechanical properties of the concrete.

HIGH-RANGE WATER REDUCING AND RETARDING ADMIXTURE

PROPERTIES Admix CF 102 is formulated from synthesized polymer and special resins. Its dispersing action on the finer elements of concrete is particularly high. Admix CF 102 is recommended when using silica fume. Important water reductions are obtained while concrete keeps the same workability.

Edition: 04/08-A **Available only in MENA

PACKAGING Admix CF 102 is supplied in: Bulk 200 and 25 lit. drums

STORAGE Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

SCOPE OF USE Admix CF 102 is used to optimize the dosage of cement and to maintain the workability. It is recommended for use with all types of cements, in the following areas: • Ready-mix concrete • Prestressed concrete • incubated concrete • Paving and industrial floors • Fluid concrete, in particular when there is a desire to maintain fluidity over time • High mechanical strength concrete

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

Brown Liquid

Specific gravity

1.138 ± 0.01

DISCLAIMER

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Type G.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Admix CF 102 is totally miscible in water. It can be introduced into a mixture at the same time as the mixing water or at the end of the mixing if a fluid concrete is required. In this case, supplementary mixing for at least 2 minutes will be necessary.

136

137

Admix CF 102

Admix CF 104

NOTE

PRODUCT

Admix CF 104 is a superplasticizer that enhances the workability of concrete and enables the reduction in water demand in the mixture, hence leading to higher compressive strength and durability.

Edition: 04/08-A **Available only in MENA

Admix CF 104 is formulated from synthesized polymer and special resins. Its dispersing action on the finer elements of concrete is particularly high. Admix CF 104 is recommended when using silica fume. Important water reductions are obtained while concrete keeps the same workability.

HIGH-RANGE WATER REDUCING AND RETARDING ADMIXTURE DOSAGE Range of dosing rates: from 0.5% to 2%, by mass of cement. The In-situ dosage should be determined after a trial for particular preferences taking into account the rheological characteristics and mechanical properties of the concrete.

PROPERTIES

PACKAGING Admix CF 104 is supplied in: Bulk 200 and 25 lit. drums

STORAGE Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

SCOPE OF USE

HEALTH & SAFETY

Admix CF 102 is used to optimize the dosage of cement and to maintain the workability. It is recommended for use with all types of cements, in the following areas: • Ready-mix concrete • Prestressed concrete • incubated concrete • Paving and industrial floors • Fluid concrete, in particular when there is a desire to maintain fluidity over time • High mechanical strength concrete

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

Brown Liquid

Specific gravity

1.096 ± 0.01

DISCLAIMER While the company guarantees its products against defective materials, the use and application of these products are made without guarantee since the conditions of their application are beyond its control. It is recommended to verify with the company that the product is suitable for the intended use, and that this Data Sheet version is the latest one. The company may modify it without prior notice. Technical characteristics are listed for guidance only. For more information, please contact the company’s office in your location.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS ASTM C 494 Type G.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Admix CF 104 is totally miscible in water. It can be introduced into a mixture at the same time as the mixing water or at the end of the mixing if a fluid concrete is required. In this case, supplementary mixing for at least 2 minutes will be necessary.

138

139

Admix CF 104

Admix CF 105

NOTE

PRODUCT

SUPERPLASTICIZER (FOR LOW W/C CONCRETE)

Plasticity improvement

Admix CF 105 is a superplasticizer based on selected polymers specifically designed for use with hydraulic binders. Its particular chemical structure is remarkably efficient: It has a strong dispersing action with the finer elements of concrete. This translates into an improvement of the workability of concrete. Admix CF 105 is a catalyst of the hydration reactions of cement. It allows reaching higher mechanical properties. The use of Admix CF 105 has no effect on the setting time of the concrete.

Edition: 06/07-A **Available only in MENA

SLUMP CONTROL

70 mm

Admix CF 105 1 lit/100kg cement

180 mm

SLUMP GAIN

DD H= 140 mm

APPLICABLE STANDARDS ASTM C 494 Type F.

SCOPE OF USE

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF 105 is recommended for all types of cement, in the following areas: • Heavily reinforced concrete works • Paving and industrial floor • Ready-mix concrete • All concrete requiring fluid consistency • Concrete with low W/C.

Admix CF 105 is totally miscible in water. Admix CF 105 can be added to the concrete just before the pouring. Mix together no less than 2 minutes before casting. The maximum efficiency of Admix CF 105 will be determined after trial batches.

DOSAGE RATES

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

Brown Liquid

Specific gravity

1.15 ± 0.03

Range of dosing rates From 0.6 to 2.4 kg / 100 kg cement

SPECIAL ADVICE

PERFORMANCE

Maintenance of fluidity The time during which the concrete remains fluid is variable according to the ambient temperature, consistency of the concrete mixture, and nature and content of the cement . In-situ trial will help determine this duration.

Mechanical resistance (Temperature = + 20°C)

24 Hrs

7 Days

28 Days

CONTROL

9 MPa

30 MPa

45 MPa

Admix CF 105 1 lit/100kg cement 10 MPa

36MPa

52MPa

PACKAGING

Admix CF 105 is supplied in: Bulk 200 and 25 lit. drums

STORAGE Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

HEALTH & SAFETY In case of frost, the product recovers its properties

140

141

Admix CF 105

Admix CF 106

after progressive thawing and homogenizing by agitation. In case of contact with skin or eyes, rinse thoroughly with water. If irritation persists, seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention.

PRODUCT

SUPERPLASTICIZER - HIGH-RANGE WATER REDUCER

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: From 0.4 to 3 kg / 100 kg cement The maximum efficiency of Admix CF 106 will be determined after trial batches.

Admix CF 106 is a liquid admixture based on synthetic polymer specifically designed for use with hydraulic binders. Admix CF 106 produces high workability concrete requiring little or no vibration during placement. Admix CF 106 provides up to 25% reduction in free water without loss in workability, resulting in high quality concrete of reduced permeability with increased early strength gain.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

PACKAGING

Admix CF 106 is supplied in : Bulk 200 and 25 lit. drums

STORAGE

SCOPE OF USE

DISCLAIMER

Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

Admix CF 106 is recommended for all cement types, in the following areas: • Heavily reinforced concrete works • Paving and industrial floor • Ready-mix concrete • Precast concrete elements • Concrete at low temperatures • All concrete requiring a fluid consistency • Concrete with low W/C

NOTE

ADVANTAGES

• As a superplasticizer for making easier placement • As a normal water-reducing admixture, high mechanical strength can be achieved at all ages • Cement content optimized for desired mechanical properties. • No segregation • High strength hardening accelerator • Safe with prestressed concrete

Edition: 06/11-A **Available only in MENA

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

Brownish Liquid

Specific gravity

1.040 ± 0.005

APPLICABLE STANDARDS ASTM C 494 Type A, F.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

NOTE

Admix CF 106 is totally miscible in water. It can be added to the concrete just before casting. Mix together for at least 2 minutes before concrete casting.

142

The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorized

143

Admix CF 106

Admix CF 110

disclosure, use, dissemination or copying (either whole or partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit.

PRODUCT

HIGH PERFORMANCE WATER REDUCING ADMIXTURE

PACKAGING

Admix CF 110 is a liquid admixture based on naphthalene polymer associated with chemical synthesis products. Admix CF 110 produces high workability concrete requiring little or no vibration during placement. Admix CF 110 provides up to 25% reduction in free water without loss of workability, resulting in high-quality concrete of reduced permeability and increased early strength gain.

Edition: 06/07-A **Available only in MENA

Admix CF 100 is supplied in: Bulk 200 and 25 lit. drums

STORAGE Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

SCOPE OF USE

HEALTH & SAFETY

Admix CF 110 is recommended for all cement types, in the following areas: • Heavily reinforced concrete works • Paving and industrial floor • Ready-mix concrete • Precast concrete elements • Concrete placement at low temperatures • All concrete requiring fluid consistency • Concrete with low W/C

QUALITY STATEMENT

ADVANTAGES

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

• As a superplasticizer for facilitating concrete placement • As a normal water-reducing admixture to enhance mechanical properties at all ages • Cement content optimized for desired mechanical strength • No segregation • High strength hardening accelerator • Safe with prestressed concrete

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

Brownish Liquid

Specific gravity

1.185 ± 0.015

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

NOTE

ASTM C 494 Type A, F

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF 110 is totally miscible in water. It can be added to the concrete just before casting. Mix with concrete for at least 2 minutes before casting.

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: From 0.4 to 3 kg / 100 kg of cement. The maximum efficiency of Admix CF 110 will be determined after trial batches.

144

Edition: 06/07-A **Available only in MENA

145

Admix CF 111

HIGH-RANGE WATER REDUCING / RETARDING / SUPERPLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

DOSAGE RATES

Admix CF 111 is formulated from synthetic polymers and designed as a multi-purpose superplasticizer. This special formulation enables Admix CF 111 to retain concrete workability for a longer time at low w/c at hot weather concreting. It can maintain good mix appearance without segregation or bleeding. At intentionally higher dosages, Admix CF 111 has the effect of a setting retarder.

Trial batches should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 111 for a particular mixture. A dosage of 800 to 1850 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials is recommended. Dosage above the recommended values can be practiced up to 2000 ml per 100 kg of cementituous materials. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in situ trials.

PROPERTIES

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING

• High resulting workability is recommended for congested reinforcement structures • Extended setting time allows effective hot • Weather concreting • Allows quicker concrete consolidation • Improves surface appearance • Improves pumpability in conjunction with setting time • Concrete containing pozzolanic materials

A severe over dose of Admix CF 111 will result in the following: • Delay in setting • Increase in air content • Higher workability

COMPATIBILITY

Admix CF 111 can be used in all types of portland cements, sulfate-resisting cement, and cement concrete cementitious materials. Admix CF 111 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 111, they must be dispensed separately. Consult the company’s Technical Dept. for advice.

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 111 to ensure that rheoplastic concrete remains workable for more than 1 hour at high temperature. Ideal for construction of dams, locks, road works, architectonic concrete, light or heavy prefabrication, ready-mixed concrete, and pumped concrete.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

Liquid

Color

Brown

Specific gravity @ 20˚C

1.16 ± 0.02

Chloride content

Zero to BS 5075

Air entrainment

Up to 1.5% depending on dosage rate and

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE

Admix CF 111 a high-range water reducing and retarding plasticizing concrete admixture manufactured to the following specification: Admix CF 111 can be used in all concrete as mentioned at dosage between 800 to 1,850 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials in accordance with the manufacture’s instructions.

mixture proportioning

Specific Gravity at 20ºC: 1.160 - 1.180 Complying with ASTM C 494 types D & G. Composition: High molecular weight refined synthetic polymers derivatives and other refined chemicals.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS Admix CF 111 complies with: ASTM C 494 – Type D & G. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

DISPENSING

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment. Such equipment can be supplied by the company.

Admix CF111 is totally miscible in water. It is to be added to the concrete mixture during the mixing cycle at the same time as the mixing water. No extension to normal mixing time is necessary.

146

Admix CF 111

PACKAGING Admix CF 111 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

147

Admix CF 113

HIGH-RANGE WATER REDUCING / RETARDING / SUPERPLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

A dosage of 500 to 3000 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials is recommended. Dosage above the recommended values can be practiced up to 2500 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials.

Admix CF 113 is formulated from synthetic complex co-polymers and designed as a multi-purpose superplasticizer. This special formulation enables Admix CF 113 to retain concrete workability for a longer time at low w/c at hot weather conditions. It can maintain good mixture appearance without segregation or bleeding. At intentionally higher dosages, Admix CF 113 has the effect of a set retarder.

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING

PROPERTIES

• The High workability produced is recommended for congested reinforced structures • Extended setting time allows effective hot Weather concreting • Allows quicker consolidation • Improves surface appearance • Improves pumpability • Compatible with concrete containing fly ash, silica fume and GGBS

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 113 is formulated to ensure fluidity concrete remains workable for more than 2 hours at high temperature. Ideal for concrete dams, locks, road works, architectonic concrete, light or heavy prefabrication, ready-mix concrete, pumped concrete and piling.

Liquid Brown 1.155 ± 0.005

Chloride content

Zero to BS 5075

COMPATIBILITY

Admix CF 113 can be used in all types of portland cement, sulfate-resisting cement, and cementitious materials. Admix CF 113 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 113, they must be dispensed separately. Consult the company’s technical dept. for advice.

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE

Admix CF 113 a high-range water reducing and retarding plasticizing concrete admixture. Admix CF 113 can be used in all concrete as mentioned at dosage between 500 to 2300 ml per 100 kg of cementitious material in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20˚C

A severe over dose of Admix CF 113 will result in the following: • Delay in setting • Increase in air content • Higher workability

Admix CF 113 complies with: ASTM C 494 – Type D & G. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

Specific Gravity at 20ºC: 1.155 ± 0.005 Complying with ASTM C 494 Types D & G. Composition: High molecular weight refined synthetic complex co-polymers derivatives and other refined chemicals.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

DISPENSING

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Admix CF 113 is totally miscible in water. It is to be added to the concrete mix during the mixing cycle at the same time as the mixing water. No extension to normal mixing time is necessary.

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment.

DOSAGE RATES

Admix CF 113 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

Admix CF 113

STORAGE Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

PACKAGING

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 113 for a particular mixture.

148

149

Admix CF 115

HIGH-RANGE / WATER REDUCING / SUPERPLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF 115 is a superplasticizer based on synthetic polymers, that has a strong dispersing power over the fine particles of concrete and thus allows a higher mechanical resistance. Admix CF 115 does not delay the setting of concrete and is capable for higher water reduction in concrete. Admix CF 115 works on very low water/ cement mixtures. Admix CF 115 can be used on site to boost up the workability of the concrete mixture to any extend without danger of delay in setting.

Admix CF 115 is totally miscible in water. No extension to the batching time is necessary. Do not add to dry cement. Admix CF 115 can be used on site to produce fluid concrete to a required workability. Make sure that the concrete is agitated for not less than 2 minutes at 15 - 20 rpm before casting. For high early strength of concrete, use a lower w/c and a higher Admix CF 115 dosage.

DOSAGE

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 115 for a particular mix. A dosage of 800 to 2500 ml per 100 kg of cement is recommended. This may be changed to higher dosage in high ambient and mixture temperature conditions.

PROPERTIES

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING Admix CF 115 can be used at high dosages without retardation. Severe over dose of Admix CF 115 will result in the following: • Slight delay of the initial and final setting of the concrete mixture • Slight increase in air entrainment • Increased workability No severe side effects are known with the history of use of Admix CF 115

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 115 is recommended for all cement types in the following areas: • Heavily reinforced concrete works • Paving and industrial floor • Ready-mix concrete • All concrete requiring fluid consistency • Concrete with low W/C • Precast concrete • Cement based injection grout • Works well with silica fume and slag • Hollow core precast concrete elements • Addition for workability at site • Reduction in cement content

COMPATIBILITY Admix CF 115 can be used in all types of portland and sulfate-resisting cements. For use with other cement types, contact Company’s technical service department. Admix CF 115 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 115 they must be dispensed separately. Consult Company’s Technical Dept. for advice.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20˚C Chloride content Air entrainment

Liquid Brownish 1.205 ± 0.015 Zero to BS 5075 Less than 1% additional

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE

air is entrained.

Admix CF 115, a superplasticizing concrete admixture manufactured to the following specification: Admix CF 115 can be used in all concrete mixtures at dosage rate of 800 to 2500 ml per 100 kg of cement

APPLICABLE STANDARDS Admix CF 115 complies with: ASTM C – 494 – Type F. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

150

Admix CF 115

disclosure, use, dissemination or copying (either whole or partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit.

in accordance with the manufacture’s instructions.

DISPENSING It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment. Such equipment can be supplied by our company.

Edition: 10/10-A

PACKAGING Admix CF 115 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE Admix CF 115 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorized

151

Admix CF 116

HIGH-RANGE / WATER REDUCING / SUPERPLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

Admix CF 116 is formulated from synthetic complex co-polymers and designed as a multi-purpose superplasticizer. This special formulation enables Admix CF 116 to retain concrete workability for a longer time at low w/c at hot weather conditions. It can maintain good mixture appearance without segregation or bleeding. At intentionally higher dosages, Admix CF 116 has the effect of a set retarder.

DISPENSING

DOSAGE

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment.

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING A severe over dose of Admix CF 116 will result in the following: • Delay in setting • Increase in air content • Higher workability

COMPATIBILITY

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 116 can be used in all types of portland cement, sulfate-resisting cement, and cementitious materials. Admix CF 116 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 116, they must be dispensed separately. Consult the company’s technical dept. for advice.

Admix CF 116 is formulated to ensure fluidity concrete remains workable for more than 2 hours at high temperature. Ideal for concrete dams, locks, road works, architectonic concrete, light or heavy prefabrication, ready-mix concrete, pumped concrete and piling.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20˚C Chloride content Air entrainment

to normal mixing time is necessary.

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 116 for a particular mixture. A dosage of 500 to 2300 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials is recommended. Dosage above the recommended values can be practiced up to 2450 ml per 100 kg of cementituous materials. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials.

PROPERTIES

Liquid Brownish 1.191 - 1.211 Zero to BS 5075 Up to 1.5% depending on dosage rate and

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE Admix CF 116 a high-range water reducing and retarding plasticizing concrete admixture. Admix CF 116 can be used in all concrete as mentioned at dosage between 500 to 2300 ml per 100 kg of cementitious material in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

concrete proportioning

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Specific Gravity at 20ºC: 1.191 – 1.211 Complying with ASTM C 494 Types D & G. Composition: High molecular weight refined synthetic complex co-polymers derivatives and other refined chemicals.

Admix CF 116 complies with: ASTM C 494 – Type D & G. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF 116

disclosure, use, dissemination or copying (either whole or partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit. Edition: 10/10-A

PACKAGING Admix CF 116 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE Admix CF 116 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorized

Admix CF 116 is totally miscible in water. It is to be added to the concrete mixture during the mixing cycle at the same time as the mixing water. No extension

152

153

Admix CF 117

HIGH-RANGE WATER REDUCING ADMIXTURE FOR HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE

PRODUCT

to normal mixing time is necessary.

segregation or bleeding. can maintain good mixture appearance without longer time at low w/c at hot weather conditions. It Admix CF 117 to retain concrete workability for a superplasticizer. This special formulation enables co-polymers and designed as a multipurpose Admix CF 117 is formulated from synthetic complex

DOSAGE

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 117 for a particular mixture. A dosage of 1500 to 3500 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials is recommended. Dosage above the recommended values can be practiced up to 4000 ml per 100 kg of cementituous materials. Still, the required dosage for a speciﬁc job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials.

PROPERTIES

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING A severe over dose of Admix CF 117will result in the following: • Delay in setting • Higher workability

SCOPE OF USE

COMPATIBILITY

Admix CF 117 is formulated to ensure ﬂuidity concrete remains workable for more than 2 hours at high temperature. Ideal for concrete dams, locks, road works, architectonic concrete, light or heavy prefabrication, ready-mix concrete, pumped concrete and piling.

Admix CF 117 can be used in all types of portland cement, sulfate-resisting cement, and cementitious materials. Admix CF 117 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 117, they must be dispensed separately. Consult the company’s technical dept. for advice.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20˚C Chloride content Air entrainment

Liquid Brown 1.236 ± 0.01 Zero to BS 5057 Up to 1.5% depending on dosage rate and

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE Admix CF 117 a high-range water reducing and retarding plasticizing concrete admixture. Admix CF 117 can be used in all concrete as mentioned at dosage between 1500 to 3500 ml per 100 kg of cementitious material in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

concrete proportioning

APPLICABLE STANDARDS Admix CF 117 complies with: ASTM C 494 – Type D, F & G. ASTM C 1017 - Type I & II BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

Speciﬁc Gravity at 20˚C: 1.236 ± 0.01 Complying with ASTM C 494 Types D & G. (it is Types F & G) Composition: High molecular weight re*ned synthetic complex co-polymers derivatives and other reﬁned chemicals.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Admix CF 117 is totally miscible in water. It is to be added to the concrete mixture during the mixing cycle at the same time as the mixing water. No extension to normal mixing time is necessary.

DISPENSING It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete

154

Admix CF 117

should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment.

PACKAGING Admix CF 117 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE Admix CF 117 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

155

Admix CF 120

HIGH-RANGE / WATER REDUCING / SUPERPLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF 120 is a superplasticizer based on synthetic polymers that has a strong dispersing power over the fine particles of concrete, thus allowing the concrete to achieve higher mechanical properties and high early strength . Admix CF 120 does not delay the setting of concrete and is capable for higher water reduction. Admix CF 120 works on a very low W/CM with the presence of supplementary cementitious materials, such as GGBS and silica fume. Admix CF 120 can be used on site (re-tempering) to boost up the workability of the concrete mixture to any extend without danger of delay in setting.

Admix CF 120 is totally miscible in water. No extension to the batching time is necessary. Do not add to dry cement. Admix CF 120 can be used on site to produce fluid concrete to a required workability. Make sure that the concrete is agitated for not less than 2 minutes at 15-20 rpm before casting. For high early strength of concrete, use a lower W/CM and a higher Admix CF 120 dosage.

DOSAGE

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 120 for a particular mixture. A dosage of 800 to 2500 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials is recommended. This may be changed to higher dosage in high ambient and concrete temperature conditions.

PROPERTIES

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING Admix CF 120 can be used at high dosages without any retardation. A severe over dose of Admix CF 120 will result in the following: • Very slight delay of the initial and final setting of the concrete mixture • Very Slight increase in air entrainment • Increase in workability

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 120 is recommended for all cement types in the following areas: • Heavily reinforced concrete works • Paving and industrial floor • Ready mixed concrete • Concrete with low W/CM • Precast concrete • Hollow core precast concrete elements • Improvement of concrete workability on site • Reduction in cement content

Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20˚C Chloride content Air entrainment

Liquid Brownish 1.185 ± 0.01 Zero to BS 5075 Less than 1% additional air is entrained.

156

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment. Such equipment can be supplied by our company.

Edition: 10/10-A *Available only in Qatar

PACKAGING Admix CF 120 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE Admix CF 120 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

HEALTH & SAFETY

COMPATIBILITY

QUALITY STATEMENT

Admix CF 120, a superplasticizing concrete admixture manufactured by our company to the following specification:

Admix CF 120 complies with: ASTM C – 494 – Type F. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

NOTE

DISPENSING

No more severe side effects are known with the history of Admix CF 120

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Admix CF 120 can be used in all concrete mixes as mentioned, at dosage between 800 and 2500 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials in accordance with the manufacture’s instructions.

Admix CF 120 can be used in all types of portland and sulfate-resisting cements including concrete made with supplementary cementitious materials. For use with other cements, contact the company technical services department. Admix CF 120 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 120 they must be dispensed separately. Consult the company Technical Dept. for advice.

CHARACTERISTICS

Admix CF 120

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

157

Admix CF 121

HIGH-RANGE / WATER REDUCING / SUPERPLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF 121 is a high range water-reducing admixture. It may be added to the concrete at the job site or at the ready mix concrete plant. Because Admix CF 121 is formulated without added chlorides, it is recommvvended for prestressed concrete. It is also very compatible with air-entraining agents, water proofing agents and many other admixtures; however, each material should be added to the concrete separately. Admix CF 121 provides excellent slump increase and retention in low water to cement ratio concrete.

Admix CF 121 is totally miscible in water. No extension to the batching time is necessary. Do not add to dry cement. Admix CF 121 can be used on site to produce fluid concrete to a required workability. Make sure that the concrete is agitated for not less than 2 minutes at 15 - 20 rpm before casting. For high early strength of concrete, use a lower w/c and a higher Admix CF 121 dosage.

DOSAGE

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 121 for a particular mix. A dosage of 800 to 2500 ml per 100 kg of cement is recommended. This may be changed to higher dosage in high ambient and mixture temperature conditions.

PROPERTIES

DISPENSING

or partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit.

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment. Such equipment can be supplied by our company.

Edition: 10/10-A

PACKAGING Admix CF 121 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE Admix CF 121 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

HEALTH & SAFETY EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING Admix CF 121 can be used at high dosages without retardation. Severe over dose of Admix CF 121 will result in the following: • Slight delay of the initial and final setting of the concrete mixture • Slight increase in air entrainment • Increased workability

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 121 is recommended for all cement types in the following areas: • High performance concrete • General ready mix concrete • Flatwork and mass concrete • High slump, flowable concrete • Heavily reinforced concrete works • Paving and industrial floor • Concrete with low W/C • Precast concrete • Works well with silica fume and slag • Hollow core precast concrete elements • Reduction in cement content

COMPATIBILITY Admix CF 121 can be used in all types of portland and sulfate-resisting cements. For use with other cement types, contact Company’s technical service department. Admix CF 121 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 121 they must be dispensed separately. Consult Company’s Technical Dept. for advice.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20˚C Chloride content Air entrainment

Admix CF 121

Liquid Brownish 1.170 ± 0.01 Zero to BS 5075 Less than 1% additional

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE Admix CF 121, a superplasticizing concrete admixture manufactured to the following specification: Admix CF 121 can be used in all concrete mixtures at dosage rate of 800 to 2500 ml per 100 kg of cement in accordance with the manufacture’s instructions.

air is entrained.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Admix CF 121 complies with: ASTM C – 494 – Type F. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

158

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorized disclosure, use, dissemination or copying (either whole

159

Admix CF 125

HIGH-RANGE / WATER REDUCING / SUPERPLASTICIZING admixture FOR READY MIX CONCRETE APPLICABLE STANDARDS

PRODUCT

Admix CF 125 complies with: ASTM C – 494 – Type D&G. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2. ASTM C1017 Type II

Admix CF 125 is a chloride-free, high-range superplasticizer based on synthetic polymers that has a strong dispersing power over the fine particles of concrete, thus allowing the concrete to achieve higher mechanical properties. Admix CF 125 secures a powerful deflocculating and dispersing action of cement, which facilitates the production of fluid, self-consolidating concrete without segregation.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Admix CF 125 is totally miscible in water. No extension to the batching time is necessary. Do not add to dry cement. Admix CF 125 can be used on site to produce fluid concrete to a required workability. Make sure that the concrete is agitated for not less than 2 minutes at 15- 20 rpm before casting.

PROPERTIES

• Admix CF 125 produces concrete of similar workability up to 40% less water • Increase concrete cohesion • Increase compressive, tensile, and flexura strengths • Produces flowable concrete • High strength, especially at low W/C, can be significantly increased • High workability-ease of placing and compaction without segregation • Good adhesion - ease of pumping. No bleeding • Good workability - excellent surface appearance • Minimal bleed water - excellent concrete quality

DOSAGE Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 125 for a particular mixture. A dosage of 800 to 2250 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials is recommended. This may be changed to higher dosage in high ambient and mixture temperature conditions.

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING Admix CF 125 can be used at high dosage rates without any retardation. A severe over dosage of Admix CF 125 will result in the following: • Very slight delay of the initial and final setting times of the concrete mixture. • Very Slight increase in air entrainment. • Increase in workability. No more severe side effects are known with the history of Admix CF 125

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 125 is recommended for all types of portland cement and sulfate resisting cement in the following areas: • Heavily reinforced concrete works • Paving and industrial floor • Ready mixed concrete • All concrete requiring a fluid consistency • Concrete with low W/C • Precast concrete • Works well with silica fume, fly ash and slag cementitious replacement • Structures with close reinforcement where vibratory efforts are ineffective • Improvement of concrete workability on site.

COMPATIBILITY Admix CF 125 can be used in all types of Portland and sulfate-resisting cements, including those containing supplementary cementitious materials. For use with other cements, contact the company’s technical service department. Admix CF 125 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 125 they must be dispensed separately. Consult the company’s technical dept. for advice.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity at 20°C Chloride content

Liquid (brown) 1.18 ± 0.03 NIL– BS 5075934-2

160

Admix CF 125

PACKAGING

Admix CF 125 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE

Admix CF 125 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

HEALTH & SAFETY

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

161

Admix CF 130

HIGH-PERFORMANCE WATER-REDUCING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

Admix CF 130 is a superplasticizer designed to give high workability to concrete for a long period. It can be used to reduce water from a concrete mixture for achieving higher strength to hardener concrete.

PROPERTIES

• Helps concrete cohesion. • Secures fluid and homogenous non-segregated concrete • Reduces shrinking and risk of cracking • Can be used to reduce cement content • Can be used at low W/C for increasing compressive strength, impermeability, and durability of concrete • Facilitates concrete pumping • Retains concrete workability for longer time

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING

NOTE

A dosage higher than 1.5 kg per 100 kg of cement will result in the following: • Increase in retardation, provided that adequate curing is maintained, the ultimate strength of concrete will not be impaired • Increase in air entrainment • Higher workability The maximum efficiency of Admix CF 130 will be determined after trial batches.

PACKAGING Admix CF 130 is supplied in: Bulk 200 and 25 lit. drums

STORAGE

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 130 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

Admix CF 130 is recommended for all types of cement, in the following areas: • Heavily reinforced concrete works • Paving and industrial floor • Ready-mix concrete • Concrete requiring a fluid consistency • Precast concrete elements • Prestressed concrete

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity at 20˚C

Admix CF 130

Brownish Liquid 1.185 ± 0.015

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS ASTM C494 Type G.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF 130 is miscible in water. It can be introduced into the mixer at the same time as the mixing water or at the end of the mixing, if a fluid concrete is required.

DISCLAIMER

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosing rates: from 0.4 to 1.5 kg per 100 kg of cement. In-situ dosage will be determined after trials for taking into account the rheological characteristics and required performance of the hardened concrete.

162

163

Admix CF 207

HIGH-RANGE SUPERPLASTICIZER FOR FLUID CONCRETE

PRODUCT

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF 207 is a chloride-free, high-range naphthalene-based superplasticizer, specially formulated for high strength concrete. Admix CF 207 secures a powerful deflocculating and dispersing action of cement, which facilitates the production of fluid, self-consolidating concrete without segregation.

Admix CF 207 is totally miscible in water. It is to be added to the concrete mix during the mixing cycle at the same time as the mixing water. No extension to normal mixing time is necessary.

DOSAGE RATES Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 207 for a particular mix. A dosage of 600 to 2500 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials is recommended. The required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials.

PROPERTIES

• Admix CF 207 produces concrete of similar workability with 20%-25% less water • Increase concrete cohesion • Increase compressive, tensile, and flexural strengths • Produces flowable and self-consolidating concrete • High strength, especially at low W/C, can significantly increase mould utilization in precast works

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING A severe over dose of Admix CF 207 will result in the following: • Delay in setting • Increase in air content • Higher workability

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 207 is recommended for all cement types of types of portland cement and sulfate resisting cement in the following areas: • Heavily reinforced concrete works • Paving and industrial floor • Ready mixed concrete • All concrete requiring a fluid consistency • Concrete with low W/C • Precast concrete • Works well with silica fume and slag cement • Structures with close reinforcement where vibratory efforts are ineffective • Can be used with white cement

COMPATIBILITY Admix CF 207 can be used in all types of portland cements, sulfate resisting cement, and cementitious materials. Admix CF 207 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 207, they must be dispensed separately. Consult the company Technical Dept. for advice.

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20˚C Chloride content Air entrainment

Admix CF 207 is a high-range water reducing and retarding plasticizing concrete admixture. Admix CF 207 can be used in all concrete as mentioned at dosage between 600 to 2500 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

Liquid Brown 1.185 ± 0.015 Zero to BS 5075 Up to 2.0% depending on dosage rate and concrete proportioning

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 – Type D& G. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

164

Admix CF 207

PACKAGING Admix CF 207 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

DISPENSING

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment.

Edition: 10/10-A *Available only in Qatar

165

Admix CF 257

HIGH-RANGE WATER REDUCING / RETARDING / SUPERPLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

DOSAGE

Admix CF 257 is formulated from synthetic polymers and designed as a multi-purpose superplasticizer. This special formulation enables Admix CF 257 to retain concrete workability for a longer time at low w/c and for hot weather concreting. It can maintain good mixture appearance without segregation or bleeding. At intentionally higher dosages, Admix CF 257 has the effect of a set retarder.

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 257 for a particular mixture. A dosage of 1100 ml to 2000ml per 100kg of cementitious materials is recommended. Dosage greater than the above recommended values could be incorporated up to 2200 ml per 100 kg of cementituous materials. Still, the required dosage for a specific job conditions with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trial batches.

PROPERTIES

• The high workability produced is recommended for congested reinforced structures • Extended setting times allow effective hot weather concreting • Allows quicker consolidation • Improves surface appearance • Improves pumpability • Compatible with concrete containing pozzolanic materials

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING A severe over dose of Admix CF 257 will result in the following: • Delay in setting • Increase in air content • Higher workability

COMPATIBILITY

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 257 can be used in all types of portland cement, sulfate-resisting cement, and concrete made with cementitious materials. Admix CF 257 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 257, they must be dispensed separately. Consult the company’s Technical Dept. for advice.

Admix CF 257 to ensure that rheoplastic concrete remains workable for more than 1 hour at high temperatures. Ideal for construction of dams, locks, road works, architectonic concrete, light or heavy prefabrication, ready-mix concrete, and pumped concrete.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20˚C Chloride content Air entrainment

VOC and Formadehyde ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS

Liquid Brown 1.210 ± 0.01 Zero to BS 5075 Up to 1.5% depending on dosage rate and concrete proportioning None (< 10µg/l)

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE Admix CF 257 a high-range water reducing and retarding plasticizing concrete admixture manufactured to the following specification: Admix CF 257 can be used in all concrete as mentioned at dosage between 1100 to 2000 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Specific Gravity at 20°C : 1.210 ± 0.01 Complying with ASTM C 494 Types D & G. Composition: High molecular weight refined synthetic polymers derivatives and other refined chemicals.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 – Type D & G. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

DISPENSING

Admix CF 257 is totally miscible in water. It is to be added to the concrete mixture during the mixing cycle at the same time as the mixing water. No extension to normal mixing time is necessary.

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of

166

automatic dispensing equipment. Such equipment can be supplied by the company.

Edition: 10/10-A *Available only in UAE

PACKAGING Admix CF 257 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE Admix CF 257 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

167

Admix CF 258 AW

HIGH-RANGE WATER REDUCING / RETARDING / SUPERPLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

DOSAGE

Admix CF 258 AW is formulated from synthetic polymers and designed as a multi-purpose superplasticizer. This special formulation enables Admix CF 258 AW to retain concrete workability for a longer time at low w/c and for hot weather concreting. It can maintain good mixture appearance without segregation or bleeding. At intentionally higher dosages, Admix CF 258 AW has the effect of a set retarder.

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 258 AW for a particular mixture. A dosage of 1100 ml to 2000ml per 100kg of cem en ti ti ous materi al s i s recommended. Dosage greater than the above recommended values could be incorporated up to 2200 ml per 100 kg of cementituous materials. Still, the required dosage for a specific job conditions with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trial batches.

PROPERTIES

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING A severe over dose of Admix CF 258 AW will result in the following: • Delay in setting • Increase in air content • Higher workability

COMPATIBILITY Admix CF 258 AW can be used in all types of portland cement, sulfate-resisting cement, and concrete made with cementitious materials. Admix CF 258 AW should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 258 AW, they must be dispensed separately. Consult the company’s Technical Dept. for advice.

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 258 AW to ensure that rheoplastic concrete remains workable for more than 1 hour at high temperatures. Ideal for construction of dams, locks, road works, architectonic concrete, light or heavy prefabrication, ready-mix concrete, and pumped concrete.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20˚C Chloride content Air entrainment

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE

Liquid Brown 1.220 - 1.230 Zero to BS 5075 Up to 1.5% depending on dosage rate and concrete proportioning

Admix CF 258 AW a high-range water reducing and retarding plasticizing concrete admixture manufactured to the following specification: Admix CF 258 AW can be used in all concrete as mentioned at dosage between 1100 to 2000 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Specific Gravity at 20°C : 1.220 - 1.230 Complying with ASTM C 494 Types D & G. Composition: High molecular weight refined synthetic polymers derivatives and other refined chemicals.

ASTM C 494 – Type D & G. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF258 AW is totally miscible in water. It is to be added to the concrete mixture during the mixing cycle at the same time as the mixing water. No extension to normal mixing time is necessary.

DISPENSING It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of

168

Admix CF 258 AW

automatic dispensing equipment. Such equipment can be supplied by the company.

Edition: 10/10-A *Available only in UAE

PACKAGING Admix CF 258 AW is supplied in: Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE Admix CF 258 AW can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

169

Admix CF 260

HIGH-RANGE WATER REDUCING / RETARDING / SUPERPLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

DOSAGE

Admix CF 260 is formulated from synthetic complex co-polymers and designed as a multi-purpose superplasticizer. This special formulation enables Admix CF 260 to retain concrete workability for longer time at low w/cm at hot weather conditions. It can maintain good mixture appearance without segregation or bleeding. At intentionally higher dosages, Admix CF 260 has the effect of a set retarder.

PROPERTIES

• The high workability produced is recommended for congested reinforced structures • Extended setting time allows effective hotweather concreting • Allows quicker consolidation • Improves surface appearance • Improves pumpability • Compatible with concrete containing pozzolanic materials

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING

HEALTH & SAFETY

Admix CF 260 can be used in all types of Portland cement, sulfate resisting cement and cementitious materials. Admix CF 260 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 260, they must be dispensed separately. Please consult the company’s Technical Dept. for advice.

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20˚C Chloride content Air entrainment

Admix CF 260 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

COMPATIBILITY

Admix CF 260 is to formulated to ensure fluidity concrete remains workable for more than 2 hours at high temperature. Ideal for concrete dams, locks, road works, architectonic concrete, light or heavy prefabrication, ready-mix concrete, pumped concrete, and piling.

Admix CF 260 is a high-range water reducing and retarding plasticizing concrete admixture. Admix CF 260 can be used in all concrete as mentioned at dosage between 450 ml to 2000 ml per 100 kg of cementitious material in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Specific Gravity at 20°C: 1.225 ± 0.01 Complying with ASTM C 494 Types D & G. Composition: High molecular weight refined synthetic complex co-polymers derivatives and other refined chemicals.

Liquid Brown 1.225 ± 0.01 Zero to BS 5075 Up to 2.0% depending on dosage rate and concrete proportioning

APPLICABLE STANDARDS ASTM C 494 – Type D& G. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

DISPENSING

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment.

Admix CF 260 is totally miscible in water. It is to be added to the concrete mix during the mixing cycle at the same time as the mixing water. No extension to normal mixing time is necessary.

170

PACKAGING

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 260 for a particular mixture. A dosage of 450 to 2200 ml per 100 kg of cementitious material is recommended. Dosage above the recommended values can be practiced up to 2450 ml per 100 kg of cementituous materials. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials.

A severe over dose of Admix CF 260 will result in the following: • Delay in setting • Increase in air content • Higher workability

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 260

STORAGE Admix CF 260 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

Edition: 10/10-A *Available only in UAE

171

Admix CF 274

HIGH-RANGE WATER REDUCING / RETARDING / SUPERPLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

DOSAGE

Admix CF 274 is formulated from synthetic complex co-polymers and designed as a multi-purpose superplasticizer. This special formulation enables Admix CF 274 to retain concrete workability for a longer time at low w/c at hot weather conditions. It can maintain good mixture appearance without segregation or bleeding. At intentionally higher dosages, Admix CF 274 has the effect of a set retarder.

PROPERTIES

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING

HEALTH & SAFETY

Admix CF 274 can be used in all types of portland cement, sulfate-resisting cement, and cementitious materials. Admix CF 274 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 274, they must be dispensed separately. Consult the company’s technical dept. for advice.

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20˚C Chloride content Air entrainment

Admix CF 274 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

COMPATIBILITY

Admix CF 274 is formulated to ensure fluidity concrete remains workable for more than 2 hours at high temperature. Ideal for concrete dams, locks, road works, architectonic concrete, light or heavy prefabrication, ready-mix concrete, pumped concrete and piling.

Admix CF 274 a high-range water reducing and retarding plasticizing concrete admixture. Admix CF 274 can be used in all concrete as mentioned at dosage between 500 to 2300 ml per 100 kg of cementitious material in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

Liquid Brown 1.200 ± 0.01 Zero to BS 5075 Up to 1.5% depending on dosage rate and concrete proportioning

ASTM C 494 – Type D & G. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

Specific Gravity at 20ºC: 1.200 ± 0.01 Complying with ASTM C 494 Types D & G. Composition: High molecular weight refined synthetic complex co-polymers derivatives and other refined chemicals.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

DISPENSING

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Admix CF274 is totally miscible in water. It is to be added to the concrete mixture during the mixing cycle at the same time as the mixing water. No extension to normal mixing time is necessary.

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment.

172

PACKAGING

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 274 for a particular mixture. A dosage of 500 to 2300 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials is recommended. Dosage above the recommended values can be practiced up to 2450 ml per 100 kg of cementituous materials. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials.

A severe over dose of Admix CF 274 will result in the following: • Delay in setting • Increase in air content • Higher workability

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 274

STORAGE Admix CF 274 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

Edition: 10/10-A *Available only in UAE

173

Admix CF 275

HIGH-RANGE WATER REDUCING / RETARDING / SUPERPLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

DOSAGE

Admix CF 275 is formulated from synthetic complex co-polymers and designed as a multi-purpose superplasticizer. This special formulation enables Admix CF 275 to retain concrete workability for a longer time at low w/c at hot weather conditions. It can maintain good mixture appearance without segregation or bleeding. At intentionally higher dosages, Admix CF 275 has the effect of a set retarder.

PROPERTIES

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING

HEALTH & SAFETY

Admix CF 275 can be used in all types of portland cement, sulfate-resisting cement, and cementitious materials. Admix CF 275 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 275, they must be dispensed separately. Consult the company’s technical dept. for advice.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20˚C Chloride content Air entrainment

Admix CF 275 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

COMPATIBILITY

Admix CF 275 is formulated to ensure fluidity concrete remains workable for more than 2 hours at high temperature. Ideal for concrete dams, locks, road works, architectonic concrete, light or heavy prefabrication, ready-mix concrete, pumped concrete and piling.

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE

Liquid Brown 1.210 ± 0.01 Zero to BS 5057 Up to 1.5% depending on dosage rate and concrete proportioning

Admix CF 275 a high-range water reducing and retarding plasticizing concrete admixture. Admix CF 275 can be used in all concrete as mentioned at dosage between 500 to 2300 ml per 100 kg of cementitious material in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Specific Gravity at 20ºC: 1.210 ± 0.01 Complying with ASTM C 494 Types D & G. Composition: High molecular weight refined synthetic complex co-polymers derivatives and other refined chemicals.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS ASTM C 494 – Type D & G. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

PACKAGING

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 275 for a particular mixture. A dosage of 500 to 2300 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials is recommended. Dosage above the recommended values can be practiced up to 2450 ml per 100 kg of cementituous materials. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials.

A severe over dose of Admix CF 275 will result in the following: • Delay in setting • Increase in air content • Higher workability

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 275

STORAGE Admix CF 275 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

DISPENSING

Admix CF274 is totally miscible in water. It is to be added to the concrete mixture during the mixing cycle at the same time as the mixing water. No extension to normal mixing time is necessary.

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment.

174

Edition: 10/10-A *Available only in UAE

175

Admix CF 300

HIGH-RANGE WATER REDUCING / RETARDING / SUPERPLASTICIZING admixture

PRODUCT

Admix CF 300 is formulated from synthetic polymers and designed as a multi-purpose superplasticizer. This special formulation enables Admix CF 300 to retain concrete workability for a longer time at low w/c at during hot weather concreting. It can maintain good mixture appearance without segregation or bleeding. At intentionally higher dosages, Admix CF 300 has the effect of a set retarder.

• Water reducing • Superior slump retention. Ease of delivery to point of placement • High workability-ease of placing and compaction without segregation • Ease of pumping. No bleeding • Enhances workability • Improves workability recommended for congested reinforced structures • Compatible with concrete containing pozzolanic materials

automatic dispensing equipment. Such equipment can be supplied by the company.

DOSAGE

PACKAGING

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING

A severe over dose of Admix CF 300 will result in the following: • Delay in setting • Increase in air content • Higher workability

COMPATIBILITY

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 300 can be used in all types of Portland cements, sulfate-resisting cement, and concrete with cementitious materials. Admix CF 300 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 300, they must be dispensed separately. Consult the company’s technical dept. for advice.

Admix CF 300 to ensure that plastic concrete remains workable for more than 1 hour at high temperatures. Ideal for construction of dams, locks, road works, architectural concrete, light or heavy prefabrication, ready-mix concrete, and pumped concrete.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20˚C Chloride content Air entrainment

cycle at the same time as the mixing water. No extension to normal mixing time is necessary.

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 300 for a particular mixture. A dosage of 200 to 1300 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials is recommended. The required dosage for a specific job conditions to ensure controlled delay in setting and secure the desired workability should be determined by in-situ trials.

PROPERTIES

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE

Liquid Brown 1.18 ± 0.03 Zero to BS 5075 Up to 1.5% depending on dosage rate and concrete proportioning

Admix CF 300 is high-range water reducing and retarding plasticizing concrete admixture manufactured to the following specification:

Admix CF 300 complies with: ASTM C 494 – Type D & G. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2

Admix CF 300 can be used in all concrete as mentioned at dosage between 200 to 1300 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Specific Gravity 1.18 ± 0.03 Complying with ASTM C 494 Types D &G. Composition: High molecular weight refined synthetic polymers derivatives and other refined chemicals.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

DISPENSING

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Admix CF 300 is totally miscible in water. It is to be added to the concrete mixture during the mixing

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of

176

Admix CF 300

Admix CF 300 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE Admix CF 300 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

Edition: 01/11-A

177

Admix CF 333

HIGH-RANGE WATER REDUCING / RETARDING / SUPERPLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

DOSAGE

Admix CF 333 is formulated from synthetic polymers and designed as a multi-purpose superplasticizer. This special formulation enables Admix CF 333 to retain concrete workability for a longer time at low w/c at during hot weather concreting. It can maintain good mixture appearance without segregation or bleeding. At intentionally higher dosages, Admix CF 333 has the effect of a set retarder.

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 333 for a particular mixture. A dosage of 700 to 2000 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials is recommended. Dosage above the recommended values can be incorporated up to 2200 ml per 100 kg of cementituous materials. Still, the required dosage for a specific job conditions to ensure controlled delay in setting and secure the desired workability should be determined by in-situ trials.

PROPERTIES

• High resulting workability recommended for congested reinforced structures • Extended setting times allow effective hot • Weather concreting • Allows quicker compaction • Improves surface appearance • Improves pumpability in conjunction with setting time • Compatible with concrete containing pozzolanic materials

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING A severe over dose of Admix CF 333 will result in the following: • Delay in setting • Increase in air content • Higher workability

COMPATIBILITY Admix CF 333 can be used in all types of portland cements, sulfate-resisting cement, and concrete with cementitious materials. Admix CF 333 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 333, they must be dispensed separately. Consult the company’s technical dept. for advice.

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 333 to ensure that plastic concrete remains workable for more than 1 hour at high temperatures. Ideal for construction of dams, locks, road works, architectonic concrete, light or heavy prefabrication, ready-mix concrete, and pumped concrete.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20˚C Chloride content Air entrainment

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE

Liquid Brown 1.178 ± 0.02 Zero to BS 5075 Up to 1.5% depending on dosage rate and concrete proportioning

Admix CF 333 a high-range water reducing and retarding plasticizing concrete admixture manufactured to the following specification: Admix CF 333 can be used in all concrete as mentioned at dosage between 700 to 2000 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Specific Gravity 1.178 ± 0.02 Complying with ASTM C 494 Types D & G. Composition: High molecular weight refined synthetic polymers derivatives and other refined chemicals.

ASTM C 494 – Type D & G. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF333 is totally miscible in water. It is to be added to the concrete mixture during the mixing cycle at the same time as the mixing water. No extension to normal mixing time is necessary.

178

Admix CF 333

automatic dispensing equipment. Such equipment can be supplied by the company.

PACKAGING Admix CF 333 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE Admix CF 333 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

DISPENSING

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of

Edition: 10/10-A

179

Admix CF 555

HIGH-RANGE WATER REDUCING / RETARDING / SUPERPLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

DOSAGE

Admix CF 555 is formulated from synthetic complex co-polymers and designed as a multi-purpose superplasticizer. This special formulation enables Admix CF 555 to retain concrete workability for longer time at low w/cm at hot weather conditions. It can maintain good mixture appearance without segregation or bleeding. At intentionally higher dosages, Admix CF 555 has the effect of a set retarder.

Admix CF 555

PACKAGING

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 555 for a particular mixture. A dosage of 450 to 2200 ml per 100 kg of cementitious material is recommended. Dosage above the recommended values can be practiced up to 2450 ml per 100 kg of cementituous materials. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials.

Admix CF 555 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

• The high workability produced is recommended for congested reinforced structures • Extended setting time allows effective hot-weather concreting • Allows quicker consolidation • Improves surface appearance • Improves pumpability • Compatible with concrete containing pozzolanic materials

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING

HEALTH & SAFETY

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 555 can be used in all types of Portland cement, sulfate resisting cement and cementitious materials. Admix CF 555 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 555, they must be dispensed separately. Please consult the company’s Technical Dept. for advice.

PROPERTIES

A severe over dose of Admix CF 555 will result in the following: • Delay in setting • Increase in air content • Higher workability

COMPATIBILITY

Admix CF 555 is to formulated to ensure fluidity concrete remains workable for more than 2 hours at high temperature. Ideal for concrete dams, locks, road works, architectonic concrete, light or heavy prefabrication, ready-mix concrete, pumped concrete, and piling.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20˚C Chloride content Air entrainment

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE

Liquid Brown 1.205 - 1.225 Zero to BS 5075 Up to 2.0% depending on dosage rate and concrete proportioning

STORAGE Admix CF 555 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

Admix CF 555 complies with: ASTM C 494 – Type D& G. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

Admix CF 555 is a high-range water reducing and retarding plasticizing concrete admixture. Admix CF 555 can be used in all concrete as mentioned at dosage between 450 ml to 2000 ml per 100 kg of cementitious material in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Specific Gravity at 20ºC: 1.205 - 1.225 Complying with ASTM C 494 Types D & G. Composition: High molecular weight refined synthetic complex co-polymers derivatives and other refined chemicals.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

DISPENSING

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment.

Edition: 10/10-A *Available only in UAE

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Admix CF 555 is totally miscible in water. It is to be added to the concrete mix during the mixing cycle at the same time as the mixing water. No extension to normal mixing time is necessary.

180

NOTE

181

Admix CF 1700

HIGH-RANGE WATER REDUCING / RETARDING / SUPERPLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

DOSAGE

Admix CF 1700 is formulated from synthetic polymers and designed as a multi-purpose superplasticizer. This special formulation enables Admix CF 1700 to retain concrete workability for a longer time at low w/c at hot weather concreting. It can maintain good mixture appearance without segregation or bleeding. At intentionally higher dosages, Admix CF 1700 has the effect of a setting retarder.

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 1700 for a particular mix. A dosage of 1100 ml to 2000ml per 100 kg of cementitious material is recommended. Dosage above the recommended values can be practiced up to 2200 ml per 100kg of cementituous material. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials.

PROPERTIES

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING

• High workability is recommended for congested reinforcement structures • Extended setting times allow effective hot • weather concreting • Allows quicker compaction • Improves surface appearance • Improves pumpability in conjunction with setting time • Compatible with concrete containing pozzolanic materials

Admix CF 1700 to ensure that rheoplastic concrete remains workable for more than 1 hour at high temperatures. Ideal for Dams, locks, road works, architectonic concrete, light or heavy prefabrication, ready-mixed and pumped concrete.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 20˚C Chloride content Air entrainment

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF 1700 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

HEALTH & SAFETY

QUALITY STATEMENT

Specific gravity at 200C: 1.2 ± 0.01 Complying with ASTM C 494 types D & G. Composition: High molecular weight refined synthetic polymers derivatives and other refined chemicals.

ASTM C 494 – Type D & G. BS 5075 Part 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

STORAGE

COMPATIBILITY

Admix CF 1700 a high-range water reducing and retarding plasticizing concrete admixture is manufactured to the following specification: Admix CF 1700 can be used in all concrete as mentioned at dosage between 1100 ml to 2000 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Admix CF 1700 is supplied in Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE

Liquid Brown 1.2 ± 0.01 Zero to BS 5075 Up to 1.5% depending on dosage rate and concrete proportioning

PACKAGING

A severe over dose of Admix CF 1700 will result in the following: • Delay in setting • Increase in air content • Higher workability

Admix CF 1700 can be used in all types of Portland cement, sulfate resisting cement and cementitious materials. Admix CF 1700 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 1700, they must be dispensed separately. Consult company Technical Dept. for advice.

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF 1700

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

DISPENSING

Admix CF1700 is totally miscible in water. It is to be added to the concrete mix during the mixing cycle at the same time as the mixing water. No extension to normal mixing time is necessary.

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment. Such equipment can be supplied by the company.

182

Edition: 10/10-A *Available only in GCC

183

Admix CF G

HIGH-RANGE WATER REDUCING AND RETARDING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

200 and 25 lit. drums

Admix CF G is a superplasticizer that confers more workability to concrete with less water in the mixture, and higher compressive strength to hardened concrete.

STORAGE Admix CF G can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

PROPERTIES

Admix CF G is formulated from synthesized polymer and special resins.Its dispersing action on the finer elements of concrete is particularly high.Admix CF G is recommended when using silica fume. Important water reductions are obtained while concrete keeps the same workability.

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF G is used to optimize the dosage of cement and to maintain the workability. It’s recommended for all types of cements, in the following areas: • Ready-mix concrete • Prestressed concrete • Incubated concrete • Paving and industrial floors • Fluid concrete, in particular when there is a desire to maintain fluidity over time • High-strength concrete

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity at 20˚C

Dark Brown Liquid 1.140 ± 0.01

APPLICABLE STANDARDS Applicable standard: ASTM C494 Type G.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF G is totally miscible in water.It can be introduced into a mixture at the same time as the mixing water or at the end of mixing if a fluid concrete is required. In this case, supplementary mixing for at least 2 minutes will be necessary.

DOSAGE

Range of dosing rates: from 0.5% to 1.8% by mass of cement.In-situ dosage will be determined after trial batches for particular preferences taking into account the rheological characteristics and required mechanical properties of the concrete.

Edition: 12/07-A **Available only in MENA

PACKAGING

Admix CF TH95

SUPERPLASTICIZER (FOR LOW W/C CONCRETE)

PRODUCT

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix CF TH95 is a synthesizing polymer from the family of polynaphtalene, specifically designed for use with hydraulic binders. Its particular chemical structure is remarkably efficient: It has a strong dispersant action with the finer elements of concrete. This translates into an improvement of concrete workability. Admix CF TH95 is a catalyst of the hydration reactions of cement. It allows reaching higher mechanical strength. The use of Admix CF TH95 has no effect on setting time of concrete.

Admix CF TH95 is totally miscible in water. Admix CF TH95 can be added to the concrete just before casting. Mix together at least 2 minutes before casting. The maximum efficiency of Admix CF TH95 will be determined after trial batches.

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates From 0.6 to 2.4 kg / 100kg cement

SPECIAL ADVICE Maintenance of fluidity The time during which the concrete remains fluid is variable according to the ambient temperature, consistency of the concrete mixture, and to the nature and content of the cement . Previous trial in-situ batch will help determine this duration.

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CF TH95 is recommended for all types of cements, in the following areas: • Heavily reinforced concrete works • Paving and industrial floor • Ready-mix concrete • All concrete requiring a fluid consistency • Concrete with low W/C

PACKAGING

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity

Admix CF TH95 is supplied in: Bulk 200 and 25 lit. drums

Brownish Liquid 1.145 ± 0.01

PERFORMANCE

STORAGE

(Temperature = + 20°C)

Admix CF TH95 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

Mechanical resistance

CONTROL Admix CF TH95 1 lit/100 kg cement

24 Hrs

7 Days

28 Days

HEALTH & SAFETY

9 MPa

30 MPa

45 MPa

10 MPa

36 MPa

52 MPa

Plasticity improvement SLUMP

CONTROL Admix CF TH95 1 lit/100 kg cement

SLUMP GAIN

QUALITY STATEMENT

7 mm 180 mm

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

∆H = 140 mm

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Admix CF G is supplied in: Bulk

Applicable standard: ASTM C494 Type F.

184

185

Admix CF TH 95

Admix GEL A

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT

NOTE

Admix GEL A is a liquid air-entraining agent, which increases the durability and quality of the concrete and its resistance to freezing and thawing and de-icing salt scaling. The millions of tiny air bubbles proportionately distributed throughout the entire mass of wet concrete mixture enables it to achieve higher workability retention, better cohesion, eliminates shrinkage cracking and provides greater resistance to freezing and thawing damage without any remarkable decline in concrete mechanical properties.

AIR-ENTRAINING ADMIXTURE FOR CONCRETE

CHARACTERISTICS Chloride content

Zero to BS 5075

Admix GEL A complies with ASTM – C 260, BS 5075

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix GEL A is totally miscible in water. It must be incorporated into the mixing water. The quantity of water and dosage of Admix GEL A can be determined considering the properties required for the concrete mixture.

Admix GEL A introduced into the concrete, generates a network of stable microscopic air bubbles, thus diminishing the phenomena of capillarity. In fresh concrete, Admix GEL A produces some plasticizing effect which allows the reduction of water demand by approximately 6% and enhancement in workability retention. Admix GEL A improves frost resistance of concrete. Admix GEL A prevents bleeding and improves cohesion. The consolidation of the plastic concrete becomes better enabling the hardened concrete to be denser and develop a waterproofing effect. This product has been developed specially to resist water permeability in hardened concrete and to secure excellent surface finish and limit the risk of errors due to excessive dosage.

DOSAGE RATES

Dosing rates ranges from 60 to 300 ml/100 kg of cement. Special laboratory trials should be carried out to define the optimum dosage needed to obtain the required air content. Special considerations are to be taken while dispensing Admix GEL A.

PRECAUTIONS The maximum efficiency will be determined after a test of suitability. The entrained air is essentially a false fine aggregate. One must consider it as such and reduce the quantity of sand corresponding to the additional volume of entrained air. The amount of entrained air must be verified periodically in concrete, since it varies with the nature of the aggregate and W/C ratio.

SCOPE OF USE Admix GEL A is suitable for large areas of concrete where damage by frost or shrinkage cracking is likely to happen. Admix GEL A is suitable to use with various cement types, including ordinary portland cement and concrete made with silica fume, GGBS, and fly ash in the following areas: • Paving of motor-ways • Airport runways • Barriers and reservoirs • Sea works • Large structures • Correction of grain-size distribution of natural

186

Clear Brown Liquid 1.01 ± 0.01

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

PROPERTIES

Edition: 08/10-A **Available only in MENA

Appearance Specific gravity

PACKAGING Admix GEL A is supplied in: Bulk, barrels, and small casks

STORAGE Admix GEL A can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

187

Admix GEL A

Admix GEL P

HEALTH & SAFETY

PRODUCT

Admix GEL P is powder air-entraining agent of modified resins. It is specifically designed for concrete exposed to freeze/thaw conditions.

define the optimum dosage needed to obtain the required air content. Special considerations are to be taken while dispensing Admix GEL A.

PROPERTIES

PACKAGING

AIR-ENTRAINING AGENT IN POWDER FORM

• Admix GEL P can entrain 2% to 6% air volume in the concrete. It produces an air-void system of microscopic air bubbles that remains stable in the plastic concrete enabling the improvement of frost durability of the concrete. • Less mixing water can be used per cubic meter of concrete and overall workability is improved. • Minimizes bleeding and segregation.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

Admix GEL P is packed in 1 kg plastic bag.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains very fine powder which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning thoroughly with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

SCOPE OF USE • • • • •

Ready-mixed concrete Structural concrete Mass concrete construction Paving concrete Exterior concrete work exposed to freeze/thaw conditions

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS

NOTE

Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

Clear Brown Liquid 1.05 Zero to BS 5075

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Admix GEL P is typically introduced during concrete mixing. The amount to be used will vary depending on type of cement, fineness of sand, temperature, mix design, etc. Concrete mixtures must be tested regularly to confirm that the proper air content is achieved. For adequate resistance to freezing and thawing, the volume of entrained air should be about 4% to 6%, depending on the maximum size of aggregates. Above these values, a reduction in mechanical strength can be noted.

Edition: 08/10-A

Edition: 06/07-A **Available only in MENA

DOSAGE RATES

Dosing rates ranges from 60 to 300 ml/100 kg of cement. Special laboratory trials should be carried out to

188

189

Admix SEC

WATER REPELLENT / HYDROPHOBIC ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

The total concrete mixing water will be reduced by 20% before Admix SEC is added. During the mixing, adjust the plasticity by adding small quantities of water, until required plasticity is reached.

Admix SEC is a water repellent with plasticizing effect. Added to the mixing water of concrete, it deflocculates the cement particles and reduces the water surface tension, leading to better workability, complete hydration of cement, and appreciable reduction of the mixing water. Admix SEC is chloride free and soluble in water in any proportions. Admix SEC helps to prevent permeability and increase water tightness properties of concrete with its special components.

Edition: 06/07-A **Available only in MENA

DOSAGE RATES 1.0 to 1.20 liters per 100 Kg of cement.

PACKAGING Admix SEC is supplied in: Bulk, barrels, small casks

PROPERTIES

STORAGE

• Admix SEC gives concrete and mortars lasting water tightness against capillary bleeding and pressurized water. • Admix SEC reduces the bad effects of shrinking and cracking. • It prevents sweating, segregation and lost of laitance. • It gets a better casing of steel without corrosion. • Used with unchanged W/CM ratio, Admix SEC improves the workability and the compactness of fresh concrete, and increases the mechanical strengths.

Admix SEC can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

SCOPE OF USE

QUALITY STATEMENT

Suitable in the casting of: foundation concrete, tanks, swimming pools, dams, river locks, road works, ready-mixed or pumped concrete. Admix SEC can be used as a plasticiser in rendering mortars.

DISCLAIMER

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity Chloride content

disclosure, use, dissemination or copying (either whole or partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit.

Brown Liquid 1.050 Zero to BS 5075

APPLICABLE STANDARDS Complies with 18334 standard. BS EN 934, Part 2.

NOTE

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorized

APPLICATION Admix SEC is to be added to the mixing water.

190

191

Admix SEC E

INTEGRAL WATERPROOFING ADMIXTURE IN LIQUID FORM

PRODUCT Admix SEC E is an integral waterproofer in liquid form suitable for mortar and concrete. This highly efficient admixture reacts with free lime in the cement to form water repellent particles. Mortar and concrete treated are more resistant to capillary pressure and less subject to infiltration of water under pressure. Admix SEC E does not significantly modify the characteristics of the fresh concrete and mortar, nor the compressive strength. Admix SEC E is compatible with all types of cement except aluminates. It may be also associated with other admixtures for concrete (plasticizer, superplasticizer, …). In this case, trials on site are recommended.

VOC and Formadehyde ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS

PACKAGING

Edition: 11/10-A

Admix SEC E is supplied in: 1000, 200, 25, 20 and 4 lit. drums.

STORAGE Can be stored up 6 months from manufacturing date, in original packaging, non open, protected from heat and frost. When stored over a long period, before use, agitate it lightly or circulate it using a pump to make it completely homogenous.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity at 20˚C Chloride content pH

NOTE

Admix SEC E is completely miscible in water. It must be added to the mixing water.

0.5 to 1.5 kg per 100 kg of the cement.

Concrete for foundations under water table Concrete for reservoirs, tanks, … Sealing grouts for tanks Concrete and mortar in regular contact with water Canals for irrigation Sand / cement plaster

Composition

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

DOSAGE RATES

SCOPE OF USE • • • • • •

Admix SEC E

Specific grades of hydrophobic additives White Liquid Around 1 NIL 7

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

None (< 10µg/l)

DISCLAIMER

PERFORMANCES

192

193

Admix SEC L

WATER REPELLENT / HYDROPHOBIC ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

NOTE

RETARDING EFFECT

At dosage rate higher than 1.5% of cement mass, the delay for the beginning of setting of concrete can be increased, depending on the quantity of cement used.

PROPERTIES • Admix SEC L allows reduction of the Water / Cement ratio by 8 to 12%. Compare to a reference specimen, for the same workability, it improves the compactness of fresh concrete and increases slightly the mechanical strength • Admix SEC L gives to concrete lasting water tightness against capillary bleeding and pressurized water • Admix SEC L reduces shrinkage • It prevents sweating, segregation and lost of laitance • It gets a better casing of steel

Edition: 09/08-A **Available only in MENA

PACKAGING Admix SEC L is supplied in: Bulk 200 and 25 lit. drums

STORAGE Admix SEC L can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

SCOPE OF USE Recommended for use in structural concrete such as: Foundation concrete, tanks, swimming pools, dams, river locks, road works…

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity

DOSAGE RATES

Recommended dosage for waterproofing effect: 0.5 kg per 100 kg cement. If more plasticity is required, the dosage may be increased up to 1.5 kg per 100 kg of cement.

Admix SEC L is a water-reducer plasticizer and waterproofing agent for concrete. Added to the mixing water in concrete, it deflocculates the cement particles and reduces the surface water tension, leading to reduction of the mixing water, greater workability, and complete hydration of cement. Admix SEC L is chloride-free and soluble in water.

Admix SEC L

Brown Liquid 1.06 ± 0.03

QUALITY STATEMENT

ASTM C 494 Type A & D

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

DISCLAIMER

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Admix SEC L is to be added to the mixing water. The total concrete mixing water should be reduced by 5% to 10% before the introduction of Admix SEC L. During the mixing, adjust the consistency of the mixture by adding small quantities of water, until the required plasticity is reached.

194

195

Admix SEC P

WATER REPELLENT / HYDROPHOBIC ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

PACKAGING

Admix SEC P is a waterproofing admixture in powder form, designed for use in all cement-based applications, such as: • plastering and rendering exposed to rain • mounting mortar • joint grout • screed • concrete iIt minimises penetration of moisture into the mortar. It improves the workability of fresh mortar, plaster, or concrete.

Admix SEC P is packed in 1 kg plastic bag

STORAGE One year in dry condition of original packaging

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains very fine powder which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes, and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning thoroughly with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance White Powder Specific gravity 0.8 Solubility Partial in water Capillarity 3.2 g/dm².min½ Cl-content NIL Admix SEC P is compatible with all portland cements.

DISCLAIMER

Capillarity at 28 days

Capilarity

Control

6.75 g/dm².min½

Control + Admix SEC P

3.2 g/dm².min½

NOTE

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix SEC P is dosed for one bag of 50 kg cement: • Spread the 1-kg bag over cement and aggregates. Usual mixture proportions shall be respected. Example for mortar: 1 part of cement for 3 parts of clean and selected sand. Do not pre- dissolve it in the mixing water • Add the quantity of water required and mix well. • Apply your mortar on a well-prepared substrate: clean, free from dust and all traces of oil or laitance. Few hours before apply, dampen the support. • Cure and protect the mortar as usual.

Edition:06/07-A

Admix cemtex

EXPANDING & PLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

well for 4 additional minutes to achieve a complete dispersion of the admixture. The concrete should be placed immediately. The work area should be protected from direct sunshine or high wind.

Admix cemtex is an admixture for cementitious grout that can be incorporated whenever an expansion is required. Admix cemtex is highly recommended for bedding, filling cracks, jointing, duct grouting, and void filling. Admix cemtex produces controlled expansion in cement grout and maintains high water retention. Admix cemtex also allows reduction of water content which increases compressive strength of the grout.

DOSAGE RATES Admix PORTLAND WATER cemtex CEMENT SLURRY 0.5 kg 50 Kg 20 Lit MORTAR 0.5 kg 50 Kg 20 Lit

PROPERTIES • • • • • •

Expanding effect Suitable for mortar and concrete Water reducer which improves strength of grout Ready to be mixed with a 50 kg cement bag Plasticizing effect for a free flowing grout Do not contain metallic iron: no risk of corrosion or deterioration due to rust expansion in the grout

Color

Chloride content Expansion

Admix cemtex is packed in 0.5 kg bag, ready to be mixed with a 50 kg bag of cement

STORAGE Can be stored up 1 year from manufacturing date, in original packaging, non open, protected from humidity.

Specific Additives Off white powder

NIL 1% to 5%, depending on type of cement

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains very fine powder that releases alkalis when mixed with water that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes, and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning thoroughly with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention. The product is nonflammable.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE When used in cement grout (with or without sand) Prepare a homogenous mixture with the cement and water. Then add 0.5 kg bag Admix cemtex for each 50 kg Portland cement. Mix well for few minutes until the admixture has been completely dispersed. If required, add sand and complete the mixture. The cavity to be filled must be clean, sound, dust free, and free from oil. Injection equipment can be used for neat cement grout. The work area should be protected from direct sunshine or high wind.

DISCLAIMER

When used in portland cement concrete Add Admix cemtex to the ready to use concrete: 0.5 kg bag for each 50 kg of portland cement. Mix

196

50 Kg

PACKAGING

CHARACTERISTICS Composition

SAND

197

Admix cemtex

Admix cemtex M

only. For more information, please contact the company’s office in your location.

PRODUCT

EXPANDING & PLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

portland cement. Mix well for an additional 4 minutes to achieve complete dispersion of the admixture. The concrete should be placed immediately.

Admix cemtex M is an admixture for cementitious grout when an expansion is required. Admix cemtex M is highly recommended for use in bedding, cable grouting, filling cracks, jointing, duct grouting, and void filling. Admix cemtex M produces controlled expansion in cement grouts and maintains high water retention. Admix cemtex M also allows reduction of water content which increases compressive strength of the grout.

Edition: 06/07-A

PACKAGING Admix cemtex M is packed in 3 kg bag, ready to be mixed with 50 kg bag of cement.

STORAGE Can be stored up 1 year from manufacturing date, in original packaging, non open, protected from humidity.

PROPERTIES • • • • • •

Expanding effect Suitable for mortar and concrete Water reducer which improves grout strength Ready to be mixed with 50 kg cement bag Plasticizing effect for a free flowing grout Does not contain metallic iron: no risk of corrosion or deterioration due to rust expansion in the grout

CHARACTERISTICS Composition

Specific Additives

Color

Off white powder

Chloride content Expansion

NIL 1% to 5%, depending on type of cement

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE When used in cement grout Prepare a homogenous mixture with 50 kg cement + 15 to 17 liters of potable water + 3 kg Admix cemtex M. Mix well for few minutes until the admixture has been completely dispersed. The grout should be poured within 20 minutes of mixing. The cavity to be filled must be clean, sound, dust free, and free from oil. Injection equipment can be used for cement grouting. The work area should be protected from direct sunshine or high wind.

NOTE

When used in concrete 3 kg of Admix cemtex M should be added for each batch of ready-mix concrete containing 50 kg

198

Edition: 06/07-A

199

Admix CR 152

HIGH PERFORMANCE RETARDING/PLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT

added to the concrete mix during the mixing cycle at the same time as the water. No extension to normal mixing time is required.

Admix CR 152 is a high performance retarding admixture developed to maintain high workability retention and to increase the initial and final setting times of concrete especially in high ambient temperature (hot weather concrete).

DOSAGE Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CR 152 for a particular mix. A dosage of 150 to 350 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials is recommended. This may be changed to higher dosage in high ambient and mix temperature conditions.

PROPERTIES Admix CR 152: • Allows extra time for concrete casting in mass structures and densely reinforced structural elements, thus reducing the risk of cold joint development. • Improves surface finish and minimizes early development of plastic shrinkage cracking. • Increases the ultimate strength of the concrete.

EFFECTS OF OVER DOSING A severe over dose of Admix CR 152 will result in the following: • Delay of the initial and final set • Increase in workability Providing it is properly cured, the ultimate strength of the concrete will not be adversely affected and will generally be higher than of the normal concrete without Admix CR 152.

SCOPE OF USE Admix CR 152 is ideal to use in hot weather conditions where slump retention over time is important for transport and placement of concrete. • Transported concrete • General reinforced concrete • Ready-mix concrete • Heavy prefabrication • Pumped concrete • Concrete piling

COMPATIBILITY Admix CR 152 can be used in all types of portland and sulfate-resisting cements and concrete with cementitious materials used as cement replacement. Admix CR 152 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CR 152, they must be dispensed separately. Consult the company’s technical dept. for advice.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

liquid

Color

light yellowish

Specific gravity at 20˚ C Chloride content Air entrainment

1.103 - 1.108 Zero to BS 5075 Up to 1% depending on the dosage and mix design

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE Admix CR 152, a retarding concrete admixture manufactured to the following specification: Admix CR 152 can be used in all concrete mixes as mentioned, at dosage between 150 and 350 ml per 100 kg of cementitious materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS Admix CR 152 complies with: ASTM C 494 Type B BS 5075 Part – 1, BS EN 934, Part 2.

DISPENSING It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment. Such equipment can be supplied by the company.

NSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Admix CR 152 is totally miscible in water. It is to be

200

Admix CR 152

PACKAGING Admix CR 152 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels. Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE Admix CR 152 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

201

Admix tard B

Admix eco-tard 100

RETARDING ADMIXTURE

WATER REDUCING & RETARDING & admixture FOR CONCRETE

PRODUCT

PACKAGING

Admix tard B is a retarding admixture based on natural polysaccharide chemically modified. Its dispersing action on the finer elements of concrete is particularly high. Admix tard B allows the retention of the original slump over time in addition to a secondary effect of a plasticizer. Admix tard B is used in hot weather conditions where the slump retention over time is required for transportation. An improvement of the density of concrete, and a reduction in capillary absorption will be noticed, in addition to the increase of mechanical properties after 28 days.

Admix tard B is supplied in: Bulk 200 and 25 lit. drums

STORAGE Admix tard B can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

SCOPE OF USE Admix tard B is recommended for all types of cements, in the following areas: • General reinforced concrete • Ready to use and pumped concrete • Heavy prefabrication • Prestressed concrete

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

liquid

Color

yellowish

Specific gravity

1.10 - 0.01

DISCLAIMER

APPLICABLE STANDARDS Applicable standard: ASTM C 494 Type B

NSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Admix tard B is totally miscible in water. It should be dispensed directly into the mixing water. The quantity of water is determined as a function of the plasticity desired.

NOTE

DOSAGE RATES 0.1 to 0.6 liters per 100 kg of cement The maximum efficiency of Admix tard B will be determined after trial mixes.

Edition: 08/07-A

202

• Concrete with high resistance against aggressive media • Long distance transport • Hot weather concreting • Highly durable concrete • Mass concrete • Pumped concrete

PRODUCT Admix eco-tard 100 is a sustainable multi-component admixture which is carefully formulated to enhance the quality and performance characteristics of plastic and hardened concrete. Its unique chemistry results in more complete and efficient hydration of the cementitious materials in the concrete matrix, and provides improved strength, durability, finishability and overall appearance.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific Gravity at 25°C Chloride content

Admix eco-tard 100 supports the sustainability of concrete by extending its range of economic and useful applications. Its sustainable properties at the material production level continuing to make further reductions in their environmental impacts, through plant efficiencies, technology uptake and embracing an environmental awareness culture.

Liquid (Dark Brown) 1.10 ± 0.03 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Types D & G BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix eco-tard 100 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, preferably after approximately 70% of mixing water addition.

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: from 200 to 900ml per 100 kg of cementituous content. Dosage above the recommended values can be employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials.

PROPERTIES • Improves the quality of concrete by decreasing water-cement ratio for a given workability • Increases early and ultimate compressive and flexural strengths • Provides superior concrete finishability • Improves workability and ease of placement and consolidation • Improves pumpability of concrete • Provides uniform control of setting characteristics • Reduces cracking and shrinkage • Increases relative freeze-thaw durability

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of Admix eco-tard 100 may result in the following: • Delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Impair consistency & cohesion Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

SCOPE OF USE Admix eco-tard 100 is recommended for all areas of use of concrete in the ready-mix industry: • Super slump retaining concrete with equal or less water content than conventional admixtures • Concrete mixtures containing silica fume, GGBS, or PFA

COMPATIBILITY

Admix eco-tard 100 is compatible with all types of Portland cement, class C and F fly ash, silica fume,

203

Admix eco-tard 100

Admix eco-tard 120

WATER REDUCING & RETARDING & admixture FOR CONCRETE

ground granulated blast furnace slag, calcium chloride, fibers and approved air entraining, accelerating, retarding, and high-range water-reducing admixtures. For best results, each admixture must be dispensed separately into the concrete mix. Admix eco-tard 100 is compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical dept. for advice.

PACKAGING

Admix eco-tard 100 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers

STORAGE

Admix eco-tard 100 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

HEALTH & SAFETY

is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit.

PRODUCT

Edition: 03/11-A

Admix eco-tard 120 is a sustainable multi-component admixture which is carefully formulated to enhance the quality and performance characteristics of plastic and hardened concrete. Its unique chemistry results in more complete and efficient hydration of the cementitious materials in the concrete matrix, and provides improved strength, durability, finishability and overall appearance.

media • Long distance transport • Hot weather concreting • Highly durable concrete • Mass concrete • Pumped concrete

CHARACTERISTICS

Admix eco-tard 120 supports the sustainability of concrete by extending its range of economic and useful applications. Its sustainable properties at the material production level continuing to make further reductions in their environmental impacts, through plant efficiencies, technology uptake and embracing an environmental awareness culture.

Appearance Specific Gravity at 25°C Chloride content

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

STANDARDS

ASTM C 494 Types A & D BS EN 934-2 BS 5075: Part 3

Admix eco-tard 120 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, preferably after approximately 70% of mixing water addition.

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: from 200 to 1100ml per 100 kg of cementituous content. Dosage above the recommended values can be employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled delay in setting and workability should be determined by in-situ trials

PROPERTIES

QUALITY STATEMENT

• Improves the quality of concrete by decreasing water-cement ratio for a given workability • Increases early and ultimate compressive and flexural strengths • Provides superior concrete finishability • Improves workability and ease of placement and consolidation • Improves pumpability of concrete • Provides uniform control of setting characteristics • Reduces cracking and shrinkage • Increases relative freeze-thaw durability

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE

Overdose of Admix eco-tard 120 may result in the following: • Delay of initial setting • Higher workability • Impair consistency & cohesion Dependant upon the level of overdose, concrete mixture details and conditions involved.

SCOPE OF USE Admix eco-tard 120 is recommended for all areas of use of concrete in the ready-mix industry: • Super slump retaining concrete with equal or less water content than conventional admixtures • Concrete mixtures containing silica fume, GGBS, or PFA • Concrete with high resistance against aggressive

NOTE

The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorized disclosure, use dissemination or copying (either whole or partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains,

204

Liquid (Dark Brown) 1.10 ± 0.03 NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

COMPATIBILITY

Admix eco-tard 120 is compatible with all types of Portland cement, class C and F fly ash, silica fume,

205

Admix eco-tard 120

Admix fast

PRODUCT

SETTING AND HARDENING CHLORIDE-FREE ACCELERATOR

DOSAGE RATES

Admix fast is a chloride-free, setting and hardening accelerator for special application concretes. Added in the mixing water, it allows fast form removal and faster construction process, whether in prefabrication or on site casting.

Admix eco-tard 120 is compatible with naphthalene sulfonate- and melamine sulfonate-based superplasticizers. Consult SODAMCO’s technical dept. for advice.

Recommended ratio: from 2 to 5% of the cement weight.

PACKAGING

Admix fast is supplied in: 1000 lit. totes - 200 lit. drums - 25 lit. gallons

PROPERTIES

STORAGE

If Admix fast is used in the proportion of 2% to 3% of the cement mass, the setting time will be stimulated, thus reducing the beginning and the end of the setting by 40% to 60% at + 5°C compared to the reference test. If it is used in the proportion of 3.5% of cement mass, the mechanical strength will not be altered, and the beginning of the setting will be identical to what is obtained at normal temperature (20°C). Admix fast speeds up formwork rotation and can be used with heated concrete.

PACKAGING

Admix eco-tard 120 is supplied in: 1000 liter containers.

STORAGE

Admix eco-tard 120 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

HEALTH & SAFETY

Admix fast can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

HEALTH & SAFETY

SCOPE OF USE

QUALITY STATEMENT

• Concreting in cold weather • Heavy or light prefabrication • Dry mix shotcrete

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

QUALITY STATEMENT

Specific gravity Cl-content pH Storage

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

Yellow liquid

DISCLAIMER

1.220 - 0.05 < 0.1g/lit. (NIL) 8±1 Down to 5°C in tightly closed drums

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Applicable standard: ASTM C 494 Type C

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

NOTE

MIXING Add Admix fast to the mixing water which will be reduced by 3% to 5%. PRECAUTIONS • Never mix concrete when the aggregates are frozen. • In cold weather the cement content must not be lower than 300 kg/m³.

NOTE

TESTS We recommend carrying out preliminary test before using our product on site.

206

207

Admix fast C

SETTING AND HARDENING CHLORIDE-FREE ACCELERATOR

PRODUCT

DOSAGE RATES

Recommended dosage: from 1% to 4% of cement mass. The same ratio should be reduced from the mixing water.

Admix fast C is a chloride-free, setting and hardening accelerator for shotcrete and reinforced concrete. Added in the mixing water, it allows fast form removal and faster construction process, whether in prefabrication or on site placement.

PACKAGING

Admix fast C is supplied in: 1000, 200, 25 and 20 lit. drums.

PROPERTIES If Admix fast C is used in the proportion of 1% to 2% of cement mass, cement hydration, and setting will be accelerated, thus reducing at 5°C the initial and final setting times by 40% to 60% compared to the reference test. If it is used in the proportion of 3% of cement mass, mechanical properties will not be affected, and the beginning of setting will be identical to properties obtained at standard temperature of 20°C. Admix fast C speeds up formwork rotation and can be used with heated concrete.

STORAGE

SCOPE OF USE

QUALITY STATEMENT

Admix fast C can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

HEALTH & SAFETY

In case of frost, the product recovers its properties after progressive thawing and homogenizing by agitation. In case of contact with skin or eyes, rinse thoroughly with water. If irritation persists, seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention. All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

• Cold-weather concreting • Heavy or light prefabrication • admixture to dry-mix shotcrete

CHARACTERISTICS

DISCLAIMER

Appearance

Transparent liquid

Specific gravity Cl-content pH Storage

1.30 ± 0.01 < 0.1g/lit. (NIL) 8±1 Down to - 20°C in tightly closed drums

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Applicable standard: ASTM C 494 Type C, E

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

208

PRODUCT

temperatures before applying coatings.

Admix fast C 200 is a setting and hardening accelerator and an anti-freezing compound. Mixed with concrete or mortar, Admix fast C 200 makes it possible to concrete even when a drop of temperature under 0oC is expected. Admix fast C 200 is compatible with all types of cement, except aluminates cement.

PACKAGING Admix fast C 200 is supplied in: 200 and 25 lit. drums

STORAGE Admix fast C 200 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

SCOPE OF USE The main use of Admix fast C 200 is in prefabrication to speed up mould rotation. Admix fast C 200 is also used on site when fast setting and hardening in concrete is necessary, for example prior to cold weather conditions, or to speed up the construction process.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

Uncolored liquid

Specific gravity

1.35 ± 0.01

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS Applicable standard: ASTM C 494 Type C.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Do not use with under-proportioned concrete, because the lower amount of cement is, the slower the setting. Avoid using Admix fast C 200 in concrete floors in which water pipes, and heating pipes or electric conduits are embedded. Preliminary tests on the product are recommended before use of it on site.

NOTE

From 0.5% to 3% of the cement mass. It is recommended not to exceed 0.8% whenever steel is used in concrete.

Edition: 11/10-A **Available only in MENA

TESTS It is recommend to carry out preliminary testing before using the product on site.

CHLORINATED SETTING ACCELERATOR

MIXING Add Admix fast C to the mixing water. PRECAUTIONS • Never concrete when the aggregates are frozen. • In cold weather the proportion must not be lower than 300 kg/m³.

Admix fast C 200

DISCLAIMER

DOSAGE RATES

NOTE

PRECAUTIONS Admix fast C 200 may be used in mortar renderings or course mortars, but these renderings should never be applied on frozen backgrounds. If the temperature has been very low for a few days, it is recommended to wait 4 to 5 days with positive

Edition: 06/07-A

209

Admix anti-freeze

ANTI-FREEZE AGENT FOR CONCRETING IN COLD WEATHER

PRODUCT

PACKAGING

Admix anti-freeze is chloride-free; it permits placement and curing of concrete below the freezing point of water. It has no tendency to cause corrosion of embedded reinforcing steel.

Admix anti-freeze is supplied in: 200 and 25 lit. drums

HEALTH & SAFETY In case of contact with skin or eyes, rinse thoroughly with water. If irritation persists, seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention.

PROPERTIES When concrete freezes before the mixture reaches the minimum strength, the matrix of the Portland cement concrete may experience irreparable internal fracturing; this reduces the strength of the mixture. Admix anti-freeze protects the mixture in the structure until the desired strength and durability characteristics are achieved.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

SCOPE OF USE • Cold-weather concreting • Heavy or light prefabrication • admixture to dry-mix shotcrete

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

Transparent liquid

Specific gravity Cl - content Storage

1.280 ± 0.01 (NIL) Down to -20ºC in tightly closed drums

Admix SRA 2000

SHRINKAGE REDUCING admixture

PRODUCT

• Allows greater joint spacing • Minimizes risk of shrinkage for the same joint spacing • Impact on compressive and flexural strengths • Reduced risk of cracks • Good adhesion - ease of pumping. No bleeding • Good workability - excellent surface appearance • Minimal bleed water - excellent concrete quality • High elastic modulus - superior load bearing capacity • Impact on flow ability • Impact on resistance to freezing & thawing • Reduces carbonation • Reduces compressive creep

Admix SRA 2000 Shrinkage Reducing admixture is a liquid admixture for concrete or mortar which significantly reduces the plastic and drying shrinkage in cementitious materials and help to control the curling, thus limiting the risks on job sites. Admix SRA 2000 impacts three types of shrinkage: • Plastic shrinkage • Drying shrinkage • Autogeneous shrinkage It gives a homogeneous and non segregating concrete, mortar and grout.

WORKING MECHANISM Admix SRA 2000 contains no expansive materials, but instead acts chemically to attack the primary mechanism causing shrinkage. Drying shrinkage of concrete is a function of several mechanisms. The primary causes derive where internal relative humidity is in excess of 40% at the surface tension of water. As the water filled pores lose moisture, curved menisci are formed and the surface tension of the water pulls the walls of the pores. Admix SRA 2000 reduces the surface tension. With reduced surface tension, the force pulling in on the walls of the pores is reduced and the resultant shrinkage strain is reduced.

CHARACTERISTICS

NOTE

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

MIXING Add Admix anti-freeze to the mixing water. PRECAUTIONS • Never mix concrete when the aggregates are frozen. • In cold weather the proportion of cement must not be lower than 300 kg/m³.

• Efficiency in plastic, drying and chemical shrinkage reaction • Significantly reduces drying shrinkage by as much as 80% at 28 days, and up to 50% at one year or beyond as measured per ASTM C157 • Reduces the potential for slab curling • Improved impermeability, resulting in improved concrete durability

Recommended dosage: from 0.5% to 2.5% of cement weight. The same ratio should be reduced from the mixing water.

210

NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2 1.01

Admix SRA 2000 should be dispensed after all concrete constituents are charged in the central mixer, must not be allowed to come into contact with other admixtures prior to being mixed into the concrete. The mix water content should be reduced to account for the quantity of Admix SRA 2000 used. It may also be added into the transit mixer at the point of discharge, but an additional mixing time of 5 minutes is required and the concrete should be visually verified for uniformity.

PROPERTIES

DOSAGE RATES

Transparent liquid

Chloride content Specific gravity @ 25°C

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Edition: 01/08-A **Available only in MENA

TESTS It is recommended carrying out preliminary testing before using the product on site.

Appearance

DOSAGE RATES

Range of dosage rates: depending on the application, the dosage of Admix SRA 2000 varies from 0.5 to 2.0% of the binder weight. For production of a normal

211

Admix multi 250

Admix SRA 2000

MULTIFUNCTIONAL CONCRETE admixture

with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

flooring concrete, the recommended dosage is approximately 1%. Dosage above the recommended values can be practiced unless adequately tested. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled drying shrinkage should be determined by in-situ trials.

DISCLAIMER

EFFECT OF OVERDOSE Overdose of Admix SRA 2000 may result in the following: • Slight Air entrainment • Minimal compressive strength loss • May increase bleed time • Slight delay in initial setting Dependant upon level of overdose, concrete mix details and conditions involved.

NOTE

COMPATIBILITY Admix SRA 2000 is easily miscible in dry-mix mortars / wet concrete and is compatible with a broad range of cement mixes and additives. Consult SODAMCO’s Technical Dept for further info.

Edition: 06/07-A

PACKAGING Admix SRA 2000 is supplied in; 1000 liters containers 210 liters containers

STORAGE Admix SRA 2000 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures. Storage tanks should be cleaned annually.

PRODUCT

Admix multi 250 is an effective multifunctional concrete liquid admixture based on calcium nitrate specially designed to regulate the setting of concrete, enhance strength development, provide protection Admix multi 250 is compatible with all Portland cement, supplementary cementitious materials, and conventional plasticizer - super-plasticizer admixtures.

constituents are charged in the central mixer. Admix multi 250 can be added to the mixing water. Never mix concrete when the aggregates are frozen. In cold weather the proportion of cement must not be lower than 300 kg/m³. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix multi 250, they must be dispensed separately.

PROPERTIES

DOSAGE RATES

• Inhibitor against chloride induced corrosion of steel. • Set accelerator • Counteraction of retardation by plasticizers while maintaining rheology of the concrete mix • Long term strength enhancer • Anti-freeze admixture or winter concreting admixture

Range of dosage rates & applications: • Corrosion inhibiting properties from 3% to 5% by weight of cementitious content (it is directly related to expected chloride concentration) • Antifreeze properties from 0.5% to 1% by weight of cementitious content • Early strength enhancement properties from 0.5% to 1.5% by weight of cementitious content • Counteracting the retardation of concrete from 0.25% to 0.75% by weight of cementitious content • Set acceleration properties from 1% to 2% by weight of cementitious content • Slip forming rate optimized by 0.25 % by weight of cementitious content.

SCOPE OF USE

Admix multi 250 is recommended for all areas of use of concrete in the ready-mix, precast & manufactured concrete products industry: • Parking structures • Marine structures • Bridges • Balconies where chloride salts are presents • Concrete streets and highways • Concrete exposed to corrosive environments • Restoration and repair of all reinforced concrete • Cold-weather concreting • Heavy or light prefabrication • admixture to dry-mix • Shotcrete

Dosage above the recommended values can be employed. Still, the required dosage for a specific job with controlled properties in setting, strength and workability should be determined by in-situ trials. admixture demand varies with w/b of the concrete, cement type, pozzolanic materials and ambient temperature. Trials are to be conducted prior to use in order to determine required performance, including workability retention, setting, and strength development.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity at 25°C Non Volatile Content Chloride content BS 5075/EN 934-2

HEALTH & SAFETY In case of frost, the product recovers its properties after progressive thawing and homogenizing by agitation. In case when contact with skin or eyes, rinse thoroughly with water. If irritation persists, seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention. Please refer to material safety data sheet for further details.

Liquid (transparent) 1.285 ± 0.03 30 ± 2% NIL– BS 5075/EN 934-2

PACKAGING

Admix multi 250 is supplied in 20 liters pails, 200 liter drums and 1000 liters totes.

STORAGE

Admix multi 250 can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

STANDARDS BS EN 934-2 ASTM C1582

QUALITY STATEMENT

HEALTH & SAFETY

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

All our products are manufactured to comply

Admix multi 250 should be dispensed after all concrete

212

213

In case of frost, the product recovers its properties after progressive thawing and homogenizing by agitation.

Admix multi 250

Admix 205 PVA

In case of contact with skin or eyes, rinse thoroughly with water. If irritation persists, seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seemedical attention.

PRODUCT

PVA – MULTI-PURPOSE BONDING AGENT

clean sand. Add Admix 205 PVA to the mix at the ratio of 5% to 10% of cement weight.

Admix 205 PVA is a synthetic resin emulsion (PVA), non-corrosive and non toxic, used as a bonding agent for mortar, rendering and concrete on all surfaces, even in damp atmosphere. Admix 205 PVA may be used as a primer or an admixture for mortar, plaster and concrete. It increases waterproofing and curing effects, and improves plasticity.

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

PACKAGING Admix 205 PVA is supplied in 1 liter, 5 liters , 20 liters, 125 liters and 200 liters.

STORAGE

SCOPE OF USE

DISCLAIMER

6 months from manufacturing date, in dry conditions and original packaging. To be stored protected against frost. In case of frost, Admix 205 PVA recovers its properties after progressive thawing.

• Bonding of thin coating on smooth concrete without scabbing • Bonding of thin topping on floor slab without scabbing • Bonding between 2 phases of concreting • Repair of joint spalling • admixture to spatter-dash key slurry • Repairs of toppings • Bonding additive for mortar and grouting tiles

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Avoid prolonged contact with skin. Wear protective gear for hands & eyes. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

CHARACTERISTICS

NOTE

Appearance

White liquid

Density at 20 ˚C Viscosity Brookfield pH

1 7000 Cps at 25°C Around 6

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Substrates must be clean, sound and free from dust, laitance and greasy matter. Admix 205 PVA must be dissolved in the mixing water. Never work below + 5°C and beyond + 45°C.

Edition: 03/11-A

Bonding new concrete to old concrete Mix 1 part of Admix 205 PVA with 1 part of water and 2 parts of cement (by weight). Apply with a brush, then bond the new concrete while the slurry is still tacky.

NOTE

Key coat Add to the key coat around 2 kg of Admix 205 PVA per 50 kg cement. Apply the slurry uniformly and cure it for 3 days.

Edition: 11/10-A

Plaster, mortar and grout Make a conventional dry mix using screened and

214

215

Admix 210 PV

PVA-BASED BONDING AGENT FOR MORTAR AND CONCRETE

PRODUCT

clean sand. Add Admix 210 PV to the mix at the ratio of 5% to 10% of cement weight.

Admix 210 PV is a synthetic resin emulsion, non-corrosive and non toxic, used as a bonding agent for mortar, rendering and concrete on all surfaces, even in damp atmosphere. Admix 210 PV may be used as a primer or an admixture for mortar, plaster and concrete. It increases waterproofing and curing effects, and improves plasticity.

PACKAGING Admix 210 PV is supplied in 20 kg, 200 kg drum.

STORAGE 1 year in dry conditions and original packaging. To be stored protected against frost. In case of frost, Admix 210 PV recovers its properties after progressive thawing.

SCOPE OF USE • Bonding of thin coating on smooth concrete without scabbing • Bonding of thin topping on floor slab without scabbing • Bonding between 2 phases of concreting • Repair of joint spalling • Admixture to spatter-dash key slurry • Repairs of toppings • Bonding additive for mortar and grouting tiles

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

White liquid

Density at 20 ˚C Viscosity Brookfield pH

Around 1.2 10 000 Cps at 25°C Around 4.5

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Substrates must be clean, sound and free from dust, laitance and greasy matter. Admix 210 PV must be dissolved in the mixing water. Never work below + 5°C and beyond + 45°C. Bonding new concrete to old concrete Mix 1 part of Admix 210 PV with 1 part of water. Apply with a brush or a spray, then bond the new concrete while the solution is still tacky.

NOTE

Key coat Add to the key coat around 4 kg of Admix 210 PV per 50 kg cement. Apply the slurry uniformly and cure it for 3 days.

Edition: 06/07-A *Available only in GCC

Plaster, mortar and grout Make a conventional dry mix using screened and

Admix 215 PV

PVA-BASED BONDING AGENT FOR MORTAR AND CONCRETE

PRODUCT

clean sand. Add Admix 215 PV to the mix at the ratio of 5% to 10% of cement weight.

Admix 215 PV is a synthetic resin emulsion (PVA), non-corrosive and non toxic, used as a bonding agent for mortar, rendering and concrete on all surfaces, even in damp atmosphere. Admix 215 PV may be used as a primer or an admixture for mortar, plaster and concrete. It increases waterproofing and curing effects, and improves plasticity.

PACKAGING Admix 215 PV is supplied in 1 kg, 5 kg and 18 kg plastic pail. 125 kg or 200 kg drum.

SCOPE OF USE

STORAGE

6 months from manufacturing date, in dry conditions and original packaging. To be stored protected against frost. In case of frost, Admix 215 PV recovers its properties after progressive thawing.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

White liquid

Density at 20 ˚C Viscosity Brookfield pH

1 10 000 Cps at 25°C Around 4.5

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Substrates must be clean, sound and free from dust, laitance and greasy matter. Admix 215 PV must be dissolved in the mixing water. Never work below + 5°C and beyond + 45°C. Bonding new concrete to old concrete Mix 1 part of Admix 215 PV with 1 part of water and 2 parts of cement (by weight). Apply with a brush, then bond the new concrete while the slurry is still tacky.

NOTE

Key coat Add to the key coat around 2 kg of Admix 215 PV per 50 kg cement. Apply the slurry uniformly and cure it for 3 days.

Edition: 06/07-A **Available only in MENA

Plaster, mortar and grout Make a conventional dry mix using screened and

216

217

Admix 230 CH

PVA-BASED BONDING AGENT

PRODUCT

Plaster Mix Admix 230 CH to water in the proportion of 1:4 in volume. Use this solution to prepare a plaster with cement and sand in the usual proportions.

Admix 230 CH is a Polyvinyl Acetate emulsion (PVA) to be used as a multi-purpose bonding agent on plaster, concrete, soil screed and other substrate.

PROPERTIES

FLOOR SCREED Surface preparation The day before the topping application, the slab should be moistened all the way through without leaving water puddles. Key Slurry Mix Admix 230 CH and water 1:1 in volume. Use this solution to prepare a slurry with cement and coarse sand in the proportion of 1:1 weight. Mortar will be proportioned at 500kg/m³ cement. Apply the slurry on the slab uniformly with a brush, and let it rest. Topping mortar Mix Admix 230 CH and water in the proportion 1:2 in volume. Use this solution to prepare an earth moist mortar for the screed. Apply the screed mortar on the slurry to the required thickness, before the slurry dries up. Strongly float the screed on the slurry while still wet and level the surface. Do not mix the mortar in the mixer more than two minutes in order to avoid excessive occulted air in the mortar. After leveling the screed, protect the surface from sunshine or high wind by applying Cure WH or Cure Y 40 curing compound. The screed can be put in use after 8 days, but the final strength will be obtained at 28 days.

Used as an additive in mortars, it improves the workability, the compressive strength, and reduces porosity, cracking and shrinkage.

SCOPE OF USE • Bonding of fresh concrete or mortar on hardened concrete • Plasticizing effect on mortars • Improvement of mechanical strength of screeds • Resistance of screeds to wear, oils, cleaning agent • Additive to spatterdash key slurry

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

Milky White liquid

Density Viscosity pH Chloride content

1.05 ± 0.05 110 cP Brookfield 9 NIL

APPLICABLE STANDARD BS 5270

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SURFACE PREPARATION Surface must be clean, sound, free from all dirty and greasy matters, paints or plaster remains.

- 20°C to + 45°C. Stir always before use. Can be stored up to 6 months after manufacturing date, in original packaging.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

CONSUMPTION

PLASTERING AND RENDERING Spatterdash key slurry Mix Admix 230 CH and water in the proportion of 1/3 in volume. Use this solution to prepare a slurry with cement and coarse sand in the proportions of 1:1 in weight, Apply the slurry by dashing it mechanically or by hand on the wall. Curing is required for three days before the application of the plaster.

Slurry: Approx 100 g of Admix 230 CH per m². Topping mortar: 6% to 12% of the cement weight.

PACKAGING Admix 230 CH is supplied in: 20 lit. can. 200 lit. drums.

STORAGE Admix 240 LTX has a high storage stability from

218

219

Admix 225 MB

SBR LATEX-BASED BONDING AGENT

PRODUCT

PRODUCT PREPARATION Admix 225 MB liquid is directly added to a previously prepared mixture of cement/sand or cement/sand/ gravel and mixed either by hand or a power mixer with low rotation speed (300 rpm). Total mixing time should not exceed 5 minutes from the time liquid is added to the solid material. Over-mixing should be avoided. Keep mortar or concrete as stiff as possible for the intended use.

Admix 225 MB is a water based latex admixture used as a bonding agent for mortar and concrete.

PROPERTIES Admix 225 MB contains no iron. Added to mortar, it increases internal and external bonding of cement and confers to the product strength, waterproofing, flexibility and resistance to abrasion and to chemicals.

PRODUCT APPLICATION Prime the prepared surface by applying a thin cement slurry mix with Admix 225 MB, using a stiff nylon bristled brush. Apply mortar or concrete and level immediately. Use a float for finishing.

SCOPE OF USE Admix 225 MB is generally used : • As an additive in spatter-dash key slurries, plasters, renders and mortar screeds • As an additive in joint grouts and thick mortar beds, for tiles, ceramics, marble tiles, bricks and stones • As an additive in mortars for the patching and the repair of concrete elements • As a bonding for fresh concrete on hardened concrete • For the bonding of prefabricated concrete elements

LIMITATION Optimum working temperature is 45°C. For hot weather conditions, consult Company’s technical service for special instructions. Works should be performed within 30 min. In case of workability loss, mixture can be re-wetted by adding more Admix 225 MB. Do not add water to Admix 225 MB or mortar mixes. When areas are exposed to sunlight, rapid air movement, or hot temperature use Cure Y 40 curing compound over the mortar surface. For interior or protected exterior work, simple air cure is adequate.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

White liquid miscible in water

Density at 20 ˚C 1 Freezing point - 2 ˚C pH 10 ± 1 VOC and Formadehyde None (< 10µg/l) I SO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS

MIX DESIGN PERFORMANCE WITH AND WITHOUT Admix 225 MB MIX DESIGN FOR PATCHING AND REPAIR Raw materials Cement Fine silica sand < 0.6 mm Admix 225 MB Water Compressive Strength @ 24 hrs Flexural Strength @ 14 days Compressive Strength @ 14 days pull off test @ 28 days

MIX 2 (by weight)

1 part 1.5 parts 0 0.36 parts 18 5.5 40 0.3

1 part 1.5 parts 0.17 parts 0.36 parts 14 9 48 2.4

Above dosage are given for standard usage and for dry sand and applied in normal conditions. Adjustments could be necessary relative to the condition of materials and application.

PACKAGING

DISCLAIMER

Admix 225 MB is supplied in 20 lit. pails 160 and 200 lit. drums.

STORAGE Admix 240 LTX has a high storage stability from - 20°C to + 45°C. Stir always before use. Can be stored up to 6 months after manufacturing date, in original packaging.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

NOTE

Avoid prolonged contact with skin. Wear protective gear for hands & eyes. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Surface shall be sound and scrubbed using stiff-bristled nylon brush to remove laitance, dust, dirt, grease, wax, and concrete sealers. Surface should be damp with no excess, free standing water.

220

MIX 1 (by weight)

221

Admix 235 EM

SBR LATEX-BASED BONDING AGENT FOR MORTAR AND CONCRETE

PRODUCT

should be moistened all the way through without leaving water puddles. Key slurry Mix Admix 235 EM and water 1:3 in volume. Use this solution to prepare a slurry with cement and coarse sand in the proportion of 1:1 weight. Mortar will be proportioned at 500kg/m³ cement. Apply the slurry on the slab uniformly with a brush, and let it rest. Topping mortar Mix Admix 235 EM and water in the proportion 1:5 in volume. Use this solution to prepare an earth moist mortar for the screed. Apply the screed mortar on the slurry to the required thickness, before the slurry dries up. Strongly float the screed on the slurry while still wet and level the surface. Do not mix the mortar in the mixer more than two minutes in order to avoid excessive occulted air in the mortar. After leveling the screed, protect the surface from sunshine or high wind by applying Cure WH or Cure Y 40 curing compound. The screed can be put in use after 8 days, but the final resistance will be obtained at 28 days.

Admix 235 EM is a synthetic resin emulsion, noncorrosive and non toxic, used as a bonding agent for mortar, rendering and concrete on all surfaces, even in damp atmosphere.

SCOPE OF USE • Bonding of thin coating on smooth concrete without scabbing • Bonding of thin topping on floor slab without scabbing • Bonding between two phases of concreting • Repair of joint spalling • Admixture to spatter-dash key slurry • Repairs of toppings • Floor smoothing, mortar for laying tiles, etc...

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

White liquid

Density at 20°C Viscosity (Brookfield modulus 11 tr/mn) pH

1 7500 CPs 9

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix 235 EM

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

PACKAGING

Only use clean sand of suitable grain size. Apply only on sound and clean supports, free from greasy matters, plasters, dust, etc... Never work below + 5°C and beyond + 45°C. For works executed in high temperatures, special instructions will be given by our specialized staff.

Admix 235 EM is supplied in: 5 lit. can. 20 lit. can. 200 lit. drums.

STORAGE Admix 240 LTX has a high storage stability from - 20°C to + 45°C. Stir always before use. Can be stored up to 6 months after manufacturing date, in original packaging.

RENDERING ON SMOOTH CONCRETE OR REPAIRS Make a conventional dry mortar using screened sand. Mix 1 volume Admix 235 EM with 3 or 4 volumes of water. With this mixture, mix mortar to the standard plasticity of a rendering mortar. key coat is made of (water + Admix 235 EM) at ratio 1/4.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Avoid prolonged contact with skin. Wear protective gear for hands & eyes. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean w ater. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

FLOOR SCREED Surface preparation The day before the topping application, the slab

222

223

Admix 240 LTX

SBR LATEX- BASED BONDING AGENT

PRODUCT

and Admix 240 LTX diluted in water (Admix 240 LTX / water ratio in volume : 1/1). While the surface is still tacky, pour the concrete. The screed performances may also be improved by adding Admix 240 LTX from 2 to 8% of the cement weight. Spread the mix on the substrate and adjust it at the required level

Admix 240 LTX is a styrene-butadiene copolymer latex (SBR) used as a waterproof and bonding agent added to concrete and mortar.

PROPERTIES Admix 240 LTX is added to cement based mortars and concrete to provide following properties: • Good flexural / compressive strength • Resistance to abrasion • Resistance to fuel, oils and salt • Limited shrinkage • Increased waterproofing and durability • Improved adhesion

Better performances mortar Quality of cement based traditional mortars may also be improved by adding Admix 240 LTX during the mix. Recommended dosage: from 2 to 8% of the cement weight, to be added to the mixing water.

PACKAGING

SCOPE OF USE • • • • • • •

NOTE

Admix 240 LTX is supplied in: MENA: 5 kg, 25 kg and 200 kg drums. GCC: 5 lit, 20 lit, 160 lit and 200 lit drums.

Industrial flooring Concrete repair Bonding slurries Watertight compartments Potable water reservoirs Cement based adhesives External and internal mortars

STORAGE Admix 240 LTX has a high storage stability from - 20°C to + 45°C. Stir always before use. Can be stored up to 6 months after manufacturing date, in original packaging.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

White liquid

Density at 20°C pH VOC (USEPA Method 24)

1.03 8±1 0.1g/l (less water)

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Spatterdash keying mix The surface must be sound, clean and free from oil and grease. In order to provide a good bonding slurry, Admix 240 LTX is added with the mixing water at the ratio of 4% of cement weight. The slurry should be projected manually or sprayed mechanically. Cure with water for 3 days.

DISCLAIMER

Floor screed The surface must be thoroughly cleaned and free from oil and grease. Prime the substrate with a slurry made with cement, sand

224

225

Admix 245 SBR

SBR LATEX- BASED HIGH PERFORMANCE BONDING AGENT

245 SBR from 2 to 6 % of the cement weight. Spread the mix on the substrate and adjust it at the required level

PRODUCT Admix 245 SBR is a styrene-butadiene co-polymer latex (SBR) used as a waterproof and bonding agent added to concrete and mortar.

Better performances mortar Quality of cement based traditional mortars may also be improved by adding Admix 245 SBR during the mix. Recommended dosage: from 2 to 6% of the cement weight, to be added to the mixing water.

PROPERTIES Admix 245 SBR is added to cement based mortars and concrete to provide following properties: • High flexural / compressive strength • High resistance to abrasion • High resistance to fuel, oils and salt • Limited shrinkage • Increased waterproofing and durability • Improved adhesion

PACKAGING

Admix 245 SBR is supplied in: MENA: 5 kg, 25 kg and 200 kg drums. GCC: 5 lit., 20 lit., 160 lit. and 200 lit. drums.

STORAGE

Admix 245 SBR has a high storage stability from -20°C to +45°C. Stir always before use. Can be stored up to 6 months after manufacturing date, in original packaging.

SCOPE OF USE • • • • • • •

Industrial flooring Concrete repair Bonding slurries Watertight compartments Potable water reservoirs Cement based adhesives External and internal mortars

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

White liquid

Density at 20°C pH

1.06 7±1

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Spatterdash keying mix The surface must be sound, clean and free from oil and grease. In order to provide a good bonding slurry, Admix 245 SBR is added with the mixing water at the ratio of 4% of cement weight. The slurry should be projected manually or sprayed mechanically. Cure with water for 3 days.

NOTE

Floor screed The surface must be thoroughly cleaned and free from oil and grease. Prime the substrate with a slurry made with cement, sand and Admix 245 SBR diluted in water (Admix 245 SBR / water ratio in volume: 1/1).While the surface is still tacky, pour the concrete. The screed performances may also be improved by adding Admix

Edition: 06/07-A

226

Admix fly ash

SUPPLEMENTARY CEMENTING MATERIAL FOR CONCRETE

PRODUCT

PACKAGING

Admix fly ash is a finely divided powder of grayish white color which is a Pozzolanic material used in the production of concrete. This material is obtained by the processing of fly ash produced by the combustion of coal in power stations.

Admix fly ash is supplied in jumbo bags

STORAGE

PROPERTIES

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

When supplied in bags, store in original closed packaging and in a dry ventilated area.

The product contains very fine powder which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning thoroughly with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention. The product is nonflammable.

• Improved workability: Concrete is easier to place and requires less effort to achieve full compaction • Ease of pumping • Reduced bleeding and segregation • Increased compression strength of concrete • Reduced permeability • Increased durability • Reduced alkali silica reaction

SCOPE OF USE Admix fly ash is used in the following: • Structural concrete • Concrete liable to sulfate attack • Concrete where improved durability is required • In mass concrete where slower setting times are required • Concrete that requires pumping

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

Fitness (retained on 235 mesh sieve)

Maximum 34%

NOTE

CHEMICAL PARAMETER

SiO2 + Al2O3 + Fe2O3 SO3 Moisture Loss on Ignition Na2O

Minimum 70% Maximum 2% Maximum 2% Maximum 2% Maximum 2%

Edition: 09/08-A

RECOMMENDED DOSAGE Admix fly ash can be incorporated in concrete up to 80% of total cementitious content. It is recommended that trial mixes be carried out to determine addition rates to achieve the required performance criteria prior to actual use.

227

Admix SIL D

DENSIFIED SILICA FUME FOR HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE

PRODUCT

D50 : 0.5 micron pH : 8.6 Pozzolanic activity index : 101%

Admix SIL D is a mass additive allowing the production of high performance concrete. Its main properties are: • Improves cohesion of concrete. • Allows manufacturing of concrete with low permeability to gas and liquids. • Decreases water penetration in concrete. • Improves mechanical properties: compression, tensile, and flexural strengths, modulus of elasticity, early strength development, … • Reduces shrinkage and expansion due to alkali-silica reaction. Admix SIL D is particularly recommended to give exceptional durability to concrete: • Concrete exposed to aggressive environments, like high carbon dioxide content. • Concrete in presence with aggressive water: foundations, marine works, …

APPLICABLE STANDARDS In accordance with Type U of Canadian National Standard CAN/CSA – A23.8 – M86 and ASTM C-1240/93.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE To obtain the best results from Admix SIL D, manufacture recommendations are: • Cement replacement rates of 5% to 12%, by mass • Best results are obtained with a cement content from 400 to 500 kg/m³ • W/CM should be reduced by using a proper superplasticizer As Admix SIL D is a densified silica fume, its handling is easy and do not create inconvenience (dust and loss).

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Relative density Specific surface

Fine powder Grey 2.27 gr/cm³ 22.85 m²/gr

Typical chemical composition (%) Silica (SiO2) : Aluminium (Al2O3) : Iron (Fe2O3) : Calcium (CaO) : Magnesium (MgO) : Na2O : SO3 : K2O : Cl : H2O : Loss of ignition < Micron < 0.4 0.4 – 0.5 0.5 – 1.0 1.0 – 2.0 2.0 – 5.0 5.0 – 10.0

Aggregate, cement, sand, and Admix SIL D are to be mixed without water for around 30 seconds to allow complete homogenization. Then water and admixtures are added, and the concrete should be mixed for about 1.5 minute to obtain the required consistency. If needed, extra water or admixture may be added during transport of concrete.

93.8 0.23 0.12 0.6 0.21 0.11 0.24 0.33 0.001 1.1 3.2 %

soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

Tests shall be performed in situ to determine the appropriate dosage.

PACKAGING Admix SIL D is packed in: 1.75 ton big bags. 20 kg paper bags.

Average, % 16.44 22.03 33.69 11.54 11.11 3.9

228

229

Admix SIL DSF

DENSIFIED SILICA FUME FOR HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE

PRODUCT

• Best results are obtained with a cement content from 400 to 500 kg/m³ • W/CM should be reduced by using a proper superplasticizer

Admix SIL DSF is a mass additive allowing the production of high performance concrete. Its addition provides to concrete the following main properties: • Improves internal cohesion of concrete. • Allows production of concrete with low permeability to gazes,chlorides, sulfurs, … • Improves impermeability of concrete against water penetration • Improves mechanical properties: compression, tensile, and flexural strengths, modulus of elasticity, early strength gain, … • Reduces shrinkage and expansion due to alkali-silica reaction Admix SIL DSF is particularly recommended to give exceptional durability to concrete: • Concrete exposed to aggressive atmosphere environment, like high carbon dioxide content • Concrete in presence with aggressive water: foundations, marine works, …

As Admix SIL DSF is a densified silica fume, its handling is easy and does not create inconvenience (dust and loss). Aggregate, cement, sand, and Admix SIL DSF are to be mixed without water for around 30 seconds to allow complete homogenization. Water and admixtures are then added, and the concrete should be mixed for around 1.5 minutes to obtain the required consistency. If needed, extra water or admixture may be added during transport of concrete. Tests shall be performed in-situ to determine the appropriate dosage.

Typical chemical composition (%) Silica (SiO2) minimum : CaO : % sol. Na2O eq. : Fe2O3 : Loss of ignition : Activity index : Loss of ignition <

NOTE

PACKAGING Admix SIL DSF is packed in jumbo bag.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Bullk density (average) Specific surface Specific Gravity

Admix SIL DSF

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Fine powder Grey 597 kg/cm³ 18 m²/g 2.4

85 0.27 1.35 0.48 2.89 105 3.2 %

DISCLAIMER

APPLICABLE STANDARDS Admix SIL DSF meets the requirement of ASTM C-1240

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE To obtain the best results from Admix SIL D, manufacture recommendations are: • Cement replacement rates of 5% to 12%, by mass

230

231

Admix SIL P

SILICA FUME FOR HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE

PRODUCT

• Dosage rates are usually from 5% to 12% of cement content. • Best results are obtained with a cement content from 400 to 500 kg/m³. • W/C should be reduced by using a superplasticizer. Aggregate, cement, sand, and Admix SIL P are to be mixed without water for around 30 seconds to allow a complete homogenization. Water and admixtures are then added, and the concrete should be mixed for around 1.5 minutes to obtain the required consistency. If needed, extra water or admixture may be added during transport of concrete.

Admix SIL P is a mass additive allowing the production of high performance concrete. Its main properties are: • Improves cohesion of concrete. • Allows manufacturing of concrete with low permeability to gas and liquids • Decreases water penetration in concrete • Improves mechanical properties: compression, tensile, and flexural strengths, modulus of elasticity, early strength gain, … • Reduces shrinkage and expansion (due to alkali-silica reaction)

office in your location.

NOTE

PACKAGING Admix SIL P is packed in 20 kg bag, bulk.

CHARACTERISTICS Fine powder Light Grey Min. 15 m²/gr 500 - 700 kg/m³ > 44 micron < 3%

Typical chemical composition (%) Silica (SiO2) : Iron (Fe2O3) : Na2O : K2O : Cl : H2O : Loss of ignition 750˚C <

notice. Technical characteristics are listed for guidance only. For more information, please contact the company’s

Tests shall be performed in-situ to determine the appropriate dosage.

Admix SIL P is particularly recommended to give exceptional durability to concrete: • Concrete exposed to aggressive atmospheres, like high carbon dioxide content • Concrete in presence with aggressive water: foundations, marine works, …

Appearance Color Specific surface Bullk density Particules

Admix SIL P

92 % min. 3 - 4 Max. 0.8 % Max. 1.5 % Max. 0.1 % Max. 0.5 % Max 2.0 % Max

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS Admix SIL P meets the requirements of ASTM C-1240/95a and the Norwegian Standard NS 3045.

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE To obtain the best results from Admix SIL P, Manufacturer’s recommendations are:

232

233

Admix SIL U

UN-DENSIFIED SILICA FUME FOR HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE

D50 pH

PRODUCT

Admix SIL U is a mass additive allowing the manufacture of high performance concrete. Its main properties are: • Improves cohesion of concrete. • Allows manufacturing of concrete with low permeability to gas and liquids. • Decreases water penetration in concrete. • Improves mechanical properties: compression, tensile, and flexural strengths, modulus of elasticity, early strength gain, … • Reduces shrinkage and expansion due to alkali-silica reaction. Admix SIL U is particularly recommended to give exceptional durability to concrete: • Concrete exposed to aggressive atmospheres, like high carbon dioxide content • Concrete in presence with aggressive water: foundations, marine works, …

APPLICABLE STANDARDS ASTM C-1240/93.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE To obtain the best results from Admix SIL U, Manufacturer’s recommendations are: • Dosing rates are usually from 5% to 12% of cement mass. • Best results are obtained with a cement content from 400 to 500 kg/m³. • W/C should be reduced by using a superplasticizer. Aggregate, cement, sand, and Admix SIL U are to be mixed without water for around 30 seconds to allow a complete homogenization. Water and admixtures are then added, and the concrete should be mixed for around 1.5 minutes to obtain the required consistency. If needed, extra water or admixture may be added during transport of concrete.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Relative density Specific surface Bulk density

Fine powder Light Grey 2.27 gr/cm³ 22.85 m²/gr 200 - 450 kg/m³

Typical chemical composition (%) Silica (SiO2) min : Aluminium (Al2O3) : Iron (Fe2O3) : Calcium (CaO) : Magnesium (MgO) : Na2O : SO3 : K2O : Cl : H2O < Loss of ignition < Micron < 0.4 0.4 – 0.5 0.5 – 1.0 1.0 – 2.0 2.0 – 5.0 5.0 – 10.0

: 0.5 micron : 8.6

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

Tests shall be performed in situ to determine the appropriate dosage.

PACKAGING Admix SIL U is packed in: 0.5 ton big bags. 30 & 50 kg paper bags.

85 0.23 0.12 0.6 0.21 0.11 0.24 0.33 0.001 1 4

Average, % 16.44 22.03 33.69 11.54 11.11 3.9

234

235

Fiber mesh

SYNTHETIC FIBERS ADDITIVE TO CONCRETE AND PLASTER

PRODUCT

Air content of the concrete will not be significantly increased Chloride content NIL Constituents Virgin polypropylene fiber thickness 18 - 30 micron Melting point >160ºC Fiber mesh conform to ASTM C-1116

The Fiber mesh is a high performance micropropylene fiber designed and formulated specially for the use in mortar and concrete. It is available in different length 6 mm, 12 mm, 18 mm and 20 mm. It is used to inhibit the occurrence of small cracks which can occur through plastic shrinkage, premature drying, and early thermal volume changes of the hardened cementitious materials. Due to their specific characteristics and ease of dispersion in concrete, they can be mixed at any stage in the concrete regardless of the consistency of concrete.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Fiber mesh fibers could be introduced in dry or wet mixing. Since they have the advantage of mixing in concrete or mortar in all phases. They could be even introduced in truck mixers, in which case 5 min. of mixing would be required.

They are extremely resistant to alkali. In addition, they adhere chemically to the matrix of the cement which highly contribute to the reinforcement and durability of the concrete and mortar. The hydration of the cement as well as mixing water requirement of concrete and mortar are not affected by the use of Fiber mesh fibers.

DOSAGE RATES

0.60 to 0.9 kg/m³. Excessive overdosing will generally produce a reduction in workability, and an increase in the cohesiveness of the mixture.

• • • • •

DISCLAIMER

Since they are completely integrated in the structure of the concrete and mortar they constitute a secondary reinforcement which improves the general material characteristics: • Mechanical strength • Abrasion resistance • Impact resistance • Concrete durability

CHARACTERISTICS Color Specific gravity Alkali content Sulphate content

White 0.91 NIL NIL Air entrainment

Edition: 03/10-A

236

BENEFITS

• Reduction in seepage / dampness • Reduced honeycombing & bleeding problems, ensuring uniform hydration • Better quality & faster completion of work • Reduce shrinkage cracks by over 90% • Protects primary steel reinforcement from corrosion • Ensuring better hydration

SCOPE OF USE

ADVANTAGES

Should be stored in dry conditions for 12 months.

ADVANTAGES

Fibril 100 is a high performance micropropylene fiber designed and formulated specially for the use in mortar and concrete. It is used to inhibit the occurrence of small cracks which can occur through plastic shrinkage, premature drying, and early thermal volume changes of the hardened cementitious materials. Due to their specific characteristics and ease of dispersion in concrete, they can be mixed at any stage in the concrete regardless of the consistency of concrete. They are extremely resistant to alkali. The hydration of the cement as well as mixing water requirement of concrete and mortar are not affected by the use of Fibril 100 fiber

NOTE

STORAGE

•Fibrillated (Mesh) structure ensures better binding & anchoring with concrete aggregates. • Distributes localized stresses & increase fatigue resistance • Reduces unequal bleeding so solids in concrete do not settle unevenly & enhances cement hydration in fresh concrete thereby increasing tensile & Flexural strength • Improves fire resistance characteristics in concrete thereby reducing risk of spalling • Provides impact and abrasion resistance

PRODUCT

Availble in 0.6 kg bag, 0.9 kg bag 25 kg bag and Jumbo bag. Fiber mesh is available in watersoluble paper bags and polyethylene bags.

Industrial flooring Precast Gunned concrete and mortar Tanks, silo Rendering

FIBRILLATED POLYPROPYLENE FIBERS ADDITIVE FOR CONCRETE AND PLASTER

• Canal Lining Works • Industrial / Commercial Floorings • Tunnel Lining Works • Concrete Roads / Pavements • Water Storage Tanks • Swimming Pools • Rooftaps • Pre-stressed concrete electricity poles • Rock / Slope Stabilization • Internal & External Plaster • Precast Products – Pipes • Structural Repairs & Restoration • Concrete Slabs • Shotcreting • Mine Lining Works • Roofing Sheets • Bridges – Wearing Coat • Stamped Concrete • Decorative concrete • Slab-on-Grade • Tilt-up Panels

PACKAGING

SCOPE OF USE

Fibril 100

Composition Type Length Specific gravity Absorption Modulus of elasticity Melt point Ignition point Alkali, acid and salt resistance

100% Virgin Polypropylene Fibrillated Form 6, 12, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 & 120 0.91 None 500 ksi >165°C 600°C High

SPECIFICATIONS

Fibril 100 shall be used in strict accordance with the supplier’s recommendations and within time as specified in ASTM C94. Fibril 100 complies with ASTM Designation C1116 Type III 4.1.3 and with applicable building codes. Standard ACI 302 procedures for placing, finishing and curing shall be followed when using Fibril 100.

Since they are completely integrated in the structure of the concrete and mortar they constitute a secondary reinforcement which improves the general material characteristics: • Inhibits plastic shrinkage cracks & settlement cracks • Does not allow moisture or water to seep in due to reduction in permeability

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Fibril 100 could be introduced in dry or wet mixing. Since they have the advantage of mixing in concrete or mortar in all phases; they could be even introduced in truck mixers, in which case 5 min. of mixing at high speed would be required or 70 revolutions

237

Fibril 100

Admix corrin

after the addition of Fibril 100 to ensure uniform distribution.

PRODUCT

CORROSION INHIBITOR IN LIQUID FORM

STORAGE

Admix corrin is a liquid corrosion inhibitor specially designed to protect the reinforcing steel in concrete. It chemically arrests the corrosion process. Unlike standard inorganic inhibitors, Admix corrin doesn’t have to come in contact with the reinforcing steel upon application because they can migrate to the steel and form a corrosion inhibiting protective layer on metals. Admix corrin is compatible with all Portland cement and usual plasticizer and super-plasticizer admixtures. Admix corrin does not affect the physical properties of the concrete mix. Admix corrin is a very concentrated product; it doesn’t contain calcium nitrite and can be used to protect both anodic and cathodic areas.

DISCLAIMER

SCOPE OF USE

DOSAGE RATES

0.60 to 0.9 kg/m³. Higher addition dosages may be used to produce special concrete properties as per requirements. Excessive overdosing will generally produce a reduction in workability, and an increase in the cohesiveness of the mixture.

PACKAGING

Available in 0.6 kg bag, 0.9 kg bag, 25 kg bag and Jumbo bag. Fibril 100 is available in water-soluble paper bags and polyethylene bags. Should be stored in dry conditions for 12 months.

STORAGE Up to 1 year for manufacturing date, in original sealed packaging. Protect from heat and frost.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

• Admix corrin is used in concrete for parking structures, marine structures, bridges and balconie where chloride salts are presents. • It is recommended also for streets and highways exposed to corrosive environments, and for restoration and repair of all reinforced concrete.

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS

NOTE

Appearance Color Density Non Volatile content

Liquid Clear dark brown 1.141 - 1.241 kg/lit. 42-50%

NOTE

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Edition: 12/10-A

Admix corrin is a ready to use admixture to be added to concrete at the ready-mix plant, directly to the ready-mix truck drum, to portable mixers, or directly into repair mortars. It is recommended to mix concrete and mortar thoroughly.

DOSAGE RATES

Edition: 06/07-A

0.6 lit./m³ of concrete, mortar or grout.

PACKAGING Admix corrin is supplied in,19 liters pails, 200 liter drums and 1000 liters totes.

238

239

Admix CIS

CORROSION INHIBITOR SOLUTION

PRODUCT

chloride kg/m³

8 7 6 5

NOTE

4 3 2 10

12.5

17.5

22.5

27.5

Admix CIS Liter/m³ If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CIS, they must be dispensed separately

PACKAGING

SCOPE OF USE

Admix CIS is supplied in 20 liters pails, 200 liter drums and 1000 liters totes.

• Admix CIS is used in concrete for parking structures, marine structures, bridges and balconies where chloride salts are presents. • It is recommended also for streets and highways exposed to corrosive environments, and for restoration and repair of all reinforced concrete.

STORAGE Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Density Non Volatile content

made without guarantee since the conditions of their application are beyond its control. It is recommended to verify with the company that the product is suitable for the intended use, and that this Data Sheet version is the latest one. The company may modify it without prior notice. Technical characteristics are listed for guidance only. For more information, please contact the company’s office in your location.

Dosing rate of Admix CIS Liter/m³ vs chloride kg/m³

Admix CIS is an effective liquid corrosion inhibitor based on calcium nitrite specially designed to protect the reinforcing steel in concrete. It inhibits chemically the corrosion process by reacting with chloride ions to prevent the last to attack the steel. It functions as an anodic corrosion inhibitor; it reacts with the defective ferrous oxide ions and converts it to more stable ferric ions less sensitive to corrosion. It delays the corrosion process by repassivating deficiency on the steel surface. Admix CIS is compatible with all Portland cement and usual plasticizer and super-plasticizer admixtures. It doesn’t affect the air entrainment. A set retarding admixture can be used to compensate the set acceleration properties of Admix CIS. Please contact our sales representatives on the proper choice of set retarding admixture.

HEALTH & SAFETY

Liquid yellowish 1.20 - 1.28 kg/lit. min. 30%

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Admix CIS is a ready to use admixture to be added to concrete at the ready-mix plant, directly to the ready-mix truck drum, to portable mixers, or directly into repair mortars. It is recommended to mix concrete and mortar thoroughly.

QUALITY STATEMENT

DOSAGE RATES

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

The dosage range is from 5 to 30 liter/m3 and it is directly related to expected chloride concentration.

DISCLAIMER

While the company guarantees its products against defective materials, the use and application of these products are

240

241

Admix JET L

SHOTCRETE ACCELERATING ADMIXTURE

PRODUCT Admix JET L is a high performance liquid admixture for shotcrete incorporated to impart instant workability loss and accelerated setting of the shotcrete to achieve low rebound. It causes instantaneous slump loss resulting in a thixotropic mixture by the time the shotcrete reaches the substrate. Admix JET L can be used in combination with superplasticizer like POLYAdmix PC 11 and Admix CF 100.

PRODUCT

Admix JET L is supplied in: Bulk 200 and 25 lit. drums

Admix color P is powder pigment used for the coloration of concrete.

The product must be stored in original sealed drums at ambient temperatures not inferior to 0ºC and protected from direct sunshine and strong heat.

It is ideal for use in shotcreting areas, where high build thickness and high early and final strengths are essential, such as: Permanent rock support in tunnels, galleries, caverns, and mines.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

Liquide

QUALITY STATEMENT

Color Specific gravity at 20ºC pH at 20ºC Chloride content Solubility in water

White 1.5 ± .02 11 < 0.1% Total

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix JET L is to be added to properly graded and proportioned concrete / mortar dry mix at rate ranging from 1% to 10%, by mass of cement depending upon the desired acceleration, setting, and hardening. It is necessary to conduct preliminary job-site with Admix JET L to determine suitability, optimum dosage, setting time. During cold weather due to low temperature, the setting time is reduced. It may therefore be necessary to use warm mixing water or heated aggregate.

NOTE

DOSAGE RATES

0.60 to 0.9 kg/m³. Excessive overdosing will generally produce a reduction in workability, and an increase in the cohesiveness of the mixture.

Edition: 06/07-A

PRECAUTION

POWDER PIGMENTS FOR CONCRETE

PACKAGING

STORAGE

SCOPE OF USE

Admix color P

DOSAGE RATES The final tint of concrete is a function of the nature and distribution of the final elements in the mass, in particular those of the cement and of the fraction of sand with finer than 0.2 mm. The exact dosage depends on the intensity of the desired tint: from 2 to 5 kg per 100 kg cement. When using white cement, the dosage can be reduced for the same intensity of tint.

PROPERTIES Admix color P powder pigment has a specific surface approximately 10 times higher than that of cement. Admix color P has an important dispersing action. The very fine size of the pigment particles allows easy dispersion of the Admix color P in concrete and achieving durable and homogeneous tint at lower dosage.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS Conform to European standard EN 12878 (in use for BS 1014 and Din 53237) and ASTM C979.

RECOMMENDATIONS

SCOPE OF USE

In order to obtain a concrete with consistent coloration, it is important that the composition of the concrete does not vary, in particular the dosage of cement and water content. In order to avoid the appearance

Paving stones, bricks, blocks, concrete tiles, enclosures, sidewalk frames, concrete industrial floors, heavy prefabrication, and grouts.

CHARACTERISTICS Reference Yellow Ochre Brown Brown Red Red Red Black Black Black Blue Green White

SC920 SC 960 SC 610 SC 660 SC130 SC 810 SC 222 SC 330 SC 318 HS 50 SC 544 SC 023

Pigment Pigment Apparent Content (%) type Density (g\cm³) 85 - 87 0.3 - 0.5 88 - 90 0.5 > 90 0.7 - 1.1 > 92 0.7 - 1.1 95 - 97 0.7 - 1.1 90 - 91 Fe2O3 0.6 - 0.9 97 - 99 0.6 - 1 90 0.8 - 1.2 90 0.8 - 1.2 CarbonBlack 50 - 60 1.7 - 1.9 90 Co (Cr,AI) 0.8 - 1.2 98.8 Cr2O3 0.5 - 0.8 > 91 TIO2 0.6 - 0.9

Density (g\cm³) 4.1 4.3 Approx. 4.7 4.4 5 4.5 5 4.6 4.6 4.3 5.4 4

shelter of efflorescence, it is necessary: • to work with W/C as low as possible • to store at the earlier stages the concrete under

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Admix color P is introduced with the aggregate and cement before mixing water. It is under these conditions that the best homogeneity of color can be obtained. The quantity of water will be determined as a function of desired plasticity.

PACKAGING Admix color P is packed in 20 or 25 kg bags.

Admix JET L is a high pH by nature.

242

SiO2 + AL2O3 (%) 0.2 < 0.6 <4 2-4 2-4 1.5 - 3 0.5 - 3 3 <3 0.1 -

243

Admix color P

Admix CF 114

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

PRODUCT

PLASTICIZING ADMIXTURE FOR SEMI-DRY CONCRETE PRODUCTS

Specific gravity at 20°C Chloride content

Admix CF 114 is a multi-component admixture specifically formulated for reducing efflorescence and increasing water tightness in concrete block, pavers’ products and architectural concrete products. Admix CF 114 does not contain calcium chloride. Admix CF 114 is also a plasticizing admixture that provides improved placement and lubricity to semidry concrete products such as concrete block or brick, dry cast pipe or landscaping paving stones. Admix CF 114 disperses the mix to provide added workability while lowering the overall water to cement ratio. This allows easier hydration of the cement particles and results in improved green strengths and higher ultimate compressive strengths. Admix CF 114 works on very low water/cement mixtures.

The product contains very fine powder which, when mixed with water, releases alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning thoroughly with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention. The product is nonflammable.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Admix CF 114 is totally miscible in water. Admix CF 114 is normally dosed as supplied at a rate of 800 to 2500 ml per 100 kg of cement. Other dosages may be required depending on specific conditions. For best results, add Admix CF 114 after pre-wetting the mix aggregates and cement with part of the required hydration water. Avoid addition of Admix CF 114 to dry cement mix if possible. Mix components for at least two minutes to provide optimum lubricity to the mix. For high early strength of concrete, use a lower w/c and a higher Admix CF 114 dosage.

DOSAGE

PROPERTIES

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CF 114 for a particular mix. A dosage of 800 to 2500 ml per 100 kg of cement is recommended. This may be changed to higher dosage in specific conditions.

• • • • •

Lowers moisture absorption Minimizes efflorescence Improves appearance and texture Increases concrete cohesion Produces high early strengths and can significantly increase mould utilization in precast works • Can be used to gain economies due to possible cement reduction

DISCLAIMER

EFFECT OF OVER DOSING Admix CF 114 can be used at high dosages without retardation. Severe over dose of Admix CF 114 will result in the following: • Slight delay of the initial and final setting of the concrete mixture • Slight increase in air entrainment • Increased workability

SCOPE OF USE Admix CF 114 is recommended for all cement types in the following areas: • Concrete block • Architectural concrete panels • Roof tiles • Pavers • Precast concrete • Colored concrete • Concrete with low W/C • Concrete with GGBS, fly ash and silica fume • Hollow core precast concrete elements • Reduction in cement content

NOTE

COMPATIBILITY Admix CF 114 can be used with all types of portland and sulfate-resisting cements. Admix CF 114 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CF 114 they must be dispensed separately. Consult Company’s Technical Dept. for advice.

CHARACTERISTICS

244

1.2 ± 0.01 NIL

Appearance

Liquid

Color

Brownish

DISPENSING

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete should be introduced into a mixer by means of

245

Admix CF 114

Admix CMU 100

automatic dispensing equipment.

PRODUCT

WATER REDUCING ADMIXTURE FOR SEMI-DRY CONCRETE PRODUCT

Chloride content

Admix CMU 100 is a multi-component admixture speciﬁcally formulated for reducing efﬂorescence and increasing water tightness in concrete block, pavers’ products and architectural concrete products. Admix CMU 100 does not contain calcium chloride. Admix CMU 100 is also a plasticizing admixture that provides improved placement and lubricity to semi-dry concrete products such as concrete block or brick, dry cast pipe or landscaping paving stones. Admix CMU 100 disperses the mix to provide added workability while lowering the overall water to cement ratio. This allows easier hydration of the cement particles and results in improved green strengths and higher ultimate compressive strengths. Admix CMU 100 works on very low water/cement mixtures.

PACKAGING Admix CF 114 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE Up to 2 years when stored in accordance with manufacture’s instructions.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Admix CMU 100 is totally miscible in water. Admix CMU 100 is normally dosed as supplied at a rate of 3000 to 5000 ml per 100 kg of cement. Other dosages may be required depending on speciﬁc conditions. For best results, add Admix CMU 100 after pre-wetting the mix aggregates and cement with part of the required hydration water. Avoid addition of Admix CMU 100 to dry cement mix if possible. Mix components for at least two minutes to provide optimum lubricity to the mix. For high early strength of concrete, use a lower w/c and a higher Admix CMU 100 dosage.

PROPERTIES

DOSAGE

• • • • •

Lowers moisture absorption Minimizes efﬂorescence Improves appearance and texture Increases concrete cohesion Produces high early strengths and can signiﬁcantly increase mould utilization in precast works • Can be used to gain economies due to possible cement reduction

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CMU 100 for a particular mix. A dosage of 3000 to 5000 ml per 100 kg of cement is recommended. This may be changed to higher dosage in speciﬁc conditions.

EFFECT OF OVER DOSING Admix CMU 100 can be used at high dosages without retardation. Severe over dose of Admix CMU 100 will result in the following: • Slight delay of the initial and ﬁnal setting of the concrete mixture • Slight increase in air entrainment • Increased workability

SCOPE OF USE Admix CMU 100 is recommended for all cement types in the following areas: • Concrete block • Architectural concrete panels • Roof tiles • Pavers • Precast concrete • Colored concrete • Concrete with low W/C • Concrete with GGBS, ﬂy ash and silica fume • Hollow core precast concrete elements • Reduction in cement content

NOTE

COMPATIBILITY Admix CMU 100 can be used with all types of portland and sulfate-resisting cements. Admix CMU 100 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CMU 100 they must be dispensed separately. Consult Company’s Technical Dept. for advice.

CHARACTERISTICS

Edition: 08/10-A **Available only in MENA

Appearance

Color Speciﬁc gravity at 20°C

246

NIL

Liquid

DISPENSING

Brown 1.02 ± 0.01

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete

247

Admix CMU 100

Admix CMU 200

should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment.

PRODUCT

SPECIAL ADMIXTURE FOR DRY CAST AND SEMIDRY CONCRETE APPLICATIONS

CHARACTERISTICS

Admix CMU 200 is a multi-component admixture specifically formulated to be used in the manufacture of “dry” or “semi-dry” vibrated and pressed concrete products such as paving and masonry blocks, bricks and architectural masonry to assist compaction, disperse cement, colour and fine aggregate particles, and help reducing efflorescence and increasing water tightness. Damage by handling, strapping and palleting is reduced, and the resistance to abrasion is significantly enhanced. Admix CMU 200 does not contain calcium chloride. Admix CMU 200 is also a plasticizing admixture that provides improved placement and lubricity to semi-dry concrete products. Admix CMU 200 disperses the mix to provide added workability while lowering the overall water to cement ratio. This allows easier hydration of the cement particles and results in improved green strengths and higher ultimate compressive strengths. Admix CMU 200 works on very low water/cement mixtures.

PACKAGING Admix CMU 100 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

STORAGE Up to 2 years when stored in accordance with manufacture’s instructions.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DOSAGE Trials should be conducted to determine the optimum dosage of Admix CMU 200 for a particular mix. A dosage of 400 to 1000 ml per 100 kg of cement is recommended. This may be changed to higher dosage in specific conditions.

EFFECT OF OVER DOSING Severe over dose of Admix CMU 200 will result in the following: • Delay of the initial and final setting of the concrete mixture • Increased workability

SCOPE OF USE Admix CF CMU 200 is recommended for all cement types in the following areas: • Concrete block • Architectural concrete panels • Roof tiles • Pavers • Precast concrete • Colored concrete • Concrete with low W/C • Concrete with GGBS, fly ash and silica fume • Hollow core precast concrete elements • Reduction in cement content

NOTE

248

Brown 1.220 ± 0.02 NIL

Admix CMU 200 is totally miscible in water. Admix CMU 200 is normally dosed as supplied at a rate of 400 to 1000 ml per 100 kg of cementitious. Other dosages may be required depending on specific conditions. For best results, add Admix CMU 200 after pre-wetting the mix aggregates and cement with part of the required hydration water. Mix components for at least two minutes to provide optimum lubricity to the mix. For high early strength of concrete, use a lower w/c and a higher Admix CMU 200 dosage.

• Lowers moisture absorption • Minimizes efflorescence • Improves appearance and texture • Increases concrete cohesion • Produces high early strengths and can significantly increase mould utilization in precast works • Can be used to gain economies due to possible cement reduction

Liquid

Color Speciﬁc gravity at 20°C Chloride content

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

PROPERTIES

DISCLAIMER

Appearance

COMPATIBILITY Admix CMU 200 can be used with all types of portland and sulfate-resisting cements. Admix CMU 200 should be dispensed directly into the mixer and should not be pre-mixed with other admixtures. If other admixtures are to be used in concrete containing Admix CMU 200 they must be dispensed separately.

DISPENSING

It is preferable that liquid admixtures for concrete

249

Admix CMU 200

Admix LSM 500

should be introduced into a mixer by means of automatic dispensing equipment.

PRODUCT

FOAMING AGENT FOR MANUFACTURING LOW STRENGTH MATERIALS

CHARACTERISTICS

Admix LSM 500 is a highly efficient liquid surface active, polymer stabilized compound specifically designed to provide a uniformed colloidal aerosol network for use in the production of foam concrete and light weight concrete.

PACKAGING Admix CMU 200 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels Storage tanks can be provided for bulk use.

HEALTH & SAFETY

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

Admix LSM 500 is normally applied with foam generator but direct dosage is also possible for specific applications. The specific gravity of the mortar/foamed concrete can be adjusted by the amount of foam or foaming agent added respectively. The foam prepared with Admix LSM 500 using foam generator is very stable. Therefore it can be added to the premixed mortar or grout.

DOSAGE RATES 1000 liters of foam requires 1 to 2 liters of Admix LSM 500. The required dosage for a specific job conditions should be determined by in situ trials. The composition of the mortar or foamed concrete is important for the resulting compressive strength; however, it is mainly depending on the specific gravity. Lower specific gravity corresponds with lower strength and better insulation properties.

PRECAUTIONS The maximum efficiency will be determined after a test of suitability. The amount of entrained air must be verified periodically in concrete, since it varies with the nature of the aggregate and W/C ratio.

PACKAGING

Admix LSM 500 is suitable to use with various cement types in the following areas:

Admix LSM 500 is supplied in: Bulk, barrels, and small casks

• Light weight concrete • Foamed concrete • Trowel – ready mortar • Insulation mortar • Filling mortar • Polystyrene concrete

Edition: 01/10-A

250

Nil

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SCOPE OF USE

NOTE

Chloride Content

ASTM C 869

• Admix LSM 500 has excellent stability over a wide range of temperature and water quality. This stability means that the foam bubbles sustain themselves and support the mortar around them. The bubbles do not burst easily and hence the foamed concrete does not collapse when it is made or after it has been placed. By using Admix LSM 500, a high level of air entrapment is possible; hence low density foamed concrete can be achieved without using excessive foaming agent. • When processed through a foam generator, a solution of Admix LSM 500 in water creates a high volume of stable white foam. The foam can easily be incorporated into any mortar mix to make foamed concrete, even when using cold water. • Admix LSM 500 foaming Agent may be used with all types of Portland cement and incorporated into cement only, or sand-cement mortar slurries to produce foamed concrete of every type and for every application • It has excellent strength and thermal insulation properties. The foamed concrete produced from Admix LSM 500 foaming Agent is ideal for a wide range of applications. • Good water retention • Good workability of concrete and mortar

Up to 2 years when stored in accordance with manufacture’s instructions.

Yellowish Approx. 1.05

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

PROPERTIES

STORAGE

Appearance Specific gravity

251

Admix LSM 500

Admix A-wash-C

If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention.

PRODUCT

ANTI-WASHOUT ADMIXTURE-SPECIAL

cementitious material. Because of variations in job conditions, applications and concrete materials, dosage rates outside the recommended range may be required. Admix A-wash-C admixture should be added at the batch plant after all other concrete ingredients have been mixed and discharged into the mixer. Do not use water to adjust slump after Admix A-wash-C has been dispensed, instead, adjust slump through the use of a superplasticizer. Contact company for a product recommendation.

Admix A-wash-C is a ready to use liquid admixture designed to prevent the loss of cement and fine particles during the placement of underwater concrete. It is a blend of thixotropic agents and superplasticizers. Concrete mixed with Admix A-wash-C exhibits resistance to washout of cement particles and segregation of concrete. It is specially designed to be used in concrete formulated with third generation superplasticizers.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

PROPERTIES Admix A-wash-C produces a concrete highly resistant to washout while maintaining the normal characteristics of concrete. • Minimal effect on water demand • Minimal effect on set time • Reduces/eliminates the need to dewater • No effect on slump characteristics • Reduces concrete bleeding • Greatly reduces segregation, even with high fluid,high water-cement ratio mixes.

NOTE

PRECAUTIONS Material must be stored at temperatures above (5 °C) to avoid dispensing difficulties due to thickening. Do not allow material to freeze. Do not use Admix A-wash-C with naphthalene based admixtures. Erratic behavior in slump, pumpability and washout may be experienced.

PACKAGING Admix A-wash-C is supplied in: Bulk, barrels, and small casks

SCOPE OF USE Admix A-wash-C admixture is recommended for use in all types of concrete pumped or placed underwater. Admix A-wash-C admixture is especially helpful in extreme conditions where conventional concrete or placing techniques would result in a high percentage of material loss due to washout.

Edition: 08/09-A

HEALTH & SAFETY In case of frost, the product cannot be reconstituted after thawing. In case of contact with skin or eyes, rinse thoroughly with water. If irritation persists, seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

Clear brown liquid

Speciﬁc gravity at 20°C Chloride Content

1.150 Zero to BS 5075

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Admix A-wash-C is totally miscible in water. It is to be added to the concrete mixture during the mixing cycle at the same time as the mixing water. No extension to normal mixing time is necessary.

STORAGE

DOSAGE RATES

DISCLAIMER

Admix A-wash-C can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

Admix A-wash-C admixture is recommended for use at a dosage range of 260 to 1300 mL/100kg of

252

While the company guarantees its products against defective materials, the use and application of these products are made without guarantee since the conditions of their

253

Admix A-wash-C

Admix A-wash-N

application are beyond its control. It is recommended to verify with the company that the product is suitable for the intended use, and that this Data Sheet version is the latest one. The company may modify it without prior notice. Technical characteristics are listed for guidance only. For more information, please contact the company’s office in your location.

PRODUCT

LIQUID ANTI-WASHOUT ADMIXTURE

NOTE

Admix A-wash-N is liquid anti-washout admixture specifically developed for addition to concrete for placement underwater. It is a blend of thixotropic agents and superplasticizers. Concrete mixed with Admix A-wash-N exhibits resistance to washout of cement particles and segregation of concrete.

be required. Admix A-wash-N admixture should be added at the batch plant after all other concrete ingredients have been mixed and discharged into the mixer. Do not use water to adjust slump after Admix A-wash-N has been dispensed, instead, adjust slump through the use of a superplasticizer such as Admix CF 100.

PROPERTIES

PRECAUTIONS

Admix A-wash-N produces a concrete highly resistant to washout while maintaining the normal characteristics of concrete. • Minimal effect on water demand • Minimal effect on set time • Reduces/eliminates the need to dewater • No effect on slump characteristics • Reduces concrete bleeding • Greatly reduces segregation, even with high fluid, high water-cement ratio mixes.

Material must be stored at temperatures above (7°C) to avoid dispensing difficulties due to thickening. Do not allow material to freeze.. Do not use Admix Awash-N with Polycarboxylate based admixtures. Erratic behavior in slump, pumpability and washout may be experienced.

SCOPE OF USE

HEALTH & SAFETY

PACKAGING Admix A-wash-N is supplied in: Bulk, barrels, and small casks

Admix A-wash-N admixture is recommended for use in all types of concrete pumped or placed underwater. Admix A-wash-N admixture is especially helpful in extreme conditions where conventional concrete or placing techniques would result in a high percentage of material loss due to washout.

In case of frost, the product cannot be reconstituted after thawing. In case of contact with skin or eyes, rinse thoroughly with water. If irritation persists, seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention.

QUALITY STATEMENT

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

Clear brown liquid

Speciﬁc gravity at 20°C Chloride Content

1.224 Zero to BS 5075

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

STORAGE

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Admix A-wash-N can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

Admix A-wash-N is totally miscible in water. It is to be added to the concrete mixture during the mixing cycle at the same time as the mixing water. No extension to normal mixing time is necessary.

DOSAGE RATES Admix A-wash-N admixture is recommended for use at a dosage range of 260 to 1800 mL/100kg of cementitious material. Because of variations in job conditions, applications and concrete materials, dosage rates outside the recommended range may

254

255

Admix A-wash-N

Admix A-wash-U

is the latest one. The company may modify it without prior notice. Technical characteristics are listed for guidance only. For more information, please contact the company’s office in your location.

PRODUCT

UNIVERSAL ANTI-WASHOUT ADMIXTURE

or cement. Allow thorough dry-mixing to ensure the powder is well dispersed and wet-mixing times should be increased by up to 50%.

Admix A-wash-U is an anti-washout admixture in powder form, for use with under water concrete and mortar. It is an effective anti-washout admixture in concrete placed under water. It produces a cohesive mix which retains its integrity as it passes through the surrounding water and consolidates. The cement paste stays in intimate contact with the aggregate particles, instead of being washed away at the surface of the concrete mix.

NOTE

DOSAGE RATES When using Admix A-wash-U, the normal recommended mix design and procedures for placing concrete underwater should be followed. It is imperative that full trials are carried before work commences, paying close attention to effects on pumpability, placing procedure, flowability and washout resistance. Should other admixtures be used in conjunction with Admix A-wash-U impact on performance should also be checked. In general it is recommended that minimum cement contents of 400 kg/m3 be applied. A dosage of 1 kg / m3 is normal depending on the specific level of washout resistance required.

PROPERTIES Admix AWA-N produces a concrete highly resistant to washout while maintaining the normal characteristics of concrete. • Provides excellent anti-washout properties in under water applications • Eliminates sedimentation and segregation • Eliminates “bleeding” in concrete • Readily soluble and stable in water cement systems • Does not affect the cement hydration process. • Effective at low levels • Minimal effect on setting time • Reduces fluid loss in cement grout • Imparts cohesiveness to the grout • Does not entrain air • Does not foam • May require an addition of a high range water reducing agent in some applications

PACKAGING Admix A-wash-U is packed in 1 kg plastic bag

STORAGE One year in dry condition of original packaging.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes, and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning thoroughly with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

SCOPE OF USE Admix A-wash-U admixture is recommended for use in all types of concrete pumped or placed underwater. Admix A-wash-U admixture is especially helpful in extreme conditions where conventional concrete or placing techniques would result in a high percentage of material loss due to washout.

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

Bulck density

White / Beige powder

0.8

DISCLAIMER

While the company guarantees its products against defective materials, the use and application of these products are made without guarantee since the conditions of their

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE The admixture should be dispersed onto the dry aggregate

256

257

Admix A-wash-U

EcoDem

PRODUCT

DELAYED MOULD-RELEASE AGENT VEGETABLE EMULSION

CHARACTERISTICS

EcoDem specially formulated mould release agent designed for use on all types of steel and impervious formwork material to give an excellent release and aesthetic finish. This product is formulated as an emulsion from vegetable components.

Appearance Chloride content Density at 25˚C Flash point Biodegrability

PROPERTIES

NOTE

• • • • • •

VOC

Facilitates easy formwork release. Low viscosity for easy application Low risk of skin damage Readily biodegradable Easy application by spray, brush or swab. Forms may be stripped early when other factors permit. Non-staining, suitable for use with colored, white or standard OPC Produces high quality surface finish Minimizes form cleaning to extend formwork life Cost effective compared to oil based mold release agents Environmentally friendly product with low VOC content Odor free

STANDARDS NF EN ISO 9408 ASTM C1582

COVERAGE

A thin coating to give a coverage rate of 30 to 50m2 per litre depending upon surface porosity and texture.

EQUIPMENT

Spraying pressure : 4bars

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Before application mould release agent, the moulds should be dry and clean, concrete residues must be removed. EcoDem is ready to use, it doesn’t not require continuous stirring, but it is recommended to shake before using it.

SCOPE OF USE

EcoDem is recommended for all areas of use of concrete in the ready-mix, precast & manufactured concrete products industry: • EcoDem is unaffected by rain or frost and may be applied either immediately before casting or treated forms may be left for several days before concreting. • The reproduction of difficult features is readily achieved. • Compatible with most types of formers, i.e. wood, metal, concrete and composites. • Metal and timber forms are temporarily protected from the weather. • Incidence of blow holes and surface crazing are substantially reduced. • Concrete cast with EcoDem requires no further treatment other than a light brushing prior to the application of plasters, adhesives, mortars, surface coatings and penetrating systems such as silane. • Ideal for use in confined spaces or in precast and industrial operations where prestressed or heated systems are involved.

258

Liquid (Whitish) Nil-BS5075/934-2 <1.00 >100 ˚C <80% at 28 days as per NF EN ISO 9480OCDE 301F No VOC

After preparation of formwork and any necessary sealing, apply thinly, by spray, brush or swab prior to each concrete pour, and as near to time of placement of concrete as practical conditions permit but allowing a minimum of 1 hour for the excess water to evaporate off and the release film to be properly established. On vertical forms any excess material accumulating at the bottom of the form should be removed. Care should therefore be taken to ensure that EcoDem is applied as recommended, as this will achieve optimum performance and maximum economy. Protect from precipitation when still wet

PACKAGING

EcoDem is supplied in 20 liters pails, 200 liter drums and 1000 liters totes.

259

EcoDem

Dem 22

STORAGE

PRODUCT

WATER - BASED SHUTTER RELEASE AGENT

EcoDem can be stored up to 6 month from manufacturing date under cover, out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme temperatures.

medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention.

Dem 22 is a water based release agent usable with all type of stuttering: steel, plastic, plywood or aluminum. It allows a clean, fast, and easy striking. It can be sprayed or applied with a cloth. Due to its white color, Dem 22 is particularly recommended for architectural or fair faced concrete where no traces are allowed.

HEALTH & SAFETY

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

SCOPE OF USE • • • •

QUALITY STATEMENT

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality

Concrete fabrication Formworks for gypsum Heavy prefabrication Formwork for prestressed concrete

CHARACTERISTICS

DISCLAIMER

While the company guarantees its products against defective materials, the use and application of these products are made without guarantee since the conditions of their applications are beyond its control. It is recommended to verify with the company that the product is suitable for the intended use, and that the Data Sheet version is the latest one. The company may modify it without prior notice. Technical characteristics are listed for guidance only. For more information, please contact the company’s office in your location.

Appearance

Liquid

Preparation Color Freezing point Flash point Viscosity Specific density

Ready to use Milky White -3 ˚C approximate ≥ 100 ˚C 60 CP at 20 ˚C 1 ± 0.1

NOTE

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Edition: 06/07-A

Dem 22 is a ready to use release agent to be applied by spray, brush, roller, or cloth.

NOTE

YIELD

50 to 60 m²/L depending on the form used.

PACKAGING

Dem 22 is supplied in: 200 lit. drums. 25 lit. drums

Edition: 08/11-A

STORAGE 6 months from date of production if stored properly in original unopened packing.

260

261

Dem 44

UNIVERSAL OIL - BASED SHUTTER RELEASE AGENTRELEASE AGENTRELEASE AGENT

PRODUCT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Dem 44 is characterized by an outstanding covering power, it does not stain concrete, even white concrete. It is not prejudicial to a suitable adhesion of further coating or paints. Used with clean forms without laitance or rust.

Application should be done in a ventilated area away from any heat source. Wear protective gear for hands and eyes and avoid breathing of vapor. In case of heavy vapor inhalation, place affected person in an open-air area. In case of contact with eyes and skin, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. In all cases, seek medical attention. In case of fire, use CO2 foam to extinguish. Tightly seal containers when not in use, store them away from heat and carefully dispose empty ones.

PROPERTIES • Dem 44 is not washed off by rain • Dem 44 is resistant to high temperatures and therefore may be used in heated prefab • Dem 44 can stand frost • Dem 44 can be kept indefinitely • The use of Dem 44 presents no danger

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

SCOPE OF USE Dem 44 is a universal release agent which may be applied on any formwork: wood, metal, plastic, concrete form bottoms, etc.

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS Viscosity Specific gravity

<1 < 40 cP

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Apply on the form in very thin layers preferably with a sprayer.

YIELD

NOTE

On wood with 1 litre, 25 to 30 m² should be covered. On metal forms, 50 m² should be covered with 1 litre.

PACKAGING Dem 44 is supplied in: Bulk. Drums. 25 lit. pails.

Edition: 06/07-A

Dem B

WAX - BASED SHUTTER RELEASE AGENT

PRODUCT

25 lit. drums. 4 lit. drums

The paraffin waxes which compose Dem B, allow the concrete to easily slide away at the time of vibration. The imprisoned air escapes easily, which favorably influences surface appearance. The demoulded elements are smooth, brilliant, and without markings. When a surface without bubbling is desired, when using grey or white concrete, Dem B is recommended.

SCOPE OF USE • • • •

Concrete fabrication Formworks for gypsum Heavy prefabrication Formworks for prestressed concrete

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Preparation Color Freezing point Flash point Viscosity

DISCLAIMER

Creamy liquid Ready to use Milky white -3°C approximate ≥ 54°C 3 to 6 cP at 20°C

APPLICABLE STANDARD

P.C.B. content: Dem B conforms to directive of the Council of the European Community n°85/467/ CEE, 01/10/85 dated.

NOTE

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

The consistency of Dem B does not allow the use of spray application. Surface appearance will be proportional with the quantity applied. The sponge alone will permit good results, and it is advised, in all cases, the removal of any excess of product that exists on the surface of the form. White streaks will appear if persistent sponging continues following application.

Edition: 06/07-A

YIELD

STORAGE

50 m²/litre minimum. When applied with caution, The covering power increases to 100 m²/lit

Shelf life is up to 12 months when stored in a cool environment. Care should be taken to store this product away from sparks or open flames. Empty drums must not be cut with a cutting torch.

PACKAGING Dem B is supplied in: 200 lit. drums.

262

263

Cure WH

CURING COMPOUND FOR FRESH CONCRETE SURFACES

PRODUCT

PACKAGING

Cure WH is a white pigmented emulsion that protects concrete surfaces from fast evaporation of the mixing water. This product creates a regular and continuous film on the surface of fresh concrete preventing water evaporation and allowing concrete to cure and attain high strength.

Cure WH is supplied in: 1,000, 200, 25, and 4 lit. drums

STORAGE 6 months after manufacturing date. Do not store the product at high temperature.

HEALTH & SAFETY

PROPERTIES

• Protects fresh concrete surface from rainfall • Improves concrete surface appearance

SCOPE OF USE Cure WH is applied to concrete surfaces after mold release (piers, walls, retaining walls, prefabricated elements, either grey or white cement). Cure WH is recommended for concrete areas with high exposure to sunshine and elevated temperatures. The white pigmentation of Cure WH provides reflection to solar rays.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

White Liquid

Specific density pH

1.0 at 20 ˚C 9±1

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Carefully stir in container before use. Cure WH has been designed for spray application to the newly laid concrete. A thin film of Cure WH is applied to the whole surface using a hand operated spray gun. In case of over coating, it is recommended to check the adhesion & compatibility of the new coat and concrete surface treated with Cure WH before application.

NOTE

DOSAGE 0.10 to 0.15 kg/m² depending on wind, humidity, and temperature.

Edition: 03/09-A

PRECAUTIONS

Cure WT

HIGH EFFICIENT CURING COMPOUND FOR FRESH CONCRETE

PRODUCT

The most appropriate time for the application of Cure WT is after the concrete has received its final inish and immediately after the disappearance of bleed water sheen from the surface. It is important not to apply Cure WT when standing water is still present on the concrete. If the concrete has already lost some of its surface water, it is recommended to fog down the surface before application of Cure WT.

Cure WT is a wax based, low viscosity emulsion that protects concrete surfaces from fast evaporation of mixing water. It creates a regular and continuous film on the surface of fresh concrete preventing water evaporation. By ensuring better cement hydration, durability of concrete will be improved and shrinkage reduced.

PROPERTIES • • • •

Improves hydration of cement Minimizes shrinkage and surface cracking Improves durability of concrete Provides visual guide during application due to its white color • Non-flammable • Applicable by spray • Improves concrete surface appearance

Over coating and removal: Cure WT must be removed from concrete surface before application of any coating. It will be slowly removed by physical abrasion (traffic on the surface) or exposure to UV light. For a quick and total removal of the film formed, the surface should be scratch manually or by a light sand blasting or high-pressure water jetting.

DOSAGE

SCOPE OF USE

Recommended coverage rates range from 5 to 8 m² per liter depending on wind, humidity, and ambient temperature.

Cure WT is applied to fresh concrete surfaces after mold release (piers, walls, retaining walls, prefab. parts, either grey or white cement).

PACKAGING

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

Cure WT is supplied in: 1000, 200, 25, and 4 lit. drums

White Liquid

Specific density 1.0 Curing efficiency 94% (BS7542) VOC and Formadehyde None (< 10µg/l) ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS

STORAGE 12 months after manufacturing date in non-open original packaging protected from direct sun shine and high temperature.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

HEALTH & SAFETY

Complies to ASTM C309 type 2A and ASTM C156

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Before Cure WT is applied, the contents of the container must be stirred and thoroughly mixed by shaking. It is advisable to apply Cure WT by means of any usual spraying device.

QUALITY STATEMENT

While spraying, the distance between the spraying device and surface of the concrete should be 0.5 to 1 m. Thus a uniform coating is guaranteed. Coverage should not exceed 150 – 200 g/m².

Avoid close spraying at high pressure on fresh concrete.

264

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

265

Cure Y 20

Cure WT

CURING COMPOUND FOR NEWLY PLACED CONCRETE

original packaging protected from direct sun shine and high temperature.

PRODUCT

DISCLAIMER

Cure Y 20 is a water based, advanced copolymer formula, curing compound. It controls water retention and evaporation rates in newly placed concrete to provide added strength and protection. When water can’t evaporate quickly, the result is a stronger, more durable substrate that has a higher compressive strength. The concrete will resist shrinkage that is normally associated with the curing process, as well as cracking or other damage that can result from seasonal contraction and expansion. Applicable standards: ASTM C 309 & BS 7542

NOTE

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

SCOPE OF USE • • • • • •

Edition: 02/10-A

Exterior and interior, horizontal concrete surfaces Pre-cast or pre-stressed members Cure freshly poured concrete Residential, commercial and industrial applications Parking structures, driveways, patios, walkways Manufacturing, assembly and warehouse facilities

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

White Liquid

Specific gravity pH Color Chloride

Approx.1 7.5 ± 1 Transparent when dried Free

NOTE

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE It is advisable to apply Cure Y 20 by means of any usual spraying device. Apply Cure Y 20 after all bleed water has dissipated and application will not mar surface. The optional second coat is applied at right angles to first coat enhancing moisture retention.

Edition: 06/08-A **Available only in MENA

CONSUMPTION App. 8m² per liter.

PACKAGING Cure Y 20 is supplied in: 200, 25, and 4 lit.drums.

STORAGE 12 months after manufacturing date in non-open

266

267

Cure Y 40

Decap

CONCRETE CURING COMPOUND

HIGH-PERFORMANCE CONCRETE SOLVENT

by agitation. In case of contact with skin or eyes, rinse thoroughly with water. If irritation persists, seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention.

PRODUCT Cure Y 40 is a water-based curing compound for newly placed concrete surfaces. It produces a moisture-resistant membrane film on concrete surfaces to assure proper hydration of cement and reduce plastic shrinkage cracks.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

SCOPE OF USE For application to fresh concrete slabs or any other concrete surface to delay moisture loss.

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

White Liquid

Specific gravity pH Color Chloride

Approx.1 7.5 ± 1 Transparent when dried Free

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE On fresh concrete or rendering as soon as the gloss of the surface becomes mat, and the bleeding stops, Cure Y 40 is sprayed on the surface using a hand operated spray gun. In case of over coating, it is recommended to check the adhesion & compatibility of the new coat and concrete surface treated with Cure Y40 before application.

NOTE

CONSUMPTION

PRODUCT

CONSUMPTION

Decap is a concentrated acid which desegregates mortar, concrete, and laitance in cement. Decap dissolves the binders of these materials, which are eliminated by washing. Decap contains passive agents which avoid all attack on metal surfaces.

250 to 400 g/m² according to the depth of attack required.

SCOPE OF USE

12 months in unopened containers. Keep in tightly closed plastic containers. Avoid extremes of temperature. Keep out of reach of children.

PACKAGING Decap is supplied in 15 lit. drums

STORAGE

Elimination of superficial build up on concrete, bricks, and non-calcified material. • Elimination of dirt marks on concrete. • Final cleaning of washed gravel through elimination of superficial layers on fresh concrete. • Cleaning of metal forms, concrete mixers, hoppers of ready-mix concrete, and tools to eliminate adhered hardened concrete and mortar. • Rust remover

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

QUALITY STATEMENT

Liquid

Color Form

Non-colored straw yellow Concentrated, for dilution with water Specific gravity (20°C) 1.155 pH <2

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Superficial dissolving of concrete Apply one coat of pure product with a brush onto the surface to be dissolved. Leave the product on the surface (10 minutes approximately), then rinse with plenty of water. For light removal, dilute Decap with 1 or 2 parts of product to water.

App. 8m² per liter.

PACKAGING Cure Y 40 is supplied in: 200, 25, and 4 drums.

Cleaning of materials Soak the soiled materials in a basin containing pure Decap or dilute in 1 or 2 parts of water, depending on the speed of cleaning desired. Allow to soak the necessary time for the concrete to become disintegrated. When the attack on the concrete is advanced enough, remove the pieces, scrape the rest of the concrete, and rinse in water. In a concrete mixer pure Decap can be used for rapid attack, then prepare 1 or 2 parts water in order to dilute dissolved salts.

STORAGE Has a high storage stability: can be store up to 6 months from manufacturing date, in original and non open packaging. Storage temperature should not exceed +45°C over a long period.

HEALTH & SAFETY In case of frost, the product recovers its properties after progressive thawing and homogenizing

268

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

269

Decap XER

Blastocrete 160 FC

CONCRETE SOLVENT

SURFACE RETARDER FOR FRESH CONCRETE

by agitation. In case of contact with skin or eyes, rinse thoroughly with water. If irritation persists, seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention.

PRODUCT Decap XER is a concrete solvent that attacks mortar and lime. It is used to clean tiles and to wash tools after work. It removes all traces of laitance, splashes of mortar, etc.

QUALITY STATEMENT

SCOPE OF USE

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

• Cleaning molten-glass tiles • Cleaning ceramic and sandstone tiles • Removal of laitance traces or mortar splashes from tools Preliminary tests are recommended to ensure that Decap XER does not attack the support to be cleaned.

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS Color Specific gravity pH

None 1.04 at 20°C 1

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

NOTE

Decap XER is ready for use. The way to apply Decap XER depends on the surface or subject to be treated: with paint brush or with floor-cloth. Apply Decap XER and wait a few minutes. Repeat the operation if necessary. For the cleaning of tools, the layer of dry mortar must be properly soaked. It is then scraped with a sharp blade and washed with clear water.

Edition: 06/07-A

is at desired level. If the depth is greater than desired, allow the slab to cure longer before exposing the aggregate.

PRODUCT

Blastocrete 160 FC Surface Retarder is a blend of chemicals, which retards the surface set of freshly placed concrete. Surface Retarder reacts with cement at the surface to interrupt the normal hydration process. It will permit removal of the surface mortar within 8 to 24 hours after initial concrete set to uniformly expose embedded aggregate either by scrubbing or pressure washing.

COVERAGE

0.1 to 0.2 liter /m2

PACKAGING

Blastocrete 160 FC is supplied in 20 liters pails, 200 liter drums and 1000 liters totes.

SCOPE OF USE

STORAGE

Blastocrete 160 FC is used for exposing aggregate on sidewalks, floor slabs, topside of tilt-up panels, precast members, pool decks, driveways etc. Blastocrete 160 FC Surface Retarder may be used on construction joints of horizontally poured concrete when longer than normal time is involved between pours. Use of Blastocrete 160 FC Surface Retarder produces a rough surface for better bonding at construction joints.

Up to 1 year from manufacturing date, in original sealed packaging. Protect from heat and frost.

HEALTH & SAFETY

The rough finish obtained from using Blastocrete 160 FC may be used as a mechanical key for later concrete lifting or rendering.

QUALITY STATEMENT

Appearance

Liquid

All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

Color Density

Cream 1.125 kg/lit.

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Apply Blastocrete 160 FC with a low-pressure sprayer immediately after screeding when concrete has lost its sheen, or as soon as bleed water has disappeared. Apply only after all finishing operations are complete. Avoid puddles and over-spraying.

PACKAGING Decap XER is supplied in: 25-lit. drums.

Cover concrete with wet burlap or plastic sheeting to prevent drying out. Do not use curing compounds. Periodically check concrete to determine depth of retarded mortar, making sure concrete hardens.

STORAGE

12 months in unopened containers. Keep in tightly closed plastic containers. Avoid extremes of temperature. Keep out of reach of children.

Within 12-24 hours of application (depending on temperature and humidity), remove burlap or plastic sheeting one section at a time and wash the retardedsurface mortar using a low-pressure garden hose and stiff broom. Do not use excessive force. Test a small area to determine if depth of retarded mortar

HEALTH & SAFETY In case of frost, the product recovers its properties after progressive thawing and homogenizing

270

Edition: 05/08-A

271

Blastocrete 165 FW

SURFACE RETARDER FOR FORMWORK

PRODUCT

COVERAGE

Blastocrete 165 FW is a formwork retarder of thick viscosity that can be applied by brush to formwork, prior to the pouring of concrete. Concrete that comes in contact with the treated formwork will be retarded allowing for the exposure of the surface with a brush and water.

PACKAGING

Around 0.2 liter /m2

Blastocrete 165 FW is supplied in 20 liters pails, 200 liter drums and 1000 liters totes.

STORAGE

SCOPE OF USE

Up to 1 year from manufacturing date, in original sealed packaging. Protect from heat and frost.

Blastocrete 165 FW Will produce a deep etch. It can be used on steel or timber formwork. After the concrete sets or forms are removed, simply remove the Blastocrete 165 FW and unhardened mortar to reveal beautifully textured exposed aggregate surfaces.

The rough finish obtained from using Blastocrete 165 FW over normal concrete may be used as a mechanical key for cement based plaster.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

Viscous Liquid

Color Density

yellow 1.077 kg/lit.

QUALITY STATEMENT All our products are manufactured to comply with our internal QA/QC program and quality management system to ensure consistency and quality.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

DISCLAIMER

The Blastocrete 165 FW may be applied by roller, brush or spray. Considerable care is needed to ensure that the coatings are even to minimize variable depth of exposure. When production commences it will be necessary to maintain a reasonably uniform time delay between placing the retarder, allowing it to dry and then placing the concrete.

Within 12-24 hours of application (depending on temperature and humidity), the formwork should be stripped and the retarded layer of mortar removed with a stiff broom and hosed water. Do not use excessive force. Test a small area to determine if depth of retarded mortar is at desired level. If the depth is greater than desired, allow the treated surface to cure longer before exposing the aggregate. Trials should be conducted for time requirements. Local conditions and mix designs will affect the productâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s effectiveness

NOTE

TILE ADHESIVES

CEMENT-BASED TILE ADHESIVES

*Carrocolle BOND Carrocolle MAX Carrocolle PLUS Carrocolle WP Carrofix Carroflex Carroflex FS Carromortar Carromortar TBS *Carromortar TBS (HS) Carromortar TBS thick Colle primer

Latex modified mortar glue for tiles Premium quality polymer modified cementitous tile adhesive High performance cementitious tile adhesive Regular cement based tile adhesive Cementitious tile adhesive High performance cementitious flexible tile adhesive Fast-setting cementitious flexible tile adhesive Thick adhesive mortar Thick bedding screed High strength tile bedding screed UAE Only Thick tile bedding screed Tile adhesives primer

275 277 279 281 283 287 290 292 294 295 297 298

Ready to use pasty tile adhesive

285

ORGANIC ADHESIVES **Carrofix PY

EPOXY-BASED TILE ADHESIVES Epotile PLUS Epotile

Thin bed epoxy tile adhesive Three component epoxy tile adhesive

TILE GROUTS

CEMENT-BASED TILE GROUTS Carrojoint (Thin / Thick)

Cementitious tile grout

Edition: 05/08-A

*Available only in GCC **Available only in MENA

272

299 301

273

303

Carrocolle BOND

LATEX-MODIFIED MORTAR GLUE FOR TILES

*Carrojoint PLUS (Thin / Thick)

High performance cementitious tile grout

306

Three component epoxy grouting system Water based epoxy grouting system

308 310

EPOXY-BASED TILE GROUTS Epojoint **Epojoint WB

PRODUCT

* Con D - 7 days standard condition, 21 days water immersion, 25 freeze/Thaw cycles * Standard Condition - (50 ± 5)% Relative Humidity & 23 (± 2)˚C

A two component high quality latex-modified mortar glue for fixing tiles. It is made of cement, siliceous fillers, and additives, and is water resistant.

SCOPE OF USE ADMISSILE SUBSTRATES • For internal applications: cement plaster, concrete and plasterboards… • For external applications: plaster or concrete. Over difficult substrates such as gypsum, wood..., primer is required, consult company for advice.

Test for ANSI 118.4

ASSOCIATED COVERINGS All kind of tiles. For non-porous tiles, kindly consult the company’s technical department.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

Powder Additive Apparent density Powder Additive Open Time Pot Life Setting Time (min.) Shelf Life Pull-off strength Coverage

Shear strength (N/mm²) F-5.3.2 & F-5.3.3

Tensile Adhesion Stregth acc. EN 1348:2007 (N/mm²)

1.2

20 minutes

0.5

Con A

1.4

Con B

Con C

1.2

Con D

1.65

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION The substrates must be sound, clean, and free of dust, oil, paint, gypsum plaster. Substrate must be cured but not wet. PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix 1 lit. Carrocolle BOND liquid with 5 lit. water. With the mixing paddle of a low speed drill (<300 rpm) in operation, add gradually the powder component to the mix and continue mixing for 2 to 3 minutes. Mix until a uniform lump-free paste is obtained. Let the paste rest for a few minutes before starting the application. PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply Carrocolle BOND evenly on the substrate. Use a notched trowel. Apply the tiles on the substrate and press them firmly, making sure that the paste does not slip from the tile sides, and ensuring to have a uniform adhesive thickness of 2 to 3 mm minimum after having pressed the tiles. Carrocolle BOND can also be applied on the back of tiles to ensure full adhesion on the entire surface. Clean the tools with water after use. Cured materials can only be removed mechanically.

* Con A - 28 days standards conditions * Con B - 7 days standard condition + 21 days water immersion * Con C - 14 days standard condition + 14 days at 70˚C *Available only in GCC **Available only in MENA

274

28 days standard conditions

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Grey or white Milky white liquid 1.55 ± 0.05 1.0 25 min. at 20°C 2 hrs at 20°C Initial set: 540 Final set: 720 6 months > 1.2 MPa at 28 days 3 to 7 kg/m²

5 minutes

0.74

BS 5980: 1980 BS EN 12004:2007 ANSI 118.4

Test for BS EN 12004:2007 Open Time by Tensile Adhesion acc. EN 1346:2007 (N/mm²)

7 days standard conditions

275

Carrocolle BOND

Carrocolle MAX

PREMIUM QUALITY POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENTITIOUS TILE ADHESIVE

CONSUMPTION

vomiting and seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

Consumption depends on the type of substrate, type of tile and the technique used. In summary: • Single coat (substrate) : 4 - 5 kg/m² • Double coat (substrate & tile) : 5 - 7 kg/m² Please consult the company’s technical department for more details.

DISCLAIMER

PRECAUTIONS Apply Carrocolle BOND on the substrate by areas of around 1m² each, which can be tiled within a maximum of 25 minutes from mixing time at 20°C. After that time, an outer skin may form thus preventing the tile from adhering properly to Carrocolle BOND. Adjustments to the tiles should only be made during Carrocolle BOND‘s open time. It is recommended to leave a minimum width of 2mm around the tiles (or as designed). Grouting the tile joints should only be done at least 24 hours after tiling, using our ranges of Carrojoint.

NOTE

Edition: 06/10-A *Available only in GCC

PACKAGING Carrocolle BOND is packed in: 25 kg paper bag (powder) and 1lit.bottle (liquid) Mixing ratio: 25 kg powder for 1lit. liquid and 5 lit.water.

Test for BS EN 12004:2007

PRODUCT

Open Time by Tensile 5 minutes Adhesion acc. EN 20 minutes 1346:2007 (N/mm²) 30 minutes Tensile Adhesion Con A Strength acc. EN Con B 1348:2007 (N/mm²) Con C

Carrocolle MAX is a ready mix cement-based polymer modified adhesive for fixing all types of ceramic tiles, including fully vitrified/porcelain tiles to rigid interior and exterior floors and walls. Carrocolle MAX has very strong bond strength onto tiles with very low porosity. It is suitable to fix tiles onto low porosity substrates such as power floated concrete or existing tiles. Carrocolle MAX has a super white color and doesn’t cause staining or discoloration of light colored tiles. It is suitable for use in wet and dry conditions. Exceeds the requirement of BS EN 12004 for C2E.

* Con A - 28 days standards conditions * Con B - 7 days standard condition + 21 days water immersion * Con C - 14 days standard condition + 14 days at 70˚C Strength values are obtained under laboratory conditions at 20°C.

SCOPE OF USE

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Carrocolle MAX is used for fixing a wide range of tiles on the following substrates: • Concrete • Aerated concrete blocks • Stone walls (cleaned and prepared) • Glazed tiles (internal use) • Cementitious plaster and renders • Gypsum boards Over difficult substrates such as gypsum, wood..., primer is required, consult company for advice.

BS EN 12004 (EN 1346, EN 1348).

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SURFACE PREPARATION Surface must be clean and free from greasy matters or dust. Substrate should have been sufficiently cured in a way that any shrinkage has already occurred. Make good any unsound areas and remove flaky or peeling layers before tiling. Moisten slightly the substrate if it is dry at the time of application, never moisten the tiles.

Carrocolle MAX can be used for tiling in: • Swimming pools • Facades • Bathrooms • Rooms • Stairs • Parking • Heated floors

STORAGE Carrocolle BOND can be stored for 6 months in dry conditions, away from extreme temperatures and protected against wind. Protect the liquid component away from extreme temperature and direct sunlight.

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix Carrocolle MAX in the proportion of 3.5 liters of clean cool water per 15kg bag. An electric mixer with low rotation speed (< 300 rpm) can be used. Mix until a uniform lump free paste is obtained. Let the paste rest for a few minutes before starting the application.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Composition Color Density Open Time Pot Life Shelf Life Mixing Ratio Coverage

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be donein a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning thoroughly with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce

276

1.3 1.07 0.6 1.4 1.2 1.2

Powder Cement, selected silica sand and additives White 1.55 kg/lit. ± 0.05 30 min. at 20°C 2 hrs at 20°C 12 months 3.5 lit. per 15 kg 3 to 7 kg/m²

PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply the adhesive onto the substrate covering up to 1 m² at a time (or no more than can be tiled within 30 minutes at 20°C). Use a suitable notched trowel to achieve a uniform thickness. Apply the tiles on the substrate and press them firmly, while making sure that the paste does not slip from the

277

Carrocolle PLUS Grey/White

Carrocolle MAX

HIGH PERFORMANCE CEMENTITIOUS TILE ADHESIVE

tile sides. Large or studded backed tiles may need to have adhesive buttered onto the tile back as well. Leave appropriate clearance joints for grouting and make any adjustments within 10 minutes.

vomiting and seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

DISCLAIMER

CLEANING

Carefully clean off any excess adhesive from the tiles and joints with a damp cloth or sponge, before it sets. Clean the tools with water after use. Cured materials can only be removed mechanically.

PRECAUTIONS

NOTE

Apply Carrocolle MAX on the substrate by areas of around 1 m² each, which can be tiled within a maximum of 30 minutes from mixing time at 20°C. After that time, an outer skin may form thus preventing the tile from adhering properly to Carrocolle MAX. Adjustments to the tiles should only be made during Carrocolle MAX open time. It is recommended to leave a minimum width of 2 mm around the tiles. Grouting the tile joints should only be done at least 24 hours after tiling, using Carrojoint or Carrojoint PLUS.

Edition: 06/10-A

PRODUCT

Test for BS EN 12004:2007

Carrocolle PLUS is a ready mix cement-based high performance polymer modified tile adhesive for internal and external use. Carrocolle PLUS has a strong bonding effect, used for adhering large tiles, or in cases of permanent exposure to high degrees of humidity. It can be used in a damp environment, and is water resistant.

Open Time by Tensile Adhesion acc. EN 1346:2007 (N/mm²) Tensile Adhesion Strength acc. EN 1348:2007 (N/mm²)

Carrocolle MAX is packed in 15 kg bag.

STORAGE

Carrocolle MAX can be stored for 12 months in dry conditions, away from extreme temperatures and protected against wind.

Carrocolle PLUS is used for fixing a wide range of tiles (ceramic, sandstone, granite, marble, etc.) on the following substrates: • Concrete • Lightweight blocks • Stone walls (cleaned and prepared) • Glazed tiles (internal use) • Cementitious plaster and renders • Gypsum Board • Fixing of Polystyrene board to concrete or Cementitious substrate.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Composition

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

Color Density Open time Pot Life Setting time (min.) Shelf Life Mixing Ratio Coverage

Thin

VOC and Formadehyde ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS

278

1.2

20 minutes

0.56

Con A Con B Con C Con D

1.2 1 1.1 1

* Con A - 28 days standards conditions * Con B - 7 days standard condition + 21 days water immersion * Con C - 14 days standard condition + 14 days at 70˚C * Con D - 7 days standard condition, 21 days water immersion, 25 freeze/Thaw cycles * Standard Condition - (50 ± 5)% Relative Humidity & 23 (± 2)˚C

SCOPE OF USE

Test for ANSI 118.4

Shear strength (N/mm²) F-5.3.2 & F-5.3.3

Over difficult substrates such as gypsum, wood..., primer is required, consult company for advice. Carrocolle PLUS can be used for tiling in: • Swimming pools • Facades • Bathrooms • Rooms • Stairs • Parking • Heated floors

PACKAGING

5 minutes

7 days standard conditions

1.4

28 days standard conditions

1.9

APPLICABLE STANDARDS BS 5980:1980. BS EN 12004:2007, ANSI 118.4

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SURFACE PREPARATION Surface must be clean and free from greasy matters or dust. Substrate should have been sufficiently cured in a way that any shrinkage has already occurred. Moisten slightly the substrate if it is dry at the time of application, never moisten the tiles.

Powder Cement, siliceous sand and additives Grey or white 1.55 kg/lit. ± 0.05 25 min. at 20°C 2 hrs at 20°C Initial set: 330 Final set: 540 6 months 6 Lit. /25 kg. 3 to 7 kg/m²

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix Carrocolle PLUS in the proportion of 6 liters of clean cool water per 25 kg bag. An electric mixer with low rotation speed (< 300 rpm) can be used. Mix until a uniform lump free paste is obtained. Let the paste rest for a few minutes before starting the application.

None (< 10µg/l)

279

Carrocolle PLUS Grey/White

PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply Carrocolle PLUS evenly on the substrate. Use a notched trowel to have a uniform thickness of 2 to 3 mm minimum. Apply the tiles on the substrate and press them firmly, while making sure that the paste does not slip from the tile sides. Carrocolle PLUS can also be applied on the back of tiles to ensure full adhesion with all the surface. each bag of 25 kg Carrocolle PLUS should be mixed with 1 liter Admix 225 MB (styrene butadiene latex bonding agent)+ 4.75 liters clean water. For 20 Kg bag Carrocolle PLUS, use 1 liter Admix 225 MB+ 3.6 liters of clean water.

protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning thoroughly with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

DISCLAIMER

CLEANING Clean the tools with water after use. Cured materials can only be removed mechanically.

PRECAUTIONS Apply Carrocolle PLUS on the substrate by areas of around 1 m² each, which can be tiled within a maximum of 25 minutes from mixing time at 20°C. After that time, an outer skin may form thus preventing the tile from adhering properly to Carrocolle PLUS. Adjustments to the tiles should only be made during Carrocolle PLUS’ open time. It is recommended to leave a minimum width of 2 mm around the tiles. Grouting the tile joints should only be done at least 24 hours after tiling, using Carrojoint PLUS

NOTE

PACKAGING Carrocolle PLUS is packed in 25 kg bag.

STORAGE Carrocolle PLUS can be stored for 6 months in dry conditions, away from extreme temperatures and protected against wind.

Carrocolle WP Grey/White

REGULAR CEMENT BASED TILE ADHESIVE

PRODUCT

Test for BS EN 12004:2007

Carrocolle WP is a ready mix cement-based tile adhesive for internal walls and floor tiling as well as external flooring. Carrocolle WP has a strong bonding effect and is water resistant.

Open Time by Tensile Adhesion acc. EN 1346:2007 (N/mm²) Tensile Adhesion Stregth acc. EN 1348:2007 (N/mm²)

SCOPE OF USE

Carrocolle WP is used for fixing a wide range of tiles (ceramic, sandstone, etc.) on the following substrates: • Concrete • Lightweight blocks (Primer is required) • Stone walls (cleaned and prepared) • Gypsum board • Cementitious plasters and renders Substarte made of Gypsum plaster is not advisable. Carrocolle WP can be used for tiling in: • Bathrooms • Rooms • Stairs • Parking

Con A

1.1

Con B

0.9

Con C

0.8

Con D

0.9

Test for ANSI 118.4

Appearance Composition

Powder Cement, siliceous sand and additives Color Grey or White Density 1.55 kg/lit. ± 0.05 Open Time 25 min. at 20°C Pot Life 2 hrs at 20°C Setting Time (min.) Initial set: 450 Final set: 840 Shelf Life 6 months Mixing Ratio 6 lit. per 25 kg Coverage 3 to 7 kg/m² VOC and Formadehyde None (< 10µg/l) ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS

Shear strength (N/mm²) F-5.3.2 & F-5.3.3

7 days standard conditions

1.2

28 days standard conditions

1.4

All values given are subject to 5 to 10 % tolerance.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS BS 5980:1980 as Class A Type 1. BS EN 12004:2007 ANSI 118.4

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Tensile adhesion strength >950 N (Appendix D) Shear adhesion strength (App . E) >8.9 KN

280

0.56

All values given are subject to 5 to 10 % tolerance.

CHARACTERISTICS

Test for: BS 5980:1980 Class A Type 1

The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be donein a ventilated area, and to wear

20 minutes

TEST RESULTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

5 minutes

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix 25 kg of Carrocolle WP with 6 liters of clean cool water (for 20 kg with 4.8 liters of water). An electric mixer with low rotation speed (< 300 rpm) can be used.

281

Carrocolle WP Grey/White

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Mix until a uniform lump free paste is obtained. Let the paste rest for a few minutes before starting the application.

PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply Carrocolle WP evenly on the substrate. Use a notched trowel to have a uniform thickness of 2 to 3 mm minimum. Apply the tiles on the substrate and press them firmly, while making sure that the paste does not slip from the tile sides. Carrocolle WP can also be applied on the back of tiles to ensure full adhesion on the entire surface. Clean the tools with water after use. Cured materials can only be removed mechanically. In case exceptional performance is required, each bag of 25 kg Carrocolle WP should be mixed with 1 liter Admix 225 MB (styrene butadiene latex bonding agent)+ 4.75 liters clean water. For 20 Kg bag Carrocolle WP, use 1 liter Admix 225 MB + 3.6 liters of clean water.

DISCLAIMER

PRECAUTIONS Apply Carrocolle WP on the substrate by areas of around 1m² each, which can be tiled within a maximum of 25 minutes from mixing time at 20°C. After that time, an outer skin may form thus preventing the tile from adhering properly to Carrocolle WP. Adjustments to the tiles should only be made during Carrocolle WP ‘s open time. It is recommended to leave a minimum width of 2mm around the tiles (or as designed). Grouting the tile joints should only be done at least 24 hours after tiling, using Carrojoint.

NOTE

Edition: 01/11-A

Carrofix Grey/White CEMENTITIOUS TILE ADHESIVE

PRODUCT Carrofix is a ready-mix cement-based tile adhesive for internal use. Carrofix is water resistant and has a strong bonding effect.

*Con B - 7 days standard condition + 21 days water immersion *Con C - 14 days standard condition + 14 days at 70˚C * Con D - 7 days standard condition, 21 days water immersion, 25 freeze/Thaw cycles * Standard Condition - (50 ± 5)% Relative Humidity & 23 (± 2)˚C

SCOPE OF USE Carrofix can fix a wide range of ceramic tiles. Carrofix can be used to tile directly onto the following substrates: • Concrete • Stone walls (cleaned and prepared) • Cementitious plaster and renders

Test for ANSI 118.4 Shear strength (N/mm²) F-5.3.2 & F-5.3.3

Gypsum substrates are not advisable. Carrofix can be used for tiling in: • Bathrooms • Regular rooms

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Composition

Resistance to slip Shelf Life Mixing Ratio Coverage VOC and Formadehyde

None (< 10µg/l)

Open Time by Tensile Adhesion acc. EN 1346:2007 (N/mm²) Tensile Adhesion Stregth acc. EN 1348:2007 (N/mm²)

STORAGE Carrocolle WP can be stored for 6 months in dry conditions, away from extreme temperatures and protected against wind.

5 minutes Con A Con B Con C Con D

SURFACE PREPARATION Substrate must be clean and free from greasy matters or dust. It should have been sufficiently cured in a way that any shrinkage has already occurred. Moisten slightly the substrate if it is dry at the time of application, never moisten the tiles. PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix Carrofix in the proportion of 5 to 6 liters of clean cool water per 25 kg bag (or 20kg with 4 to 4.8 liters of water. An electric mixer with low rotation speed (< 300 rpm) can be used. Mix until a uniform lump free paste is obtained. Let the paste rest for a few minutes before starting the application. PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply Carrofix evenly on the substrate. Use a notched trowel to have a uniform thickness according to the size of the tile. Apply the tiles on the substrate and press them firmly, while making sure that the paste does not slip from the tile sides. Carrofix can also be applied on the back of tiles to ensure full adhesion on the entire surface. In

0.77 0.8 0.8 0.5 0.9

*Con A - 28 days standards conditions

282

1.6

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Test for BS EN 12004:2007

Carrocolle WP is packed in: GCC: 25 kg bags. MENA: 20 kg bags.

28 days standard conditions

BS 5980:1980 as Class A Type 1. BS EN 12004:2007, ANSI 118.4

ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS

PACKAGING

0.7

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Powder Cement, siliceous sand and additives Grey or White 1.55 kg/lit. ± 0.05 15 min. at 20°C 2 hrs at 20°C Initial set: 570 Final set: 750 Excellent 6 months 5 lit. per 25 kg 3 to 7 kg/m²

Color Density Open Time Pot Life Setting Time (min.)

7 days standard conditions

283

Carrofix Grey/White

Carrofix PY

READY TO USE PASTY TILE ADHESIVE

Apply the tiles and press them strongly on the substrate in order to spread the product uniformly on the wall.

PRODUCT case exceptional performance is required, each bag of 25 kg Carrofix should be mixed with 1 liter Admix 225 MB (styrene butadiene latex bonding agent)+ 4 liters clean water. For 20 Kg bag Carrofix, use 1 liter Admix 225 MB+ 3 liters of clean water.

is non-flammable.

DISCLAIMER

CLEANING

Clean the tools with water after use. Cured materials can only be removed mechanically.

PRECAUTIONS

Apply Carrofix on the substrate by areas of around 1m² each, which can be tiled within a maximum of 15 minutes from mixing time at 20°C. After that time, an outer skin may form thus preventing the tile from adhering properly to Carrofix. Adjustments to the tiles should only be made during its open time. It is recommended to leave a minimum width of 2 mm around the tiles (or as designed). Grouting the tile joints should only be done at least 24 hours after tiling, using Carrojoint.

NOTE

PACKAGING Carrofix is packed in 25 kg bags.

Carrofix PY is a pasty tile adhesive for interior purpose suitable for a wide range of tiles. It is a ready to use product based only on resins, fillers and plasticizers. Carrofix PY sets by evaporation.

Carrofix PY will set and seal by evaporation.Joints can be filled with the Carrojoint grout, 24 hours after the sealing of the tiles.

SCOPE OF USE Carrofix PY is designed for internal use only.

CONSUMPTION 3 to 5 kg/m².

ADMISSIBLE TILES • Ceramic tiles • Earthenware tiles • Sandstone tiles • Molten glass • Backed clay

PACKAGING Carrofix PY is supplied in 20 kg pails

STORAGE 1 year, stored in a fresh and dry area in unopened original packaging.

ADMISSIBLE SUBSTRATES • Concrete • Cementitious plasters • Gypsum plasters • Gypsum boards and all kind of gypsum partitions • Wooden substrates

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Avoid prolonged contact with skin. Wear protective gear for hands & eyes. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning thoroughly with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

CHARACTERISTICS

STORAGE Carrofix can be stored for 6 months in dry conditions, away from extreme temperatures and protected against wind.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning thoroughly with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention. The product

Appearance

Creamy sandy paste

Density pH Dry Extract Viscosity

1.68 7 79.5% 3000 Poise (brookfield module D5 trs/min.)

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SURFACE PREPARATION The surface must be leveled and regular. The substrate must be clean, sound, free from all dust, greasy matters, and must be dry. Do not wet the wall nor the tiles. PRODUCT APPLICATION The product is ready to use. Apply Carrofix PY uniformly on the support and use the notched spatula to give the required thickness

284

NOTE The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorized

285

Carrofix PY

Carroflex Grey/White

disclosure, use, dissemination or copying (either whole or partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit.

PRODUCT

HIGH PERFORMANCE CEMENTITIOUS FLEXIBLE TILE ADHESIVE Color Density Open Time Pot Life Setting Time (min.) Drying time before traffic Shelf Life Mixing Ratio Coverage

Carroflex is a two-component cement-based, polymer modified, flexible, waterproof tile adhesive for internal & external use. It is a ready mix powder containing cement, siliceous sand and additives. Carroflex has outstanding qualities such as high bonding strength, high resistance to water and chemicals, water tightness and flexibility.

Edition: 06/07-A **Available only in MENA

It is used internally and externally with a wide range of small to large tiles, and in cases of permanent exposure to high degrees of humidity.

TEST RESULTS

SCOPE OF USE

Test for ANSI 118.6 Water Absorption (ANSI-A 118.6-1999 Cl. H-4.4)

Applicable tile types include: • Ceramic • Granite • Sandstone • Marble Applicable substrates include: • Concrete • Lightweight blocks • Stone walls (cleaned and prepared) • Cement-based plaster and renders • Gypsum board • Glazed tiles • Wood agglomerates • Aluminum coverings • Ceramic & terrazzo tiles (after preparation) Over difficult substrates such as gypsum, wood..., primer is required, consult company for advice.

• • • • • •

Shear strength (N/mm²) F-5.3.2 & F-5.3.3

Liquid composition

286

7 days standard conditions 28 days standard conditions

1.9 2

Test for BS EN 12004:2007 Open Time by Tensile Adhesion acc. EN 1346:2007 (N/mm²) Tensile Adhesion Stregth acc. EN 1348:2007 (N/mm²)

Facades Rooms Parking Balconies Public showers SubwaysS

5 minutes

1.9

20 minutes 30 minutes Con A Con B Con C Con D

0.9 0.6 2 1.3 2.4 2.1

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Powder composition

0.76%

Test for ANSI 118.4

Applicable conditions include: • Where thermal and dimensional variations are expected • In vibrating areas • For external & internal waterproof tiling Where resistance to chemical aggression is required Applicable cases include: • Swimming pools • Bathrooms • Stairs • Heated floors • Terraces • Hospitals

Grey or White 1.55 kg/lit. ± 0.05 25 min. at 20°C 2 hrs at 20°C Initial set: 840 Final set: 900 24 hrs at 20°C 6 months 11.5 kg powder + 3.5 kg liquid 3 to 7 kg/m²

Creamy sandy paste Cement (ASTM C150), fillers-sand & admixtures Resins (polymer additives),admixtures

Test for EN 12002

Deformation from horizontal plane (mm)

287

Carroflex Grey/White

the company’s office in your location.

SURFACE PREPARATION Surface must be clean, sound, and free from greasy matters and dust. Substrate should have been sufficiently cured in a way that any shrinkage has already occurred. Moisten slightly the substrate if it is dry at the time of application, never moisten the tiles.

Carroflex’s open time. It is recommended to leave a minimum width of 2 mm around the tiles. Grouting the tile joints should only be done at least 24 hours after tiling, using Carrojoint PLUS. For immersed areas, allow 21 days curing for Carroflex before filling with water. Clean the tools with water after use.

PACKAGING

Edition: 05/11-A

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix the two components of Carroflex by pouring the powder in the liquid progressively while stirring the liquid. An electric mixer with low rotation speed (< 300 rpm) can be used. Mix until a uniform lump free paste is obtained. Let the paste rest for a few minutes before starting the application.

STORAGE

APPLICABLE STANDARDS BS 5980:1980. ANSI-A 118.6-1999 Cl. H-4.4. ANSI 118.4, BS EN 12004:2007

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Carroflex is supplied in: UAE: 15 kg kit: 11.5 kg powder + 3.5 kg liquid Qatar: 20 kg kit: 15 kg powder + 5 kg liquid MENA: 32.5 kg kit: 25 kg powder + 7.5 kg liquid

Carroflex can be stored for 6 months in dry conditions, away from extreme temperatures and protected against wind.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CLEANING

The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning thoroughly with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

Clean the tools with water after use. Cured materials can only be removed mechanically.

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply Carroflex evenly on the substrate. Use a notched trowel to have a uniform thickness of 2 to 3 mm minimum. Apply the tiles on the substrate and press them firmly, while making sure that the paste does not slip from the tile sides. Carroflex can also be applied on the back of tiles to ensure full adhesion on the entire surface.

PRECAUTIONS Apply Carroflex on the substrate by areas of around 1m² each, which can be tiled within a maximum of 25 minutes from mixing time at 20°C. After that time, an outer skin may form thus preventing the tile from adhering properly to Carroflex. Adjustments to the tiles should only be made during

288

289

Carroflex FS

fast-SETTING CEMENTITIOUS FLEXIBLE TILE ADHESIVE

Carroflex FS

PRODUCT

PRECAUTIONS

* Con C - 14 days standard condition + 14 days at 70˚C * Standard Condition - (50 ± 5)% Relative Humidity & 23 (± 2)˚C

Carroflex FS is a two components polymer modified fast-setting flexible ready-mix tile adhesive. Its flexibility makes it suitable for tiling directly to timber and concrete substrate subject to thermal/shrinkage movement. It is specially formulated for interior and exterior wall and floor applications. Carroflex FS is water resistant and has an outstanding bonding effect.

Test for EN 12002 Deformation from horizontal plane (mm)

Carroflex FS is suitable for the rapid set laying of all ceramic, mosaic stone, brick, clay and non-porous tiles. The fast setting nature of this material makes it ideal for situations where the tiled area need to be accessed / grouted in few hours such as: shops, hospitals, and commercial and domestics situations. Over difficult substrates such as gypsum, wood..., primer is required, consult company for advice

Shear strength (N/mm²) F-5.3.2 & F-5.3.3

Color Pot Life Setting Time (min.) Shelf Life Mixing Ratio Coverage Tensile Adhesion at 20 hours

Tensile Adhesion Stregth acc. EN 1348:2007 (N/mm²)

7 days standard conditions 28 days standard conditions

STORAGE 2.4 2.1

BS EN 12004:2007, ANSI 118.4.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Powder Special cements, siliceous sand and additives Dark Grey 15 min at 20°C Initial set: 90 Final set: 210 6 months 5.5 lit. per 25 kg 3 to 7 kg/m² 0.95 MPa

5 minutes

1.1

10 minutes Con A Con B Con C

0.7 2.6 0.9 2.5

SURFACE PREPARATION Substrate must be structurally sound and free from loose tiles and debris, existing setting material or any foreign matters. PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix the two components of Carroflex FS by pouring the powder in the liquid progressively while stirring the liquid. An electric mixer with low rotation speed (< 300 rpm) can be used. Mix until a uniform lump free paste is obtained. PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply Carroflex FS evenly on the substrate. Use a notched trowel to have the required thickness. Apply the tiles on the substrate and press them firmly, while making sure that the paste does not slip from the tile sides. Carroflex FS can also be applied on the back of tiles to ensure full adhesion on the entire surface.

Test for BS EN 12004:2007 Open Time by Tensile Adhesion acc. EN 1346:2007 (N/mm²)

Carroflex FS is packed in 15 kg & 30.5 kg kit: 12.3 kg powder + 2.7 kg liquid 25 kg powder + 5.5 kg liquid

5.3

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Composition

PACKAGING

Test for ANSI 118.4

SCOPE OF USE

CLEANING

* Con A - 28 days standards conditions * Con B - 7 days standard condition + 21 days water immersion

Clean the tools with water after use. Cured materials can only be removed mechanically.

290

Edition: 05/11-A

The mixed Carroflex FS should be used within 15 minutes from mixing time at 20°C. It is recommended to determine the suitability of all materials before proceeding with the installation.

Carroflex FS can be stored for 6 months in dry conditions, away from extreme temperatures and protected against wind.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cements powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning thoroughly with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

291

Carromortar

THICK ADHESIVE MORTAR

PRODUCT

CLEANING

Carromortar is a ready mix dry mortar made of hydraulic binders, calibrated grains and resins. It is used for installing ceramic tiles, mosaic, prefabricated stones, blocks or marble, on interior and exterior floors

Clean the tools with water after use. Cured materialscan only be removed mechanically.

1.53 kg / m² per 1 mm thickness approx.

PACKAGING

Concrete, plaster mortar screed, hollow blocks, light weight blocks, sand bed. Do not use on gypsum based substrate.

Carromortar is packed in: GCC: 25 kg bag MENA: 50 kg bag

CHARACTERISTICS

Grain size Adhesion

Edition: 01/08-A

CONSUMPTION

ADMISSIBLE SUBSTRATES

Appearance Color Powder density

disclosure, use, dissemination or copying (either whole or partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit.

STORAGE

Powder Grey

6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing under dry conditions.

1.54 0 to 4.00 mm > 0.5 Mpa at 28 days on concrete substrate

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning thoroughly with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE • For a 25 kg bag: Mix the 25 kg bag of Carromortar with 3.75 to 4.75 Lit. of clean cool water. For additional adhesion strength, mix the 25 kg bag with 2.5 to 3.2 Lit. of clean cool water with approximately 1.25 Lit. of Admix 240 LTX • For a 50 kg bag: Mix the 50 kg bag with 7.5 to 9.5 Lit. of clean cool water. For additional adhesion strength, mix the 50 Kg bag with 5 to 6.4 Lit. of clean cool water with approximately 2.5 Lit. of Admix 240 LTX • Mixing is done manually, using an electric agitator or continuous mixer. • Mix well until a homogeneous mixture is obtained. • Carromortar can be applied up to 40 mm thickness. • For small thicknesses, use one of the cementitious tile adhesives from our range. • Pot life is 60 minutes approximately at 20ºC. • Protect the tiled surfaces. • We recommend using our ranges of Carrojoint waterproof grout for filling the tile joint. • Ideal application temperature is between 5ºC and 35ºC.

NOTE The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorized

292

293

Carromortar TBS

Carromortar TBS (HS)

THICK BEDDING SCREED

HIGH STRENGTH TILE BEDDING SCREED

PRODUCT

PACKAGING

PRODUCT

Carromortar TBS is a ready mix dry mortar made of hydraulic binders, calibrated grains and resins. This mortar is laid on top of concrete substrates in internal environments to form a thick dry bedding screed over which a slurry is poured and ceramic tiles, mosaics, prefabricated stones, blocks or marble are installed.

Carromortar TBS is supplied in 50 Kg bags.

Carromortar TBS (HS) is a uniformly blended mixture of hydraulic binders, resins calibrated sands and aggregates. This mortar is laid on top of concrete substrates in internal environments to form a thick dry bedding screed over which a slurry is poured and ceramic tiles, mosaics, prefabricated stones, blocks or marble are installed.

STORAGE 6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing under dry conditions.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning thoroughly with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

ADMISSIBLE SUBSTRATES Concrete. Do not use on gypsum based substrate.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Powder density

Mixed density Grain size

Powder Grey

1.4 2.2 0 to 5.00 mm

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix one 50 Kg bag of Carromortar TBS with 5 to 5.5 litres of clean cool water manually, using a mixing drill or a continuous mixer, until a homogeneous dry mixture is obtained. PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply Carromortar TBS using a trowel on the well cleaned and cured concrete. Carromortar TBS can be applied up to 30 – 50 mm thickness. Soon after levelling Carromortar TBS, apply over it a slurry layer of 2 to 3 mm containing cement, water and a bonding agent like Admix 240 LTX. Fix immediately the tiles and make sure to protect the tiled surface. It is recommended to use our range of Carrojoint waterproof grouts for filling the tile joints. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC.

NOTE

waterproof grouts for filling the tile joints. Ideal application temperature is between +5 ºC and +35 ºC.

CONSUMPTION 2.2 kg / m² per 1 mm thickness approximately.

PACKAGING Carromortar TBS is supplied in 25 Kg bags.

ADMISSIBLE SUBSTRATES

STORAGE

Concrete with minimum 40 MPa compressive strength. Do not use on gypsum based substrate.

6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing under dry conditions.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Powder density

Mixed density Grain size Compressive strength at 28 days (MPa)

The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning thoroughly with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

Powder Grey

1.7 ± 0.1 2.300 0 to 6 mm 40 MPa

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix one 50 Kg bag of Carromortar TBS (HS) with 4 to 4.5 litres of clean cool water manually, using a mixing drill or a continuous mixer, until a homogeneous dry mixture is obtained.

PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply Carromortar TBS (HS) using a trowel on the well cleaned and cured concrete. Carromortar TBS (HS) can be applied from 30 to 100 mm thickness. For tiles fixing, soon after levelling Carromortar TBS (HS), apply over it a slurry layer of 2 to 3 mm containing cement, water and a bonding agent like Admix 240 LTX. Fix immediately the tiles and make sure to protect the tiled surface.

NOTE The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorized

It is recommended to use our range of Carrojoint

CONSUMPTION 2 kg / m² per 1 mm thickness approximately.

294

295

Carromortar TBS (HS)

Carromortar TBS thick THICK TILE BEDDING SCREED

disclosure, use, dissemination or copying (either whole or partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit. Edition: 12/09-A *Available in UAE

PRODUCT

PACKAGING

Carromortar TBS thick is a uniformly blended mixture of hydraulic binders, resins calibrated sands and aggregates. This mortar is laid on top of concrete substrates in internal environments to form a thick dry bedding screed over which a slurry is poured and ceramic tiles, mosaics, prefabricated stones, blocks or marble are installed.

Carromortar TBS thick is supplied in 50 Kg bags.

STORAGE 6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing under dry conditions.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning thoroughly with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

ADMISSIBLE SUBSTRATES Concrete. Do not use on gypsum based substrate.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Powder density

Mixed density Grain size Compressive strength at 28 days (EN 196-1)

Powder Grey

1.45 2.220 0 to 6.00 mm 20 MPa

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix one 50 Kg bag of Carromortar TBS thick with 5 to 5.5 litres of clean cool water manually, using a mixing drill or a continuous mixer, until a homogeneous dry mixture is obtained. PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply Carromortar TBS thick using a trowel on the well cleaned and cured concrete. Carromortar TBS thick can be applied up to 30 100 mm thickness. Soon after levelling Carromortar TBS thick, apply over it a slurry layer of 2 to 3 mm containing cement, water and a bonding agent like Admix 240 LTX. Fix immediately the tiles and make sure to protect the tiled surface. It is recommended to use our range of Carrojoint waterproof grouts for filling the tile joints. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC.

NOTE

CONSUMPTION 2 kg / m² per 1 mm thickness approximately.

296

297

Epotile PLUS

Colle primer

THIN BED EPOXY TILE ADHESIVE

TILE ADHESIVES PRIMER

PRODUCT

STORAGE

Colle primer is a specially formulated acrylic dispersion for use as a primer before tilling to improve application and adhesion of tile adhesives. Colle primer prevents over-rapid absorption of water into very absorbent substrate, such as foamed concrete blocks. It prolongs the open time of the tile adhesives.

Colle primer has high storage stability from -20°C to + 45°C. Can be stored up to 6 months after manufacturing date, in original packaging.

ADMISSIBLE SUBSTRATES To prepare and stabilize porous surfaces prior to tiling and to improve adhesion of tile adhesives on difficult substrates, such as vinyl tiles, timber, asphalt and terrazzo etc. Also prevents swelling of timber.

CHARACTERISTICS Density Color Drying time

DISCLAIMER

Approx 1 kg / lit Milky White 1/2 to 2 hours depending on Application rate and climatic Conditions

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE PRODUCT PREPARATION The substrate must be perfectly sound, clean, dry and free from grease, oil, dust or any contamination that may prevent adhesion.

NOTE

PRODUCT APPLICATION Shake container well before use. Apply the primer evenly, using a brush, roller or small broom, over the sound, clean and dust-free surface and leave to dry to a clear thin film before applying the tile adhesives. It is important that the primer fill the entire surface to ensure a solid bond of the tile adhesives. Avoid forming of puddles. Extremely porous substrates may require two priming coats. Clean tools with water when wet.

Edition: 10/10-A

APPLICABLE STANDARD

PRODUCT

Colle primer is supplied in 5, 15 or 20 liters pails.

298

PRODUCT PREPARATION Part B (hardener) is to be added to part A (resin), not the reverse. Mix parts A and B for 2 minutes using a suitable electrical agitator at low speed to ensure the proper chemical reaction. Add gradually the mineral charge (part C) to the premix of parts A and B and continue mixing for a further 2 minutes until all the mineral charges are completely wetted by the epoxy. PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply Epotile PLUS evenly on the substrate with the notched side of the trowel using a scrapping motion to ensure good contact with the substrate. Additional adhesive may then be applied to have a uniform thickness of 3 to 5 mm minimum. Apply the tiles on the substrate and press them firmly, while making sure that the paste does not slip from the tile sides. For large tiles, Epotile PLUS can also be applied on the back of tiles to ensure full adhesion with the entire surface.

ADVANTAGES

• 100% solids • Water Cleanable • Moisture insensitive for bond to dry or damp surfaces • Resistant to chemical attack, including most acids and caustics • Hygienic in service, will not support bacterial growth • High mechanical and bonding qualities to various substrates.

Tiles should be placed within the open time of the adhesive. Remove surplus material from the face of the tiles immediately.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

Adhesion on concrete Consumption

PACKAGING

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION New concrete must be a minimum of 28 days old. The surface to be covered shall be sound, dry, rigid, clean and free from impurities like grout, dirt, debris, oil, grease, curing agents, loose plaster etc.

Epotile PLUS can be used as tile adhesive in medium and heavy duty, hygienic and corrosive environment. It can be used in the following industries: • Food Production – including meat, and fish processing, fruit canning, dairy products, etc. • Chemical productions and processing • Brewing and Distilling • Soft drink production and bottling • Workshop and garage.

Colors Mix density Flash point Pot life Water cleanable Compressive strength

100 to 300 ml/m2 depending on the roughness and absorbency of the substrate.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SCOPE OF USE

Part A Part B Part C

COVERAGE

BS EN 12004:2007

Epotile PLUS is a 100% reactive solvent free, water cleanable designed for numerous applications needs. It provides excellent chemical resistance and exceptional adhesion on ceramic tile/vitrified tile/ stone on concrete and steel/metal surface. It is chemical resistant, moisture insensitive and fast curing system specially blended to produce a non-sag material.

3-component Resin Hardener Mineral charge OFF white (after mixing) 1.8 ± 0.05 > 150ºC Approx 1 hour at 30ºC ANSI 118.3 50 MPa at 7 days (ASTM C 579) > 2.5 MPa (BS 1881) 5 to 10 kg/m² depending on thickness.

CLEANING

Clean tools and equipment with water and soap while the material still wet or use solvents such as Xylene, Xylol or toluene. Do not allow the epoxy to harden on equipments.

PACKAGING

Epotile PLUS is packed in 8 kg kits (parts A+B+C)..

STORAGE

Epotile PLUS can be stored for 1 year in dry conditions, away from extreme temperatures and protected against wind

299

Epotile PLUS

Epotile

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

PRODUCT

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Epotile is a 100% reactive, 3- component epoxy tile adhesive system designed for numerous application needs. It is a moisture insensitive fast curing system specially blended to produce a workable mortar. It provides excellent chemical resistance and outstanding adhesion on steel, concrete and tiles.

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION New concrete must be a minimum of 28 days old and possess an open, porous and textured surface with all curing compounds and sealers removed. Old concrete must be clean and well textured. All oil, dirt, debris, paint and unsound concrete must be removed.

SCOPE OF USE

PRODUCT PREPARATION Part B (hardener) is to be added to part A (resin), not the reverse. Mix parts A and B for 1 minute using a suitable electrical agitator (Heavy Duty) at low speed to ensure the proper chemical reaction. Gradually add the filler (part C) to the premix of parts A and B and continue mixing for a further 2 minutes until all the aggregates are completely wetted by the epoxy.

THREE-COMPONENT EPOXY TILE ADHESIVE

Ensure adequate ventilation during application and avoid inhalation of vapors, Wear suitable gloves, clothing and eye protection. Direct contact with eyes will cause irritation and may cause serous damage if not treated. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clear water and seek medical attention.

Epotile is especially designed for fixing tile on floor where heavy and fast load, and chemical resistance is required. Epotile can be used for a thickness above 8mm as tile adhesive in medium and heavy duty, hygienic and corrosive environment. It can be used in the following industries: • Food Production – including meat, and fish processing, fruit canning, dairy products, etc. • Chemical productions and processing • Brewing and Distilling • Soft drink production and bottling • Workshop and garage.

DISCLAIMER

While the company guarantees its products against defective materials, all recommendations concerning the use and application of these products are made without guarantee since the conditions of their application are beyond its control. It is recommended to verify with the company that the product is suitable for the intended use, and that this Data Sheet version is the latest one. The company may modify it without prior notice. Technical characteristics are listed for guidance only. For more information, please contact the company’s office in your location.

PRODUCT APPLICATION For Flooring only: The mixed adhesive should spread over the surface using a serrated trowel. Tiles should be placed within the open time of the adhesive. Remove surplus material from the face of the tiles immediately.

ADVANTAGES

• 100% solids • Moisture insensitive for bond to dry or damp surfaces • Resistant to chemical attack, including most acids and caustics • Hygienic in service, will not support bacterial growth • High mechanical and bonding qualities to all round substrate

NOTE

CLEANING

Clean tools and equipment with solvents such as Xylene, Xylol or toluene. Do not allow the epoxy to harden on equipment

CHARACTERISTICS

Edition: 06/11 - A

Appearance Part A Part B Part C Color

Mix density Flash point Pot life Compressive strength Adhesion on concrete Tensile strength Flexural strength Consumption

300

3-component Resin Hardener Mineral charge Grey (after mixing)

PACKAGING

Epotile is packed in 22 kg kits (parts A+B+C).

STORAGE

1.89 +/- 0.05 > 150˚ C Approx 1 hour at 30ºC 67.5 MPa at 7 days (ASTM C 579) > 2.5 MPa (BS 1881) 9.8 MPa (ASTM C307) 29.1 MPa (ASTM C580) 15 kg/m² depending on thickness.

Epotile can be stored for 1 year in dry conditions, away from extreme temperatures and protected against wind.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

301

Epotile

Carrojoint Thin/Thick

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT

CEMENTITIOUS TILE GROUT

Carrojoint is a cement-based pre-mixed non-shrink grout, used for filling tile joints in wet and dry areas. It is water resistant, easy to apply, and can be cleaned easily. It is a thixotropic, crack-free, non-slump grout that only needs to be mixed with water. It is also available in a wide range of attractive colors (please consult our color chart board).

NOTE

SCOPE OF USE

Carrojoint is suitable for internal and external applications, including: • Wet areas • Rooms • Stairs • Parking

Edition: 01/11-A

Carrojoint is available for two types of tile joints: • Thin joints: up to 4 mm wide. • Thick joints: 4 to 10 mm wide.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Powder composition

Powder Cement, mineral charges, hydrophobic agent, synthetic organic polymers, pigments Color Grey or White or other colors Density Thin 1.17 kg/Lit. Thick 1.35 kg/Lit. Pot Life 2 hrs at 20°C Shelf Life 6 months Mixing Ratio Thin 5 to 6 lit. / 20 kg bag 1.3 lit / 5 kg bag Thick 5 to 5.5 lit. / 25 kg bag Consumption (see table below) VOC and Formadehyde None (< 10µg/l) ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS

Test results as per EN 13888:2009 - Carrojoint thin (Unsanded) Flexural Strength as Per EN 12808-3:2002 (N/mm²)

Results 5.5

Compressive Strength as per EN 12808-3:2002 (N/mm²)

23.4

Abrasion Resistance as per EN 12808-2:2002 (mm³) Water Absorption after 30 min as per EN 12808-5 (g) Water Absorption after 240 min as per EN 12808-5 (g)

3.32

Shrinkage as per DIN EN 12808-4 at 28 days standard conditions (mm/m)

423

Standard requirements for type CG class 1 ≥ 3.5 N/mm² ≥ 15 N/mm² ≤ 2000 mm3 ≤5g

7.48

≤ 10 g

≤ 3 mm/m

Results

Standard requirements for type CG class 2WA ≥ 3.5 N/mm² ≥ 15 N/mm² ≤ 1000 mm³ ≤2g

TEST RESULTS (Carrojoint THICK) Test results as per EN 13888:2009 - Carrojoint thick (Sanded) Flexural Strength as Per EN 12808-3:2002 (N/mm2) Compressive Strength as per EN 12808-3:2002 (N/mm2) Abrasion Resistance as per EN 12808-2:2002 (mm3) Water Absorption after 30 min as per EN 12808-5 (g) Water Absorption after 240 min as per EN 12808-5 (g) Shrinkage as per DIN EN 12808-4 at 28 days standard conditions (mm/m)

302

303

7.7 32 323.3 0.82 1.8

≤5g

1.5

≤ 3 mm/m

Carrojoint Thin/Thick

DISCLAIMER CONSUMPTION

APPLICABLE STANDARDS ANSI 118.6 & 7 ASTM C109: 95 BS 1881, Part 207

EXAMPLES OF CONSUMPTION (IN KG/M²):

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION Carrojoint must not be used before a minimum of 24 hours from tiling, allowing the tiling to set. The grooves between all external and internal ceramic surfaces to be grouted must be sound and thoroughly cleaned before the application of Carrojoint. All traces of oil or grease must be removed. All loose particles of mortar or tile adhesive in the groove must be physically removed. The gap between tiles should not exceed 4mm for Carrojoint Thin, and 10mm for Carrojoint Thick.

Joint Width (mm) 5x5

Tile Size (cm) 10x10 11x25 15x15 20x20 30x30

2 5 5 10

0.3 0.7 -

0.6 1.3 -

0.3 0.9 -

0.4 0.9 -

0.3 0.7 1.2 1.5

0.2 0.6 0.8 1.0

TILE GROUT CONSUMPTION FORMULA: C = 0.18 x E x H x [(L + W) / (L x W)] C E H L W

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix 20 kg of Carrojoint Thin with 5 to 6 Lit. of clean cool water (or a 5 kg bag with around 1.3 Lit of water), or 25 kg of Carrojoint Thick with 5 to 5.5 Lit. of water. An electric mixer with low rotation speed (< 300 rpm) can be used. Mix until a uniform lump free paste is obtained. Let the paste rest for a few minutes before starting the application.

: Consumption (kg/m²) : Joint Width (mm) : Tile Thickness (mm) : Tile Length (cm) : Tile Width (cm)

NOTE

CLEANING

Clean the tools with water after use. Cured materials can only be removed mechanically.

PACKAGING Carrojoint Thin Carrojoint Thick

PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply Carrojoint with a rubber spatula into the joints by filling all the gaps. Remove surplus grout with a damp sponge. Use the product within a maximum of 2 hours after mixing. When the grout is dry, clean the tiles with a dry cloth. In case of hot or windy conditions, it is recommended to dampen the joint a few hours after application of Carrojoint. Do not spray water under high pressure and avoid using any chemical cleaning agent on the grout until 3 days after the application.

: 5 and 20 kg bags : 25 kg bags

STORAGE Carrojoint can be stored for 6 months in dry conditions, away from extreme temperatures and protected against wind.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning thoroughly with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

304

305

Carrojoint PLUS Thin/Thick

HIGH PERFORMANCE CEMENTITIOUS TILE GROUT

PRODUCT Carrojoint PLUS is a cement-based pre-mixed nonshrink grout, used for filling tile and glass block joints in dry and wet areas and specially swimming pools. It is water resistant, easy to apply, and can be cleaned easily. It is a thixotropic, crack-free, non-slump grout that only needs to be mixed with water. It is also available in a wide range of attractive colors (please consult our color chart board).

Pot Life Shelf Life Mixing Ratio Consumption

Thin Thick Thin Thick

16%

ANSI 118.6

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION Carrojoint PLUS must not be used before a minimum of 24 hours from tiling, allowing the tiling to set. The grooves between all external and internal ceramic surfaces to be grouted must be sound and thoroughly cleaned before the application of Carrojoint PLUS. All traces of oil or grease must be removed. All loose particles of mortar or tile adhesive in the groove must be physically removed. The gap between tiles should not exceed 4 mm for Carrojoint PLUS Thin, and 10mm for Carrojoint PLUS Thick.

CHARACTERISTICS

Density

> 1.25 MPa

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Carrojoint PLUS is available for two types of tile joints: • Thin joints : 0 to 4 mm wide • Thick joints : 4 to 10 mm wideS

Color

Adhesion strength at 28 days (BS 1881, Part 207)

Powder Cement, mineral charges, hydrophobic agent, synthetic organic polymers, pigments Grey or White or other colors 1.17 kg/Lit. 1.35 kg/Lit. 2 hrs at 20°C 6 months 6 lit. / 20 kg bag 5.5 lit. / 25 kg bag (see table below)

Compressive Strength at 28 days (ASTM C109:95)

PACKAGING

Do not spray water under high pressure and avoid using any chemical cleaning agent on the grout until 3 days after the application.

Carrojoint PLUS Thin : 20 kg bags Carrojoint PLUS Thick : 25 kg bags

RELATED PRODUCTS Tiles for swimming pools should be fixed with Carroflex or Carrocolle PLUS. Do not spray water under high pressure and avoid using any chemical cleaning agent on the grout until 3 days after the application.

STORAGE

Carrojoint PLUS can be stored for 6 months in dry conditions, away from extreme temperatures and protected against wind.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SCOPE OF USE Carrojoint PLUS is suitable for internal and external applications, including: • Wet areas • Bathrooms • Water reservoirs • Parking • Swimming Pools • Kitchens

> 6 MPa

Water absorption at 28 days (ANSI A118.6-1999 Cl. H4.4)

SCOPE OF USE

Appearance Powder composition

Flexural strength at 7 days (ASTM C580:93)

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix 20 kg of Carrojoint PLUS Thin with 6 Lit. of clean cool water, or 25 kg of Carrojoint PLUS Thick with 5.5 Lit. of water. An electric mixer with low rotation speed (< 300 rpm) can be used. Mix until a uniform lump free paste is obtained. Let the paste rest for a few minutes before starting the application. PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply Carrojoint PLUS with a rubber spatula into the joints by filling all the gaps. Remove surplus grout with a damp sponge. Use the product within a maximum of 2 hours after mixing. When the grout is dry, clean the tiles with a dry cloth. In case of hot or windy conditions, it is recommended to dampen the joint a few hours after application of Carrojoint.

> 25 MPa

306

The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning thoroughly with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

CONSUMPTION EXAMPLES OF CONSUMPTION (IN KG/M²): Tile Size Joint (cm) Width (mm) 5x5 10x10 11x25 15x15 20x20 30x30 2 5 5 10

0.6 1.3 -

0.3 0.7 -

0.3 0.9 -

0.4 0.9 -

0.3 0.7 1.2 1.5

0.2 0.6 0.8 1.0

DISCLAIMER

TILE GROUT CONSUMPTION FORMULA: C = 0.18 x E x H x [(L + W) / (L x W)] C E H L W

: Consumption (kg/m²) : Joint Width (mm) : Tile Thickness (mm) : Tile Length (cm) : Tile Width (cm)

CLEANING

Clean the tools with water after use. Cured materials can only be removed mechanically.

NOTE

LATEX-MODIFIED GROUT

To obtain a latex-modified grout, Carrojoint PLUS can be mixed with Admix 240 LTX, an SBR latex bonding agent in the following proportions: • Carrojoint PLUS Thin: 20 kg bag to be mixed with 5 lit. water + 1 lit. of Admix 240 LTX. • Carrojoint PLUS Thick: 25 kg bag to be mixed with 4.5 lit. water +1 lit. of Admix 240 LTX.

Edition: 02/09-A *Available only in GCC

307

Epojoint

THREE-COMPONENT EPOXY GROUTING SYSTEM

PRODUCT

Epojoint is a 100% reactive, 3-component epoxy grouting system designed for numerous application needs. It is a moisture insensitive fast curing system specially blended to produce a non-sag material with good workability. It provides excellent chemical and abrasion resistance. Epojoint is particularly recommended for tile grouting in medium and heavy duty, hygienic and corrosive environment. Epojoint can be used in: • Food production: fruit canning, meat & fish processing, dairy products, etc. • Chemical productions and processing • Brewing and distilling • Soft drink production and bottling • Swimming pool

Water cleanability Resistance to chemicals reagents VOC and formaldehyde content ISO/FDIS 11890-2/GC-MS

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION Before grouting, joints and the tile surface should be clean with a damp sponge to remove dust, dirt, and other contaminants. Do not leave water standing in joints. Do not clean tiles with acid cleaners. PRODUCT PREPARATION Part B (hardener) is to be added to part A (resin), not the reverse. Mix parts A and B for 2 minutes using a suitable electrical agitator at low speed to ensure the proper chemical reaction. Add the mineral charge (part C) to the premix of parts A and B and continue mixing for a further 2 minutes until all the aggregates are completely wetted by the epoxy.

Epojoint can be used as tile adhesive for thickness from 1 to 4 mm

ADVANTAGES

• 100% solids, V.O.C. compliant grout • Moisture insensitive for bond to dry or damp surfaces • Resistant to chemical attack, including most acids and caustics • Water and abrasion resistant. • Hygienic in service, will not support bacterial growth

PRODUCT APPLICATION: GROUTING Epojoint should be applied directly into the joints. The joint should be completely filled. Remove excess grout with a grout float. Do not leave excess grout on face of tiles. Epojoint may also be applied by cartridge gun or similar technique.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Part A Part B Part C Color

Mix density Flash point Pot life Compressive strength Adhesion on concrete Bond strength Shrinkage Thermal shock

Water cleanable at 80 minutes ANSI 118.3 Available upon request ASTM D 543:95 None (<10µg/l)

3-component Resin Hardener Mineral charge Grey and white Others upon request

PRODUCT APPLICATION: TILING The mixed adhesive should spread over the surface using a serrated trowel. Tiles should be placed within the open time of the adhesive. Remove surplus material from the face of the tiles immediately.

1.65 ± 0.05 > 150˚ C Approx 1 hour at 30ºC 108 MPa at 7 days (ANSI 118.3) > 2.5 MPa at 7 days (BS 1881) 86.9 Kg/ cm2 at 7 days ANSI 118.3 0.01% at 7 days ANSI 118.3 45.2 kg/ cm2 at 7 days ANSI 118.3

CONSUMPTION

TILE ADHESIVE CONSUMPTION When used as a tile glue, consumption is from 2.5 to 6 kg/m².

For tiles of 10 mm thickness, consumption will be from 0.5 to 2.5 kg/m².

disclosure, use, dissemination or copying (either whole or partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit.

CLEANING

Edition: 10/10-A

Clean tools and equipment with solvents such as Xylene, Xylol or toluene. Do not allow the epoxy to harden on equipment

PACKAGING Epojoint is packed in 4 kg kit.

STORAGE Epojoint can be stored for 1 year in dry conditions, away from extreme temperatures and protected against wind.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Ensure adequate ventilation during application and avoid inhalation of vapors, Wear suitable gloves, clothing and eye protection. Direct contact with eyes will cause irritation and may cause serous damage if not treated. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clear water and seek medical attention.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorized

TILE GROUT CONSUMPTION FORMULA C = 0.18 x E x H x [(L + W) / (L x W)] C : Consumption (kg/m²) E : Joint Width (mm) H : Tile Thickness (mm) L : Tile Length (cm) W : Tile Width (cm)

308

309

Epojoint WB

WATER BASED EPOXY GROUTING SYSTEM

Epojoint WB

PRODUCT

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Epojoint WB is a 3-component epoxy grouting system designed where specific resistance to abrasion and chemical attacks are required. Epojoint WB is made with a water based epoxy (resin + hardener) and special pigmented fillers. As Epojoint WB is odorless and non-flammable, it allows interior application. Epojoint WB is suitable for joints up to 10 mm width and is available in 15 different colors.

ANSI 118.8 & ANSI 118.3

The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning thoroughly with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SURFACE PREPARATION Before grouting, joints and the tile surface should be clean with a damp sponge to remove dust, dirt, and other contaminants. Do not leave water standing in joints. Do not clean tiles with acid cleaners. PRODUCT PREPARATION Part B (resin) is to be added to part A (hardener), not the reverse. Mix parts A and B for 2 minutes using a suitable electrical agitator at low speed to ensure the proper chemical reaction. Add the mineral charge (part C) to the premix of parts A and B and continue mixing for a further 2 minutes until all the aggregates are completely wetted by the epoxy.

PROPERTIES • Mechanical and bonding qualities to all sound substrates • Waterproofing and chemical resistance to diluted acids, alkalis, solvents & oils • Easy and efficient joint grouting, for joints from 2 mm to 10 mm wide • Water miscible before curing

PRODUCT APPLICATION Epojoint WB should be applied directly into the joints. The joint should be completely filled. Smooth down the joints and remove excess grout with a grout float. Do not leave excess grout on face of tiles. Clean tools and tiles with clear water.

SCOPE OF USE Epojoint WB main use is the application of waterproof and chemical resistant seals around tiles and ceramic finishes. The common fields of applications are: • Chemical industries • Food industry, kitchens & catering • Hospitals and clinics • Swimming pools and spas • Restoration of deteriorated tile grout • Internal jointing in non aerated rooms • External joints: facades and floors

CONSUMPTION TILE GROUT CONSUMPTION FORMULA: C = 0.18 x E x H x [(L + W) / (L x W)] C : Consumption (kg/m²) E : Joint Width (mm) H : Tile Thickness (mm) L : Tile Length (cm) W : Tile Width (cm)

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance

Part A Part B Part C

Color Initial setting Sagging Comp. strength Flexural strength Shrinkage Adhesion Water cleanability

3-component Resin Hardener Mineral charge 15 colors available 3h30 min (ANSI118.3) No change (ANSI 118.3) 18 MPa (ANSI 118.8) 6.4 MPa (ANSI 118.8) 0.05% (ANSI 118.3) 1.7 MPa on concrete > 85 mn (ANSI 118.3)

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

PACKAGING Epojoint WB is supplied in 16 kg kit: Part A, epoxy resin :0.251 kg Part B, epoxy hardener :2.958 kg Part C, pigmented fillers :12.791 kg

STORAGE Epojoint WB can be stored for 1 year in dry conditions, away from extreme temperatures and protected against wind.

310

311

DECORATIVE FAÇADE COATINGS

CEMENT-BASED DECORATIVE FAÇADE COATINGS **Decofaçade.210 AD *Decofaçade.220 DC Decofaçade.230 RC *Decofaçade.250 AP Decofaçade.260 BD Decofaçade.GRC Decofine

Decorative render with aggregates Colored render for internal and external application Colored rush coat for internal and external application Decorative Arabian render for internal and external use Decorative protective coating for plaster Dry mix mortars for moudling decorative element Decorative render for internal & external application

315 317 319 320 322 323 325

MONOCOUCHE RENDERS Decofaçade.240 ED Decofaçade.241 LW Decofaçade.242 CP weber.pral F weber.pral F LW

Decorative single layer render Decorative single layer render for light weight substrates Decorative single layer render One coat minearl decorative rendering mortar Decorative single layer render for lightweight AAC

327 329 331 333 335

TEXTURED THIN COAT RENDERS

ACRYLIC-BASED DECORATIVE FAÇADE COATINGS **Decofaçade.300 PR **Decofaçade.310 MX Decofaçade.320 AC **Decofaçade.330 RC **Decofaçade.340 HE **Decofaçade.350 SX

Acrylic water based primer Acrylic textured coating - Ribbed finish Acrylic waterproof coating - Roll finish Plastic decorative coating - Roll finish Highly elastic facade coating Acrylic textured coating - Sanded finish

*Available only in GCC **Available only in MENA

312

313

337 338 339 340 341 342

Decofaçade∙210 AD

DECORATIVE RENDER WITH AGGREGATES

MINERAL ORGANIC-BASED DECORATIVE FAÇADE COATINGS weber.pas deco weber.pas prime

Ready-to-use high performance mineral-based wet render Ready-to-use primer for the equalization and neutralization of the substrate

343 345

EXTERNAL INSULATION SYSTEMS weber.therm base weber.therm glue

Cement based, polymer modified base coat render for ETICS Adhesive of increased adhesion for fixing foamed polystyrene boards for ETICS

346 348

COLORED MOUNTING MORTARS Stone.fix

Colored mortar for mounting and grouting stones

350

PROTECTIVE ANTI-CARBONATION COATING weber.cote beton

Semi acrylic protective and decorative anti-carbonation treatment for concrete

351

or plastic corrugated trowel.

PRODUCT Decofaçade.210 AD is a pre-blended powder mix. The principal binder is Portland cement which performance is reinforced through the addition of powder polymers. It includes additives to improve water retention and adhesion, thus minimizing occurrence of cracks. A hydrophobic agent is also incorporated to improve waterproofing characteristics. Decofaçade.210 AD is used over cement based substrates where a wide range of aggregates needs to be spread.

The material can be applied on a thickness of 5 mm for small aggregates and 10 mm for medium and big ones. While the applied product is still wet, spread the aggregates manually or by a spray gun.

CONSUMPTION 1.5 kg/m²/mm thickness.

PACKAGING

CHARACTERISTICS Color

Grey / white

Decofaçade.210 AD is packed in 25 kg paper bags.

Grain size Powder density

<1 mm 1.36

STORAGE 6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable to do the application a well ventilated area, to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid dust inhaling. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. In both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix one bag of 25 kg with 5 litres of clean water by an electric mixer with low rotation speed (< 300 rpm).Continue mixing until a homogeneous paste of smooth creamy consistency is obtained. Let the mix rest for a few minutes before starting the application.

PRODUCT APPLICATION Before starting the application, we highly recommend to design joints every 25 m². Decofaçade.210 AD is applied using a stainless steel

314

315

Decofaçade∙210 AD

Decofaçade∙220 DC

NOTE

PRODUCT

COLORED RENDER FOR INTERNAL & EXTERNAL APPLICATION

the product in two layers. The first layer must be set before the application of the second one. After application, protect the freshly applied mortar from direct sun shine and cure it twice a day for 3 consecutive days.

Decofaçade.220 DC is a dry ready mixed mortar that requires addition of water only. It is made of hydraulic binders, calibrated aggregates, additives (hydrophobic agent, water retention agent...) and pigments. Ideal for use on concrete walls and cement plaster.

Edition: 06/07-A **Available only in MENA

CONSUMPTION 1.5 kg/m²/mm thickness.

CHARACTERISTICS Color

Grain size Powder density

PACKAGING

The product is available in

Decofaçade.220 DC is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

different colours (white, beige and others)

STORAGE

<1.5 mm 1.73

6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Substrate must be clean, sound and free from greasy matters and dust. Remove all traces of paint, mould oil which may affect the adhesion. Before the application the substrate must be sufficiently cured in a way that any shrinkage has already occurred. Moisten the substrate if it is dry at the time of application.

The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable to do the application a well ventilated area, to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid dust inhaling. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. In both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix one bag of 50 kg with 9 to 10 litres of clean water by an electric mixer with low rotation speed (< 300 rpm).

DISCLAIMER

Continue mixing until a homogeneous paste of smooth creamy consistency is obtained. Let the mix rest for a few minutes and mix again before starting the application. No additional water should be added to the mix.

PRODUCT APPLICATION Decofaçade.220 DC is applied using a wood or plastic float in circular, horizontal or vertical motion. Alternatively, a soft sponge or other tools can be used to obtain different aspects.

NOTE

The material can be applied on a thickness of 2 to 4 mm by layer. If more thickness is required, it is recommended to apply

316

The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorized

317

Decofaçade∙220 DC

Decofaçade∙230 RC

disclosure, use, dissemination or copying (either whole or partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit.

PRODUCT

COLORED RUSH COAT FOR INTERNAL & EXTERNAL APPLICATION

PACKAGING

Decofaçade.230 RC is a dry ready mixed mortar that requires addition of water only. It is made of hydraulic binders, calibrated aggregates, additives (hydrophobic agent, water retention agent...) and pigments. Ideal for use on concrete walls, cement blocks work and plaster.

Edition: 06/07-A *Available only in GCC

Decofaçade.230 RC is packed in 25 or 50 kg paper bags.

STORAGE 6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CHARACTERISTICS Color

The product is available in different colours (white, beige and others)

Grain size

< 2.5 mm

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix one bag of 50 kg with 10 to 12 litres of clean water by an electric mixer with low rotation speed (< 300 rpm). Continue mixing until a homogeneous paste of smooth creamy consistency is obtained. Let the mix rest for a few minutes and mix again before starting the application. No additional water should be added to the mix.

NOTE

PRODUCT APPLICATION Decofaçade.230 RC is applied using a tyrolean box or a spray gun to obtain a tyrolean finish. spray the material in two times allowing the first to stiffen slightly to achieve a sprayed thickness of 4-6 mm.

Edition: 06/07-A

After application, protect the freshly applied mortar from direct sun shine and cure it twice a day for 3 consecutive days.

CONSUMPTION 5.6 kg/m²/4mm thickness.

318

319

Decofaçade∙250 AP

DECORATIVE ARABIAN RENDER FOR INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL USE

Decofaçade∙250 AP

PRODUCT

PRODUCT APPLICATION

NOTE

Decofaçade.250 AP is a colored plaster for internal and external use. It is designed to match the appearance of traditional Arabic houses to be used internally & externally on block walls and concrete surfaces. A special selection of graded quartz sand and fillers contribute to unique workability properties while giving an exceptional aesthetic appeal to the product. It also contains additives to improve water retention and adhesion, thus minimising occurrence of cracks.

Decofaçade.250 AP is applied using a stainless steel or plastic trowel in circular, horizontal or vertical motion. Alternatively, a soft sponge or polystyrene float. The material can be applied on a thickness of 12 to 20 mm. After application, protect the freshly applied mortar from direct sun shine and cure it twice a day for 3 consecutive days.

Edition: 06/07-A *Available only in GCC

CONSUMPTION 1.8 kg/m²/mm thickness.

PACKAGING

CHARACTERISTICS Color

Decofaçade.250 AP is packed in 25 or 50 kg paper bags.

The product is available in different colours (white, beige and others)

Grain size Paste density Compressive strength Adhesion

<1.5 mm 1.67 > 4 MPa at 28 days > 0.3 MPa at 28 days

Pot life

45 minutes at 30°C

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Substrate must be clean, sound and free from greasy matters and dust. Remove all traces of paint, mould oil which may affect the adhesion. Before the application the substrate must be sufficiently cured in a way that any shrinkage has already occurred. On block work substrates, level/ fill the block work joints to get the same surface level at least 48 hours before the application of Decofaçade.250 AP. For better adhesion and finishing aspect, we recommend the use of the company’s appropriate ready mixed spatterdash coat on block work before the product application. Moisten the substrate if it is dry at the time of application.

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix one bag of 50 kg with 7 to 9 litres of clean water by an electric mixer with low rotation speed (< 300 rpm). Continue mixing until a homogeneous paste of smooth creamy consistency is obtained. Let the mix rest for a few minutes before starting the application.

320

321

Decofaçade∙260 BD

DECORATIVE PROTECTIVE COATING FOR PLASTER

PRODUCT

STORAGE

Decofaçade.260 BD is a two components ready mixed cement based protective and decorative coating. It is made of hydraulic binders as cement and lime, additives (hydrophobic agent, water retention agent...), pigments and synthetic polymers.

6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

It is applied to unify existing colored plaster if required providing pleasant colored façade finishes.

CHARACTERISTICS Color

Pot life

The product is available in different colours (white, beige and others)

2 hrs at 20°C

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix one bag of 7 kg of Decofaçade.260 BD with 5 litres of liquid Decofaçade.260 BD by an electric mixer with low rotation speed (< 300 rpm). Continue mixing until a uniform lump free paint is obtained. Let the mix rest for a few minutes before starting the application.

NOTE

PRODUCT APPLICATION Decofaçade.260 BD is applied using a brush or roll. If a second coat is required the application should be done after the drying of the first coat.

Edition: 06/07-A

Decofaçade∙GRC

DRY MIX MORTAR FOR MOULDING DECORATIVE ELEMENT

PRODUCT Decofaçade.GRC is a pre-blended fiber reinforced colored powder mix. It is specially designed for the manufacturing of prefabricated DECORATIVE ELEMENT. The principal binder is Portland cement which performance is reinforced through the addition of powder polymers and superplasticizer. A special selection of graded sand and fillers contribute to unique workability properties. It is formulated to be spray applied for faster application or to be hand applied by trowel.

After application, protect the freshly applied mortar from direct sun shine. Once the initial set has taken place, Decofaçade.GRC elements should be covered with polythene for their protection and to prevent them from drying out fully. They must not be moved again until they are ready for demoulding.

Decofaçade.GRC can be formed with a wide variety of textures and colours to replicate natural materials. When moulded by hand application it has a self levelling property.

PACKAGING

Curing should be made by water sprinkling.

CONSUMPTION 1.8 kg/m²/mm thickness.

Decofaçade.GRC is packed in 25 kg paper bags.

STORAGE

6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

Depending on the application method Decofaçade. GRC can be supplied with or without fiber glass.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CHARACTERISTICS Color

The product is available in different colours (white, beige and others)

Grain size Powder density Mixing ratio

<1 mm 1.40 3.5 liters of clean water/25 Kg Paste density 2 Form demoulding time Less than 10 hours at 25 ˚C Compressive strength 24 hours: 10 (MPa) at 25 ˚C 7 days : 16 28 days: 25 Flexural strength (MPa) 9 at 25˚C, 28 days

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

CONSUMPTION

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION The first step is preparation of the mould, which must be thoroughly cleaned and treated with release agent.

0.40 - 0.50 kg/m²

PACKAGING

PRODUCT APPLICATION Application shall be by spraying, using suitable equipement.

Decofaçade.260 BD is packed in 7 kg powder + 5 liters liquid. Packaging is subject to change.

322

323

Decofaçade∙GRC

Decofine

NOTE

PRODUCT

DECORATIVE RENDER FOR INTERNAL & EXTERNAL APPLICATION

Alternatively, a soft sponge or other tools can be used to obtain different aspects. The material can be applied on a thickness of 3 to 5 mm by layer. If more thickness is required, it is recommended to apply the product in two layers. The first layer must be set before the application of the second one. After application, protect the freshly applied mortar from direct sun shine and cure it twice a day for 3 consecutive days.

Decofine is a pre-blended powder mix. The principal binder is Portland cement which performance is reinforced through the addition of powder polymers. A special selection of graded quartz sand and fillers contribute to unique workability properties while giving an exceptional aesthetic appeal to the product. It also contains additives to improve water retention and adhesion, thus minimising occurrence of cracks. A hydrophobic agent is also incorporated to improve waterproofing characteristics. Decofine is suitable for both internal and external use over cement based substrates. When applied by trained applicators, the product provides various attractive “natural” type finishes.

Edition: 12/09-A

CONSUMPTION 1.5 kg/m²/mm thickness.

PACKAGING Decofine is packed in 25 kg paper bags.

CHARACTERISTICS Color

STORAGE

The product is available in different colours (white, beige and others)

Grain size Powder density Paste density

<2 mm 1.40 1.62

Adhesion

> 0.5 MPa at 28 days

6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix one bag of 25 kg with 3.75 to 4.25 litres of clean water by an electric mixer with low rotation speed (< 300 rpm).Continue mixing until a homogeneous paste of smooth creamy consistency is obtained. Let the mix rest for a few minutes before starting the application.

PRODUCT APPLICATION Decofine is applied using a stainless steel or plastic trowel in circular, horizontal or vertical motion.

324

325

Decofine

Decofaçade∙240 ED

NOTE

PRODUCT

the surface is scrapped.

Decofaçade.240 ED is a colored waterproofing and decorative mortar made of hydraulic binders, additives as hydrophobic and water retention agents and pigments. A special selection of graded quartz sand and fillers contribute to unique workability properties while giving an exceptional aesthetic appeal to the product. It can also be applied on concrete and brick blocks.

DECORATIVE SINGLE LAYER RENDER

NB: The thickness must be at least 10mm before rustic and know-down rustic finishing and after scraped or float finishing.

CHARACTERISTICS Color

The product is available in different colours (white, beige and others)

Grain size Powder density

<2 mm 1.35

2- FOR DECORATING CONCRETE & MASONRY SUBSTRATE

Paste density

1.62

a-RUSTIC/KNOC-DOWN RUSTIC - Apply a level, compact 8mm thick first coat. - Allow to draw and then spray the decorative coat. The knock-down appearance is obtained by pressing a plastic or stainless steel float onto the stiffened coat.

b-SCRAPED - spray a level, compact 12mm thick coat. Allow to dry (3-16 hours), and then scrape. c- FLOAT - Apply a level, compact 10 mm thick coat and finish with a wooden, plastic or sponge- backed float as desired.

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix one bag of 50 kg with 7 to 8 litres of clean water by special mixing machines.

During application, the temperature should be between +5°C and +35°C.

PRODUCT APPLICATION 1- FOR DECORATIVE WATERPROOFING MORTAR

After application, protect the freshly applied mortar from direct sun shine and cure it twice a day for 3 consecutive days.

a- RUSTIC/KNOC-DOWN RUSTIC - Apply the first pass to a minimum thickness of 10 mm. - Allow to draw and then spray the decorative coat. The knock- down appearance is obtained by pressing a plastic or stainless-steel float onto the stiffened coat.

CONSUMPTION

b-SCRAPED - Apply the product in one coat to a uniform thickness of 15 mm. When sufficiently hard, generally between 3-16 hours after application,

326

327

Purpose Substrate

Waterproofing Concrete Block, bricks

Rustic Scraped Float

22 kg / m² 25 kg / m² 22 kg / m²

Decorations Concrete Sub-mortar coating 18 kg / m² 21 kg / m² 18 kg / m²

Decofaçade∙240 ED

Decofaçade∙241 LW

PACKAGING

PRODUCT

DECORATIVE SINGLE LAYER RENDER FOR LIGHT WEIGHT SUBSTRATES

generally between 3-16 hours after application, the surface is scrapped.

Decofaçade.241 LW is a colored waterproofing and decorative mortar especially designed for light weight substrates. It is made of hydraulic binders, additives as hydrophobic and water retention agents and pigments. A special selection of graded quartz sand and fillers contribute to unique workability properties while giving an exceptional aesthetic appeal to the product. It can also be applied on concrete and brick blocks.

Decofaçade.240 ED is packed in 25 or 50 kg paper bags.

STORAGE 6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

CHARACTERISTICS

Color

Grain size Powder density Paste density Resistance to fire as per BS EN 998 -1

c- FLOAT - The first pass is applied to a minimum thickness of 7-8 mm; when sufficiently hard Apply a second pass. - Allow to harden and then apply a 2nd coat. Finish with a wooden, plastic or sponge – backed floats desired. NB : The thickness must be at least 10 mm before rustic and know-down rustic finishing and after scraped or float finishing.

The product is available in different colours (white, beige and others)

2- FOR DECORATING CONCRETE & MASONRY SUBSTRATE

<2 mm 1.35 1.62 Class A1

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Substrate must be clean, sound and free from greasy matters and dust. Remove all traces of paint, mould oil which may affect the adhesion. Before the application the substrate must be sufficiently cured in a way that any shrinkage has already occurred. On concrete and non-absorbent substrates use the appropriate company’s Premix.RUSH-COAT.

DISCLAIMER

b-SCRAPED - spray a level, compact 12 mm thick coat. Allow to dry (3-16 hours), and then scrape. c- FLOAT - Apply a level, compact 10 mm thick coat and finish with a wooden, plastic or sponge-backed float as desired.

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix one bag of 50 kg with 7 to 8 litres of clean water by special mixing machines.

NOTE

During application, the temperature should be between +5°C and +35°C. After application, protect the freshly applied mortar from direct sun shine and cure it twice a day for 3 consecutive days.

PRODUCT APPLICATION 1- FOR DECORATIVE WATERPROOFING MORTAR a- RUSTIC/KNOC-DOWN RUSTIC - Apply the first pass to a minimum thickness of 10 mm. - Allow to draw and then spray the decorative coat. The knock-down appearance is obtained by pressing a plastic or stainless-steel float onto the stiffened coat.

Edition: 06/07-A

CONSUMPTION

b-SCRAPED - Apply the product in one coat to a uniform thickness of 15 mm. When sufficiently hard, generally between 3-16 hours after application,

328

329

Purpose Substrate

Waterproofing Concrete Block, bricks

Rustic Scraped Float

22 kg / m² 25 kg / m² 22 kg / m²

Decorations Concrete Sub-mortar coating 18 kg / m² 21 kg / m² 18 kg / m²

Decofaçade∙241 LW

Decofaçade∙242 CP

DECORATIVE SINGLE LAYER RENDER

PRODUCT

the substrate must be sufficiently cured in a way that any shrinkage has already occurred. On concrete and non-absorbent substrates use the appropriate company’s Premix rush-coat.

Decofaçade.242 CP is a colored waterproofing and decorative mortar made of hydraulic binders, additives as hydrophobic and water retention agents and pigments. A special selection of graded quartz sand and fillers contribute to unique workability properties while giving an exceptional aesthetic appeal to the product. It can be applied on concrete, cement, render, brick, block work.

PACKAGING Decofaçade.241 LW is packed in 25 or 50 kg paper bags.

STORAGE 6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

PRODUCT PREPARATION

Mix one bag of 25 kg with 3.7 to 4 litres of clean water by using special render pump machine. PRODUCT APPLICATION The material has been designed for spray application 1- FOR DECORATIVE WATERPROOFING MORTAR Apply the product in one coat (two passes) to a uniform thickness of 15 mm. When sufficiently hard, generally between 3-16 hours after application, the surface is scrapped.

SCOPE OF USE

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

• Waterproofing and decorative render for the facades of detached houses, blocks of flats, office and industrial buildings. • Suitable for creating stone piers, cornices, cills, windows or door recesses,which can be enhanced by using ashlar detailing. • Exterior and interior walls.

2- FOR DECORATIVE MORTAR Apply the product in one coat (two passes) to a uniform thickness of 10 mm. When sufficiently hard, generally between 3-16 hours after application, the surface is scrapped.

SUITABLE SUBSTRATES

• For waterproofing and decoration : - Dense concrete blocks and clay bricks - Concrete - Precast concrete blocks - Cement renders • Existing mineral render

DISCLAIMER

CONDITIONS OF APPLICATION

• Do not apply on frozen or thawing surfaces or when frost is expected within 24 hours, in direct sunlight or when raining. • Avoid application in damp / wet conditions to reduce the risk of efflorescence, especially with dark colours. • Ideal application temperature + 15 °C to + 35 °C. • Provide necessary protection (eg. shade netting) during and immediately after application. • Curing with a fine mist of water is necessary in hot or quick drying conditions for 48 hours after application from bottom to top. • Scaffolding should be independently tied to assist uninterrupted application.

For any other substrate, please contact the technical department

LIMITATIONS OF USE

• Do not apply: - Onto horizontal or sloping surfaces. - On metal surfaces. - On gypsum-based materials. - At ground level in order to avoid staining. - On previously painted surfaces • On design features such as parapet or similar, the render should be protected.

NOTE

RECOMMENDATIONS

• The creation of design features with a thicker coat of render is possible on selected areas such as stone piers, corniches at roof and storey height, or at ground level. The following thicknesses should not be exceeded: 30 mm on masonry 20 mm on concrete or existing render. For thicker coats please contact the Technical Department for advice.

CHARACTERISTICS Colors Grain size Paste density Resistance to fire as per BS EN 998-1

Edition: 06/11-A

Various < 2mm 1.62 Class A1

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

• AVERAGE COVERAGE With a mortar pump 75 / 150 m² per team per day for flat walls. Detailed aspects will reduce the daily coverage.

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Substrate must be clean, sound and free from greasy matters and dust. Remove all traces of paint, mould oil which may affect the adhesion. Before the application

330

331

Decofaçade∙242 CP

weber∙pral F

CONSUMPTION

PRODUCT

ONE-COAT MINERAL DECORATIVE RENDING MORTAR

Scraped finish masonry: 22 to 25 kg / m² / 15mm thickness concrete or undercoat: 14 to 16 kg/m²/10mm thickness

PRODUCT APPLICATION 1-FOR DECORATIVE WATERPROOFING MORTAR Scraped finish Spray directly a layer of 15 mm thickness onto the prepared substrate and then level out. As soon as it has set to the touch, scrape the render with a short tooth scraper. The minimum thickness should be 10 mm throughout after scraping.

Weber.pral F is a Weatherproof and decorative render made of White cement and limestone, selected aggregates, organic additives, waterproof additives and mineral pigments for the facades of detached houses, blocks of flats, office and industrial. Suitable for creating stone piers, cornices, sills, windows or door recesses, which can be enhanced by using Ashlar cuts.

PACKAGING

Decofaçade.242 CP is packed in 25 paper bags.

STORAGE

CHARACTERISTICS

6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Color Powder density Paste density

72 colors 1.4 1.775

TEST

RESULT

Density of set mortar Flexural strength Capillarity Fire rating

2-FOR DECORATING CONCRETE AND MASONARY Scraped finish Spray directly a layer of 10 mm thickness onto the prepared substrate and then level out. As soon as it has set to the touch, 1 to 5 hours after the application, scrape the render with the short tooth scraper. The minimum thickness should be 6 mm throughout after scraping. Next day lightly brush to remove dust and spray with a light mist of water 2 times per day for 2 days.

1.6 to 1.7 > 2.5 N/mm2 Less than 1 g/dm2 .mn½ M0 (non combustible)

APPLICATION PRECAUTIONS

Onto horizontal surfaces. • On wood or metal surfaces • On gypsum-based materials or paint • At ground level in order to avoid staining On design features such as parapet or similar, the render should be protected.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Dense concrete blocks or clay bricks • Remove contamination, dirt, laitance... • Fill any open joints and voids by dubbing out with weber.pral F according to good working practices.

DISCLAIMER

APPLICATION CHARACTERISTICS

• Time between each pass: 1 to 3 days maximum. • Period of protection against rain water: 3 to 8 hours. • Application thickness:

In hot weather and dry winds, wet the substrate before application in order to prevent premature drying of the render.

Substrate Mansonary Concrete or undercoat Substrate Scraped before scrapping 15 mm Before scrapping: 10mm

Concrete and render • In all cases, remove any contamination and level out. • In hot weather and dry winds, wet the substrate by spraying water. Wait until the film of water has disappeared before applying the render.

NOTE

RECOMMENDATIONS

The creation of design features with a thicker coat of render is possible on selected areas such as stone piers, cornices at roof and storey height, or at ground level. The following thicknesses should not be exceeded: • 30 mm on masonry (blockwork and new render) • 20 mm on concrete or existing render.

Smooth concrete • Roughen the surface by mechanical scabbling. • Or apply Premix Rush-Coat SRC-2 with heavy stipple finish.

Edition: 06/11-A

For thicker coats please contact SODAMCO Weber.

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix weber.pral F with 3.75 to 4.25 liters of water per 25 kg bag for 5 to 10 minutes in a mortar pump. The mixing rate and mixing time must be constant to avoid shade variations after drying.

332

CONSUMPTION

Masonry: 22 to 25kg/m² Concrete or undercoat: 12 to 15kg/m²

333

weber∙pral F

weber∙pral F LW

PACKAGING

PRODUCT

DECORATIVE SINGLE LAYER RENDER FOR LIGHTWEIGH TS AAC BLOCKS

25 Kg bag

Weber.pral F LW is a Weatherproof and decorative render especially designed for light weight substrates made of White cement and limestone, selected aggregates, organic additives, waterproof additives and mineral pigments for the facades of detached houses, blocks of flats, office and industrial. Suitable for creating stone piers, cornices, sills, windows or door recesses, which can be enhanced by using Ashlar cuts.

STORAGE

Up to one year in a fresh and dry area

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CHARACTERISTICS Color Powder density Paste density Hardened density

TEST

Density of set mortar Flexural strength Capillarity Fire rating

DISCLAIMER

72 colors 1.35 1.65 1.400

RESULT

1.4 to 1.5 > 1.5 N/mm2 Less than1 g/dm2 .mn½ M0 (non combustible)

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

APPLICATION PRECAUTIONS

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION On Lightweight blocks AAC 500 kg / m³, dense concrete blocks and clay bricks • Remove contamination, dirt, laitance... • Fill any open joints and voids by dubbing out with weber.pral F according to good working practices. In hot weather and dry winds, wet the substrate before application in order to prevent premature drying of the render. Concrete and render • In all cases, remove any contamination and level out. • In hot weather and dry winds, wet the substrate by spraying water. Wait until the film of water has disappeared before applying the render. Smooth concrete • Roughen the surface by mechanical scabbling. • Or apply Premix Rush-Coat SRC-2 with heavy stipple finish.

NOTE

The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Weber. The unauthorized disclosure, use dissemination or copying (either whole or partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit. Edition: 10/11-A

APPLICATION CHARACTERISTICS • Time between each pass: 1 to 3 days maximum. • Period of protection against rain water: 3 to 8 hours. • Application thickness: Substrate Mansonary Concrete or undercoat Substrate Scraped before scrapping 15 mm Before scrapping: 10mm

RECOMMENDATIONS The creation of design features with a thicker coat of render is possible on selected areas such as stone piers, cornices at roof and storey height, or at ground level. The following thicknesses should not be exceeded: • 30 mm on masonry (blockwork and new render) • 20 mm on concrete or existing render.

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix weber.pral F LW with 3.75 to 4.25 liters of water per 25 kg bag for 5 to 10 minutes in a mortar pump. The mixing rate and mixing time must be constant to avoid shade variations after drying.

334

For thicker coats please contact SODAMCO Weber.

335

weber∙pral F LW

Decofaçade∙300 PR

CONSUMPTION

PRODUCT

ACRYLIC WATER BASED PRIMER

Masonry: 22 to 25kg/m² Concrete or undercoat: 12 to 15kg/m²

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Decofaçade.300 PR is used as a primer coat to provide the substrate with a homogenous absorption giving the treated area a uniform aspect. It is used before the application of Decofaçade.310 MX, 330 RC and 350 SX over cementitous, Gypsum and wood substrates.

PACKAGING 25Kg bag

STORAGE

CHARACTERISTICS

Up to one year in a fresh & dry area

Colours

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Paste density pH

The product is available in different colours (white, beige and others) 1.25 8

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Substrate must be clean, sound and free from greasy matters and dust. Remove all traces of paint, mould oil which may affect the adhesion. Before the application the substrate must be sufficiently cured in a way that any shrinkage has already occurred. Before the application of Decofaçade.300 PR, moisten the substrate and wait until it becomes dry at the surface.

The product is non-flammable.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

PRODUCT APPLICATION Decofaçade.300 PR is applied using a paint brush or woolen roller. It is recommended to apply the product in two CROSSED layers. The first layer must be dry before the application of the second one.

Edition: 06/07-A **Available only in MENA

CONSUMPTION 0.25 kg/m².

NOTE

PACKAGING Decofaçade.300 PR is supplied in 20 kg plastic pails.

STORAGE 6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

Edition: 10/11-A

336

337

Decofaçade∙310 MX

ACRYLIC TEXTURED COATING - RIBBED FINISH

PRODUCT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Decofaçade.310 MX is a ready to use acrylic ribbed finish coating. It includes a special selection of graded quartz sand and fillers that contribute to a unique workability properties while giving an exceptional aesthetic appeal to the product. Special additives improve the product resistance to water and UV lights, thus suitable for external and internal applications.

CHARACTERISTICS Color

The product is available in different colours (white, beige and others)

Paste density

1.80

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

PRODUCT APPLICATION Decofaçade.310 MX is applied using a stainless steel trowel and leveled with a plastic trowel giving the directions of the ribs.

Edition: 06/07-A **Available only in MENA

CONSUMPTION 2.5 kg/m².

PACKAGING

Decofaçade∙320 AC

ACRYLIC WATERPROOF COATING - ROLL FINISH

PRODUCT

STORAGE

Decofaçade.320 AC is a semi-fluid acrylic paste with polymer resins. Applied in a thick coat, it provides a flexible waterproof coating for pitched roofs and façades, allowing the product to follow the tension/ expansion cycles of the substrate. Decofaçade.320 AC shows an exceptional resistance to extreme weather conditions. It does not pollute fresh water. It is non-toxic and environmental friendly. it can also be applied over substrates made of Zinc, bitumen, corrugated and galvanized iron. Decofaçade.320 AC can be used to over-coat existing coatings on a mineral or synthetic resin base that are well adhered and in good condition.

6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Avoid prolonged contact with skin. Wear protective gear for hands & eyes. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. In both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS Color

The product is available in different colours (white, beige and others)

Paste density pH

1.25 8

Elongation at break

≈ 200%

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

NOTE

PRODUCT APPLICATION Decofaçade.320 AC is applied using a cotton roll. Thinning is unnecessary, but if thin coat is required to obtain desired application properties, a maximum of 3 liters clean water may be added for each 20 Kg Decofaçade.320 AC

Decofaçade.310 MX is supplied in 20 kg plastic pails.

CONSUMPTION Thick coat: 1 kg/m2/coat Thin coat: 0. 3 to 0.5 kg/m2/coat

STORAGE 6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

PACKAGING Decofaçade.320 AC is supplied in 20 kg plastic pails.

338

339

Decofaçade∙330 RC

PLASTIC DECORATIVE COATING - ROLL FINISH

PRODUCT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Decofaçade.330 RC is a ready to use synthetic decorative coating. It includes a special selection of graded fillers that contribute to a unique workability properties while giving an exceptional aesthetic appeal to the product. It is suitable for external and internal applications.

Avoid prolonged contact with skin. Wear protective gear for hands & eyes. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. In both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

CHARACTERISTICS Color

DISCLAIMER

The product is available in different colours (white, beige and others)

Paste density

1.54

NOTE

PRODUCT APPLICATION Decofaçade.330 RC is applied using a roller. Thinning is unnecessary, but if required to obtain desired application properties, a small amount of clean water not more than 0.5 liter/ 20 Kg pail may be added.

CONSUMPTION

Decofaçade∙340 HE

HIGHLY ELASTIC FACADE COATING

PRODUCT

PACKAGING

Decofaçade.340 HE is a ready to use one component product, based on an elastomeric acrylic aqueous dispersion containing pigments, mineral ﬁllers and rheological additives. It can be used on properly prepared surfaces such as concrete, masonry and Exterior Insulated and Finish Systems (EIFS).It is possible to over-coat existing coatings on a mineral or synthetic resin base that are well adhered and in good condition. Decofaçade.340 HE forms a protective and decorative ﬁlm with permanent elasticity and excellent adhesion. Decofaçade.340 HE shows an exceptional resistance to extreme weather conditions. It is non-toxic and environmental friendly.

Decofaçade.340 HE is supplied in 5 kg and 18 kg plastic pails.

STORAGE 6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Avoid prolonged contact with skin. Wear protective gear for hands & eyes. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. In both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

CHARACTERISTICS Color

The product is available in different colours (white, beige and others)

Paste density pH

1.150 11

Elongation at break

≈ 400%

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

PRODUCT APPLICATIONStir thoroughly before and during use. Decofaçade.340 HE is applied using a cotton roll. Two coats are usually required to obtain satisfactory results but additional coats can be used if required.The ﬁrst coat of Decofaçade.340 HE can be diluted with up to 10% by volume clean water and used as a priming coat.

0.6 kg/m²/coat using a cotton roll.

PACKAGING Decofaçade.340 HE is supplied in 5 kg and 18 kg plastic pails.

STORAGE

Edition: 03/09-A **Available only in MENA

CONSUMPTION

6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

0.6 kg/m²/coat using a cotton roll.

340

341

Decofaçade∙350 SX

ACRYLIC TEXTURED COATING-SANDED FINISH

gear for hands & eyes. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. In both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

PRODUCT Decofaçade.350 SX is a ready to use acrylic sanded finish coating. It includes a special selection of graded quartz sand and fillers that contribute to a unique workability properties while giving an exceptional aesthetic appeal to the product. Special additives improve the product resistance to water and UV lights, thus suitable for external and internal applications.

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS Color

The product is available in different colours (white, beige and others)

Paste density

1.92

NOTE

A READY-TO-USE HIGH PERFORMANCE ORGANO MINERAL BASED WET RENDER PRODUCT

by carefully butt-joining the edges to achieve a seamless joint. • Raised or recessed joints must be completely coated.

weber.pas deco is a ready-to-use high performance organo-mineral-based wet render made of kali waterglass, dispersion for stabilisation, marble sands, high performance pigments UV stable and additives. weber.pas deco is used for internal and external walls as a decorative render over a plastered substrate e.g. grey renders; can also be used as the finishing coat for weber.therm OM ETICS systems. It is available in 16 standard colours

QUALITY ASSURANCE

weber.pas deco is quality controlled by Weber Management System

SPECIAL RECOMMENDATIONS

PROPERTIES

• For neutralisation of the substrate apply weber.pas prime 1 day before application of weber.pas deco • When using on ETICS system, the HPV factor should not be under 25 • Application must be continuous; use the same tools and in one direction only • Mix buckets together to achieve an homogeneous finish and colour • Ideal application temperature 5 °C to 35 °C; protect from direct sun and rain during application and the drying period for minimum 2 days • Use only clean tools • Use only potable water for mixing and cleaning of tools • Windows, window boards, floors must be masked to avoid damage during application

• Water repellent • Easy to renovate with any masonry paint • Fire resistant • Very low water permeability - Allow the structure to breath • Easy to apply

SUBSTRATES

Mineral backgrounds e.g. cement renders, lime plasters, concrete and gypsum plasterboard.

CHARACTERISTICS Water permeability Water absorption Density Appearance

μ: 40 w (kg/m²∙√h): < 0.15 (kg/m³):1600-1800 Grain-to-grain orolled-grain finish

PACKAGING

Paste, in 30 kg bucket; pallet 24 x 30 kg = 720 kg

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

CONSUMPTION

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION • Mineral and masonry substrates e.g. lime and cement plasters and cement renders must be completely dry and hard and free of shrinkage and movement. • Remove mould oil from concrete surfaces • Surface must be flat and without holes or hollows • For renovation the substrate should be free of old plaster and any loose material and peeling paint • Repaired areas of the surface should have the same strength and hardness as the existing substrate

PRODUCT APPLICATION Decofaçade.350 SX is applied using a stainless steel trowel and leveled with a plastic trowel

CONSUMPTION 2.5 kg/m².

PACKAGING

2.9 – 3.1 kg/m²

STORAGE

12 months from production date in unopened buckets and kept in dry frost-free storage, under cover, off the ground and not in direct sunlight.

COMPLIMENTARY PRODUCTS / PRIMERS weber.pas prime

PRODUCT APPLICATION • Remove the lid and mix with a low-speed drill and whisk attachment • Clean potable water can be added to aid workability; max 0.5 litre per 30 kg bucket; mix thoroughly. • Manually apply with a Stainless Steel Trowel to a carefully controlled thickness not exceeding the aggregate size e.g. weber.pas Silikatputz 20 is applied at 2.0 mm thickness. • The texture is then achieved with a Thin Plastic Trowel. • Joints should be pre-determined and can be constructed

Decofaçade.350 SX is supplied in 20 kg plastic pails.

STORAGE 6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Avoid prolonged contact with skin. Wear protective

342

343

DISCLAIMER

A READY-TO-USE PRIMER FOR THE EQUALIZATION AND NEUTRALIZATION OF THE SUBSTRATE NOTE

PRODUCT

The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Weber. The unauthorized disclosure, use, dissemination or copying (either whole or partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit.

CONSUMPTION

weber.pas prime is a ready-to-use Primer made of organic components, alkali resistant pigments and additives. weber.pas prime is used for internal and external walls in association with weber.pas deco, for the equalization and neutralization of the substrate before the application of weber.pas deco and silicone-based wet renders.

Edition: 10/11-A

0.2 kg/m² - 100m²/20 kg pail

PACKAGING

Liquid in 20 kg bucket; pallet 24 x 20 kg /480 kg

STORAGE

12 months from production date in unopened buckets and kept in dry frost-free storage, under cover, off the ground and not in direct sunlight.

It is availbale in white.

PROPERTIES

QUALITY ASSURANCE

• Provides an even suction for the substrate • Ready-to-use • Easy to apply

weber.pas prime is quality controlled by Weber Management System.

DISCLAIMER

SUBSTRATES

Suitable substrates include masonry surfaces e.g. cement renders, lime plasters, concrete or cement board and gypsum plasterboard.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION • Mineral and masonry substrates e.g. lime and cement plasters and cement renders must be completely dry and hard and free of shrinkage and movement. • Remove mould oil from concrete surfaces • For renovation the substrate should be free of old plaster and any loose material and peeling paint • Repaired areas of the surface should have the same strength and hardness as the existing substrate.

NOTE

SUBSTRATE APPLICATION • Remove the lid and mix manually • Apply with a sponge roller or brush • 1 coat only • Cover the whole area • Allow to dry for 24 hours

Edition: 10/11-A

SPECIAL RECOMMENDATIONS

For neutralisation of the substrate apply weber.pas prime 1 day before application of weber.pas deco • Ideal application temp 5ºC to 35ºC; protect from direct sun and rain during application • Use only clean tools • No water to be added

344

345

weber∙therm base

ADHESIVE OF INCREASED ADHESION FOR FIXING FOAMED POLYSTYRENE BOARD FOR ETICS PRODUCT

mixer with low rotation speed (< 300 rpm) can be used. Mix until a uniform lump free paste is obtained. Let the paste rest for a few minutes before starting the application.

weber.therm base is a pre-bagged dry blend of cement, aggregates, polymer, and additives. It provides an excellent reinforcing coat for embedding glass Fiber mesh in facade insulation system (ETICS). It is elastic, crack-proof and resistant to mechanical stress. weber.therm base has an outstanding bonding effect and is water resistant.

PRODUCT APPLICATION Use a stainless notched trowel to apply the mortar to the surface of the EPS insulation board to a uniform thickness of appr. 2 to 3 mm; immediately, lay in the meshcloth. Once the initial coat has started to ‘take-up’, apply a second layer of adhesive mortar to produce a sandwich approximately 6 mm thick totally encapsulating the meshcloth. The meshcloth must lie within the outer one-third of the weber. therm base. At joints, individual meshes should overlap each other by 10 to 15 cm. At corners special reinforcing corner angle glass Fiber mesh is used. In order to protect against the formation of cracks, in areas where larger local stresses are to be expected, i.e. in the vicinity of the corners of door, window and other openings, strips of mesh (app.20 x 40 cm) should be placed diagonally across the corners. In case a thick mineral finish is required, lightly comb scratch the weber.therm base to achieve a good mechanical key.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Composition Color Density Open Time Pot Life Shelf Life Mixing Ratio Coverage

Powder Cement, siliceous sand and additives Grey or White 1.55 kg/lit. ± 0.05 25 min. at 20°C 2 hrs at 20°C 6 months 5.5 to 6 lit. per 25 kg 3 to 4 kg/m²

TEST RESULTS Tensile adhesion strength (N/MM2) as per ETAG 004:2000 (1) 28 days standard conditions 28 days standard conditions + 2 days water immersion + 2 hours drying 28 days standard conditions + 2 days water immersion + 7 days drying Water vapor transmission acc. EN 15148:2000 [kg/ m2.h½]

weber.therm base / EPS 0.1

weber∙therm base

with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting; in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

Edition: 02/10-A

CLEANING

0.13

Clean the tools with water after use. Cured materials can only be removed mechanically.

PACKAGING

0.1

weber.therm base is packed in 25 kg bag.

STORAGE

0.3

(1): Results pass the minimum requirement of ETAG 004:2000

weber.therm base can be stored for 6 months in dry conditions, away from extreme temperatures and protected against wind.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Surface must be clean and free from greasy matters or dust. PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix weber.therm base in the proportion of 5.5 to 6 liters of clean cool water per 25kg bag. An electric

346

347

weber∙therm glue

CEMENT BASED POLYMER MODIFIED BASE COAT RENDER FOR ETICS PRODUCT

with low rotation speed (< 300 rpm) can be used. Mix until a uniform lump free paste is obtained. Let the paste rest for a few minutes before starting the application.

weber.therm glue is a pre-mixed dry blend of cement, fillers, polymer, and additives. It is mainly used as adhesive to fix rigid insulation to a variety of surfaces, masonry, brick, and gypsum and cement board. It is resistant to mechanical stress and has an outstanding bonding effect and is water resistant.

PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply the weber.therm glue mixture on the back side of the insulation board (EPS). Apply the adhesive on the inside of the board using the “strip-point” method. It consists of preparation of continuous circumferential block (at least 3 cm wide) at the edge of the board and even distribution of 6 to 8 patches of 8 to 12 cm in diameter on the whole surface. Immediately after application of the mortar on the board, fix the board to the substrate by firm pressing and level it. In case of even and smooth substrates, the mortar can be evenly distributed using a notched float on the whole board surface to ensure 2 to 5 mm layer thickness.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Composition Color Density Open Time Pot Life Shelf Life Mixing Ratio Coverage

Powder Cement, siliceous sand and additives Grey or White 1.55 kg/lit. ± 0.05 25 min. at 20°C 2 hrs at 20°C 6 months 5 lit. per 25 kg 3 to 7 kg/m²

CAUTION: Immediately place the insulation board on the substrate, ensuring that no weber.therm glue mixture gets into board joints. Do not allow the weber.therm glue mixture to form a skin before positioning the insulation board on the substrate as it will affect the bond strength.

TEST RESULTS weber. Tensile adhesion weber. strength (N/MM2) therm glue/ therm glue / EPS Substrate ETAG 004:2000 (1) 28 days standard conditions 0.26 0.08 28 days standard conditions + 2 days water immersion + 2 0.34 0.1 hours drying 28 days standard conditions + 2 days water immersion + 7 0.1 days drying 0.47

weber∙therm glue

system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

Edition: 02/10-A

Joints between adjacent insulation boards should be reduced to the minimum.

CLEANING

Clean the tools with water after use. Cured materials can only be removed mechanically.

PACKAGING

weber.therm glue is packed in 25 kg bag.

(1): Results pass the minimum requirement of ETAG 004:2000

STORAGE

weber.therm glue can be stored for 6 months in dry conditions, away from extreme temperatures and protected against wind.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Surface must be clean and free from greasy matters or dust.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix weber.therm glue in the proportion of 6 liters of clean cool water per 25kg bag. An electric mixer

348

349

Stone∙fix

COLORED MORTAR FOR MOUNTING AND GROUTING STONES

PRODUCT

CONSUMPTION

Stone.fix is a dry ready mixed mortar that requires addition of water only. It is made of hydraulic binders as cement and lime, calibrated aggregates, additives (hydrophobic agent, water retention agent...) and pigments. Stone.fix is impermeable to water but permeable to vapors. This product is particularly used in mounting and grouting natural stones, and hollow blocks and bricks. It is to be applied in internal and external jobs.

1.7 kg/m²/mm thickness.

PACKAGING Stone.fix is packed in 25 or 50 kg bags.

6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Avoid prolonged contact with skin. Wear protective gear for hands & eyes. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. In both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

The product is available in different colours (white, beige and others)

Grain Size Powder density

< 1.5 mm 1.58

Pot Life

1 hr at 20°C

PROTECTIVE DECORATIVE ANTI-CARBONATION TREATMENT FOR CONCRETE PRODUCT

CONSUMPTION

Weber.cote beton is an anti-carbonation protective coating for exposed concrete and resistant to Chloride penetration with good permeability to water vapor diffusion. The elastometric nature of Weber.cote beton ensures good crack bridging properties.

70 m² in 2 coats per 14 litre pails.

PACKAGING 14 litre bucket

STORAGE

CHARACTERISTICS Color

weber∙cote beton

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION For grouting works on existing facades prepare the substrates as follows: • Remove old grouting material if any • Wash the substrate with water to dampen it before starting application PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix one bag of 50 kg with 8.5 to 9 litres of clean water using an electric mixer with low rotation speed (< 300 rpm). Continue mixing until a homogeneous paste of smooth creamy consistency is obtained. Let the mix rest for a few minutes before starting the application.

NOTE

PRODUCT APPLICATION Stone.fix is applied using a stainless steel trowel in a maximum thickness of 3 cm. During application, the temperature should be between + 5°C and + 35°C. After application, protect the freshly applied mortar from direct sun shine and cure it twice a day for 3 consecutive days.

Edition: 06/07-A

Validity of performance specifications: 12 months in intact package protected from excessively high or low temperatures

CHARACTERISTICS colors weight by volume pH Viscosity Carbon dioxide diffusion resistance UNI EN 1062-6

6 colors 1.36 kg/l 9 10.500 mPa*s 417.27 m

RECOMMENDATIONS

• Ideal application temperature: +5°C to +30°C, with max.R.H. of 85% • Do not apply on wet or frozen surfaces, or where there is a risk of freezing within the next 24 hours • Avoid application in full sunlight or in a strong wind • For best results, apply with a brush or roller • On large surfaces, it is good practice to interrupt application around joints and rain channels • Protect sealed product from freezing and extreme heat during storage • Do not leave buckets exposed to sunlight before use

These values were obtained in laboratory tests in a conditioned environment and may be considerably affected by conditions of application.

TYPICAL USES

Where new and existing concrete and masonry structures require protection from Carbon Dioxide, Sulphur Dioxide, Oxides of Nitrogen, Chlorides, Sulphates and UVradiation. Examples: car parks, commercial and industrial buildings, bridges, subways, beach resorts, high rise flats, etc.

DISCLAIMER

ADVANTAGES

• Easy to clean • Excellent weathering resistance • Single pack and easy to apply • Protects substrates form Carbonation • Elastic nature • Allows structure to “breathe” • Water based and non-toxic

NOTE

APPLICATION SPECIFICATION Primer coat 1st coat 2nd coat time for apllication between 2 coats

weber.cote beton diluted at 100% weber.cote beton diluted at 40% weber.cote beton diluted at 20% 12 hours

Edition: 09/11-A

These times are calculated for 22°C. Lower temperatures require more time, higher temperatures less time.

350

351

FLOOR COATINGS

EPOXY FLOOR COATING SYSTEMS Eposil Eposil.plus Epofloor.H.B. 50 Epobat **Epobat.52

Solvent based epoxy sealing primer Solvent free epoxy sealing primer Solvent based epoxy floor coating Solvent free heavy duty epoxy floor coating Solvent free two component epoxy floor coating

355 356 357 358 360

POLYURETHANE FLOOR COATING SYSTEMS Floortop.210 PU Floortop.215 UV Floortop.220 PU Floortop.2100 XPU Epogravel

Mono-component polyurethane floor coating Polyurethane top-coat, UV stable high (public) pedestrian traffic, light and medium car traffic Two component polyurethane coating Waterproof, crack bridging polyurethane coating system for car parks Epoxy binder for decorative aggregates surfacing

361 363 364 366 368

FLOOR TREATMENTS

SURFACE HARDENERS, RETARDERS & SEALERS Floortop.255 SC Floortop.400 BA **Floortop.410 QS Floortop.420 HP Hardex

Liquid surface hardener for concrete & mortar Surface hardener in powder form Quartz silica surface hardener High performance surface hardener in powder form Epoxy sealer, hardener and dust-proofer

370 371 372 373 374

STAMPED CONCRETE PRODUCTS Floortop.240 SIL SB Floortop.241 SIL WB Floortop.340 RLS Floortop.440 SC

352

Acrylic solvent based sealer and dust proofer Acrylic water based sealer and dust proofer Release agent in powder form Colored surface hardener in powder form

353

375 376 377 378

Eposil

SOLVENT BASED EPOXY SEALING PRIMERS

SELF-LEVELLING FLOOR COMPOUNDS & SCREEDS Epopark.3 MM Floortop.505 SLC Floortop.510 prime *Floortop.510 SOL Floortop.515 PSC Floortop.600 SCR Floortop.605 PRS Floortop.610 EHS Floortop.630 TSC

Solvent free epoxy flooring system One component high performance self levelling floor compound Acrylic based primer Two component high performance self levelling floor compound Premium self-levelling floor compound Dry ready mix fiber reinforced screed Polymer reinforced, self-consolidating screed High performance self levelling screed Pre-mixed fiber reinforced floor screed

379 381 382 383 384 386 387 389 391

PRODUCT APPLICATION Eposil is applied using a roller, brush or an airless sprayer For very porous surfaces two coats may be required to seal effectively.

PRODUCT

Eposil is a two-component epoxy primer designed to seal the porosity of the substrate thus providing a homogeneous and adherent surface to various epoxy coating systems. It improves the resistance of concrete to chemicals and daily abrasion, and reduces its absorption of water and salts.

CONSUMPTION

0.09 litre/m² The concrete surface greatly affects coverage rate.

SCOPE OF USE

PACKAGING

• Parking decks • Bridge decks • Industrial floors • Food industry flooring

*Available only in GCC **Available only in MENA

Eposil is packed in 20 litres kit.

STORAGE

One year after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry cool area.

CHARACTERISTICS Color

Transparent

Solid content Density Pot life Flash point Thickness of dry film Thickness of wet film Over coating application Max over coating delay

60% by volume 1.05 (Clear) 2-3 hours at 20°C > 26°C 55 microns 90 microns after 8 hours 4 days

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Application should be done in a ventilated area away from any heat source. Wear protective gear for hands and eyes and avoid breathing of vapor. If mixed resin comes into contact with the skin, it should be promptly removed before hardening, followed by thoroughly washing the skin with soap and water. In case of heavy vapor inhalation, place affected person in an open-air area. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. In all cases, seek medical attention. In case of fire, use CO2 foam to extinguish. Tightly seal containers when not in use, store them away from heat and carefully dispose empty ones.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION Careful surface preparation is essential for optimum finishing and durability. Maximum moisture content should not exceed 5%. New concrete structures need to dry for at least 28 days. Old coatings, dirt, fats, oils or organic substances need to be removed by a grinding machine. Possible surface irregularities need to be smoothened. Any loose surface pieces need to be thoroughly removed. The surface should then be roughened using a dust-free “grit-blasting” machine. The substrate should be clean, dry and sound, free of any dust or contamination which may harmfully affect the adhesion of the primer layer. WARNING: Do not wash surface with water!

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix the two parts for 2-3 minutes by an electric mixer with low rotation speed (< 300 rpm). The epoxy must be well mixed to ensure proper chemical reaction. After mixing, apply immediately.

354

Edition: 02/10-A

355

Eposil∙plus

SOLVENT FREE EPOXY SEALING PRIMER

PRODUCT Eposil.plus is a high quality two-component epoxy primer designed to seal the porosity of the substrate thus providing a homogeneous and adherent surface to various epoxy and polyurethane coating systems. It can also be used as a bonding coat for epoxy mortars. It provides superior resistance of concrete to chemicals and daily abrasion, and reduces its absorption of water and salts.

PRODUCT

CONSUMPTION

SCOPE OF USE

0.3 litres /m²/2 coats.

PACKAGING

• Parking decks • Bridge decks • Industrial floors • Food industry flooring • Warehouses

Eposil.plus is packed in 3.4 kg or 12 kg kit.

• Parking decks • Bridge decks • Industrial floors • Food industry flooring

STORAGE

One year after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry cool area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CHARACTERISTICS Color

Transparent

Solid content Density Pot life Max over coating delay VOC and Formadehyde ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS

100% by volume 1.07 1 hour at 30°C 1 days None (< 10µg/l)

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

SOLVENT BASED EPOXY FLOOR COATING

less sprayer For very porous surfaces two coats may be required to seal effectively. Eposil.plus must be over coated within 24 hours. If it is not possible, aggregates 0.1-0.4 mm must be strewn on the wet applied Eposil.plus. 0.15 kg/m² The concrete surface greatly affects coverage rate.

SCOPE OF USE

Epofloor∙H∙B∙ 50

upon specifications. If required, calibrated aggregates can be applied between coats. Cleaner and Thinner: Contact company for advice

Epofloor.H.B.50 is a high quality two-component epoxy coating for floors. It has good self-leveling properties, excellent resistance to abrasion, water and chemicals.

CONSUMPTION

Epofloor.H.B 50 is packed in 20 litres kit.

STORAGE

One year after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry cool area.

CHARACTERISTICS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Color

Grey, white and others

Solid content Density Pot life Drying time Flash Point Thickness of dry film Thickness of wet film Max over coating delay

60% by volume 1.03 2 hours at 35°C 1 to 2 hours at 30°C > 28 ˚C 125 microns 130 microns 5 days

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Epofloor.H.B.50 was tested in accordance with ASTM D2240 and BS 4800. Epofloor.H.B.50 complies with BS 476, Part 7: 1971class I spread of flame

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Ensure the surface is coated with Eposil and free from contaminants. If the maximum over coating time of Eposil has been exceeded, the surface should be roughened to provide “key” for subsequent coats. PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix the two parts for 2 - 3 minutes by an electric mixer with low rotation speed (< 300 rpm). The epoxy must be well mixed to ensure proper chemical reaction. After mixing, apply immediately.

NOTE

PRODUCT APPLICATION Epofloor.H.B.50 is applied using a brush or a roller or a notched trowel. It can be applied in single or multiple coats depending

Edition: 06/07-A

Edition: 02/10 -A

356

357

Epobat

SOLVENT FREE HEAVY DUTY EPOXY FLOOR COATING

PRODUCT Epobat is a solvent-free two-component epoxy coating for floors. With its high resistance to chemicals, salts and mechanical wear, Epobat is a heavy duty concrete floor coating. Epobat can also be used as a rust preventive coating for concrete and steel tanks and other surfaces subjected to chemical attacks and corrosion.

SCOPE OF USE • Parking decks • Bridge decks • Industrial floors • Food industry floors • Warehouses • Service stations • Chemical plants • Metal treatment plants • Machinery service areas

CHARACTERISTICS

Color

Epobat

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix the two parts for 2 - 3 minutes by an electric mixer with low rotation speed (< 300 rpm). The epoxy must be well mixed to ensure proper chemical reaction. After mixing, apply immediately.

PRODUCT APPLICATION Epobat is applied using a brush, a roller, an airless sprayer or a notched trowel in two coats. Epobat should be applied maximum 24 hours after the application of Eposil/Eposil Plus. For non-slip surfaces, fine sand must be broadcasted on the second coat while it is still wet. The surface is allowed to cure for at least 24 hours and finally topped with a very thin coat. Cleaner and Thinner: Contact company for advice.

NOTE

the company’s office in your location.

CONSUMPTION 0.60 kg/ m²/400 microns thickness. Grey, yellow and red and others

Solid content 100% by volume Density 1.45 Pot life 1-2 hours at 20°C Drying time 8 hours at 20°C Max over coating delay 7 days Adhesion strength > 3.5 N/mm² (ASTMD 4541) Abrasion resistance 113 mg / 100 cycles (ASTM D 4060:01) Chemical resistance very good VOC and Formadehyde ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS None (< 10µg/l) Table of chemical resistance is available upon request.

PACKAGING Epobat is packed in 5.4 kg or 12 kg Kit.

STORAGE One year after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry cool area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Application should be done in a ventilated area away from any heat source. Wear protective gear for hands and eyes and avoid breathing of vapor. If mixed resin comes into contact with the skin, it should be promptly removed before hardening, followed by thoroughly washing the skin with soap and water. In case of heavy vapor inhalation, place affected person in an open-air area. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. In all cases, seek medical attention. In case of fire, use CO2 foam to extinguish. Tightly seal containers when not in use, store them away from heat and carefully dispose empty ones.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Epobat was tested in accordance with ASTM D4541 and ASTM D 4060:01.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Ensure the surface is coated with Eposil if the surface has a low porosity and with Eposil.plus if the surface is very porous.

DISCLAIMER

While the company guarantees its products against defective materials, the use and application of these products are made without guarantee since the conditions of their

358

359

Epobat∙52

SOLVENT FREE TWO COMPONENT EPOXYFLOOR COATING

upon specifications. If required, calibrated aggregates can be applied between coats. Cleaner and Thinner: Contact company for advice.

PRODUCT Epobat.52 is a high quality semi-gloss two-component epoxy coating for concrete and steel surfaces. It has a high mechanical impact resistance, withstands water, oils, chemicals, various solvents and soluble salts. Withstands heavy loads and trucking.

CONSUMPTION

Approximately 0.150 liter/m2/100 microns thickness.

PACKAGING

SCOPE OF USE

Epobat.52 is packed in 7 liters kit.

• Parking decks • Bridge decks • Industrial floors • Warehouses • Stairways

CHARACTERISTICS

Color

Mixing ratio (by volume) Base / Hardener Volume solid content Density Pot life (mixed product) Drying time at 20˚C (film 100 microns): Dust free Fully cured Recoat VOC Thickness of dry filmstandard

STORAGE

One year after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry cool area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Standard colors and on request

5/2 99% (mixed product) 1.4 45 minutes at 20°C

6 hours 16 hours 16 hours 15 g/Liter 100 microns

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION The substrate should be clean, dry and sound, free of any dust or contamination which may harmfully affect the adhesion of the material. WARNING : Do not wash surface with water! PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix the two parts for 2 - 3 minutes by an electric mixer with low rotation speed (< 300 rpm). The epoxy must be well mixed to ensure proper chemical reaction. After mixing, apply immediately.

PRODUCT APPLICATION Epobat.52 is applied using a brush or a roller or a rubber wiper. It can be applied in single or multiple coats depending

Edition: 12/07-A

360

Floortop∙210 PU

MONO-COMPONENT POLYURETHANE FLOOR COATING

Hardness (shore A scale). ASTM D 2240 Solids Content Application Temperature Track Free Time Light trafficking Final Curing Time

PRODUCT

Floortop.210 PU is a colored, mono component, abrasion resistant, medium duty polyurethane, thinlayer floor coating. Cures by reaction with ground and air moisture.

SCOPE OF USE

Floortop.210 PU is mainly used on medium duty industrial floors. Due to its long lasting unchangeable properties, it is widely used for: • Car repair workshops • Car parking areas • Warehouses • Storage rooms • Factories • Animal breading farms • Food preparation-packaging or storage factories • Fresh juice factories • Cold storage rooms (Freezers), etc.

+ + ± + + + + + + + + + -

Stable: + Unstable: Stable for a short period: ±

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

ADVANTAGES

ASTM D 1475, DIN 1048, ASTM D 903 ASTM D 2240

Simple application (mono component) Highly abrasion resistant Decorative Prevents absorption of liquids or dirt Stops the creation of dust Chemical resistant Low cost

CHARACTERISTICS

60 ± 2 % 5ºC to 35ºC 2 – 3 hours 12 hours 4 days

Water Potassium hydroxide 20% Sodium hydroxide 20% Ammonia 10% Salt 20% Domestic Detergents Diesel oil Hydrochloric acid 10% Phosphoric acid 10% Sulfuric acid 10% Citric acid 10% Ethanol 10% Dichlormethane N-Methyl pyrrolidon (brake fluid)

Floortop.210 PU is also used as an acid spillage resistant coating, and basement sealing against ascending humidity for floors or walls. It can also be used as a protection film against dirt, chemicals, oils, grease, water and other staining liquids.

• • • • • • •

> 95 ± 5

Color

Grey, yellow and red and others

Composition Density - ASTM D 1475 Resistance to water pressure-DIN 1048 Adhesion to concrete ASTM D 903

Pigmented Polyurethane pre-polymer, solvent based 1.2 ± 0.1

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SURFACE PREPARATION Careful surface preparation is essential for optimum finishing and durability. Maximum moisture content should not exceed 5%. New concrete structures need to dry for at least 28 days. Old coatings, dirt, fats, oils or organic substances need to be removed by a grinding machine. Possible surface irregularities need to be smoothened. Any loose surface pieces need to be thoroughly removed. The surface should then be roughened using a dust-free “grit-blasting” machine. The substrate should be clean, dry and sound, free of any dust or contamination which may harmfully affect the adhesion of the primer layer. WARNING: Do not wash surface with water!

No leak at 7 atm. 2.2 ± 0.2 kg / cm² (concrete failure)

361

Floortop∙210 PU

Floortop∙215 UV

POLYURETHANE TOP-COAT, UV-STABLE HIGH (PUBLIC) PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC, LIGHT AND MEDIUM CAR TRAFFIC

other contamination. Fill all cracks with ConRep 412 CRY epoxy putty. The next day smoothen the putty surface with a sand paper or a mechanical grinder.

packing non open and in dry cool area.

ABSORBENT SURFACES Prime absorbent surfaces, like concrete, cement screed and wood with Eposil.plus by using a roller, brush or a spray gun. After 8 hours (not later than 24 hours) apply the first layer of the colored Floortop.210 PU coating. Allow 2-3 hours for the coating to cure (not more than 4 hours) and apply the second layer of the colored Floortop.210 PU. NON-ABSORBENT SURFACES Prime non-absorbent surfaces like metal, terrazzo, mosaic, power-floated concrete (helicopter leveled) and ceramic tiles with Eposil by using a roller, or a brush. After 8 hours (not later than 4 days) apply the first layer, of the coloured Floortop.210 PU coating. Allow 2-3 hours for the coating to cure (not more than 4 hours) and apply the second layer of the coloured Floortop.210 PU. Stir well before using. For best results, the temperature during application and cure should be between 5ºC and 35ºC. Lower temperatures retard curing while high temperatures speed up curing. High humidity may affect the final finish.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

ANTI-SLIP FINISH In order to achieve an anti-slip effect, sprinkle evenly silica sand on the first layer of Floortop.210 PU while still wet. When the layer is dry, brush off any excess aggregate and continue with the application of the second layer of the Floortop.210 PU.

Edition: 08/07-E

CONSUMPTION 300 g/m² depending on the surface finishing.

PACKAGING

Floortop.210 PU is supplied in: 1 kg, 5 kg, 10 kg, 20 kg pails.

STORAGE

One year after manufacturing date in its original

362

WARNING: Do not wash surface with water!

PRODUCT Floortop.215 UV is a pigmented aliphatic polyurethane, wear resistant, semi-rigid and color stable. As it is UV and weather stable Floortop.215 UV is used as a top-coat over exposed waterproofing coatings to protect from high wear conditions. Resistant to frost, it is used over Waterproof.360 or 350 PU, on surfaces subject to high public pedestrian and medium car traffic. It cures by reaction with ground and air moisture.

PRODUCT APPLICATION Floortop.215 UV is applied using a roller, brush or an airless sprayer.

CONSUMPTION 0.5 kg/m²/2 layers.

PACKAGING

Floortop.215 UV is supplied in 20 kg pails.

STORAGE

SCOPE OF USE

6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry cool area.

• Stadiums • Parking decks • Bridge decks • Industrial floors • Food industry floors • Warehouses • Service stations • Chemical plants • Metal treatment plants • Machinery service areas

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CHARACTERISTICS Color

Grey, white, red and green

Drying time Max over coating delay Elongation at break Hardeness (SHORE D Scale) Resistance to water pressure

4 hours at 20°C 8 hours > 100% (ASTM D 412) 30(ASTM D 2240)

DISCLAIMER

No leak (DIN EN 1928)

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

NOTE

363

Floortop∙220 PU

TWO COMPONENT POLYURETHANE COATING

Any loose surface pieces need to be thoroughly removed. The surface should then be roughened using a dust-free “grit-blasting” machine. The substrate should be clean, dry and sound, free of any dust or contamination which may harmfully affect the adhesion of the primer layer. WARNING: Do not wash surface with water!

PRODUCT Floortop.220 PU is a two component, UV resistant colored polyurethane coating used for waterproofing concrete floors and steel and concrete reservoirs. As Floortop.220 PU is chemically stable, it doesn’t give any taste to drinking liquids and food. As it is resistant to fresh and salt water, motor oils, lubricants, acids, alkalis and to many solvents it is easy to maintain.

PRODUCT PREPARATION Floortop.220 PU must be well mixed to ensure proper chemical reaction. After mixing, apply immediately.

PRODUCT APPLICATION Floortop.220 PU is applied using a roller, brush or an airless sprayer For very porous surfaces two coats may be required to seal effectively. Cleaner and Thinner: Contact company for advice.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

Floortop.220 PU may be walked on after 12 hours. The full resistance is obtained within 7 days approximately.

CHARACTERISTICS Color

Floortop∙220 PU

CONSUMPTION

Grey, yellow, red and others

0.17 liters/m².

Solid content 60% Density 1.25 Flash point 25 ˚C Pot life 4 hours at 30°C Drying time 10 hours at 20°C Max over coating delay 12 Hours Shock test 1Kg - 0.50m fall - no cracks (NFT 30039) Tensile strength 10 N/mm² Compressive strength 100 N/mm²

PACKAGING

Floortop.220 PU is supplied in 4 and 20 liters pails.

STORAGE

18 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry cool area.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS Floortop.220 PU was tested in accordance with AFNOR 4 and ASTM B4541

364

365

Floortop∙2100 XPU

WATERPROOF, CRACK BRIDGING POLYURETHANE COATING SYSTEM FOR CAR PARKS

need to be removed by a grinding machine. Possible surface irregularities need to be smoothened. Any loose surface pieces need to be thoroughly removed. The surface should then be roughened using a dust-free “grit-blasting” machine. The substrate should be clean, dry and sound, free of any dust or contamination which may harmfully affect the adhesion of the primer layer. WARNING: Do not wash surface with water!

PRODUCT Primer Eposil is a two-component epoxy primer designed to seal the porosity of the substrate thus providing a homogeneous and adherent surface to various epoxy coating systems. It improves the resistance of concrete to chemicals and daily abrasion, and reduces its absorption of water and salts. Base Coat Waterproof.360 PU It is a one component liquid applied polyurethane membrane.

PRODUCT APPLICATION Primer A primer is not typically required on freshly shot blasted dry concrete. For very porous surfaces Eposil is applied using a roller, brush or an airless sprayer at the rate of 100 -200 g/m². Allow a minimum dry time of 1 hour. Prime coat may be allowed to completely dry but shall not be applied more than 8 hours preceding application of Waterproof.360 PU. Apply the base coat in the same day.

Top Coat Floortop.215 UV It is a pigmented aliphatic polyurethane, wear resistant, semi-rigid and color stable. As it is UV and weather stable Floortop.215 UV is used as a top-coat over exposed waterproofing coatings to protect from high wear conditions. Resistant to frost, it is used over Waterproof.360 or 350 PU, on surfaces subject to high public pedestrian and medium car traffic.

Base Coat Apply Waterproof.360 PU using a roller, a brush or airless spray at the rate of 1.2 kg/m² in two layers for medium duty and at the rate of 0.7 kg/m² in one layer for light duty. In the first case the second layer should be applied after 12 hours and before 36 hours of the first layer application.

SCOPE OF USE • Stadiums • Parking decks • Bridge decks • Industrial floors • Food industry floors • Warehouses • Service stations • Chemical plants • Metal treatment plants • Machinery service areas

Silica sand To obtain higher anti-skid finishes, the freshly applied Waterproof.360 PU coating should be sprinkled immediately with dry silica sand, grain size 0.1-0.4 mm for light and medium duty and grain size 0.6-1.5 mm for heavy duty. All excess sand must be removed after hardening of the Waterproof.360 PU.

CHARACTERISTICS Refer to the technical data sheet of each product used in the system.

Top Coat Apply Floortop.215 UV at the rate of 0.5 kg/m² in one or two layers.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

The thickness of the total system will vary between 1000 and 1500 µ.

CONSUMPTION

Primer : 0.1 – 0.2 kg/m² Base Coat : 0.7 – 1.2 kg/m² Silica Sand : around 1 kg/m²

366

Floortop∙2100 XPU

is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit.

Top Coat : 0.5 kg /m². Factors like surface porosity, temperature, humidity, application method and finish required can alter consumption.

PACKAGING

Eposil Waterproof.360 PU Silica sand Floortop.215 UV

Edition: 08/07-A

: 20 liter pail : 25 kg metallic pail : 25 kg plastic bags : 20 kg pail

STORAGE

6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry cool area.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

367

Epogravel

EPOXY BINDER FOR DECORATIVE AGGREGATES SURFACINGR

mixed binder to a concrete or plaster mixer and add Decorative aggregates progressively while mixing until all aggregates are thoroughly wet. Binder amounts must be sufficient to thoroughly coat each aggregate particle with a slight excess to assure bond between the particles and the prepared substrate.

PRODUCT Epogravel is a two components, low viscosity, epoxy substrate primer and aggregate binder designed specifically for decorative aggregate surfacings in residential, commercial and institutional environments. Surfacings made with Epogravel are suitable for both interior and exterior applications. The binder’s resistance to wear and impact, environmental extremes and common chemicals make it ideally suited for a variety of decorative surfacing applications. Used in conjunction with suitable aggregate, Epogravel is emplooyed as a substrate primer and aggregate binder on concrete, masonry, stone, compacted soil and steel substrates.

PRODUCT APPLICATION Most applications require prime coating the substrate. Epogravel without aggregates can be used as a primer. Apply the Epogravel + Decorative aggregates mix before the primer begins to cure. Dump the mix onto the primed substrate, screed or rake level and finish with a clean trowel or float. At a cure temperature of 22 C, the surfacing may be opened to light foot traffic after 48 hours cure time; 7 days cure time recommended before exposure to heavy foot or light vehicular traffic.

SCOPE OF USE

Surfacings made with Epogravel are most frequently installed on patios, pool decks, walkways, stair risers, driveways and prefabricated, decorative building panels.

Excess mixed product is best removed from the work area and tools before it hardens. Use of solvent such as Xylene facilitates cleaning.

FEATURES

• Good chemical resistance • Excellent compressive strength • Abrasion resistant • Environmentally safe- No VOCs

PACKAGING

not in use, store them away from heat and carefully dispose empty ones.

Epogravel is packed in 3.4 kg or 12 kg kit.

CHARACTERISTICS Colour Solid content Density Pot life

Epogravel

STORAGE

Transparent 100% by volume 1.05 1 hours at 30˚C

One year after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry cool area.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SURFACE PREPARATION Substrate surfaces must be dry, sound and free of all bond-inhibiting substances. New concrete structures need to dry for at least 28 days. PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix the two parts for 2 -3 minutes by an electric mixer with low rotation speed (< 300 rpm). The epoxy must be well mixed to ensure proper chemical reaction. To complete mixing, the resin is poured progressively from one can to another and mixed again. Then, Transfer mixed binder to a concrete or

368

369

Floortop∙255 SC

LIQUID SURFACE HARDENER FOR CONCRETE & MORTAR

PRODUCT

PACKAGING

Floortop.255 SC is a water based liquid surface hardener and dust proofer. It is based on hard resins that provide a good adhesion to concrete, stones and mortars. It offers high exterior durability and oil, grease and water resistance.

Floortop.255 SC is supplied in 5 liters, 20 liters , 25 liters and 200 liters.

STORAGE

One year after manufacturing date in its original packing non open, protected form frost and heat.

SCOPE OF USE • Industrial floors • Parking • Facade panels • Terraces • Stones

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Avoid prolonged contact with skin. Wear protective gear for hands & eyes. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning thoroughly with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. In both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

CHARACTERISTICS Color Density pH

Transparent Around 1.35 10.5

DISCLAIMER

APPLICABLE STANDARD ASTM C1315- Type 1.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Substrate must be dry, clean, sound and free form greasy matters and dust. Remove all traces of curing compounds, old paints and sealer, and debris which may affect the adhesion. Before the application the substrate must be sufficiently cured in a way that any shrinkage has already occurred. New concrete must be at least 14 days old.

the company’s office in your location.

NOTE

PRODUCT APPLICATION It is recommended to dilute 1 part of Floortop.255 SC with 1 to 2 parts of clean water in order to facilitate its penetration. Floortop.255 SC is applied using a roller, a brush or an airless spray gun. Allow the solution to be absorbed into the substrate and remove the surplus. Two layers are recommended at 24 hours interval. Allow to dry for few hours before exposure to traffic.

Edition: 11/10-A

Floortop∙400 BA

SURFACE HARDENER IN POWDER FORM

Immediately, use a power float or a trowel to obtain the requested smooth finish. During the following days after application, protect the surface from sunshine and wind. A proper curing improves the performances of Floortop.400 BA.

PRODUCT

Floortop.400 BA is a ready to use surface hardener for concrete made with selected aggregates (Silica, Basalt…), cement and additives. It is an economical floor hardener recommended for internal and external use. With its high abrasion resistance and strength, Floortop.400 BA is a heavy duty concrete surface hardener particularly recommended for heavy traffic floors.

CONSUMPTION

Moderate traffic: 4 to 5 kg/m² Heavy traffic: 5 to 7 kg/m²

SCOPE OF USE

PACKAGING

• Parking areas • Auto show rooms • Warehouse • Industrial floors • Corridors • Lobbies & Waiting rooms

Floortop.400 BA is packed in 25 kg or 50 kg paper bags.

STORAGE

6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

CHARACTERISTICS Color Grain size Powder density Abrasion resistance Compressive Strength (ASTM C 109:99) 7 days 28 days

Flexural Strength (ASTM C 580) 7 days 28 days Moh’s Hardness

Grey < 4 mm 1.40 0.99 mm/1000 rev (Tinius Olsen wearometer C.D.R)

69.0 N/mm² 86.3 N/mm²

10.1 N/mm² 12.2 N/mm² 8-9

0.150 liters/m²/two coats.

370

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION For a good aspect, the fresh concrete must not contain too much air or water. As per technical recommendations and state of art, joints should be created regularly to prevent cracks: usually each 25m². Before applying Floortop.400 BA, the concrete should be leveled and the excess water removed.

NOTE

PRODUCT APPLICATION When the concrete is prepared, spread Floortop.400 BA regularly on the surface. For obtaining a constant quality, the quantity of dry shake hardener per m² must be the same all over the surface. Spread two-third of the Floortop.400 BA needed. Wait until the product gets wet in contact with the concrete. Then spread the remaining one-third of Floortop.400 BA.

CONSUMPTION

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

371

Floortop∙410 QS

Floortop∙420 HP

QUARTZ SILICA SURFACE HARDENER

CONSUMPTION

PRODUCT

Moderate traffic: 4 to 5 kg/m2 Heavy traffic: 5 to 7 kg/m²

Floortop.410 QS is a ready to use, economical non metallic aggregate, dry shake floor hardener comprised of carefully graded Quartz-Silica aggregates, special additives and Portland cement. Proper installation of Floortop.410 QS will impart long life and high durability to interior and exterior concrete floors.

PACKAGING Floortop.410 QS is packed in 25 kg or 50 kg paper bags.

STORAGE

SCOPE OF USE

6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

Recommended for interior or exterior applications such as: warehouse floors, shopping centers, hopitals, dairies, auditoriums, aircraft hangars, plants, loading docks, etc.

CHARACTERISTICS Color Grain size Powder density Compressive Strength at 28 days

Moh’s Hardness

HIGH PERFORMANCE SURFACE HARDENER IN POWDER FORM

Grey < 3 mm 1.40 More than 50 N/mm²

7-8

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SUBSTRATE PREPARATION For a good aspect, the fresh concrete must not contain too much air or water. As per technical recommendations and state of art, joints should be created regularly to prevent cracks: usually each 25m². Before applying Floortop.410 QS, the concrete should be leveled and the excess water removed.

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT APPLICATION When the concrete is prepared, spread Floortop.410 QS regularly on the surface. For obtaining a constant quality, the quantity of dry shake hardener per m² must be the same all over the surface. Spread twothird of the Floortop.410 QS needed. Wait until the product gets wet in contact with the concrete. Then spread the remaining one-third of Floortop.410 QS. Immediately, use a power float or a trowel to obtain the requested smooth finish. During the following days after application, protect the surface from sunshine and wind. A proper curing improves the performances of Floortop.410 QS.

the company’s office in your location.

NOTE

372

Wait until the product gets wet in contact with the concrete. Then spread the remaining one-third of

PRODUCT Floortop.420 HP is a ready to use surface hardener for concrete made with selected aggregates (Silica, Basalt & Emery), special cement and additives. It is an economical floor hardener recommended for internal and external use. With its high abrasion resistance and strength, Floortop.420 HP is a heavy duty concrete surface hardener particularly recommended for heavy traffic floors. Floortop.420 HP improves by 43% abrasion of a high performances concrete slab having 60 MPa compressive strength.

CONSUMPTION

Moderate traffic: 4 to 5 kg/m² Heavy traffic: 5 to 7 kg/m²

PACKAGING Floortop.420 HP is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

STORAGE

6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

SCOPE OF USE • • • • • •

Parking areas Auto show rooms Warehouse Industrial floors Corridors Lobbies & Waiting rooms

CHARACTERISTICS Color Grain size Powder density Aggregate hardness Aggregate abrasion value Aggregate impact value Abrasion resistance

Grey < 4 mm 1.40 > 8.5 MOHS 1.9 (BS 812) 8.0 (BS 812)

0.69mm/1000rev/ Tinius Olsen wearometer C.D.R

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SUBSTRATE PREPARATION For a good aspect, the fresh concrete must not contain too much air or water. As per technical recommendations and state of art, joints should be created regularly to prevent cracks: usually each 25m². Before applying Floortop.420 HP, the concrete should be leveled and the excess water removed.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

PRODUCT APPLICATION When the concrete is prepared, spread Floortop.420 HP regularly on the surface. For obtaining a constant quality, the quantity of dry shake hardener per m² must be the same all over the surface. Sprinkle two-third of the Floortop.420 HP needed.

Edition: 06/07-A

373

Hardex

EPOXY SEALER, HARDENER AND DUST-PROOFER

CONSUMPTION

PRODUCT Hardex is a two-component epoxy system designed to penetrate and seal concrete surfaces. It improves the resistance of concrete to chemicals and daily abrasion, and reduces its absorption of water and salts.

Clear: 0.1 litre/m² Grey: 0.2 litre/m² NB: The concrete surface greatly affects coverage rate and final appearance.

SCOPE OF USE

Hardex is packed in 20 litres kit.

• • • •

PACKAGING

Parking decks Bridge decks Industrial floors Food industry floors

STORAGE

One year after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry cool area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CHARACTERISTICS

Color Clear or Grey Finish Semi-gloss Solid content ≥ 60% by volume Density 1.40 (Grey) 1.05 (Transparent) Pot life 3 hours at 20°C Flash point > 28°C Suitable for foot traffic after 12-24 hours Suitable for wheel traffic after 48 hours.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Substrate must be clean, sound and free form greasy matters and dust. Remove all traces of curing compounds, old paints and sealer, and debris which may affect the adhesion. Before the application the substrate must be sufficiently cured in a way that any shrinkage has already occurred. New concrete must be at least 28 days old with open pores. For maximum penetration of the product, it is recommended to sandblast or to shot-blast the surface. Allow the concrete to completely dry before starting the application.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

PRODUCT PREPARATION Add part B to Part A and mix for 2 - 3 minutes by an electric mixer with low rotation speed (< 300 rpm). The epoxy must be well mixed to ensure proper chemical reaction. After mixing, apply immediately.

Edition: 06/07-A

PRODUCT APPLICATION Hardex is applied using a roller, pump-up or an airless sprayer.

374

Floortop∙240 SIL SB

ACRYLIC SOLVENT BASED SEALER AND DUST PROOFER

PRODUCT

CONSUMPTION

Floortop.240 SIL SB is a glossy solvent based sealer and dust proofer. It is based on hard resins that provide a durable and serviceable finish with excellent adhesion to concrete floors, stamped concrete or natural stones. It allows conserving the original color of the support. This acrylic sealer offers high exterior durability and UV, alkali and water resistance.

0.117 litres/m²

SCOPE OF USE

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

• • • • •

PACKAGING Floortop.240 SIL SB is supplied in 10 liters metallic pails.

STORAGE

One year after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry cool area.

Terraces Private parking Shopping centers Show rooms Warehouses

CHARACTERISTICS Color Density Flash point Touch dry

Transparent 0.95 ≤ 21°C 1 hour

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

DISCLAIMER

Floortop.240 SIL SB complies with AFNOR NFT 36 005 Famille I – classe 7b1.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Substrate must be clean, sound and free form greasy matters and dust. Remove all traces of curing compounds, old paints and sealer, and debris which may affect the adhesion. Before the application the substrate must be sufficiently cured in a way that any shrinkage has already occurred. New concrete must be at least 28 days old with open pores. Allow the concrete to completely dry before starting the application.

the company’s office in your location.

NOTE

PRODUCT APPLICATION Floortop.240 SIL SB is applied using a roller, a brush or an airless spray gun. Two layers are recommended at one hour interval with the first one diluted up to 15% with toluol. Allow to dry for few hours before exposure to traffic.

Edition: 06/07-A

375

Floortop∙241 SIL WB

ACRYLIC SOLVENT BASED SEALER AND DUST PROOFER

PRODUCT

STORAGE

Floortop.241 SIL WB is a water based, penetrating acrylic sealer and dust-proofer. It is based on hard resins that provide a durable and serviceable finish with excellent adhesion to concrete floors, stamped concrete or natural stones. It allows conserving the original color of the support. This acrylic sealer offers high exterior durability and UV, alkali and water resistance.

One year after manufacturing date in its original packing non open, protected form frost and heat.

SCOPE OF USE • • • • •

Terraces Private parking Shopping centers Show rooms Warehouses

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS Color Density Touch dry

Milky white 0.95 1 hour

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

the company’s office in your location.

NOTE

Floortop∙340 RLS

RELEASE AGENT IN POWDER FORM

PRODUCT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Floortop.340 RLS contains a specific fillers, pigments and additives that form a moisture barrier between the stamping tools and wet concrete facilitating the release of flexible tools. It is a dry shake material applied directly on top of the colored surface hardener like Floortop.440 SC prior to stamping. It gives a decorative aspect to stamped concrete.

SCOPE OF USE Stamped concrete

CHARACTERISTICS Color Grain size

DISCLAIMER

Refer to company’s chart colors <0.150 mm

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Before applying Floortop.340 RLS, the surface colored hardener should be well leveled. PRODUCT APPLICATION Floortop.340 RLS is spread by hand on top of the freshly applied colored surface hardener like Floortop.440 SC. Then, by using specific stamps, the system (fresh concrete + surface colored hardener + Floortop.340 RLS) is stamped. 24 hours after the application, remove the excess of Floortop.340 RLS with water. Diluted acids may be added to the washing water.

the company’s office in your location.

NOTE

During the following days, when the surface becomes completely dry, apply a protective coating using Floortop.240 SIL SB or Floortop.241 SIL WB.

PRODUCT APPLICATION Floortop.241 SIL WB is applied using a roller, a brush or an airless spray gun. Two layers are recommended at half hour interval.

CONSUMPTION

Allow to dry for few hours before exposure to traffic.

0.2 kg/m².

CONSUMPTION

PACKAGING

Floortop.340 RLS is packed in 10 kg plastic or paper bags.

0.117 litres/m²

PACKAGING

STORAGE

Floortop.241 SIL WB is supplied in 20 liters, 25 liters, 200 liters and 1000 liters.

6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

376

377

Floortop∙440 SC

COLORED SURFACE HARDENER IN POWDER FORM

Floortop.240 SIL SB / 241 SIL WB acrylic based sealer. For stamped concrete, Floortop.440 SC is to be combined with Floortop.340 RLS (release agent in powder form) and Floortop.240 SIL SB / 241 SIL WB acrylic based sealer.

PRODUCT

Floortop.440 SC is a ready to use colored surface hardener for concrete. It is to be applied as a dry shake over freshly leveled and floated concrete. It is an economical and decorative floor hardener particularly recommended for commercial and residential areas. It increases abrasion resistance and strength of floors.

CONSUMPTION

Light color : 3 to 5 kg/m² Dark color : 2 to 3 kg/m²

SCOPE OF USE • • • • • • • •

Terraces Private parking Shopping centers Show rooms Warehouse Corridors Lobbies Waiting rooms

PACKAGING

Floortop.440 SC is packed in 25 kg paper bags

STORAGE

6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CHARACTERISTICS Color Composition Grain size Powder density

Refer to company’s chart colors Cement, selected sand, additives and pigments. <4 mm 1.40

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION For a good aspect, the fresh concrete must not contain too much air or water. As per technical recommendations and state of art, joints should be created regularly to prevent cracks: usually each 25m². Before applying Floortop.440 SC, the concrete should be leveled and the excess water removed.

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT APPLICATION When the concrete is prepared, spread Floortop.440 SC regularly on the surface. For obtaining a constant color, the quantity of dry shake hardener per m² must be the same all over the surface. Sprinkle two-third of the Floortop.440 SC needed. Wait until the product gets wet in contact with the concrete. Then spread the remaining one-third of Floortop.440 SC. Immediately, use a power float or a trowel to obtain the requested smooth finish. During the following days after application, protect the surface from sunshine and wind. 241 SIL WB.

NOTE

Epopark∙3MM

SOLVENT FREE EPOXY FLOORING SYSTEM

PRODUCT

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Careful surface preparation is essential for optimumfinishing and durability. Maximum moisture content should not exceed 5%. New concrete structures need to dry for at least 28 days. Old coatings, dirt, fats, oils or organic substances need to be removed by a grinding machine. Possible surface irregularities need to be smoothened. Any loose surface

A solvent free three component epoxy mortar designed to provide continuous protection for concrete floors. It can be used for grouting, anchoring a wide range of steel bars and bedding industrial equipments. It can be used up to 10 mm thickness. It provides excellent abrasion and good chemical resistance.

SCOPE OF USE

• Automobile production units, Aircraft manufacturing industries • Industrial and commercial warehouse Pharmaceutical and food factories

pieces need to be thoroughly removed. The surface should then be roughened using a dust-free “gritblasting” machine. The substrate should be clean, dry and sound, free of any dust or contamination which may harmfully affect the adhesion of the primer layer. WARNING: Do not wash surface with water!

CHARACTERISTICS Color Density Pot Life Drying time for 3 mm. Dust free Pedestrian traffic Road traffic Over coating time For 3 mm (BS 1881 Part 107) Description Composition Finish Thinner Water absorption @ 14 days (ASTM C 413) Compressive Strength (ASTM C579) @ 3 days and 40°C Flexural Strength (BS 4551) @ 3 days and 40°C Tensile Strength (ASTM C 807) @ 3 days 40°C Tensile Strength (ASTM C807) @ 14 days 40°C Bond Strength on concrete (BS 1881 part 207) @ 14 days VOC and Formadehyde ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS

Brown 2 1 hour @ 20 ˚C

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix the two parts hardener and resin by an electric mixer with low rotation speed (< 300 rpm). To obtain a uniform epoxy mortar compound, gradually add the graded aggregates to the epoxy fluid while mixing for 2 to 3 minutes.

4 hours 30 min 48 hours 7 days Min. 48 hours - max. 7 days 3-components epoxy mortar Resin, Hardener, selected fillers Gloss No thinning

PRODUCT APPLICATION Flooring: After the surface has been prepared, prime any smooth areas with Eposil. In case of high porosity substrate, use Eposil.plus as primer. Both Eposil must be coated within 24 hours. If it is not possible, anti slip grain 0.1-0.4 mm must be sprinkled on the wet applied Eposil. Pour out mixed material on to the floor, evenly spread out using a rake or squeegee. Ensure that the surface is rolled using a calibrated rake. Check the thickness and eliminate entrapped air by means of a spiked roller in two crossed passes (applied coating must not be altered or touched up to 30 minutes after its application at 20ºC.

0.14% 87 Mpa 17 Mpa 13 Mpa

Bedding and Grouting: Pour Epopark.3 mm continuously, in one direction to avoid air pockets. The choice of installation method depends on the grouting thickness and the length of the machine.

15 Mpa > 2.8 Mpa None (< 10µg/l)

CONSUMPTION

Edition: 06/07-A

6 Kg/m²/3 mm thickness.

FINISHING For more durability, the surface must be covered with

378

379

Epopark∙3MM

Floortop∙505 SLC

PACKAGING

PRODUCT

ONE COMPONENT HIGH PERFORMANCE SELF LEVELLING FLOOR COMPOUND

Epopark.3 mm is packed in: Not colored: 20 kg kit (3.4 kg epoxy + 16.6 kg fillers). Colored: 24.5 kg kit (12 kg epoxy + 12.5 kg fillers).

absorbs all the irregularities of the substrate. Applied layers must be from 3 to 8 mm. Wait 3 days minimum before covering the ﬂoor with carpeting, tiles, etc...

Floortop.505 SLC is cement based dry ready mixed self levelling mortar for internal use. It is composed of hydraulic binders, mineral charges and special admixtures.

STORAGE 12 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry cool area.

CONSUMPTION

1.6 kg / m²/ mm thickness

SCOPE OF USE

• Concrete ﬂoor slabs • Prefabricated concrete slabs • Monolithic screeds • Modular concrete elements

PACKAGING Floortop.505 SLC is packed in 25 kg paper bags.

STORAGE

CHARACTERISTICS Powder Density Grain Size Pot life Initial adhesion Compressive strength Bending strength

6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

1.40 < 0.5 mm 25 Min 1 MPa at 28 days 20 Mpa ± 2 4 Mpa ± 0.5

APPLICABLE STANDARDS It complies with BS 4551, BS 890, BS 4550.

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

PRODUCT PREPARATIONPour slowly each 25 kg bag of Floortop.505 SLC into 6 to 6.5 liters of water while stirring with a lowspeed drill ( <500 rpm). Mix for 2 to 3 minutes, untila homogeneous creamy paste is obtained.

Edition: 02/10-A

Edition: 09/08-A

PRODUCT APPLICATION Spread the paste on the ﬂoor, with a large ﬂat metallic trowel. Since Floortop.505 SLC is self levelling, it

380

381

Floortop∙510 prime

Floortop∙510 SOL

ACRYLIC BASED PRIMER

TWO-COMPONENT HIGH PERFORMANCE SELF LEVELLING FLOOR COMPOUND

PRODUCT Floortop.510 prime is a co-polymer acrylic emulsion designed to prime absorbent concrete substrates prior to the application of self leveling compounds (e.g. Floortop.510 SOL or Floortop.505 SLC or Floortop.515 PSC ) and screed (e.g. Floortop.600 SCR or Floortop.630 TSC). It is used as a pore sealer on floor surfaces to prevent air bubbles rising through subsequently applied sub-floor smoothing and leveling compounds and to prolong their flow life and workability.

PRODUCT

CONSUMPTION

100 to 300 ml/m2 depending on the roughness and absorbency of the substrate.

Floortop.510 SOL is a two-component cement based dry ready mixed self levelling mortar for internal use. It is composed of hydraulic binders, mineral charges and special admixtures.

PACKAGING

SCOPE OF USE

Floortop.510 prime is supplied in 5 and 15 liters pails.

STORAGE

Floortop.510 prime has high storage stability from 20°C to + 45°C. Always stir before use. Can be stored for up to 6 months after manufacturing date, in original packaging.

SCOPE OF USE

For priming of substrates made of concrete, anhydrite and cement based rendering, light concrete, woodenlike panels, ceramic tiles, and asphalt concrete.

CHARACTERISTICS Density Drying time

Clean tools with water before they dry.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Approx 1 kg / lit 1/2 to 2 hours depending on Application rate and climatic Conditions

Avoid prolonged contact with skin. Wear protective gear for hands & eyes. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning thoroughly with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION The substrate must be perfectly sound, clean, and free from grease, oil, dust or any friable matters. Depending on type and condition of sub floor, a mechanical treatment (e.g. mechanical brushing, grinding or sanding) is required. Intensity of such work needs to be determined at site. Dust, paint, residual adhesives or other surface pollution must be removed by suitable means. We recommend cleaning the surface with an industrial vacuum cleaner.

DISCLAIMER

the company’s office in your location.

NOTE

It is important that the primer fill every square inch of the substrate to ensure a solid bond of the self leveling compound. Avoid the formation of puddles. Extremely porous substrates may require two priming coats.

Edition: 06/10-A

382

1.5 kg/m²/mm thickness

Floortop.510 SOL is packed in: UAE : 32.5 kg kit (25 kg bag + 7.5 lit liquid) QATAR: 30 Kg kit (25 Kg bag + 5 lit liquid)

• Concrete floor slabs • Prefabricated concrete slabs • Monolithic screeds • Modular concrete elements.

STORAGE

6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CHARACTERISTICS Powder Density Grain Size Pot life Drying time

1.40 < 0.5 mm 25 Min 24 hours

DISCLAIMER

In hot weather, dampen the slab one day before the application. For porous substrate it is recommended to apply Floortop.510 prime and allow to dry before the application of Floortop.510 SOL. PRODUCT PREPARATION Pour the powder of Floortop.510 SOL into the liquid, while stirring with a low speed drill (< 500 rpm). Mix for 2 to 3 minutes, until a homogeneous creamy paste is obtained.

the company’s office in your location.

NOTE

PRODUCT APPLICATION Spread the paste on the floor, with a large flat metallic trowel. Since Floortop.510 SOL is self levelling, it absorbs all the irregularities of the substrate. Applied layers must be from 2 to 6 mm. Wait 3 days minimum before covering the floor with carpeting, tiles, etc...

Edition: 09/09-A

*Available only in GCC

383

Floortop∙515 PSC

PREMIUM SELF LEVELING FLOOR COMPOUND

PRODUCT

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Floortop.515 PSC is a superior quality cement based, polymer modified, non-shrinking, self-leveling topping designed for leveling interior horizontal concrete. This single component product produces a tough surface that will accept light traffic 24 hours after installation. Floortop.515 PSC can be applied in thicknesses ranging from 2 to 15 mm per layer. For applications thicker than 15 mm, kindly contact SODAMCO technical department. It provides excellent abrasion and chemical resistances. It has excellent self-leveling properties, high early and ultimate strengths.

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Substrate must be clean, sound and free form greasy matters and dust. Remove all traces of curing compounds, old paints and sealer, and debris which may affect the adhesion. Before the application the substrate must be sufficiently cured in a way that any shrinkage has already occurred. In hot weather, dampen the slab one day before the application. For porous substrate, it is recommended to apply Floortop.510 prime and allow to dry before the application of Floortop.515 PSC. PRODUCT APPLICATION Floortop.515 PSC is to be mixed in full bag batches. Do not mix partial bags. Each 25 Kg bag of Floortop.515 PSC is to be mixed with 5.25 liters of clean, potable water. Measure and add the proper amount of water for each bag into a mixing container. Using a paddle type mixer on a slow speed drill, place the paddle in the mixing water and start the drill. Slowly add the Floortop.515 PSC powder. Mix for a minimum of 2 minutes until lump free. Scrape the sides of the mixing container and remix for 1 minute. The mixed material should be lump free.

SCOPE OF USE Floortop.515 PSC is particularly recommended for resurfacing sound, properly prepared interior concrete surfaces. On new construction projects, Floortop.515 PSC may also correct rough or unfinished concrete surface and level uneven floors. On restoration projects, use Floortop.515 PSC to produce a hard smooth finish over old concrete

CHARACTERISTICS Color Grain Size Powder density Shelf healing properties Setting time (minutes) Flowability test (mm) EN 12706:1999 Abrasion resistance (mm³) EN 12808 - 2:2002 Shrinkage at 28 days (mm/m) - IBN German guideline: 1993 Flexural strength at 28 days (N/mm²) EN 13813:2003 Compressive strength at 28 days (N/mm²) EN 13813:2003 VOC and Formadehyde ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS

PRODUCT PREPARATION Limit the work areas into manageable sections of approximately 20m. Reduce the width of the work area when applying in warmer temperatures. Temperatures above 21ºC or low humidity conditions will shorten the working time of the material. Place the mixed material onto the prepared surface, then immediately work into the substrate with a medium to stiff bristled broom. Spreaders and smothers may be used to aid in leveling and smoothing the surface. Do not walk in the wet material unless wearing spiked shoes or boots. Always keep a wet edge of material to pour fresh material into. Protect the material from wind when installing. Allow longer cure time of the material before walking on if the

Brown < 1mm 1 hour @ 20 ˚C Good up to 30 minutes Initial 265 Final 325 0 min 14 5 min 12.5 10 min 9.0 less than 310 1.05 7 35

Floortop∙515 PSC

PACKAGING

Floortop.515 PSC is packed in in 25 kg paper bags.

STORAGE

6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry cool area.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

temperature is below 21ºC. Wait 3 days minimum before covering the floor with carpeting, tiles, etc...

None (< 10µg/l)

CONSUMPTION

1.5 kg/m2/ mm thickness.

384

385

Floortop∙600 SCR

DRY READY MIX FIBER REINFORCED SCREED

Avoid fast drying in case of hot temperature or wind by regular curing.

PRODUCT

Floortop.600 SCR is a ready mixed cementitious screed made with selected aggregates, additives and fiber. Ready to use, Floortop.600 SCR is to be simply mixed with water on site. It can be used to level the surface prior to the installation of other floor products such as Floortop 510 SOL or Floortop 515 PSC. Tiles can be laid down directly on top of Floortop 600 SCR.

CONSUMPTION 22 kg/m² /cm thickness.

PACKAGING

Floortop.600 SCR is packed in 50 kg or 25 kg paper bags.

STORAGE

SCOPE OF USE

6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

Floortop 600 SCR is particularly recommended for floor screed with pedestrian traffic : hotel, housing… For industrial floor & car park- Floortop 600 SCR must be topped with a thin layer (8 to 12 mm) Floortop 515 PSC before applying any kind of epoxy mortar or paints.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Grain size

Flexural Strength Compressive strength

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Grey powder < 5 mm 9 MPa at 28 days ASTM C 580-02 25 MPa at 7 days > 35 MPa at 28 days ASTM C 109-02

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

DISCLAIMER

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Surface should be sound, free from oil and dust. The substrate must be absorbing and clean of substances, which may weaken the bond. The tensile strength of the substrate should be > 1 MPa. Weakened top layer and any loose material should be removed to produce a good mechanical key. Then, the substrate is vacuumed and primed with Floortop 510 prime to improve the adhesion. Strongly absorbent substrate must be treated twice.

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix a 50 kg Floortop.600 SCR bag with 5 to 6 liters clean water using a concrete mixer or a mixing machine. Half quantity of water is required for 25 kg package. Pour the mixed material on to the substrate and spread it with a steel trowel, for a thickness up to 5 cm. Control joints in the existing substrate should be respected. For large area, joints should be created every 25 m².

NOTE

386

Floortop∙605 PRS

POLYMER REINFORCED, SELF-CONSOLIDATING SCREED

Any excess of water shall be removed. Smooth concrete surfaces should be hacked or eventually shot blasted. In hot weather, dampen the slab one day before the application.

PRODUCT Floortop.605 PRS is cement based dry ready mixed self consolidating screed for internal and external use. It is composed of hydraulic binders, mineral charges and special polymers admixtures. It can be used up to 50 mm thickness per layer. It provides excellent abrasion and good chemical resistance. It has good self-consolidating properties and ultimate strength

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix each 50 kg bag of Floortop.605 PRS with 7.25 to 7.5 liter of clean water using a mechanical mixer. Mix for 2 to 3 minutes to reach the necessary homogeneity and workability.

SCOPE OF USE

• Pile cap repair • Shopping mall • Exhibition hall • Hotels and offices • Hospitals and universities • Car parks • Garage and workshops

PRODUCT APPLICATION Start laying Floortop.605 PRS from one end of a panel and fill with the mixed material to the required level before proceeding to adjacent area within each panel. Rake or float shall be used to assist material flow where necessary. If required the screed can be finished with a steel trowel to give a smooth dense surface. For such a finish, the screed should be allowed to stiffen slightly then worked with the trowel, which will make a ringing sound when the correct action is being used. Excessive trowelling should be avoided. Panels should be saw-cut to 1 cm depth in order to create control joints in bays of 25 m2. Saw-cutting should occur immediately after final setting. At the junction of columns and walls a minimum of 1 cm gap should be provided.

CHARACTERISTICS Color Grain size open time Wey density Compressive Strength (BS 1881-part 116) 1 days 7 days 28 days Flexural Strength BS EN 196-1 at

Grey powder < 3 mm 1hour @ 20˚C 2.04 87 Mpa 8 N/mm² 13 N/mm² 20 N/mm² 8 N/mm²

Applied layers must be from 7 to 50 mm.

28 days Adhesion strength (BS 1881 part 207 7 days

0.9 N.mm²

> 1 N/mm²

28 days

Strictly cover with polyethylene sheet once Floortop.605 PRS screed attains final set. Due care shall be exercised to protect the freshly laid Floortop.605 PRS from extreme sunshine and wind before its final setting. Avoid service loading with 24 hours after installation of Floortop.605 PRS

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Substrate must be clean, sound and free form greasy matters and dust. Remove all traces of curing compounds, old paints and sealer, and debris which may affect the adhesion. Before the application the substrate must be sufficiently cured in a way that any shrinkage has already occurred. Contraction joints shall be installed as required. Absorbent substrate shall be thoroughly wetted down to saturation prior to application of Floortop.605 PRS.

CONSUMPTION 21 kg/ m²/ 10 mm thickness.

PACKAGING Floortop.605 PRS is packed in 50 Kg paper bag.

387

Floortop∙605 PRS

Floortop∙610 EHS

STORAGE

PRODUCT

HIGH PERFORMANCE SELF LEVELLING SCREED

6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

the application.

Floortop.610 EHS is a four component cement based ready mixed self leveling screed for internal and external use. It is composed of hydraulic binders, mineral charges and special admixtures. It can be used up to 15 cm thickness. It provides excellent abrasion and good chemical resistance. It has good self-leveling properties, high early and ultimate strength.

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix the powder of Floortop.610 EHS with the liquid using a mechanical mixer. Mix for 3 to 4 minutes to reach the necessary homogeneity and workability. Note: Floortop.610 EHS is a four-component system which doesn’t need the addition of any quantity of water which will only lead to bleeding and other undesirable defects.

SCOPE OF USE • • • • • • • • •

DISCLAIMER

Pile cap repair Shopping mall Exhibition hall Hotels and offices Hospitals Forklift traffic area Car parks Garage and workshops Warehouses

PRODUCT APPLICATION Start laying Floortop.610 EHS from one end of a panel and fill with the mixed material to the required level before proceeding to adjacent area within each panel. Rake or float shall be used to assist material flow where necessary. Check that correct floor level is achieved and allow Floortop.610 EHS to self-level to flatness with light assisted tamping. Applied layers must be from 5 to 15 cm.

CHARACTERISTICS Color Grain size Compressive Strength (BS 1881-part 116) 1 days 3 days 7 days 28 days Flow spread Open time Water absorption

NOTE

(BS 1881 part 122) VOC and Formadehyde

Grey powder Yellowish liquid < 10 mm 87 Mpa

Strictly cover with polyethylene sheet once Floortop.610 EHS screed attains final set. Due care shall be exercised to protect the freshly laid Floortop.610 EHS from extreme sunshine and wind before its final setting. Avoid service loading with 24 hours after installation of Floortop.610 EHS.

30 N/mm² 40 N/mm² 50 N/mm² 60 N/mm² 60 - 70cm @ 28˚C 1 hour @ 28˚C

CONSUMPTION

3.41% None (< 10µg/l)

11.5 kg/m²/ 5 mm thickness.

ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS

PACKAGING Floortop.610 EHS is packed in 53.8 Kg or 76.8 kg Kit: Components A+B+C: 50 kg; Component D: 3.8 kg Components A+B+C: 71.4 kg; Component D: 5.4 kg

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Edition: 03/09-A

388

STORAGE 6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful

389

Floortop∙610 EHS

Floortop∙630 TSC

to the skin. It is preferable to do the application a well ventilated area, to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid dust inhaling. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. In both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

PRODUCT

PRE-MIXED FIBER REINFORCED FLOOR SCREED

Control joints in the existing substrate should be respected. For large area, joints should be created every 25 m².

Floortop.630 TSC is a pre-packaged screeding mix based on Portland cement, synthetic fibers, specially graded aggregates plus a blend of synergistic admixtures. Floortop.630 TSC is ready to use on site and when mixed with water produces a trowelable floor screed which is applied to new or existing concrete. The mix design is readily mixed to produce a screeding consistency that is easily applied and finished. The cured material develops high ultimate compressive and mechanical strengths.

DISCLAIMER

CONSUMPTION 22 kg/m²/ cm thickness.

PACKAGING

Floortop.630 TSC is packed in 25 or 50 kg paper bags.

STORAGE

6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open and in dry area.

SCOPE OF USE

Topping of concrete and cementitious floors.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CHARACTERISTICS

Appearance Grey powder Grain size < 5 mm Compressive strength >30 MPa@28days Recommended layer 30 - 80 mm thickness (1) Shrinkage (28 days) < 0.6 mm/m (1) If the maximum screed thickness required is 30 mm or

NOTE

less, Floortop 515 PSC should be used.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Edition: 11/10-B

DISCLAIMER

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Surface should be sound, free from oil and dust. The substrate must be absorbent and free from foreign materials which may weaken the bond. The tensile strength of the substrate should be > 1 MPa. Weakened top layer and any loose material should be removed to produce a good mechanical key. Then, the substrate is vacuumed and primed with Floortop.510 prime to improve the adhesion. Strongly absorbent substrate must be treated twice.

NOTE

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix a 50 kg Floortop.630 TSC bag with 5.5 liters of clean water (25 Kg with 2.75 Liters) using a concrete mixer or a mixing machine. Excess water weakens the strength and increase shrinkage; therefore water must not be overdosed. Pour the mixed material on to the substrate and level it with a steel trowel.

390

Edition: 11/10-A

391

PREMIXED RUSH COAT & PLASTERS PREMIXED RUSH COATS

*Premix.SRC-1 *Premix.SRC-2 *Premix.SRC-LW *Premix.SRC-S **Premix.key coat

Ready mixed spatterdash slurry coat for blocks Ready mixed spatterdash slurry coat for fair face concrete Ready mixed spatterdash slurry coat for light weight blocks (Autoclaved Aerated Concrete Blocks) Ready mixed spatterdash slurry coat for very dense concrete & concrete containing SCMs Ready mixed spatterdash slurry coat

395 396 398

Cement based dry ready mix plaster Portland cement plaster Cement based dry ready mix plaster with fiber High quality fibre reinforced ready mix plaster Cement base ready mix plaster One coat high bonding ready mix plaster One coat high bonding ready mix plaster for light weight blocks Cement based ready mix plaster for ceiling Cement based ready mix plaster with fiber Cement based ready mix plaster Cement based ready mix sprayable plaster Ready mixed brown coat plaster Gypsum based ready mixed plaster Gypsum based ready mixed finishing coat

404 406 408 410 412 414 416

400 402

PREMIXED PLASTERS *Premix.SP-1 *Premix.SP-2 *Premix.SP-3 FL *Premix.SP-5 Premix.SP-6 WP Premix.SP-11 Premix.SP-33 Premix.plaster ceiling **Premix.plaster fiber **Premix.plaster hand **Premix.plaster spray **Premix.plaster thick Premix.plaster SGP-1 Premix.plaster SGP-2 *Available only in GCC **Available only in MENA

392

393

418 420 422 424 426 428 429

Premix∙SRC-1

READY MIXED SPATTERDASH SLURRY COAT FOR BLOCKS

RELATED PREMIXED PRODUCTS Premix.bloc fix Premix.bloc fix A Premix.bloc fix LW Premix.bloc fix LW-B Premix.bloc fix N Premix.bloc fill RM Premix.custom Mix

Mounting and gap filling mortar for hollow blocks and bricks Block and brick masonary laying mortar Mounting mortar for light weight blocks Mounting mortar for light weight bricks Block and brick laying mortar Core fill grout for concrete masonry units Ready mix mortar for building walls and foundations

430 431 432 433 434 435 436

PREMIXED FINISHING PUTTIES Premix.fine finish Premix.skim coat

Putty for cement based substrate resurfacing High Quality Cementitious Rendering

438 439

Synthetic based primer

437

Protect the newly applied material from sunshine and wind. The new material has to be cured with water for at least three days by spraying 3 to 4 times daily.

Premix.SRC-1 is a ready mixed mortar based on mineral bonding agent used for preparing surfaces before the rendering. It improves the adhesion of the new plaster, cement & gypsum based. It is applied on masonry blocks.

CONSUMPTION

Around 4 kg/m², depending on the substrate and the application method.

Recommended rush-coats according to substrate SUBSTRATES PRODUCT Regular Blocks Light-Weight Blocks Fair faced Concrete Concrete with SCMs

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Composition

PLASTERS PRIMERS Primer 500 GYP

CURING

PRODUCT

PREMIXED MOUNTING MORTARS

Grain size VOC and Formadehyde ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS Resistance to fire as per BS EN 998 -1

PACKAGING

Premix SRC-1 Premix SRC-LW Premix SRC-2 Premix SRC-S

Premix.SRC-1 is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

STORAGE

Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Grey granular powder Portland cement, selected sand, additives 0 to 3 mm

None (< 10µg/l) Class A1

APPLICABLE STANDARDS BS 5262: 1991 BS 5492: 1990 BS 4551: Part 2: 1998 ASTM C 150 ASTM C 926 ASTM C 897

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Substrates must be sound, clean, dust free and free from all traces of oil, curing compound, gypsum, paint or laitance. The support must be dampened a few hours before the application of Premix.SRC-1

NOTE

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix a 50 kg bag with 9 to 11 liters of potable cool water in order to obtain the consistency desired. Mixing has to be done with an electric mixer. PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply the Premix.SRC-1 using a tyrolean box or a power spray gun.

Edition: 06/11-A *Available only in GCC

*Available only in GCC **Available only in MENA

394

395

Premix∙SRC-2

READY MIXED SPATTERDASH SLURRY COAT FOR FAIR FACED CONCRETE PRODUCT

CURING

Premix.SRC-2 is a ready mixed mortar based on mineral bonding agent used for preparing surfaces before the rendering. It improves the adhesion of the new plaster, cement & gypsum based. It is applied on normal strength fair faced concrete.

Protect the newly applied material from sunshine and wind. The new material has to be cured with water for at least three days by spraying 3 to 4 times daily.

CONSUMPTION

Recommended rush-coats according to substrate SUBSTRATES PRODUCT

Around 4 kg/m², depending on the substrate and the application method.

Regular Blocks Light-Weight Blocks Fair faced Concrete

Premix SRC-1 Premix SRC-LW Premix SRC-2

PACKAGING

Concrete with SCMs

Premix SRC-S

STORAGE

Grain size VOC and Formadehyde ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS Resistance to fire as per BS EN 998 -1

NOTE

Premix.SRC-2 is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Composition

Premix∙SRC-2

Grey granular powder Portland cement, selected sand, additives 0 to 3 mm

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

None (< 10µg/l) Class A1

APPLICABLE STANDARDS BS 5262: 1991 BS 5492: 1990 BS 4551: Part 2: 1998 ASTM C 150 ASTM C 926 ASTM C 897

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION Substrates must be sound, clean, dust free and free from all traces of oil, curing compound, gypsum, paint or laitance. The support must be dampened a few hours before the application of Premix.SRC-2. PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix a 50 kg bag with 10 to 12 liters of clean water in order to obtain the consistency desired. Mixing has to be done with an electric mixer.

NOTE

The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorized disclosure, use, dissemination or copying (either whole or

PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply the Premix.SRC-2 using a tyrolean box or a power spray gun.

396

397

Premix∙SRC-LW

READY MIXED SPATTERDASH SLURRY COAT FOR LIGHT WEIGHT BLOCKS (Autoclaved Aerated Concrete Blocks) PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply the Premix.SRC-LW using a tyrolean box or a power spray gun.

PRODUCT Premix.SRC-LW is a ready mixed mortar based on mineral bonding agent used for preparing surfaces before the rendering. It improves the adhesion of the new plaster, cement & gypsum based. It is applied on light weight blocks.

CURING

Premix SRC-1 Premix SRC-LW Premix SRC-2

Concrete with Micro silica

Premix SRC-S

partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit. Edition: 02/10-A *Available only in GCC

Protect the newly applied material from sunshine and wind. The new material has to be cured with water for at least three days by spraying 3 to 4 times daily.

Recommended rush-coats according to substrate SUBSTRATES PRODUCT Regular Blocks Light-Weight Blocks Fair faced Concrete

Premix∙SRC-LW

CONSUMPTION

Around 4 kg/m², depending on the substrate and the application method.

PACKAGING Premix.SRC-LW is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Composition Grain size VOC and Formadehyde ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS Resistance to fire as per BS EN 998 -1

STORAGE

Grey granular powder Portland cement, selected sand, additives 0 to 3 mm

Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

None (< 10µg/l) Class A1

APPLICABLE STANDARDS BS 5262: 1991 BS 5492: 1990 BS 4551: Part 2: 1998 ASTM C 150 ASTM C 926 ASTM C 897

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION The substrate must be clean, sound, and free from dust and all traces of oil or laitance. The substrate must be dampened a few hours before the application of Premix.SRC-LW and again 1 hour before application.

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix a 50 kg bag with 9 to 11 liters of clean cool water in order to obtain the consistency desired. Mixing has to be done with an electric mixer.

398

399

Premix∙SRC-S

READY MIXED SPATTERDASH SLURRY COAT FOR VERY DENSE CONCRETE & CONCRETE CONTAINING SCMs CURING

PRODUCT

Premix.SRC-S is a ready mixed mortar based on mineral bonding agent used for preparing surfaces before the rendering. It improves the adhesion of the new plaster, cement or gypsum based. It is applied on smooth very dense concrete and concrete containing SCMs (GGBS, Silia fume, Fly ash, Metakaolin…).

Protect the newly applied material from sunshine and wind. The new material has to be cured with water for at least three days by spraying 3 to 4 times daily.

Grain size VOC and Formadehyde ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS Resistance to fire as per BS EN 998 -1

Edition: 06/11-A *Available only in GCC

Around 4 kg/m², depending on the substrate and the application method.

PACKAGING

Premix SRC-1 Premix SRC-LW Premix SRC-2 Premix SRC-S

Premix.SRC-S is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

STORAGE Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Composition

partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit.

CONSUMPTION

Recommended rush-coats according to substrate SUBSTRATES PRODUCT Regular Blocks Light-Weight Blocks Fair faced Concrete Concrete with SCMs

Premix∙SRC-S

Brownish granular powder Portland cement, selected sand, additives 0 to 3 mm

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

None (< 10µg/l) Class A1

APPLICABLE STANDARDS BS 5262: 1991 BS 5492: 1990 BS 4551: Part 2: 1998 ASTM C 150 ASTM C 926 ASTM C 897

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix a 50 kg bag with 10 to 12 liters of clean water in order to obtain the consistency desired. The addition of a bonding agent to SRC-S is not required. Mixing has to be done with an electric mixer.

NOTE

The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorized disclosure, use, dissemination or copying (either whole or

PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply the Premix.SRC-S using a tyrolean box or a power spray gun.

400

401

Premix∙key coat

READY MIXED SPATTERDASH SLURRY COAT

PRODUCT

CURING

Premix.key coat is a ready mixed mortar based on mineral bonding agent used for preparing cement based surfaces before rendering. It improves the adhesion of the new plaster, cement & gypsum based. It is applied on internal or external walls and ceilings, fair faced concrete, masonry blocks, and old cement based plaster.

Protect the newly applied material from sunshine and wind. The new material has to be cured with water for at least three days by spraying 3 to 4 times daily.

Grain size Resistance to fire as per BS EN 998 -1

partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit. Edition: 06/11-A **Available only in MENA

CONSUMPTION

Around 5 kg/m², depending on the substrate and the application method.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Composition

Premix∙key coat

PACKAGING

Brownish granular powder Portland cement, selected sand, additives 0 to 4 mm Class A1

Premix.key coat is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

STORAGE Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

BS 5262: 1991 BS 5492: 1990 BS 4551: Part 2: 1998 ASTM C 150 ASTM C 926 ASTM C 897 DTU 26.1 DTU 20.1 DTU 23.1

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix a 50 kg bag with 11 to 14 liters of clean cool water in order to obtain the consistency desired. For specific cases, when an important adhesion is required, 1 kg of Admix 240 LTX can be added to the mixing water. Mixing has to be done with an electric mixer.

NOTE

PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply the Premix.key coat using a tyrolean box or a power spray gun.

The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorized disclosure, use, dissemination or copying (either whole or

402

403

Premix∙SP-1

CEMENT BASED DRY READY MIX PLASTER

PRODUCT

Premix.SP-1 is a cementitious ready mix plaster used for traditional plastering works in a clean and speedy manner, while keeping a homogeneous mix. Due to its high content in additives and fibers, it allows better shrinkage control as well as improved workability and curing. Premix.SP-1 is recommended for external and internal plastering on block walls, ceilings, concrete surfaces, bricks and for general filling up.

For the application on Light Weight concrete blocks, it is recommended to use Premix.SP-3 FL.

CHARACTERISTICS Color Composition Grain size Mixing ratio Powder density Wet mix life VOC and Formadehyde ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS Resistance to fire as per BS EN 998 -1

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix manually or mechanically a 50 kg bag of Premix.SP-1 with 7 to 9 litres of clean water until a homogeneous paste is obtained. Let the mix rest for a few minutes.

water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. The product is nonflammable.

If a spraying machine is used, the mixing is carried out automatically.

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply the plaster on the prepared surface by spraying it or manually with a plastering trowel at a thickness between 10 and 20 mm in one layer. Finish the surface with a wooden or steel float as required. Let the product set properly on the surface before any curing. If more thickness is required, the application should be done in two layers. The 1st layer should be roughened then cured. The 2nd layer should be applied at least 48 hrs after the 1st one.

Premix.SP-1 can be applied traditionally by hand or by using modern plaster-spraying machines. It should not be used on painted surfaces or floors.

Grey Portland cement, selected sand, additives 0 to 2.5 mm 7-9 liters per 50 kg bag 1.55 ± 0.10 < 2 hours at 20°C

CURING Protect the newly applied plaster from sunshine and wind. The new plaster has to be cured with water for at least three days by spraying 3 to 4 times daily.

None (< 10µg/l) Class A1

Premix∙SP-1

NOTE

CONSUMPTION Approximately 1.6 kg per m² per 1 mm thickness.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

PACKAGING

BS 5262: 1991 BS 5492: 1990 BS 4551: Part 2: 1998 ASTM C 150 ASTM C 926 ASTM C 897

Premix.SP-1 is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

STORAGE Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SURFACE PREPARATION The substrate must be clean, sound, and free from dust and all traces of oil and laitance. A spatter dash slurry coat (Premix.SRC-1, SRC-2 or SRC-S) should be applied as a key coat for improved bonding & adhesion of subsequent layers.

A few hours before the application of Premix.SP-1, dampen the rush coat with clean water.

404

405

Premix∙SP-2

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER

PRODUCT Premix.SP-2 is a cementitious ready mix plaster used for traditional plastering works in a clean and speedy manner, while keeping a homogeneous mix. Due to its high content in additives, it allows better shrinkage control as well as improved workability and curing. Premix.SP-2 is recommended for external and internal plastering on block walls, ceilings, concrete surfaces, bricks and for general filling up.

For the application on Light Weight concrete blocks, it is recommended to use Premix.SP-3 FL which is reinforced with polypropylene fibers.

CHARACTERISTICS

Mixing ratio Powder density Wet mix life Resistance to fire per BS EN 998 -1

water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. The product is nonflammable.

If a spraying machine is used, the mixing is carried out automatically.

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply the plaster on the prepared surface by spraying it or manually with a plastering trowel at a thickness between 10 and 15 mm in one layer. After levelling, finish the surface with a steel float or synthetic sponge as required. Let the product set properly on the surface before any curing. If more thickness is required, the application should be done in two layers. The 1st layer should be roughened then cured. The 2nd layer should be applied at least 48 hrs after the 1st one.

Premix.SP-2 can be applied traditionally by hand or by using modern plaster-spraying machines. It should not be used on painted surfaces or floors.

Color Composition

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix manually or mechanically a 50 kg bag of Premix.SP-2 with 8 to 9 litres of clean water until a homogeneous paste is obtained. Let the mix rest for a few minutes.

Grey Portland cement, selected sand, additives 8-9 liters per 50 kg bag 1.55 ± 0.10 < 2 hours at 20°C Class A1

CURING Protect the newly applied plaster from sunshine and wind. The new plaster has to be cured with water for at least three days by spraying 3 to 4 times daily.

NOTE

CONSUMPTION Approximately 1.6 kg per m² per 1 mm thickness.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

PACKAGING

BS 5262: 1991 BS 5492: 1990 BS 4551: Part 2: 1998 ASTM C 150 ASTM C 926

Premix.SP-2 is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

STORAGE Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION The substrate must be clean, sound, and free from dust and all traces of oil and laitance.

A spatter dash slurry coat (Premix.SRC-1, SRC-2 or SRC-S) should be applied as a key coat for improved bonding & adhesion of subsequent layers. A few hours before the application of Premix.SP-2, dampen the rush coat with clean water.

406

407

Premix∙SP-3 FL

CEMENT BASED DRY READY MIX PLASTER WITH FIBER PRODUCT

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix manually or mechanically a 50 kg bag of Premix. SP-3 FL with 8 to 9 litres of clean cool water until a homogeneous paste is obtained. Let the mix rest for a few minutes. If a spraying machine is used, the mixing is carried out automatically.

Premix.SP-3 FL is a fiber reinforced cement-lime ready mix plaster used for traditional plastering works in a clean and speedy manner, while keeping a homogeneous mix. Due to its high content in fibers and additives, it allows better shrinkage control as well as improved workability, curing and impermeability. Premix.SP-3 FL is recommended for external and internal plastering on light weight blocks (Autoclaved Aerated Concrete Blocks). It is also applicable on concrete provided that a suitable rush-coat is applied before (Premix.SRC-2 or SRC-S).

Premix.SP-3 FL can be applied traditionally by hand or by using modern plaster-spraying machines. It should not be used on painted surfaces or floors. For the application on block walls, ceilings, concrete surfaces, bricks and for general filling up, it is recommended to use Premix.SP-1.

CURING Protect the newly applied plaster from sunshine and wind. The new plaster has to be cured with water for at least three days by spraying 3 to 4 times daily.

CHARACTERISTICS Color Composition Grain Size Mixing ratio Powder density Wet mix life VOC and Formadehyde ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS Resistance to fire as per BS EN 998 -1

Grey Portland cement, selected sand, fibers and other additives. 0 to 2.5 mm 8-9 liters per 50 kg bag 1.45 ± 0.10 < 2 hours at 20°C

Premix∙SP-3 FL

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

CONSUMPTION Approximately 1.6 kg per m² per 1 mm thickness.

PACKAGING Premix.SP-3 FL is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

None (< 10µg/l) Class A1

STORAGE Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS BS 5262: 1991 BS 5492: 1990 BS 4551: Part 2: 1998 ASTM C 150 ASTM C 926 ASTM C 897

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION The substrate must be clean, sound, and free from dust and all traces of oil and laitance. Prior to the application of Premix.SP-3 FL, the surface has to be covered by a specific spatter dash key coat, Premix.SRC-LW. A few hours before the application of Premix.SP-3 FL, dampen the rush coat with clean water.

408

409

Premix∙SP-5

HIGH QUALITY FIBRE REINFORCED READY MIX PLASTER

PRODUCT

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix manually or mechanically a 50 kg bag of Premix.SP-5 with 8 to 9 litres of clean water until a homogeneous paste is obtained. Let the mix rest for a few minutes. If a spraying machine is used, the mixing is carried out automatically.

Premix.SP-5 is a cementitious fibre reinforced ready mix plaster used for traditional plastering works in a clean and speedy manner, while keeping a homogeneous mix. Due to its high content in additives, it allows better shrinkage control as well as improved workability, bonding and curing. Premix.SP-5 is recommended for external and internal plastering on block walls, aerated light weight (AAC) blocks, ceilings, concrete surfaces, bricks and for general filling up. Premix.SP-5 can be applied traditionally by hand or by using modern plaster-spraying machines. It should not be used on painted surfaces or floors.

CHARACTERISTICS

Color Composition Grain Size Mixing ratio Powder density Wet mix life VOC and Formadehyde SO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS Resistance to fire as per BS EN 998 -1

Grey Portland cement, selected sand, fibers and other additives. 0 to 2.5 mm 8-9 liters per 50 kg bag 1.55 ± 0.10 < 2 hours at 20°C

CURING Protect the newly applied plaster from sunshine and wind. The new plaster has to be cured with water for at least three days by spraying 3 to 4 times daily.

None (< 10µg/l) Class A1

Premix∙SP-5

in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

CONSUMPTION

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Approximately 1.6 kg per m² per 1 mm thickness.

BS 5262: 1991 BS 5492: 1990 BS 4551: Part 2: 1998 ASTM C 150 ASTM C 926 ASTM C 897

PACKAGING Premix.SP-5 is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

STORAGE Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION All bases should be sufficiently rigid, clean of any surface contamination that may prevent good suction. Although Premix.SP-5 can be applied directly over masonry blocks, (AAC) blocks; smooth concrete surfaces, or those with low absorption, can be made more receptive to plaster application by first applying a spatter dash slurry coat (Premix.SRC-2 or SRC-S) as a key coat for improved bonding & adhesion of subsequent layers. A few hours before the application of Premix.SP-5, dampen the substrate with clean water.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting,

410

411

Premix∙SP-6 WP

CEMENT BASED READY MIX PLASTER

PRODUCT

SP-6 WP with 8 to 9 litres of clean water until a homogeneous paste is obtained. Let the mix rest for a few minutes. If a spraying machine is used, the mixing is carried out automatically.

Premix.SP-6 WP is a cementitious ready mix plaster used for traditional plastering works in a clean and speedy manner, while keeping a homogeneous mix. Due to its high content in additives, it allows better shrinkage control as well as improved workability and curing. Premix.SP-6 WP contains a special waterproofing additive to reduce the water absorption of the plaster. Premix.SP-6 WP is recommended for external and internal plastering on block walls, ceilings, concrete surfaces, bricks and for general filling up. Premix.SP-6 WP can be applied traditionally by hand or by using modern plaster-spraying machines. It should not be used on painted surfaces or floors. For the application on Light Weight concrete blocks, it is recommended to use Premix.SP-3 FL which is reinforced with polypropylene fibers.

CURING

CHARACTERISTICS Color Composition Grain size Mixing ratio Powder density Wet mix life Resistance to fire as per BS EN 998 -1

tion of these products are made without guarantee since the conditions of their application are beyond its control. It is recommended to verify with the company that the product is suitable for the intended use, and that this Data Sheet version is the latest one. The company may modify it without prior notice. Technical characteristics are listed for guidance only. For more information, please contact the company’s office in your location.

NOTE

Protect the newly applied plaster from sunshine and wind. The new plaster has to be cured with water for at least three days by spraying 3 to 4 times daily.

Grey Portland cement, selected sand, specific additives. 0 to 2.5 mm 8-9 liters per 50 kg bag 1.55 ± 0.10 <2 hours at 20oC

CONSUMPTION

Approximately 1.6 kg per m² per 1 mm thickness.

STORAGE

Class A1

Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

PACKAGING

BS 5262: 1991 BS 5492: 1990 BS 4551: Part 2: 1998 ASTM C 150 ASTM C 926 ASTM C 897

Premix.SP-6 WP is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION The substrate must be clean, sound, and free from dust and all traces of oil and laitance. A spatter dash slurry coat (Premix.SRC-1, SRC-2 or SRC-S) should be applied as a key coat for improved bonding & adhesion of subsequent layers. A few hours before the application of Premix.SP-6 WP, dampen the rush coat with clean water.

DISCLAIMER

While the company guarantees its products against defective materials, the use and applica-

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix manually or mechanically a 50 kg bag of Premix.

412

413

Premix∙SP-11

ONE COAT HIGH BONDING READY MIX PLASTER

PRODUCT

surface contamination that may prevent good suction. Although Premix.SP-11 can be applied directly over masonry blocks. Smooth concrete surfaces, or those with low absorption, can be made more receptive to plaster application by first applying a spatter dash slurry coat (Premix.SRC-2 or SRC-S) as a key coat for improved bonding & adhesion of subsequent layers. A few hours before the application of Premix.SP-11, dampen the substrate with clean water.

Premix.SP-11 is a cementitious fibre reinforced ready mix plaster used for traditional plastering works in a clean and speedy manner, while keeping a homogeneous mix. Due to its high content in additives, it allows better shrinkage control as well as improved workability, bonding and curing. Premix.SP-11 is recommended for external and internal plastering on block walls, ceilings, concrete surfaces, bricks and for general filling up. Premix.SP-11 can be applied traditionally by hand or by using modern plaster-spraying machines. It should not be used on painted surfaces or floors. For the application on Light Weight concrete blocks, it is recommended to use Premix.SP-3 FL or Premix.SP 33.

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix manually or mechanically a 50 kg bag of Premix. SP-11 with 7 to 9 litres of clean water until a homogeneous paste is obtained. Let the mix rest for a few minutes. If a spraying machine is used, the mixing is carried out automatically. PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply the plaster on the prepared surface by spraying it or manually with a plastering trowel at a thickness between 10 and 20 mm in one layer. Finish the surface with a wooden or steel float as required. Let the product set properly on the surface before any curing. If more thickness is required, the application should be done in two layers. The 1st layer should be roughened then cured. The 2nd layer should be applied at least 48 hrs after the 1st one.

CHARACTERISTICS Color Composition Grain size Mixing ratio Powder density Wet alife VOC and formaldehyde content ISO/FDIS 11890-2/GC-MS Resistance to fire as per BS EN 998 -1 Compressive strength at 28 days - ASTM C 109/109 M-02 Pull off test at 28 days -BS 1881;Part 207:1992

Grey Portland cement, selected sand, specific additives. 0 to 2.5 mm 7-9 liters per 50 kg bag 1.55 ± 0.10 <2 hours at 20oC None (<10µg/l)

Class A1

CURING

Protect the newly applied plaster from sunshine and wind. The new plaster has to be cured with water for at least three days by spraying 3 to 4 times daily.

> 7 Mpa > 0.3 Mpa

Premix∙SP-11

ful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

CONSUMPTION

Approximately 1.6 kg per m² per 1 mm thickness.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS BS 5262: 1991 BS 5492: 1990 BS 4551: Part 2: 1998 ASTM C 150 ASTM C 926 ASTM C 897 EN 13914-1 EN 13914-2

PACKAGING

Premix.SP-11 is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

STORAGE

Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION All bases should be sufficiently rigid, clean of any

The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harm-

414

415

Premix∙SP-33

ONE COAT HIGH BONDING READY MIX PLASTER FOR LIGHT WEIGHT BLOCKS

PRODUCT

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Premix.SP-33 is a fiber reinforced cement-lime ready mix plaster used for traditional plastering works in a clean and speedy manner, while keeping a homogeneous mix. Due to its high content in fibers and additives, it allows better shrinkage control as well as improved workability, curing and impermeability.

SURFACE PREPARATION The substrate must be clean, sound, and free from dust and all traces of oil and laitance. Although Premix.SP-33 can be applied directly over light weight block, Smooth concrete surfaces, or those with low absorption, can be made more receptive to plaster application by first applying a spatter dash slurry coat (Premix.SRC-2 or SRC-S) as a key coat for improved bonding & adhesion of subsequent layers. A few hours before the application of Premix.SP-33, dampen the rush coat with clean water.

Premix.SP-33 is recommended for external and internal plastering and can be applied without the need of any rush coat on light weight blocks (Autoclaved Aerated Concrete Blocks). It is also applicable on concrete provided that a suitable rush-coat is applied before (Premix.SRC-2 or SRC-S).

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix manually or mechanically a 50 kg bag of Premix. SP-33 with 8 to 9 litres of clean cool Water until a homogeneous paste is obtained. Let the mix rest for a few minutes. If a spraying machine is used, the mixing is carried out automatically.

Premix.SP-33 can be applied traditionally by hand or by using modern plaster-spraying machines. It should not be used on painted surfaces or floors. For the application on block walls, ceilings, concrete surfaces, bricks and for general filling up, it is recommended to use Premix.SP-1 or Premix.SP-11.

CURING

Protect the newly applied plaster from sunshine and wind. The new plaster has to be cured with water for at least three days by spraying 3 to 4 times daily.

Premix∙SP-33

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, washthoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

Edition: 07/11-A

CONSUMPTION

Approximately 1.6 kg per m² per 1 mm thickness.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS BS 5262: 1991 BS 5492: 1990 BS 4551: Part 2: 1998 ASTM C 150 ASTM C 926 ASTM C 897 EN 13914-1 EN 13914-2

PACKAGING

Premix.SP-33 is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

STORAGE

Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

416

417

Premix∙plaster ceiling

CEMENT BASED READY MIX PLASTER FOR CEILING

plaster ceiling to 7 to 8 liters clean water until homogeneous paste is obtained. Leave the mix a few minutes.

PRODUCT Premix.plaster ceiling is a fiber reinforced, grey cement based, factory blended mixture designed as a cement plaster base coat requiring only the addition of water on the job site. Due to its content in special additives, it allows better adhesion on ceiling surfaces. It is the product of choice when a superior cement plaster coating is desired. It has exceptional workability and the fiber reinforcing greatly reduce the possibility of cracking.

PRODUCT APPLICATION The plastering is levelled and finished like a usual plaster. For thickness more than 1 cm, apply in 2 coats. After levelling, let the product dry before finishing it with a synthetic sponge.

CURING

SCOPE OF USE

Protect the newly applied plaster from sunshine and wind. The new plaster has to be cured with water for at least three days by spraying 3 to 4 times daily.

Premix.plaster ceiling is particularly recommended to be applied on ceiling substrates such as: • Concrete & blocks • Fair faced concrete • Prefabricated concrete • Traditional cementitious plaster

NOTE

CONSUMPTION 1.6 kg per m² per 1 mm thickness.

CHARACTERISTICS

PACKAGING

Appearance M/V of powder Grain Size Composition

Premix.plaster ceiling is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

Wet mix life Superior bonding Greater crack resistance Resistance to fire as per BS EN 998 -1

Premix∙plaster ceiling

Grey Powder 1.50 ± 0.10 0.02 to 1.5 mm Portland cement, selected sand, fibers and additives < 1 hr

STORAGE Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

Class A1

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

DTU 26.1, DTU 20.1 & 23.1 (substrats). BS 5262:1991, BS 5492 : 1990, BS 4551 part 2 : 1998, ASTM C 150, ASTM C 926, ASTM C 897.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION All substrates must be clean, sound, dust free, and free from all traces of oil and laitance. The traces of mould joints must be levelled. In case of smooth surfaces, a spatter dash slurry coat should be made as a key, by using Premix.key coat. Let it dry 3 days before plastering application. Before application all surfaces must be dampened.

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix manually or mechanically a 50 kg bag of Premix

418

419

Premix∙plaster fiber

CEMENT BASED READY MIX PLASTER FOR CEILING

PRODUCT APPLICATION The plastering is applied manually with a plastering trowel, until 1.5 cm thickness per coat. After levelling, let the product dry before finishing it with a synthetic sponge.

PRODUCT Premix.plaster fiber is a fiber reinforced cement based ready mix plaster, to carry out traditional plastering works in a clean and speedy manner, while keeping a homogeneous mix. It allows better workability and curing. Due to its content in waterproofing additives, Premix.plaster fiber is particularly recommended for external uses.

CURING Protect the newly applied plaster from sunshine and wind. The new plaster has to be cured with water for at least three days by spraying 3 to 4 times daily.

SCOPE OF USE Premix.plaster fiber is particularly recommended for external applications. Associated substrates: • Concrete blocks, bricks, etc… • Fair faced concrete • Prefabricated concrete • Traditional cement based plaster

NOTE

YIELD Around 2 kg per m² per 1 mm thickness.

PACKAGING Premix.plaster fiber is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

CHARACTERISTICS

STORAGE

Appearance M/V of powder Grain Size Composition

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Wet mix life Compressive strength Resistance to fire as per BS EN 998 -1

Premix∙plaster fiber

Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

Grey Powder 1.39 around 0.02 to 1.5 mm Portland cement, selected sand, fibers and additives < 1 hr 10 MPa ± 2 Class A1

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

DTU 26.1, DTU 20.1 & 23.1 (substrates). BS 5262: 1991, BS 5492: 1990, BS 4551 part 2: 1998, ASTM C 150, ASTM C 926, ASTM C 897.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix manually or mechanically a 50 kg bag of Premix. plaster fiber to 9 to 10 lit. clean water until homogeneous paste is obtained. Leave the mix a few minutes.

420

421

Premix∙plaster hand

CEMENT BASED READY MIX PLASTER

let the product dry before finishing it with a synthetic sponge.

PRODUCT

Premix.plaster hand is a cement based ready mix plaster, to carry out traditional plastering works in a clean and speedy manner, while keeping a homogeneous mix. Due to its content in additives, it allows better workability and curing.

CURING Protect the newly applied plaster from sunshine and wind. The new plaster has to be cured with water for at least three days by spraying 3 to 4 times daily.

SCOPE OF USE

Premix.plaster hand may be applied on walls or ceilings on: • Concrete blocks, bricks, etc… • Fair faced concrete • Prefabricated concrete • Traditional cement based plaster

sole property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorized disclosure, use, dissemination or copying (either whole or partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit. Edition: 06/11-A **Available only in MENA

CONSUMPTION 1.7 kg per m² per 1 mm thickness.

PACKAGING Premix.plaster hand is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance M/V of powder Grain Size Composition

Wet mix life Resistance to fire as

Grey Powder 1.58 ± 0.10 0.02 to 1.5 mm Portland cement, selected sand, additives < 1 hr Class A1

STORAGE

Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

per BS EN 998 -1

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

DTU 26.1, DTU 20.1 & 23.1 (substrates). BS 5262: 1991, BS 5492: 1990, BS 4551 part 2: 1998, ASTM C 150, ASTM C 926, ASTM C 897.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix manually or mechanically a 50 kg bag of Premix. plaster hand with 8 to 9 liters of clean water until a homogeneous paste is obtained. Leave the mix a few minutes.

NOTE

PRODUCT APPLICATION The plastering is applied manually with a plastering trowel, until 1.5 cm thickness per coat. After levelling,

The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the

422

423

Premix∙plaster spray

CEMENT BASED READY MIX SPRAYABLE PLASTER

plaster. For thickness more than 1.5cm, apply in 2 coats. After levelling, let the product dry before finishing it with a synthetic sponge.

PRODUCT

Premix.plaster spray is a cementitious ready mix plaster, to carry out traditional plastering works in a clean and speedy manner, while keeping a homogeneous mix. Due to its content in additives, it allows better workability and curing.

CURING Protect the newly applied plaster from sunshine and wind. The new plaster has to be cured with water for at least three days by spraying 3 to 4 times daily.

SCOPE OF USE

Premix.plaster spray is particularly recommended for application by spraying machine. These machines can be supplied by our company. It may be applied even on walls or ceilings on the following substrates: • Concrete blocks, bricks, etc… • Fair faced concrete • Prefabricated concrete • Traditional cementitious plaster

Wet mix life Resistance to fire as

NOTE

CONSUMPTION 1.6 kg per m² per 1 mm thickness.

PACKAGING Premix.plaster spray is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

STORAGE Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance M/V of powder Grain Size Composition

Premix∙plaster spray

Grey Powder 1.52 ± 0.10 0.02 to 1.5 mm Portland cement, selected sand, additives < 1 hr Class A1

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

per BS EN 998 -1

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

DTU 26.1, DTU 20.1 & 23.1 (substrates). BS 5262: 1991, BS 5492: 1990, BS 4551 part 2: 1998, ASTM C 150, ASTM C 926, ASTM C 897.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

PRODUCT PREPARATION Premix.plaster spray is mixed and applied on the surface by using special spraying machine. The dosage of water may be 7 to 8 liters clean water per 50 kg bag. PRODUCT APPLICATION The plastering is levelled and finished like a usual

424

425

Premix∙plaster thick

READY MIXED BROWN COAT PLASTER

ranging from 10 to 20 mm in one layer. Level the surface with an aluminium feather edge, wooden or steel float as required. Let the product set properly on the surface before any curing. If more thickness is required, the application should be done in two layers. The 1st layer should be roughened then cured. The 2nd layer should be applied at least 48 hrs after the 1st one. A skim coat could be applied on top of the Premix. plaster thick if better finishing is required. Contact company technical department for advice on finishing products.

PRODUCT Premix.plaster thick is a cementitious ready mix plaster used for traditional plastering works when a high thickness of plaster is required to level the surface. Due to its content in additives, it allows better shrinkage control as well as improved workability and curing. Premix.plaster thick is recommended for external and internal plastering on masonry block walls, concrete surfaces, bricks and for general filling up. Premix.plaster thick can be applied traditionally by hand or by using plaster-spraying machines. it should not be used on ceiling or floors.

CURING

Protect the newly applied plaster from sunshine and wind. The new plaster has to be cured with water for at least three days by spraying 3 to 4 times daily.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Mixing ratio Grain Size Composition Wet mix life Resistance to fire as per BS EN 998 -1

Grey Powder 7.5 - 8.5 Liter / 50 kg bag 0 to 4 mm Portland cement, selected sand, specific additives Approx. 2 hours at 20°C Class A1

NOTE

CONSUMPTION Approximately 1.6 kg per m² per 1 mm thickness.

PACKAGING Premix.plaster thick is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

STORAGE

BS 5262:1991, BS 5492 : 1990, BS 4551 part 2 : 1998, ASTM C 150, ASTM C 926, ASTM C 897.

Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION The substrate must be clean, sound, free from dust and all traces of oil and laitance. A scratch coat (Premix.key coat, SRC-1, SRC-2 or SCRC-S) should be applied as a key coat for improved bonding and adhesion of subsequent layers. A few hours before the application of Premix. plaster thick, dampen the scratch coat with clean water.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix manually or mechanically a 50 kg bag of Premix. plaster thick with 7.5 to 8.5 liters of clean water until a homogeneous paste is obtained. Let the mix rest for a few minutes. If a spraying machine is used, the mixxing is carried out automatically. PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply the plaster on the prepared surface by spraying it or manually with a plastering trowel at a thickness

DISCLAIMER

While the company guarantees its products against defective materials, the use and application of these products are made without guarantee since the conditions of their

426

427

Premix∙SGP-1

GYPSUM BASED READY MIXED PLASTER

CONSUMPTION

PRODUCT

Premix.SGP-1 is a ready mixed plaster based on hemi-hydrated gypsum, suitable for interior plastering by machine or manually. Premix.SGP-1 allows a smooth finish, with an easy application.

1.3 kg per m² per 1 mm thickness.

PACKAGING Premix.SGP-1 is packed in 40kg paper bags.

SCOPE OF USE • • • •

STORAGE

Fair faced concrete Bloc masonry Old cement based plaster Plasterboard

Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Grain Size Setting Time Density of Hardened Product Compressive strength Composition

Off-white Powder 0 to 1mm Around 2 hours 30 minutes 1.3 > 3 MPa at 28 days Gypsum, selected sand and fillers, additives

DISCLAIMER

VOC and Formadehyde ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS None (< 10µg/l)

APPLICABLE STANDARDS ASTM C 28, EN 13279- part 1

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION Substrates must be sound, clean, dust free and free from all traces of oil and laitance. Few hours before apply, dampen the support.

NOTE

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix a 40 kg bag with 12 to 14 liters of water in order to obtain a homogeneous paste.

PRODUCT APPLICATION Premix.SGP-1 may be applied manually or by using a plastering machine. Each layer should not exceed 1.5 cm. Once applied on the surface, the product must be leveled and smoothed out with a rule and a metal trowel. To finish the surface, wait till the Premix.SGP-1 begins to thicken and smooth the surface with an American trowel. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC.

Edition: 05/10-A

Premix∙SGP-2

GYPSUM BASED READY MIXED FINISHING COAT

original packaging, non open and in dry area.

PRODUCT

Premix.SGP-2 is a ready mixed render based on hemihydrated gypsum. It’s used for finishing interior cement or gypsum based plaster prior painting.

SCOPE OF USE

• Gypsum based plaster • Cement based plaster

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Off-white Powder Grain Size 0 to 0.5mm Setting Time Around 2 hours 30 minutes Dried Density 1.2 Composition Gypsum, selected fillers, additives

DISCLAIMER

APPLICABLE STANDARDS ASTM C 28

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION Substrates must be sound, clean, dust free and free from all traces of oil and laitance. Few hours before apply, dampen the support.

NOTE

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix a 40 kg bag with 20 liters of water in order to obtain a homogeneous paste.

Edition: 08/08-A

PRODUCT APPLICATION Premix.SGP-2 may be applied manually with a steel trowel. Once applied on the surface, the product must be leveled and smoothed before drying. As Premix.SGP-2 is a finishing coat, thickness of application should not exceed 3 mm. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC.

CONSUMPTION

1.3 kg per m² per 1mm thickness.

PACKAGING Premix.SGP-2 is packed in 40kg paper bags.

STORAGE

Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its

428

429

Premix∙bloc fix

MOUNTING AND GAP FILLING MORTAR FOR HOLLOW BLOCKS AND BRICKS CURING

PRODUCT

Premix.bloc fix is a ready mix mortar that requires only the addition of water. It is made of cement, graded sand and additives for improved workability, better bonding and water retention. Premix.bloc fix is particularly adapted for mounting regular/hollow blocks, stones, and bricks and to fill gaps between concrete and bricks.

Protect the newly applied material from sunshine and wind. The new material has to be cured with water for at least three days by spraying 3 to 4 times daily.

YIELD

1000 kg of Premix.bloc fix with 13% of clean cool water will give around 550 liters of workable mortar. A 50 kg bag = 27 liters approx. of fresh mortar.

CHARACTERISTICS

PACKAGING

Composition Cement, graded sand, additives Appearance Grey Powder Mix Density 1.95 kg/lit Grain Size Up to 4mm Thickness after fixing 1 to 2 cm the bloc Pull off strength at 28 > 0.3 MPa days (BS 1881 part 207) Compressive strength-BS- 13 Mpa at 28 days EN 196-1-1994 VOC and Formadehyde None (< 10µg/l) ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS Resistance to fire as Class A1 per BS EN 998 -2, 2003

Premix.bloc fix is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

STORAGE

Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water . If swallowed, do not induce vomiting in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION The surface should be clean, sound and free from any powder or greasy matter. It must not be overheated not frozen. In hot weather, the surface receiving Premix.bloc fix should be brushed with some water immediately prior to the application.

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT PREPARATION Premix.bloc fix should be mixed using a low-speed mechanical mixer with 6 to 7 liters of clean water per 50 kg bag, to obtain a homogeneous paste. If necessary, Adjust consistency by adding water without excess.

NOTE

PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply Premix.bloc fix on the blocks using a trowel. Place the blocks onto the mortar ensuring good contact. Check the level and continue with the next block. Remove excess material with a wet sponge before setting. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC.

Premix∙bloc fix A

BLOCK AND BRICK MASONRY LAYING MORTAR

wind. The new material has to be cured with water for at least three days by spraying 3 to 4 times daily.

PRODUCT

Premix.bloc fix A is a ready mix mortar that requires only the addition of water. It is made of cement, graded sand and additives for improved workability, better bonding and water retention. Premix.bloc fix A is particularly adapted for mounting regular/hollow blocks, stones, and bricks and to fill gaps between concrete and bricks. Premix.bloc fix A is available with or without lime, complying to different European and American standards like BS EN 998-1 and ASTM C 270. The material can be designed to suit any type or class of these two standards.

YIELD

1000 kg of Premix.bloc fix A with 12 % of clean cool water will give around 670 liters of workable mortar. A 50 kg bag = 33 liters approx. of fresh mortar.

PACKAGING

Premix.bloc fix A is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

STORAGE

Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CHARACTERISTICS

The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water . If swallowed, do not induce vomiting in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

Composition Cement, graded sand, additives Appearance Grey Powder Mix Density 1.66 Kg/lit Grain Size up to 4mm Thickness after fixing 1 to 2 mm the bloc Resistance to fire as Class A1 per BS EN 998 -2, 2003

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION The surface should be clean, sound and free from any powder or greasy matter. It must not be overheated not frozen. In hot weather, the surface receiving Premix.bloc fix A should be brushed with some water immediately prior to the application.

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT PREPARATION Premix.bloc fix A should be mixed using a lowspeed mechanical mixer with clean cool water in the proportion of 6 lit. per 50 kg bag.

NOTE

PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply Premix.bloc fix A on the blocks using a trowel. Place the blocks onto the mortar ensuring good contact. Check the level and continue with the next block. Remove excess material with a wet sponge before setting. Ideal application temperature is between +5ºC and +35ºC.

CURING

Protect the newly applied material from sunshine and

430

431

Premix∙bloc fix LW

MOUNTING MORTAR FOR LIGHT WEIGHT BLOCKS

PRODUCT

for at least three days by spraying 3 to 4 times daily.

Premix.bloc fix LW is a ready mix mortar that requires only the addition of water. It is made of cement, graded sand and additives for improved workability, bonding and water retention. Premix.bloc fix LW is particularly adapted for mounting light weight blocks.

YIELD

1000 Kg of Premix.bloc fix LW plus approximately 24% of clean cool water will give between 700 and 750 liters of workable mortar. A 50 Kg bag = approx. 36 Liters of fresh mortar.

CHARACTERISTICS Color Composition Appearance Mix Density Grain Size Pull off strength at 28 days (BS 1881 part 207) Resistance to fire as per BS EN 998 -2, 2003

PACKAGING

Grey / White Cement, graded sand, additives Powder 1.6 ± 0.05 maximum 0.6mm > 0.35 MPa

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix a 50 kg bag of Premix.bloc fix LW with 10 to 12 liters of potable cool water. Mixing has to be done with a mechanical mixer.

NOTE

CURING

Edition: 08/11-A

Protect the newly applied material from sunshine and wind. The new material has to be cured with water

432

YIELD

1000 Kg of Premix.bloc fix LW plus approximately 16% of clean cool water will give around 650 liters of workable mortar. A 50 kg bag = approx. 32 liters of fresh mortar.

CHARACTERISTICS

STORAGE

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply Premix.bloc fix LW to the light weight blocks using a notched trowel to approximately 3 to 5 mm thickness. Place the blocks onto the mortar ensuring good contact. Check the level and continue with the next block. Remove excess material with a wet sponge before setting. Care should be taken in order not to mount blocks if a dry skin has already formed on the freshly-applied mortar. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC.

for at least three days by spraying 3 to 4 times daily.

Premix.bloc fix LW-B is a ready mix mortar that requires only the addition of water. It is made of cement, lime, graded sand and additives for improved workability, bonding and water retention. Premix.bloc fix LW-B is particularly adapted for mounting light weight bricks.

Appearance Mix Density Grain Size Pull off strength at 28 days (BS 1881 part 207) Compressive strength Approx. 8 Mpa at 28 days (BS 6319) Resistance to fire as Class A1 per BS EN 998 -2, 2003

The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water . If swallowed, do not induce vomiting in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

SURFACE PREPARATION The substrate must be clean, sound, and free from dust and all traces of oil and laitance. It must not be over heated nor frozen. In hot weather, the surface receiving Premix.bloc fix LW should be brushed with some water immediately prior to application.

PRODUCT

Composition

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

MOUNTING MORTAR FOR LIGHT WEIGHT BRICKS

Premix.bloc fix LW is packed in 50 kg paper bags. Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

Class A1

Premix∙bloc fix LW B

PACKAGING

Cement, lime, graded sand, additives Grey Powder 1.8 ± 0.05 maximum 1.5mm > 0.3 MPa

Premix.bloc fix LW-B is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

STORAGE

Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water . If swallowed, do not induce vomiting in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION The substrate must be clean, sound, and free from dust and all traces of oil and laitance. It must not be over heated nor frozen. In hot weather, the surface receiving Premix.bloc fix LW-B should be brushed with some water immediately prior to application.

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix a 50 kg bag of Premix.bloc fix LW-B with 7.5 to 8.5 liters of potable cool water. Mixing has to be done with a mechanical mixer.

PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply Premix.bloc fix LW-B to the light weight bricks using a notched trowel to approximately 10 mm thickness. Place the bricks onto the mortar ensuring good contact. Check the level and continue with the next brick. Remove excess material with a wet sponge before setting. Care should be taken in order not to mount blocks if a dry skin has already formed on the freshly-applied mortar. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC.

NOTE

CURING

Protect the newly applied material from sunshine and wind. The new material has to be cured with water

Edition: 08/11-A

433

Premix∙bloc fix N

Premix∙bloc fill RM

BLOCK AND BRICK LAYING MORTAR

CORE FILL GROUT FOR CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS The new material has to be cured with water for at least three days by spraying 3 to 4 times daily.

PRODUCT

Premix.bloc fix N is a ready mix mortar that requires only the addition of water. It is made of cement, graded sand and additives for improved workability, better bonding and water retention. Premix.bloc fix N is particularly adapted for mounting regular/hollow blocks, stones, and bricks and to fill gaps between concrete and bricks.

YIELD

1000 kg of Premix.bloc fix N with 12 % of clean cool water will give around 670 liters of workable mortar. A 50 kg bag = 33 liters approx. of fresh mortar.

PACKAGING CHARACTERISTICS

Premix.bloc fix N is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

Composition Cement sand ratio

STORAGE

Cement, graded sand, additives 1:6 Various other mix ratio can be designed depends on project specification Grey Powder 1.66 Kg/lit up to 4mm 1 to 2 cm

Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Appearance Wet Density Grain Size Thickness after fixing the bloc Compressive strength-BS 8 MPa at 28 days -EN 196-1-1994 Comply to ASTM C 270-Type N and EN 998-2, class M5 Resistance to fire as Class A1 per BS EN 998 -2, 2003

The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water . If swallowed, do not induce vomiting in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

DISCLAIMER

SURFACE PREPARATION The surface should be clean, sound and free from any powder or greasy matter. It must not be over-heated not frozen. In hot weather, the surface receiving Premix.bloc fix N should be brushed with some water immediately prior to the application.

PRODUCT PREPARATION Premix.bloc fix N should be mixed using a low-speed mechanical mixer with clean cool water in the proportion of 6 lit. per 50 kg bag. PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply Premix.bloc fix N on the blocks using a trowel. Place the blocks onto the mortar ensuring good contact. Check the level and continue with the next block. Remove excess material with a wet sponge before setting. Ideal application temperature is between +5ºC and +35ºC.

NOTE

CURING

PRODUCT

Premix.bloc fill RM grout has to be cured with water for at least 3 days by spraying 3 to 4 times daily. Curing should start the next day from application.

Premix.bloc fill RM is a pre-blended mix containing cementitous materials, graded aggregates and additives for improved workability. It is particularly designed to fill masonry voids meeting the ASTM C 476 requirements for reinforced masonry construction. It is a fluid materials used to bond together adjacent masonry units and steel reinforcement in the cores of masonry units to the masonry assemblage. Premix.bloc fill RM may be used in the cells in block construction that have enough space in both horizontal dimensions. Always check project specifications to assure proper product selection has been made.

YIELD

A 50 kg bag = 25 liters approx. of fresh mortar.

PACKAGING

Premix.bloc fill RM is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

STORAGE

Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

CHARACTERISTICS Composition Appearance Wet Density Grain size Compressive strength BS-1881-part 116 Resistance to fire as per BS EN 998

Cement, graded sand, addtivities Grey powder 2.23 kg/lit Up to 5 mm 25 MPA at 28 days Class A1

AVANTAGES

DISCLAIMER

• No site pre-blending required (water is the only additive • Quality controlled • Consistent performance • Increased productivity • No admixtures required

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

PRODUCT PREPARATION For best results, Premix.bloc fill RM should be mixed using a low-speed mechanical mixer with clean cool water in the proportion of 5 to 6 lit. per 50 kg bag.

NOTE

PRODUCT APPLICATION Transport Premix.bloc fill RM grout from the mixer to the point of deposit in the grout space as rapidly as practical by means and methods which will preventsegregation of the mix. Place the grout into cores of masonry making sure to completely fill all voids.

Ideal application temperature is between +5ºC and +35ºC.

Edition: 08/11-A

Protect the newly applied material from sunshine and wind.

434

435

Premix∙custom mix

READY MIX MORTAR FOR BUILDING WALLS AND FOUNDATIONS The micro concrete should be poured within 15 to 20 minutes. Keep the surface damp for the first seven days.

PRODUCT

Premix.custom mix is a ready-to-use mortar consisting of a uniformly blended, properly proportioned mixture of aggregates, sand, Portland cement and other additives to improve workability and performance. The product is specially designed for mounting and fixing randomly cut natural stones.

PACKAGING Premix.custom mix is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

STORAGE

A micro concrete with consistent quality can be produced by adding 12 mm aggregates.

Premix.custom mix can be stored 6 months in its original packaging, in a dry location, away from extreme temperatures.

SCOPE OF USE • • • •

Mounting stones and gap filling Foundation walls and footings Sidewalks, curbs, steps, ramps and walkways Floor slabs and patios

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water . If swallowed, do not induce vomiting in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Grey Powder Free from chlorides and metallic particles Powder Density 1.67 Grain Size up to 5mm Compressive strength After 28 days the micro concrete can achieve strength of around 25 MPa Resistance to fire as Class A1 per BS EN 998 -1

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION The surface should be clean, sound and free from any greasy matter. Saturate the surface with water by copiously spraying just before pouring the micro concrete. PRODUCT PREPARATION The Premix.custom mix should be prepared using a mechanical mixer. Mix the 50 kg bag with 6 to 7 liters of clean water until homogeneous paste is obtained. Apply Premix.custom mix using a trowel.

NOTE

MICRO CONCRETE A bag of 50 kg Premix.custom mix would require about 7 liters of water and 25 kg of 12 mm aggregates and 150 ml of Admix CF 40.

436

Primer 500 GYP

SYNTHETIC BASED PRIMER

PRODUCT

STORAGE

Primer 500 GYP is a co-polymer acrylic emulsion designed to prime absorbent concrete and gypsum substrates prior to the application of gypsum plaster. Primer 500 GYP prevents over-rapid absorption of water into the substrate and prolongs trowelability time.

Primer 500 GYP has high storage stability from -20°C to +45°C. Stir always before use. Can be stored up to 6 months after manufacturing date, in original packaging.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SCOPE OF USE

For priming of substrates made of concrete, gypsum and cement based rendering and foamed concrete blocks.

CHARACTERISTICS Density Drying Time

Approx. 1 kg / lit. 1/2 to 2 hours depending on application rate and climatic conditions

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION The substrate must be perfectly sound, clean, dry and free from grease, oil, dust or any friable matters. PRODUCT PREPARATION Shake container well before use. Apply the primer evenly, using a brush, roller or small broom, over the sound, clean and dust-free surface and leave to dry to a clear thin film before applying the gypsum plaster.

NOTE

It is important that the primer fill every square inch of the substrate to ensure a solid bond of the gypsum plaster. Avoid forming of puddles. Extremely porous substrates may require two priming coats. Clean tools with water when wet.

COVERAGE

Edition: 06/11-A

is supplied in 5, 15 or 20 liters pails.

Edition: 10/10-A

100 to 300 ml/m2 depending on the roughness and absorbency of the substrate.

PACKAGING

437

Premix∙fine finish

PUTTY FOR CEMENT BASED SUBSTRATE RESURFACING

STORAGE

PRODUCT

Premix.fine finish is a pre mixed white powder. It is used to achieve proper smoothening of concrete surface and to eliminate irregularities of concrete, bubbles, honey combs or cracks. It can be applied on both, Interior and exterior walls and ceilings. It has better compatibility with the base plaster and forms a durable base for paints.

Can be store up to 6 months from manufacturing date in original non open packaging, in a dry ventilated area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water . If swallowed, do not induce vomiting in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

ADMISSIBLE SUBSTRATES Any kind of cement based substrate.

ASSOCIATED FINISHES • Paints • Plastic decorative coating • Wall paper

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Bulk Density Composition Wet mix life

White Powder 1.17 Synthetic resins, mineral charges and additives Around 1 hour at 20ºC

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION Substrates must be clean, sound, dust free and free from all traces of oil and laitance. Traces of mould joints must be levelled.

NOTE

PRODUCT PREPARATION The Premix.fine finish paste is obtained by mixing a 20 kg bag with arround 8 litres of clean cool water, using a suitable mixer. The paste should be mixed vigorously until it is fully homogeneous.

Edition: 04/11-A

PRODUCT APPLICATION Product is applied using a stainless steel trowel or stucco blade. Surfacing is obtained with one or several passes depending on requested finish. In hot weather, it is recommended to moisten the substrate prior the application. Clean tools with water immediately after use. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC.

Premix∙skim coat

HIGH QUALITY CEMENTITIOUS RENDERING

texture is achieved. Sprinkle with water if necessary for better workability. In hot weather, it is recommended to moisten the substrate prior the application. Clean tools with water immediately after use. Ideal application temperature is between +5ºC and +35º C. In hot weather, it is recommended to cure with water the applied skim coat for two continuous days.

PRODUCT

Premix.skim coat is a high quality pre-blended, cementitious rendering material specifically designed for finishing rendering of the base coat prior to application of various finishes. It can be applied on both, Interior and exterior walls and ceilings. It has better compatibility with the base plaster and forms a durable base for paints. Premix.skim coat has Superior application and adhesion properties when compared to conventional sand and cement render. It is easy to apply and being pumpable can offer economies in time and labors.

PACKAGING

Premix.skim coat is packed in 25 kg bags or 50 kg bags.

ADMISSIBLE SUBSTRATES

STORAGE

Any kind of cement based substrate.

Can be stored for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

ASSOCIATED FINISHES

• Paints • Synthetics decorative coating • Wall paper • Cement based decorative coating

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Bulk density Composition Wet mix life

White or Grey Powder Approx 1.2 Synthetic resins, mineral charges and additives Around 1 hour at 20ºC

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION Substrates must be clean, sound, dust free and free from all traces of oil and laitance. Traces of mould joints must be levelled. Before the application the substrate must be sufficiently cured in a way that any shrinkage has already occurred.

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT PREPARATION The Premix.skim coat paste is obtained by mixing a 50 kg bag with 10 to 11.25 litres of clean cool water (mix 5 to 5.6 liters of water with 25 kg bag), using a suitable mixer. Mix up to 3 minutes, to a uniform, lump-free consistency. Avoid over mixing which could entrap air. Once mixed, the working time will depend upon material, ambient and surface conditions.

NOTE

PRODUCT APPLICATION Premix.skim coat can be applied between 2-5mm thicknesses in one layer. It is applied using a stainless steel trowel or stucco blade. Let sit until almost dry. Using a sponge float, float the material until a fine sand

PACKAGING Premix.custom mix is packed in 50 kg paper bags.

438

Edition: 05/11-A

439

REPAIR PRODUCTS CEMENT-BASED MORTARS Conrep.301 GA *Conrep.301 SR Conrep.301 HCS Conrep.302 HF Conrep.303 HFG Conrep.304 VHS Conrep.311 MC Conrep.311 MC-HCS Conrep.313 EHS Conrep.314 RD Conrep.318 FD Conrep.331 TX Conrep.331 HCS Conrep.332 FR **Conrep.335 NSR Conrep.345 NSM Conrep.350 NSG Conrep.360 FFR Conrep.370 PF **Supermix

Non shrink mortar for grouting and anchoring Sulfate resistant non shrink mortar for grouting and anchoring Non shrink very high strength mortar Highly fluid expansive mortar for bedding and anchoring Highly fluid grout Very high strength shrinkage compensated grout Non shrink micro concrete for grouting and general void filling (pile head repair) Non shrink dyrable micro concrete for structural repair and general void filling (pile head repair) High performance self levelling micro concrete for pile head, screed and general filling High early strength and fast setting filling mortar with fiber Rapid hardening high alumina cement Non-shrink thixotropic repair mortar with fiber Non shrink high strength thixotropic repair mortar Non-shrink thixotropic fine repair mortar with fiber Non-shrink repair mortar Non-shrink two component cementitious mortar for repair Non-shrink mortar for repair and grouting Pre-mixed cementitious paste for fair face repair Two component cement based corrosion protection and bonding agent General purpose mortar, with accelerated early setting

445 448 450 452 455 457 459 461 463 465 467 469 471 473 475 477 479 481 483 484

ACRYLIC-BASED PUTTIES Conrep.321 PA **Conrep.365 PY

Fair face concrete putty Ready to use putty for smoothening internal surfaces

*Available only in GCC **Available only in MENA

440

441

485 486

EPOXY-BASED PRODUCTS Conrep.410 RSA Conrep.420 SC Conrep.430 GRT Conrep.440 PR Conrep.450 PC

BITUMINOUS LIQUID MEMBRANES

Epoxy mortar for repair, sealing and anchoring Epoxy repair and resurfacing floor compound Three component epoxy repair self - leveling grout Epoxy mortar for lining and patch repair Epoxy mortar for pile caping system

487 489 491 493 495

Waterproof.prime SB Waterproof.prime WB *Waterproof.RBE **Waterproof.RBE- L *Waterproof.RBV *Waterproof.SSP 50

Solvent based bitumen primer Cold applied bitumen primer Rubberized bitumen emulsion Rubberized bitumen emulsion Rubberized bitumen emulsion Waterproofing rubberized bitumen emulsion

539 541 542 544 545 547

RELATED REPAIR PRODUCTS Conrep.501 ZRP Conrep.510 CMA Conrep.550 CFL

Heavy duty anti-corrosive zinc rich primer Cold mix asphalt Carbon fiber laminate

497 499 500

ANCHORING RESINS

EPOXY-BASED ANCHORING RESINS Conrep.405 BFX Conrep.411 EPT Conrep.412 CRY

Pure epoxy anchoring resin in cartridge Solvent free epoxy filling compound Two-component epoxy bonding paste & fairing coat

501 508 510

POLYURETHANE LIQUID MEMBRANES Waterproof.310 PU primer Waterproof.350 PU Waterproof.360 PU Waterproof.370 BPU Waterproof.380 PU Clear Waterproof.390 PU

Deep penetrating polyurethane primer Liquid applied polyurethane waterproofing membrane UV resistant Liquid applied polyurethane waterproofing membrane Liquid-applied bitumen, polyurethane waterproofing membrane Transparent, liquid - applied polyurethane waterproofing membrane One component cold applied moisture curing polyurethane waterproofing coating

549 550 552 554 556 559

COAL TAR LIQUID MEMBRANES Waterproof.TAR ESB Waterproof.TAR ESF

High build solvent-based coal tar epoxy coating High build solvent-free coal tar epoxy coating

561 563

OTHER ANCHORING RESINS Conrep.435 ANC

High performance solvent & styrene-free epoxy acrylate-based anchoring resin

512

CEMENT-BASED FLEXIBLE WATERPROOFING COATINGS Waterproof.110/120 FX Waterproof.116/126 FX Waterproof.136/146 FX

WATERPROOFING PRODUCTS

Waterproof.130/140 PR

Self.AD 4mm

SBS modified bituminous membrane - plain SBS modified bituminous membrane for roof garden SBS modified bituminous membrane - slated SBS modified bituminous membrane - plain APP modified bituminous membrane - plain APP modified bituminous membrane - plain Syria only APP modified bituminous membrane - slated APP modified bituminous membrane with double reinforcements Damp proofing modified bitumen membrane Protection board A pre-fabricated reinforced multi-ply waterproofing for sturctural concrete A pre-fabricated reinforced multi-ply waterproofing for sturctural concrete

516 520 518 522 524 528 526 530 532 537 533 535

Cement based waterproof coating

442

570

CEMENT-BASED PLUGGING MORTARS Waterproof.150 BLC

Fast setting cementitious plugging mortar

572

SURFACE WATER REPELLENTS Waterproof.132 WB Waterproof.190 PA

Water based surface water repellen Poly-siloxane oligomer-based Surface water repellent

*Available only in GCC **Available only in MENA

565 567 568

CEMENT-BASED WATERPROOFING COATINGS

BITUMINOUS MEMBRANES Biflex.PL Biflex.PL anti-root 4mm Biflex.SL **Uniflex.PL 3 mm Biplas.PL 4 mm **Biplas.PL 3 & 4 mm Biplas.SL 4 mm Biplon.PL 4 & 5 mm Damp.PC Proboard Self.AD

Flexible high-performance cement based waterproof coating Flexible cement based acrylic waterproof coating Flexible cement based waterproof coating

443

574 576

Conrep∙301 GA

NON SHRINK MORTAR FOR GROUTING AND ANCHORING ACRYLIC-BASED WATERPROOFING COATINGS Waterproof.210 AFC

Mono-component acrylic-based flexible waterproof coating

578

RELATED WATERPROOFING PRODUCTS GEOTEXTILES Geotextile.800 P Geotextile.TS

High-thickness non-woven geotextile for soil stabilisation Non-woven geotextile

579 580

WATER STOPS Waterstops Swellbar

Waterstops for construction and expansion joints Waterproof sealing of construction joints

582 584

Soil stabilizer

585

SOIL STABILIZERS Soilex.200

JOINT SEALANTS

POLYSULPHIDE JOINT SEALANTS Jointseal.prime PS Jointseal.PS 1000 GG/PG/SW Jointseal.PS 2000 JF

Primer for polysulphide sealant Two component polysulphide joint sealant, gun grade, pouring grade, sewage Two part cold applied elastomeric polysulphide jet fuel resistant joint sealant for concrete pavements

586 587 591

POLYURETHANE JOINT SEALANTS Jointseal.PU Jointseal.PU 2000 Jointseal.PU 2010 *Jointseal.PU MC

One component polyurethane sealant Two component pitch polyurethane sealant Two component polyurethane sealant One component polyurethane sealant and adhesive

593 595 597 600

Cold applied asphaltic mastic sealant Fuel resistant sealant Joint sealant based on ms-hybrid polymer

602 604 605

RELATED JOINTSEAL PRODUCTS HBR.Backing ROD

ADVANTAGES

Conrep.301 GA is a ready-to-use polymer modified mortar made of selected aggregates, special cement and additives. It can be used where high compressive strength is required. Conrep.301 GA is specially formulated to produce a shrinkage compensating mortar with excellent adhesion.

• Non-shrinking • High strength • Easy to apply • Resistant to sea water and sulfates • Liquid or plastic consistency • Excellent shock & vibration resistance

SCOPE OF USE

• Assembly of pre-cast parts made of reinforced or pre-stressed concrete • Anchoring of steel bars • Jointing • Keying bridges • Fixing industrial equipment and heavy machinery, mounting plates • Vertical shoring • Filling of shutter tie rod hole openings

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Grey Powder Grain Size 0 to 3 mm Free from chlorides and metallic particles Chloride permeability Low (ASTM C 1202) Conrep.301 GA complies test for compatibility with with the BS 6920 Part 2.6: 2000 potable water. Water absorption (BS 1881 P122) Fresh density ASTM C 185- 02 section 5.2 VOC and Formadehyde ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS

APPLICABLE STANDARDS BS 6920 Part 2.6: 2000 BS 1881: Part 122 BS 6319: PART 3: 1983 BS 6319: PART 7: 1985 BS-EN 196-1: 1994 ASTM C 1202 ASTM C 185-02 section 5.2

1.7% 2.28

None (< 10µg/l)

*COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH 1 day

AGE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (N/mm²) – BS EN 196-1 at 22°C ± 1 Fluid consistency (1) Plastic consistency

22 35

7 days 37 50

(1) Results obtained with 3.5 liters water / 25 kg bag.

*FLEXURAL STRENGTH & TENSILE STRENGTH at 28 days

OTHER JOINT SEALANTS Jointseal.BIT Jointseal.FRS Jointseal.MS

PRODUCT

Extruded polyethylene backing rod foam

607

AGE

28 days

FLEXURAL STRENGTH (N/mm²) – BS EN 196-1at 22°C ± 1 Fluid consistency (1) Plastic consistency TENSILE STRENGTH (N/mm²) – BS 6319:PART 7: 1985

6 8 4.2

*The higher the curing temperature, the higher will be the strength at 24 hours. (1) Results obtained with 3.5 liters water / 25 kg bag.

*Available only in GCC **Available only in MENA

444

445

28 days 50 60

Conrep∙301 GA

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

exceed 20 cm, depth of hole will be determined by structural designer. Conrep.301 GA high fluid and non shrink properties ensure excellent anchoring/friction with soil/rocks.

SURFACE PREPARATION Conrep.301 GA may be applied on sound concrete, masonry, rock or similar materials. Remove damaged concrete and laitance by chipping with a pick or cold-chiselling to get a rough surface. The surface must also be free from any trace of grease or oil. Saturate the surface with water by copiously spraying just before application, and if possible, 6 hours before application as well.

If the application temperature is higher than 35 ºC, make sure to use cool water to keep the mixed grout temperature below 30 ºC.

NOTE

CURING

Protect the work against rapid drying from wind, sun and excessive heat by using a curing compound like Cure WH or Cure Y 40 or by covering with properly secured plastic sheeting.

MORTAR PREPARATION The slurry or mortar is obtained by mixing Conrep.301 GA with clean water. The amount of water used depends on the workability required. Add the powder to the water and mix for 3 minutes. To ensure a homogeneous and uniform mix, an electric mixer must be used. Do not mix with other hydraulic binders. The use of additives is prohibited.

PACKAGING

Conrep.301 GA is packed in: UAE: 50 kg bag. Other countries: 25 kg bag.

STORAGE

Mixing Conrep. 301 GA

WATER (1)

Conrep.301 GA can be stored 6 months in its original packaging, in a dry location, away from extreme tem-

VOLUME IN PLACE

peratures.

Plastic Consistency 50 Kg 5.75 lit. 25 lit. Fluid Consistency 50 Kg 7 to 8 lit. 25 lit. (1): Half quantity of water is required for 25 Kg package

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

For Anchoring: The hole diameter should be at least equal to the rod diameter plus 30 mm. Depth of holes: 10 to 15 times the diameter of the rod. Clean the areas, place bar in hole and fill the hole with Conrep.301 GA to full capacity. The dimensions of anchoring must not exceed 5 cm. For bigger anchoring, contact company’s technical department.

DISCLAIMER

For Grouting & Concrete Repair: Conrep.301 GA can be used for thickness up to 10 cm. Apply the mortar evenly on the concrete surface where required. Ideal application temperature is between +5C and + 35 C. Thickness above 10 cm can be practiced depending on the design of the repair job and level of steel reinforcement.

For Shoring/Soil Nailing Applications: Conrep.301 GA can be used for grouting the inclined holes in shoring application, hole diameter must not

the company’s office in your location.

446

447

Conrep∙301 SR

SULFATE RESISTANT NON SHRINK MORTAR FOR GROUTING AND ANCHORING ADVANTAGES

PRODUCT

• Non-shrinking • High strength • Easy to apply • Resistant to sea water and sulfates • Liquid or plastic consistency

Conrep.301 SR is a ready-to-use polymer modified sulfate resistant mortar made of selected aggregates, special cement and additives. It can be used where high compressive strength is required. Conrep.301 SR is specially formulated to produce a shrinkage compensating mortar with excellent adhesion.

CHARACTERISTICS SCOPE OF USE

Appearance Grey Powder Grain Size 0 to 3 mm Passing at 0.08 mm 38% Powder density 1.5 Free from chlorides and metallic particles Fresh density ASTM C 185-02 2.36 section 5.2

*SETTING TIME AT 20°C start of setting

end of setting

4 hrs 30 min

6 hrs 10 min

SETTING TIME *COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

28 days

AGE

COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (N/mm²) STANDARD

BS EN 196-1: 1994

*FLEXURAL STRENGTH & TENSILE STRENGTH at 28 days FLEXURAL STRENGTH (N/mm²) – BS EN 196-1: 1994

8.5

*Results obtained at plastic consistency: 12% water or 6 lit. per 50kg bag.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

grease or oil. Saturate the surface with water by copiously spraying just before application, and if possible, 6 hours before application as well.

BS-EN 196-1 ASTM C 403 ASTM C 185- 02 section 5.2

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

MORTAR PREPARATION The slurry or mortar is obtained by mixing Conrep.301 SR with clean water. The amount of water used depends on the workability required. Add the powder to the water and mix for 3 minutes. To ensure a homogeneous and uniform mix, an

SURFACE PREPARATION Conrep.301 SR may be applied on sound concrete, masonry, rock or similar materials. Remove damaged concrete and laitance by chipping with a pick or cold-chiselling to get a rough surface. The surface must also be free from any trace of

448

in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

Mixing

MORTAR SLURRY

Conrep. 301 SR

WATER (1)

VOLUME IN PLACE

50 Kg 50 Kg

6 lit. 7.5 to 8.5 lit.

26 lit. 28 lit.

DISCLAIMER

For Anchoring: The hole diameter should be at least equal to the rod diameter plus 30 mm. Depth of holes: 10 to 15 times the diameter of the rod. Clean the areas, place bar in hole and fill the hole with Conrep.301 SR to full capacity. The dimensions of anchoring must not exceed 5 cm. For bigger anchoring, contact company’s technical department.

NOTE

For Grouting & Concrete Repair: Conrep.301 SR can be used for thicknesses up to 5 cm. Apply the mortar evenly on the concrete surface where required. Use formwork in case of vertical repair. Ideal application temperature is between + 5°C and + 35°C. If the application temperature is higher than 35 ºC, make sure to use cool water to keep the mixed grout temperature below 30 ºC.

CURING 28 days

AGE

electric mixer must be used. Do not mix with other hydraulic binders. The use of additives is prohibited.

Protect the work against rapid drying from wind, sun and excessive heat by using a curing compound like Cure WH or Cure Y 40 or by covering with properly secured plastic sheeting.

PACKAGING

Conrep.301 SR is packed in: UAE: 50 kg bag. Other countries: 25 kg bag.

STORAGE

Conrep.301 SR can be stored 6 months in its original packaging, in a dry location, away from extreme temperatures.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done

449

Conrep∙301 HCS

NON SHRINK VERY HIGH STRENGTH MORTAR

• Anchoring of steel bars • Jointing • Keying bridges • Fixing industrial equipment and heavy machinery, mounting plates • Vertical shoring • Void filling operations • Excellent shock & vibration resistance

PRODUCT

Conrep.301 HCS is a blend of portland cement, special admixtures and proprietary aggregates designed to provide high flexural and compressive strength performance from plastic to fluid consistencies. Conrep.301 HCS is non-metallic, non-shrink, non-gas forming and contains no chlorides or aluminum powders. It is specialy used when repair of high strength concrete is required.

CHARACTERISTICS

ADVANTAGES

Appearance Grain Size Free from chlorides and metallic particles Fresh density (BS 1881:83) Lengthchange

• Non-shrinking • High strength • Easy to apply • Resistant to sea water and sulfates • Liquid or plastic consistency

SCOPE OF USE

Pull off stress

• Assembly of pre-cast parts made of reinforced or pre-stressed concrete

Grey Powder 0 to 3 mm

2340 kg/m³ 0.062 % @ 28 days (ASTM C157-03) > 1.5 N/mm² @ 28 days (BS 1881 Part 207)

*COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH AGE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (N/mm²) STANDARD

1 day

7 days

28 days

BS EN 196-1

*FLEXURAL STRENGTH & TENSILE STRENGTH at 28 days 28 days

AGE FLEXURAL STRENGTH (N/mm²) – BS EN 196 -1 TENSILE STRENGTH (N/mm²) – BS 6319:PART 7: 1985

7 3.8

*Results obtained at fluid consistency: 13.5% water or 6.75 lit. per 50 kg bag. The mechanical carateristics will be higher if the Conrep.301 HCS is mixed at plastic consistency: 11% water or 5.5 lit. per 50 kg bag. In this case, the compressive strength can exceed 80 MPa at 28 days.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

depends on the workability required.

BS EN 196 Part 1 BS 1881 Part 207 ASTM C 157-03 BS 6319 – Part 7- 1985 BS 1881: 83

Add the powder to the water and mix for 3 minutes. To ensure a homogeneous and uniform mix, an electric mixer must be used.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Mixing Conrep. 301 SR MORTAR

50 Kg

SLURRY

50 Kg

WATER (1) 5.5 lit. 6.255 to 6.75 lit.

Remove all water used in wetting support prior to installation of Conrep.301 HCS. Do not mix with other hydraulic binders.

VOLUME IN PLACE 26 lit.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

28 lit.

(1): Half quantity of water is required for 25 Kg package For Anchoring: The hole diameter should be at least equal to the rod diameter plus 30 mm. Depth of holes: 10 to 15 times the diameter of the rod. Clean the areas, place bar in hole and fill the hole with Conrep.301 HCS to full capacity. The dimensions of anchoring must not exceed 5 cm. For placements greater than 5 cm depth, Conrep.301 HCS must be extended by up to 30%, by weight, with clean, washed and dried 3/8” (1 cm) pea gravel. Do not blend excess water as this will cause bleeding and segregations. Do not use any other admixtures or additives.

DISCLAIMER

For Grouting & Concrete Repair: Conrep.301 HCS can be used for thicknesses up to 8 cm. Apply the mortar evenly on the concrete surface where required. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC. If the application temperature is higher than 35 ºC, make sure to use cool water to keep the mixed grout temperature below 30 ºC. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC. If the application temperature is higher than 35 ºC, make sure to use cool water to keep the mixed grout temperature below 30 ºC.

NOTE

CURING

Protect the work against rapid drying from wind, sun and excessive heat by using a curing compound like Cure WH or Cure Y 40 or by covering with properly secured plastic sheeting.

Edition: 09/10-A

PACKAGING

Conrep.301 HCS is packed in: 50 kg bag and 25 kg bag.

STORAGE

Conrep.301 HCS can be stored 6 months in its original packaging, in a dry location, away from extreme temperatures.

PRECAUTIONS

MORTAR PREPARATION The slurry or mortar is obtained by mixing Conrep.301 HCS with clean water. The amount of water used

Substrate must be sound and resistant. It should be saturated with water a few hours prior to installation.

450

451

Conrep∙302 HF

HIGHLY FLUID EXPANSIVE MORTAR FOR BEDDING AND ANCHORING • High early mechanical resistance • Good resistance to sea water & sulfated water • Easy application

PRODUCT

Conrep.302 HF is a ready-to-use polymer modified mortar made of sand, special cement and additives which provides unique characteristics.

CHARACTERISTICS

SCOPE OF USE

• Grouting industrial equipment and heavy machinery mountin plates • Bedding industrial equipment, construction posts, bars • Anchoring a wide range of fixings • Assembly of pre-cast parts made of reinforced or pre-stressed concrete, vertical shoring • Filling of shutter tie rod openings

ADVANTAGES • Expansive • Highly fluid

*COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (N/mm²) AGE 1 day COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (N/mm²) STANDARD

Appearance Grey Powder Grain Size 0 to 3 mm Passing at 0.08mm 48% Density 1.45 Chloride permeability Low (ASTM C 1202) Water absorption < 2% (BS 1881 P 122) Free from chlorides and metallic particles Fresh density ASTM C 2.33 185 - 02 section 5.2 VOC and Formadehyde ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS None (< 10µg/l)

7 days

28 days

30.5

55.2

72.7

BS 4551: PART 1: 1998

ASTM C 109: 99

*FLEXURAL STRENGTH (N/mm²) AGE

5 days

28 days

FLEXURAL STRENGTH (N/mm²) STANDARD

11.5 BS 4551: PART 1: 1998

*EXPANSION (%) AGE

Initial

EXPANSION (%) STANDARD

15 min 30 min 45 min 1 hour 2 hours 3 hours 0.5

1.5

1.9 2.8 ASTM C 940: 89

4.6

*Results obtained at fluid consistency under lab conditions at 23°C ± 2: 15% water or 7.5 lit. per 50 kg bag. The mechanical carateristics will be higher if the Conrep.302 HF is mixed at plastic consistency: 11% water or 5.5 lit. per 50 kg bag. In this case, the compressive strength can reach 80 MPa at 28 days.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS BS 6920: Part 1: 2001 BS 1881: Part 122 BS 4551: PART 1: 1998 ASTM C 109:99 ASTM C 1202 ASTM C 940: 89 ASTM C 185-02 section 5.2

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

MORTAR PREPARATION The slurry or mortar is obtained by mixing Conrep.302 HF with water. The amount of water used varies according to the workability required. Add the powder to the water and mix for 3 minutes. To ensure a homogeneous and uniform mix, an electric

452

where required. Ideal application temperature is between +5C and + 35 C. Thickness above 10 cm can be practiced depending on the design of the repair job and level of steel reinforcement.

mixer must be used. At the proper volumes, Conrep.302 HF may be used as a micro-concrete by mixing it with clean and water-saturated 3/8 aggregate to a plastic consistency. Do not mix with other hydraulic binders. The use of additives is absolutely prohibited. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC. If the application temperature is higher than 35 ºC, make sure to use cool water to keep the mixed grout temperature below 30 ºC.

For Shoring/Soil Nailing Applications: Conrep.302 HF can be used for grouting the inclined holes in shoring application, hole diameter must not exceed 20 cm, depth of hole will be determined by structural designer. Conrep.302 HF high fluid and expansion properties ensure excellent anchoring/friction with soil/rocks.

BEDDING Thoroughly scab the foundation, clean the area between the foundation and machine base-plate, as well as the anchor holes. Build a solid leak-proof formwork. Saturate the concrete foundation with water for at least few hours prior to pouring. Remove all residual water. Pour Conrep.302 HF continuously, in one direction to avoid air pockets (by gravity, loading, pumping, injection).

CURING

Protect the work against rapid drying from wind, sun and excessive heat by using a curing compound likeCure WH or Cure Y 40 or by covering with properly secured plastic sheeting.

DOSAGE

The choice of installation method depends on the grouting thickness and the length of the machine. The grouting thickness must be between 3 and 6 cm for a pure mortar. Larger thickness may be filled by a micro-concrete with the addition of 3/8 aggregate. Once the mortar starts to set, apply on its surface: • a curing compound. • or, if the configuration and the tightness of the forms allow it, pour 1 to 2 cm of cool water over the surface and leave it there until removal of forms.

Conrep.

3/8 AG-

302 HF

GREGATES

WATER (lit)

VOLUME INSTALLED

MORTAR

1 BAG

0 Lit.

5 to 6

25 Lit.

SLURRY MICRO-

OF 50 Kg

0 Lit. 20 Lit.

7 to 8 6

25 Lit. 36 Lit.

CONCRETE

PACKAGING

Conrep.302 HF is packed in: UAE: 50 Kg bag. Other Countries: 25 kg bag.

ANCHORING The hole diameter should be at least equal to the rod plus 30 mm. Depth of holes: 10 to 15 times the diameter of the rod. Clean the areas, place bar in hole and fill the hole with Conrep.302 HF to full capacity.

STORAGE

The dimensions of anchoring must not be above 5 cm. For bigger anchoring, it is recommended to use Conrep.302 HF-microconcrete.

Material can be stored for 6 months in its original packaging, in a dry location, away from extreme temperatures.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

For Grouting and Concrete Repair: Conrep.302 HF can be used for thickness up to 10 cm. Apply the mortar evenly on the concrete surface

453

Conrep∙302 HF

Conrep∙303 HFG

water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

PRODUCT

HIGHLY FLUID GROUT

add remaining water. Continue to mix for a total of 3 to 5 minutes or to uniform consistency. Mix only the amount of grout that can be placed in 20 to 30 minutes. Do not mix by hand Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC. If the application temperature is higher than 35 C, make sure to use cool water to keep the mixed grout temperature below 30 C.

Conrep.303 HFG is a ready to use, free flowing, and blended cementitious powder. It requires only the addition of water in a high shear mixer, to produce a free flowing grout. Conrep.303 HFG is high strength, highly fluid, controlled expansive grout with superior dynamic load stability. It has been designed for grouting post tension cable and a wide range of other anchoring systems. Conrep.303 HFG provides corrosion protection for highly stressed steel cables, rods and many other systems. This unique shrinkage compensating system in Conrep.303 HFG guarantees controlled positive expansion in all directions. The positive expansion of Conrep.303 HFG remains constant throughout the life of the grout.

DISCLAIMER

Placing Place the Conrep.303 HFG in accordance with guide specification for post-tensioning structures. Contact our technical department for more details.

PACKAGING Conrep.303 HFG is packed in 20 kg paper bag.

PROPERTIES

NOTE

STORAGE

• high early strength • Non shrink, unique expansion system compensates for shrinkage • Excellent pumpability • Economical, high strength gain at significantly lower cost compared to resin grouts • Durability, high ultimate strength and low porosity ensure long term life • Does not contain metallic iron: no risk of corrosion or deterioration due to rust expansion in the grout

Can be store up to 6 months from manufacturing date in original non open packaging, in a dry ventilated area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water . If swallowed, do not induce vomiting in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Composition Chloride content Expansion Compressive strength @ 5 days

Grey Powder Specific additives NIL 1% to 5% 65 MPa

– BS EN 196-1:1994

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Mixing • Mix 20 kg Conrep.303 HFG with 6 to 6.8 lit. of cool potable water. Depending on the quantities to be prepared, a drill and paddle can be used for small applications or a high shear mixer and slow speed agitator for large applications, place into the mixer most but not all of the required water. Start mixer, then slowly add Conrep.303 HFG and continue mixing. After all lumps have disappeared,

454

NOTE The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole

455

Conrep∙304 VHS

Conrep∙303 HFG

VERY HIGH STRENGTH SHRINKAGE COMPENSATED GROUT • Grouting of anchors and dowels • Jointing • Keying bridges • Fixing industrial equipment and heavy machinery mounting plates • Vertical shoring • Void filling operations

PRODUCT

property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorized disclosure, use, dissemination or copying (either whole or partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit.

Conrep.304 VHS is a blend of portland cement, special admixtures and proprietary aggregates designed to provide high flexural and compressive strength performance from plastic to fluid consistencies. Conrep.304 VHS is non-metallic, non-shrink, nongas forming and contains no chlorides or aluminum powders. It is a higher performing, multi use, general purpose, precision, construction grout.

Edition: 09/10-A

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Grain Size Free from chlorides and metallic particles Fresh density (BS 1881:83) Lengthchange

ADVANTAGES

• Non-shrinking • High strength • Easy to apply • Resistant to sea water and sulfates • Liquid or plastic consistency

Pull off stress

SCOPE OF USE

Grey Powder 0 to 3 mm

2340 kg/m³ 0.062 % @ 28 days (ASTM C157-03) > 1.5 N/mm² @ 28 days (BS 1881 Part 207)

• Assembly of pre-cast parts made of reinforced or pre-stressed concrete

*COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (N/mm²) – BS- EN 196-1 AGE

1 day

7 days

28 days

FLUID CONSISTENCY

FLOWABLE CONSISTENCY

FLEXURAL STRENGTH & TENSILE STRENGTH at 28 Days for fluid consistency 28 days

AGE FLEXURAL STRENGTH (N/mm²) – BS EN 196 -1 TENSILE STRENGTH (N/mm²) – BS 6319:PART 7: 1985

7 3.8

*The one day results obtained @ 28 ˚C .The higher the curing temperature, the higher will be the strength @ 24 hours. The mechanical characteristics will be higher if the Conrep.304 VHS is mixed at plastic consistency. In this case, the compressive strength can exceed 80 N/mm² at 28 days.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

MORTAR PREPARATION Add the powder to the water and mix for 3 minutes. To ensure a homogeneous and uniform mix, an electric mixer with high rotation speed must be used for fluid and flowable consistencies.

BS EN 196 Part 1 BS 1881 PART 207 ASTM C 157-03 BS 6319 – Part 7 – 1985 BS 1881: 83

456

457

Conrep∙304 VHS

Conrep. 304 VHS MORTAR SLURRY

WATER (1)

50 Kg

5.5 lit.

Conrep∙311 MC

NON SHRINK MICRO CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURAL REPAIR AND GENERAL VOID FILLING installation of Conrep.304 VHS. Do not mix with other hydraulic binders.

VOLUME IN PLACE 24 lit.

50 Kg

6.255 to 6.75 lit.

24 lit.

50 Kg

6.4 to 6.75 lit.

24 lit.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

(1): Half quantity of water is required for 25 Kg package The mortar is obtained by mixing Conrep.304 VHS with clean water. The amount of water used depends on the workability required. FOR ANCHORING The hole diameter should be at least equal to the rod diameter plus 30 mm. Depth of holes: 10 to 15 times diameter of the rod. Clean the areas, place bar in hole and fill the hole with Conrep.304 VHS to full capacity. The dimensions of anchoring must not exceed 5 cm depth, Conrep.304 VHS must extended by up to 30% by weight with clean washed and dried 3/8” (1cm) pea gravel. Do not blend excess water as this will cause bleeding and segregations. Do not use any other admixtures or additives.

DISCLAIMER

FOR GROUTING & CONCRETE REPAIR Conrep.304 VHS can be used for thicknesses up to 8 cm. Apply the mortar evenly on the concrete surface where required. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC. If the application temperature is higher than 35 ºC, make sure to use cool water to keep the mixed grout temperature below 30 ºC.

NOTE

CURING

Protect the work against rapid drying from wind, sun and excessive heat by using a curing compound like Cure WH or Cure Y 40 or by covering with properly secured plastic sheeting.

Edition: 09/10-A

PACKAGING

Conrep.304 VHS is packed in: 50kg bag and 25 kg bag.

STORAGE

Conrep.304 VHS can be stored 6 months in its Original packaging, in a dry location, away from Extreme temperatures.

PRECAUTIONS

Subtrate must be sound and resistant. It should be saturated with water a few hours prior to installation. Remove all water used in wetting support prior to

458

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

PRODUCT

Conrep.311 MC is a ready-to-use micro concrete made of selected sand and aggregates, special cement and additives. It can be used where high compressive strength is required. Conrep.311 MC is specially formulated to produce a shrinkage compensating micro concrete with high performance. Conrep.311 MC can be applied in thicknesses ranging from 50 mm to 300 mm per layer although greater thickness up to 500 mm can be practiced depending on the design of the repair job and level of steel reinforcement.

BS 6920: Part 1: 2001 BS 1881: Part 116:1983 BS 1881: Part 118 BS 1881: Part 122:1983 ASTM C 403/403 M-05 ASTM C 1202-05 ASTM C 185-02 section 5.2

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Conrep.311 MC may be applied on sound concrete, masonry, rock or similar materials. Remove damaged concrete and laitance by chipping with a pick or cold-chiselling to get a rough surface. The surface must also be free from any trace of grease or oil. Saturate the surface with water by copiously spraying just before application, and if possible, 6 hours before application as well.

SCOPE OF USE

• Assembly of pre-cast parts made of reinforced or pre-stressed concrete • Jointing • Fixing industrial equipment and heavy machinery, mounting plates • Vertical shoring • Pile cap repair • Jacketing

ADVANTAGES

PRODUCT PREPARATION The micro concrete is obtained by mixing Conrep.311 MC with clean water at the following dosage: - 78 kg kit with 7 to 8 liters of clean water - 38 kg kit with 3.5 to 4 liters of clean water - 25 kg bags with 2.5 to 2.75 liters of clean water The amount of water used depending on the workability required. Add the powder or/and aggregates to the required amount of water and mix for 3 minutes. Mixing should be carried out in a suitably sized mixing vessel, using a slow speed, heavy duty drill, and applied promptly after. Do not mix with other hydraulic binders. The use of additives is prohibited.

• Non-shrinking • High strength • Easy to apply • Resistant to sea water and sulfates (Sulfate resistant Conrep.311 MC is available on request)

CHARACTERISTICS

Appearance Grey Powder + aggregates Free from chlorides and metallic particles Grain size 0 to 9 mm Powder density 1.8 Setting time (ASTM C 403) Initial 5 hrs. 20 min. Final 7 hrs. 30 min. Compressive strength 30 N/mm² at 1 day at 22°C ± 1 (BS 188140 N/mm² at 3 days part 116) 50 N/mm² at 7 days 60 N/mm² at 28 days Flexural strength at 22°C 3 N/mm² at 1 day ± 1 (BS 1881 P118) 4.5 N/mm² at 7 days 5 N/mm² at 28 days Water absorption Less than 2% at 32 days (BS 1881 P122) Chloride permeability 2123 (ASTM C 1202-05) Fresh density 2.41 ASTM C 185- 02 section 5.5 VOC and Formadehyde ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS None (< 10µg/l)

SECTION ENLARGEMENT Conrep 311 MC can be used when additional “bonded” reinforced or non-reinforced micro-concrete to an existing structural member in the form of an overlay or a jacket is required. With section enlargement, columns, beams, slabs and walls can be enlarged to increase their load-carrying capacity or stiffness. A typical enlargement is approximately 5 to 7.5 cm for slabs and 7.5 to 13 cm for beams and columns. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC.

459

Conrep∙311 MC-HCS

Conrep∙311 MC

NON SHRINK DURABLE MICRO CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURAL REPAIR AND GENERAL VOID FILLING (PILE HEAD REPAIR) NOTE

If the application temperature is higher than 35 ºC, make sure to use cool water to keep the mixed grout temperature below 30 ºC.

CONSUMPTION 78 kg kit + 7 liters of water give a volume of 38 liters.

Edition: 06/11-A

PACKAGING Conrep.311 MC is supplied in: UAE: 78 kg kit: 50 kg powder + 28 kg aggregates. KSA: 25 kg bags (powder + aggregates) Other countries: 38 kg kit: 25 kg powder + 13k aggregates

Water absorption Less than 1.2% at 32 days (BS 1881 P122) Chloride permeability < 1200 - Low (ASTM C 1202-05) Fresh density 2.48 ± 0.05 ASTM C 185- 02 section 5.5

PRODUCT

Conrep.311 MC - HCS is a ready-to-use micro concrete made of selected sand and aggregates, special cement and additives to provide a durable properties. It can be used where high compressive strength is required. Conrep.311 MC - HCS is specially formulated to produce a shrinkage compensating micro concrete with high performance. Conrep.311MC-HCS can be applied in thickness ranging from 50 mm to 300 mm per layer although greater thickness up to 500 mm can be practiced depending on the design of the repair job and level of steel reinforcement.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS BS 1881: Part 116:1983 BS 1881: Part 118 BS 1881: Part 122:1983 ASTM C 403/403 M-05 ASTM C 1202-09 ASTM C 138: 01

SCOPE OF USE

• Assembly of pre-cast parts made of reinforced or pre-stressed concrete • Jointing • Keying bridges • Fixing industrial equipment and heavy machinery, mounting plates • Vertical shoring • Pile cap repair • Concrete Jacketing

STORAGE Conrep.311 MC can be stored 6 months in its original packaging, in a dry location, away from extreme temperatures.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water . If swallowed, do not induce vomiting in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Conrep.311 MC - HCS may be applied on sound concrete, masonry, rock or similar materials. Remove damaged concrete and laitance by chipping with a pick or cold-chiselling to get a rough surface. The surface must also be free from any trace of grease or oil. Saturate the surface with water by copiously spraying just before application, and if possible, 6 hours before application as well. At the time of application, the area should be free from water but still damp.

ADVANTAGES

• Non-shrinking • Durable • Low water absorption • Low RCP • High strength • Easy to apply • Resistant to sea water and sulfates (Sulfate resistant Conrep.311 MC - HCS is available on request)

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT PREPARATION The micro concrete is obtained by mixing the 78 kg kit of Conrep.311 MC-HCS with 6 to 6.5 liters of clean water (half quantity of water is required for 38 kg kit). The amount of water used depending on the workability required. Add the (powder + aggregates) to the water and mix for 3 to 5 minutes. Mixing should be carried out in a suitably sized heavy duty drum mixer, and applied promptly after. Do not mix with other hydraulic binders. The use of additives is prohibited.

CHARACTERISTICS

Appearance Grey Powder + aggregates Free from chlorides and metallic particles Grain size 0 to 10 mm Powder density 1.8 Setting time (ASTM C 403) Initial Around 5 min Final Around 6H 30 min Compressive strength 43 N/mm² at 1 day at 22°C ± 1 (BS 188155 N/mm² at 7 days part 116) 70 N/mm² at 28 days Flexural strength at 22°C 7 N/mm² at 28 days ± 1 (BS 1881 P118)

460

SECTION ENLARGEMENT Conrep 311 MC – HCS can be used when, additional

461

Conrep∙313 EHS

Conrep∙311 MC-HCS

HIGH PERFORMANCE SELF LEVELLING MICRO CONCRETE FOR PILE HEAD, SCREED AND GENERAL FILLING

“bonded” reinforced or non-reinforced micro-concrete to an existing structural member in the form of an overlay or a jacket, is required. With section enlargement, columns, beams, slabs, and walls can be enlarged to increase their load-carrying capacity or stiffness. A typical enlargement is approximately 5 to 7.5 cm for slabs and 7.5 to 13 cm for beams and column. Ideal application temperature is between +5 ºC and +35 ºC. If the application temperature is higher than 35 ºC, make sure to use cool water to keep the mixed micro-concrete temperature below 30 ºC

NOTE

The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorizeddisclosure, use, dissemination or copying (either whole or partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit. Edition: 07/11-A

CONSUMPTION 78 kg kit + 6.2 liters of water give an approximate volume of 34 liters.

Conrep.313 EHS is a four-component system designed to produce a very fluid micro concrete with thickness 5 to 15 cm. The system is based on the following: • Component A, B & C – blend of cementitious materials, selected aggregates and additives. • Component D – superplasticizer made from new generation synthetic polymers.

STORAGE

ADVANTAGES • • • • • •

Conrep.311 MC - HCS can be stored 6 months in its original packaging, in a dry location, away from extreme temperatures.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water . If swallowed, do not induce vomiting in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

• • • •

BS 1881 Part: 116: 1993 ASTM C 403/403 M-05 ASTM C 1202-05 BS 1881 Part 122: 1993 BS 1881 Part 118: 1983

Pile head repair Exhibition hall Hotels and offices Hospitals Forklift traffic area Car parks Garage and workshops Warehouses General filling

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SUBSTRATE PREPARATION New concrete should be at least 28 days old. All surfaces to be laid with Conrep.313 EHS shall be water cured and thoroughly cleaned to remove all dirt, oil, laitance and unsound materials. Any excess water shall be removed. For flooring Control joints in the existing substrate should be respected. For large area, joints should be created every 25 m².

Easy to mix Easy to use Quick easy laying and fast hardening High early and ultimate strength No vibration required Extended workability without segregation or bleeding Improved surface finish Reduce cracking Flowable Consistent quality

MIXING Conrep.313 EHS component A, B and C should be charged into the mixer and then gradually add part D. Mix all the components for 5 minutes to reach the required workability. Note: Conrep.313 EHS is a four-component system which doesn’t need the addition of any quantity of water which will only lead to bleeding and other undesirable defects.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Grain size Liquide Part Color Compressive strength at 22°C ± 1 (BS 1881-part 116) 1 day 7 days 28 days Flexural strength at 22°C ± 1 (BS 1881 P118) 7 days 28 days

DISCLAIMER

462

Low

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Conrep.313 EHS is specifically developed for use to provide a durable, self leveling micro concrete which can be used in both internal and external application such as:

Conrep.311 MC – HCS is supplied in: UAE: 78 kg kit: 50 kg powder + 28 kg aggregates. Other countries: 38 kg kit: 25 kg powder + 13kg aggregates.

60 - 70cm @ 28°C 1 hour @ 28°C 23 liters per 53.80 kg kit ~ 1.5%

(ASTM C 1202)

SCOPE OF USE

• • • • • • • • •

PACKAGING

Flow spread Working time Yield Water absorption at 23 days (BS 1881 Part122) Chloride permeability

PRODUCT

Grey Powder 0 - 10 mm White yellowish

PRODUCT APPLICATION Pour the mixed Conrep.313 EHS on to the prepared substrate. Rake or float shall be used to assist material flow where necessary. Check that correct level is achieved and allow Conrep.313 EHS to self-level to flatness with light assisted tamping. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and

16 N/mm² 36 N/mm² 53 N/mm² 5N/mm² 6.5 N/mm²

463

Conrep∙313 EHS

Conrep∙314 RD

HIGH EARLY STRENGTH AND fast SETTING FILLING MORTAR WITH FIBER

+ 35ºC. If the application temperature is higher than 35 ºC, make sure to keep the liquid part in cold place to keep the mixed grout temperature below 30 ºC.

only. For more information, please contact the company’s office in your location.

NOTE

CURING AND PROTECTION

Strictly cover with polyethylene sheet once Conrep.313 EHS attains final set. Due care shall be exercised to protect the freshly laid Conrep.313 EHS from extreme sunshine and wind before its final setting. Avoid service loading with 24 hours after installation of Conrep.313 EHS.

Edition: 11/10-A

PACKAGING Conrep.313 EHS is packed in 53.8 Kg or 76.8 kg Kit: Components A+B+C: 50 kg; Component D: 3.8 kg Components A+B+C: 71.4 kg; Component D: 5.4 kg

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

PRODUCT

BS 1881: Part 116 BS 1881: Part 118 ASTM C 403, BS EN 196-1: 1994 ASTM C 185-02 section 5.2

Conrep.314 RD is a ready-to-use mortar mainly made of specific cement, fibers, special additives and selected sands that provide special properties: low shrinking, high strength, fast setting. With its high performance and fast setting, Conrep.314 RD allows the repair of roads or industrial surfaces without a long traffic interruption.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Conrep.314 RD may be applied on sound concrete, masonry, rock or similar materials. Remove damaged concrete and laitance by chipping with a pick or cold-chiselling to get a rough surface. The surface must also be free from any trace of grease or oil. Saturate the surface with water by copiously spraying just before application, and if possible, 6 hours before application as well.

PROPERTIES

• Low shrinking • High strength • Fast setting • Excellent resistance to sea and sulfated waters • Excellent resistance to high temperatures • Precast repair

SCOPE OF USE

• Repair of industrial surfaces when high resistances are required • Repair of grounds or roads under service • Anchoring of manholes or poles in roads

STORAGE Conrep.313 EHS can be stored for 6 months in its original packaging when kept in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

MORTAR PREPARATION Prepare a plastic consistency mortar by mixing a 25 kg bag of Conrep.314 RD with 4 to 5 liters of clean water. Mixing must be done for at least 3 minutes until a homogeneous paste is obtained. Do not mix it with an other hydraulic binder (cement, lime or gypsum) or an admixture.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Powder density Mortar density Free from chlorides and metallic particles Fresh density ASTM C 185 - 02 section 5.2 VOC and Formadehyde ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

Grey Powder Around 1.4 Around 2.2

MICRO-CONCRETE PREPARATION For a thickness of more than 30 mm, Conrep.314 RD may be used as a micro-concrete. In this case, mix a 25 kg bag of Conrep.314 RD with 5 liters of water and 15 kg of 3/8 aggregates.

2.22

None (< 10µg/l)

Conrep.314 RD must be used within 10 minutes (at 30ºC) from mixing. Re-mixing with an extra amount of water is not recomended. After application, protect the surface by using a curing compound like Cure WH or Cure Y 40 or by covering with properly secured plastic sheeting. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC. If the application temperature is higher than 35 ºC, make sure to use cool water to keep the mixed mortar temperature below 30 ºC.

Setting time (at 20°C) - (ASTM C 403)

Plastic consistency

DISCLAIMER

start 20 min

end 40 min

Compressive strength (at 20°C) BS 1881: Part 116 & BS EN 196-1: 1994

Plastic consist. (MPa)

8h 25

24h 49

28d 55

Flexural strength at 22°C BS 1881: Part 118 & BS EN 196-1: 1994

Plastic consist. (MPa)

464

8h 4

24h 7.9

YIELD

28d 10

Mortar: 13 liters per 25 kg bag. Micro-concrete: 20 liters per 25 kg bag.

465

Conrep∙314 RD

Conrep∙318 FD

PACKAGING

PRODUCT

RAPID HARDENING HIGH ALUMINA CEMENT

Residue on sieve at 90 micrometer

Conrep.318 FD is a normal setting, rapid hardening High Alumina Cement (HAC) with high early strength. It differs substantially from the usual calcium silicate cements (Portland cements) in its manufacturing process, chemical composition and rapid strength gain. Conrep.318 FD is composed of calcium aluminates with the following characteristics: • High early strength • Refractoriness • High abrasion resistance • Resistance to biogenic sulphuric acid corrosion (BSAC)

Conrep.314 RD is packed in 25 kg bag.

STORAGE Conrep.314 RD can be stored for 6 months, in its original packaging, in a dry ventilated area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

Setting time and water demand

The testing of the setting time is performed using the mortar in order to describe the behavior of the Conrep.318 FD in mixtures with a workable consistency. A mixture containing three (3) parts of standard sand and one (1) part cement with a water/cement ratio of 0.43 is produced for testing the mortar on the basis of EN 196.

Mortar

Conrep.318 FD meets the requirements of British Standard BS 915 for High Alumina Cements and is controlled in accordance with EN 196. Conrep.318 FD is produced by melting selected raw materials (bauxite and limestone) in special kilns. After cooling, the clinker is ground using ball mills.

DISCLAIMER

TECHNICAL DATA

NOTE

Mineralogical composition Conrep.318 FD contains mainly monocalcium aluminate (CA). This mineral phase is responsible for the high early strength. When mixed with water Conrep.318 FD forms calcium aluminate hydrates as its hydration products. During the hydration of the Conrep.318 FD no Ca(OH)2 is created, as opposed to Portland cement.

Initial Set Final Set

after the initial set After setting, strength develops very rapidly. Conrep.318 FD is cement with very high early strength and high compressive strength. After one (1) day, the compressive strength is higher than that of high grade Portland cements CEM I 52.5 R after 28 days.

Development of strength [N/mm2 ] 6h

60-100

70-120

Flexural strength

7 - 10

9 - 12

4-8

Resistance to corrosion High resistance to waste waters in combination with extraordinary abrasion resistance and high resistance to biogenic sulphuric acid corrosion (BSAC) makes Conrep.318 FD an ideal product for sewer systems and waste water plants. When Conrep.318 FD is mixed with water, the hydration products of calcium aluminates are formed. They are extremely resistant to aggressive, slightly acid

Cement technical properties Bulk density Around 1.15 g/cm³ Specific gravity 3.2 – 3.3 g/cm³ Fineness (blaine) 3000 – 3500 cm²/g Refractoriness in cement Approx 1270 C

466

Compressive Strength 30-70

The tests are conducted with mortar prisms 4 x 4 x 16 cm produced according to EN 196 containing three (3) parts standard sand and one (1) part cement with a water/cement ratio of 0.40.

Mineral phases of Conrep.318 FD Main mineral phase: CA, Minor mineral phases: C4AF, C-F-T, C2AS, C6fA4S, C12A7

Edition: 09/10-A

1 - 4 hours Maximum 120 min

Development of strength

Chemical composition (%) SiO2 2–5 Al2O3 39–42 Fe2O3 14–17 CaO 37–40 MgO < 1.2 SO3 < 0.4

< 5%

467

Conrep∙318 FD

Conrep∙331 TX

NON SHRINK THIXOTROPIC REPAIR MORTAR WITH FIBER use, dissemination or copying (either whole or partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit.

waters (pH factor > 3) including water soluble sulphates.

Refractoriness After drying out, mortars and concretes made from Conrep.318 FD slowly emit their hydrate water without destroying the matrix. At high temperatures (> 1000°C), ceramic bonding occurs between the high alumina cement parts and the refractory aggregates. These ceramic bonds make Conrep.318 FD an excellent binder in refractory concretes and other refractory mortars or gunning mixes.

Edition: 04/08-A

PRODUCT

*Tensile Strength:

Conrep.331 TX is a ready-to-use mortar mainly made of sand (reconstituted grain size range), special cement, fibres, and special additives that provide special properties: non-shrinking, thixotropic, high strength, high adhesion, compactness; its closed porosity slows down carbonation.

7 days (BS EN 6319 Part 7) 28 days (BS EN 6319 Part 7)

*Adhesion Strength: 28 days (BS EN 1881 Part 207)

*Test for compatibility with potable water

PROPERTIES

• Non-shrinking • High strength • Normal setting • Good resistance to sea water and to high-sulphate water • Thixotropic: It can be applied in a thick layer • Prevents steel reinforcements from corrosion

PACKAGING

BS 6920 Part 2.6: 2000.

STORAGE Conrep.318 FD can be stored for 6 months, in its original packaging, in a dry ventilated area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

CHARACTERISTICS Active ingredients

DISCLAIMER

Thickness Fresh density ASTM C 185 - 02 section 5.2 VOC and Formadehyde ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS None (<10µg/l)

Appearance Powder density Grain size Mixing water Yield

BS EN 196-1: 1994 BS EN 6319 Part 2 BS EN 6319 Part 3 BS EN 6319 Part 7 BS 1881 Part 207: 1992 section 8 BS 6920 Part 2.6: 2000. ASTM C 109/C109M-05

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

hydraulic binders, synthetic fibres, without any chlorides or metal particles Grey Powder 1.28 0 to 2.5 mm 8.5 liters / 50 kg bag 4.25 liters / 25 kg bag 25 liters / 50 kg bag 12.5 liters / 25 kg bag 5 to 50 mm in one coat 2.220

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Conrep.331 TX may be applied on sound concrete, masonry, rock or similar materials. Remove damaged concrete and laitance by chipping with a pick or cold-chiselling to get a rough surface. The area must be surrounded by clean edges. Do not feather edges. The surface must also be free from any trace of grease or oil. Brush or scrape corroded steel with a metal brush, or sand it to remove all rust particles. Remove dust from all surfaces to be fixed. For an optimal protection of steel, apply Conrep.370 PF by brush prior to Conrep.331 TX. Saturate the surface with water by copiously spraying just before application, and if possible, 6 hours before application as well. PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix a 50 kg bag Conrep.331 TX with 8 to 8.5 litres of clean water until a smooth paste is obtained (mix 4 to 4.25 lit. of water with a 25 kg bag)

*Compressive Strength ASTM

NOTE

1 day 7 days 28 days

20 MPa 48 MPa 60 MPa

*Flexural Strength - BS EN 196-1 at 22°C ± 1

The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorized disclosure,

468

7 days 28 days

complies

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

TEST RESULTS C 109 M at at 22°C ± 1:

> 1.5 MPa

*Results obtained at 16% water under lab. condition at 22°C ± 1

SCOPE OF USE • Repair of concrete surfaces, honeycombing, edges of steps and all types of load bearing situations. • Restoring the structure of damaged construction: columns, slabs, vault, mats and dam overflows. • Reinforcing of weakened structures such as balconies, pedestals and cornices.

Conrep.318 FD is packed in 25 kg bag.

4 MPa 4.5MPa

PRODUCT APPLICATION Conrep.331 TX can be applied: • Manually with a trowel.

6 MPa 8 MPa

469

Conrep∙331 TX

Conrep∙331 HCS

NON SHRINK HIGH STRENGTH THIXOTROPIC REPAIR MORTAR

PRODUCT APPLICATION

DISCLAIMER

Conrep.331 TX can be applied: • Manually with a trowel. • By using a dry or wet spraying machine. • By pumping

Conrep.331 TX must be used within one hour from mixing. For thickness more than 50 mm, it is recommended to apply Conrep.331 TX in 2 layers. When the first coat is applied it must be directly roughened to increase bonding with the second coat. Re-mixing with an extra amount of water is forbidden. After application, protect the surface by using a curing compound like Cure WH or Cure Y 40 by covering with properly secured plastic sheeting. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC. If the application temperature is higher than 35 ºC, make sure to use cool water to keep the mixed mortar temperature below 30 ºC.

NOTE

PACKAGING PACKAGING Conrep.331 TX is packed in: UAE: 50 kg bag. Qatar & MENA: 25 kg bag.

PRODUCT

Compressive Strength

Conrep.331 HCS is a ready to use mortar fiberreinforced. It is made of sand (reconstituted grain size range), special cement, fibres, and special additives that provide special properties: nonshrinking, thixotropic, very high strength, excellent bond to rough and damp surfaces, compactness; its closed porosity slows down carbonation. It has low permeability and is extremely durable. The formulation of Conrep.331 HCS provides excellent strength, making it a high quality all purpose mortar for different applications including repair of high strength concrete.

1 day (BS EN 196-1) 7 days (BS EN 196-1) 28 days (BS EN 196-1)

Flexural Strength 1 day (BS EN 196-1) 7 days (BS EN 196-1) 28 days (BS EN 196-1)

Conrep.331 TX can be stored for 6 months, in its original packaging, in a dry ventilated area.

28 days (BS 1881 Part 207) 28 days (ASTM C 157-03)

Tensile Strength:

• Non-shrinking • Very High strength • Normal setting • Good resistance to sea water and to high sulphate water • Thixotropic: It can be applied in a thick layer • Prevents steel reinforcements from corrosion

CHARACTERISTICS

Active ingredients

Appearance Grain size Mixing water Yield Thickness Fresh density (Kg/m³)

470

>1.3 N/mm²

Length Change:

PROPERTIES

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

4.5 N/mm² 5.5 N/mm² 6.5 N/mm²

Pull Off Stress:

7 days (BS 6319 -7- 1985) 28 days (BS 6319 -7- 1985)

0.041% 1.8N/mm² 3.8 N/mm²

APPLICABLE STANDARDS BS EN 196 Part 1 BS 1881 Part 207 ASTM C 157-03 BS 6319 – Part 7- 1985 BS 1881: 83

STORAGE

30 N/mm² 52 N/mm² 70 N/mm²

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Conrep.331 HCS may be applied on sound concrete, masonry, rock or similar materials. Remove damaged concrete and laitance by chipping with a pick or cold-chiselling to get a rough surface. The area must be surrounded by clean edges. Do not feather edges. The surface must also be free from any trace of grease or oil.

hydraulic binders, synthetic fibres, without any chlorides or metal particles Grey Powder 0 to 2.5 mm 8.5 liters / 50 kg bag 4.25 liters / 25 kg bag 25 liters / 50 kg bag 12.5 liters / 25 kg bag 5 to 50 mm in one coat 2230 (BS 1881:83)

Brush or scrape corroded steel with a metal brush, or sand it to remove all rust particles. Remove dust from all surfaces to be fixed. For an optimal protection of steel, apply Conrep.370 PF by brush prior to Conrep.331 HCS. Saturate the surface with water by copiously spraying just before application, and if possible, 6 hours before application as well.

471

Conrep∙332 FR

Conrep∙331 HCS

NON SHRINK THIXOTROPIC FINE REPAIR MORTAR WITH FIBER DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix a 50 kg bag Conrep.331 HCS with 7.5 litres of clean water until a smooth paste is obtained (mix 3.75

PRODUCT APPLICATION Conrep.331 HCS can be applied: • Manually with a trowel • By using a dry or wet spraying machine • Or by pumping Conrep.331 HCS must be used within one hour from mixing. Re-mixing with an extra amount of water is forbidden. After application, protect the surface by using a curing compound like Cure WH or Cure Y 40 by covering with properly secured plastic sheeting. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC. If the application temperature is higher than 35 C, make sure to use cool water to keep the mixed mortar temperature below 30 ºC.

NOTE

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

PRODUCT

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION This mortar may be applied to all sound substrates: concrete, masonry, rock and similar materials. Remove damaged concrete and laitance by jack-hammering, cold-chiseling, or running a concrete plane to get a sound, rough surface. The area must be surrounded by clean edges. Do not create feather edge. The surface must also be free from any trace of grease or oil. Remove dust from all surfaces to be repaired. Saturate the surface with water by copiously spraying just before application, and, if possible, 6 hours before application as well.

Conrep.332 FR is a ready-to-use mortar composed of silica sand (reconstituted grain size range), special cement, microsilica, fibers, and additives that provide specific properties: non shrinking, thixotropic, high strength, high adhesion, compactness. Its very closed grain size slows down carbonation.

PROPERTIES • Non-shrinking • Non-sweating • High strengths • Normal setting / fast hardening • High strength at 24 hours • Good resistance to sea water and to high-sulfate water • Thixotropic • Applicable by trowel

PRODUCT PREPARATION Add 4.5 lit. clean water to a 25 kg bag Conrep.332 FR. Mix until an homogenous mortar is obtained. Conrep.332 FR must be used within one hour from mixing. Re-mixing with an extra amount of water is forbidden.

SCOPE OF USE Repair of concrete surfaces, representing honeycombing and spalling of concrete surface.

PRECAUTIONS

For thickness more than 50 mm, it is recommended to apply Conrep.331 HCS in 2 layers. When the first coat is applied it must be directly roughened to increase bonding with the second coat.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Powder density

PACKAGING

PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply Conrep.332 FR with a trowel and press hard on the surface. Run a mason’s board across repaired surface, and smooth it. Apply a curing compound onto the surface as soon as application is finished to protect from wind and sunshine. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC. If the application temperature is higher than 35 ºC, make sure to use cool water to keep the mixed mortar temperature below 30 ºC.

Grey Powder 1.28

CHEMICAL COMPOSITION hydraulic binders, synthetic fibers, microsilica, selected mineral charges free from chlorides or metal particles.

Conrep.331 HCS is packed in: 50 kg bag and 25 kg bag.

STORAGE

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES Grain size Mixing water Yield Mortar density pH Thickness Flexural strength Compressive strength Adhesion on concreteat 28 days

Conrep.331 HCS can be stored for 6 months, in its original packaging, in a dry ventilated area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

0 to 1mm 4.5 lit. / 25 kg bag 13 lit. mortar / 25 kg bag 2.1 12 2 to 20 mm in one coat 8 MPa at 28 days 50 MPa at 28 days > 1.5 MPa

CONSUMPTION

Approximately 2 kg /m² per mm thickness.

PACKAGING

Conrep.332 FR is packed in 25 kg bag

STORAGE

Conrep.332 FR can be stored for 6 months from manufacturing date, in its original packaging, in a dry ventilated area.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS ASTM C942 ASTM D4541 BS -1542

472

473

Conrep∙332 FR

Conrep∙335 NSR

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

PRODUCT

NON SHRINK REPAIR MORTAR

The paste can then be applied with a trowel. After finishing, cure with Cure Y 40.

Conrep.335 NSR is a premixed, cementitious polymer modified, non shrink mortar giving high performance at plastic consistency. Supplied as a ready to use dry powder it requires only the addition of water to produce a non-shrink mortar for repair and grouting.

When more than one coating is required, the first coat must be applied directly roughened to increase bonding with the second coat. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC. If the application temperature is higher than 35 ºC, make sure to use cool water to keep the mixed mortar temperature below 30 ºC.

PROPERTIES • No metallic content • Avoids corrosion and stops rust • Composition allows early strength development without the use of chlorides

DISCLAIMER

PACKAGING

Conrep.335 NSR is packed in 25 kg bag.

SCOPE OF USE Conrep.335 NSR can be used in different situation where shrinkage is undesirable. • Repair of concrete surface • Prefabricated unit joints • Repairs to pre-cast concrete

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Powder density Grain size Adhesion on concrete - 28 days Mortar density Flexural strength 28 days - minimum Compressive strength - 28 days - min. Thickness

NOTE

STORAGE

Conrep.335 NSR can be stored for 6 months, in its original packaging, in a dry ventilated area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Grey Powder 1.45 0.04 - 2mm 1 N/mm² 2.2 3 N/mm² 35 N/mm² 5 to 15 mm in one layer

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE The substrate should be sound, clean, and free from any dust, wax and oils. Dust should be removed and the substrate should be moistened. Substrates should not be over heated or frozen. PRODUCT PREPARATION & APPLICATION The paste is obtained by mixing a 25 kg with 3 to 3.5 liters of water manually or in a suitable mixer. After mixing, the paste should be left to rest a few minutes before use.

474

NOTE

475

Conrep∙335 NSR

Conrep∙345 NSM

NON-SHRINK TWO-COMPONENT CEMENTITIOUS MORTAR FOR REPAIR

is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit.

PRODUCT PREPARATION AND APPLICATION The paste is obtained by mixing the 25 kg powder with the 5 liter liquid in a mixer. After mixing, the paste is left to rest a few minutes. The paste can then be applied with a trowel. After usage, tools should be cleaned with water. Curing should be done for 3 days, twice a day. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC. If the application temperature is higher than 35 ºC, make sure to keep the liquid part in cold place to keep the mixed grout temperature below 30 ºC.

PRODUCT

Edition: 09/10-A **Available only in MENA

Conrep.345 NSM is a premixed, cementitious non shrink mortar giving high performance at plastic consistency. Supplied as a ready to use dry powder it requires only the addition of liquid to produce a high, consistent cementitious free flowing non shrink mortar for repair and plastering work.

PROPERTIES

• No metallic content • Avoids corrosion and stops rust • Composition allows high early strength development without the use of chlorides

PACKAGING

Conrep.345 NSM is packed in 25 kg powder + 5 lit. Liquid

SCOPE OF USE

Conrep.345 NSM can be used in all repairing situations where shrinkage is undesirable. Conrep.345 NSM can be used as a cement plaster or render in one or two coats on walls and ceiling in internal and external. CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Apparent density Grain size Thickness Adhesion on concrete Flexural strength (28 days) Compressive strength (28 days) Liquid Color Density

STORAGE

Conrep.345 NSM should be stored in dry premises, protected against humidity and wind. Conservation: 6 months approx. Protect the product from high wind and bright sunshine.

Powder Grey 1.45 ± 0.05 0.04 to 6mm up to 6 mm >0.5 N/mm² >2 N/mm²

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

>20 N/mm²

White 1

DISCLAIMER

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

BS 1881: part 118, ASTM C942 and ASTM D4541.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE The substrate should be sound, clean, free from any dust or demoulding products and oils. Dust will be removed and the substrate will be moistened if dry. Substrates should not be overheated nor frozen.

476

477

Conrep∙345 NSM

Conrep∙350 NSG

NON SHRINK MORTAR FOR REPAIR AND GROUTING

PRODUCT PREPARATION & APPLICATION The paste is obtained by mixing a 25 kg with 5 to 6 liters of water manually or in a suitable mixer. After mixing, the paste should be left to rest a few minutes before use. The paste can then be applied with a trowel. After finishing, keep the surface moisten or immediately apply a curing compound like Cure WH or Cure Y 40 as soon as application is finished. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC. If the application temperature is higher than 35 ºC, make sure to use cool water to keep the mixed grout temperature below 30 ºC.

PRODUCT

NOTE

Conrep.350 NSG is a pre-mixed, cementitious non shrink mortar giving high performance at plastic consistency. Supplied as a ready to use dry powder it requires only the addition of water to produce a non-shrink mortar for repair and grouting.

The information included on this Technical Data Sheet is the sole property of SODAMCO Holding. The unauthorized disclosure, use, dissemination or copying (either wholeor partial) of this data sheet or any information it contains, is prohibited and subject to legal pursuit. Edition: 07/11-A

PROPERTIES

• No metallic content • Avoids corrosion and stops rust • Composition allows early strength development

SCOPE OF USE

Conrep.350 NSG can be used in different situation where shrinkage is undesirable. • Repair of concrete surface • Prefabricated unit joints • Repairs to pre-cast concrete CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Grain size Bond strength (BS 1881 part 207) Flexural strength (BS EN 196-1) 28 day Compressive strength (BS EN 196-1) 1 day 28 days Thickness Yield Fresh density ASTM C 185- 02 section 5.2

PACKAGING

Conrep.350 NSG is packed in 25 kg bag.

STORAGE

Conrep.350 NSG should be stored in dry premises, protected from humidity, high winds and bright sunshine. Conservation: 6 months approximately.

Grey or white powder 0.04 - 6mm >0.5 N/mm²

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

4 N/mm² 8 N/mm² 30 N/mm² up to 10 mm in one layer 13.5 liter/25 kg bag 1666 Kg/m³

DISCLAIMER

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

BS EN 196-1:1994 BS 1881 part 207 ASTM C 185- 02 section 5.2

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE The substrate should be sound, clean, free from any dust, wax and oils. Dust should be removed and the substrate should be moistened. Substrates should not be over heated or frozen.

478

479

Conrep∙350 NSG

Conrep∙360 FFR

NOTE

PRODUCT

PRE-MIXED CEMENTITIOUS PASTE FOR FAIR FACE REPAIR

ASTM C 185- 02 section 5.2 ASTM C 307- 94

Conrep.360 FFR is a dry pre-mixed cementitious coating based on hydraulic binders, siliceous filler, water retaining agents and other admixtures. Conrep.360 FFR is available in white and light-grey.

Edition: 09/10-A

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION The substrate should be sound, clean free from any dust or demoulding products and oils. Roughen the surface to remove any laitance. The surface should be moistened in hot weather. It should not be overheated or frozen.

SCOPE OF USE

Conrep.360 FFR is used as a render in one or two coats, on walls and ceilings in internal and external conditions. It can be used to fill pinholes prior to over coating, for general repro-filling over large areas, up to 3 mm depth and fairing coat.

PRODUCT PREPARATION The Conrep.360 FFR paste is obtained by mixing a 20 kg bag with 5.5 to 7 litres of clean cool water, using a suitable mixer. The paste should be mixed vigorously until fully homogeneous. Clean tools with water immediately after use. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC. If the application temperature is higher than 35 ºC, make sure to use cool water to keep the mixed mortar temperature below 30 ºC.

ADMISSIBLE SUBSTRATES Concrete and masonry surfaces.

ASSOCIATED COATINGS

Conrep.360 FFR can be covered with: • Texture coatings • Paints • Wallpaper

PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply the paste with a steel trowel. It should be allowed to partly set before smoothing. If a very smooth finish is required, a small amount of water may be sprayed on to the surface of the Conrep.360 FFR prior to final smoothing.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Cement based powder Grain size 0 to 0.1 mm Pull off test, ASTM D 4541 > 1.2 N/mm² Flexural strength 5 N/mm² -28 days BS EN 196-1 Compressive strength 5 N/mm² 1 day BS EN 196-1 Compressive strength- > 28 N/mm² 32 days BS EN 196-1 Minimum thickness 1 mm per coat Maximum thickness 3 mm per coat Fresh density ASTM C 1681 Kg/m³ 185- 02 section 5.2 Tensile strength at 7 days 1.3N/mm² at 28 days 2.9 N/mm² ASTM C 307- 94 VOC and Formadehyde ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS None (< 10µg/l)

CURING

Conrep.360 FFR should be cured with clean water for at least three days by spraying twice a day.

CONSUMPTION

1.3 kg/m² per 1 mm thickness.

PACKAGING

Conrep.360 FFR is packed in 20 kg paper bag.

STORAGE

Conrep.360 FFR can be stored for 6 months, in a dry ventilated area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful

ASTM D 4541 BS EN 196-1

480

481

Conrep∙360 FFR

Conrep∙370 PF

to the skin. It is preferable that the application be done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

PRODUCT

TWO-COMPONENT CEMENT BASED CORROSION PROTECTION AND BONDING AGENT STORAGE

Can be stored up to 6 months after manufacturing date, in the original package, non-open and in dry area. Conrep.370 PF liquid part must be protected from frost and high temperature.

Conrep.370 PF is a two-component slurry with high degree of alkalinity used as a corrosion protection for reinforcement steel in concrete. It has a good adhesion on steel and concrete and is highly impermeable to water, carbon dioxide and other acid airborne gases. Conrep.370 PF protects durably reinforcement steel from corrosion. CHARACTERISTICS Composition

DISCLAIMER

Slurry aspect Pot life Slurry density pH Adhesion

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Cement based powder synthetic polymer liquid. Dark brown paste Approx. 1 our at 20˚C 1.95 ± 0.1 12.5 ± 0.5 > 2MPa (on concrete)

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

the company’s office in your location.

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION The surface must clean, dry, free from greasy matter, oil or rust. If necessary, rust on reinforcement steel may be removed with a wire brush or by sandblasting.

NOTE

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT PREPARATION Pour Conrep.370 PF liquid into a suitable container and add all Conrep.370 PF powder gradually. Stir carefully with a mechanical mixer until a smooth homogeneous consistency is obtained. This slurry is to be used during its pot life.

Edition: 09/10-A

the company’s office in your location.

PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply the prepared mixture to the clean steel reinforcement by brush. Following repair mortar, like Conrep.331 TX, can be applied on the dried Conrep.370 PF. Clean tools with water. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC.

NOTE

CONSUMPTION

Around 2 kg/m²/mm, when applied as bonding agent and variable on steel.

PACKAGING

Conrep.370 PF is supplied in 4 kg kit: a plastic pail containing 3 kg Conrep.370 PF Powder and 1-liter Conrep.370 PF Liquid.

482

483

Supermix

GENERAL PURPOSE MORTAR, WITH ACCELERATED EARLY SETTING PRODUCT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Supermix is a dry ready mixed mortar that requires addition of water only. It is made of hydraulic binders, calibrated aggregates and resins. Its formulation provides specific properties: accelerated setting, compensated shrinkage, good mechanical strengths.

SCOPE OF USE

This product is particularly adapted for all common repairs and cavities filling in hollow blocks and concrete. Supermix is aimed at electricians, plumbers, masons or all private persons CHARACTERISTICS Aspect Grain size Powder density Compressive strength

DISCLAIMER

Grey powder 0 to 2.5 mm 1.35 >10 MPa (28 days)

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Supermix is to be mixed with clean water. Dosage of water is around 4 lit./25kg. Mixing is done manually. The product is applied manually using a trowel. The support must be sound, clean, free from greasy matters or dust. Moisten the surface before application. The setting begins around 45 min after mixing (at 20°C). Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC. If the application temperature is higher than 35 ºC, make sure to use cool water to keep the mixed mortar temperature below 30 ºC.

the company’s office in your location.

NOTE

CURING

Protect the newly applied material from sunshine and wind. The new material has to be cured with water for at least three days by spraying 3 to 4 times daily.

Conrep∙321 PA

FAIR FACE CONCRETE PUTTY

PRODUCT

Conrep.321 PA is a paste to be mixed with cement. The mixture produces a repair stucco used to level and fill the holes in concrete walls for a maximum thickness of 2 mm without cracking. It is used to achieve proper smoothing of concrete surface and to eliminate irregularities of concrete, bubbles, honey combs or cracks. Conrep.321 PA can fill pin holes up to 5 mm wide.

PACKAGING

Conrep.321 PA is supplied in 20 kg pail.

ADMISSIBLE SUBSTRATES

STORAGE

Exterior and interior cementitious walls or ceilings. • Reinforced concrete surfaces • Under face of concrete slabs • Prefabricated concrete slabs • Traditional plaster

Can be store up to 6 months from manufacturing date in original non open packaging, in a dry ventilated area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ASSOCIATED FINISHES

• Plastic decorative coating, paints • Wall paper • Adhesive plastic finishes • Tiles fixed with a thin bed adhesive (Interior only) Surface treated with Conrep.321 PA must not be recovered with products formulated with hydraulic binders. CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Specific gravity PH Composition Wet mix life Temperature during application

White paste 1.39 8.8 Synthetic resins, mineral charges and admixtures < 1hour Should be between +5ºC and + 35ºC

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

YIELD

the company’s office in your location.

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Substrates must be clean, sound, dust free and free from all traces of oil and laitance. Traces of mould joints must be levelled.

25 kg bag gives 15 liters of mortar.

PACKAGING

Supermix is packed in 25 kg paper bags.

NOTE

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix Conrep.321 PA with equal quantity of cement until a homogeneous paste is obtained.

STORAGE

Store for 6 months after manufacturing date, in its original packaging, non open and in dry area.

484

Edition: 06/07-A

485

Conrep∙365 PY

READY TO USE PUTTY FOR SMOOTHENING INTERNAL SURFACES PRODUCT

Conrep.365 PY is a ready to use putty based on resins and filler. This paste is suitable for smoothen surfaces of walls and ceilings to make ready to be painted. Its creamy consistency allows an easy application. Conrep.365 PY may be covered with any type of paints and is intended only for internal use.

PROPERTIES

• Ready to use paste • Easy to apply due to its creamy consistency • Excellent adhesion on any types of substrates: cement or gypsum plaster, concrete… • Confers a very smooth finishing to surface treated

PRODUCT

DISCLAIMER

SCOPE OF USE

the company’s office in your location.

NOTE

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

The surface must be sound, clean, dry, free from oil or dust. A primer is not needed. Apply the paste directly with a trowel. Conrep.365 PY may be also applied with a spraying machine. Wait complete drying before recovering.

Edition: 06/07-A **Available only in MENA

CONSUMPTION

Approx. 0.50 kg per m².

PACKAGING

Conrep.365 PY is supplied in 25 kg plastic pail.

STORAGE

EPOXY MORTAR FOR REPAIR, SEALING AND ANCHORING

gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

CHARACTERISTICS Composition Special additives & resins, calcium carbonate, non toxic binders, preservatives, water Appearance Off white paste Density 1.75 kg/ liter Solid content 75%

Conrep∙410 RSA

PRODUCT PREPARATION The product is already delivered in the recommended mixing proportions. Mix the resin and the hardener manually or with a mechanical low-speed mixer (speed < 300 rpm) until a homogeneous mix is obtained. To obtain the epoxy mortar, add the filler (3rd component) to the mixture while mixing thoroughly until a homogeneous paste is obtained.

Conrep.410 RSA is a three components fast-setting, shrinkage-free epoxy mortar. It is mainly used for its high bonding power and mechanical strength. Conrep.410 RSA adheres to all building materials: iron, concrete, bricks,... It has a high chemical resistance to: Petroleum, oil, grease, acids, alkalis, solvents and salty water.

PRODUCT APPLICATION Patching mortar: Apply the mortar on the surface with a spatula or a trowel. Smoothen the surface. The setting will occur within 5 hours depending on the temperature.

Conrep.410 RSA is used in the following fields: • Jointing: prefabricated elements, asbestos cement parts, fresh concrete on hardened concrete. • Bonding or Anchoring: Steel bars and bolts in concrete or masonry, base plates, railway tracks, ground anchors. • Patching and repair: concrete surface patching for walls and floors, pile cap repairing. • Chemical proof and anti-acid treatment: floor screed. • Grouting bearing plates and column bases. • Heavy machinery and equipments foundations. CHARACTERISTICS Composition

Repair: Apply the mortar with a trowel or by other means on the wall or on the floor. Level it and smoothen it with a trowel or a float. The setting will occur within few hours and its chemical resistance will be fully obtained within 7 to 14 days. For a thick floor screed, coarse sand should be used as filler. Avoid using calcareous aggregates which would not be acid-resistant. After usage, clean tools with Conrep.410 RSA thinner. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC.

3 components Resin, Hardener, Siliceous fillers 2

Specific gravity BS 6319 Part 2 Pot life 2 hrs. at 20°C 1 hr. at 30°C Compressive strength at 7 110 MPa days and 30°C Flexural strength at 7 days 30 MPa and 30°C Water absorption ASTM C 0.04% 642-97

PACKAGING

Conrep.410 RSA is packed in 28 kg kit (2.8 kg epoxy + 25.2 kg fillers).

STORAGE

Unmixed, Conrep.410 RSA may be kept for one year in its original packing protected against frost and heat. When frozen, Conrep.410 RSA recovers its properties after progressive thawing.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Can be stored up to 6 months from manufacturing date in original, non open packaging, protected from frost and high temperature.

BS 6319 Part 2 ASTM C-642-97

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

486

487

Conrep∙410 RSA

Conrep∙420 SC

case of heavy vapor inhalation, place affected person in an open-air area. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. In all cases, seek medical attention. In case of fire, use CO2 foam to extinguish. Tightly seal containers when not in use, store them away from heat and carefully dispose empty ones.

PRODUCT

EPOXY SCREED AND RESURFACING FLOOR COMPOUND CHEMICAL RESISTANCE

To caustic soda 10%: excellent To muriatic acid 10%: excellent To sulfuric acid 10%: excellent To xylene: some surface softening

Conrep.420 SC is a three- component system based on epoxy resins and selected fillers. It provides a resilient system for floor repairs and resurfacing, non absorbent and dust free. The selected fillers enable the system to hold thickness and give Conrep.420 SC a high resistance to abrasion, as well as a high tensile and compressive strength.

DISCLAIMER

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

BS 1881 Part 107& 207, ASTM C413, ASTM C 579, ASTM C 807, ASTM C 642-97 and BS 4551, ASTM C 642-97

SCOPE OF USE

Conrep.420 SC can be applied up to 50 mm thickness and it is used for flooring resurfacing or patching in industrial and commercial plants: • Warehouses • Service stations • Dairies plants • Food processing and rendering plants • Chemical plants • Metal treating plants • Machinery service areas • It is recommended for any surface subjected to chemical attack and/or wherever superior corrosion resistance and wearing quality is required.

the company’s office in your location.

NOTE

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION The substrate must be structurally sound, clean, dry. Mechanical scarifying or blasting with light sand shall be performed in order to cause 1/16” (1.6 mm) deep irregularities on the substrate. Make sure that the surface is free from laitance, dirt and loose concrete remains, by floor scabbing or vacuuming. All transitions between two different floor finishes or at floor drains shall be saw-cut in a 1/2” (13 mm) wide by 1/2” (13 mm) deep slot. All cracks over 1/16” (1.6 mm) wide should be widened to the dimensions of 1/4” (6.3 mm) wide and 1/4” (6.3 mm) deep prior to the application of Conrep.420 SC.

CHARACTERISTICS Description

3-components epoxy mortar Composition Resin, Hardener, selected fillers Density (BS 1881 Part 107) 2 g/cm³ Water absorption @ 14 days (ASTM C 413) 0.14% Compressive Strength 87MPa (ASTM C 579) @ 3 days & 40°C Compressive Strength @ 100 MPa 7days and 30°C Flexural Strength 17 MPa (BS 4551) @ 3 days & 40°C Flexural Strength 27 MPa @ 7 days and 30°C Tensile Strength 13 MPa (ASTM C 807) @ 3 days 40°C Tensile Strength (ASTM 15MPa C807) @ 14 days 40°C Bond Strength on concrete >2.8 MPa (BS 1881 Part 207) @ 14 days Pot life 2 hrs @ 20˚C 1 hr @ 30˚C

Edition: 10/07-B

488

PRODUCT PREPARATION All material should be within the proper temperature range of (10°C) to (40°C) for at least 24 hours prior to mixing. Part B, the hardener is added to Part A, the base. Mix with a special slotted paddle by using a low speed drill. The paddle should touch the inside surface of the can, bottom and sides, to insure complete mixing of the liquids. Mixing time should be 1 to 2 minutes with the proper tools. Then add gradually the fillers to the mixture and mix thoroughly until all the aggregate is mixed and a uniform epoxy mortar is obtained. PRIMING After the surface has been prepared, prime any smooth areas with Eposil plus (Primer and sealer).

489

Conrep∙420 SC

Conrep∙430 GRT

THREE-COMPONENT EPOXY REPAIR AND SELF LEVELLING GROUT NOTE

Mix thoroughly and apply in a thin, even coat with squeegee, roller or brush. Make sure the primer thoroughly wets the surface, but do not allow it to puddle. Allow to cure for a maximum 24 hours before applying the mortar. All areas must be covered and the epoxy Mortar must be laid over tacky primer before it cures.

PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply Conrep.420 SC with a steel trowel and then either finish by hand or finish with a spiked roll.

Tensile strength (ASTM C307): : 6.1 MPa at 1 day :13.2 MPa at 3 days :14.3 MPa at 7 days

PRODUCT

Conrep.430 GRT is a three-component solvent free epoxy mortar: resin, hardener and specific fillers. The mix of these components gives a very resistant, waterproof and non shrink resin mortar, particularly recommended for concrete repair. For specific cases (bedding, anchoring, flooring…), a fluid consistency is obtained by reducing the quantity of the filler to be added to the two-component epoxy.

Flexural strength (ASTM C 580:93): : 9.9 MPa at 1 day : 23.2 MPa at 3 days : 28.7 MPa at 7 days High chemical resistance to: • Common diluted acids & alkalis • Distilled water • Oil, kerosene • Sea water

SCOPE OF USE

• Concrete repair up to 50 mm thickness • Vertical anchoring of metal elements • Bedding of machine bases or bridge bearing plates • Protection of concrete floors where heavy mechanical and chemical duty is observed

CONSUMPTION

App. 2 kg / m² for 1mm

YIELD

CHARACTERISTICS Epoxy / fillers ratio Standard color (mixture) Dry extract Pot life at 20°C Viscosity (epoxy resin) Hardened & Fresh Density

14 lit. / kit (28 kg/kit).

PACKAGING

Conrep.420 SC is packed in 28 kg kit (2.8 kg epoxy + 25.2 kg fillers).

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SURFACE PREPARATION The concrete should have at least 28 days setting. The substrate must be clean and free from all loose particles, dust, cement laitance, rust, oil and other contaminants. The minimum concrete compressive strength necessary should be 25 MPa. The substrate must not contain more than 6% moisture.

1 / 5.5 in weight Grey 100% Around 20 min 500-600 mPa.s approx 2 g/cm³

PRODUCT PREPARATION Before application, the resin and the hardener components are carefully mixed with a slowly rotating electric drill with paddle. To complete mixing, the resin is poured progressively from one can to another and mixed again. Then the mineral charge is mixed with the binding resin by means of a forced action mixer. Add the mineral charge progressively while mixing until a homogeneous consistency is obtained. When used as concrete repair, all the quantity of fillers is to be added to the epoxy.

PERFORMANCES

Resistance to foot traffic after 24 hours. Full mechanical and chemical resistance after 7 days. Anti-skid property. Adherence is superior to concrete internal cohesion. Impact strength : no sign of cracks, loss of adhesion or any other type of failure observed for 1 kg falling from 1.5 m high.

empty ones.

(test done in accordance with ISO 6272: 1973)

DISCLAIMER

Abrasion resistance: 99.2 (Taber Wear index as per ASTM D4060:95).

PRODUCT APPLICATION The mortar is leveled with a trowel wetted with solvent. Recommended layer thickness per application: minimum 3 mm, maximum 50 mm. Do not add water or solvent to the mix. Application and substrate temperature : from 8 to 30ºC. Relative ambient humidity ≤ 85% Cleaning agent: toluol.

Compressive strength (as per ASTM C 579:96): : 28.5 MPa at 1 day : 55.7 MPa at 3 days : 70.8 MPa at 7 days

490

491

Conrep∙430 GRT

Conrep∙440 PR

PACKAGING

PRODUCT

EPOXY MORTAR FOR LINING AND PATCH REPAIR

Conrep.430 GRT is supplied in 17.8 kg kit: • 2.8 kg epoxy (Part A + Part B) • 15 kg specific fillers (Part C)

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION The substrate should be dry, free from loose or unsounded pieces, dust, greasy matters or paint. The substrate should be abraded by light brushing, grinding or light sandblasting depending on its quality. When a rough surface is difficult to be obtained, Eposil.plus should be used to prime the surface, Conrep.440 PR should be applied while the primer is still tacky, but not before 10 to 20 minutes of primer application.

Conrep.440 PR is a trowellable three components, shrinkage-free epoxy mortar. It is mainly used for its high bonding power and mechanical strength. The material will give excellent chemical and abrasion resistance for concrete and similar substrate.

STORAGE

Can be stored in original sealed packaging under cool (< 20°C) and dry conditions for at least 12 months from manufacturing date.

Conrep.440 PR adheres to all building materials: iron, concrete, bricks,... It has a high chemical resistance to: Petroleum, oil, grease, diluted acids, alkalis, solvents and salty water.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SCOPE OF USE

PRODUCT PREPARATION The product is already delivered in the recommended mixing proportions. Mix the resin (Part A) and the hardener (Part B) manually or with a mechanical low-speed mixer (speed < 300 rpm) in a suitable container until a homogeneous mix is obtained. Then add gradually the filler (3rd component: Part C) to the mixture while mixing thoroughly. The mixing should continue after all the components have been added for approx. 3 minutes to ensure that the product is fully blended and a homogenous mortar is obtained.

Conrep.440 PR is used in the following fields: • Lining manholes: It is especially designed for the rehabilitation of manholes (vertically and horizontally) • Repair: concrete surface patching for walls and floors, pile cap repairing. • Chemical proof and anti-acid treatment: floor screed.

ADVANTAGES

• Chemical resistance • Solvent free • Resistant to large range of industrial chemicals including acids and alkalis • High early strength • Durable: good resistance to abrasion and impact • Easy application • Water resistance and waterproofing • High bond strength

DISCLAIMER

PRODUCT APPLICATION Lining: The mixed epoxy mortar should be placed immediately after mixing. It can be applied by using a steel trowel. The mortar should be firmly compressed on all surfaces to ensure good compaction and adhesion. On vertical and overhead surfaces, avoid applications over 12 mm per layer since the mixed material may exhibit some sagging. In this case it is recommended to apply 2 or 3 layers making sure that the first layer is rough and dried before the application of any successive layer rough The setting will occur within 5 hours depending on the temperature.mixed material may exhibit some sagging.

CHARACTERISTICS Composition

the company’s office in your location.

Specific gravity BS 6319 Part 2 Pot life

NOTE

Compressive Strength @ 7 days and 30 ºC

Edition: 11/10-A

Flexural strength @ 7 days and 30 ºC

492

3 components Resin, Hardener, Siliceous fillers 2.1 ± 0.1 2 hrs. at 25 °C 1 hr. at 35 °C 85 MPa

30 MPa

493

Conrep∙440 PR

Conrep∙450 PC

to 14 days. After usage, clean tools with XYLENE.

PRODUCT

EPOXY MORTAR FOR PILE CAPING SYSTEM

Flexural Strength (BS 4551) @ 3 days & 40°C Flexural Strength @ 7 days and 30°C Tensile Strength (ASTM C 807) @ 3 days 40°C Tensile Strength (ASTM C807) @ 14 days 40°C Bond Strength on concrete (BS 1881 Part 207) @ 14 days Pot life

Conrep.450 PC is a three-component epoxy mortar. It is mainly used for pile caping. It has high bonding power, and high mechanical strength.

Ideal application temperature is between +5º C and +35º C.

PACKAGING

PROPERTIES

Conrep.440 PR is packed in 18 kg kit (2.82 kg epoxy + 15.18 kg fillers).

Conrep.450 PC adheres to most building materials: iron, concrete, bricks, etc. It has the following characteristics: • Fast setting mortar, with no shrinkage • High chemical resistance to: Petroleum, oil, grease, acids, alkalis, solvents, salt water • High strength and excellent adhesion to its substrate • Self leveling properties • Waterproof • Simple mixing techniques

STORAGE

Unmixed, Conrep.440 PR may be kept for one year in its original packing protected against frost and heat and direct sun light.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

494

2 hrs @ 20˚C 1 hr @ 30˚C

SURFACE PREPARATION If necessary, brush or grind the substrate. In case of pile cap repair, wash the pile cap with water a few hours before the application of a suitable concrete repair mortar (like Conrep.311 MC, necessary to adjust the level of the pile before the application of Conrep.450 PC. At the time of application of Conrep.450 PC, the substrate should be completely dry, free from dust, greasy matters, paint and laitance. PRODUCT PREPARATION The product is already delivered in the recommended mixing proportions. Mix the Conrep.450 PC hardener and resin to obtain a homogeneous mix, using a low speed electrical mixer (< 300 rpm). To obtain a uniform epoxy mortar compound, gradually add the graded aggregates to the epoxy fluid while mixing for 2 to 3 minutes. One full kit should be mixed, and the application should be done in a fast manner.

3-components epoxy mortar Composition Resin, Hardener, selected fillers Density (BS 1881 Part 107) 2 g/cm³ Water absorption @ 14 0.14% days (ASTM C 413) Compressive Strength 87MPa (ASTM C 579) @ 3 days and 40°C Compressive Strength @ 90 MPa 7days and 30°C

Edition: 06/11-A

>2.8 MPa

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

CHARACTERISTICS Description

15MPa

BS 1881 Part 107& 207, ASTM C413, ASTM C 579, ASTM C 807, and BS 4551.

Conrep.450 PC is used in the following applications: • Pile Cap Repair: designed to encapsulate pile tops in a range of 5-50 mm thickness. • Bonding or Anchoring: Steel bars and bolts in concrete or masonry, base plates, railway tracks, ground anchors. • Patching and repair: concrete surface patching for walls and floors. • Chemical proof and anti-acid treatment: floor screed. • Grouting bearing plates and column bases. • Heavy machinery and equipment foundations.

NOTE

13 MPa

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Conrep.450 PC can be used as an epoxy mortar with good workability (Resin + Hardener + Filler) for grouting and pile top encapsulating system.

While the company guarantees its products against defective materials,the use and application of these products are made without guarantee since the conditions of their application are beyond its control. It is recommended to verify with the company that the product is suitable for the intended use, and that this Data Sheet version is the latest one. The company may modify it without prior.

24 MPa

VOC and Formadehyde ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS None (< 10µg/l)

SCOPE OF USE

DISCLAIMER

17 MPa

PRODUCT APPLICATION Patching mortar: Apply the mortar on the surface with a spatula or a trowel. Smoothen the surface. The setting occurs within 2 to 5 hours. Pile cap: Shuttering should be done on all sides of the pile before applying Conrep.450 PC. The surface should be leak proof and sufficient

495

Conrep∙450 PC

Conrep∙501 ZRP

HEAVY DUTY ANTI-CORROSIVE ZINC-RICH PRIMER

NOTE

material should be prepared prior to pouring. The setting occurs within 2 to 5 hours. Conrep.450 PC is a flowable material, however smoothening the surface with a trowel is required. Conrep.450 PC can be applied to the pile top up to a thickness of 50 mm. After usage, clean tools with Conrep.450 PC Thinner.

YIELD

surfaces, and removal of oxydation and weld spatters. Surface defects revealed by the blast cleaning process should be sound, filled or treated in the appropriate manner.

PRODUCT

Conrep.501 ZRP is a two-component epoxy high-build zinc-rich phosphate primer with rust inhibiting properties. It is used as an anticorrosive primer suitable for a wide range of high performance topcoats. It is easy to apply and has a fast drying time. After application, it shows excellent abrasion resistance which minimizes transit and handling damage.

SHOP primeD STEEL WORKS If the zinc of shop primer shows extensive or widely scattered breakdown, overall sweep of blasting will be necessary. Other types of primer would require complete removal by blast cleaning.

SCOPE OF USE

14 lit / kit (28 kg/kit).

Conrep.ZINC is a primer on steel in high performance anticorrosive systems. It can be used on reinforcement steel while repairing concrete, or for repairing damaged galvanized steel surfaces.

PACKAGING

Conrep.450 PC is packed in 28 kg/kit (2.8 kg epoxy + 25.2 kg fillers).

CHARACTERISTICS Mixing

STORAGE

Conrep.450 PC can be stored for more than one year in its original packing protected against heat and direct sunlight.

Density of mix Color of final product Volume Solids Typical thickness (DFT) Typical thickness (WFT) Theoretical Coverage Temperature resistance

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

PRODUCT APPLICATION Mix the two components thoroughly. Apply in one coat. Types of application: Brush, Roller, conventional spray, airless spray. Conrep.501 ZRP must be clean, dry and free of zinc salts prior to over-coating

4: 1 Resin Hardener in volume 1.55 Grey 55% 50 microns 95 microns 10.5 m².litre Continuous 130˚C Intermittent 200˚C 25˚C 8 hrs

PACKAGING

Conrep.501 ZRP is packed in 4 lit & 20 lit kit.

STORAGE Conrep.501 ZRP can be stored for 18 months in its original sealed container, in cool and dry conditions.

Flash Point (of mix) Pot life30°C Drying time at 30°C Touch dry 5 hrs Dry to recoat 8 hrs Fully cured 7 days Conrep.501 ZRP will not cure adequately below 5°C. Maximum performance is reached above 10°C.

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION The substrate must be sound, clean, free from all greasy matter, and free from oxidation. Grease and oil should be removed. Where necessary, remove weld spatter and smooth weld seams or sharp edges.

DISCLAIMER

ABRASIVE BLAST CLEANING Abrasive blast provides a good cleaning to metallic

496

497

Conrep∙501 ZRP

Conrep∙510 CMA

PRODUCT Conrep.510 CMA is a mixture of asphalt, graded aggregates and special binders designed for the permanent restoration of asphalt or concrete.

Standard method of calculation: W(mm) x D(mm) x L(m) x 1.7 kg.

NOTE

PROPERTIES

Conrep.510 CMA is packed in: 25 kg steel can

COLD MIX ASPHALT

• • • • • • • • •

COVERAGE

PACKAGING

Permanent repair- guaranteed No mixing required Ready to use Works in water Works in all temperatures & conditions No heat or tack coat required Easy to use, easy cleanup Environmentally Friendly Instantly ready for traffic

STORAGE Can be stored up to 9 months from date of manufacture, in non open original packaging.

SCOPE OF USE • • • • • • • •

Potholes Utility Cuts Edge of Pavement Repair Small Overlays Driveways Parking Areas Large Cracks Walks

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE PREPARATION OF THE SUBSTRATE Clean area and remove all debris, unsound concrete, blacktop, grease, oil, paint, and any other foreign materials that will inhibit performance. PRODUCT APPLICATION Place the Conrep.510 CMA in area to be repaired. Compact/tamp with roller, vibratory plate compactor or vehicle to just 25% higher of the repair depth over level of existing pavement. For applications deeper than 102 mm, place Conrep.510 CMA in 50 mm lifts. Compact each layer before applying the next layer.

The recommended curing time is 24 hrs. at 25°C, it may require less for > 40 °C.

498

499

Conrep∙405 BFX

Conrep∙550 CFL

PURE EPOXY ANCHORING RESIN IN CARTRIDGE

CARBON FIBER LAMINATE

Metal: degrease and remove all rust, high pressure cleaning is preferred.

PRODUCT

Conrep.550 CFL is an unidirectional carbon fiber laminates for the reinforcement of beams, floors, walls and columns in concrete, wood and steel.

PRODUCT APPLICATION Degrease the carbon fibre laminate with special solvent. Apply an adhesive on the surface of the laminate that has to be glued. Mix the components of the adhesive, apply on the laminate with a spatula and make sure that no air is being enclosed. Consumption: 3 to 5 kg/m² depending on the roughness of the surface. Pot life: 30 min at 20°C. After positioning the laminate on the surface, it must be pressed until a minimal quantity of glue comes out from underneath the laminate Remove the glue that is pressed out with a special solvent.

SCOPE OF USE

Strengthening of bridges and buildings, for example in the following cases: • Repair of the original bearing capacity, like after a fire or corrosion of the rebars • To increase the load bearing capacity • Local strengthening of construction elements, when making holes through floor plates or walls • To repair errors during construction

ADVANTAGES

• High tensile strength and stiffness • High durability • Light weight • Very low creep • Flexible in use • Great lengths can be jointlessly installed • The finishing with paint or plaster demands no special requirements • Little thermal expansion • Requires little or no maintenance • Excellent corrosion, acid and alkali resistance CHARACTERISTICS Composition Minimum fibre content Width Thickness Tensile strength Maximum elongation Density Water absorption Application temperature

DISCLAIMER

undirectional carbon fibers 65% by volume 50, 70, 100 mm 1, 1.4, 2 mm >2500 MPa > 1.5% 1.6 g/cm3 < 0.1% by weight - 40 to + 130°C

the company’s office in your location.

NOTE

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION The surface of concrete, steel and wood should be cleaned , prepared and smoothened. Concrete: the surface has to be free of grease, laitance and dust. Repair unevenness and weak zones (the adhesion strength should, if possible, be superior to 1.5 N/mm²). Smothen the surface, remove all dust and make dry.

ensure that the two component conduits are free from any obstructive matters and that material can flow easily. During the anchoring you must : • Disregard the first 10 cm of the mix (approx. 2 pulls on trigger) untill obtaining a homogenous mix of grey colour. • Pay attention to the amount of product to be injected. • Insert rebar while rotating. Avoid lateral movements.

PRODUCT

Conrep.405 BFX is a two-component pure epoxy anchoring resin. It is specially recommended for heavy loads in rebar application and anchoring in solid materials.

FEATURES

• Solvent free • Odorless resin • Longer working time • High durable in wet area, under water and diamond drilled holes

CURING TIME*

SCOPE OF USE

• Rebar fixation in solid materials such as dry concrete or stones etc... • Anchoring in, concrete blocs etc... • Anchoring can be applied in horizontal or vertical positions

* Figures are based on M12 fixings. Full cure is acheived after 24 hours

CHARACTERISTICS Compressive strength Flexural strength Flexural modulus Tensile strength E modulus

PACKAGING

Conrep.405 BFX is supplied in 400 ml cartridge (1 part resin / 1 part hardener) with a mixer. Extrusion gun to be supplied separately.

82.48 N/mm2 ASTM 695 41.64 N/mm2 ASTM 795 4249.0 N/mm2 28.21 N/mm2 ASTM 638 4811.0 N/mm2

STORAGE

Can be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date. Stored away from heat and direct sunlight. Protect from freezing temperatures

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SURFACE PREPARATION The diameter of drilling should be few millimeters larger than the diameter of the rebar, for more details consult the belowed table. Clean the hole with air to remove spoils and dust.

PRODUCT PREPARATION AND APPLICATION Unscrew the cap and remove the small red plug. Screw the mixing nozzle to the cartridge. By using the specific extrusion tool, fill the hole where the anchor will be fixed. Application temperature up to 55ºC. Ideally between +5ºC & +35ºC.

RECOMMENDATIONS

Before fixing the resin, you should check the following: • Concrete quality. • After removing the cap and the small red plug from the cartridge and before inserting the plastic nozzle,

500

501

Conrep∙405 BFX

LOAD DATA AND SETTING DETAILS

8.8 GRADE STUDDING

Performance Data at Standard Embedment Depth Re-Bar Size

M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 10.9 GRADE STUDDING

M30

SETTING DETAILS

LOAD DATA FOR DIFFERENT STUD STRENGTHS, MATERIAL AND REBAR 5.8 GRADE STUDDING

A4 - 70 STAINLESS STEEL STUDDING

502

503

Conrep∙405 BFX

A4 - 80 STAINLESS STEEL STUDDING

SPACING AND EDGE DISTANCE (safety factors) Effect of Anchor Spacing

HIGH BOND REINFORCING BARS fyk=500 N/mm²

Effect of Edge Distance

Note: Tables show limits of spacing and edge distance. Concrete member thickness ≥ 2hef

504

505

Conrep∙405 BFX

DESIGN SHEAR LOADS FOR DIFFERENT STUD GRADES + REBARS

PRODUCT PREPARATION

Unscrew the cap and remove the small red plug.

Release the catch and pull back the piston. Place the cartridge in the gun.

Screw the plastic nozzle on the cartridge. Don’t use the first ten centimeters of the mix until it becomes grey .

RESIN INJECTION

NOTES: All grades shown for information. M30 studding is 8.8 grade instead of 5.8 grade. M30 for A4 - 70 tensile strength of 500 N/mm², instead of 700 N/mm². Safety Factor is 1.25 for all carbon steel. Safety Factor is 1.56 for stainless steel, up to M24, M30 is 2.0. Safety Factor is 1.5 for BSt 500 rebar.

Start injecting slowly from the bottom of the hole, while withdrawing the gun. The nozzle must be long enough for the full hole depth.

Release the piston after filling the hole.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

Edition: 06/10-A

PREPARATION OF CONCRETE BASE

Drill the hole

Clean the hole with a brush

506

Insert rebar till end of hole while rotating clock-wise. Excess mortar must be visible.

Blow out remaining dust with a pump (or compressed air).

507

Conrep∙411 EPT

SOLVENT-FREE EPOXY FILLING COMPOUND

When the maximum recoat time has been exceeded or after a prolonged exposure times it is necessary to roughen the surface in order to ensure inter-coat adhesion.

PRODUCT

Conrep.411 EPT is a two-component solvent-free epoxy filler. It is light weight, and suitable for crack and damage repair of concrete, boats, metal, wood and GRP. It can be applied up to thicknesses of 2 mm.

PRODUCT PREPARATION All materials should be applied in the proper temperature range of 10°C to 40°C. Add part B to Part A and mix 2-3 minutes using a drill and prop mixer. The epoxy must be well mixed to ensure proper chemical reaction. After mixing, place immediately.

SCOPE OF USE • • • •

Parking decks Bridge decks Industrial floors Food industry floorings

Conrep∙411 EPT

NOTE

Edition: 11/10-A

PRODUCT APPLICATION To apply the filler to concrete, use a brush and preferably by combining trowel and putty knives. Working pot life : = 1 hour, and Maximum thickness of application is 2 mm. Avoid longer recoat intervals of 48 hours. Whether applying by brush, roller or spray, wear protective clothing, goggles and gloves. Refrain from smoking at all times.

CHARACTERISTICS Composition

2 components Epoxy Resin + Hardener Color Pale yellow Volume Solids 100% Specific gravity 1.7 gr/ml VOC (USEPA Method 24) 0.1 g/l (less water)

PACKAGING

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS The following results were developed under laboratory conditions. Surface Temperature: Min. 10°C, Max 40°C. Pot life: 1 hours at 20°C. Mixing ratio by weight : 1:1 Mixing ratio by volume : 1:1 Practical coverage: 0.8- 1 m 2/lit. when applied at 1 mm thickness. Suitable for foot traffic: after 4 days at 30°C. Suitable for recoating at 30°C: 16 hours. Maximum recoating time: 48 hours.

Conrep.411 EPT is packed in 20 and 4 liters kit.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION New concrete must be a minimum of 28 days old and possesses an open surface texture with all curing compounds and sealers removed. The concrete must be clean and sound. Remove all oil, dirt, debris, paint from concrete. The surface should be prepared mechanically using sandblast, shot-blast or a scarifier, thus giving an open surface profile with the cement paste removed from the surface. The concrete surface should be dry for at least 24 hours for maximum and free from salts and other contaminants prior to over-coating.

DISCLAIMER

508

509

Conrep∙412 CRY

TWO-COMPONENT EPOXY BONDING PASTE & FAIRING COAT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

PRODUCT

Total charge passed, Columbus at 28 days ASTM C 1202:05 VOC (USEPA Method 24)

Conrep.412 CRY is a two component, medium viscosity, moisture insensitive epoxy paste used to bond fresh concrete to cured concrete, steel to fresh or hardened concrete, as a grout for anchor bolts, dowels and rebar.

Reduction in Chloride ion penetration versus control specimen: 92 % 0.1 g/l (less water)

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Conrep.412 CRY is solvent free and shows no shrinkage. It ensures a bonding that is waterproof and resistant to atmospheric corrosion in extreme climates.

SURFACE PREPARATION All surfaces to be bonded must be sound and clean with no traces of contamination.

SCOPE OF USE

While Conrep.412 CRY will bond to damp concrete, there should be no standing water. Best results are obtained on dry concrete.

Conrep.412 CRY is a multipurpose product used for a variety of applications, which include: • Bonding fresh concrete to hardened concrete • Grouting dowels, rebar and anchor bolts • Repair of damaged concrete • Bonding of all construction materials (except plastic) • Anchoring and Waterproof sealing • Cracks and general repair

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix each component separately, then pour the hardener in the resin can and mix until a homogeneous mix is obtained. Mixing can be made manually with a trowel or a spatula, or preferably with a power mixer with low rotation speed (300 rpm).

CHARACTERISTICS Composition

Resin(white) Hardener (black) Mixing ratio by weight 2.33/1 resin/hardener Working time at 20°C 40 min Curing at 20°C 1 day Pull off test > 2.5 N/mm² Compressive strength > 65 Mpa at 12 days Density (g/cm3) 1.600 BS 1881 P-107 Length change at 0.017 28 days (%) ASTM C 157/C 157 M-03 Tensile strength ASTM C 307 7 Days 7.4 N/mm² 28 Days 16.2 N/mm² Water absorption (%) 0.07 at 28 days ASTM C 413

Cleaning Prior to curing, Conrep.412 CRY may be removed from tools and equipment using toluen, xylene, lacquer thinners or MEK PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply the product on the substrate so as to have a 1 mm thick bonding layer after assembling. On very rough surfaces let the product penetrate all irregularities of the support. The bonding must be performed only when the product is tacky., i.e. between 10 min and 2 hrs after application of the product. If epoxy paint is to be applied on Conrep.412 CRY, in this case make sure to apply the paint within 24 hours from the application of Conrep.412 CRY.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

CONSUMPTION

1.6 kg/m² at 1 mm thick.

PACKAGING (KIT)

Conrep.412 CRY is supplied in 1 kg and 6.2 Kg kit in two metal cans.

STORAGE

1 year after manufacturing date, in original packaging and in dry area.

510

511

Conrep∙435 ANC

HIGH PERFORMANCE STYRENE-FREE ANCHORING RESIN PACKAGING

PRODUCT

Conrep.435 ANC is a polyester styrene free resin two part chemicals in one tube.

Conrep.435 ANC is supplied in 300 ml cartridge, 12 per box

FEATURES

STORAGE

• High performance • Fast curing • Non Flammable

Can be stored up to 9 months from manufacturing date, in cool, dry, well ventilated area away from heat sources, at 5ºC to + 25ºC and out of direct sunlight.

• low odor • Cost economical • No need for special dispencer

SCOPE OF USE

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

• Rebar fixation • Fixing machines, plates… • Anchoring fixation in solid and hollow substrates... CHARACTERISTICS Compressive strength Flexural strength Flexural modulus Tensile strength E modulus

53.55 N/mm2 ASTM 695 24.08 N/mm2 ASTM 795 2927.67 N/mm2 12.48 N/mm2 ASTM 638 9651.33 N/mm2

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Substrates must be clean, sound and dry. Drill the substrate. Diameter of hole and length of embedment depend on the size of rebar and the needed loading capacity. Refer to belowed table. Thoroughly clean the hole to remove spoil using a wire brush and air blower. Unscrew the cap of the cartridge and attach the static mixer. Insert the cartridge into a standard application gun. Apply nozzle to hole, working from base outwards and approximately half fill the hole. Insert anchor into resin rotating slowly by hand. Allow full curing time (see curing time table) prior fixing the loading charge. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

CURING TIME* Base Material Gel Time Loading Time Temperature (°C) mins mins 35 20 3 25 8 20 15 13 20 5 21 30 -5 50 90 -10** 60 180 * Figures are based on M12 fixings. Full cure is achieved after 24 hours. ** Resin temperature must e at least 20°C

512

LOAD DATA AND SETTING DETAILS

Performance Data at Standard Embedment Depth Concrete, f ck, cube = 25 N/mm2 (C20/25) 5.8 Grade Steel Characteristic Resistance (kN) Tension Shear (N Rk ) (V Rk )

Re-Bar Size

Design Resistance (kN) Tension Shear (N Rd ) (V Rd )

Recommended Load (kN) Tension Shear (Nrec ) (Vrec )

Characteristic Edge Characteristic Spacing Distance (mm) (mm) Tension Shear (C cr, N) (Ccr, V )

20.2

10.1

8.1

5.8

100

160

M10

28.5

15.6

11.4

12.5

8.1

8.9

130

180

M12

40.5

23.1

16.2

18.5

11.6

13.2

110

150

220

M16

69.2

41.8

27.7

33.5

19.8

23.9

125

170

250

M20

89.9

66.8

40.7

53.5

29.1

38.2

170

190

340

M24

112.6

95.7

46.3

76.6

33.1

54.7

210

240

420

M30

280

350

560

SETTING DETAILS Hole Diameter Hole Diameter in Fixture in Concrete (mm) (mm)

10 12 14 18 24 28 35

9 11 13 17 22 26 33

LOADING DATA IN HOLLOW SUBSTRATES Standard Embedment in concrete (mm) 80 90 110

Recommended Torque (Nm) Concret / Brick 11 / 5 22 / 17 38 / 28

125 170 210 280

95 / 75 170 / 260 / 480 / -

EDGE DISTANCE (CONCRETE) EDGE (mm) 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 125 150 170 190 210 240 260 280

M8 0.65 0.70 0.75 1.00

0.67 0.71 0.76 1.00

M12

0.69 0.73 0.76 1.00

M16

0.69 0.72 0.75 1.00

M20

0.64 0.66 0.70 0.75 1.00

Brickwork 20.5 N/mm² 1.7

Blockwork 7 N/mm² 0.8

M10 M12 M16

3.4 4.8 5.6

1.7 2.7 3.6

EDGE DISTANCE (CONCRETE)

TENSILE: EDGE REDUCTION FACTORS M10

Recommended Load (kN) Tension or Shear (Fec )

Size

M24

0.64 0.69 0.72 0.76 1.00

EDGE (mm) 60 75 90 100 115 130 150 170 190 210 240 280 300 325 350

M30

0.67 0.70 0.74 0.77 1.00

Edition: 03/11-A

513

M8 0.65 0.76 0.88 1.00

TENSILE: EDGE REDUCTION FACTORS M10 0.70 0.80 0.87 0.97 1.00

M12 0.69 0.75 0.83 0.91 1.00

M16

0.68 0.75 0.83 0.92 1.00

M20

0.66 0.73 0.80 1.00

M24

0.63 0.69 0.74 0.80 1.00

M30

0.65 0.71 0.80 0.84 0.90 1.00

Conrep∙435 ANC

SPACING (CONCRETE)

PREPARATION OF CONCRETE BASE

EDGE (mm) 50 60 70 80 90 100 115 130 150 170 190 210 240 280 300 325 350

TENSILE: EDGE REDUCTION FACTORS M8 0.66 0.69 0.72 0.75 0.78 1.00

M10 0.69 0.72 0.75 0.78 0.82 1.00

M12

0.70 0.73 0.76 0.80 1.00

M16

M20

M24

M30

Drill the hole 0.69 0.72 0.75 0.78 1.00

0.68 0.70 0.73 0.75 1.00

Clean the hole with a brush

Blow out remaining dust with a pump (or compressed air).

PRODUCT PREPARATION

0.69 0.71 0.75 0.77 0.79 1.00

DESIGN SHEAR LOADS FOR DIFFERENT STUD GRADES

Unscrew the cap Release the catch and pull back the piston. Place the cartridge in the gun.

Screw the plastic nozzle on the cartridge. Don’t use the first ten centimeters of the mix until it becomes grey .

RESIN INJECTION

Notes

All grades shown for information. M30 studding is 8.8 grade instead of 5.8 grade. M30 for A4-70 tensile strength of 500 N/mm², instead of 700 N/mm². Safety factor is 1.25 for all carbon steel. safety factoris 1.56 for stainless steel, up to M24, M30 is 2.0.

514

Start injecting slowly from the bottom of the hole, while withdrawing the gun. The nozzle must be long enough for the full hole depth.

Release the piston after filling the hole.

515

Insert rebar till end of hole while rotating clock-wise. Excess mortar must be visible.

Biflex∙PL

SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE - PLAIN

REINFORCEMENT CORE AND COATING MIXTURE

GENERAL

A high performance elastomeric waterproofing membrane which combines the ability to withstand high ambient temperature with the usual characteristics of an SBS membrane of high flexibility at low temperature that makes it easy to apply at sub-zero temperature. It is suitable for all types of waterproofing works including roofs, foundation works, basement tankings, where high flexibility and malleability are required.

Biflex.PL waterproofing membranes is reinforced with 180 grams non woven spun bond polyester reinforcement that gives the membrane dimensional stability and resistance to puncture. It is coated with a specially formulated mixture of SBS modified bitumen which makes the membrane resistant to water, atmospheric agents, and malleable at low temperature while retaining a high softening point.

SPECIAL FEATURES

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

The membrane must first be unrolled and laid down on the area to which it is to be applied. Check the orientation carefully. Adjacent rolls should then be laid, each overlapping the one next to it by 10 cm on the side and 15 cm at the ends. Taking care not to change the orientation of each roll, reverse the process until each has been re-rolled. When laying the roll, the lower surface should be heated with a propane torch, using sweeping left to right movements. This will melt the lower surface of the membrane and allow it to stick to the substrate.Continue this process for each subsequent roll, remembering that the overlaps must be 10 cm for the edges and 15 cm at the ends. When the process is complete, carry out an inspection to ensure total adhesion. When applied in a totally bonded system, a coat of Waterproof.prime WB or SB should be applied at the rate of 200 – 300 g/m².

• Positive vapour barrier. • Excellent resistance to atmospheric agents. • High flexibility during application at sub-zero temperature with no physical strains. • High malleability making it entirely suitable for difficult basement and foundation works. • High softening point allowing it to maintain shape stability at high temperatures. • Withstand thermal shocks. • Accommodates structural movements. • Resistant to chemical attacks.

SIZE AND SURFACE FINISH

Biflex.PL is supplied in 1 m wide and 10 m length. The surface finish is either sanded or protected with PE film.

PROPERTIES

TYPICAL VALUES

TEST METHOD

4 mm

ASTM D 751

Thickness Reinforcement base Penetration (DOW) of coating mixture

≥ 145ºC

ASTM D36

35-45 dm

ASTM D5

Flexibility at low temperature

-10 to -20ºC

UEAtc

Service ambient Temperature

-40ºC to 80ºC

ELONGATION

LAP JOINT STRENGTH

Longitudinal Transverse

PUNCTURE RESISTANCE

Static Dynamic

HEAT FLOW RESISTANCE, 100ºC, 2 hrs Water Absorption Impermeability of the Membrane of water Resistance to Thermal Ageing Resistance to Ageing due to UV-Radiation Water Vapour Permeability Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance

550 N 350 N

Longitudinal Transverse

850 N/5 cm

Longitudinal Transverse

50%

Longitudinal Transverse

850 N/5 cm

700 N/5 cm 55% 700 N/5 cm

516

ASTM D 5147

L 4 (not perforated at 25 kg, 10 mm ball) l 4 (not perforated at 9 joules impact energy, 5 mm ball)

UEAtc

No Flow Less than 0.15% Absolutely Impermeable No signs of deterioration after the test No signs of deterioration after 2000 hours Absolutely Impermeable > 110 PSI

UEAtc ASTM D570 UEAtc UEAtc ASTM G53 ASTM E96 DIN 1048

Biflex.membranes are resistant to chlorides, sulphates and phosphates found in ground water.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

180 gms/m² non woven spunbond Polyester mat

Softening point (R+B) of coating mixture

TENSILE STRENGTH

TEAR RESISTANCE

UEAtc,

UEAtc

517

Biflex∙SL

SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE - SLATED

REINFORCEMENT CORE AND COATING MIXTURE

GENERAL

TEAR RESISTANCE

It is suitable for all types of waterproofing works including roofs, foundation works, basement tanking, where high flexibility and malleability are required.

Biflex.SL waterproofing membranes is reinforced with 180 grams non woven spun bond polyester reinforcement that gives the membrane dimensional stability and resistance to puncture. It is coated with a specially formulated mixture of SBS modified bitumen which makes the membrane resistant to water, atmospheric agents, and malleable at low temperature while retaining a high softening point.

SPECIAL FEATURES

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SIZE AND SURFACE FINISH

Biflex.SL is supplied in 1 m wide and 10 m length. The surface finish is covered with slates of natural grey to resist UV rays.

PROPERTIES

TYPICAL VALUES

TEST METHOD

4 mm

ASTM D 751

Thickness Reinforcement base

≥ 135ºC

ASTM D36

20-35 dm

ASTM D5

Flexibility at low temperature

-10 to -20ºC

UEAtc

Service ambient Temperature

-40ºC to 80ºC

Penetration (DOW) of coating mixture

ELONGATION

LAP JOINT STRENGTH

550 N 350 N L 4 (not perforated at 25 kg, 10 mm ball) PUNCTURE RESISTANCE Static Dynamic l 4 (not perforated at 9 joules impact energy, 5 mm ball) No Flow HEAT FLOW RESISTANCE, 100ºC, 2 hrs Less than 0.15% Water Absorption Absolutely Impermeable Impermeability of the Membrane of water No signs of deterioration after the test Resistance to Thermal Ageing Resistance to Ageing due to UV-Radiation No signs of deterioration after 2000 hours Water Vapour Permeability Absolutely Impermeable Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance > 110 PSI BLIFLEX membranes are resistant to chlorides, sulphates and phosphates found in ground water.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

Longitudinal

850 N/5 cm

Transverse

700 N/5 cm

Longitudinal

50%

Transverse

55%

Longitudinal

850 N/5 cm

Transverse

700 N/5 cm

518

ASTM D 5147 UEAtc

UEAtc ASTM D570 UEAtc UEAtc ASTM G53 ASTM E96 DIN 1048

180 gms/m² non woven spunbond Polyester mat

Softening point (R+B) of coating mixture

TENSILE STRENGTH

Longitudinal Transverse

UEAtc,

UEAtc

519

Biflex∙PL anti-root 4mm

SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE FOR ROOF GARDEN GENERAL

REINFORCEMENT CORE AND COATING MIXTURE

Biflex.ANTIROOT waterproofing membranes is reinforced with 180 g/m² non woven spunbond polyester reinforcement that gives the membrane dimensional stability and resistance to puncture. It is coated with a specially formulated mixture of SBS modified bitumen and anti-root additive which makes the membrane resistant to water, atmospheric agents, and plantations roots and malleable at low temperature while retaining a high softening point.

The SBS Bitumen Compound is carefully blended with high quality anti-root additives that makes it suitable for all types of waterproofing works especially roofs gardens, flower boxes and underground backfilled structures.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

The membrane must first be unrolled and laid down on the area to which it is to be applied. Check the orientation carefully. Adjacent rolls should then be laid, each overlapping the one next to it by 10 cm on the side and 15 cm at the ends. Taking care not to change the orientation of each roll, reverse the process until each has been re-rolled. When laying the roll, the lower surface should be heated with a propane torch, using sweeping left to right movements. This will melt the lower surface of the membrane and allow it to stick to the substrate. Continue this process for each subsequent roll, remembering that the overlaps must be 10 cm for the edges and 15 cm at the ends. When the process is complete, carry out an inspection to ensure total adhesion. When applied in a totally bonded system, a coat of Waterproof.prime WB or SB should be applied at the rate of 200-300 g/m2.

SPECIAL FEATURES

• Positive vapor barrier • Excellent resistance to atmospheric agents • High flexibility during application at sub-zero temperature with no physical strains • High malleability making it entirely suitable for difficult basement and foundation works. • High softening point allowing it to maintain shape stability at high temperatures. • Withstand thermal shocks • Accommodates structural movements • Resistant to chemical attacks

SIZE AND SURFACE FINISH

Biflex.ANTIROOT is available in 1 m wide and 10 m length. The surface finish is sanded plain.

PROPERTIES Thickness Reinforcement base Softening point (R+B) of coating mixture Penetration (DOW) of coating mixture Flexibility at low temperature (-10ºC) Creepinf of the membrane applied on a 60°C sloped surface at a test temperature of 100°C during 120 hours.

TYPICAL VALUES

4 mm 180 gms/m2 non woven spunbond Polyester mat 150ºC 35 dm No cracking No cracking

700 N/5 cm 550 N/5 cm 40% 50% 700 N/5 cm 550 N/5 cm 170 N 180 N

TENSILE STRENGTH Longitudinal Transverse ELONGATION Longitudinal Transverse LAP JOINT STRENGTH Longitudinal Transverse TEAR RESISTANCE Longitudinal Transverse

520

TEST METHOD

PUNCTURE RESISTANCE

Static Dynamic

Water Absorption - PBS Impermeability of the Membrane to water Resistance to Thermal Ageing Resistance to Ageing due to UV-Radiation

L 4 (not perforated at 25 kg, 10 mm ball) l 4 (not perforated at 9 joules impact energy, 5 mm ball) Less than 0.15% Absolutely Impermeable No signs of deterioration after the test No signs of deterioration after the test

Water Vapor Permeability

Absolutely Impermeable 0.8 Kg/ cm2

Adhesion strength of the membrane fully bonded to a concrete deck, previously treated witha Dermaprimer

UEAtc ASTM D570 UEAtc UEAtc ASTM G53 ASTM E96 UEAtc

Biflex.membranes are resistant to chlorides, sulphates and phosphates found in ground water.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

ASTM D36 ASTM D5 UEAtc, ASTM D146 UEAtc

ASTM D146 UEAtc, ASTM D146 UEAtc UEAtc

521

Uniflex∙PL 3 mm

SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE - PLAIN

PRODUCT

REINFORCEMENT CORE AND COATING MIXTURE

Uniflex.waterproofing membranes is reinforced with 180 grams non woven spun bond polyester reinforcement that gives the membrane dimensional stability and resistance to puncture. It is coated with a specially formulated mixture of SBS modified bitumen which makes the membrane resistant to water, atmospheric agents, and malleable at low temperature while retaining a high softening point.

It is suitable for all types of waterproofing works including roofs, foundation works, basement tankings, where high flexibility and malleability are required.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

The membrane must first be unrolled and laid down on the area to which it is to be applied. Check the orientation carefully. Adjacent rolls should then be laid, each overlapping the one next to it by 10 cm on the side and 15 cm at the ends. Taking care not to change the orientation of each roll, reverse the process until each has been re-rolled. When laying the roll, the lower surface should be heated with a propane torch, using sweeping left to right movements. This will melt the lower surface of the membrane and allow it to stick to the substrate. On slated membranes you should either remove the special selvedge paper or on sand bottom rolls torch the special polypropylene selvedge. Continue this process for each subsequent roll, remembering that the overlaps must be 10 cm for the edges and 15 cm at the ends. When the process is complete, carry out an inspection to ensure total adhesion. In totally bonded systems, Uniflex.PL 3 mm should be applied over one coat of Waterproof.prime WB or SB at the rate of 200 – 300 g/m².

SPECIAL FEATURES

• Positive vapour barrier • Excellent resistance to atmospheric agents • High flexibility during application at sub-zero temperature with no physical strains. • High malleability making it entirely suitable for difficult basement and foundation works • High softening point allowing it to maintain shape stability at high temperatures • Withstand thermal shocks • Accommodates structural movements. • Resistant to chemical attacks

SIZE AND SURFACE FINISH

Uniflex.is available in 1 X 10 meter rolls. The surface finish is polyethylene film.

PROPERTIES

TYPICAL VALUES

TEST METHOD

3 mm

ASTM D 751

Thickness Reinforcement base

TEAR RESISTANCE

Longitudinal Transverse Static Dynamic

550 N 350 N L 4 (not perforated at 25 kg, 10 mm ball) PUNCTURE RESISTANCE l 4 (not perforated at 9 joules impact energy, 5 mm ball) HEAT FLOW RESISTANCE, 100ºC, 2 hrs No Flow Less than 0.15% Water Absorption Absolutely Impermeable Impermeability of the Membrane of water No signs of deterioration after the test Resistance to Thermal Ageing Resistance to Ageing due to UV-Radiation No signs of deterioration after 2000 hours Absolutely Impermeable Water Vapour Permeability Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance > 110 PSI Uniflex.membranes are resistant to chlorides, sulphates and phosphates found in ground water.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

Penetration (DOW) of coating mixture Flexibility at low temperature Service ambient Temperature TENSILE STRENGTH Longitudinal Transverse

≥ 135ºC

ASTM D36

20-35 dm -10 to -20ºC -40ºC to 80ºC

ASTM D5

850 N/5 cm 700 N/5 cm

UEAtc,

Edition: 11/08-A **Available only in MENA

UEAtc

ELONGATION

Longitudinal Transverse

50% 55%

UEAtc,

LAP JOINT STRENGTH

Longitudinal Transverse

850 N/5 cm 700 N/5 cm

UEAtc

522

UEAtc ASTM D570 UEAtc UEAtc ASTM G53 ASTM E96 DIN 1048

180 gms/m² non woven spunbond Polyester mat

Softening point (R+B) of coating mixture

ASTM D 5147 UEAtc

523

Biplas∙PL 4 mm

APP MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE- PLAIN

GENERAL

APPLICATION TOOLS & EQUIPMENT

Biplas.PL is an ideal membrane for the waterproofing of roof, foundations, basements and footings, tanking and car parks etc. It can also be used for the waterproofing of tunnels, bridges, swimming pools, ramps and as a tank lining.

You will need a propane gas torch, a gas cylinder, a knife for cutting and trimming and a trowel with a rounded end.

PACKAGING

SPECIAL FEATURES

The packaging is rolls of 1 m wide and 10 m length.

• • • • •

Provides a positive barrier to water and vapor. Has excellent resistance to atmospheric agents. High flexibility at low temperatures. Maintains shape stability at high temperatures. Its high performance capabilities enable it to withstand thermal shocks, making it ideal for use in exposed systems. • Resistance to water-borne chemical attack. • Accommodates structural movement.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

The application of Biplas.PL waterproofing membrane is both easy and quick. Where it is to be laid directly in a one-layer system on concrete, tiles or an existing roofing system, a coat of Waterproof.Prime WB or SB at the rate of 200-300 g/m² should first be applied. Allow this coating to dry thoroughly. In areas of high humidity we recommend it should be left overnight. As in all other application, the membrane should first be unrolled and positioned correctly on the surface to be treated. Each roll should overlap the adjacent roll by 10 cm. Once the roll has been positioned correctly, the membrane should be rolled up gain, taking care not to change its orientation. Using left to right movements, heat the lower surface of the membrane with a propane gas torch. This will cause slight surface melting and adhesion to the substrate. Continue the above method for consecutive rolls remembering overlaps must be 10 cm and end laps 15 cm. Inspection of lap joints must be carried out to ensure total adhesion.

COATING MIXTURE

The coating / impregnation mixture used in Biplas.PL waterproofing membrane, which is also the waterproofing agent, is bitumen which has been heavily modified with APP plastomeric thermoplastic resins, stabilizers and antioxidants. This mixture gives the membrane excellent resistance to atmospheric agents and ageing, whilst maintaining shape stability at high temperatures, thus allowing high adhesion strength and making it easy to apply, with consequent saving in time and manpower.

REINFORCEMENT CORE

The membranes are reinforced with a core of nonwoven spun bond with continuous thread Polyester fabric, which has a weight of 180 g/m² and is both rot-proof and highly malleable. It is this core which gives the membrane its excellent mechanical properties, allowing for good elongation and affording high resistance to puncture. As an added feature, this core is first impregnated with the coating mixture.

Biplas∙PL 4 mm

PROPERTIES Softening point (R+B) of coating mixture Penetration (DOW) of coating mixture Shape stability at 120ºC or 248ºF Flexibility at low temperature Service ambient Temperature Reinforcement core of the membrane Membrane thickness +5% TENSILE STRENGTH Longitudinal Transverse ELONGATION Longitudinal Transverse

TYPICAL VALUES 155ºC 12-20 dm No deformation (-2ºC to -5ºC) -10ºC to 100ºC 180 g/m² Polyester (non woven) 4 mm

TEST METHOD ASTM D36 ASTM D5

750 N/5 cm 550 N/5 cm 40% 45%

UEAtc

190 N 190 N L4 l4

UEAtc

TEAR RESISTANCE Longitudinal Transverse PUNCTURE RESISTANCE Static Dynamic

< 0.2 g / 24 hr / m² Water vapour permeability Complies Resistance to Thermal Ageing Resistance to Ageing due to UV-Radiation Complies No signs of deterioration after the test Resistance to Thermal Hydro Shock Biplas.membranes are resistant to chlorides, sulphates and phosphates found in ground water.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

ASTM D751

UEAtc

UEAtc ASTM E96 UEAtc UEAtc UEAtc

FINISH

The upper surface of the membrane can either be covered with a coating of fine sand or with a thin polyethylene film. The bottom surface is covered with a thin film of polyethylene that is burnt-off during the torching process.

524

UEAtc

525

Biplas∙SL 4 mm

APP MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE - SLATED

GENERAL

SIZE AND PACKAGING

Biplas.SL is a high performance waterproofing membrane especially formulated with reflective natural or color slates to give maximum protection against UV radiation in an exposed system application.

Biplas.SL membrane are manufactured and supplied in rolls of 1 m wide and 10 m length shrink-wrapped on pallets. The lower surface is covered with a thin, flammable polyethylene film that is bonded to the membrane, and is burnt off during torching. A lower surface covered with sand can be provided on demand.

The presence of the slates will also provide an aesthetically pleasant surface. It is an ideal membrane re-roofing applications where it can be placed on top of the existing surface, providing an economical and efficient solution to leaking roofs. Biplas.SL membrane is resistant to water-borne chemical attack.

APPLICATION TOOLS & EQUIPMENT

The tools and equipment required to apply Biplas. membrane include a propane gas torch with related cylinder, a knife for cutting and trimming, a trowel with a rounded end.

COATING MIXTURE

The coating compound mix of Biplas.SL membrane is produced with high quality distilled bitumen modified with selected plastomeric (APP) polymers and antioxidants. This mixture gives the membrane its excellent resistance to atmospheric agents and thermal ageing. The mix also allows constant flexibility and plasticity at low or high temperatures. The compound also allows for quick application and torching.

METHOD OF APPLICATION

The application of Biplas.SL is both easy and quick. Where it is to be laid directly in a one-layer system on concrete, tiles or an existing roofing system, a coat of Waterproof.Prime WB or SB at the rate of 200-300 g/m² should first be applied. Allow this coating to dry thoroughly. In areas of high humidity we recommend it should be left overnight. As in all other application, the membrane should first be unrolled and positioned correctly on the surface to be treated. Each roll should overlap the adjacent roll by the size of the selvedge, i.e. 10 cm. Once the roll has been positioned correctly, the membrane should be rolled up again, taking care not to change its orientation. Using left to right movements, heat the lower surface of the membrane with a propane gas torch. This will cause slight surface melting and adhesion to the substrate. Continue the above method for consecutive rolls remembering overlaps must always cover the whole selvedge and end laps to be minimum 15 cm. Inspection of lap joints must be carried out to ensure total adhesion.

SELF PROTECTING SHIELD

During the manufacturing process the upper surface of the membrane is uniformly coated with a layer of natural slate flakes (chips/granules) that adhere to the top surface of the membrane at high temperature. During this process the selvedge of the slated surface is left uncoated and 10 cm covered with a flammable film that can be torched, thus providing continuity at the overlaps and a perfect watertight seal. The slate flakes provide protection for the waterproofing covering from ageing caused by infra red and UV rays. The reflective power of the natural slate also lowers the temperature underneath. The slate flakes may come in a variety of colors.

Biplas∙SL 4 mm

PROPERTIES Softening point (R+B) of coating mixture

TYPICAL VALUES 155ºC 12-20 dmm -2ºC to -5ºC -10ºC to 100 Min. 4.1 mm 750 N/5cm 550 N/5cm

TEST METHOD ASTM D36 ASTM D5 UEAtc

ELONGATION Longitudinal Transverse TEAR RESISTANCE Longitudinal Transverse

40% 45% 550 N 400 N

UEAtc

PUNCTURE RESISTANCE Static Dynamic Dimension Stability 120ºC (2 Hrs) Resistance to water pressure (24 Hrs)

L 4 (not perforated at 25 kg, 10 mm ball) l 4 (not perforated at 9 joules impact energy, 5 mm ball)

UEAtc

No change > 60 Kpa Complies Complies

UEAtc

Penetration of coating mixture at 25oC Flexibility at low temperature Service ambient Temperature Thickness TENSILE STRENGTH Longitudinal Transverse

Resistance to Ageing due to UV-Radiation Resistance to Thermal Ageing

ASTM D5147

UEAtc UEAtc

Biplas.membranes are resistant to chlorides, sulphates and phosphates found in ground water.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

REINFORCEMENT CORE

Biplas.SL membranes are reinforced with a 180 g/m² non woven spun bond polyester core. The core is of continuous thread, rot-proof material which has a high tensile strength and offers high resistance to tear and puncturing loads and remains highly flexible at temperatures below 0ºC.

526

ASTM D751 UEAtc

527

Biplas∙PL 3 & 4 mm

APP MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE - PLAIN

GENERAL

THICKNESS, SIZE & SURFACE FINISH

Biplas.PL Roofing and Waterproofing Membranes are available in a variety of thicknesses to suit all application requirements. Standard roll size is 1 x 10 meter lengths. The upper surface is finished in sand or polyethylane film. The lower surface has a Polyethylene film which melts when torched.

Biplas.PL is a quality APP modified Bituminous Membrane, developed using the most up-to-date technology that enables it to perform over time and give long lasting waterproofing characteristics.

FEATURES OF THE Biplas.PL MEMBRANE • • • • • •

Positive barrier to water & vapour. Excellent resistance to atmospheric agents. High flexibility at low temperatures. Withstands thermal shocks. Easy application. General purpose membrane for various waterproofing jobs: roofing wet areas, basements, re-roofing etc. • Resistant to water borne chemical attack.

APPLICATION METHODS

The application of Biplas.PL roofing and waterproofing membranes is easy and quick by “torch-on” method: After having mopped the surface to be waterproofed with 200-300 g/m² of Waterproof.WB Primer, allow a drying time up to 24 hours. The membrane is unrolled and placed in the position where it has to be torched on later The membrane is then re-rolled without changing the given orientation and unrolled again, while heating the lower surface with a propane gas torch causing surface melting and subsequent adhesion to the primed surface.

REINFORCEMENT CORE & COATING MIXTURE

Biplas.PL Roofing and Waterproofing membrane is manufactured with 160 gm/m² non-woven polyester reinforcements that are impregnated and coated with a mixture of APP Polymer modified bitumen. This mixture gives the membrane its excellent properties of resistance to atmospheric agents, and to ageing. It ensures shape stability at high temperatures, and facilitates the ease of application and adhesion.

PROPERTIES Thickness(nominal) Membrane Weight

Membranes should overlap each other by at least 10 cm at the side lap and 15 cm at the end laps. Inspection of lap joints must be carried out to ensure total adhesion. Smooth out seams with a rounded trowel.

VALUES Biplas.PL 3mm 3 mm 3.5 kg/m²

Biplas.PL 4mm 4 mm 4.6Kg/m²

12-20 dm 0 to -4ºC -10ºC to 100ºC

ASTM D5

700 N/5 cm 500 N/5 cm

UEAtc

ELONGATION Longitudinal Transverse

40% 40%

UEAtc

TEAR RESISTANCE Longitudinal Transverse

600 N 450 N

UEAtc

Flexibility at low temperature Service Ambient Temperature TENSILE STRENGTGH Longitudinal Transverse

528

ASTM D5147 UEAtc UEAtc UEAtc

< 0.2g / 24 hr / m²

ASTM E 96

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

ASTM D751 ASTM D36

Penetration of coating mixture at 25ºC

Resistance to Ageing due to UV Radiation Water Vapour Permeability Biplas.PL membranes are resistant to chlorides sulphates and phosphates found in ground water.

Less than 0.15% > 60 kpa Complies Complies

TEST METHOD

155ºC

Softening point (R+B) of Coating Mixture

Water Absorption Resistance to water pressure (24 hr) Resistance to Thermal Ageing

UEAtc

529

Biplon∙PL 4 & 5 mm

APP MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE WITH DOUBLE REINFORCEMENTS INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

GENERAL

The application of Biplon.PL is easy and quick. Where it is to be laid directly in a one-layer system on concrete, tiles or an existing roofing system, a coat of Waterproof.Prime WB at the rate of 200 – 300 grms/m² should first be applied. Allow this coating to dry thoroughly, in case of high humidity we recommend it should be left overnight.

Biplon.PL is an APP modified waterproofing membrane with double reinforcements. Incorporated in Biplon. are a non-woven polyester carrier and a fiberglass mat. The non woven polyester carrier used in Biplon.PL has excellent puncture resistance. The fiberglass mat is situated just below the top surface of the membrane. This helps maintain shape stability. The excellent mechanical properties of Biplon.make it comprehensively versatile.

As in all other applications, the membrane should first be unrolled and positioned correctly on the surface to be treated. Each roll should overlap the adjacent roll by 10 cm. Once the roll has been positioned correctly, the membrane should be rolled up again; taking care not to change its orientation. Using left to right movements, heat the lower surface of the membrane with a propane gas torch. This will cause slight surface melting and adhesion to the substrate. Continue the above method for consecutive rolls remembering overlaps must be 10 cm and end laps 15 cm.

It is specially formulated for the waterproofing of bridge decks, viaducts, aqueducts and also for new roofing and re-roofing. It is also recommended for elevated road-ways, bridge ramps, roof, car park etc.

SPECIAL FEATURES

• Positive barrier to water and vapor. • Specially designed for bridge deck waterproofing and does not require any protection system when applied under asphalt wearing course. • Maintain shape stability at high temperatures. • High flexibility at low temperatures. • Excellent resistance to atmospheric agents. • Accommodate structural movements. • High resistance to traffic and site abuse. • Resistant to acids, sulphates & chlorides. • Resistant to water-borne chemical attack. • Ideal bridge-deck waterproofing.

PROPERTIES

Thickness ± 5% Reinforcement base Softening point (R+B) of coating mixture Penetration (DOW) of coating mixture Flexibility at low temperature (-10ºC) Service ambient Temperature TENSILE STRENGTH Longitudinal Transverse

Inspection of Lap Joints must be carried out to ensure total adhesion.

TYPICAL VALUES 4mm, 5 mm

fiberglass : 50 g/m² Polyester mat : 180 g/m² 150ºC - 155ºC 10-25 dm No cracking 100ºC to -40ºC 800 N/5cm 600 N/5cm

ELONGATION Longitudinal Transverse LOAD STRAIN Longitudinal PRODUCT Transverse LAP JOINT STRENGTH Longitudinal Transverse

40% 40% 32,000 24,000 800 N/5cm 600 N/5cm

530

TEAR RESISTANCE Longitudinal Transverse PUNCTURE RESISTANCE Static Dynamic Water Absorption- PBS Impermeability of the Membrane to water Creeping of the membrane applied on a 60ºC sloped surface at a rest temperature of 100ºC during 120 hours. Resistance to thermal Ageing Resistance to Ageing due to UV-Radiation Water Vapour Permeability Adhesion strength of the membrane fully bonded to a concrete deck, previously tested with Waterproof.Prime WB

195 N 205 N

UEAtc

L4 I4 Less than 0.15% Absolutely Impermeable No creeping

UEAtc ASTM D570 UEAtc UEAtc

No signs of deterioration after the test No signs of deterioration after the test Absolutely Impermeable 0.8 Kg/cm²

UEAtc ASTM G53 ASTM E96 UEAtc

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

TEST METHOD ASTM D751

ASTM D36 ASTM D5 UEAtc UEAtc UEAtc CGSB-37-GP56M UEAtc

531

Damp∙PC

Self∙AD

DAMP PROOFING MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE

A PRE-FABRICATED REINFORCED MULTI-PLY WATERPROOFING FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

APPLICATION METHOD

PRODUCT

Loose laid / Torch-on Torchable overlaps

A DPC (Damp.PC) is intended to provide a barrier to the passage of moisture or water from the exterior of the building to the interior, from the ground to the structure, or from one part of the structure to another.

SURFACE FINISH

Damp.PC is supplied in 100 mm,150 mm, 200 mm, 500 mm and 1000 mm wide, and 10 m length. The surface finish is top-PE and bottom-PE.

SCOPE OF USE DCP is used in: • Blockworks • Basement • Roofs • Other civil works

Installation must follow normal good practice for the detailing of DPCs, as set in the relevant clauses of BS 5628: Part 3:2001. The following installation practices are essential: The DPC must extend through the full thickness of the wall or wall-leaf, including pointing, applied rendering or other facing material and project beyond the external face by 5 mm.

All lap joints in the DPC must have a 100mm overlap and be completely sealed Application should start at 15cm from the floor.

Self.AD is a general purpose waterproofing membrane suitable for different waterproofing application. Mainly recommended but not restricted to: • Basement • Foundation dressing • Piles and Footing Wrapping • Bathroom and kitchen waterproofing • Terraces and covered roofs • Outside protection • For manholes and water retaining structures • Tanking

On vertical surfaces, cut the rolls according to the required height and place them as per the above detailed procedure. PROTECTION Self.AD is provided with a tough surface, however, in underground application especially on vertical surfaces it is highly recommended to protect the membrane with suitable protection like Proboard.

PACKAGING Self.AD is available in rolls of 1x15M on pallet.

ADVANTAGES

NOTE

The DPC must be sandwiched between an even bed of wet mortar, and perforations in adjacent courses of brickwork must be completely filled with mortar.

Once the rolls are well placed, roll their surface with a wooden roller, taking extra care on the joints thus ensuring a long lasting bond.

SCOPE OF USE

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

the ground. Place the adjacent membrane straight along the provided selvedge and repeat the same steps. If any mistake in aligning the rolls, lift them slowly and replace them again.

Self.AD is a self adhesive cold applied modified bituminous waterproofing sheet membrane. Preformed by impregnating and coating a robust, rotproof, damage-resistant core reinforcement with a polymermodified rubber compound, it comes with a fibreglass reinforcement.

• Provide excellent barrier against vapour and water. • Ideal for the protection of substructures where corrosive ground water salts are present. • Excellent elongation and recovery characteristics. • Self sealing to minor punctures.

Edition: 04/10-A

Complies to BS 8102 (1990)

STORAGE

Rolls should be stored vertically, in dry areas under cover, away from direct sunlight.

APPLICABLE STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

PROPERTIES

Memrane nominal thickness Softening of coating material Tensile Strength Longitudinal Transverse Elongation Longitudinal Transverse Reinforcement

TYPICAL VALUES

TEST METHOD UEAtc ASTM D36

280 N/5 cm 200 N/5 cm

ASTM D146

3 mm ≥ 155ºC

3.8 % 3.9 % 50 grms/M2 fiberglass fleece

ASTM D412 UEAtc

SURFACE PREPARATION The surface must be clean, smooth and free from any laitance or loose particles. It should be fully dry. MEMBRANE LAYING Heat the prime surface before applying the membrane, with a gas torch or hot air blower, at temperature below 5 ºC surfaces should be free from condensation (Ice/Frost). On horizontal surfaces, open the roll and lay it completely on the floor. If necessary mark the floor along the whole length to ensure straight alignment. While two applicators start peeling off the release film, a third one presses the membrane firmly on

532

533

Self∙AD

Self∙AD 4mm

A PRE-FABRICATED REINFORCED MULTI-PLY WATERPROOFING FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

PROPERTIES

TYPICAL VALUES

TEST METHOD

Reinforcement

60 g/m² reinforced fiberglass fleece

UEATc

4.48 N/mm² 1.95 N/mm²

ASTM D412

> 2000%

ASTM D412

Tensile Strength or Reinforcement Longitudinal Transverse Elongation or rubber Modified bitumen compound Lap Joint tensile strength Longitudinal Transverse

>362 N/ 5cm >194 N/ 5cm

Tear resistance Longitudinal Transverse

UEATc

220 N 143 N

ASTM D4073

Tensile –tear strength Longitudinal Transverse

120 N/ mm 115 N/ mm

ASTM D4073

Peel Strength To primed concrete To self To metal

2.01 N /mm 2.11 N /mm 5.7 N /mm

ASTM D1000

5 Bar

DIN 1048

120 N / 30 mm 90 ºC min. 30 – 50 dmm -20 ºC – No cracking ≥0.2%

ASTM E 154 ASTM D36 ASTM D5 DIN 52123 ASTM D570

Conforms

ASTM D543

Resistance to hydrostatic pressure Puncture resistance Softening point Penetration at 25 ºC Flexibility at low temperature Water absorption Chemical resistance

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

Edition: 05/10-A

534

PRODUCT

Place the adjacent membrane straight along the provided selvedge and repeat the same steps. If any mistake in aligning the rolls, lift them slowly and replace them again.

Self.AD P 4mm is a self adhesive cold applied modified bituminous waterproofing sheet membrane. Preformed by impregnating and coating a robust, rotproof, damage-resistant core reinforcement with a polymer-modified rubber compound, it comes with a polyester reinforcement.

Once the rolls are well placed, roll their surface with a wooden roller, taking extra care on the joints thus ensuring a long lasting bond.

SCOPE OF USE

On vertical surfaces, cut the rolls according to the required height and place them as per the above detailed procedure.

Self.AD P 4mm is a general purpose waterproofing membrane suitable for different waterproofing application. Mainly recommended but not restricted to: • Basement • Foundation dressing • Piles and Footing Wrapping • Bathroom and kitchen waterproofing • Terraces and covered roofs • Outside protection • For manholes and water retaining structures • Tanking

PROTECTION Self.AD P 4mm is provided with a tough surface, however, in underground application especially on vertical surfaces it is highly recommended to protect the membrane with suitable protection like Proboard.

PACKAGING Self.AD 4mm is available in rolls of 1x15M on pallet.

ADVANTAGES

STORAGE

Rolls should be stored vertically, in dry areas under cover, away from direct sunlight.

APPLICABLE STANDARD Complies to BS 8102 (1990)

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

535

Proboard

Self∙AD 4mm

PROTECTION BOARD

PROPERTIES

TYPICAL VALUES

TEST METHOD

Reinforcement

200 g/m² Polyester mat

UEAtc

Thickness Elongation of rubber bitumen compound Tensile Strength of Membrane Longitudinal Transverse Tear resistance Longitudinal Transverse Static Puncture Resistance Dynamic Puncture Resistance Softening point Water Vapour Permeability Water absorption Chemical resistance

4 mm 45 % 800 N/5 cm 600 N/5 cm 180 N 200 N 15 Kg 15 Kg 105 oC 0.94 g/m²/24 Hr < 0.2 % Conforms

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

UEAtc UEAtc UEAtc UEAtc UEAtc ASTM D36 UEAtc ASTM D 5147 ASTM D 543

Proboard is not intended to be used as a waterproofing membrane, instead it is made to protect the waterproofing membrane from construction abuse and harmful puncture by rocks and stones during the backfill operation. Proboard panels stand up against normal on-site foot traffic by workmen as well as the pressure caused by the concrete pouring operation of multi- level floors and decks.

Proboard is a tough durable protective cover consisting of a core of air blown asphalt and mineral filler, which is covered on both sides with a flexible inorganic fiberglass mat. The result is a moldable, water- repellent panel that will not shrink or decay. Proboard does not rot, warp, or decompose like conventional fibrous boards, which are commonly in use. Proboard provides only mechanical protection to the applied membrane.

ADVANTAGES

• • • • • • • • • •

APPLICATION

Protection from Aggregate Backfill Protection from Foot Traffic at site fiberglass Reinforced for Strength Tough, Durable, Economical Non-biodegradable Weather, warp and rot proof Improved heat resistance Excellent resistance to chemicals Improved puncture resistance Compatible with most waterproofing systems

Proboard panels should continuously cover the total surface of the membrane by tightly fitting all edges firmly together. For Horizontal use butt Proboard panels together, if required they can be quickly and easily cut to the desired size with a sharp knife. On vertical surfaces, all panels should be held in place until backfill has been accomplished or it can be fixed by torch or with both cold and hot adhesive recommended by the membrane manufacturer.

TECHNICAL PARAMETERS PROPERTIES

VALUE

TEST METHODS

Board thickness (Standard)

3.2 mm

3.5 mm

6 mm

UAEtc

4.1 Kgs/m²

4.5 Kgs/m²

7.8 Kgs/m²

UAEtc

Asphalt Content

56.7 %

DWI Internal

Softening Point

120 °C

ASTM D36

Water Absorption

< 0.2%

ASTM D570

< 0.94 mm

BSEN 322 : 1993

Unit Weight

Deflection Static Indentation Resistance Puncture Resistance

536

USES

PRODUCT

L4 not perforated L4 not perforated L4 not perforated by 25 Kg in 24 hrs by 25 Kg in 24 hrs by 25 Kg in 24 hrs

UAEtc

> 1500 N/32mm (315 lb.f)

ASTM E154

> 1500 N/32mm (315 lb.f)

537

> 1500 N/32mm (315 lb.f)

Proboard

Waterproof∙prime SB

SPECIFICATIONS

PRODUCT

SOLVENT BASED BITUMEN PRIMER

Proboard panels meet ASTM E-96 Method B & BW rated 0.000 grains/hr./sq.ft.

STORAGE It should be stored in a shaded place and on flat surface.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Proboard might leave stains on the skin, it can be removed by using any light solvent.

Waterproof.prime SB is solvent-based primer, used for the preparation of surface to be waterproofed, with the aim of improving adherence of the waterproofing bituminous membranes to the substrate. The product can be applied on the majority of traditional surface in building.

plied with a normal paint spray. The tools used, including the spray nozzle, must be cleaned with White Spirit type solvent as often as necessary to avoid Waterproof.prime SB from drying on the tools and spoiling them, other than, of course, during any work break, lunch break and at the end ofworking day.

PROPERTIES

COVERAGE RATE This depends on the smoothness or roughness and porosity of the surface. Coverage rate around 300 ml/m² per coat.

• Excellent adherence to all traditional substrate in building • High penetration capacity on porous surface • Excellent coverage rate • Fast- drying • Strengthens surfaces, eliminating loose dust

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Density at 25°C Saybolt Furol Viscosity 25°C Flash point Water solubility Benzene solubility Toluens solubility

the company’s office in your location.

NOTE

PACKAGING Waterproof.prime SB is supplied in 20 lit. pails and 200 lit. drums

STORAGE

Black coloured liquid 0.90 ± 0.05 g/ cm³ 25-75 S Min. 38°C Insoluble soluble soluble

Maximum One Year in well closed containers and protected against weathering.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS Waterproof.prime SB complies with UNE 104-234 Type 1 and ASTM- D 41.

Edition: 12/10-A

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE a) The surface must be dry, free from dust, loose or badly adhered particles and any dirt in general, including any pity or anti-adherent remains. b) Waterproof.prime SB can be applied on smooth or rough surfaces. However, it is not advisable to apply the product on very polished surfaces, i.e. burnished or glazed, as these would have to be slightly roughened prior to application. c) Hollows and unevenness must be repaired with cement mortar, to obtain an even surface.

APPLICATION OF Waterproof.prime SB Waterproof.prime SB is supplied ready to use and is cold applied using a brush or roller. It can also be ap-

538

539

Waterproof∙prime SB

Waterproof∙prime WB

only. For more information, please contact the company’s office in your location.

PRODUCT

COLD APPLIED BITUMEN COATING

PACKAGING

Waterproof.prime WB is supplied in: GCC : 200 litres drums. MENA: 15 litres pails.

Waterproof.prime WB is a cold applied highly stable bitumen emulsion compound. It contains a high proportion of stabilizers and thickeners to ensure a prolonged shelf life and easy usage. The incorporation of high quality selected bitumen ensures excellent water and moisture proof properties (vapour barrier).

STORAGE

Store under cover, out of direct sunlight and protect from extreme temperatures. In tropical climates the product must be stored in an air conditioned environment. Failure to comply with the recommended storage conditions may result in premature deterioration of the product or packaging.

SCOPE OF USE

• To protect steel, concrete and masonry from attack by sulphates, chlorides and many other moisture and atmospheric borne pollutants.

Edition: 06/07-A

• Waterproof.prime WB is an excellent bituminous primer for use in roofing and fully compatible with most roofing substrates i.e. concrete, Asphalt felt, Asbestos etc. Adjust application rates to suit individual requirements.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

• Resists attacks from salts, acids, oil, alkali, gasoline, bacteria and fungus. • Waterproof.prime WB provides after drying an effective coat prior to application of waterproofing membranes and liquid applied protective coatings containing bitumen.

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS Density Approx 1 kg/lit Dry time 2 to 3 hours depending on Application rate and climatic Conditions

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

NOTE

Complies to ASTM D1227-95 type 3, class I.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Above 5ºC by brush or roller on clean surface. Brushes should be moistened before use. Wait until first coat has thoroughly dried before applying a second coat. Clean tools with water when wet.

Edition: 05/11-A

COVERAGE

Up to 10 m² per litre on smooth steel. 2 to 5 m² per litre on concrete.

540

541

Waterproof∙RBE

RUBBERIZED BITUMEN EMULSION

dirt, dust, loose debris, grease, cracks and holes must be repaired before application of Waterproof.RBE. It may be applied to damp but not waterlogged surfaces. Hot, very dry of porous surfaces should be dampened with Waterproof.prime WB coat before Waterproof.RBE is applied. Where subsequent coats are to be applied, the first coat must be dry.

PRODUCT

Waterproof.RBE is a dark brown rubberized bitumen emulsion with excellent adhesion. It dries to a tough black seamless, flexible waterproof and vapor-resistant membrane.

PROPERTIES

• Economical • Wide range of applications • Water-proof • Flexible • Chemical resistant • Versatile • Cold applied, easy to apply • Applicable on a variety of substrate Concrete coated with Waterproof.RBE will prevent the absorption of saline solutions. This is particularly necessary for the protection of the foundations.

PRODUCT APPLICATION Waterproof.RBE may be applied by brush or squeegee. Ensure the contents of the drums are well mixed before application. Apply at rate of 1 to 2 m²/Liter per coat. Coverage and number of coats depend on the surface porosity.

SCOPE OF USE

PACKAGING

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE All areas indicated shall receive 2 or 3 coats as recommended of a high build SBS rubber/bitumen emulsion such as Waterproof.RBE or similar approved. Waterproof.RBE is supplied in: 20 litre pails. 200 litre drums.

• Waterproofing of wet areas • Floors: to provide a sandwich membrane in new construction or surface treatment • Walls: Vapor barrier of cladded walls. • Roofs: for the maintenance of many types of roofs: concrete, lightweight screeds, timber, slate, asbestos, cement and as a vapor barrier • As an adhesive: for bonding, insulation board and expanded polystyrene cork tiles • May be applied to green concrete surfaces imme diately after the shuttering has been removed to act as a curing membrane. CHARACTERISTICS Latex in Dry Film Colour Specific Gravity at 25°C Dry extract Flash point Application temperature Viscosity (NS, S20)

NOTE

STORAGE

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

10% min Dark brown Black when dry 0.91 35% Min Non flammable +5°C to +50°C 45-70 Poise

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION All surfaces to which Waterproof.RBE is applied must be sound, stable with an even finish and free from

542

543

Waterproof∙RBE-L

Waterproof∙RBV

RUBBERIZED BITUMEN EMULSION

and grease free. It may be applied to damp but not waterlogged surfaces. For proper effect, 2 or 3 coats are recommended.

PRODUCT

Waterproof.RBE-L is a cold applied rubberized bituminous emulsion containing styrene butadiene rubber which after application dries to a highly effective black waterproofing membrane.

YIELD

Average coverage rate: around 0.75 liter per m² and per coat.

PROPERTIES

• Single component • Excellent adhesion to most surface • Economical • Easy to apply • Cold applied • Provides a waterproof black flexible film. Concrete coated with Waterproof.RBE-L will prevent the absorption of saline solutions. This is particularly necessary for the protection of the foundations.

PACKAGING

PACKAGING Waterproof.RBE-L is supplied in 15 liters pails.

STORAGE

Can be store up to 6 months in a dry area, at below 35ºC, in non open original packaging.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SCOPE OF USE

• Suitable for waterproofing of underground concrete walls and floors (balconies, bathroom…) • Usable for maintenance of many types of roofs including built up felt asphalt, concrete, light weight screeds, corrugated iron… • Provides a waterproofing membrane for foundation. CHARACTERISTICS Color Specific Gravity at 25°C Solid content Rubber content Flash point Service Temperature Application temperature Toxicity Resistance

DISCLAIMER

Dark brown liquid 1.01 60% 10% Non flammable -20°C to + 60°C +5°C to + 55°C NIL to chlorides, sulfates & nitrates.

NOTE

APPLICABLE STANDARD

Edition: 06/07-A **Available only in MENA

ASTM D 1187 type II.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SUBSTRATE PREPARATION All surfaces to which Waterproof.RBE is applied must be sound, stable with an even finish and free from dirt, dust, loose debris, grease, cracks and holes must be repaired before application of Waterproof.RBE. It may be applied to damp but not waterlogged

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

PRODUCT

Waterproof.RBV may be applied by brush or squeegee. All surfaces to which Waterproof.RBV is applied must be sound, stable with an even finish and free from dirt, dust, loose debris, grease etc. It may be applied to damp but not waterlogged surfaces. Hot, very dry of porous surfaces should be dampened with Waterproof.prime WB coat before Waterproof.RBV is applied. Where subsequent coats are to be applied, the first coat must be dry.

Waterproof.RBV is a high quality cold applied rubberized bitumen liquid emulsion with excellent adhesion which dries to a tough black seamless, flexible waterproof and vapor- proof membrane.

PROPERTIES • • • • •

Chemical resistant Versatile Economical Easy to apply Cold applied

Concrete coated with Waterproof.RBV will prevent the absorption of saline solutions. This is particularly necessary for the protection of the foundations.

SPECIFICATION CLAUSE All areas indicated shall receive 2 or 3 coats as recommended of a high build SBS rubber/bitumen emulsion such as Waterproof.RBV or similar approved.

SCOPE OF USE

• Waterproofing of wet areas. • Foundations: waterproofing of footings, pile caps, walls etc,... • Floors: to provide a sandwich membrane in new construction or surface treatment. • Walls: vapor barrier of cladded walls. • It can be used as an efficient curing membrane to fresh concrete. • Roofs: for the maintenance of many types of roofs including built up felt asphalt, lead, zinc, aluminium,concrete, light weight screeds, timber, slate, asbestos, cement, corrugated iron, and as a vapor barrier. • As an adhesive: for bonding, insulation board, expanded polystyrene cork tiles. CHARACTERISTICS Color Specific Gravity at 25°C Dry extract Flash point Service Temperature Application temperature Viscosity Latex content PRM Elongation

YIELD

1.25 Lit / m² for 1mm thickness

PACKAGING

Waterproof.RBV is supplied in: 20 litre pails. 200 litre drums.

STORAGE

Dark brown, dry black 1.00 60% Non flammable -10°C to +85°C +5°C to 50°C Brook field spindle 4 @ 20 13% 60 to 100 CPS 400% for 1mm film thick.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

DISCLAIMER

APPLICABLE STANDARDS Conform to ASTM D 1187 & ASTM D3747 standards.

544

545

Waterproof∙RBV

Waterproof∙SSP 50

notice. Technical characteristics are listed for guidance only. For more information, please contact the company’s office in your location.

PRODUCT

WATERPROOFING RUBBERIZED BITUMEN EMULSION

SCOPE OF USE

Waterproof.SSP 50 is used: • As a flexible waterproof coat for concrete and masonry surfaces in general use.. • As an adhesive and bonding agent for wood blocks, wood insulation boards, expanded polystyrene, cork tiles, etc... • As a vapor barrier on concrete and blocks behind wall cladding mechanically fixed.

Waterproof.SSP 50 is a cold-applied rubberized bitumen emulsion with polymer and mineral fillers. Once applied, it forms an elastomeric damp proof membrane. WATERPROOFSSP 50 has excellent adhesion properties, as well as waterproofing and protection from chloride, sulfates, alkalis & mild acids. Waterproof.SSP 50 has a tropical grade.

NOTE

CHARACTERISTICS

PROPERTIES Color Specific Gravity Non Volatile matter @ 105+/-5Deg C. Nature of non volatile organic-base Water resistance

Final set. Heat Test (2Hrs) @ 100+/-3 Deg C. Cold Temp. @ 0 Deg.C Latex content Elongation

SPECIFICATION

TEST METHOD

Brownish Black Liquid Black upon drying 1-1.1

ASTM D 2939

50 - 60% Asphalt

ASTM D 2939

Non Blistering no re-emulsification and no loss of adhesion Within 24 Hours No sagging or chipping No cracking or chipping 12% 800%

ASTM D 2939

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

ASTM D 1010

PRODUCT APPLICATION Overlaying coat shall be applied only after the previous coat is touch dry. In case of bonding, the coat applied is allowed to betacky before pressing adhesion surface.

Conforms to BS 3416, 8102, ASTM D 1187 and ASTM C309 standards.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION The surface should be cleaned and free from dust, grease or loose particles. For better performance the surface may be dampened but not wet, particularly in hot and dry weather.

CLEANING Can be cleaned with water before dry or with special cleaner.

YIELD

Depends on the application and surface. Approximately 1.5 to 2 m²/lit. per layer.

PRODUCT PREPARATION Waterproof.SSP 50 is ready to be used. Stir well the product before application. Waterproof.SSP 50 can be applied by brush, roller or squeegee.

546

ASTM D 1010

PACKAGING

Waterproof.SSP 50 is supplied in 200 lit. Drums.

547

Waterproof∙SSP 50

Waterproof∙310 PU primer

STORAGE

PRODUCT

DEEP PENETRATING POLYURETHANE PRIMER

Shelf life is one year in closed container, if stored under moderate temperature. Waterproof.SSP 50 is non flammable, non toxic and presents no health hazards.

CONSUMPTION

The consumption will depend on absorbency of the substrate. Usually 200 g/m² are necessary for concrete.

Waterproof.310 PU Primer is a 1-component transparent low viscosity primer. It is mainly used as a primer for polyurethane waterproofing system, like Waterproof.350 PU and Waterproof.360 PU. It has excellent adhesion and is mainly used on absorbent substrate like concrete, light weight concrete or wooden surface. It can be also used as a protection film against oil or greasy liquid. Waterproof.310 PU Primer is easy to apply by brush or roller.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CHARACTERISTICS Composition

DISCLAIMER

Color Solid content Density Adhesion to concrete Tack free time Curing time Resistance to water pressure Hardness (Shore A scale) Chemical resistance to Diesel oil, xylene,ammonia

NOTE

PACKAGING

Waterproof.310 PU Primer is supplied in 17 kg and 1 kg metallic pails.

STORAGE

12 months from manufacturing date, stored in a fresh and dry area in unopened original packaging.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Polyurethane prepolymer Transparent 50% 1.1 (ASTM D1475) 2.8 MPa (ASTM D903) 3 hours 48 hours No leak at 7 atm. (DIN 1048) > 95 (ASTM D2240) 10%, hydrochloric acid 10%, sea water, sodium hydroxide 20%.

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Edition: 06/07-A *Available only in GCC

SUPPORT PREPARATION All surfaces should be clean, dry and free from grease, oil or dust. Remove all loose material. The surface needs to be grinded. Moisture content should not exceed 5%. New concrete should be at least 28 days old. Old coatings and curing membranes should be removed by a grinding machine. Laitance on the surface of smooth flooring must be also removed prior to application.

NOTE

PRODUCT APPLICATION Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC. Apply the transparent primer by brush, roll or spray gun. After 2 or 3 hours but not later than 4 hours, apply the waterproofing system.

548

Edition: 06/07-A

549

Waterproof∙350 PU

LIQUID APPLIED POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE UV RESISTANT PRODUCT

Resistance to water pressure

Waterproof.350 PU is a 1-component liquid applied membrane made of polyurethane specially designed for waterproofing. Its outstanding performances allow protection and waterproofing of many areas such as: • Water supply channel • Water storage tanks • Flowerbeds and fountains • Flat rooftops • Crack bridging • Under-tile wet areas (pools, bathrooms, balconies, terraces…) When applied, Waterproof.350 PU creates a continuous watertight seal. It allows moisture vapor transmission. It has also excellent adhesion to almost any surface: concrete, metal, bitumen membranes, acrylic paints… It keeps outstanding performances for a very long period. Waterproof.350 PU maintains its properties with a service temperature from -40ºC to + 100ºC. Waterproof.350 PU is applicable by brush, roller or spray gun.

Hardness (Shore A scale)

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SUPPORT PREPARATION All surfaces should be clean, dry, free from grease, oil or dust. Remove all loose material. Moisture content should not exceed 5%. New concrete should be at least 28 days old. All cracks and expansion joints are to be sealed with JOINT SEAL PU, at least 2 days before application of Waterproof.350 PU. PRODUCT APPLICATION Prime the surface with Waterproof.310 PU primer. Allow 2 to 3 hours to dry. On stable, sound and wellprepared concrete surfaces, Waterproof.350 PU diluted 15% with toluol may be used as a primer coat. Apply the first layer of Waterproof.350 PU pure by roller, brush or airless spray with a film thickness of around 0.5 mm. After 12 hours and not later than 36 hours, apply the second layer of Waterproof.350 PU also with a film thickness of 0.5 mm. Do not apply over 0.5 mm per layer. Tools are to be cleaned before polymerization with Toluol.

PROPERTIES • • • • • • • • •

One component Easy application by roll Long-lasting waterproofing Permanent high elasticity Water insoluble Can be walked on Moisture vapor transmission Good resistance to water Good resistance against acidic and basic solutions (10%), detergents, fuel, sea water, oils and lubricants • UV resistant CHARACTERISTICS Composition Color Solid content Tensile strength Elongation at break Adhesion to concrete Tack free time Curing time Water vapor permeability

No leak at 7 atm. (DIN 1048) 65 (ASTM D2240)

with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. In all cases, seek medical attention. In case of fire, use CO2 foam to extinguish. Tightly seal containers when not in use, store them away from heat and carefully dispose empty ones.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

CONSUMPTION

For the minimum dry film thickness of 1 mm, the consumption of Waterproof.350 PU is around 1.4 kg/m², in case of smooth surfaces.

PACKAGING

Waterproof.350 PU is supplied in 6 kg and 25 kg metallic pails.

Polyurethane pre-polymer Off white / Black 90% 7.45 N/mm² (ASTM D412) 900% (ASTM D412) 2.5 MPa (ASTM D903) 12 hours 24 hours 25 g/m²/24hr (ISO 9932:91)

STORAGE

12 months from manufacturing date, stored in a fresh and dry area in unopened original packaging.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

550

551

Waterproof∙360 PU

LIQUID APPLIED POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE PRODUCT

Softing point

Waterproof.360 PU is a 1-component liquid applied membrane made of polyurethane specially designed for waterproofing. Its outstanding performances allow protection and waterproofing of many areas such as: • Water supply channel • Water storage tanks • Flowerbeds and fountains • Rooftops • Crack bridging • Under-tile wet areas (pools, bathrooms, balconies, terraces…) When applied, Waterproof.360 PU creates a continuous watertight seal. It allows moisture vapor transmission. It has also excellent adhesion to almost any surface: concrete, metal, bitumen membranes, acrylic paints… It keeps outstanding performances for a very long period. Waterproof.360 PU maintains its properties with a service temperature from -40ºC to + 100ºC. Waterproof.360 PU is applicable by brush, roller or spray gun.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SUPPORT PREPARATION All surfaces should be clean, dry, free from grease, oil or dust. Remove all loose material. Moisture content should not exceed 5%. New concrete should be at least 28 days old. All cracks and expansion joints are to be sealed with JOINT SEAL PU, at least 2 days before application of Waterproof.360 PU. PRODUCT APPLICATION Prime the surface with Waterproof.310 PU primer. Allow 2 to 3 hours to dry. On stable, sound and wellprepared concrete surfaces, Waterproof.360 PU diluted 15% with toluol may be used as a primer coat. Apply the first layer of Waterproof.360 PU pure by roller, brush or airless spray with a film thickness of around 0.5 mm. After 12 hours and not later than 36 hours, apply the second layer of Waterproof.360 PU also with a film thickness of 0.5 mm. Do not apply over 0.5 mm per layer. Tools are to be cleaned before polymerization with Toluol.

PROPERTIES • • • • • • • •

One component Easy application by roll Long-lasting waterproofing Permanent high elasticity Water insoluble Can be walked on Moisture vapor transmission Good resistance against acidic and basic solutions (10%), detergents, fuel, sea water, oils and lubricants

vapor inhalation, place affected person in an open-air area. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. In all cases, seek medical attention. In case of fire, use CO2 foam to extinguish. Tightly seal containers when not in use, store them away from heat and carefully dispose empty ones.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

CONSUMPTION

For the minimum dry film thickness of 1 mm, the consumption of Waterproof.360 PU is around 1.4 kg/m², in case of smooth surfaces.

CHARACTERISTICS Composition Color Solid content Tensile strength Elongation at break Adhesion to concrete Tack free time Curing time Water vapor permeability

Polyurethane pre-polymer Off white / Black 90% 5 N/mm² (ASTM D412) 800% (ASTM D412) 2.3 MPa (ASTM D903) 12 hours 24 hours 25 g/m²/24hr (ISO 9932:91) Resistance to water pressure No leak at 7 atm. (DIN 1048) Hardness (Shore A scale) 65 (ASTM D2240) Crack Bridging Ability (ASTM C 836:95)

Service temperature of 80˚C a short time temperature resistance (shock) of up to 220˚C

PACKAGING

Waterproof.360 PU is supplied in 6 kg and 25 kg metallic pails.

STORAGE

12 months from manufacturing date, stored in a fresh and dry area in unopened original packaging.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

3.4 mm

552

553

Waterproof∙370 BPU

LIQUID-APPLIED BITUMEN/POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE PRODUCT

Service Temperature ºC Chemical properties

Waterproof.370 BPU is a liquid-applied, highly permanent elastic, cold applied and cold curing, coal-tar free, one component bitumen/polyurethane membrane used for long lasting waterproofing. Cures by reaction with ground and air moisture.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SUBSTRATE PREPARATION All surfaces should be clean, dry, free from grease, oil or dust. Remove all loose material. Moisture content should not exceed 5%. New concrete should be at least 28 days old. Old, loose coatings, dirt, fats, oils, organic substances and dust need to be removed by a grinding machine. Possible surface irregularities need to be smoothened. Any loose surface pieces and grinding dust need to be thoroughly removed.

PROPERTIES

• Simple application (roller or brush). • When applied, it forms a seamless membrane without joints or leak possibilities • Resistant to water • Resistant to frost • Full surface adherence without any additional anchoring • Low cost, with high profitability

SCOPE OF USE

WARNING: Do not wash surface with water!

• Waterproofing of Balconies and Terraces (under-tile) • Waterproofing of Wet Areas (under-tile) in Balconies, Bathrooms, Kitchens, etc • Waterproofing of Foundations • Waterproofing of Roofs with inverted insulation

TREATMENT OF CRACKS The careful sealing of existing cracks and joints before the application is extremely important for long lasting waterproofing results. Clean concrete cracks and hairline cracks, of dust, residue or other contamination. Fill all prepared cracks with JOINT SEAL PU. Then apply a layer of Waterproof.370 BPU, 200mm wide centered over all cracks and while wet, cover with a correct cut stripe of the Fiber mesh. Press it to soak. Then saturate the Fiber mesh with enough Waterproof.370 BPU, until it is fully covered. Allow 12 hours to cure.

The Waterproof.370 BPU is mainly used to waterproof concealed areas, not directly exposed to the sun for a long period. CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Specific gravity at 25ºC Viscosity at 25ºC cps At 20C, 50% RH Estimated tack free Final curing time Tensile StrengthASTM D412-80 Kg/cm² Hardness Shore DASTM D2240 Elongation at breakASTM D412 Water PermeabilityASTM-E96 Tear Resistance-ASTM D-624

-40ºC to 66ºC Excellent resistance to a wide range of chemicals.

Liquid Black 1.35 4,500 ± 500

TREATMENT OF EXPANSION JOINTS Clean concrete expansion joints and control joints of dust, residue or other contamination. Widen and deepen joints (cut open) if necessary. The prepared movement joint should have a depth of 10-15 mm. The width:depth ratio of the movement joint should be at a rate of approx. 2:1. Apply some JOINT SEAL PU on the bottom of the joint only. Then with a brush, apply a stripe layer of Waterproof.370 BPU, 200mm wide centered over inside the joint, until it is soaked and the joint is fully covered from the inside. Then fully saturate the fabric with enough Waterproof.370 BPU. Then place a polyethylene cord of the correct dimensions inside the joint and press it deep inside onto the saturated fabric. Fill the remaining free space of the joint with

2 to 3 hours 24 hours 400 60 600 0.18 20

554

JOINT SEAL PU sealant. Do not cover. Allow 12 hours to cure.

which is easily removed. Skinning does not affect the use of the product.

TREATMENT OF CONCRETE SURFACES

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Waterproofing membrane

Stir well before using. Poor the Waterproof.370 BPU onto the prepared/primed surface and lay it out by roller or brush, until all surface is covered. Reinforce with Fiber mesh at problem areas, like wall-floor connections, pipes, waterspouts (siphon), etc. In order to do that, apply on the still wet Waterproof.370 BPU a correct cut piece of Fiber mesh, press it to soak, and saturate again with enough Waterproof.370 BPU. After 12 hours - but not later than 36 hours – apply a second layer of the Waterproof.370 BPU, by using roller or brush. If desired, after 12 hours - but not later than 36 hours – apply a third layer of the Waterproof.370 BPU, by using roller or brush.

DISCLAIMER

ATTENTION: Do not apply the Waterproof.370 BPU over 0.5 mm thickness (dry film) per layer. For best results, the temperature during application and cure should be between 5 and 45 °C. Low temperatures retard cure while high temperature speed up curing. High humidity may affect the final finish. *For very brittle and destructed concrete surface, apply one coat Waterproof.310 PU Primer as Primer and allow 2 to 3 hours drying time depending on temperature.

NOTE

CONSUMPTION

Apply Waterproof.370 BPU compound to the required thickness at approximately1.20kg/m² to achieve 1.0mm dry film thickness. Factors like surface porosity, temperature, humidity, application method and finish required can alter consumption.

PACKAGING

Waterproof.370 BPU is supplied in 20 kg pails.

STORAGE

6 months, stored in a fresh and dry area in unopened original packaging. Since Waterproof.370 BPU is reactive product, a thin skin may form during storage

555

Waterproof∙380 PU CLEAR

PRODUCT

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

TRANSPARENT, LIQUID-APPLIED POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE CHARACTERISTICS PROPERTY Composition

Waterproof.380 PU is a transparent, hard-elastic, one component aliphatic polyurethane, high-solids coating, used for long- Lasting waterproofing. This high-technology coating is UV-stable, non-yellowing, weather stable, alkali and chemical resistant and even after aging it remains transparent and elastic. Waterproof.380 PU protects and waterproofs mineral surfaces against water penetration, frost, smog and acid rain. Aged and oxidized plastic surfaces look more transparent after coating with Waterproof.380 PU. Waterproof.380 PU waterproofs damaged glass surfaces and protects of glass fragments incase of breaking. Waterproof.380 PU is using a unique curing system (moisture triggered), and unlike other similar systems it does not react with moisture (moisture-cured) and does not form bubbles.

RESULTS & STANDARD Polyurethane high-solids pre-polymer Elongation at Break 322% - DIN EN ISO 527 Tensile Strength 25.4 N/mm² - DIN EN ISO 527 E-modulus 69.5 N/mm²- DIN EN ISO 527 Tear resistance 56.9 N/mm²- DIN ISO 34, Method B Elongation at break after 298% - DIN EN ISO 527 2000h of accelerated aging (DJN EN ISO 4892-3, 400 MJ/m²) Tensile strength after 2000h 25.5 N/mm²- DIN EN ISO of accelerated aging (DIN 527 EN ISO 4892-3, 400 MJ/m²) Gloss retention after 2000h Good – DIN 67530 of accelerated aging (DIN EN ISO 4892-3, 400 MJ/m²) Surface chalking after 2000h No chalking observed. of accelerated aging (DIN Chalking grade 0 EN ISO 4892-3, 400 MJ/m²) DIN EN ISO 4628-6 Hardness (SHORE D Scale) 25-ASTM D 220 Water vapor permeability 8.05 gr/m² 24hoursEN ISO 12572 Resistance to Water Pressure No leak (1m water column, 24h) – DIN EN 1928 Adhesion to absorbent tile >2,0 N/mm² (ceramic tile failure) – ASTM D 903 ceramic Application Temperature 50°C to 35°C Tack Free Time 8 hours light Trafficking Time 24 hours Final Curing time 7 days Chemical Properties Good resistance against acidic and alkali solution (10%), detergents, seawater and oils.

SCOPE OF USE • Waterproofing of Balconies and Terraces • Waterproofing of Glass and metal-mesh reinforced Glass • Waterproofing of Glass-Brick walls • Waterproofing and protection of Natural Stones. • Waterproofing of Transparent Plastics (e.g. GFK, Polycarbonate) • Waterproofing and protection of Wood and Bamboo • Waterproofing of ceramic surfaces

ADVANTAGES • • • • • • • • •

Simple application (roller or airless spray) UV-stable Non-yellowing When applied forms seamless membrane without joints or leak possibilities Resistant to water Maintains its mechanical properties over a temperature span of - 30°C to + 90°C Resistant to frost Full surface adherence The waterproofed surface can be walked on

556

Transparent waterproofing membrane Pour the Waterproof.380 PU coating onto the primed surface and lay it out by roller or by 1mm teeth trowel, until all surfaces is covered. After 12 hours -but not Later than 18 hours apply a secondlayer of the Waterproof.380 PU coating, by using roller or brush, For better waterproofing results, apply a third layer of the Waterproof.380 PU coating. should be between 5°C and 35°C. Low temperatures retard cure while high temperature speed up curing. High humidity may affect the final finish.

SURFACE PREPARATION Careful surface preparation is essential for optimum finish and durability. The surface needs to be clean, dry and sound, free of any contamination, which may harmfully affect the adhesion of the membrane. Maximum moisture content should not exceed 5%. New concrete structures need to dry for at least 28 days. Old coatings, dirt, fats, oils, organic substances and dust need to be removed. WARNING: Do not wash surface with water!

ATTENTION: Do not apply the Waterproof.380 PU over 1mm thickness (dry film) per layer, For best results, the temperature during application and cure

ATTENTION: Surfaces with trapped moisture (e.g. trapped moisture under balconies tiles) must be left to dry completely (max. 5% moisture), before the application of the Waterproof.380 PU coating. WARNING: Do not apply the Waterproof.380 PU on surfaces treated in the past with silane, siloxane, silicon or other water-repellents, because of expected poor adhesion. We recommend an adhesion test, if circumstances and surface history are not clear.

CONSUMPTION 0.8 – 1,2 kg/m² in two or three layers. This coverage is based on practical application by roller onto a smooth surface in optimum conditions. Factors like surface porosity, temperature, humidity, application method and finish required can alter consumption.

Repair of cracks and joints The careful sealing of existing cracks and joints before the application is extremely important for long lasting waterproofing results. Clean cracks, hairline cracks, expansion joints and control joints of dust, residue or other contamination. Prime locally with the Waterproof.310 PU Primer and allow 2-3 hours to dry. Fill all prepared cracks and joints with JOINT SEAL PU. Allow to cure.

PACKAGING Waterproof.380 PU is supplied in 20 kg pails; Pails should be stored in dry and cool rooms for up to 9 months. Protect the material against moisture and direct sunlight. Storage temperature: 5°-30°C. Products shou1d remain in their original, unopened containers, bearing the manufacturers name, product designation, batch number and application precaution labels.

HEALTH & SAFETY

Priming Prime non-absorbent glazed surfaces, like glazed ceramic tiles, glass and glass bricks with Waterproof.310 PU primer. Apply the Waterproof.310 PU Primer by soaking a clean and dry cloth, and wipe the entire surface off. By this application procedure, you ensure that besides the chemical activation {priming) of the surface, the surface is getting also very effectively degreased. Change cloths often. Make sure that enough quantity of Waterproof.310 PU Primer is applied on the entire surface to primed and make sure that you do not leave any untreated spots.

Waterproof.380 PU contains isocyanates. Keep away from fire sources. Do not smoke, sufficient ventilation is recommended, Gloves and goggles must protect hands and eyes. ln case of contact of the material with the eyes, rinse with plenty of water and consult a physician. Tools must be cleaned before polymerization, with Toluol, Keep out of reach of children.

DISCLAIMER While the company guarantees its products against defective materials, the use and application of these products are made without guarantee since the conditions

557

Waterproof∙380 PU CLEAR

Waterproof∙390 PU

of their application are beyond its control. It is recommended to verify with the company that the product is suitable for the intended use, and that this Data Sheet version is the latest one. The company may modify it without prior notice. Technical characteristics are listed for guidance only. For more information, please contact the company’s office in your location.

PRODUCT

ONE COMPONENT COLD APPLIED MOISTURE CURING POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING COATING Chemical Properties

Waterproof.390 PU is a liquid-applied polyurethane waterproofing membrane highly permanent elastic, cold applied and cold curing, one component polyurethane membrane used for long lasting waterproofing. Cures by reaction with ground and air moisture.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION All surfaces should be clean, dry, free from grease, oil or dust. Remove all loose material. Moisture content should not exceed 5%. New concrete should be at least 28 days old. Old, loose coatings, dirt, fats, oils, organic substances and dust need to be removed by a grinding machine. Possible surface irregularities need to be smoothened. Any loose surface pieces and grinding dust need to be thoroughly removed.

PROPERTIES

• Simple application (roller or brush). • When applied, it forms a seamless membrane without joints or leak possibilities • Resistant to water • Maintains its mechanical properties over a temperature span of -30°C to +80ºC. • Resistant to frost • Full surface adherence without any additional anchoring • The waterproofed surface can be walked on • Even if the membrane gets damaged, it can be easily repaired locally within minutes • Low cost, with high profitability

WARNING: Do not wash surface with water! TREATMENT OF CRACKS The careful sealing of existing cracks and joints before the application is extremely important for long lasting waterproofing results. Clean concrete cracks and hairline cracks, of dust, residue or other contamination. Prime locally with the Waterproof.310 PU Primer and allow 2-3 hours to dry. Fill all prepared cracks with JOINT SEAL PU. Then apply a layer of Waterproof.390 PU, 200mm wide centered over all cracks and while wet, cover with a correct cut stripe of the GEOTEXTILE. Press it to soak. Then saturate the Geotextile with enough Waterproof.390 PU, until it is fully covered. Allow 12 hours to cure.

SCOPE OF USE

• Waterproofing of Balconies and Terraces (under-tile) • Waterproofing of Wet Areas (under-tile) in Balconies, Bathrooms, Kitchens, etc • Waterproofing of Foundations CHARACTERISTICS Composition Color Tensile Strength Elongation at break Hardness (SHORE A Scale) Water tightness

Polyurethane high-solids pre-polymer Black >4 N/mm2 ASTM D 903 > 700% ASTM D 412 70 ± 5 ASTM D 903 No leak , No absorption of water was observed on the underside of substrate – DIN EN 1928 ASTM C1185: 2003 section 11 >17 gr/m².day +5°C to +35°C

TREATMENT OF EXPANSION JOINTS Clean concrete expansion joints and control joints of dust, residue or other contamination. Widen and deepen joints (cut open) if necessary. The prepared movement joint should have a depth of 10-15 mm. The width: depth ratio of the movement joint should be at a rate of approx. 2:1. Apply some JOINT SEAL PU on the bottom of the joint only. Then with a brush, apply a stripe layer of Waterproof.390 PU, 200mm wide centered over and inside the joint. Cover the area with polyesternon woven Geotextile ( min 60-65 gr/m2) , press it deep inside the joint, until it is soaked and the joint is fully covered from the inside. Then fully saturate the fabric with enough Waterproof.390 PU. Then place a polyethylene cord of the correct dimensions inside

Water Vapor Permeability Application temperature At 20°C, 50 % RH -Tack free time 6-8 hours -Light pedestrian traffic 12-18 hours time -Final curing time 7 days

558

Good resistance against acidic and basic solutions (10%), detergents, sea water and oil.

559

Waterproof∙TAR ESB

Waterproof∙390 PU

HIGH BUILD SOLVENT-BASED COAL TAR EPOXY COATING STORAGE

the joint and press it deep inside onto the saturated fabric. Fill the remaining free space of the joint with JOINT SEAL PU sealant. Do not cover. Allow 12 hours to cure.

9 months, stored in a fresh and dry area in unopened original packaging.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

TREATMENT OF CONCRETE SURFACES Priming Prime very brittle and destructed concrete surfaces, with Waterproof.310 PU Primer to increase the stability of the surface. If the concrete surface to be waterproofed is sound and stable, prime with a layer of diluted Waterproof.390 PU Dilute only with TOLUOL, at max. 10% by weight.

Waterproofing membrane Stir well before using. Poor the Waterproof.390 PU onto the prepared/primed surface and lay it out by roller or brush, until all surface is covered. Reinforce with polyester non woven geotextile (min 60-65 gr/m2) at problem areas, like wall-floor connections, pipes, waterspouts (siphon), etc. In order to do that, apply on the still wet Waterproof.390 PU a correct cut piece of , polyester non woven geotextile ( min 60-65 gr/m2) press it to soak, and saturate again with enough Waterproof.390 PU. After 12 hours - but not later than 36 hours – apply a second layer of the Waterproof.390 PU, by using roller or brush. If desired, after 12 hours - but not later than 36 hours – apply a third layer of the Waterproof.390 PU, by using roller or brush.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

ATTENTION: Do not apply the Waterproof.390 PU over 0.5 mm thickness (dry film) per layer. For best results, the temperature during application and cure should be between +5 and +35 ºC. Low temperatures retard cure while high temperature speed up curing. High humidity may affect the final finish.

Edition: 06/10-A

CONSUMPTION

1.2 – 1.5 kg/m² in two layers. Factors like surface porosity, temperature, humidity, application method and finish required can alter consumption.

PACKAGING

Waterproof.390 PU is supplied in: 25 kg, 6 kg pails.

loose deposits, rust and grease and also be dry. Concrete surface should be dry, free of loose concrete.

PRODUCT

A two component based on polyamine cured coal tar epoxy product with outstanding water and crude oil resistance that makes it eminently suitable for use as an anticorrosive on underwater areas (especially where cathodic protection is envisaged). It can also be applied behind linings, in void spaces and ballast tanks. Designed to build up thickness of 400 microns..

PRODUCT APPLICATION Mix only in the proportions indicated using a power mixer individual components separately slowly. Add activator to the base and thoroughly mix together. Do not thin Waterproof.TAR ESB. Cleaning of equipment with thinner.

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS

DRYING, OVERCOATING AND CURING TIMES

Sewerage works, main structures, concrete foundations, manholes covers, lining of tanks, pipes and ducting. Excellent chemical resistance to sewage water, sea water, distilled water, chlorinated water, kerosene, diluted acids. CHARACTERISTICS Solids content by volume Flash point Specific Gravity Colour

Waterproof.TAR ESB should preferably be applied at temperatures in excess of 10°C and under conditions of reasonable relative humidity i.e. not exceeding 85% and assuming good ventilation conditions. Under such conditions the materials will surface dry in approx. 5 hours and may be overcoated after 12 hours. At application temperatures below 10°C, drying and curing times will be significantly extended.

72% >25°C 1.4 kg/litre Black and Brown/ Semi gloss

CHEMICAL RESISTANCE Cured coating is resistant to: Distilled water Brine Effluent Barnacle growth Sewage Exhaust gases Marine Bacteria Diluted acids and alkalis Salt solutions (Potassium, Sodium)

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

• Mixing Ratio: 8 parts base to 2 part activator by volume • Working pot life: 4 hours at 23°C ± 2°C • Airless spray - Pressure at nozzle: 180 – 250 bar. Nozzle size 0.48-0.78 mm. - spray angle: 40 – 80 degrees • Brush or roller application only to be used on touch-up or stripe coating, in which case several coats may be needed to achieve specified dry film thickness. • Dry film thickness (microns) per coat: 150 • Wet film thickness (microns) per coat: 210 • Theoretical spreading rate (m²/litre): 4.8 • Dry times at 23°C (± 2°C) Touch Dry: 6 hrs, Hard: 24 hrs Overcoating time: Min.10 hrs-max. 2 days Full cure: 7 days

PACKAGING

Waterproof.TAR ESB is packed in 20 litres kit.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SURFACE PREPARATION Grit blast surface thoroughly to Sa 2.5- ISO 8501:1. Previously primed surfaces should be free from

560

561

Waterproof∙TAR ESB

Waterproof∙TAR ESF

wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. In all cases, seek medical attention. In case of fire, use CO2 foam to extinguish. Tightly seal containers when not in use, store them away from heat and carefully dispose empty ones.

PRODUCT

HIGH BUILD SOLVENT-FREE COAL TAR EPOXY COATING

• Full cure: 7 days • Cleaning of equipment with thinner.

A two component high build, solvent free, coal tar epoxy product with outstanding water and crude oil resistance that makes it eminently suitable for use as an anticorrosive on underwater areas (especially where cathodic protection is envisaged). The superior adhesion and chemical resistance of epoxy resin along with the flexibility and excellent water resistant qualities of pitch produce a good system of coating or concrete and steel substrates. Especially formulated to provide single coat application up to 500 microns dry film thickness. Suitable for use in sewerage tanks.

DISCLAIMER

SURFACE PREPARATION Grit blast surface thoroughly to Sa 2.5 or better. Previously primed surfaces should be free from loose deposits, rust and grease and also be dry. Concrete surface should be dry, free of loose concrete. PRODUCT APPLICATION Mix only in the proportions indicated powder mix individual components separately slowly- add activator to the base and thoroughly mix together. Do not thin Waterproof.TAR ESF.

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS

NOTE

CHARACTERISTICS Solids content by volume Flash point Specific Gravity Colour Coverage

Edition: 11/07-A

DRYING, OVERCOATING AND CURING TIMES

Waterproof.TAR ESF should preferably be applied at temperatures in excess of 10°C and under conditions of reasonable relative humidity i.e. not exceeding 85% and assuming good ventilation conditions. Under such conditions the materials will surface dry in approx. 6 hours and may be over coated after 16 hours. At application temperatures below 10°C, drying and curing times will be significantly extended. It is not recommended that the materials be applied at temperatures below 5°C. Maximum recommended time interval between coats is 7 days.

100% >38°C 1.40 kg/litre Black, Brown & Semi gloss 0.3 lit/m² for 400 µ

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

APPLICATION DETAILS • Mixing Ratio: 85 parts base to 15 part - additive by volume • Induction period : Nil • Working pot life @ 23°C± 2°C: 2 hours • Airless spray: Line pressure - 2500 - 3200 PSI Tip size 17/25 Fan angle 60°C • Recommended application methods: Airless spray or brush • Nominal dry film thickness (microns): 500 • Corresponding wet film • Thickness (microns): 500 • Theoretical spreading rate (m²/litre): 2.00 • Dry times - at 23°C (± 2°C) to BS.3900 Part C2, • Surface Dry: Touch: 5 hrs : Hard :24 hrs • Over coating time: Min. 16 hrs- max.7 days

562

CHEMICAL RESISTANCE Cured coating is resistant to: Distilled water Brine Effluent Barnacle growth Sewage Exhaust gases Marine Bacteria Diluted acids and alkalis Salt solutions (Potassium, Sodium)

PACKAGING

Waterproof.TAR ESF is packed in 20 litres kit.

563

Waterproof∙110 FX (Grey)/ 120 FX (White)

Waterproof∙TAR ESF

FLEXIBLE HIGH-PERFORMANCE CEMENT-BASED WATERPROOF COATING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

PRODUCT

Elongation (Dry Film thickness 2 mm ASTM D 412:98) 40% VOC and Formadehyde ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS None (< 10µg/l)

Waterproof.110/120 FX is a 2-component product: • A powder made of cements, fillers and admixtures. • A liquid based on resins and additives. Two colours are available: • WaterProof 110 FX: Grey • WaterProof 120 FX: White Applied on cement based substrate like concrete, cement plaster, masonry; and gypsum board, Waterproof.110/120 FX forms a film that is: • Waterproof • Flexible • Resistant The adhesion and sealing qualities of Waterproof.110/120 FX are outstanding. Therefore, it can be used for positive or negative hydrostatic pressures. Waterproof.110/120 FX is non-shrinking, it prevents reinforcements from corrosion. Waterproof.110/120 FX must be used on damp cement based substrates.

DISCLAIMER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

PREPARATION OF THE SUBSTRATE The substrate must be perfectly sound, clean, free from grease, oil, dust or any friable matters. All corners should be saw-cut and filled with a nonshrink thixotropic mortar like Conrep.331 TX. All honeycombs or holes should be widened and filled with a non-shrink mortar like Conrep.350 NSG. Before applying Waterproof.110/120 FX, wet abundantly the substrate to be treated. PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix the 2 components of Waterproof.110/120 FX by using a mechanical mixer in order to obtain a creamy coating which can be applied by brush.

SCOPE OF USE

Inside or outside coatings on: • Swimming pools. • Water tanks. • Saunas & Jacuzzis. • Drinking water reservoirs. • Pits and tanks of any type. • Tunnels. • Waterproofing of terraces & wet areas. • Waterproofing of sludge basins in sewage treatment plants.

NOTE

CHARACTERISTICS Powder appearance Powder density Powder grain size Liquid density pH of the mix Application temperature Water absorption (ASTM D 870) Pull off Strength (ASTM D4541)

564

PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply the 1st layer of Waterproof.110/120 FX with sufficient thickness to plug pores, cracks, and holes at 1kg/m². Apply 2nd and 3rd layers in the proportion of 0.5 to 1 kg/m². Always allow to dry between each layer. All corners, cracks or construction joints should receive 20 cm wide fiber Mesh reinforcement between the 1st and 2nd layer. Wherever tiling on Waterproof.110/120FX is required, Carroflex should be used. It is recommended that the tiling start after one week from the application of Waterproof.110/120 FX. When needed, flood test on Waterproof.110/120 FX can be carried out prior tiles fixing. Allow one week curing before flood test.

White or grey 1.49 0.6 mm 1.04 12 5 to 35°C Reduction in Water Absorption is 91 .75% 1 MPa @ 28 days on concrete substrate

CONSUMPTION

2 kg/m² to 4 kg/m² depending on the nature of the support.

PACKAGING

Waterproof.110/120 FX are packed in 15 kg kit. A: Powder component: 10 kg. B: Liquid component: 5 kg pails.

565

Waterproof∙110 FX (Grey) / 120 FX (White)

Waterproof∙116 FX (Grey) / 126 FX (White)

STORAGE

PRODUCT

Can be stored up to 6 months from manufacturing date, in original packaging, non open, protected from humidity, hot or freezing temperature.

FLEXIBLE CEMENT BASED ACRYLIC WATERPROOF COATING as as possible, after hardening of the first layer, to ensure proper adhesion between layer. If needed apply a third layer. The thickness of Waterproof.116/126 FX has to be around 1.5 mm. In hot weather, wind or sunshine, take all necessary measures to prevent the coating from rapid water evaporation.

Waterproof.116/126 FX is a cement based two-component polymer modified waterproofing slurry. It is applied to concrete and mortar structures to prevent water infiltration. Waterproof membrane used under interior and exterior ceramic tile.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

COVERAGE

Approx. 2 to 3 kg/m² depending on the surface and consistency required.

SCOPE OF USE

Waterproof.116/126 FX is used for external and internal waterproofing, crack sealing, repair work in the following structures: • Bathrooms commercial & residential • Roofs and foundations • Kitchens - Commercial & Residential • Steam rooms, showers • Laundry rooms CHARACTERISTICS Powder Color Bulk density Liquid Color Density Mix Product Mixing ratio Density comp A+B

DISCLAIMER

PACKAGING

Waterproof.116/126 FX are packed in 10 kg powder (A) + 5 lit. liquid (B)

STORAGE

Can be stored for 6 months in original package in a dry and tempered area.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Cement, sand and additives Grey or White 1.5 Acrylic copolymers white 1.06 2(A) to 1(B) 1.4 ± 0.05 (fresh mortar)

NOTE

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Edition: 02/11-A

PRODUCT PREPARATION Pour component B (liquid) into a suitable clean container, then slowly add component A (powder) while stirring with a mechanical mixer. Mix until the product is perfectly smooth and homogeneous using a low speed mechanical stirrer in order to avoid any excessive incorporation of air.

DISCLAIMER

SURFACE PREPARATION The substrate to be treated must be perfectly sound, clean, free from grease, dust and friable matters. Soak the surface with water, removing any excess so that the substrate is saturated but the surface is dry.

NOTE

PRODUCT APPLICATION The paste can be applied with a brush, roller or trowel. For a trowable consistency reduce the amount of component B (liquid) used. Apply first layer of Waterproof.116/126 FX with sufficient thickness to plug pores, cracks and holes. Apply the second layer

566

Edition: 11/07-A

567

Waterproof∙136 FX (Grey) /146 FX (White) FLEXIBLE CEMENT BASED WATERPROOF COATING

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

PRODUCT

SURFACE PREPARATION The substrate must be perfectly sound, clean, free from grease, dust and friable matters. Damp down the concrete surface with clean water, but free of standing water.

Waterproof.136/146 FX is a two-component flexible cementitious coating used as a waterproof plaster or render over masonry and concrete. Two colours are available: • WaterProof 136 FX: Grey • WaterProof 146 FX: White

PRODUCT PREPARATION Mix the 2 components: A powder + B liquid, so as to obtain a creamy coating which can be applied with a brush.

Waterproof.136/146 FX is composed of a cement mortar with additives, and of a liquid component. Mixed together on site, the product is easy to apply and is used as an effective protection coating on walls against: water-borne salts (chlorides, sulfates), wear, weather and chemicals, atmospheric gases and carbonation, from rusting of steel reinforcements. It is a non shrink mortar. Waterproof.136/146 FX is available in white and grey colors. For other colors, contact Company’s Technical Department.

PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply 1st layer of Waterproof.136/146 FX with sufficient thickness to plug pores, cracks, holes: 1kg/m². Apply the 2nd and 3rd layers in the proportions of 0,5 to 1 kg/m². In dry weather, wind or sunshine, take all necessary measures to prevent the coating from violent draughts. Avoid direct exposure to sunshine. Work in the shade if possible.

SCOPE OF USE

• Renovate concrete surfaces • Waterproof lining for drinking water reservoirs and structures • Sealing and coating bar holes to ensure water tightness • Foundation protection • Waterproofing for roofs • Waterproofing under tiles in wet areas, outdoors and swimming pools • Waterproofingof gypsum board • To provide protection to concrete surfaces from carbonation and chloride attack

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

COVERAGE

1.6 kg/m² at 1 mm thickness

PACKAGING

Waterproof.136/146 FX are packed in 15 kg kit. A: Powder component: 10 kg. B: Liquid component: 5 kg pails.

STORAGE

Can be stored up to 6 months from manufacturing date, in original packaging, non open, protected from humidity, hot or freezing temperature.

CHARACTERISTICS Waterproof.136/146 FX is a 2-component product: A. Powder Composition Selected cements Silica sand, Additives,Fillers Colour White or grey Density 1.47 Grain size 0 to 1 mm B. Liquid Specific Gravity VOC and Formadehyde ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS

Waterproof∙136 FX (Grey) /146 FX (White)

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1.04 None (< 10µg/l)

568

569

Waterproof∙130 PR (Grey) / 140 PR (White) CEMENT BASED WATERPROOF COATING

All cracks and construction joints should be reinforced with fibreglass band between the first and second layer.

PRODUCT

Waterproof.130/140 PR is cement based waterproof coating for masonry and concrete, resistant to positive and negative water pressure. It is a 2-component product: A-Powder: ready mixture of cements, fillers and admixtures. B- Mixing liquid based on resins and additives. The product is non toxic and can be in contact with drinking water. Two colours are available: - Waterproof.130 PR: Grey - Waterproof.140 PR: White

APPLICATION TOOLS Apply Waterproof.130/140 PR with a brush, a sweeper or a trowel. EXAMPLES OF APPLICATIONS DRINKING WATER RESERVOIRS First repair all the cracks with Conrep.331 TX. Apply 2 coats of Waterproof.130/140 PR on the walls of the reservoir. Recommended consumption of Waterproof.130/140 PR mixture is 1 kg/m² per layer. Total consumption 2 kg/m². It is possible to work in thick coats using trowel. In this case, clean sand should be added to the Waterproof.130/140 PR mixture in the proportions of 1 volume of sand to 2 volumes of Waterproof.130/140 PR mixture.

SCOPE OF USE

External coating on any construction: • Vertical • Underground • Immersed • Internal coating of constructions with negative pressures • Completely watertight departments • Immersed cellars • Lift holes • Car parks • Waterproofing of tunnels, galleries... • Waterproofing of any pits or tanks • Swimming pools • Coating on expanded polystyrene • Waterproofing under tiles

WATERTIGHT DEPARTMENTS, TUNNELS UNDER HIGH NEGATIVE PRESSURE First repair all the cracks with WATERPROOF150 BLC. Apply 2 or 3 layers of Waterproof.130/140 PR depending on the pressure. Recommended consumption is 2 to 3 kg/m² of Waterproof.130/140 PR mixture.

Waterproof∙130 PR (Grey) / 140 PR (White) done in a ventilated area, and to wear protective gear for hands, eyes and respiratory system and to avoid breathing of the dust. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

PACKAGING

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Waterproof.130/140 PR are supplied in: MENA/UAE: 32.5 kg kit A: Powder component: 25 kg B: Liquid component: 7.5 kg pails

Qatar: 31.5 kg kit A: Powder component: 16.5 kg B: Liquid component: 5 kg pails.

PREPARATION OF PRODUCT Mix the 2 components of Waterproof.130/140 PR so as to obtain a creamy coating, which can be applied with a brush.

STORAGE

Can be stored for 6 months after manufacturing in original package, in tempered and dry area.

PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply the 1st layer of Waterproof.130/140 PR with sufficient thickness to plug pores, cracks, holes at 1 kg/m².

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

The product contains cement powders which, when mixed with water, release alkalis that could be harmful to the skin. It is preferable that the application be

Apply 2nd and 3rd layers in the proportion of 0.5 to 1 kg/m².

570

571

Waterproof∙150 BLC

FAST SETTING CEMENTITIOUS PLUGGING MORTAR

wet abundantly with water. Then apply Waterproof.150 BLC while pressing lightly.

PRODUCT

Waterproof.150 BLC is fast-setting hydraulic cement that instantly and durably stops slight or serious water leaks. Waterproof.150 BLC hardens in less than 1 minute and slightly increases in volume during setting. It is supplied as a ready-to-mix dry powder. It does not contain any aggressive or harmful products. Waterproof.150 BLC prevents corrosion, can be used underwater and resists very high pressure.

Waterproofing of joints between vertical walls and ground Prepare a groove at least 2 cm deep and 2 cm wide where the leak is located, before proceeding with the repair. To fix high-pressure leaks, make a hole as regular as possible. Plug the lower-pressure areas first, and finish with the high-pressure areas. After building up the patch progressively around the edge, put a dab of Waterproof.150 BLC in the hand, plug it in and press hard to complete the repair. After applying, keep the surface cool and moist for 15 minutes. Ideal application temperature is between + 5ºC and + 35ºC.

SCOPE OF USE

• Water seepage in underground structures: basements, parking lots, underpasses, elevator shafts, and inspection pits. • Cracks in silos, porous beds, waterproof sealing, manhole waterproofing, expansion joints, water reservoir leakage, and miscellaneous. • Waterproofing of joints between vertical and horizontal constructions.

CHARACTERISTICS

Waterproof∙150 BLC

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

CONSUMPTION

Composition

Selected cements Silica sand, Additives,Fillers Colour Grey Powder density 1.400 Grain size 0 to 1 mm Compressive strength 26 MPa @ 2 days BS EN 196-1 : 1994 Contact with potable Suitable water

1.7 kg of Waterproof.150 BLC plugs a 1 liter volume.

PACKAGING

Waterproof.150 BLC is supplied in: UAE : 20 kg bags. Qatar: 25 kg pails. MENA: 1 kg, 5 kg and 20 kg pails

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

STORAGE

BS EN 196-1 : 1994 BS EN 6319 Part 2

Can be stored under dry conditions in its original packaging for 6 months.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Water infiltration Chip away the location to be plugged, in order to obtain an opening with clean edges. Remove soil and crumbly material. Mix small amounts of Waterproof.150 BLC with some clean water. The mixture obtained must be thick. It should be applied and pressed on for 20 seconds, until it hardens. Large leaks must be stopped progressively. The plug needs to be cool, and must be kept moist for approximately 15 minutes. For preventive plugging or sealing (pipes...), first

572

573

Waterproof∙132 WB

WATER BASED SURFACE WATER REPELLENT

facilitate penetration. The surface needs to be treated for saturation twice ; the second layer must be applied before the first layer is totally dry (wet on wet). Best results are reached with a dry, absorbent surface.

PRODUCT

Waterproof.132 WB is a ready-to-use surface waterproofer made of siliconate, intended to leave a colorless, hydrophobic coat on inorganic construction materials. Once applied, Waterproof.132 WB is absorbed by capillary action and is turned into a hydrophobic siloxane by reacting with carbonic gas. The product has strong penetration into the material because of low molecular weight. It can be used on moist materials, and its beading effect appears instantly. Waterproof.132 WB can also be used to help in preventing mould and fungus formation.

RECOMMENDATIONS

As Waterproof.132 WB is alkalis, avoid contact with aluminium, wood or other light metal Prior to application on decorative substrates (tiles, colored plasters, stones…), it is strongly recommended to carry out a sample trial on site.

NOTE

CONSUMPTION

SCOPE OF USE

Consumption depends on the absorption of the substrates. Usually, they are between and ranges from 0.25 and 0.8 litre/m².

ADMISSIBLE SUBSTRATES Waterproof.132 WB is intended to protect all porous materials like: • Cementitious plaster or renders • All types of concrete • Absorbent tiles or natural stones • Bricks and roofing tiles • Tile grouts

PACKAGING

Waterproof.132 WB is supplied in 5 lit. and 25 lit. drums.

STORAGE

ASSOCIATED COATINGS A substrate treated with Waterproof.132 WB can be covered by water or solvent based paints. For water emulsion paints, compatibility tests should be realized before application.

1 year from manufacturing date, in non-open original packaging.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Density at 20°C

Waterproof∙132 WB

Transparent or whitish liquid Around 1

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

ASTM C 642: 67% of water exclusion Vs control (28 days concrete) after 24 hours immersion.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

DISCLAIMER

SURFACE PREPARATION The surface to be treated must be sound, free from powder residues and dust, and cracks must be repaired. Concrete and cement based plasters must be aged at least 28 days before Waterproof.132 WB application.

PRODUCT APPLICATION By brushing, immersion or spraying. In the latter case, the nozzle must be held near the surface to

574

575

Waterproof∙190 PA

POLY-SILOXANE OLIGOMER-BASED SURFACE WATER REPELLENT Concrete Cellular concrete Tiles and brick Natural stone Rough-coat finish Asbestos cement

PRODUCT

Waterproof.190 PA is a ready-to-use surface waterproofer made from a poly-siloxane oligomer, intended to leave a colorless, hydrophobic coat on inorganic construction materials. Once applied, Waterproof.190 PA is absorbed by capillary action and is turned into a hydrophobic siloxane by humidity. The product has strong penetration into the material because of low molecular weight. It is perfectly suited for strongly alkaline construction materials. Waterproof.190 PA makes a non-tacky, self- cleaning film. Pores and capillaries are not filled up by treatment with Waterproof.190 PA. Consequently, the impregnated building material preserves most of its original water vapor permeability, allowing the substrate to breath. Waterproof.190 PA can also be used to help in preventing mould and fungus formation.

excellent excellent excellent variable excellent ver good

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

ASTM C642: 84% of water exclusion Vs control (28 days concrete) after 24 hours immersion.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION The surface to be treated must be sound, free from powder residues and dust, and cracks must be repaired. Concrete, cement and roughcast must be aged at least 28 days before Waterproof.190 PA can be applied. Protect elements not to be treated (aluminium, wood…). PRODUCT APPLICATION By brushing, immersion or spraying. In the latter case, the nozzle must be held near the surface to facilitate penetration. The surface needs to be treated for saturation twice; the second layer must be applied before the first layer is totally dry (wet on wet). Best results are reached with a dry, absorbent surface.

SCOPE OF USE

ADMISSIBLE SUBSTRATES Waterproof.190 PA is intended to protect all porous materials like: • Cement based plaster, traditional or ready mixed • Concrete and cellular concrete • Inorganic rough-coat finishes • Asbestos cement • Bricks and roofing tiles • Absorbent natural stones

RECOMMENDATIONS

For natural stones, it is strongly recommended to carry out a sample trial on site. Not suitable for immerged surface.

ASSOCIATED COATINGS A substrate treated with Waterproof.190 PA can be covered subsequently with synthetic paints or rough coat finishes containing wetting agents. Do not apply any inorganic rough coat finishing or lime based paints, which do not contain wetting agents.

STORAGE

May be stored up to 1 year from manufacturing date, in non-open original packaging at less than 30°C

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Application should be done in a ventilated area away from any heat source. Avoid prolonged contact with skin. Wear protective gear for hands & eyes. Splashes onthe skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting, in both cases seek medical attention. In case of fire, use CO2 foam to extinguish. Tightly seal containers when not in use, store them away from heat and carefully dispose empty ones.

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

CONSUMPTION

Consumption depends on the absorption of the substrates and ranges from 0.15 to 1 litre/m². EXAMPLES Asbestos : 0.05 to 0.15 lit./m² Concrete : 0.25 to 0.50 lit./m² Rough-coat : 0.50 to 0.80 lit./m² Cellular concrete: 0.50 to 1.00 lit./m²

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Opalescent liquid Density at 20°C 0.78g/ml approx Flash point more than 55°C PERFORMANCE The following results have been obtained on different materials

PACKAGING

Waterproof.190 PA is supplied in: GCC: 20 lit. & 210 lit. drums. Lebanon: 5 lit. & 25 lit. drums.

576

577

Waterproof∙ 210 AFC

MONO-COMPONENT ACRYLIC-BASED FLEXIBLE WATERPROOF COATING PACKAGING

PRODUCT

Waterproof.210 AFC are packed in 15 kg plastic pails.

Waterproof.210 AFC is elasticized, acrylic, water-based, waterproof membrane. Waterproof.210 AFC is designed for under tile use in demanding internal & external waterproofing applications. Properly applied, Waterproof.210 AFC cures to form a durable, elastic, seamless odorless and impervious membrane that will not re-emulsify once it has fully cured even if continually immersed in water. It has a good resistance to alkalis, salt solutions & diluted acids, non hazardous composition with excellent strength & flexible characteristics.

STORAGE

Can be stored up to 6 months from manufacturing date, in original packaging, non open, protected from humidity, hot or freezing temperature.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Avoid prolonged contact with skin. Wear protective gear for hands & eyes. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. In both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

SCOPE OF USE

Waterproof.210 AFC has been specifically designed for the long term waterproofing of wet areas inc. shower, bathrooms, laundries, exterior decks, terraces and balconies.

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS Paste Appearance Paste Density Ideal application temperature Pull off Strength @ 14 days ( ASTM D4541)

Pink 1.560 5 to 35°C 1.2 MPa

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

PREPARATION OF THE SUBSTRATE Substrates should be dry, smooth, sound and free from oil, grease, waxes, dust, laitance and all loose matter. Any surface defects should be repaired prior to application of membrane.

HIGH-THICKNESS NON-WOVEN GEOTEXTILE FOR SOIL STABILISATION CHARACTERISTICS / PERFORMANCES

PRODUCT

Geotextile.800 P is a nonwoven high performances geotextile consisting of a first choice polypropylene staples, produced by mechanical needling, without using any glues or chemical binders. This geotextile is produced in Western Europe. The porosity level of Geotextile.800 P is tailored to meet specific application requirements.

Please refer to the attached table. Over lapping: depends on the application and requirements from consultants on site.

PACKAGING

Delivered by roll of 3.9 m x 25m.

SCOPE OF USE

• • • • •

Road and railway soil stabilization, Waterways and seashore erosion control, Drainage systems, Waterproofing membrane protection, Landscaping…

PROPERTIES Unit weight Thickness MECHANICAL PROPERTIES Tensile strength resistance Elongation at max load

NOTE

Static puncture test (CBR test) Dynamic puncture test (cone drop test) HYDRAULIC PROPERTIES Velocity index

Edition: 11/07-A

Permeability coefficient In-plane flow capacity (MD) Opening size DURABILITY PROPERTIES Weathering resistance

PRODUCT APPLICATION Apply the 1st layer of Waterproof.210 AFC with sufficient thickness to plug pores, cracks, and holes. Allow to dry and apply the second layer. All corners, cracks or construction joints should receive 20 cm wide fiber Mesh reinforcement between the 1st and 2nd layer. Wherever tiling on Waterproof.210 AFC is required, it is recommended that the tiling must start 24 hours after the application of Waterproof.210 AFC.

Geotextile∙800 P

Oxydation resistance

STANDARD UNIT (EN ISO 9864) 2 kPa (EN ISO 9863-1) 20 kPa (EN ISO 9863-1) 200 kPa (EN ISO 9863-1) MD CMD MD CMD

(EN ISO 10319) (EN ISO 10319) (EN ISO 10319) (EN ISO 10319) (EN ISO 12236) (EN 918)

Tolerances

g / m² mm mm mm

A d d d

kN / m kN / m % % kN mm

(EN ISO 11058) mm / s m/s (EN ISO 11058) 10-3 m / s 20 kPa (EN ISO 12958) 10-6 m² / s (EN ISO 12956) microns

800 6.2 5.5 3.8

+/+/+/+/-

10% 20% 20% 20%

Tmax 50 Tmax 60 85 85 Fp 9 Dc 0

+/+/+

10% 10% 20% 20% 10% 20%

v-index 15 v-index 0.015 Kv qp 11.0 O90 70

+/-

30% 30% 30% 30% 30%

(EN 12224)

To be covered within 15 days from the day of installation Forecast minimum durability of 25 years for every application in in natural grounds with 4<pH<9 (EN ISO 13438) and soil temperature < 25°C

The values given are average obtained in our laboratories and in official testing institutes. They can change according to certain tolerances; further information are available contacting our Commercial Department. The tolerance is indicated according to the 95% confidence level. Tolerances in hydraulic properties also result from the variation of test results from internal and external laboratories. The right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice.

NOTE

CONSUMPTION

0.260 kg/m² over smooth substrate.

Edition: 11/07-A

578

579

Geotextile∙TS

NONWOVEN GEOTEXTILE

PRODUCT

Geotextile.TS is a nonwoven geotextile composed of polypropylene fibers, which are formed into a stable network such that the fibers retain their relative position. Geotextile TS is inert to illogical degradation and resistant to naturally encountered chemicals, alkalis, and acids. Geotextile TS demonstrates high uniform strength in all directions, which means there are no inherently weak areas. Moreover, the continuous nature of the bonded fibers makes unraveling or abrasion under dynamic loads impossible. Unit PROPERTIES Type pf product Raw material CGR Puncture resistance (EN ISO 10319) N Strip tensile md KN/m KN/m Strength cd (EN ISO 10319) % Elongation at max load md % (EN ISO 10319) cd Grab tensile strength md (ASTM D 4632) N Dynamic puncture test mm (cone drop test) (EN 918) Opening size O90 µm (EN ISO 12958) Water flow rate normal to the plane (EN ISO 11058) mm/s Water flow rate 20 KPa 105 m²/s l/m.h in the plane Transmissivity 200 KPa 105 m²/s l/m.h (EN ISO 12958) Thickness 2 KPa mm (EN 964-1) Mass (EN 965)

SCOPE OF USE Area of application

g/m²

TS 10 TS 20 TS 30 TS 40 TS 50 TS 60 TS 65 TS 70 TS 80 Mechanically bonded conditions filament nonwoven 100% propylene, UV-stabilized

1175 1500 1750 2100 2350 2900 3300 3850 4250 21.5 24 28 19 15 9.5 11.5 13.5 7.5 21.5 24 28 19 15 9.5 11.5 13.5 7.5 75 35

80 35

80 40

75 35

570

680

820

990

105

100

130 6 2.2 2 0.7

115 10 3.6 4 1.5

100 20 7.26 2.2

90 25 9 7 2.5

85 30 10.8 8 2.9

72 35 12.6 8.5 3.1

65 55 40 45 14.4 16.2 9 10 3.2 3.6

50 50 18 11 4

1.2

1.5

1.7

1.9

2.2

2.5

2.9

3.2

105

125

155

180

200

250

285

325

385

1100 1350 1550 1800 1950

SCOPE OF USE

Forms of supply width length area weight of roll width length area weight of roll

Unit m m m² kg m m m² kg

TS 10 TS 20 TS 30 TS 40 TS 50 TS 60 TS 65 TS 70 TS 80 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 300 250 225 200 175 135 125 100 90 1200 1000 900 800 700 540 500 400 360 136 135 150 154 150 145 153 140 149 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 300 250 225 200 175 135 125 100 90 600 500 450 400 350 270 250 200 180 68 88 75 77 75 73 76 70 75

DISCLAIMER

This information is given according to our experience and our responsibility can only be engaged in this respect. The manufacturer shall have the right to modify the data without previous notice and denies all responsibility in case the product is used improperly. This data sheet supersedes all previous literature and all products should be used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

NOTE

TS 10 TS 20 TS 30 TS 40 TS 50 TS 60 TS 65 TS 70 TS 80

Subgrade stabilization Railway construction Hydraulic construction Drainage systems Geomembrane protection Reinforced earth structures Light medium High

580

581

Waterstops

WATERSTOPS FOR CONSTRUCTION AND EXPANSION JOINTS PRODUCT

PACKAGING

CHARACTERISTICS

Waterstops are to be used to stop positively leakage through construction and expansion joints in concrete structures. They are made in flexible PVC and are available in different sizes and types.

Appearance Color Tensile strength Elongation at break Shore ‘A’ hardness Welding Temp.

SCOPE OF USE

Waterstops are designed for sealing construction and expansion joints in water retaining structures and keeping water out from concrete structures. • Basements • Tunnels • Underground car parks • Tankers, dams, canals • Swimming pools

PVC Orange > 10N/mm² (DIN 18541) > 350% (DIN 18541) 67 ± 5 Around 200°C

Waterstops are permanently resistant to water, seawater and sewage.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Waterstops

Internal construction joint

Internal expansion joint

Roll Length (m)

5 years from manufacturing date, protected from UV light.

The jointing of Waterstops by welding will generate toxic fumes. For this reason, jointing should be made in a not confined area or by providing forced ventilation.

DISCLAIMER

BS 2571 and BS 2782 DIN 18541 (part 2)

Width (cm)

STORAGE

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CHEMICAL RESISTANCE

USES AND PROFILES Type

Waterstops is supplied in 15 ml/ roll or 30 ml/ roll depending on the type.

Nominal Thickness (mm)

Max. Waterhead (m)

V-15 V-20 L V-24 L V-32 L

15 20 24 32

30 30 30 15

5 ± 10% 4 ± 10% 4 ± 10% 5.5 ± 10%

5 10 15 25

O-20 L O-25 L O-32 L

20 25 32

15 15 15

2 ± 10% 2 ± 10% 3 ± 10%

10 15 25

AR-24

3.5 ± 10%

DR-25

3.5 ± 10%

NOTE

External construction joint

External expansion joint

582

583

Swellbar

WATERPROOF SEALING OF CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

PRODUCT

SURFACE PREPARATION Swellbar should be applied to a dry, smooth surface, secured with glue and /or steel nails. The construction joint can be leveled off using expandable mastic or bentonite paste.

Swellbar is a hydrophilic joint sealant composed of natural sodium bentonite clay and butyl rubber. According to the type, the sealant can be used in both fresh water and/or salt water. Swellbar is harmless for the environment and may be used when in contact with drinking water.

PRODUCT APPLICATION The sealant is applied to the middle of the construction joint. It is advisable to allow at least 8 cm of concrete on both sides of the expanding sealant to prevent cracks in the concrete. In a vertical installation a metal fastening profile is being used to reinforce the strip, or to provide protection during concreting. Connect together by bringing the extremities of the expanding joints together flush or with a 10 cm overlap and gluing and /or nailing.

PROPERTIES

Swellbar swells more than 400 % in contact with water which guarantees a durable sealing. Due to his rubber-bentonite composition, Swellbar stays flexible, even at temperature of – 15 ºC. Swellbar is resistant against chemical products like alkali, fresh concrete.

SCOPE OF USE

Swellbar are used for the waterproof sealing of construction joints in concrete.

STORAGE

12 months in its original packaging in a dry place and away from frost.

CHARACTERISTICS Joint sealant for fresh water only Color Section Packaging in mm m x rolls/ box Joint Sealants Swellbar/G Green 19x25 10mx4 rolls Swellbar/B10 Black 20x10 15mx5 rolls Swellbar/B5 Black 20x5 15mx5 rolls Fastening profile (metallic) Swellbar/M 19x25 20m/pack Joint sealants for fresh and salt water (SQ Types) Joint Sealants Swellbar SQ Red 19x25 10mx4 rolls Fastening profile (metallic) Swellbar/MS 19x25 20m/pack

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

The expansion capacity of Swellbar joint sealants reaches a maximum of 450 %, however, sustained contact with water before concreting is to be avoided. Swellbar SQ joint sealants are developed for use in both fresh water and sea water as well as in brackish water. The expansion capacity in fresh water equals that of the Swellbar types: Maximum 450 %. In sea water a minimum capacity of 200 % is reached.

Edition: 04/08-A

Soilex∙200 SOIL STABILIZER

STORAGE

PRODUCT

6 months after manufacturing date in its original packing non open, protected form frost and heat.

Soilex.200 is an aqueous, non-ionic stabilized dispersion of carboxylated styrene/butadiene copolymers resistant to saponification. Soilex.200 is widely used as soil stabilizer. It penetrates into the soil to bind the particles into a more compacted unit, difficult to erode or destabilize. It can also be added to mortars where a fast development of compressive strength and high flexural strength of mortars are required

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Avoid prolonged contact with skin. Wear protective gear for hands & eyes. Splashes on the skin should be washed away by cleaning with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. In both cases seek medical attention. The product is non-flammable.

SCOPE OF USE

• Stabilizing slopes • Rail ways • Roads • Soil consolidation before excavation

DISCLAIMER

CHARACTERISTICS Color Total Solids content Viscosity Surface Tension pH

Milky white (transparent once applied) 47% (DIN 53189) 300 mPas (ISO 1652) 40 mN/m (DIN 53593) 5.5 (DIN 53785)

NOTE

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

PRODUCT APPLICATION For better dispersion, dilute Soilex.200 with water at a rate of 15% and use the mix as follows:

First option: spray on the compacted surface of the soil at a average rate of 1 Lit/m² depending on the soil’s type.

Edition: 11/09-A

Second option: Introduce the material through holes into the soil. 20 mm diameter holes are spread over the area at an average of 1 hole/m² - pour 1 Liter in each hole.

CONSUMPTION 1 lit/m².

PACKAGING

Soilex.200 is supplied in 200 lit drums.

584

585

Jointseal∙PS 1000 GG/PG/SW

Jointseal∙prime PS

TWO-COMPONENT POLYSULPHIDE JOINT SEALANT GG (GUN GRADE), PG (POURING GRADE), SW (SEWAGE)

PRIMER FOR POLYSULPHIDE SEALANT

PRODUCT

Jointseal.prime PS is a primer recommended for increasing the bonding of polysulphide sealant on most surfaces. It can also be used to reinforce friable and dusty surfaces.

SCOPE OF USE

DISCLAIMER

• Primer for polysulphide sealant, to be applied in the joints • Spot remover

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Colour Viscosity at 30°C Weight per liter Adhesion on concrete

Free flowing liquid Pale yellow 14 ± 2 sec on Ford Cup B4 1.0 ± 0.02 kg Good

NOTE

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Jointseal.prime PS is to be applied with a brush wherever Polysulphide Sealant Jointseal.PS 1000 will be applied. Before applying sealant on Jointseal.prime PS, wait between 30 minutes and 1 hour.

Edition: 06/07-A

CONSUMPTION

Between 50 and 100 g / m² (depending on the surface porosity). It is desirable to increase dosage on particularly porous substrate. On contrary, a minimal dosage will be used for smooth support.

• Durable, remains unaffected by UV rays, Ozone and weathering conditions. • Resistant to water, salt water, 10% diluted, acids except nitric acid, 10% alkalies, most of the common chemicals, vegetable, lubricating oils and fuels. • Performs well in a temperature ranging from -40°C to + 80°C. and +100°C. intermittent. • Resistant to biodegradation, prevents the growth of fungus & micro- organisms. • Movement Capability: Provides satisfactory hermetic sealing of the joint subjected to expansion,contraction vibrations and cyclic movements within the following limits. • - Moving joints up to ±25% of the width Slip resistant (non-sag) can be applied in vertical & ceiling joints. • Self levelling, after pouring in horizontal joint levels itself. • Resilient, recovers the original width after expansion & contraction without loosing the surface bond. • Excellent repair ability property. • It can be over coated by waterproofing compounds. • Non toxic • Sealant will not cause staining to concrete, masonry or stones.

PRESENTATION

Jointseal.PS 1000 sealants are made of two components based on Polysulphide liquid elastomer. It consists of a ‘Base’ component and accelerator. When the two components are mixed together prior to application, a chemical reaction is initiated which cures to a firm, flexible rubber like seal with excellent adhesion to concrete, masonry, wood, glass acrylic & PVC plastics. It is capable of withstanding repeated expansion, contraction & Cyclic movements without loss of adhesion and resists deterioration by weathering, UV, ozone, water, salt water, oils & fuels. It is far superior to all the conventional joint sealing materials. Jointseal.PS 1000 GG (Gun grade) is a non-sag material used for sealing of horizontal, vertical & ceiling joints. Jointseal. PS 1000 PG (Pouring grade) is a pourable & self levelling material used for sealing of horizontal joints only. Jointseal.PS 1000 SW is suitable for sewage system and has extra ordinary resistance to organic chemicals and micro biological effects.

TYPICAL APPLICATION

Sealing of expansion, contraction & construction joints in building structures such as, Basements, subways, retaining walls, floors, external walls and claddings of high-rise buildings, roof terraces & ceilings especially structural expansion joint running through the ceiling. Sealing of dynamic structural cracks.

Glazing joints of window, door frame and curtain walls. Joints & ‘J’ bolts of asbestos sheet roofing. Sealing of water retaining structure joints such as, Water tank, reservoirs, dams, aqua ducts, canals, culverts, water treatment plant, sewage plants. Sealing of joints in traffic areas such as, Bridges, roads and car parking areas.

ADVANTAGES

PACKAGING

• Cure at ambient temperature to a tough, elastic & flexible rubber like material. • Bonds strongly to most of the building materials with the use of Jointseal.prime PS.

STORAGE

TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Jointseal.prime PS is supplied in 1 liter can. 12 months from the manufacturing date.

ITEM Nature

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Relative elongation

Bleeding Staining Solid content Mixing ratio

586

Jointseal.PS 1000 GG / PG Two component

Jointseal.PS 1000 SW (Sewage) Two component

450-800% None

600-1000% None

None

100% Base: Accelerator 92: 8 parts by weight

587

Jointseal∙PS 1000 GG/PG/SW

Consistency after mixing 940 GG 941 PG

Thick, non sag paste Thick, flowing paste

Thick, non sag paste

Peel adhesion with Jointseal.prime PS

As per ASTM C-794

0.45 kg/ mm

Pot Life at 30°C Initial setting time at 30°C Complete curing time,at 5°C at 15°C at 25°C at 30°C to 35°C

3 to 4 hours 24 hours

2 to 3 hours 24 hours

8 weeks 4 weeks 2 weeks 1 week

Colour- Base compound Off White Accelerator (curing agent) Dark brown to black Grey Mixed compound Slump (sag) resistance of 940 GG Nil as per BS 4254 Movement accommodation factor ± 25% As per ASTM C920 Bond durability 25 Shore hardness Resistant Ozone & weathering resistance Specific gravity 1.5 - 1.55 As per BS 4254 Tensile Strength Cracking & grazing 70°C/21 days As per ASTMC-792.7 Rubber like Appearance after curing 12 months Shelf life

BACK UP MATERIAL Insert compressible polyethylene, polyurethane, thermocol foam, neoprene, polyethylene, butyl rods as a back-up material to control depth of sealant in the joint & to provide support for tooling of the sealant.

Off White Dark brown to black Grey Nil as per BS 4254 ± 25% Pass 28 Resistant 1.55 - 1.65 As per BS 4254 As per ASTMC-792.7 Rubber like 12 months

determined and are given below:

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

BS-4254-1983 : British Standard specification TT- S- 00227E : National Bureau of standard (GSA) C- 920-87 : American Society for Testing & Materials (ASTM) DIN - 18549 : German Standard Specification

DEPTH OF SEALANT TYPE OF JOINT Concrete Masonry 6 mm to 12 mm > 6 mm 12.5 mm to 25 mm = width/2 > 25 mm 12.5 mm Joint Width

JOINT DESIGN

As the joint expand, contract or experience a shear movement, cyclic movements, sealant changes the shape accordingly, but the volume of sealant remains same. Hence, in designing the joints, it is vital that the proper width-to-depth ratio is respected so that the width of the joint is consistent with the capability of sealant to endure daily and seasonal cycles for prolonged periods.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Metal Glass > 6 mm = width/2 12.5 mm

SURFACE PREPARATION 1. Surface preparation is the most important step before application of sealant to get best results and to avoid failure. 2. The joint surface must be dry, free from dust, coatings, bituminous mastics, concrete curing agents, mould release agents, oils, greases and loose particles. 3. Clean the joint surface by wire brush and sanding

The amount of movement in a joint is dependent on the length (span), the coefficient of linear expansion of a panel section and the temperature differential of the substrate. To achieve the long-term, effective performance, established width-to-depth ratios are

588

tool against the sealant surface, moving along the length of the joint. Tooling breaks air bubbles and exposes any air pockets present. Tooling compresses the sealant, thus promoting adhesion to the joint sides. After tooling, the masking tape should be removed immediately. Soap solution can be used to smoothen the sealant surface.

with emery paper. 4. Remove dust by compressed air or paint brush. 5. Wipe out oil & grease with a cleaner.

TOOLS CLEANING

Tools and equipment can be easily cleaned with a cleaner.

PRIMING Apply two coats of Jointseal.Prime PS by brush on the sides of the joint surface at an interval of 30 minutes.

COVERAGE

Length of Joint, in meters, filled per 1 liter of material Depth of joint (mm) 10 15 20 25

BOND BREAKER Fix bond breaker tape such as self-adhesive polyethylene tape on back-up material to avoid adhesion of sealant to the third surface. MASKING TAPE Apply masking tape such as self-adhesive polyethylene, cellophane or cloth tape on both edges of the joint. It is used to improve the neatness of the finished seal by protecting the face edges of the joint. It may be removed immediately after tooling of the sealant.

10 10

Width of joint (mm) 15 20 25 30 6.7 5 4 3.33 4.45

3.33 2.5

2.67 2.23 2 1.67 1.6 1.33

PACKAGING

Jointseal.PS 1000: 3 or 4lit./ kit of 2 components Jointseal.Prime PS: 1 litre

STORAGE

MIXING The base and accelerator compounds supplied are packed in pre- weighed quantity as per the mixing ratio. After the application of Primer, mix the material of individual container. Transfer entire quantity of accelerator to the base compound tin and mix it thoroughly to a uniform, homogenous grey colour. Mixing can be done manually with spatula/palette knife or special flat stirrer attached to a low speed electric mixer less than 500 r.p.m.

Store the material at Cool & Dry place Shelf life is one year in unopened containers

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Application should be done in a ventilated area away from any heat source. Wear protective gear for hands and eyes and avoid breathing of vapour. If mixed resin comes into contact with the skin, it should be promptly removed before hardening, followed by thoroughly washing the skin with soap and water. In case of heavy vapour inhalation, place affected person in an open-air area. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. In all cases, seek medical attention. In case of fire, use CO2 foam to extinguish. Tightly seal containers when not in use, store them away from heat and carefully dispose empty ones.

APPLICATION Apply the mixed gun grade compound by means of a spatula or by filling into a plastic cartridge which is then placed into the hand held caulking gun into the joint. Avoid application below 10°C temperature.

DISCLAIMER

TOOLING AND FINISHING It is desirable that a smooth surfaces is obtained. Tool the sealant by pressing the puffy knife or flat

While the company guarantees its products against defective materials, the use and application of these

589

Jointseal∙PS 1000 GG/PG/SW

Jointseal∙PS 2000 JF

PRODUCT

TWO PART COLD APPLIED ELASTOMERIC POLYSULPHIDE JET FUEL RESISTANT JOINT SEALANT FOR CONCRETE PAVEMENTS JOINTSIZE

The recommended width-to-depth ratio are as follows:

Jointseal.PS 2000 JF is a two part elastomeric polysulphide polymer based jet fuel resistant joint sealant. The cured sealant is tough, elastic, resilient and resistant to water, salt water, jet fuel, UV rays, ozone, vibrations, impact and nuclear radiations. Jointseal.PS 2000 JF seals the joint hermetically and is weather durable in exposed fields. It bonds to the concrete surface with the use of the appropriate primer. Jointseal.PS 2000 JF is available in pouring (machine applied) and in gun grades (hand applied). Jointseal.PS 2000 JF conforms to BS 5212:1975.

NOTE

19 mm

25 mm

19 mm

32 mm

19 mm

38 mm

25 mm

MASKING TAPE For a neat joint, protect it by fixing masking tape to prevent those areas from being overfilled. The masking tape should be removed immediately after placing the sealant.

CHARACTERISTICS

Shelf Life Mixing ratio

12 mm

19 mm

SURFACE PREPARATION OF JOINT Joint should be neat. Remove the dirt and foreign material from the joint. The joint sidewalls shall be wire brushed.

Jointseal.PS 2000 JF is used for sealing horizontal (Type H) and vertical joints (Type N). It is ideal for sealing joints in reinforced concrete structures such as plane parking areas, roads, bridges, pavements, airport runways and taxiways.

Appearance Color Viscosity

Depth

12 mm

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SCOPE OF USE

Edition: 08/09-A

Width

Polysulphide rubber Black G.G. 10’00-15’00 poises P.G. 1’500-2’00 poises 18 months at 5°C to 35°C base resin Curing agent 90:10 (parts by weight) -30°C to 90°C 2-12 hours 6-24 hours. 3-7 days. 85% recovery.

primeR Apply two coats of primer by brush at an interval of 30 minutes. Allow the primer to dry for 30 minutes (2nd coat) before placing sealant. Sealant must be applied within 2 hours of primer application.

Service Temperature Tack free at 20°C Setting time Full curing Recovery after expansion /contraction Change in volume @ 70 2-3% max. degrees for 168 hours Flame resistance @ 260 No combustion. degrees for 2 minutes Resistance to fuel immersion Change in mass max. 3% increase. Recover 80% Adhesion No loss Cohesion No rupture

BACK UP MATERIAL The back-up material is used to adjust the joint depth to width ratio. The back up material shall be compatible with sealant and of a resilient nature e.g. closed cell polyethylene foam. MIXING OF A SEALANT Mix both components in their individual container first by hand or with an electrically operated stirrer/ mixer. Transfer curing paste into base paste container’s entire quantity. Mix both components together by hand or with the mixer until obtention of a homogenous, uniform black color paste. APPLICATION Apply mixed gun-grade sealant manually by using spatula or hand gun, side first, then bottom and finally fill the joint with little excess for tooling. Tool the

590

591

Jointseal∙PU

Jointseal∙PS 2000 JF

ONE COMPONENT POLYURETHANE SEALANT

NOTE

sealant by soap solution soaked “putty knife” blade or steel trowel, pressing against the joint faces in downward direction to a smooth leveled surface. Tooling remover air or voids remained of the sealant.

EXPANSION JOINT

Allow the sealant to cure to a specified curing period.

Edition: 06/07-A

CLEANING OF TOOLS AND HANDS

Clean the tools immediately after applications by xylene, toluene or acetone solvent. hands can be cleaned using kerosene and soap solution.

PACKAGING

Chloride acid 10% ++ Lactic acid 50% Nitric acid 10% Sulphuric acid 5% + Orthophosphoric acid 84% ++ Ammoniac 22º Be ++ 2 Butoxy Ethanol + Sea water ++ Javelle water ++ Gasoline ++ Hydrogen peroxide 33 vol. ++ Ethanol 20% ++ Ethanol 100% + Ethylene diamine + 2 Ethylhexanol + Fuel ++ Vaselin oil ++ Mineral oil ++ Detergent ++ Octanol Aldehyde formic 37% sol ++ Sodium hydroxude 10% sol Sodium hydroxude 50% sol Toluene Trichloroethylene + White spirit ++

PRODUCT

Jointseal.PU is a reliable low modulus polyurethane joint sealant, allowing a high degree of elongation. After stretching, it recovers its performances and its resistance to climatic ageing, rain, snow, salt haze, ozone, ultra violet rays and atmospheric corrosion. It can be later painted after full curing. Use rather an acrylic or vinyl paintings after realizing a preliminary test. The Jointseal PU sealant conforms to the requirements of ASTM C 920, “Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants”, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT and M.

SCOPE OF USE

Jointseal.PS 2000 JF is supplied in 4 litres containers.

Jointseal.PU is used: • For waterprooﬁng of masonry joints. • In expansion joints in concrete structures. • As joint sealant between prefabricated concrete elements. • As a joint sealant in metal structures, in cladding, in door and window frames (metal, wood, aluminum, PVC). • As a sealant for cracks. • As a sealant in glass blocks

STORAGE

One year. Store the material in its unopened containers in a cold and dry place.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color available Density Consistency Movement capability Shore “A” hardness Elongation at Break E-modulus at 100% Service temperature Application temp. UV-ray resistance No evidence of any surface cracking was observed Slight discoloration was observed Skin time Full cure speed

DISCLAIMER

Polyurethane elastomer White, grey, beige, brown, Black 1.17 g/ml Thixotropic 25% 30 (DIN 53505) > 250% (ISO 8339) 0.30 MPa (ISO 8339) -20°C to +90°C. +5°C to +40°C. ASTM G 53:88

Good resistance : ++ Moderate resistance: + No resistance: -

APPLICABLE STANDARD

SNJF label 1st category from the “Syndicat Français Des Joints et Façades”

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION All surfaces should be clean, free from grease, oil or dust. All traces of release agent or silicone treatment should be removed. Place Baking Rod inside the joint to be filled for correcting the depth. If the thickness of the joint doesn’t exceed 20 mm and if the application with a flexible backing rod is respected, the Jointseal PU can be applied up to 5 cm width.

after 500 hrs @ 50 +2°C 75 min (23°C, 50% RH) 3 mm/day (23°C, 50% RH)

CHEMICAL RESISTANCE TABLE Acetone Ethyl acetate Acetic acid 10% Acetic acid 25%

592

PRODUCT APPLICATION For a cleaner job, protect the edges of the joint with masking tapes. Apply the sealant into the joint, using a suitable tool moistened with soapy water. Smooth the surface. Make sure that the product do

+ + + +

593

Jointseal∙PU 2000

Jointseal∙PU

TWO-COMPONENT PITCH POLYURETHANE SEALANT

not migrate in the support and the adhesion is ok. In case of problem, contact company for advice.

subject to legal pursuit. Edition: 04/11-B

PACKAGING

Jointseal.PU is supplied in 600 ml foil cartridge.

shall be taken into consideration for optimum performance. Width of joints depends very much on the spacing between joints and designed to ensure total movement does not exceed MAF 25%. In area subjected to traffic, a maximum joint width of 30 mm is recommended, with a recess of 5 mm below flush. Sealant depth shall not exceed joint width. A width: depth ratio of 1:1 to 1 – 1/2:1 subject to a minimum 10 mm depth of sealant is recommended.

PRODUCT

Jointseal.PU 2000 is a two-part polyurethane sealant, used to fill heavy duty expansion joints in civil engineering works.

PROPERTIES

STORAGE

Jointseal.PU 2000 conforms to ASTM C 920. Jointseal.PU 2000 adheres to most materials commonly used in construction. Jointseal.PU 2000 has good resistance to mechanical stress, chemicals, fuels, oils and hydraulic fluids and is highly resilient. It is more efficient and cost effective, capable of accommodating above average movement and severe climatic conditions, unlike conventional hot poured bituminous pavement sealant which become less flexible at lower temperatures and shorter life due to high age hardening.

12 months from production date, in original unopened packaging and protected from humidity. Store in a well ventillated room and at a maximum temperature of 30°C

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE All joints should be completely dry and free from all traces of dirt, dust, grease, previous sealants, and other foreign matter. Cleaning may be carried out by wire brushing, either hand or machine operated, grit blasting or grinding. In all cases, a clean bonding surface must be obtained. Joint sides must be parallel and straight. Spalled joint should be repaired with concrete repair material, such as epoxy mortar. Following preparation, place into the base of the joint a bond breaker or back up rod material to form the correct cross section for joint sealant and to prevent the sealant bonding to the base of the joint.

SCOPE OF USE

Jointseal.PU 2000 is mainly used as a joint sealant in: • Concrete pavement • Roads • Bridge decks • Air field runways • Warehouses

CHARACTERISTICS

DISCLAIMER

Appearance Color Viscosity at 25°C cps Solid content Specific gravity Service Temperature Mixing ratio 1 Resin Pot life Shelf life Tack free at 25°C Staining Slump Bleeding Resistance to ozone

NOTE

PRIMING The sides of the prepared joint should be primed with appropriate primer, for porous surfaces and non- porous surfaces, with Waterproof.310 PU primer. After priming allow half an hour for solvents to evaporate. If application of Waterproof.310 PU Primer is delayed for more than 24 hours after priming, joints should be re-primed.

Viscous black liquid Resin : Black Hardener : colorless 50,000 95% 1.30 -10°C to 90°C 3:1 Hardener 4 hours 18 months at 10°C to 30°C 24 hours Slightly 0 mm 0 mm non- crack

MIXING AND APPLICATION Add the entire contents of Pack B to Pack A and stir for a full 15 minutes preferably using a slow speed electric drill with anchor type stirrer, until a completely homogeneous mix is obtained. Avoid air entrapment.Mixing is made easier if the Pack B is added and mixed in two stages. Pour immediately into the primed joint. Use of masking tape will help to obtain a clean finish. After usage, tools should be cleaned with Company’s cleaner.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

JOINT SIZE Jointseal.PU 2000 can accommodate large continuous cyclic movements. However joint spacing

594

595

Jointseal∙PU 2010

Jointseal∙PU 2000

TWO COMPONENT POLYURETHANE SEALANT

PACKAGING

CURING TIME

Jointseal.PU 2000 is packed in12 Kg set packs. (Pouring or gun grade). Each pack consists of two containers: • Pack A • Pack B

The pot life is approximately 1H30 at 25°C. However, the application time and rate of cure will depend upon the temperature of sealant and the ambient temperature at the time of application. At higher temperatures the rate of cure will be faster. Final cure occurs within two days at 25°C, when full working properties are developed. (although the sealant will normally bear traffic within 24 hours of application) Low temperature retards curing. Do not apply at temperature below 4°C.

COVERAGE SHOWN IN METERS PER LITRE OF SEALANT JOINT DEPTH mm 10

JOINT DEPTH - mm 10 10

15 6.7 4.45

20 5 3.33

25 4 2.67

30 3.33 2.23

2.5

2 1.6

1.67 1.33

STORAGE

DISCLAIMER

The storage life is approximately 18 months, but the material should be used before the date stamped on the container. Storage temperature range is 10°C to 30°C Store in dry conditions.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

NOTE

596

• 10mm for all porous surfaces. • 20mm for joints exposed to traffic and hydrostatic pressures. • 5mm below flush for joints exposed to traffic

PRODUCT

Jointseal.PU 2010 is a two component polyurethane sealant which, after thorough mixing, cures at ambient temperature to form a flexible and resilient rubber. It has excellent recovery characteristics even after extended periods of compression and/or elongation, and is resistant to all weather conditions over a wide temperature range. Jointseal.PU 2010 two part polyurethane can be supplied in pouring and gun grade for sealing horizontal and vertical joints where movement is expected or where the performance specification is too rigorous, for most common mastics and joint sealers. Jointseal.PU 2010 two part polyurethane sealing compound is ideal for use in expansion and contraction joints on bridge decks and floor joints, airport runways and aprons, etc. It is specially used in areas subjected to heavy foot and vehicle traffic where abrasion resistant, flexible sealant is required.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Colors available Density Solide content Viscosity at 25˚C Shore”A”hardness Mixing ratio

Polyurethane rubber White, Grey, Black 4.5 g/ml 100% Thixotropic paste 35±5 Gun grade:5:1 Pouring grade:3:1 Pot life 4 hrs Tack free at 25˚C 24hrs Staining none Slump 0mm Bleeding 0mm Extrudability 5second at 20˚C Resistance to ozone Non-crack

RESISTANCE TO BIO-DEGRADATION

Jointseal.PU 2010 two part polyurethane forms and absolute water-tight seal in reservoirs and sewage works. The material has excellent resistance to bio degradation due to bacterial attack in sewage tanks, or reservoir, etc. It has been extensively tested in the laboratory and on-site in situations known to cause bio-degradation, eg, in dilute crude sewage, sewage sludge, digested sludge at the point of discharge from the primary (heated) digestion tanks, etc, without any detrimental effect to the material, and is far superior in resisting attack by sewage effluent than most other commercially available sealants.

JOINT PREPARATION

SURFACE TREATMENT • Concrete & Masonry: Surfaces must be clean and dry. Wire brush thoroughly and remove dust and all contaminants. • Metals: Remove any corrosive or mill scale by grit or shot blast, wire brush, grinder or chemical remover. Degrease the surfaces with clean cloth soaked in oil free cleansing solvent. • Wood (bare) : Wood surfaces must be clean and dry. Cut back abrade where necessary to sound timber. • Glass and Glazed: Thoroughly clean the surfaces with clean cloths soaked in oil cleansing solvent. • Coated surfaces: Where feasible, coating should be removed and the surfaces treated as above. • Cured compound can be removed by scraping with a sharp tool, wire brush or sanding. Prior soaking in paint stripper greatly facilitates mechanical removal of cured compound. Where required, masking tape and bond breaker should be applied before priming.

STANDARD COMPLIANCE

Jointseal.PU 2010 two part polyurethane sealant conforms to BS 5212 : US Federal Specification TT-S00227E A11/1969 A116.1, JIS A5758.

CHARACTERISTICS JOINT SIZE

Joint size may range from a minimum of 5mm to a maximum of 50mm wide. Joints with cyclic movements should have a width : depth ratio of 2 : 1 and designed so as total movement does not exceed the 25% MAF related to the joint width. Sealant depth shall not exceed joint width. Minimum sealant depth recommend • 5mm for metals, glass and other impervious surfaces.

PRIMING The Jointseal.prime PS must always be used in the following cases: • Porous surfaces (such as concrete & masonry) • Non-porous surfaces (such as metals, glass and

597

Jointseal∙PU 2010

glazed surfaces) • Oil-resistant applications Application of primer should not be carried out below 4ºC.

PRODUCT APPLICATION • Jointseal.PU 2010 is designed to be applied using a sealant gun, but can be applied by trowel if required. • Sealant guns are fitted with conical nozzles which can be cut to suit the joint width. • The sealant should be gunned into the joint using an even trigger pressure, cleaning the nozzle occasionally to avoid contamination. Deep joints should be filled in two or more runs, to prevent air entrapment. • Once the sealant has been applied, a small timber spatula, soaked in soapy water, should be used to compact the sealant into the joints and to tool off to achieve a smooth polished finish. Any masking tape which has been applied should be removed before the sealant cures. • Mixing and application equipment should be cleaned immediately using tool cleaner, using rubber gloves to prevent tool cleaner coming into contact with skin.

A single coat of primer should be applied by brush in accordance with the instructions on the primer tins. The primer must be allowed to dry for a minimum period of one hours before applying Jointseal.PU 2010. Jointseal.PU 2010 should be applied within 24 hours of priming, otherwise re-priming will be necessary. APPLICATION TEMPERATURES • Jointseal.PU 2010 should only be applied when the ambient temperature is between 4ºC and 50ºC. • When the temperature is below 10ºC storage at 21ºC for several hours will ease mixing and application. INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE MIXING • Mix and use on complete unit at a time – do not sub-divide. • Jointseal.PU 2010 is supplied in two parts, in separate tins with the curing agent contained in a smaller tin. • Mix for 5-10 minutes using a paddle fitted to a 500r.p.m. electric drill, moving the paddle completely through the mass of the material. The sides and base of the container should be periodically scraped down with a palette knife to ensure all the curing agent is completely blended with the base compound. • Failure to completely disperse curing agent throughout the base compound will result in uncured sealant. Jointseal.PU 2010 should be used imme diately once mixed.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Application should be done in a ventilated area away from any heat source. Wear protective gear for hands and eyes and avoid breathing of vapor. If material comes into contact with the skin, it should be promptly removed before hardening, followed by thoroughly washing the skin with soap and water. In case of contact with eyes, wash thoroughly with clean water. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. In all cases, seek medical attention. In case of fire, use CO2 foam to extinguish. Tightly seal containers when not in use, store them away from heat and carefully dispose empty ones.

DISCLAIMER

12 kg per kit (9kg resin, 3kg hardener).

STORAGE

NOTE

RECOMMENDED MOVEMENT Transverse ± 25% Shear ± 50%

PACKAGING

The storage life is approximately 18 months, but the material should be used before the date stamped on the container. Storage temperature range is 5°C to 30 oC. Store in dry conditions.

COVERAGE SHOWN IN METERS PER LITRE OF SEALANT JOINT DEPTH mm

JOINT DEPTH - mm 10 10

10 10

15 20 6 6.7 5 10 4.45 3.33 15 2.5 20 25 Length in linear metres per litre Example: for a rectangular joint 10 mm by 10 mm, one litre will fill 10m

598

25 4 2.67 2 1.6

30 3.33 2.23 1.67 1.33

599

Jointseal∙PU MC

ONE-COMPONENT POLYURETHANE SEALANT AND ADHESIVE Acetic acid 25% + Chloride acid 10% ++ Lactic acid 50% Nitric acid 10% Sulphuric acid 5% + Orthophosphoric acid 84% ++ Ammoniac 22º Be ++ 2 Butoxy Ethanol + Sea water ++ Javelle water ++ Gasoline ++ Hydrogen peroxide 33 vol. ++ Ethanol 20% ++ Ethanol 100% + Ethylene diamine + 2 Ethylhexanol + Fuel ++ Vaselin oil ++ Mineral oil ++ Detergent ++ Octanol Aldehyde formic 37% sol ++ Sodium hydroxude 10% sol Sodium hydroxude 50% sol Toluene Trichloroethylene + White spirit ++

PRODUCT

Jointseal.PU MC is a reliable high modulus polyurethane compound suitable for jointing and high performance bonding. As a mono-component material, it cures on exposure to moisture to form a high flexible seal. After stretching, it recovers its performances. Jointseal.PU MC is suitable for bonding clay tiles on roof. It is also easily over painted. The Jointseal PU MC sealant conforms to the requirements of ASTM C 920, “Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants”, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use T and NT-Type M.

SCOPE OF USE

Jointseal.PU MC is used for applications such as • Flexible bonding for decorative claddings • Flexible bonding for clay tiles • Jointing between cladding elements, ceramic tiles… • Joint sealant in metal structures, in cladding, indoor and window frames (metal, wood, aluminium, PVC) Priming is not necessary for usual substrates or materials like cement, clay tiles, aluminium and wood.

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color available

Polyurethane elastomer White, grey, beige, brown, Black 1.17 g/ml Thixotropic 40 (DIN 53505) > 600% (ASTM D 638 : 91) 0.40 MPa (ISO 8339) -20°C to +90°C +5°C to + 40°C. Good 60 min (23°C, 50% RH) 3 mm/day (23°C, 50% RH) >70% 0.60 MPa (ISO 8339) 9 KN/m (ASTM D624) 1.42 N/mm²

Good resistance : ++ Moderate resistance: + No resistance: -

Density Consistency Shore “A” hardness Elongation at Break E-modulus at 100% Service temperature Application temp. UV-ray resistance Skin time Full cure speed Resilience Resistance at break Tear Strength Bond strength VOC and Formadehyde ISO/FDIS 11890-2 / GC-MS < 10µg/l

APPLICABLE STANDARD CEBTP test report : PV 2352-6-091-3

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SUPPORT PREPARATION All surfaces should be clean, free from grease, oil or dust. All traces of release agent or silicone treatment should be removed. PRODUCT APPLICATION Jointseal.PU MC is applying by using a skeleton gun at a thickness from 1 to 3 cm. If materials to be fixed exceed 8 kg/m², mechanical supports should be kept for 8 to 15 hours. Before drying, tools should be clean with “white spirit”. When exposed to UV, Jointseal.PU MC of clear colors may discolor slightly. In this case, performances will not be affected.

CHEMICAL RESISTANCE TABLE Acetone Ethyl acetate Acetic acid 10%

+ + +

600

Jointseal∙PU MC

PACKAGING Jointseal.PU MC is packed in 600 ml foil bags.

STORAGE

12 months from production date, in original unopened packaging and protected from humidity. Store in a well ventillated room and at a maximum temperature of 30°C

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

601

Jointseal∙BIT

COLD APPLIED ASPHALTIC MASTIC SEALANT

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

PRODUCT

Spotlessly clean the mastic contact surface leaving no grease, dust or laitance affecting adhesion of the mastic with its support. Normally no priming is required. For specific cases, contact company’s technical department. Prior to application, remove the protective film using cold water, introduce the mastic in the place of application using a putty knife or manually, by pressing down as firmly as possible. If needed, retouch the edges with a hot putty knife. Clean all tools with solvent.

Jointseal.BIT is a cold applied asphaltic mastic, with special additives of selected microfillers and copolymers blend, which provide great flexibility and improved adhesion without heating.

PROPERTIES

• Excellent water resistance • Easy cold application • Waterproof • Not poisonous, nor-inflammable • High internal cohesion • Fully waterproof • High flexibility, elongation at ambient temperature (over 300%) • Does not stick to fingers during handling. • Suitable for year round use • Does not flow at high temperature • Perfect adhesion to concrete

CONSUMPTION

The quantity recommended is function of joint movement : Foreseen Movement Width / depth ratio 10% 1/1 15% 1.5/1 25% 2/1

SCOPE OF USE

PACKAGING

• Expansion joints • Joints for open channels, ditches, etc… • Building joints • Concrete or fibro-cement pipes • Sealing of metal sheets • Water reservoirs, irrigation channels • Cracks roof-gutters, etc…

Jointseal∙BIT

DISCLAIMER

NOTE

Jointseal.BIT is available in cords of 25 mm diameter and 50 cm length, supplied in cardboard boxes of 60 pieces.

STORAGE

Stock all boxes horizontally and do not exceed seven rows vertically. May be store in a cool and dry place without time restriction. Nevertheless, in these conditions, we recommend not to exceed 6 months storage from production date.

CHARACTERISTICS Density at 25°C 1.5 g/cm³ ± 0,1 Penetration (UNE 7157) 0°C, 200g, 60s, 1/10mm 50-120 (ASTM D-5) 25°C, 150g, 5s, 1/10mm < 235 (ASTM D 1850) Flowage (UNE 7160 / 5 hours, 65°C, cm=0 ASTM D 1850) Thermal sensitivity -21°C to 100°C Rapid ageing test 500 hours, HELC 12,94 (ASTM D 1850) section 7,2 cycle A subject to ultraviolet, rain cooling to -21°C etc. No cracks or blisters appeared. Adherence to concrete 5 cycles / -21°C, no cracks (UNE 73158 / ASTM180) or blisters appeared. Chemical resistance Stable against diluted solutions, however it is solublein solvents.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

602

603

Jointseal∙FRS

Jointseal∙MS

FUEL RESISTANT SEALANT

JOINT SEALANT BASED ON MS-HYBRID POLYMER

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

PRODUCT

JOINT SEAL FRS is a high quality, hot applied fuel resistant sealant intended for use in sealing joints of Portland cement concrete pavement in moderate to hot climates. The sealant is specifically formulated and produced to meet the requirements of ASTM D 3569-95, D 3406-95 and AASHTO M282. JOINT SEAL FRS forms a tough, resilient, well bonded seal for concrete pavements. JOINT SEAL FRS is not to be used in asphalt concrete pavements or extreme jet blast areas.

CHARACTERISTICS Density 1.21 kg/liter Cone Penetration, 25°C 130 units max Fuel, Immersed Penetration Not greater than non-immersed pen Flow, 70C, 72 hrs No flow Bond, -18°C, 50% ext No separation, 3 cycles Fuel Immersed Bond 0.6 cm maximum separation, 3 cycles Water Immersed Bond No separations, 3 cycles Resilience, 25°C 60% min Aged resilience, 25°C 60% min Artificial Weathering Test pass requirements Tensile Adhesion 500% min Flexibility pass Solubility +/- 2 % max Recommended Pour 132°C Temperature Safe Heating Temperature 143°C

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

PRODUCT

ISO11600 Type F 25HM, ASTM C793

Jointseal.MS is a mono component high modulus sealant, based on hybrid modified polymer. Cures quickly when in contact with air moisture, to form a flexible and abrasion resistant sealant.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

SURFACE PREPARATION The surface must be clean, sound and free from dust. Joints must be dry, any expansion joint filler must be checked to ensure it is tightly packed and no gaps. For a better finishing mask the face edges.

PROPERTIES

• It is neutral and odorless • Free of Silicone and Isocyanates • Resists, fresh and salty water, when not immersed permanently • It does not resist to solvents and permanent contact to swimming pool water

PRODUCT APPLICATION Place cartridge in the extrusion gun, fit the nozzle cut at 45º, extrude the sealant firmly into the joint, and press correctly against the supports. Avoid contact of the product with asphalt or bitumen, keep away from alcohol based agents. In case of large joints ensure sealant is sufficiently cured before traffic. Jointseal.SM can be applied in temperature ranging between + 5ºC to + 50ºC.

SCOPE OF USE DISCLAIMER

NOTE

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Prior to use, it is recommended to read and follow application Instructions for Hot Applied Sealants to verify proper product selection, heating methods, pavement preparation procedures, application geometrics usage precautions and safety procedures. These instructions are provided with each pallet of sealant.

Edition: 06/07-A

PACKAGING

Jointseal.FRS is supplied in 19 liters pails.

STORAGE

2 years from manufacturing date, stored in a fresh and dry area in unopened original package.

604

Jointseal.MS is suitable for internal expansion and perimeter joints floor, and for external joints where abrasion resistance is required such as: • Factory floors • Shopping Centers • Warehouses and depot and others

ADVANTAGES

CONSUMPTION

• High speed of polymerization during the first hour • Excellent adhesion to metal surface • Excellent to UV resistance • Good resistant to ageing and weather • Can be applied to damp substrates • Best performance for joints between 4 mm and 20 mm.

Joint Size in mm 4x6 6 x 10 15 x 15 20 x 20 25 x 30 20 x 40

CHARACTERISTICS Appearance Color Elongation at break ISO 37 Tensile strength at break DIN 53 504 Flash point Solid contents Curing rate @ 20ºC, 50% RH 24 hours 48 hours 72 hours Hardness shore A @ 20ºCD in 53 505 Trafficable time @ 20ºC Light traffic Heavy traffic

m / 600 ml foils 25 10 2.07 1.5 0.8 0.75

PACKAGING

Paste Grey, white, black >250% 1.4 - 1.6MPa

Jointseal.MS is supplied in 600 ml foils.

STORAGE

12 months after manufacturing date, in original unopened packaging and away from humidity.

>65°C 100%

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

3mm 6 mm 8 mm 50 24 hours 4 days

605

Jointseal∙MS

HBR∙Backing ROD

when not in use, store them away from heat and carefully dispose empty ones.

PRODUCT

EXTRUDED POLYETHYLENE BACKING ROD FOAM

over HBR rod according to manufacturer’s directions.

HBR.Backer ROD is a round, flexible, backing rod made of extruded polyethylene foam. It is available in a variety of diameters to fill expansion joints. HBR.Backer ROD is chemically inert, and resistant to oils, gasoline, and solvents. It does not stain or adhere to sealant materials, acts as a bond-breaker-strip. HBR has a resilient closed-cell structure and is non-exuding.

DISCLAIMER

PRECAUTIONS Do not puncture, over compress or stretch HBR. Backer ROD during insertion. RECOMMENDED HBR BACKER ROD SIZE PER JOINT WIDTH Joint Width mm HBR Diameter(mm) < 5 6 6 10 10 12 12 16 16 20 20 25 22 30 35 40 45 50

SCOPE OF USE

HBR.Backer ROD is a backing for elastomeric and other cold-applied sealants. It is used in expansion or contraction joints to: • Control the depth of applied sealant. • Act as a barrier interface to prevent three sided adhesion (bond breaker) • Provide a form to assist the sealant in developing the hour glass shape. Typical uses are in glazing and expansion joint applications for windows, certain walls, expansion wall joints, partitions, doors, setting cracks, pavements, precast units, and copings.

NOTE

PACKAGING

All sizes are wound on reels, and packaged in boxes, except 35 and 45mm diameters joints, which are packed in 7ft. straight length in cartons.

LIMITATIONS HBR should not be used with hot-melt adhesives and sealants where their temperature is over 70 C (160 F)

Edition: 10/07-A

SIZES AND PACKAGING DATA HBR Feet Gross weight Diameter (mm) per carton lbs per carton 6 2150 15 10 1200 15 12 835 15 16 517 15 20 367 15 25 185 15 30 135 15 40 257 35 50 175 35

CHARACTERISTICS TYPICAL PHYSICAL PROPERTIES Property Density Tensile strength Water absorption Compression

Nominal value 2.0 lbs/ft³ 25 psi 0.5% by vol 25% at 8 psi

Test method ASTM D 1622 ASTM D 1623 ASTM C 509 ASTM D 1621

deflection

DISCLAIMER

INSRTUCTIONS FOR USE SURFACE PREPARATION Joint should clean, moisture free, and clear of any obstruction. PRODUCT APPLICATION Either cut the desired length of HBR.Backer ROD or dispense directly from reel. Position HBR in the joint at the depth specified by the sealant manufacturer or architect. Using a blunt tool or roller, press the rod uniformly into the joint at the specified depth. Apply the sealant

606

607

HBRâ&#x2C6;&#x2122;Backing ROD

NOTE

608